U .

) M

S M IT H S O NIA N IN S TIT U TI O N B U RE A U OF E T HN O L O G Y
I
J . W . PO WE L L , DIR E C T O R

A C O L L E C T IO N .

OF

GE ST U R E
SI GN S
A N D SI GN A L S

O F T HE

NO RTH AMERIC AN INDIANS

WI T H

SO M E C O M PA R I S O N S

B Y

G A R R I C K M A L L E R Y
B R E V E T L I E UT . 00L . O
AND F R M E R L YA C TI N G C H I E F SI GN A L
I
OFFI C E R , U S
. . A RM Y

DI ST R I BU T E D O N L YT O C OL L A BOR A T O R S

WA S H I N GTO N
GO V E R N M E N T PR I N T I N G O FF I C E

1 8 80
A COLLECTION OF GESTURE SIGNS OF THE NORTH AMERICAN -

IND IANS .

I N T R O DU C
'
I O R Y L E T T E R .

S M I T H S ON I AN
I N S TIT U T I O N ,
B U R E AU O F E T H N OL O GY,
Was hing ton D , . J u ly 3 1 , 1 880
.

To C OLLAB O R A T O R S WI T H T H E B U R E AU O F E T H N OL O GY IN T H E S T U DY O F
T HE

S I GN L A N G UA GE :
GE NT L E M E N :
T h i s p aper con t ai n s th e descripti on s of the gesture si gn s of th e N orth A m eric a n
-

I ndi a n s w h ic h at the a bove d a te h a ve bee n ob t a i ned by th i s B ure au It w il l n ot be .

used for p ublic a tio n i n i ts p resent sh ape , an d w ill be d istri bu ted on ly to th ose corre
sp o n d e n t s w h o h a ve con tribu ted to i ts conten ts , a n d to oth ers wh ose expected c o oper a

ti o n, th e resul ts of wh i ch ar e n o t yet recei ved , i s relied u p on to ad d v al ue to th e n a l

w or k . N o discu ssi on is n o w i ntrod uced Th e descri p tions alo ne , in a te nt a ti ve arr a n ge
.

m ent , ar e presen ted for th e p urpo se of th e veric a ti on of ob serv a ti on s , for v erb a l

correction s of every k i n d , an d for th e study of al l col l a bor a tors , as well a s th a t of th e
editor , to secure a ccur ate cl a ssi c ation an d co m p ari son O nl y such n otes of rese m bl an ce
.

or d i scord a n ce between sever a l of th e In d i an si gn s an d between so m e of th e m an d

,

those of de a f m utes , forei gn tribes of m e n , a n d ideogr aph i c ch ar a cters ar e now pri n te d ,

as h a ve a l re a dy b e e n a tt a ch ed to th e s am e si gn s i n the co m pil a ti on for prel i m i n a ry

tre a tises a lre ady p rod uced I t is con ve nie nt to ret ai n th ose i n th e s am e con n ecti on
. .

M a ny others of the s a m e k i n d re m a i nin g i n M S m e m or a n d a , a r e o m itted bec au se

, .
,

their i n sertio n w ill be m ore correctly m ad e after t h e prop er a rr a n ge m en t h as bee n

acco m plish ed A ny such , occurri n g to col l a bor ators w ill i t is h oped , be su ggested
.
, ,

by th e m i n th e m argi n of th e presen t p a per w h ere th ey m ay see m t o be m ost a ppro

p r ia t e .

Th e pri m ary obj ect of th i s p aper is th a t ev ery con trib u tor to i t m ay be en abled
to re vi se h is o w n con trib u tion , w h ich for t h e pr e sen t is d ivided an d a rr an ged a ccord
i n g to a sche m e of l i n gui stic fa m ili es an d subor di n a te l a n gu ages or tribes , as set forth
i n the L I S T O F A U T H O RITI E S AN D C OLL AB O R A T O RS , wh i ch a l so serve s a s a n ind e x to
 2

th e V O C A B ULA R Y It is su pp osed t ha t t h i s arr an ge m en t w ill p rove th e best to stu d y

.

th e diversi ties an d agree m en ts of si gn s F or th a t i m porta n t obj ect i t is m ore con

.

v e n ie n t th a t th e n a m es of th e tribe or tri b es am on g w h ich th e si gn s described h a ve

been ob served sh ou l d c a tch th e eye i n im m edi a te con necti on w ith th e si gn s , th a n th at

th ose of the observers on ly sh o u l d foll o w So m e of th e l a tter , i n deed , h avi n g gi ven
.

both si m il ar an d di ff eri n g si gn s for m ore th a n on e tribe , th e u se of the con t r ibutor s

n a m e alon e would cre a te confusion To p ri n t i n every c a se th e n a m e of th e con trib utor ,
.

a nd a lso th e n a m e of th e tribe w ould seri ou sly burde n th e p a per an d be un necess a ry

,

to th e studen t , th e referen ce bei n g re a dily m a de to e a ch a u th ori ty th rou gh th e i ndex .

N o con tribu ti on h a s bee n pri n ted wh ich a sser t ed th a t an y d esc r i bed si gn i s used by

all In d i a n s ,

for th e re aso n th a t such state m en t is n ot ad m i ssi b le eviden ce u nless th e
a u th ori ty h ad p erson a l ly ex a m i ne ( I n di n s If an y cred ibl e corresponden t h ad

al l a .

af r m a ti vely st a ted th a t a cert a i n iden ti c al , or su bst a n ti a l ly id en tic a l , si gn h a d bee n

.

fo u nd by h im , a ctu al ly u sed by A b e n a k iT A bs a ro k a, Ari k ar a, A ssi n iboi n s , etc , goin g

-
.

throu gh th e w h ole l ist of tribes , or an y de n i te p ortion of th a t li st i t would h a ve bee n , ,

so i n serted u n der th e sever a l trib a l h e a d s B u t th e expression
. a ll In d i a n s ,

besides
bein g i n su sce p tible of m eth odi c al cl a ssi c a ti on , in v olves h e ars ay , wh ich i s not th e k i n d
of a uth ori ty desi red i n a seri ous stu d y Su ch l oose t a l k lon g del ayed th e recogn itio n
.

of a n th ropol ogy as a scien ce I t i s true th a t so m e gener al st ate m en ts of th i s ch a r a cter

.

a r e m a de by so m e old a uth ors n o w q uoted , b ut their d escri ption s a r e repri nted , a s

bei n g al l th a t can be u sed of the p a st , for w h ate ver wei gh t they m ay h a ve , an d th ey

ar e k ept sep ar a te fro m th e l i n gui sti c cl a ssi c a tion .

C on tributors w ill observe th a t th ere h a s been n o a tte m p t to ch a n ge th eir phr a se

ology e ve n wh en i t see m ed to be defecti ve B esides th e ord i n ary errors of th e press ,
.

a n d th ose th a t m ay h a ve crept i n to th e copy by m i st a k es i n re a di n g or tr a n scribin g

th e wri tten descri p tion s , so m e of th e con tributors wil l prob a bly sh a re th e co m m o n

experien ce of surprise at th e exte n t t o w h ich de tai ls of expressi o n an d p un ctu a ti on ,
wh en i n th e severe cl e arn ess of pri nt , h a ve a ltered th e sh a d e of m e a n i n g as i n tend ed
to be con veyed in th ei r M S Th e w ide m argi n s an d c alend ered p aper will re a dily
.

allo w e ven of reco m po siti on of sen te nces w h e n desir abl e F or thi s p urpose , as wel l as
.

sever al oth ers , th i s p a per wi ll be rega rded by e a ch corresp onde n t a s si m pl y a proof

sh eet se n t di rectly to h i m self fro m th e pri nter , a nd i t wi ll of course b e u n derstood th a t
a corres p onden t wh o m ay m ak e an y k i n d of correcti on or n ote upo n th i s p a per w ill

retur n it by m a il ( as boo k p roof) so a n nota ted , to th e undersi gned , th ereby s av i n g

,

correspon de nce an d secu rin g a ccur a cy It is i nd eed re q uested th a t al l copies sh al l be

.

return ed wh eth er an n otated or n ot , in order to preven t a professedly i m perfect edi ti on

fro m fal li n g i n to i m proper h a nds It i s m uch regretted th a t the ill ustr a tions a n d d ia
.

gr am m a ti c a id s to t h e descrip ti on s furn ish ed by m ost of th e c on tri b u tors , c an n ot be

,

reproduced i n th i s p a per so th a t th eir a ccur acy al so m igh t be deter m i ned , b u t the

,

cost of such il lu str a ti on s c an n ot be i n cu rred at thi s ti m e an d for th is purp ose The .

O utli nes for A r m P ositi on s a n d Types of H a n d P osi tion s were p rovided for fro m
the appropri a tion for th i s B ure a u , b u t i t s a m ou n t d o e s n ot a d m i t of su ch a n u nder
.

t ak i n g a s no w in q uesti on I n th i s co n nectio n i t m ay be m en tio ned th a t the d e sc rip

.

t ion s freq uently refer to ill ustr ati on s furni sh ed by th e con trib utors or to th e O u t

li nes an d Typ es , an d th ese referen ces ar e reta ined in pri n t As al l the con tribu tors .

re m e m ber th ei r ow n illu str a ti on s , etc th e referen ces will be i ntelli gi bl e to th e m sel ves ,
..
 3

th ou gh u n fortu n a tely n ot al w ays to others wh o m igh t w ish to co m p a re th e m with th eir

i ll u str ation s .

The a scertai n m en t of th e con cep ti on s or or i gi n of the several s1 g ns, e m b o d y i ng

a s th ey do , m a n y soci ologic , m yth ol ogic , an d other e th nogr a phic ide a s i s of speci a l i m
,

p ort a nce W he n those obt a i ned th rou gh coll a b or a tors are printed i n th e V O C AB UL A R Y
.

before th e a u th ori ty , th ey ar e to be understood to h a ve been g a th ered fro m an Indi an

a s bein g h is o wn con cep ti on . W hen pri n ted a fter th e a u th ori ty a n d withi n q uot a tion
m ar k s , they ar e i n th e words of th e coll a bor a tor a s o ff ered by h i m s e lf . W h e n pri nted
a fter th e a uth ority a n d wi th ou t q uot a tio n m a r k s they are su ggested a t th i s B ure a u
,
.

A l l sh oul d be equ al ly criti ci sed an d supple m e nted , a n d a n y error i n pri ntin g the
a u th ori ty for the co ncep ti on s corrected . I t h as so m eti m es bee n i m possible to decide
wh eth er th e correspon den t i n ten ded t o gi ve th e m as h is o w n or a s fro m an I nd i a n .

Th e im p o r t an ce e of an I n di a n s concept io n is so m uch gre a ter th a n any oth er th a t th e

fact sh oul d be m a de cle a r .

The m argi n s wi ll a l so a llo w of a ddi ti on s to al l con tribu ti on s , wh ether fro m i nter

v e n in g i nde p end e nt rese a rch or as suggested by a ny p a rt of th e m a teri al collected .

Th is wor k bein g on th e co oper ati ve p rin ci p le , i t is n ot s up posed t h a t j e a lou sies or

-

question s of preceden ce w i ll a ri se a nd e ach contri b u tor will be credited wi th the a m ou nt

,

of c a pita l a dv a n ced for t he co m m on stoc k It i s h ighly desir a ble th a t the signs a s

.

descri bed by e ac h should be co m p a red by h im wi th th ose of others an d n otes of coi n

r
,

c id e n ce or di screp a n cy m ade . Perh a p s , i n so m e i n st a nces , the si gn s as described by

on e of the other con tri bu tors m ay b e recogni zed a s i n tended for th e s am e si gn for t h e
s am e i de a or object a s th a t of th e correspon de nt , and th e for m er m ay pro ve to be t he
better descri ptio n Th e p erson al h ab itude of so m e in divid u a l i n any tribe , an d still
.

m ore frequ ently th e us a ge or f shi on of d ie r e n t tri bes , m ay , by a p eculi a r ab b r e
a

via t io n or fa nciful ouri sh , h a ve i nd uced a d i ff ere n ti a tio n i n descri ptio n w ith n o re a l

disti nction ei th er in co nce p ti o n or esse nti a l for m a tion A ll coll a bor ators w ill there
.

fore be c a n did i n ad m itti n g , sh oul d such c a ses occur , th a t th ei r o wn description s ar e

m ere u nessen ti a l v a ri a n ts fro m oth ers prin ted , oth erwi se ad here to th ei r o w n a n d
expl ai n th e true di sti nction W h en th e description s S h o w s ub st a n ti a l iden tity , they
.

w ill i n th e n a l public a ti on be un ited , w i th a co m bi ne d referen ce to all th e au th orities

gi vi n g th e m , as they ar e in so m e c a ses of th ose t ak en at W a sh i n gton in the presen t
V O C A B ULA R Y .

I t wil l prob ably be a l so n oticed th a t a S ign described w il l h a ve th e s am e a ctu a lly

subst a n ti ve for m a ti o n a s so m e oth er i n the V O C AB UL A R Y w h ic h is st a ted to be w ith a
si gn ic ation so m ark edly di stin gui sh ed as to be in susceptible of cl assi ca ti on as a
sy n ony m It w il l then be i m porta n t for e a ch cont rib utor of the ri v a l si gn s to refresh
.

h i s m e m ory as to a ccur a cy of d escri p ti o n or si gni c a n ce , or both , an d to a n n ou n ce h is

deci si on N o error is n ecess a rily i n vol ved It w ill be very re m ar k able i f precisely
. .

t he s a m e S i gn d oes n o t prove to be u sed by di ff eren t person s or bod ie s of people wi th

wh olly d istin ct sig n icat io n s, th e gr aph i c for m s for obj ects a n d id e a s bei n g m u ch m o re
li k ely to be coi n ciden t th a n soun d i s for si m il ar expression s ye t i n al l or a l l a ngu a ges
,

th e s a m e preci se sou nd i s u sed for u tterly d i verse m e a ni n gs Th e rst con cepti on o f

.

m a n y obj ects m u st be the s am e I t h as bee n fou nd , i ndeed , th a t th e h o m oph ony of word s

.

a n d th e h o m o ni o r p h y 0 f ideogr a ph ic pictu es i s n otice a bl e i n opposite sig n ica t io n s,

r
th e con ception s a risi n g fro m th e opposition i tself Th e di f feren ti a tion i n portr a iture o r
.

a ccen t i s a subsequen t a n d re m edi a l ste p t a k e n on ly a fter the con fusion h a s bee n

 4

ob served Su ch con fusion a n d con tr adiction w oul d Only be eli m in ated it th e sig n l an
.

gu a ge w ere a b sol utely perfect a s wel l a s a bsol utel y un i vers al C a st ir o n i n exibi li ty

.
-

a n d a d am a n ti n e en d ur a n ce ar e cert a i n ly n ot fou n d i n a ny oth er m ode of h u m a n u tter

a n ce It w il l be an a bn or m i ty i n th e proce sses of n at u r e if si gn s d o n ot h a ve their

'

.
.

bi rth s an d d e ath s , th ei r stru gg l es for exi sten ce with su rv i v al of th e ttest as w el l a s ,

word s , a n i m a ls , an d pl a n ts F or ou r purpose th e i nq uiry i s n ot wh a t a S i gn m i gh t ,

.

could , would or sh ould be , or w h a t i s th e be st S i gn for a p articul a r m e a n i n g b u t w h at

'

, ,

i s an y si gn actu al ly u sed for su ch m e an i n g If a n y on e Si gn is h onestl y i n ven ted or

.

a dopted by an y on e m a n w h eth er In di a n Afri c a n , Asi a tic or de a f m ute

, i t h as i ts
-

, , ,

v a lue Its p rev ale nce and S peci al r a n ge presen t con sid er a tion s of diff eren t a nd gre a ter
.

i n terest a nd req uiri n g further evidence .

Th e editor t ak es occ a sio n to decl a re th a tfor th e good re a son th at h i s re a l study

only now co m m ences w i th th e co m pl etion of th e presen t p aper wh i ch ren ders i t p ract i
c ableh e does n o t h ol d wi th ten a ci ty a n y theory wh atever , an d p articul arly on e wh i ch
woul d den y th a t th e In di a n si gn s co m e fro m a co m m o n stoc k O n th e con tr ary , it
.

w ould be h i gh ly in teresti n g t o a scert a i n th a t th e si gn s of th is co nti n en t h a d a ge neri c

-

di sti n cti ve ness co m p ared wi th th ose of o t her p a rts of th e world Such rese a rch would
.

be si m il a r to th a t i n to th e A ry a n and Se m itic s ources to w hi c h certai n m oder n l a n gu a ges

h a ve bee n tr a ced b ac k w ar d s fro m exi sti n g v arieties , a nd if th ere a ppe a r to be exi sti n g
v arie ties i n si gn s th ei r roots m ay stil l be fou n d to be sui g ener is I t is, h o wever pos
.
,

si ble th a t th e di screp a n cy bet w een si gn s w as for m erly gre a ter th a n a t presen t There .

is so m e eviden ce th at w h ere a si gn l a n gu a ge i s n o w fo u n d am on g I n d i a n tribes i t h a s

.

becom e m ore u n ifor m th a n ever before , si m ply bec a u se m a n y tribes h a ve been for so m e
ti m e p a st forced to d well n e a r togeth er a t pe a ce Th e u se of si gn s , th ou gh m a i n t ai ne d
.

by l in gui sti c d iversi ties is n ot coi nciden t w i th an y li n g u isti c bo und a ries Th e ten d
,
.

en cy is to th eir u n ifor m i ty a m on g grou ps of peopl e w h o fro m an y c a u se a r e brou gh t

in to con t act wi th e ach oth er w hi le s t ill spe ak i n g d ifferen t l a n gu a ges The l on ger a n d
.

cl oser such con t a ct , w hi le n o co m m on to n gue is ad opte d , th e gre a ter will be the u n i

for m i t y of si gn s A collecti on w a s obta i ned l a st spri n g a t Wa sh in gton fro m a u n ited
.

delega tion of th e K aio w a , Co m a n che Ap a ch e , and W ich i ta tribes , wh ich w a s n e a rly

,

un i for m , b u t th e i n di vi du al s w h o g ave the si gn s h ad a ctu a lly li ved together a t or n e ar

In di a n Terri t ory , for a con sider a bl e ti m e , an d th e resul ti n g u ni for m ity of
th eir s ign s m i gh t ei th er be con sidered a s a j argon or as th e n a tur a l tenden cy to a co m
pro m i se for m ut u a l un derst andi n g th e u n ic a ti on so ofte n observed i n or a l speech ,
u n der m an y circu m st a n ces b u t of for m er di ff eren ti a tion I t m ay b e fou nd th a t
.

ot h e r i ridi vid ual s of th ose s a m e tribes w h o h a v e fro m an y ca use n ot l i ved i n th e u n io n

'

m ay h a ve si gns for th e s a m e i de a s differen t fro m those in th e collection a bove

m e nti on ed bu t th is su pposition shoul d be d isreg a rded , except to i nci te further i n q ui ry ,
until su ch i nq u iry shoul d collect specic fa cts to su pport th e hypoth esi s The wh ole .

of th i s con tro versy m ay be d i sposed of by i n sisti n g u p o n an obj ecti ve i n ste a d of a su b

je ct ive ob serv a tion an d st udy O ur du ty is to collect th e fa cts a s th ey are , an d so soon

.

as poss ible , a s every ye a r will a d d to the conf u sion an d dii c u l t y A fter the facts a r e
.

est a bli sh ed th e theories w ill t ak e c a re of th e m selves , a n d their n a l e n u nci a tio n w i ll

b e i n th e h a n d s of m e n m ore co m peten t th a n an y of u s, perh a p s t h an a ny p erson s

no w li vi n g .

A w a rni n g see m s necess a ry si n ce th e p u bl ic a ti on of an a rticle i n th e n u m ber of

U ni ted Servi ce for J uly , 1 880, i n w h i ch th e a u th or t ak es th e grou n d th a t th e d e scr ip
 5

ti ou of si gn s sh o u l d b e m a de a ccord in g to a m e a n or a ver a ge There ca n be n o

'

ph i losoph ic con sider ati on of si gn s a ccordin g to a m e an 7 of observ a ti on s

Th e .

n a l obj ect i s to a scert ai n th e r ad ic al or essen ti a l p a rt as d i stin ct fro m an y i n dividu al

ouri sh or m a n ner is m on th e on e h a n d , an d fro m a con ven ti on a l or acci den t al ab b r e
v i a tion o u th e o t h er ; b u t a m ere a ver ag e will n ot acco m pl ish th i s obj ect If th e h a nd , .

bei n g i n a ny positi o n w h atever , i s , a ccord in g to v e observ a ti on s m oved h ori zon ,

t ally on e foot to the ri ght , an d a ccord i n g to ve other observ ation s , m oved on e foot
,

horiz on tally to th e left , th e m e a n or resul t a n t w il l be th a t i t i s sta ti on ary w hich i s ,

not in a ny w ay correspondi n g w ith a n y of th e t e n ob serv a tions So i f si x observ a .

ti on s give i t a r a pi d m otio n of on e foo t to th e ri gh t an d ve a r a pid m oti o n of th e

s a m e di st a nce to the l eft th e m e an or result a n t w ould be so m ewh a t di f cul t to express
, ,

b u t p erh ap s w oul d be a sl o w m o ve m en t to th e ri gh t for an i n ch or tw o , h a vi n g

cert a inl y n o rese m bl a n ce ei ther i n essen ti al s or a cciden ts to an y of th e si gn s a ctu ally
ob served In li k e m a n n er th e t ai l of th e wri tte n let t er
.
( wh ich reg ard in g its m ere
,

for m ati on , m i gh t be a gr a ph ic S i gn ) m ay h a ve in th e ch irogr ap h y of sever a l person s ,

,

v a ri ou s degrees of sl a n t , m ay be a str ai gh t l i n e or l ooped , an d m ay be cur ved on eith er

sid e ; b ut a m e a n t a k e n fro m sever a l m a n u scripts wou ld l e a ve th e u n fortu n ate letter
with out a ny t a i l w h a tever or t r a vestied as a a with an a m orph ou s ouri sh A
,
.

den iti on of th e r a d ic al for m of th e letter or sig n by w hi ch i t c a n be d isti n gui sh ed

fro m an y other letter or si gn i s a very d iffer en t proceed i n g Th erefore , i f a m e a n
.

or result a n t of an y n u m ber of r a dic a lly d ie r e n t si gn s to express th e s a me obj ect or

ide a , observed either am on g se ver al i n di vid u al s of th e s am e tribe or a m on g di ff eren t

tribes , i s m a de to represen t th ose si gn s , th ey ar e al l m u ti l a ted or i gn ored as di sti n cti ve
si gn s , th ou gh th e resul t m ay p ossibly be m ad e i n telli g ibl e i n pr a cti ce , a ccordin g to
p rin ciples en tio ed the I ntrod u ction t o th e Study of Sign n gu ge of th e prese nt

m n i n L a a

w ri ter ; a n d sti ll a n oth er vie w m ay be a dded th a t bec a u se a sou n d of bro k e n E n gli sh

,

m a y be u n derstood by a n i ntelli gen t E ngl ish m a n i t i s n o proof of th a t soun d bein g a n

E n gli sh w ord or a w ord of a ny l a n gu a ge Th e a doptio n of a m e a n m ay be p r ac t i
.

c ally u seful i n th e for m a ti o n of a m ere i n terpreter s j argon , th ou gh n o on e can u se i t

b ut h i m self or th ose wh o m e m orize i t fro m h i m b u t i t el ucid a tes n o pri nciple It i s
, ,
.

al so pr a ctic a lly con ve n ien t for a n y on e deter m i n ed to a rgue for the u n ifor m i ty a n d

u ni vers a li ty of si gn l a n gu a ge a s a g a i n st th e v a riety a pp a ren t i n al l th e re a l m s of

-

natu re . 0 11 th e m e a n pri n ci ple , h e only n eed s to t a k e h i s two foot rule an d a ri t h

-

m etic a l t a bles a n d m ak e a l l si gn s h is sig n s a n d h is si gn s a ll si gns O f course th ey ar e

.

u ni for m bec au se h e h as m a de the m so a fter th e bruta l ex a m ple of P rocru stes

,
.

I n th i s co nn ectio n i t is proper to urge a noth er w a rni n g , th a t a m ere si gn ta l k er is -

ofte n a b ad a ut h ority upon pri n ci ples a n d th eories H e m ay n ot be l i able to the s a tir

.

ic al co m pli m en t of Di ck en s s br a ve couri er w h o u nd erstood al l l a n gu a ges in d i e r

,

en tly i ll b ut m any m e n spe ak so m e o ne l a n gu a ge fl ue n tly , a n d yet a r e wh olly u n a ble

to ex p l a i n or a n aly ze i ts word s a nd f o r m s so as to te a ch a n y on e el se or even to gi ve

'

an i n telli ge n t su m m a ry or cl assi c a tion of th eir o w n k no wledge W h a t such a si gn

.

t a l k er h as le a rned i s by m e m orizin g a s a ch il d i na v le a r n E n gl ish , a n d th ou gh both

,

th e si gn t al k er a n d th e chi ld m ay be able to gi ve so m e sep a r a te i te m s u seful t o a ph i

-

l o l o g ist or forei gner , such i te m s are S poiled w h e n colored by th e a tte m p t of i g n or a n ce

to theori ze A G er m a n w ho h a s s tud ied E ngli sh t o th orou gh m astery , exce pt in th e
.

m ere fa ci li ty of sp eech , m ay i n a d iscussion u po n so m e of i ts pri nci pl es be co n tr a dicted

by an y m e re E ngli sh spe ak e r, w h o i n si sts u p o n h i s superi or k nowled ge bec a use h e
a ctu ally spe ak s th e l a n gu a ge an d h is a nt a gon ist does n ot b u t th e studen t will prob ably
,
 6

be correct an d th e t al ke r wron g I t i s a n old ad a ge a bou t or a l speech th at a m a n wh o

.

understand s b u t on e l a n gu a ge u nderst and s n one Th e scien ce of a si gn t a l k er pos

.
-

sessed by a restricti ve theory is l i k e th a t of M ira be a u , w h o w as gre a ter as a n ora tor

th a n as a ph il ol ogi st, an d w h o o n a vi si t to E n gl a n d gr avely a rgued th a t th ere w as
so m eth in g serio usly wron g in th e B ri ti sh m i n d bec a u se th e people woul d i n si st upon
s ayi n g gi ve m e so m e bre ad i nste a d of don nez m o i d u p a i n , w h ich w as so m uc h
e a sier a n d m ore n atur al A desi gnedly ludicrous i n st a nce to th e s am e e ff ect w as
.

H ood s a rr a i gn m en t of the F ren ch bec a u se th ey c a lled t h ei r m oth ers m ares a n d

their d a u gh ters llies N o t bi ndi ng oursel ves to th eories , w e sh ould t ak e wi th can

.

tio n a n y s t ate m en t fro m a p erson w h o , h a vin g m e m ori zed or b ash e d u p any n u m ber
of si gn s , l arge or s m all h as decided i n hi s con ceit th at th ose h e u ses ar e th e onl y
,

gen ui n e S i m o n p u re , to be excl usivel y e m ployed a ccord i n g to h i s d irection , al l others

-

bein g cou nterfei ts or bl un ders His voc ab ul a ry h a s ce ased to gi ve th e si gn s of any

.

I nd i a n or body of I n d i a n s wh a te ver , b u t beco m es the voc ab ul ary of Dr J ones or L ie u .

ten a n t S m i th , the p roprietorsh i p of wh ich h e gh ts for as did th e ori gin al Dr To wn se n d .

for hi s p aten t m ed icin e W hen a si g n is contributed by on e of th e prese n t col l a bor a

.

tors , w h ich such a sign t al k er h as n ot before see n or h e ard of, he w il l a t on ce conde m n

-

i t as b ad , j ust as a U n i ted St a tes M in i ster to Vien n a, wh o h ad been n ursed i n th e

m on grel Dutch of B er k s Cou n ty , P en n syl v a n i a , decl a red t h a t the people of Ger m a n y
spok e very b ad Ger m an Th e ex perien ce of th e presen t ed itor is t h a t th e ori gi n a l
.

a u th ori ties , or th e best eviden ce , for In d i a n si gn s 1T e , th e Ind i an s th e m sel ves

. .

bei n g still a ccessible , th e coll a bor a tors i n th is wor k sh ould not be conten t w ith
second ary a uth ori ty . W h i te si gn t al k ers an d i nterpreters m ay gi ve so m e ge n u i n e
-

sign s b ut th ey ar e very ap t to i nterpol a te their o w n i n ven tion s a nd ded uction s B y

, .

ga th eri n g th e gen ui n e si gns al on e we wi ll be of u se to sch ol ars , a nd give o ur own stud

ies proper di recti on , w h i le the true arti cl e presen te d can al w ay s be adul ter ated i n to a
co m posite j argon by th ose wh ose am bi ti on i s o nly to b e si g n t al k ers in ste ad of m ak i n g
-

a n h on est con tri b ution to eth n ol ogic a n d p h i lologic scien ce The fe w d irect con tri .

b ution s of i nterpreters to th e prese nt wor k ar e i t i s bel ieved v a l u able , bec a u se th ey

, ,

w ere m a de w i th out expressi o n o f self conceit or sy m pto m cf p ossessio n by a p e t theory

-

So f ar as only con cern s th e a ble gen tle m en w h o h a ve fa v ored th i s B ur e a u wi th

th eir contribution s th ere is n o n eed to co n ti n ue these re m a r k s S ufce i t to repe a t .

with m ore e m ph a sis , th a t th eir critic is m s an d suggesti on s are i n vited a s to a ll m a tter

-

h erei n con ta i ned , e ve n to the de ta i l s of groupi n g an d title word s in th e a lph a betic -

a rr a n ge m ent , sy n on y m s , a n d cross references In th e p resen t pri v a te and ten t a ti ve

.

w ork m a ny h u nd red s of sep ar a te sl ips of p aper ar e for th e rst ti m e con nected togeth er ,
th ereby ren derin g perfect o r der un expected It m ay be m e n tion ed th at so m e of th e
.

title word s a n d phr a ses w h ich h a ve a q u ai n t appe ar a n ce a r e th ose u sed by th e older

p rin ted a uth orities , for wh ich i t i s n ot a l w a ys s a fe to sup p ly a sy n o ny m , a n d th e si gn s
of th ose s a m e a u thori ties bei n g the m ost curtly a n d obscu rely described of al l i n the
collection th ere i s n o a l tern a ti ve bu t to pri n t the m as they st a n d for such u se as m ay
,

be p ossible wh ich wi ll ch ie y be i n t heir be ar in g u pon th e q uesti on s of persi sten cy a n d

,

u n i vers a l ity Th e presen t editio n w i ll a llo w t h e verb al e xpression s of th e l i vi n g a nd

.

a ccessibl e to be re vi sed a n d to be co m p a red w ith , th u s perh a ps to correct th e i m per

f e ct io n s of descri ption s m a de by th e de a d an d i n a ccessi ble ; bu t t h e l a n gu a ge of the

l atter c an n ot n o w be ch a n ged Th e a rr an ge m e n t of th e V O C A B U L A R Y i s m ore to
.

group th e con cepts th a n th e E n gl ish ti tle word s a ccordin g to th e sy nony m s of th at

-

l a n gu a ge A furth er ste p in the study w ill be to prep a re a sy n o p t ic arr an ge m en t o f

'

.
the sign s the m sel ves th a t is of m oti on s a n d position s o f the s am e ch ar a cter a p art
,

fro m thei r in divid u a l si gn i c a nce in an y or al s peech .

The he a rty th a n k s of thi s B ure a u are rendered t o al l its coll abor a tors a nd will i n ,

future be presented in a m a n ner m ore w orthy of th e m It re m a i ns to give to the m an .

expl an a tion of the m ode in wh ich a l a rge collection o f sign s h as been m a de i n W a sh

in g t o n Fortu n a tely for this underta k in g the policy of the govern m en t h as brought
.
,

here durin g the l a st w in ter an d s prin g deleg a ti on s , so m eti m es q uite l a rge o f m ost o f
, , ,

the i m port an t tribes Thu s the m ost intelligen t o f the r a ce fro m the m ost distant an d
.

fa rthest sep ar ated loc alities were here in con sider a ble n u m bers for wee k s , an d indeed ,
i n so m e c a ses m on th s an d together with their i nterpreters an d a gen ts were by th e
, , , , ,

con sider ate order of the hon or able Secret ary of the In terior , pl a ced at th e dispos a l o f
this Bure a u for all purposes o f g a thering ethn ologic infor m a tion Th e fa cilities thus .

ob ta ined were m uch gre a ter th a n coul d h a ve been enj oyed by a l arge n u m ber o f o b se r v
e r s tr a velin g for a lon g ti m e over the con ti nen t for the s am e express purpose The .

observ ation s rel a tin g t o sign s were al l m a de here b y the s a m e p erson s a ccordin g to a ,

un i for m m ethod i n which the gestures were obt a ined directly from the In di a n s , a n d
,

their m e a nin g ( often i n itself cle a r fro m the con text of si gn s before k n ow n ) w as tr a ns
l a ted so m eti m es through the m ediu m of E n glish or S p a n ish , o r a n a borigi n a l l an gu ag e
k n own i n co m m on by so m e one o r m ore o f the Ind i a n s a nd by so m e o n e o f the o b se r v
ers W hen an i nterpreter w as e m ployed he tr a n sl ated the words used by a n I ndi a n
.
, ,

an d w as n ot relied upon to expl a in the si gn s a ccordin g to hi s ow n ide a s S uch t r an sl a .

tion s an d a description o f m in ute an d r apidly executed sign s , dict a ted at the m o m en t

-

o f t h eir exh ibition , were so m eti m es t ak en do wn by a phon ogr a ph er th a t there m ight

,

be n o l apse o f m e m ory i n an y p articul ar , an d in m a n y c ases the sign s were m ade in

successi ve m otio n s before the c a m er a , an d prints secured a s cert a in eviden ce of their

a ccur a cy N o t on ly were m ore th a n on e h undred Indi a n s th us ex am ine d in divid u a lly ,

.

at l e isure bu t , o n occ a sion s , sever a l o f d itf e re n t tribes who h a d never before m e t e a ch

, ,

other , w ere ex am i n ed at the s am e ti m e bo t h by in q u iry of in dividu al s w hose a nswers

,

were con sulted u pon by al l the Indi a n s presen t , an d also by in ducin g sever a l of the
In d i a n s to en ga ge i n t a l k a n d story tellin g in sign s between the m selves Thus i t w as
-
.

possible t o n otice the differen ce in the sign s m a de f o r the s a m e obj ects a n d the degree
.

o f m utu al co m prehen sion n otwith st a n din g such differences S i m il a r studies were m ade
.

by t ak in g the In d i an s t o the N a tion al De a f M ute College an d brin g in g the m in con t act

w ith the p upils .

By f ar the gre a ter p a rt of t he a ctu a l wor k of the observ a tion an d record o f the
si gn s ob t a ined a t Wa shin gton h as bee n a bly perfor m ed by Dr W J H O FF M A N , the . . .

a ssist an t o f the present editor Dr H o m an a cq uired in t h e West , through h is serv ice

'

-
. .

as a ctin g a ssist a n t surgeon , U n ited S t a tes A r m y , a t a l a rge reserv a tion , the in disp e n

s able a dv a n t a ge o f beco m in g a cqu ai nted w ith the Indi a n ch ar acter so as t o co n duct

such rese arches a s th a t in question , and in a ddi tion h as the eye a n d pencil o f an a rtist ,
so th a t he c a tches re a dily , describes w ith phy siologic a l a ccur a cy an d reproduces in ,

a ction a nd in per m a nen t ill ustr a tion al l sh a des o f gesture exhibited It is therefore .

bel ieved th a t the collectio n m ade here w i ll be v alu a ble for co m p arison with an d to
supple m en t those ob t ai ned durin g the s a m e m on ths i n the eld .

I re m ain , with re n ewed o f ci a l a nd person al th a n k s a n d m uch regard ,

S i ncerely your friend ,

G A RRIC K M A L L E RY .
NOTE SPECI ALL YADDRESSEDIO CO RRESPONDENIS IN FOREIGN CO UNTRI ES
' '

The presen t p a per i s a further step i n the genera l l ine o f rese arch in dic ated in the

Introduction to the S tudy of S i gn L a n gu a ge am on g the N orth A m eric a n India n s ,

& c , i n w h ich the study of these si g ns w as su ggested as i m port a n t to il lustr a te the gest
.
~

ure speech of m an k ind I t s con tents m ay be u sefu l to col l a bor a tors in a l l p ar t s o f the
-
.

world both to fa cilita te description by a n n ot a ted reference an d i n suggestion a s reg a rds

,

m odes o f observ ation It m ay a lso gi ve a ssur a nce o f thorough an d p a i nst ak i n g w ork

.

at th i s Bure a u for the n a l coll a tio n i n the for m of a voc a bul a ry o f a l l a u thentic si gn s ,
,
.

a n cien t a n d m odern foun d in a n y p a rt o f the world with their de scription a s a lso th a t

, , ,

o f a ssoci a ted fa ci a l expressi on set forth in l an gu a ge so cle a r th a t , w ith th e a ssist a nce

,

o f copio u s illus t r a tion s th ey can be reproduced by the re ader The success o f th is

,
. .

undert ak in g w ill depen d upon th e coll abor a tion , n ow a n d before requested o f m a n y ,

person s o f sever al cl asses The presen t p a per shows th a t a r r a n g e n l e nt s h a ve alrea dy

.

been m a de prob a bly su fcien t to procure al l the gesture sign s o f th e a borigin a l tribes -

o f this coun try w hich ca n still be rescued fro m obli vi on T h e con ven tion a l si gn s of .

de af m utes i n in stit ution s for their in struction a re a cce ssible to the presen t w riter w ho
-

a lso h a s obt a ined a l a rge n u m ber of the n a tur a l sign s of de a f m utes i n vented by the m -

before syste m a tic in struction an d u sed in in t ercourse with th eir fam ilies an d friends
,
.

M ore o f the se w ould h ow ever be gl a dly received

,
Further assistan ce i s urgen tly
,
.

sou ght fro m philologi sts tr a velers an d m i ssion aries whose a tten tion h as been directed
, , ,

to th e sever a l m odes o f expressin g h u m an th ought .

The e ff orts at interco m m un ic ation o f all s a v a ge a n d b a rb aric t r ibes when brought ,

in to cont a ct wi th other bodies of m e n n o t spe ak in g an ora l l an gu a ge co m m on t o both ,

an d especi a lly when un civilized in h a bit a nts of the s a m e terri tory ar e sep a r a ted by

m a n y l in guisti c d ivision s should in theory rese m ble the devices of the N orth A m eric a n
,

In di a n s They ar e n ot sho wn b y publi shed wor k s to prev ai l in t h e E a stern he m isphere

.

to the s a m e exten t a nd i n the s am e m ann er a s in N orth an d a lso a s believed fro m , ,

less co m plete observ a tion i n S outh A m eric a It is h owever prob able th a t they
,
.

, ,

exi st in m a n v loc alities th ou gh n ot reported a n d a lso th a t so m e o f the m surv ive a fter

, ,

p arti a l or e ven hi gh civiliz a tio n h a s been a tt a ined an d a fter ch a n ged env iron m en t h a s ,

ren dered their system a tic e m ploy m en t u n n ecess ary S uch sign s m ay be , rst , im co n . .

n e c t e d with existin g or al l an gu a ge an d u sed in pl a ce of it ; secon d m a y be used to

, ,

expl ai n or a ccentu a te the words of ordin ary speech or m ay con sist o f gestures e m o , ,

t io n a l or n ot w hich a r e only n oticed i n or a tory or i m p a ssioned con vers a tion such

, ,

bein g possibly survi v al s of a for m er gestu re l an gu a ge

, ,
-
.

A l l cl a sses of gestures m a y be ex a m i ned ph ilologi c a lly to tr a ce their possible co n

n e c t io n w i th the r a d ic a l s of l a n gu a ge syll a b a ries a n d ideogr a ph ic ch a r a cters
,
E vi ,
.

den ce h a s a ccu m ul a ted to sho w th a t t h e l an gu a ge o f si gns preceded in i m portan ce th a t .

o f sounds the l a tter re m a inin g rudi m en t a ry lon g a fter gesture h a d beco m e a n a r t

, .

The e a rly con nection between the m w a s so in ti m a te th a t gestures in the w ide sen se of ,

p resen ti n g ide a s u n der physic a l for m s , h ad a for m a tive effect u pon m a ny words , th us show
in g th a t l an gu age origin a ted p artly a t le a st fro m the soun ds wh ich n at u r a lly a cco m p a ny
, ,

certa in gestures It see m s cert ai n th a t the l a t t er exhibit the e a rliest condition of the
.

h u m a n m i nd an d th a t m a inly throu gh th e m w a s si gn ic a nce co m m un ic a ted to speech

, .

E ve n i f the m ore m a teri a l an d substa n tive rel a tion s between sign s a n d l a n gu a ge

c an n ot n o w be a scerta ined , w e m ay a t le a st expect fro m the inquiries suggested , l in ,
 9

g u ist ic results i n the a n alogy between th ei r sever al dev elop m ents The m en ta l pro
.

ce sses ar e n e arly the s am e in both c a ses , an d the psych ology of l an gu a ge m ay be

stu d ied in the older an d lower m e a n s of co m m un ic ation as the physic a l an d m en ta l
org a n iz a tion of m a n h as been prot a bly co m p ared w ith th a t of the lower a n i m a ls .

The ex a m in a tion o f si gn s and o f picture writi ng w hich is i n ti m a tely a ssoci a ted w ith
-

the m , thro ws ligh t u pon the gr a m m a tic m a chinery o f l a n gu a ge , th e syn tactic prin
cip l e , an d the genesi s o f the sentence . N o t u nti l a l arge body o f fa cts h as been g ath
ered by severa l cl a sses of observers , an d com p ared by co m peten t schol a rs , can i t be
possible to a scerta in w ith precision the pri n ciple s o f the pri m i t i ve utter a nce o f m a n
k ind . A h exh a us t ive tre a t m en t o f the subj ect will also brin g to li ght reli g ious socio
,

logic an d other ethn ologic i nfor m a tion o f speci a l interest It i s i n thi s work th a t the
,
.

B ure a u of E thnology o f the S m ithsoni a n In stitu t io n solicits the co o per a tion of le a rned
m e n an d observers in al l l a n ds w hose con tribution s , w hen received , will a l w ay s be
,

publi shed wi th ind iv idu a l credit as we l l a s respon sibili ty .

G M
. .
 LIST OF AUTHORI TIES ANDCOLLABORATORS .

1 . A li st prep are d by WI LL I AM DU N B A R , d ated N a tchez June 3 0 1 800 collected , , ,

fro m tribes then w est o f the M ississippi b u t prob ably n o t fro m those very f ar west o f
,

th at river , published i n t h e Tr a n s a ction s o f the A m eric a n Phi lo sophic al S ociety , vol .

vi a s re a d J an u ary 1 6 1 801 , an d co mm un ic a ted by Tho m a s J e tf e r so n presiden t of the

, , ,

society .

2 The o e publi shed i n

. n

A n A ccoun t of a n E xpedition fro m Pittsbur gh to the
Roc k y M ount a in s perfor m ed in the ye ars 1 81 9 1 82 0 By order of the H o n J C C al
, . . . .

houn S ecretary of War u n der the co m m an d of M aj S H L ON G o f the U nited S ta tes

,
. . . .
,

Topogr a phic a l E n g i neers P hil a delphi a 1 82 3 ( C o m m only c alled J a m es L on g s E X

.
,
.

p e d it io n ) . Thi s appe ars t o h a ve been collected ch iey by M r T Sa y , fro m the Pani , . .

an d the K an s a s O tos , M issouris , Io w a s , O m a h a s , an d other southern br a nches of the

,

gre at Da k ota fam ily .

3 The o n e collected by Prince M AXI M I L I A N von W I E D N E U WI E Di n

. H is
sta te m en t is the A ri k ar a s M a nd a n s M in n it ar r is [ H id a ts a ] Crows [ A bs aro k a ] C hey
, , , ,

enn es S n ak es [ S h oshon i ] a nd B l ac k feet [ S a t sik a ] al l un derst a n d certain si gns wh ich ,

, , ,

o n the contr a ry as we a r e told ar e uni ntelligible to the Da k ot a s A s sin iboin s O j ib w a s

, , , , ,

K ribs [ Crees ] an d other n ations

, The li st gives ex a m ples of the sign l an gu a ge o f the
.

for m er Fro m the m uch gre a ter proportion o f ti m e spent an d in for m a tion obt a ined by
.

the a uthor a m on g the M a nd an s an d H id a ts a th en a n d n ow d wellin g n e ar Fort B erthold ,

o n the U pper M issouri , it m i ght be s a fe to con sider th a t a l l t h e sign s i n his li st were in

fact procured fro m those tri bes B ut as th e author does n ot say so, he i s n o t m ade t o
.

say so i n th i s wor k If it sh a ll prove th a t the sign s n o w u sed by th e M and a n s a n d

.

H id a ts a m ore closely rese m ble those o n h is l ist th a n do those o f ot h er tribes the in ter
t ,

n al ev iden ce w ill be veried This list i s n ot pub li shed i n th e E n gli sh ed ition , but
.

appe ars in the Ger m an Goblen z 1 83 9 a n d in the Fren ch Pa ris 1 84 0 B ibliogr ap hi c

, , , , ,
.

reference is often m ade to this distin gu ished explorer a s Prin ce M axi m ili an , as if
there w ere but o n e possessor of th a t chri sti a n n am e a m on g princely fam ilies For .

brevity th e referen ce in th is p per will be

a W ired
.

N o tr a n sl ation o f this list i nto E n gl ish a ppe ars to h a ve been printed in any sh a pe
before th a t recen tly published by the presen t e d itor in the A m eric a n A n tiqu ari an , v ol .

ii N o 3 while the G er m a n a n d French edition s a r e costly a n d di fcult o f access , so

,
.
,

the collection c ann ot re a dily be co m p a red by observers with the si gn s n o w m ade by

the s am e tribes The tr an sl a tion n o w presen ted is b a sed upon the G er m a n ori g in a l ,
.

11
 12

but in a fe w c a ses where the l an gu a ge w as so curt a s n ot to gi ve a cle a r ide a w a s col ,

l a ted w ith the Fren ch edition of the succeed in g ye ar w h ich fro m so m e intern a l evi , ,

dence a ppe ars to h a ve been publi shed wi th the a ssi sta n ce o r supervisi on o f the au thor
, .

M a ny of the de scripti on s a r e h owever so b r ief an d in denite i n both their G er m a n a n d

, ,

Fren ch form s th a t they n ecess arily re m ai n so i n the presen t tr an sl a tion The pri ncely .

explorer , wi th the k een discri m in a tion sho w n i n al l his wor k doubtle ss observed wh a t ,

h as esc a ped m a n y recen t reporter s of a borigi n al si gns t h a t the l a tter depen d m uch ,

m ore upon m otion th a n m ere positio na nd ar e gener a lly l a rge an d free seldo m
m in ute H is obj ect wa s to express t h e gen er a l effect of the m otion r a ther th a n to
.

descri be i t so as to a llo w of its a ccur a te reprod uction by a re a der wh o h ad n ever seen

i t Fo r the l a tter purpose , n o w very desi ra ble a m ore el a bor ate description w o uld
.
,

h a ve been necess ary a n d e ven th a t would n ot in a l l c a ses h a ve been su f cien t w ithou t

,

pictori al illustr a tion .

O n a ccoun t o f the m a ni fest i m port a n ce of deter m in in g the prev a lence a nd persi st

en ce of the si gn s as ob served h a lf a cen tury ag o a n exception is m ade to the ge n era l ,

arr an ge m en t here a fter m en tio n ed by in trod uci n g a fter the Wi ed sign s re m a r k s of col
,

l ab o r a t o r s who h a ve m ade speci a l co m p a rison s a n d a ddin g t o the l a tter the respective ,

n a m es of those coll abor a torsa s ( Ma tt/wws) I t is h oped th a t the wor k o f

these gen tle m en w ill be i m it ate d n o t only rega rdin g the Wi ed sign s but m a ny ot h ers .

4 Th a t of C a pt R F B U R T ON o f si gn s wh ich it would be i nferred were collected

. . . .
, , ,

i n 1 860 fro m the tribes m e t o r le arned o f by h i m o n the overl a n d st a ge route ,

i ncl udin g S outher n Da k ota s , U tes S h oshon i A r ap a hos C rows Pan i and A p a che s
, , , , ,
.

Thi s is con tai ned in The C ity o f the S a in ts , N e w Yor k 1 862 , .

In for m a ti on is recen tly recei ved to the eff ect th at th i s collection w as not m a de by
'

t h e d ist in g uish e d E n gli sh explorer fro m h is person a l observ a tion , but w a s obt a i ned by
'

h i m fro m one m a n a M or m an bish op w h o i t i s fe a red , g a ve his o w n i de a s o f the u sa ge

, , ,

of sign s r ather th a n their si m ple description .

5 A l ist re a d by Dr D G M A C G O WA N a t a m eetin g o f the A m eric a n E thnologic al

. . . .
,

S ociety J a n 2 3 1 86 6 an d published i n the H istoric al M a g a zine v ol x 1 86 6 , p 86

, .
, ,
87 ,

.
,
.
,

purportin g to be the sign s of the C a ddos W ich it a s an d C o m a n ches , ,

.

6 A co m m un ic a tion fro m B revet C o l R I C H AR D I DOD G E L ieuten a n t Co l on el

. . .
,
-

Twenty third Infa n try U nited S ta tes A r m y a uthor of The Pl ai n s o f the Gre a t
-

, ,

W est a n d their Inh abi t a nts & c rel a tin g to hi s l arge experience w i th the In di an s o f
,
.
,

the pr a iries Colon el Dodge n ow on a cti ve duty h as been requested to a ssi gn h is

.
, ,

gen er a l descriptions to the tribe o r tr ibes i n w hich the sig ns were a ctu a lly observed by
h im , an d should such desi gn a tion arri ve , wh ile the V O C AB UL AR Y is p a s sin g through the
press they will be cl a ssied a ccordin gly H e is a lso prep a rin g a l arger con tribution
,
. .

N O T ICE
In the six collecti on s a bove m ention ed the gen er ali ty o f the st ate m en ts a s to
l oc a lity o f the observ a tio n a n d use o f the si gns , rendered it i m possible to arra n ge
the m in the m a n ner ex p l ai ned in the In trod uctory L etter h ereto They will therefore .

be refe rred to i n the V O C A B UL A R Y by the n a m es of the a uthors respon sible f o r the m .

Those w hich n ow follo w ar a rr a n ged a lph abetic ally by tribes un der he a din gs o f Lin
e
,

g u ist ic F a m ilies w h ich a r e a lso gi ven bel ow i n a lph a betic a l order

,
E x a m ple : The .

rst a uth ority is un der the he a d in g A L G ONK I A N and co ncernin g only the A r ap ah o , ,

tribe , is referred to a s ( Ar a p a ho I ) L ieuten a n t L E M L Y bein g the person al a uthority

,
.
 13

References to an ot h er ti tle word as exp l ain i n g a p a rt o f a descripti on o r to supply an y

-

other portion s of a co m poun d si gn wi l l alw ays be understood as bein g m a de to the

description by the s a m e a uthori ty o f the sign un der the other title word E x a m ple : -
.

In the sign for A d v a n c e a n d R e t r e a t ( M am l a n a n d H ida fs a I ) the reference to .

B a t t l e is t o th a t si gn f o r B a t t l e which is con tri buted by Dr M A TTH E W S an d is .

,

referred t o under t h a t title as ( M a nda n a nd H ida tsa I ) '

A L G ONK I AN .

A r ap a h o I . con tribution from L ieut H R L E M L Y Thi rd U n ited S ta tes A rtillery ,

A .
. . .
,

co m piled fro m n otes a nd observ a tion s t ak en by h im in 1 87 7 am on g the N orthern A r a

p a hos .

C hey enne I A li st prep ared i n July 1 87 9 by M r F R A NK H C U SH I N G of the

.
, ,
. .
,

S m ith soni a n In stitution , fro m contin ued in terviews w ith T I T C H K E M AT S K I ( Cross E yes ) ,

an i n telli gen t C heyen n e t h en e m ployed a t th a t In stitu tion

, It is expected th at M r . .

C ushin g wil l m ak e other co n tribution s especi ally fro m the Zu ni an d other Pueblos , ,

a m on g w ho m he h a s been collectin g m a teri al d urin g t h e p a st ye a r .

C h eyenne II A speci a l con tribution with di a gr a m s fro m M r B EN CL AR K , scout a n d

. .

i nterpreter o f si gn s col lected fro m the Cheyen nes during h is lon g resi dence a m on g th a t
,

tribe .

Oj i bwa I The s m a ll collection o f J G K O H L m a de a bout the m iddle o f the pres

. . .
,

en t cen tury am on g the O j i bw as aroun d L ak e S uperi or Publi s h ed in his K it ch ig a m i

,
. .

W an derin gs aroun d L ak e S uperior L on don 1 86 0 ,

,
.

Oj i bw a 1 1 N otes fro m Ver y Rev E D WA R D J A C KE R Poin te S t Ign a ce M ich

. . .
, .
,
.
,

respectin g the O j ibw a .

Oj i bw a I II A co m m u nic a ti on fro m Rev J AME S A GI L F I LL A N , W hite E arth , M in n

. . . .
,

rel atin g to sign s observed a m on g the O j ibw a s d urin g his lon g period of m ission ary duty ,

still con tin u i n g .

Oj i b wa IV A list fro m M r B O W I LL I AM S S r o f O wosso M ich fro m r e c o l l ec

. . . .
,
.
, ,
.
,

ti on of si gn s observed a m o n g the O j ibw a s of M ichi ga n si xty ye ars ag o .

Sac Fo x a n d Ki ckap o o I A list fro m Rev H F BUC K NE R D D of E ufa ul a Ind

, ,
. . . .
,
. .
, ,
.

T , con sistin g chiey o f trib a l sign s observed by h im a m on g the S ac a n d Fo x Kick a

.
,

poos ,
d urin g the e a rly p a rt of the ye ar 1 880 .

D AK O T A N .

A bsa r o ka I A list o f si gn s obt a ined fro m DE EK I T S H I S ( Pretty E a gle ) E T S H I DI

.
,

K AH O T S H KI ( L on g E l k ) a n d PE R I I S H I KADI A ( O l d Crow ) m e m bers o f a deleg a tion of

'

, ,

A bs a ro k a or Crow Indi an s fro m M ont an a Territory , wh o visited Wa shi n gton D C , ,

. .

durin g th e m onths of A pril a n d M ay 1 880 ,

.

Da ko ta I A co m prehen si ve list arr an ged w i th gre a t c are an d s k ill fro m Dr

.
, ,
.

C H AR L E S E M C C H E S NEY a ctin g a ssi st an t surgeon U nited S t a tes A r m y of si gn s

.
, , ,

collected a m on g the Dak ota s ( S ioux ) ne a r Fort Bennett Dak ot a durin g the l a st , ,

w in ter a n d sprin g Dr M C C H E S NE Y req uests th at recogn ition sh ould be m ade of t h e

. .

v a lu able a ssi st ance rendered to h im b v M r VV IL L I AM FI E L DE N the interpreter a t .

~

Ch eyen n e A gen cy , Dak ot a Territory .

Da ko ta I I A short list fro m Dr BL A I R D T AY L O R a ssi st a n t surgeon Un ited

. . .
, ,
 14

S t a tes A r m y , fro m recollection of si g n s ob served am on g the S iou x duri n g hi s

service in the regio n i n h a bited by th a t tribe .

Da ko ta II I A S peci al co n trib utio n fro m C a p t A W C O R L ISS E igh t h U h

. . . .
,

S t a tes I n fa n try , of s igns obse r ved by h im duri n g h is l a te service a m on g the S ioux .

Dako ta IV A copi ous con tribution w ith di a gr am s fro m Dr W I LL I AM H C O "

. . .

SI E R a ssista n t surgeon , U n ited S t a tes A r m y , of si gn s obt a in ed fro m the O gal a l a S]

,

at Pi ne Ridge A gen cy Dak ot a Territory d urin g 1 87 9 , ,

Da ko ta V A report of Dr W J H O FF M AN , fro m observ a ti on s a m on g the T

. . . .

Dak ot a s while a ctin g a ssist a n t surgeon , U nited S tates A r m y , an d sta tioned a t Gr

River A gen cy , Da k ota , duri n g 1 87 2 J 7 3 .

Da ko ta V I A list o f sign s ob ta i ned fro m PE Z H I ( Gr ass ) , chief o f the Bl a c k

.

S iou x ; N AZ U L AT AN K A ( Big H e a d ) , chief of the U pper Y a n k ton a is ; a nd T S H I T O U A

( Thunder H a w k ) chief o f the U n cp ap as Teton Dak ota s loc a ted at S tan din g R
, , ,

Dak ot a Territory while at W a sh in gton D C in Ju ne , 1 880

, ,
. .
,
.

Da ko ta V I I A list of sign s obta i ned fro m S H UN GK A L UT A ( Red Do g ) , an n

.

chief from the Red C loud A gen cy wh o vi sited W a sh i ngton in co m p any w ith a l : ,

deleg a tion of Dak ota s in June 1 880 , .

H ida tsa I A list of si gn s obt ained fro m T S H E S H AC H ADAC H I S H ( L e a n W

.
.

chief o f the H id a ts a , loc a ted a t Fort Berthold Dak ot a Terri tory whi le at W a sh , ,

t o n , D C w ith a deleg a ti on o f S iou x Ind i a n s in Jun e 1 880

. .
, ,
.

M a nd an an d H i d a tsa I A d i scri m i n a tin g an d illustr a ted contribution fro m

-
.

WA SH I N GT ON M A TTH E WS , a ssist an t surgeon U n ited S tates A r m y a uth or o f E t h , ,

r ap h y an d Philology o f the H id ats a Indi a n s & c l a tely prep a red fro m hi s n otes
.
, ,

recollect i on s o f si gn s observed duri n g h is lon g service a m on g the M a nd a n a n d

-

d a ts a Indi a n s o f the U pper M issouri .

O m a h a 1 A speci a l li st fro m Rev J O WE N DO R S EY , m ission ary a t O m a h a A g e

. . .

N ebr a s k a fro m observ a ti on s l a tely m a de by h i m a t th a t a gen cy

,
.

O to I A n el a bor a te list wi th di a gr am s fro m Dr W C B O T E L E R U nited S t

.
, ,
. . .
,

Ind i a11 service collected fro m the O tos at the O t o A gen cy N ebr a sk a , d urin g 1 87 9
-
, ,

O to a nd Ill isso a r i I A si m il a r con trib u tion by the s am e a uth or respectin g th e s

'
.

of the O tos a n d M i ssouris of N ebr a s k a collected durin g the wi n ter o f 1 87 9

, in ,

description of m a n y o f whi ch he h a s been j oined by M iss K A TI E B AR NE S .

Po n ka I A short list fro m Rev J O WE N DO R S E Y , l a tely Ob t ai ned by h im

. . .

the Po n k a s i n N ebr a s k a .

IRO" U O IAN .

I r o qu o is I
list of si gn s con tributed by the H o n H O R ATI O H AL E auth
. A .
,

Philology o f the Wi l k es E xplori n g E xpedition & c n o w resi din g a t C l in t o n 0 n t

,
.
, ,
.

C an ad a, obt ain ed in Jun e 1 880, fro m SAK AYE N K WAR AT O N ( Dis a ppe arin g M ist ) f:
, ,

i a r l y k n o wn a s Joh n S m o k e Johnson ch ief o f the C a n a di a n divi sion of the S ix N a t ,

0r Iroquoi s proper n o w a very a ged m a n r esidin g a t B r a n tford C a n a d a

, , ,
.

Wy a ndo t l A li s t o f si gn s fro m B EN T O ( G r ay E yes ) ch ief o f the Wy a ndots ,

.
,

visited W a shin gton D C durin g the sprin g of 1 880, in th e i n terest of th a t tribe

,
. .
, ,

loc a ted in In di a n Territory .

KA I O WA N .

K a to waI A list o f si gn s fro m S I T T I M GE A ( S tu m blin g Be ar ) , a

. K aio wa chief
Indi an Terri tory w ho visited Wa shin gton D C , in Jun e , 1 880
, ,
. . .
 IF
)

K U I I N E AN
'
.

K a tine I A letter fro m J W PO WE LL E sq In di an superin ten dent

. . .
,
.
, ,
British C ol um
b ia , rel a tin g to his observ a tion s a m on g th e K u ti ne an d others .

PA N I AN .

A r ika r a I
list of sign s obt a ined fro m KU AN U C H K N AU I U C H ( S o n o f the S t a r )
. A ,

chief of the A ri k a r a s loc a ted a t Fort Berth old Dak ot a Territory while a t Wa sh in g , , ,

ton , D C with a delega tion o f Indi an s in Jun e 1 880

. .
, ,
.

S AH AP TI AN .

I A l ist con t ri buted by Rev G L DE FF EN B AU GH of L a pw ai Id a ho ,

Sa h ap t ih -

. . . .
, ,

gi vin g si gn s obta ined a t K am i a h Id ah o , chiey fro m F E L I X ch ie f o f the N e z Perc s , , ,

a nd u sed by the S ah a ptin or N e z Perc es .

SH O SH O N I A N .

Co m a nche 1 N otes fr o m Rev A .J HO L T Den i son Tex a s respectin g the C o m a n

. . .
, , ,
.

che si gn s , obt ain ed a t A n a d a rk o Indi a n Territory ,

.

Co manche I I In for m a ti on Obt a in ed a t Wa shin gton i n Febru ary , 1 880 fro m M aj

. .
, .

J M H AW O R TH In di a n i n spector rel at in g to si gn s u se d by the Co m anches of In di a n

. .
, ,

Te rritory .

Co m anche I I I A li st o f sign s obt a i n ed from K O B I ( W ild H orse ) a C o m a nche chief

.
,

from Indi an Terri tory , w h o vi sited W a shin gton , D C i n June 1 880 . .

, ,
.

Pa t Ute I Infor m a tion Obt ai ned at W a sh in gton fro m N AT S H E S a Pai U t e chief

-
.
,
-

w ho w as one of a delega tion Of th a t tribe to \Va shin gton in J a n u a ry 1 880 , .

S h o sh o ni a nd B a na k I A list of si gn s obta ined fro m T END OY ( The Cli m ber ) .

,

T I S IDI M I T , PE T E , a n d U I AGAT m e m bers of a deleg a ti on of S h osh o n i an d B an ak chiefs ,

from Id aho w h o vi sited W ashin gton D ,

duri ng the m on ths of A pril an d M ay 1 880 .
,
.
,
.

Ute I A li st of si gn s ob t a ined fr o m A L E J A ND R O G AL O T E A U G U S TI N an d other

.
, , ,

chiefs m e m bers o f a deleg atio no f U t e Indi an s o f Colorad o who visited Wa shin gton
-

, , ,

D C dur in g the e arly m on ths of the ye a r 1 880

. .
,
.

T I N NE A N .

Ap a che 1 li st o f sign s obta in ed fro m H UE R I T O ( L ittle B londe ) A G U STI N V I J E L

. A , ,

an d S A N TI AG O L AR G O ( J a m es L on g ) m e m bers of a deleg a tion o f A p a che chiefs fro m ,

Tierr a A m a rill a N e w M exico w h o visited W a shin gton ,

in the m on th s o f M arch , ,

an d A pril 1 880 , .

Ap a ch e I I A list of si gn s obt a i ned fro m N A K A N AN I I AI N ( White M a n ) a n A p a che

.
'

chief fro m In di a n Territory wh o v isited Wa shin gton in J une 1 880 , ,

.

Ap a ch e I II A l a rge collection m a de d urin g the presen t su m m er by Dr F R AN C IS H

. . .

A T K I N S a ctin g a ssist a n t surgeon U n ited S t a tes A r m y fro m the M esca lero A p a che ,
, , ,

n e a r S outh For k N e w M exico This M S w as recei ved a fter the w hole o f the V O C AB U
,
. .

L AR Y h a d gone to the printer and a l a rge p a rt a ctu ally printed so it w as n ot possible , ,

to in sert all of the description s i n the presen t ed ition T he i nterestin g N a rr a tive .

co m m u nic a ted by Dr A T KI N S is pri nted w ith si m il a r m a tter following the V O C A B UL A R Y

. .
 16

Wi chi ta Il ist of S ign s fro m Rev A J H O L T m i ssion a ry obt a ined fro m K I N

. A . . .
, ,

C H E E SS ( S pect acle s) , M edicin e m an of the W ich it a s , a t the W ichi ta A gen cy , In di a n

- -

Terri tory in 1 87 9,
.

Wi chi ta I I A list o f sign s fro m T S O DI AK O ( Sh a ved H e ad Boy ) a W ich it a chief,

.
,

fro m In di a n Terri tory w h o v isited W a shin gto n , D C i n Jun e 1 880

,
. .
, ,
.

Z U NI A N .

Zmi i I . S om e
preli m in ary n otes l ately recei ved fro m Rev T AY L O R F . . E A L Y , m is
sio n ar y a m on g the Zu ni , upo n the S ign s of th a t body o f In di a ns .

G r a teful ck nowled g m e n t m u st be m a de to Prof E A FAY, of the N a tion al De af

a . . .

M ute College , throu gh w hose speci a l a tten tion a l a rge n u m ber of the n a tur al sign s o f
de af m utes re m e m bered by the m as h a vin g been in v ented and used before in struction
-

in con vent ion al si gn s , in deed before attendin g any school w as obt ained w hich are , ,

printed in this p aper Th e gen tlem en w ho m a de the con tribution s in their o w n M S ,

.
'

an d with out pro m p ti n g ar e a s follo ws : M essrs M BAL L AR D R M ZE I G L E R , J C R O SS

,
. .
,
. . .
,

P HI L I P J H A S EN ST AB
. L AR S ON Their n am es wi ll follow the sever a l description s
,
. .

M r BA LL A R D is n o w the te a cher i n the pri m a ry sch ool o f the college an d the other
.
,

gen tle m en were studen ts durin g th e l a st session .

S peci a l th an k s ar e a lso ren dered to P rof J A ME S D B U TL E R of M a dison , Wis , f or

. .
,
.

con tribution of It a li a n ge sture S ign s , n oted by h im i n 1 843 , an d for m a ny useful su g

-

gestion s .

A s m a ll collection of A U ST R AL I A N S ign s h a s been ex t r a cted fro m T h e A bo r igi nes of

V i cto r ia by R BR O U GH S MY TH , vol ii , pp 4 5 , 3 089
,
. . L ond on 1 87 8
. U pon these .
,
.

the a uthor m ak es the follow in g cu rious re m ar k s : I t is believed th a t they h a ve se v

er a l Si gn s k n ow n only to the m selves , or t o th ose am on g the whites wh o h a ve h ad
, -

in tercou rse with the m f o r len g then ed periods , which con vey in f or m a tion re a dily and
a ccur a tely Indeed , bec a use of their use o f si gn s , i t is the r m bel ief of m any ( so m e
'

u neduc a te d an d so m e ed uc ated ) th a t the n a tives o f A u str ali a are a cq u a in ted w ith the
secrets of Free m a sonry

.
 V O C A BU L A R Y .

Ab ide . S ee S t a y .

Ab o ve .

Pl a ce
the ri ght h a nd by a n a scendin g m otion u pon the left h a n d
, , ,

both exten ded n gers j oi ned a nd p al m s dow n ( A r ap a ho I )

,
. .

Poin t w ith fore n ger o f righ t h an d r a ised from the side to the h e av
e n s a bove w ith exten ded ar m q uic kl y ( Oj ibwa I V )

. .

Thu m b an d f o r e n g e r s of both h ands extended poi ntin g u pri gh t ,

( othe r n gers closed ) in fron t o f body level of bre a st b ack of h a n d , ,

out w a rd an d th e n held in this position left h and outside of an d h igher

, ,

th an the right The S i gn ca n a lso be m a de w ith on e h an d by m ovin g

.
,

it after bein g h el d a t the lower height to the hi gher on e a nd hol din g i t ,

there a S hort ti m e ( Da ko ta I ) S uperior heigh t o ne person or thi ng

. .

above an other

.

W it h the b ac k of the h an d to wa rd the right the n gers bent at ri gh t ,

a ngles w i th the p al m an d poin ti ng to w a rd the left p us h the right h a nd ,

fro m in fron t of the chin up w a rd un til it i s a little h igher th a n the he a d .

( Da ko ta IV ) .

R a ise the h a nd very q uic k ly above the he a d p a l m to the fron t , ,

an d

a little b a c k o f the he a d ( O ma h a I ) . .

The right h and with the i ndex only extended i s elev ated before the
, ,

he a d ( Co man ch e I )
. .

The left at h an d i s h eld in front o f the body at the heigh t o f th e

elbow p al m down the right si m il a rly pl aced over a n d a l ittle higher
, , , ,

th a n the left To express gre a ter elev a tion the ri gh t h an d is r ai sed

. .

Ute I ) .

li ttle
A .

H ol d the left h a n d horizon tal a n d in fron t o f the body n gers open ,

b ut j oi ned together p al m upw ard The right h a nd i s the n pl a ced hori

,
.

z o n t a l n gers open but j oined p a l m dow n w a rd a n i n ch or m ore a bove

, , ,

the left and r a ised o r lo we red a few in ches sever al ti m es the left h a n d
, ,

bein g perfectly still ( Do dge ) .

3
 18

Ab o ve con sider a bly

, .

P l ace the h a nd s a s i n A b o v e a l i tt l e then r a ise the right h a n d

, ,

higher an d higher as the hei g ht t o be expressed is gre a te r u n til if

,
-

, ,

e no r m o u sly a bo ve the righ t h a nd i s r a ised as hi gh a s possible ; xi n g

,

the eyes tow ard th e zenith e m i t a d uplic a te grun t th e m ore prolon ged
, ,

the gre a ter the hei gh t is expressed Th e left h a n d m ust con ti nue .

m otionless dur i n g al l th is ( Do dg e ) .

A ch e . See Pa i n .

A c r o ss .

Pa ssthe h an d a ttened an d either p a rti a lly or e n tirely extend ed ,

,

fro m the bre a st for w a rd up w ard a n d do wn w a rd , for m i n g an arch to

, , ,

the front ( A bsa r o ka I ; Sh osho ni and Ban ak I )

. .

the other side of

O n .

E lev a te the left st p a l m dow n before the fa ce a n d p a ss the a t a n d ,

exten ded right a cross the b ac k o f the left beginn i ng a t t h e t h u m b sl id ,

i n g it dow n o n the outer side so a s t o tur n the ti p s of the n gers of the

ri gh t ne a rly in to w ard the p al m of th e left ( Ute I ) . .

A dd to ; to p ut in so m e m o re ; to add o r p ui t t o .
( C o m p are
C o u n ti n g ) .

With ri ght h a n d m ak e do wn w ard m otio n a s though to t ak e u p so m e

thin g ; ( 2 ) m ove sudden ly o ver t o left as though depositi n g t h e so m e
thin g in it ; to ad d on e the thre e rst ngers are cl a sped dow n by the
,

th u m b To a dd two the little an d th ird n ger extended To add three

.
,
.
,

th e l ittle an d m iddle n gers exten ded To add four al l the n gers ex .

,

te nded To ad d m uch m a ny S ign a s before ( C h ey enne I )

.
, ,
. .

H old the left h an d i n fron t o f body scoop fa s h ion wit h b a ck of h a n d

dow n w ard , t h en w ith the right h an d held i n the s a m e scoop m a n ner ,
w ith p al m dow n w a rd m a k e a sort o f di vin g m oti on d ow n w ard an d out
w ard a n d l astly i n w a rd an d up w a rd to the left h a n d , as though g a ther
i n g i m a g in a ry obj ects an d p utt in g the m i n the left h a n d ( Da ko ta I )
-
. .

Ga theri n g a d a ddin g t o
n

.

Wi th the n gers a n d thu m b of t h e ri ght h a n d preten d to pic k so m e ,

i m a gin ary obj ect in the d irection of the loc ality o f the desired obj ect ,

pl a cin g i t n e a r the body an d repe a tin g the gesture severa l ti m es

,
.

( Da ko ta

Brin g the poin t of the exten ded f o r e n g e rs together before the bre a st .

( O ma h a I) .

L eft h a n de xten ded p al m do w n w a rd ( W ) B rin g right h a nd directly .

over left h a n d do w n w ard , a n d l et t h e right h an d p a l m dow n w ar d fall

upo n the b a c k of the exten ded left h a n d ( Co m an che I ) Pili n g up . .

furs
.
 .
19

Ad m i r a ti o n , a c t i o n o f a d m i r i n g ; s u r p r i se ; wo n d e r .

( Co m p are P r e t t y , c o n t e n t ) .

Pl acin g the h a n d upon the m outh to show th a t l a n gu a ge is in a dequ ate ,

to co m m unica te thei r sen s a tio n s ( L o ng ) .

H old the hol lo w h an d f o r so m e ti m e before th e m outh Perh aps the .

ide a bein g th at th e m outh w idely open in a m aze m en t i s conce aled b e

, ,

n e a th i t an d it bein g i m proper to di spl ay e m otion or a d m ir a tion ,

,

th e open m outh i s con ce aled by the h an d ( Oj i bw a I ) .

.
.

( 1 ) F ace tu rned to th e righ t ; ( 2 ) eyebrow s elev ated con tr acted ; an d

right h a nd l ifted with n gers c a relessly or loosely extended ; ( 4 )

brou ght su d den ly to w a rd the ; m outh To express surp r ise as di stinct .

fro m a dm i r a ti on m ak e the followin g si gn : E yebro w s con tr a cted an d

elev a te d eyes in dicat in g i n terest ri ght h a n d n gers outspre ad elev a ted
, , ,

to si de a nd fron t of eyes g en tly oscill ated ( C hey enne I )

,
. .

A rms crossed in front o f b ody the h a n ds ( S ) pressi n g a ga in st the

ar e ,

right a n d left bre a sts w hich pressure is a lter nately rel a xed a n d renewed
,
.

A t the s am e ti m e p le a sure is expressed by fa ci a l e m ot ion Da ko ta .

A l m ost i n volu nt a ry o n seeing an obj ect or th in g th ey ad m ire .

Deaf -
m ute Dr aw one p a l m alon g upon the other ; t he n
n a t ur a l sig n .
-

press the m a g ai n st your bre ast directly opposite the he art m ak i n g at

, ,

th e s am e ti m e vour fa ce loo k li k e tryi n g to k iss ( C r o ss ) .

Ad u l a tio zl .

I ta li an sig n The m outh k issi ng the h a n d b y which J o b described a

species o f i dol atry is a species
of a dul a tion pr a cticed by every crin g

i n g serv a n t in Ita ly ( Bu t lcr ) . .

A d va n c e an d R e tr e a t .
( Co m p are B a t t l e ) .

Wit h the u pri ght h an ds a bou t four i nches a p art p a l m s fa cin g n gers , ,

sep a r a ted a lit t le an d se m i e xe d in fron t of the upper p art of the chest ,

-

w hile al l the n gers a re in m otion m o ve the left h a n d a w a y fro m the ,

ri ght a bou t four in ches a n d ben d i t b a c k w a rd un til its p a l m loo k s

obli q uely upw a rd tow a rd the right an d at the s am e ti m e thro w the right ,

h and tow ard it an d p artly over i t ; then m ove the righ t h a n d a w ay

fro m the left an d reverse the position of the h a nds Repe a t thi s .

m a n euver sever a l ti m es ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

The h a nds h el d as in the si gn for B a t t l e , then their rel a tion s to on e

a nother re m a i ni n g un ch an ged , they a re m oved a ltern a tely fro m side t o

side to represen t the a lte rn a te a dv a n ces an d r etre a ts o f opposin g forces .

( M a nda n a n d H ida tsa I ) .

 20

A er . S ee B e f o re .
( C hey en ne I I )
.

A ff e c ti o n . Se e L o ve.

A f r m a ti ve . S ee Ye s .

Aged . O ld m an .

Pl a ce the clinched right h an d in fron t o f the shoulder , a foot or so

fro m i t , p a l m to the left, the n push it for w ard a few i nches , dr a w in g i t
b a ck a t a lower level Thi s is done three o r four ti m es , an d the bod y
.

is inclin ed to t h e fron t a t the s a m e ti m e ( A bsar o ka I Sh osho ni and .

B a na k I ) Gr a spin g a st aff f o r a ssi stan ce i n loco m otion

. .

Pl a ce the cl in ched st i n fron t o f an d n e a rly as h i gh as the shoul

der the n push it for w ard repe a tedly , d r a win g i t b a c k at
, a lower level
( Da ko ta VI ) I m i tates w a l k in g w ith a st aff
. .

H old th e righ t st in front o f the righ t sid e n e a rly as high as the

shoulder , m ove it for w a rd a nd brin g i t b a ck a l ittle lower repe a tin g th e ,

m otion sever a l ti m es ( Ka to wa I ; Co manch e III ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I )

. .

Wa l k in g w ith a st a ff .

Ah ead . See B e f ore .

Air . Se e W in d .

A l ik e . Se e S a m e .

A l ive .

Right n ger wh irled u p w ard ( M a cgo wan ) . .

T he right h a nd b a ck up w ard , is to be a t the h eight o f the elbo w

,

a nd for w a rd the index exte n ded a n d poi ntin g forw a rd , the other n gers
,

cl o sed thu m b a ga i n st m iddle n ger ; th en , w hile rot a tin g the h a nd out

,

w a rd , m ove i t to a posi tion a bout four i n ches in fron t of the fa ce th e ,

b a ck look in g forw a rd an d th e index poin tin g upw a rd ( Da ko ta 1V ) . .

J ust a li ve , a l m ost de ad
The s am e m otio n a s for A l i v e , but the i ndex is to be ben t an d
th u m b pl a ced a ga i nst the p al m a r surface o f the rst j oin t of th e i ndex .

( Da ko ta IV ) .

All .

Move the ri ght h a nd p al m down w ard i n a l a rge circle , horizont ally

, ,

two feet in fron t of th e fa ce or m ove both h a nd s in th e s am e m a n ner ,

.

( Da ko ta IV .
)
A l wa y s ; f o r e ve r .

Pa ss th e ri ght h and ,
exten ded , e d gewi se fro m the he a d o u t
a t an d

w a rd tow ard the rig h t in t wo m o ve m en ts the p al m at l a st poin tin g to

, ,

the righ t The eyes ar e directed up w ard a t t h e s am e ti m e ( Wy a ndo t I )

. . .
 21

M ak e the si gn for T i m e a l o n g an d l o n g a g o ( Co ma nche I I I )

, , . .

T h e i nfor m a n t w a s re q uested to give the sign for the above word ,

out as n o ne w as k n o wn h e s a id th e n e a res t a ppro a c h to th e ide a would

,

b e expressed by m ak i n g the sign s m e a n i n g l o ng ag o a l o n g ti m e ,

.

S am e the sign for ( Da ko ta I ) With out end

as E ar th , th e . . .

Am er i ca n . S ee W h i te m an .

Am o n g .

Brin g t h e n gers a nd thu m b of the left h a nd ne arly together so a s ,

to for m a n in terrupted circle h a vin g a d ia m eter of an i n ch or m ore then

i ntroduce th e extended i nd ex a s f ar as the secon d j oin t ( Ka io wa I ; .

Co ma nch e I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wich ita II ) In the m id st o f ot h ers .

An ge r .
( Co m p a re B a d h ear t and Sad )
.

The n gers an d th u m b of the right h a nd w ith the end s together an d

ne ar the bre ast then tu rn the h a n d roun d two or three ti m es so as to
,

describe vertic a l circles , in dic a tin g th a t the he a rt i s disturbed ( L o ng ) . .

C lose the st pl a ce it a ga i nst , the forehe a d , an d tur n it to and fro i n

th a t positi on ( Bur to n ) .

( 1 ) M otion if to touch the righ t bre a st w ith the right h a n d to ex

as

press self, I ; ( 2 ) n gers p a rti a lly closed thu m b restin g on the ,

tip s a n d extendi n g a cross the h a nd ; ( 3 ) sudden m otio n forw a rd an d

sligh tly to the right ; ( 4 ) n gers spr un g wide open ; ( 5 ) r a pidly sh a k en
to a nd fro ( C hey e nne I ) S h a k i n g o deprec a ting
'

. . .
,

Close the rig h t h an d as i f gr a spin g a s m a ll obj ect, hol d it sever a l

i nches b efore the forehe a d a nd twist i t a rou n d tow ard the left ( A bsa
, .

r o ka I ; S ho sh o n i a n d B a na k I )

W ith the ri gh t h a nd st ( B 2 ) r a ised to the upper p a rt of the fa ce in

, _

fro n t s t ri k e d o w n o n t h e left side o f t i e b o dy to t i e le vel of t h e sto m

,

a ch .V e r y nn u c h a n g e r e d rep e a t t h i s m ove m en t sever a l ti m es

, ,

a n d express it by contr a ctio n of the m u scles of the fa ce ( Da ko ta I ) . .

T he elbow i n fron t o f a nd as high as the s h oulder , then stri k e w it h

the st a c ross the fa ce to th e left the fa ce expressin g i m p a tience ( Da ,
.

ko ta I II ) .

To u ch the chest over the he art two o r th ree ti m es w ith the end s o f
t h e ngers o f the righ t h a n d ; then m a k e the sign for b a d ( Da ko ta .

IV )
. H e a rt b a d

.

The right i s elev a ted an d in type posi tion ( A ) brough t

ar m -

,
to fore
he ad above right eye an d t wisted spira lly fro m right to left ; m otion
endin g w ith st s p al m outw ard ( O to I ) . .
 22

Close the righ t h a n d as i f gr aspin g a sm all object , pl ace it to the fore

h e ad p a l m down then tw ist i t forcibly , dr a wi n g the h a nd sli ghtly to th e
,

fron t a s if t wistin g off an y proj ection A nother : Th e cli nched right .

h a nd is twi sted a ga in st the bre a stbon e i n ste a d of the forehe ad .

A n other W hen n o t v ery an gry the in dex is slightly ben t an d twisted

before the forehe ad ( Ute I ) . .

With the thu m b n gers of th e righ t h a n d collected t o a poi n t

an d ,

pl ace the inn er side of the h a n d over the he art , b ack up ( Ka io wa I ; .

Co ma nche III ; Ap ache II ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

Brin g the tips o f the n gers a nd th u m b o f t h e right h a n d t o a

poin t , an d pl ace the m to the forehe a d j ust over the n a s a l e m inen ce .

( Ap ache I ) .

Deaf -
m a te n a t ur a l sig ns M a k e wrin k les in your fa ce by fro wnin g and

sh ak e your he a d .

the fa ce, n ext turn t h e hea d to a n other side , a n d then stretc h

H ide
down the o p en h a nd so a s to indic a te th at the o ff ender s h ould be o u t of
sig h t i mm e d iat e l y .
( H a sensta b ) .

M ove b a ck w a rd an d suddenly r a ise the h ands b et ween the bre a st wit h

a dis a gree a ble expression of the face ( L a r so n ) .

M ove the lips as if spe ak in g li k e a ve r v a n g ry m an .

( Zeig ler )

n gry wi th vo u
a .

H a n d closed right index extended a nd poin ts to he a rt ; the n si gn for

,

a n ger ; then right i ndex poi n t s to the i ndivid u al i n tended

( O to I ) . .

The m in d turned a w ay .

An te lo p e .

Pa ss the open righ t h a n d out ward fro m t h e s m a ll o f the b a c k ( Wied ) . .

T h is a s expl a ined by In di ans e xa m ined b y the presen t editor in dic a tes

, ,

the lighter colora tion upo n t h e a n i m al s a n k s The U te w ho could

.

spe ak S p a n ish acco m p a nied i t with the word bla nco as if recognizin g ,

th a t i t required expl a n a ti on .

E xten d sep a ra te the f o re n g e rs an d thu m bs n e arly close al l the

an d ,

other n gers a nd pl ace the h a n ds wi th b a c k s o utw ard a bove a n d a little

,

i n fron t of the e a rs a b out four i n ches fro m the he a d a n d sh ak e the m

, ,

b a ck an d fort h ( Da ko ta IV ). A n telope s h orns .

.

With the index only extended hold the h a n d eighteen o r twen ty

in ches tra n sversely in fro n t o f t h e he ad i ndex poi ntin g to the left , th e n ,

rub the sides of the body w ith the a t h nds

a ( Da ko t a VI )
The . .

l atter sign refers to the white si des of the a ni m al ; the for m er could n ot
be expl a in ed .

 23

C lose the r ight h a nd le a ving the en d of t h e index in the for m o f a

,

hoo k a n d the th u m b p artly extended ; the n w a ve the h and q uic k ly b ac k

a nd fort h a short dist a nce opposite the te m ple
( H id a tsa I ; A i ika r a
'

, .

I ) Represents the pron ged horn of the a n i m al This is the sig n

. .

ordin arily used but it w as n oticed th at in co nversin g wi th on e of the

,

Dak ota s ( V I ) the si gn o f the l a tter w a s used sever a l ti m es , to be m ore

re adily understood .

Pl aceboth h a nds n gers fully exten ded an d spre ad close to the sides
, ,

of the he a d Wied s sig n w as re a d ily un derstood a s sig ni fyi n g the

.

w hi te a n k s ( Ap ache I ) . .

A r r i ve . S ee C o m e .

Are yo u " S e e Q u e st i o n .

Ar ro w .

Pa ss t h e i ndex h u ger of the right h a nd sever a l ti m es across the left

-

ar m .
( Wied ) .

E xpressedby n otchin g i t upo n a n i m a gin ary bow a nd by sn a pping

w ith the i ndex a nd m edi us ( B ur to n ) .

of ri ght h and exten ded , poin ti n g uprigh t in fron t o f bre a st ;

Fo r e n g e r -

b a ck o f h a n d out then with the thu m b and foren ger of left h a nd ( other
,

n gers loosely cl osed ) rub up an d dow n the extended foren ger of the
ri ght h a nd ( str aighteni n g the a rro w ) thu m b and forenger o n Opposite ,

sides an d then exten d the left h an d in fron t of body an d dr a w the right

,

b a c k as though it w as the arrow xed i n the stri n g o f the bow ( Da ko .

ta I ) .

Fro m the pl a ce of the a rro w i n dr a w i n g the bo w .

S e m i e xthe n gers an d thu m b of the left h a n d an d pl a ce the h a n d

-

i n fron t o f the c h est w ith its p a l m i n clin i n g a t a n a n gle of 45 0 down

w a rd an d b a c k w a rd an d tow ard the ri ght ; dr a w the exten ded ri ght
i ndex , i ts b ack forw ard fro m left to right dow n w ard an d b ack w ard b e
tween the left i n dex an d thu m b a nd a lon g the p a l m , a t the s am e ti m e
brin gin g th e ends o f the two l a tter together ( Da ko ta IV ) Dr a win g . .

an a rrow out of th e h a nd in wh ich they hold their a rro ws

.

B oth r m s ar e exed as in position t o shoot The right a rm is dr a wn

a .

up an d exed t o a n a n gle o f 4 5 0 wit h h a nd i n position ( E 1 ) m odied , ,

by p a l m fa cin g the body L eft ar m is extended f r o m body a b out o n e .

foot an d ben t wi th elbow h orizon t a l at a n a n gle o f 800 L eft h a nd i s in

,
.

position ( G 1 ) m odied by reversin g h a n d The sign i s co m ple ted by .

un ifor m m ove m en t to a nd fro m as o f swingin g a rro w a ft er ass um in g

, ,
-

a bove positions ( O to I ) C l a spin g string a n d poin ti ng arro w

.
. .
 24

H old t h e lefth a nd as hi g h as and so m e distan ce in fron t o f the left , ,

bre a st b a c k forw a rd h a n d ne arl y h al f closed then dr a w the extended

, , ,

i ndex down w a rd over the p al m of the left the whole dist a n ce extendin g ,

a bout twen ty i nches ( Kai o wa I ; Co m a nche I I I ; Ap a che II ; Wich i ta

.

I I ) Dr a win g an a rrow over the h a n d a s i n pullin g the bow strin g to

.
-

sh oo t

h i t w ith an
To .

P l a ce t h e t ip s of the n gers down w a rd u pon the thu m b , th en sn a p

'

the m for w a rd ; then stri k e the h a n ds together a nd elev ate the in de x

n ger of the ri gh t h a n d Prob a bly w he n he s a ys stri k e the
.

h and s together h e w ishes to describe m y si gn for S h o t When the

, .

person who m the prin ce sa w m ak in g this si gn r ai sed the n ger he m ay

h a ve done so to indic ate a m a n shot o r o n e shot I do n ot thin k th at the .

r aisin g of the n ger is an i n tegr a l p art o f th e si gn ( l f a tthe ws ) . i

Pa ss the extended foren ger of the ri gh t h and ( others closed ) b a c k of

h a nd tow ard the ri gh t between the fore an d secon d n gers of the left
,

h an d held a bout 1 8 in ches in fron t o f body b a c k o f h a n d out horizon

, , ,

t al al l th e n gers extended an d then close the two n gers of th e left

, ,

h a n d on the right i ndex ( Da ko ta I ) A rrow stic k in g i n the t arget

. .

.

A fter m ak in g the si gn for B o w stri k e the b ack of th e right h a nd ,

i ts i n dex exten ded other n ger s closed a ga in st th e p al m o f the Opene d

, ,

left ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

Sam e as th e si gn for B O
but with this a ddi tio n : th at a fter th e
V ,

n ger h as sn a p p e d f r o m the th u m b the b a ck o f the right h an d is struck

a g a in st the p a l m o f the left ( Dako ta V ) . .

Wi th the i nde x only exte n ded a nd p oin tin g u p w a rd then elev a te the
, ,

left h a n d p al m tow a rd bre ast rst n ger sep ar ated fro m the m iddle , ,

p a ss the i ndex of the ri gh t forcibly for w a rd an d through the sp a ce th us

for m ed stri k in g the k n uck les o f the ri ght a ga i n st the p a l m of the left
,

w ith a thud ( O m a ha I )
. .

To k i ll
w ith an .

E xtend th e left h a n d closed a s if gr a spin g a bow dr a win g t h e ri gh t

, , ,

b ack to w a rd the shoulder fro m the left , sn a p the rst t wo n gers of th e

righ t forw ard fro m th e th u m b a nd th row the right over , tow ard the
ri ght an d down w ard ( Ute I ) . .

To shoot with bo w an d .

The h ands ar e pl a ced as in the a tti tude o f dr a w in g the arrow in the

bow ( thi s i s al so t h e si gn for the bow ) an d i t s dep arture i s in dica ted by ,

S prin gin g the n gers fro m the th u m bs as i n the ac t o f sp rin k li n g w a ter ,

.

( L o ng )
 25

Pl a ce
the tips of the n gers do wn w a rd upon th e th u m b , then sn a p .

the m forw a rd ( Wied ) I believe I h a ve descri bed th is u nder the he ad

. .

o f Di s c h a r g e o f d e a d l I h a ve a l w ays seen the Sa m e

y m i s si l e .

S i gn m ade for shootin g b oth bul let and a rrow If i t i s nece ss ary to .

distin guish the we a pon it ca n be d o ne by a ppropri ate signs i n add i

,

tion t o this ( ll . The left a r m w a s then elev a ted sl i ghtly bent ,

a t e lbow , an d extended fro m the body a s in holdin g a bow T h e ri ght .

ar m w as then exed a n d the h a nd i n position G l ) i n verted as hold

, ( , ,

i n g a nd pullin g the strin g ; the h a nds a r e thus un ifor m ly sw ayed to

a n d fro sever a l ti m es a s if holdin g the a rro w in si ta a nd t ak in g an a im
,
(

If VV ie d s sign i s co m ple te there is little rese m bl a nce to the si gn am on g

,

the O tos , sa ve i n the position o f the ri gh t h a n d w hich is si m il a r though , ,

i nverted In the O t o sign th e dist a nce between the h an ds would indi

.

c a te len gth o f the a rrow which is not show n in the l a tter ( Bo wl er )

,
.

Th a t wh ich rests in the strin g an d bow .

Me the sign for B o w the n ri gh t h an d dr a w n sudden l y b ac k

ak ,

tow ard ri ght shoulder n gers of both h a nd s sn apped to indic ate di s

.

ch arge o f a rro w a n d tw a n g o f strin g ( Chey e nn e I ) . .

the left ar m with closed h a n d a s if gr a spin g the bo w dr aw

E xtend ,

the ri ght h a nd b a c k tow ard the righ t side of the fa ce w ith the secon d
n ger restin g a g a in st th e thu m b ; then a llow the nger to sprin g forw ard ,

m ove i t in t h e directio n of th e obj ect h it a n d stri k e the b ac k s o f the ,

ngers of the right h a nd aga i nst the p al m of the left ( Da ko ta V ) . .

Sa m e si gn as Da ko ta V .
( Da ko ta VI I ) .

E xtend
the left h a nd a t a left oblique the thu m b an d m iddle n ger ,

for m in g circle brin g the right h a n d b ack to t h e right bre a st , a n d ip

,

the n gers of both h a n ds fro m the th u m bs ( O ma ha I ) . .

Arro w h -
ead.

W i th the in dex n ger o f th e ri ght h a n d touch th e tip of th e exten ded

.

foren ger of the left h an d sever al ti m es ( Wi ed) .

Me the si gn for A r r o w an d then pl ace the right thu m b p al m

ak ,

forw ard o n the l a st j oi nt of the left index i t s p a l m in w a rd the other

, , ,

n gers closed ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

A sh a m e d .

The extended righ t h a nd p al m in w a rd s , is p a ssed up an d down two or

,

three ti m es in fron t o f the face a n d a n i n ch or t w o fro m i t w i t h a m o d

, ,

e r a t e l y r a pi d m otion ( Ma nda n a nd H eda tsa I )

'

. .

I am .

C ross the h a n ds in fron t of the fa ce p a l m s b a c k w a r d , the righ t behi n d ,

the left to h ide th e face ( Da ko ta 1 V )

,
. .

4
 26

A sh e s.

H and s wi th n gers exte nded brou gh t together in fron t of the body , ,

p al m ar surfaces of little n gers j oined , a nd h an d s slopin g obliquely u p

w a rd wi th b ac k s loo k in g tow ard s the sides e xten ded n gers poi ntin g to ,

the fron t , e h a nd s held i n i m it a tion o f a s tr ai gh t scoop , th en

.
,

w i thout sep a r a ti n g the h a n ds c a rry t h e m forw a rd a n d do w n w a rd w ith

a q uic k upsettin g m otio n ( D a ko ta I )

S coopi n g up an d thro w i n g
. .

a w a y a shes

.

A sl e e p or sl e e p i n g .

Pl a ce the h a nds open over the fa ce close the eye s a n d gen tly pre ss ,

the m d o wn a t s a m e ti m e gently in cline the he a d an d body to the rig h t

, ,

u ntil a tta ini ng a n a n gle of a bout 4 50 or lo wer re m a i n i n th at p osi tion , ,

a fe w m o m ents ( Oj i b wa IV ) . .

A ss . Se e M ul e .

A sse n t . S ee Ye s .

A st o n i s h m en t . See S u r p r i se .

A t te n t i o n .

H old the right h a n d extended p al m do wn a t a r m s length

at and , ,

a n d directed to w a rd the person a ddressed s h ak in g i t fro m side to side ,

sever al ti m es ( A bsar o ka I ; Shosh o ni an d B an a k I )

. .

To ttr ct person s a tte n tion previou s to co m m en cin g con vers a ti on

a a a

The ri gh t h an d c arried directly ou t in fron t o f the body wi th ar m ,

fully exten ded a nd there m oved sidewi se w ith ra pid m otions ( Da ko ta I ) . .

A uro r a b o rea l is .

First m ak e the sign for the M o o n in i ron t of th e body at th e level ,

of the bre ast a nd the n o n both sides of i t a t the s a m e ti m e m ak e wi t h

,

both h a nds the sig n for re .

This req uires expl a n a tion T h e S ioux believe the nort h ern ligh ts to
.

be t h e reectio n of a re b uilt o n eit h er side of t h e m oon t o wa r m i t .

( Da ko ta I ) .

A u tum n .

W ith the thu m b an d foren ger of righ t h a n d describe a crescen t ( other

n gers closed ) b ack o f closed n gers outw ard , h a nd c a rried in this posi
,

tio n fro m a bove a n d to the left o f the he a d in front of body tow ard t he
righ t a nd dow n w a rd m odera tely r a pid wi th a curved an d s m a ll up an d
do w n w a vi n g m otion ma de by t urn in g the fore a r m a n d h a n d i n i mi t a
tio n o f a le af c arried fro m the tree by a sligh t breeze ( D a ko ta I ) The

. .

fa llin g o f the le a ves .

 27

H old the left h an d upright in front o f the left shoulder n gers sep a ,

r a ted a li ttle and sligh tly bent the en ds i n a circle a n d thro w the right ,
, ,

its n gers sep a r ated a little an d slightly ben t , fro m i m m edi a tely a bove
the left severa l ti m es do wn w ard side wise o n di ff eren t sides then , with ,

i t s n gers pointin g obliquely upw a rd tow a rd the left c a rry the right ,

h an d spirally do wn w ard a nd obliq uely tow a rd th e ri ght , to i m ita te the

falli n g o f le a ves ( Dako ta I V ) . .

E lev a te the left h a n d pointing up w ard before the face , p al m to th e

, ,

righ t with ngers a nd th u m b sep ar a ted , the n p a ss the right , with n

g ers i n a si m il ar position up w a rd p a s t t h e left a short di st a nce then turn
, ,

do w n tw o or m ore n gers of the righ t w ith th e foren ger of the left

a n d thro w the h a nds do wn w a rd an d forwa rd wit h spre a d n gers poi n t

in g i n the s am e direction ( Ka to wa I ; C o ma nch e I II ; Ap a che II ; l if t

.

ch ita I I )

. G rowth of tree , an d fa llin g of le a ves .

Aw l .

The left foren ger i s exten ded a nd the right , a lso extended is pl a ced , ,

a cross it , an d is th en turned on its a xis so as to i m i t a te the a c t io n of ,

-

the a w l i n m aki n g a hole ( L o ng ) . .

( 1 ) Th u m b a nd three n gers of ri ght h an d cl a sped as though gr a sp

in g h andle o f an a wl and the in dex n ger extended to represent th e
,

poi n t ; ( 2 ) thrust a ga i nst the p al m or so m e portion of the left h a nd .

( C hey enne I ) .

Ax . See T o m a h a wk .

C uttin g with an . Se e C utti n g .

B a by . Se e C h i l d .

B a co n .

Sep a r a te
the thu m b an d n gers of the right h a n d the for m er under , ,

the l atter over the extended left h an d p a l m s down , as if feelin g it s ,

thick n ess ( A r ap a h o I )
. .

L eft h a nd with th u m b an d n gers extended j oi ned horizon t al ed ge , ,

o f h a n d down w a rd is held i n fron t of the left bre a st b a c k outw a rd right ,

h a n d with ng ers exten ded and j oi ned thu m b extended an d for k ed i s ,

p assed over the left fro m a bove with end s of n gers do w n w ard an d ,

then the p a l m ar surfaces of the ri g ht n gers a r e p a ssed al on g the b a c k s ,

an d the th u m b a lon g the p a l m a r surfa ce of the left h a n d ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Thi n i s
a lso denoted by this sign Fa t li k e a side o f b a con

. .

B ad , ni ca n .

M a ke t he sign for Go o d an d then th a t of Not .

( L 0 ng ) .

Close th e h a nd an d open it whilst p assi n g i t dow n w a rd ( Wi ed )

,
. .

Thi s i s the s a m e as m y description b ut d iff e r e n t l v worded ; possibly ,

 28

n otes a less forcible for m I say h owever th at the h a n d i s m ov ed

. .

, ,

f orw a rd The precise directio n i n w h ich the h an d is m o ved i s n o t l

.
,

t h i n k essen ti a l
, .

S c a tter the dex ter n gers out ward , as if sportin g a w a y w a ter fro m
the m .
( B a r to n )

(1 ) Righ t h a nd p arti ally elev ated n gers closed , thu m b cl a spin g the ,

tip s ; ( 2 ) sudden m otion dow n w a rd an d ou tw ard a cco m p an ied by eq u ally

sudde n open in g of n gers an d sn appin g fro m t he th u m b of the n gers ,
.

( C h ey enne I ) .

Right h a n d cl osed ( B ) c a rried forw ard i n fron t o f the body tow ard the .

righ t an d down w ard duri n g w hi ch th e h an d is opened n gers down

.
,

w ard as if droppin g o t the con ten ts ( Da o ta I )

.

o t w rth eepin g

,
u k N o k . . .

H a lfclose th e n gers of the right h a nd crook the t h u m b over the ,

f r e a n d m iddle n gers an d m ove th e h a n d b ac k up w a rd a foot or so

o
, ,

tow a rd the ob ject refe rred to a n d sudden l y let the n g e r s y open

' '

.
,

( Da ko ta IV
)

S c a ttered a roun d th erefore h ad
.
,
.

Close the n gers o f the right h a nd , restin g the ti ps a ga i nst the thu m b ,
then throw the h an d dow n w a rd an d ou t w ard to w a rd the righ t to ar m s

len gth , a nd sprin g open the n gers ( Dako ta V I VI I ) .

,
.

H a n ds open , p al m s turned in ; m ove one h an d tow ards ,

an d the other
fro m , the body ; th en nice ner sa ( O m a ha I ) . .

T h row the cl inched right h a nd for wa rd , dow n w a rd a n d out wa rd an d , ,

w hen n e ar a t a r m s l en gth , suddenly sn ap the n gers fro m the th u mb a s

if spri n k lin g w a ter ( Wy an do t I ) T o thro w a w ay con te m p t uously ;

. .

n o t wor t h k eepin g

.

R aise h a nd in fron t o f bre a st , ngers ho ok ed thu m b restin g a gai n st ,

second nger p a l m down w a rd ( G

,
then with a nervous m ove m en t
throw the h and down w ard to the righ t an d a l ittle be hin d t h e body , w ith
a n expression o f d isgust on the f a ce Durin g m otion of h a n d the n g .

ers ar e gr ad u al l y extended a s thou gh throwi ng so m ethin g out of h a nd ,

a n d i n n a l position the n gers a n d th u m b are str a igh t an d sep a r ated ,

p al m b a c k w a rd ( R I ) , w ith n gers poin tin g do wn w a rd , p a l m ba ck w a rd .

( S a h
-
ap t i n

A w a y w ith i t
.

S a m e m oti on o f h a n d as i n A l l r i g h t G o o d B ut in the
ar m a nd .

rst position n gers are closed , an d as the h an d m oves to the right they
ar e thrown open un ti l i n n a l position a l l ar e exten ded a s in n al for
,

A l l r ig h t ; G o o d ( Sa h ap ti n I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig n U se the sign for H a n d so m e ,
at the s a m e
ti m e sh ak e the he a d as if to say No .
( Zieg ler )
 The N e a polit a ns to express con te m pt bl ow tow ard s t h e person o r
, ,

thin g referred to The de a f m utes preserve th e con n ec t ion of b ad

.
-

an d

t a ste by brushin g fro m the side of t h e m outh Thi s m ay be co m

.

p a red wi t h the de a f m ute sign o f ippi n g an i m a gin ary object between

-

thu m b n a il a n d fo ren ger den otin g so m e t hi n g s m all o r conte m ptible

, .

The m oti on of sn a ppin g the n ger ei ther o n o r fro m the th u m b i n d is

d ai n i s n ot only of l arge m odern prev alen ce i n civiliz a t ion b u t is at le a st ,

as a n cient a s the conte m por a ry st a tute o f S a rd a n a p alus at A n chi ale .

Very .

S i gn f o r V er y as i n V er y good, an d si gn f or B a d .
( Sa hap ti n I ) .

B d h t ; ic k ed ( Co m p are A n g e r )

a ear . .

Si gn f o r B a d , then fo l ded right h a n d struck tw o or three ti m es su d

d e nl y a g ai nst the he a rt to i m it a te p a lpit a tion ( C hey enn e I ) . .

T ap sever a l ti m es the region over the he art with th e ri ght h an d hori ,

zo n t al n gers exten ded poin tin g tow a rd the right , b a c k outw a rd an d

, , ,

then m a k e the S i g n f o r A n g e r ( Da ko ta I ) M y he a rt is b ad . . .

The si g n m o s t co m m only used for this ide a is m a de by the h an d bein g

closed a n d held ne ar the bre ast wi th the b a c k s tow a rd the bre a st then , ,

as the ar m is sudden ly extended the h a n d is open ed a n d the n ger s

sep ar a ted fro m e a ch other ( M a nd a n an d Hida tsa I ) .

-

Pl a ce the n gers the a t righ t h a n d over th e he art then

of ,
m ak e the
S ign for b a d .
( Dako ta VI , VI I ) .

B a ll .
I

M iddle n gers and th u m bs of both h an ds brou ght together to re p re

S cn t a circle ( C he y en ne I ) . .

Fo r gun . See B u l l e t .

B ar te r . See T rade .

B a si n .

Sa m e as K e ttle , e xce p t l n al m o t io n
-
of settin g on the re which ,

i s o m itted ( Da ko ta Fro m its sh ape

. .

B a sk e t .

In terloc k the sep a r at ed n gers o f the h a nds i n fron t o f body b a c k s ,

ou t w ard h a nd s h ori zon t al in i m it a tio n o f th e interl aci n g o f b ask et

, ,

vo r k ( Da ko ta )
I Fro inter oven splinters of b s k et
. m t e
h w . a a .

B a t tle .
( Co m p are F i g h t an d K il l ) .

The c l i nch ed h a nd s ar e held about as hi gh as the n eck an d ve o r six

inch e s a sun der t h en w aved t wo o r thr e e ti m es l ater ally to show the
,
 3O

a dv a n ces a n d retre a ts of the co m b at a nts ; after w hi ch the n gers of

e a ch h and ar e su ff ered to sprin g fro m the th u m b tow ard s e a ch other ,

as in the act o f sprin k li n g w a ter to represen t th e igh t of m issiles , .

( L 0 ng ) .

To show th a t ghtin g i s actu ally t ak in g pl a ce m ak e the gesture of ,

K i l l ; t ap the lips w it h the p a l m li k e an O rien tal w o m a n when k ee n

in g scre a m in g the while O a i O a l to i m i ta te the w ar son g ( B ur to n )
,
- -
.

Fist s of both h a n ds closed an d bro u ght to the level of the chin

(1 ) -

ne a r toge t h er a n d k n uc k les facin g e ach other ; ( 2 ) m oved sudde nly for

w a rd a n d b ac k w ard w ith a sort of chur n ing grin d in g m otion ( Chey ,
.

e nn e I ) .

B ot h
h an d s ( A 1 ) brou gh t to the m edi a n li ne of body o n a level with
the bre ast a n d close toget h er describe with bot h h a n ds a t the sa m e
ti m e a series of circul a r m o ve m e n ts o f s ma ll circu m feren ce ( Da ko ta I ) . .

T wo Opposi n g forces of Indi a n s a t b a ttle in a circul a r m a nner a fter ,

their u su a l custo m of surrou n di n g their ene m y .

T wo or m ore m e n gh ti n g M ove the u pright sts a ltern a tely sever a l

.

ti m es b ac k an d forth a bou t ei ght i nches in front of t h e upper p art of the

chest p al m s i n w ard a n d abou t four in ches a p art ( Dako ta IV )
, ,
. .

The cl inched sts ar e held be f ore the chest b ac k s ou tw ard ( the fore ,
-

a r m n ei ther prone n or supi ne ) a n d p a ssed str a ight up an d do w n r a pidly

,

a di sta n ce o f six to t w e l ve inches a lter na tely i n opposite direction s to

,

one a n other either a short d ist an ce a p a rt or wit h the j oin ts touchin g

,
.

This in dicates an y an gry con test or s t ruggle a s well a s a pitched b a t t le

fou ght with we a pon s ( M a n da n a nd H ida tsa I ) . .

The a r m s are equ a lly exed a s in posi tion o f defe n se H a nds ar e

,
.

loosely clen ched and sts rota ted in p al m ar proxi m i ty three ti m es the
sig n is co m pleted by ret a i ni n g the a r m s an d sts in posture for d e f en se

a bout three seconds H a n ds a r e position ( B ) do u ble d or ( B B )

.
( O to .

I)
. To w ard o ff .

B othh a n d s at hei ght of bre a st , p a l m s fa ci n g the left forw a rd fro m ,

the left shou lder the righ t outw ard a nd for wa rd fro m the ri ght n ger s
, ,

pointi n g up and spre a d m ove the m altern a tely tow ards an d fro m o n e
,

a nother I M in glin g of m e n i n str ife

( U te ). . .

P l ace
both h a nd s o n a level in fron t o f the che st , h alf closed , n g e r s '

pointin g dow n w ard , the b a c k s o f the ri g h t h a nd n gers poin tin g for -

w a rd those of the left fa cin g the m held a bout si x i n ches a p a rt the

, , ,

h a nds are then q uic k ly m oved to w a rd an d fro m on e a n other sever a l

ti m es ( Ap a che I )
. .

Deaf r - Vibr a te your ngers i m plyin g how

mu te n a tu a l sig n , m a ny
soldiers ; then copy the m an ner of sh ootin g a gun ( C r oss ) .
 31

B a t t l e , Whi te s m an

.

Both h a n ds cl in ched with b all o f thu m b o n the secon d an d third n .

gers clin ched f o re n g e r s of e a ch h a nd touchi n g Then push the h a n ds

, .

fro m y o u let tin g the n gers al l v ou t w ard a t the s am e ti m e as i f you

,
- -

,
.

were tryin g to throw w a ter o your n gers This repe ated twice or
'

m ore a ccordin g t o the severity of the en g age m ent

, ( Co ma nch e I ) . .

S oldiers st a ndin g i n line deliver in g the ir re .

h a ge an d co un t er ch arge
C r -

The h a nds a re held a s in the sig n for B a t t l e a n d are the n sim ul ta ,

n e o usl y m oved fro m a nd tow ard o n e a nother

( M a nda n a nd Hida tsa I ) . .

B e a d s , gl a ss .

S trok e
the n gers of the right h a n d over the left upper ar m Wied ) . .

Do n ot re m e m ber A sig n for nec k l a ce is so m eti m es m a de by e xtendi n g

.

the thu m b and in dex nger a n d p l ac in g the m a g ain s t the thro at ( M a t

t haws .
)

Tips of t h e j oi ned th u m b a n d forenger left h a nd ( others closed ) wet ,

by touch i n g to the tong ue a r e p a ssed down in fron t of the body a s

, ,

though pick i n g up loose be a ds fro m the l ap a nd the n h an d held in fron t ,

o f the left bre ast ho r izont a l b a c k o utw a rd

,
tips of j oi ned thu m b a n d
, ,

n g er tow ard the right a nd then the right h an d with th u m b an d fore

, ,

n ger extended croo k ed an d j oined at tips ( others closed ) as though

, ,

holdin g a sine w is p a ssed to w ard the left t o a nd over the left h a n d

, ,

a s though p a ssing the sine w throu gh the be ads ( D a ko ta I )

Fro m . .

the u se of be a ds i n e m broidery .

B e a r, n i m ala .

Pa ss t h e h a nd before the face to m e a n ugliness a t the s a m e ti m e ,

gri nn i n g a nd extendin g the n gers li k e cl a ws ( B u r to n) .

( 1) iddle an d thi rd n ger of right h an d cl a sped dow n by the thu m b

M ,

foren ger an d little n ger extended croo k ed down w ard ; ( 2 ) the m o ,

tion of scra tch in g m ade i n the a ir ( C h ey e nne .

Fin gers o f both h a n ds closed except the little n ger which is extended, ,

a nd poin tin g str ai gh t to w a rds the front thu m bs restin g on the b a c k s of ,

t h e secon d ph a l a n ges o f al l t h e n gers h a nds horizont al b a c k s up w ard , , ,

ar e h eld in fron t of their respective sides ne ar the body a n d then .

,

m oved directly forw a rd wit h short sh a rp j er k in g m otion s ( Da ko ta I ) ,

. .

Fro m the m otion of the be a r in run nin g .

Grizzly .

Right h and a t a nd extended held a t height o f shoulder p a l m for , ,

w a rd the n bring the p al m to t h e m outh lic k i t with the ton gue a nd

, , ,

return i t to rst position ( O ma h a

S ho win g blood o n the p a w
.
.

 32
-

S eize s h ort piece o f wood say a bout two feet lon g w a ve in the ri gh t
a , ,

h and an d stri k e a blo w a t a n i m a gin ary person ( O m a h a I )

, . .

S eize sh ort t h i n g about six in ches lon g hold it as d agger preten d

a , ,

to thrust i t dow n w ard u n der the bre a st bone repe atedly , a nd e a ch ti m e

farther gru n tin g or ga spi n g in doin g so ; w ithdr a w t h e s t ic k h ol d in g it
, ,

u p a n d sh owin g the blood point to the bre ast w ith the left foren ger
, , , ,

m e ani n g to say so d o t ha n w hen yo u m ee t t he bea r ( O m a ha I ) . .

Preten d to sta b yourself with an arrow in v a rious p a rts of the body ,

then poin t tow ards the body w ith the left h a n d foren ger ( O ma h a -
.
I

A r m s ar e exed an d h an ds cl a sped a bout center of bre a st ; then

slow ly fa ll wi th a r m s pendulous an d both h ands in posi t ion o f ( " ) The .

si gn i s co m pleted by sl owl y liftin g the h an ds an d ar m s sever a l ti mes in

i m itation o f the a n i m a l s locom otion
.

M ove m en t a nd a ppe a r an ce of an i m al s fron t feet

.
( O to I ) .

H old t h e closed ri gh t h an d at the height of the elbo w before the righ t

side p al m do w n w a rd exten d a nd cur ve the t h u m b an d l ittle n ger so
, ,

th a t their tips a r e ne a rly directed tow ard o n e a n other before the k n uc k les
o f the closed n gers ; then p ush the h a n d forw a rd sever a l ti m es ( Kato wa .

I , Co m a n ch e II I Ap ache I I Wi chi ta I I )
,
Pa w a nd lon g c l a ws
,
. .

H old both closed h a nds before the body , p a l m s down , a nd a bout eight
i nches a p art ; re a ch forw a rd a short di sta n ce rel a xi n g the n gers a s if ,

gr a spi n g so m ethin g with the m a n d dr a w the m b a ck a gai n a s the h a nds

,

ar e withdr a w n to their for m er posi tion ( Ute I ) S cr a tch in g a nd

. .
,

gr a spin g with the cl a ws .

The righ t h an d throw n in t he positi on a s f o r H o r se , th en extend

both h a n ds w ith ngers extended an d curved se p a r a ted p a l m s down , , ,

a nd p ush the m forw ard sever al ti m es m a k in g a short a rch ( Ap a che I ) . .

The a ni m a l th a t scr a t ches with lon g cl a ws .

B e a r d , whi s k ers .

Pl a ce the b a c k of t h e wrist under the chin spre a d the n gers sligh t ly , ,

a llowin g the m to exten d do w n w a rd a n d for w a rd

( Da ko ta V I V I I ) 0
.
,
.

B e a ve r .

With the b ac k of the Open right h a n d stri k e the of the left ,

p al m -

sever al ti m es ( Wied) I h a ve seen this It represen ts the be a ver

. .

stri k ing the w a ter with h is at t a il The ar m s ar e se m i

.

e x e d an d a ppro a ch t h e body with the h a n ds opened p a l m s down the , ,

righ t over a n d a bove t h e left The right h a n d n ally sweeps b a ck an d

.

i s held extended atly open in position o f a n i m a l s t a il There i s no

,

.

si m i l a rity i n the execution o r conception o f this sign an d th a t o f Wied ;

 33

the concepti on in the si gn am on g the O tos is cle ar but t h at f o r the ,

l a tter obscure The h ei ght . a n d bro ad at t a il o f the an i m a l

( Bo wl er ) .

Describe p a renthesis
a w ith the th u m b a nd i nd e x o f both h a nds .

an d then wi t h the dexter index i m it a te the w aggin g o f th e t ail ( B ur to n )

-

( 1 ) Right h an d attened to for m extensi on of fore ar m p al m dow n an ,

w ard at an a n gle o f 4 50 to the body ; ( 2 ) suddenly sl a pped down t wo

o r three ti m es I Fro m the m a n ner i n which the be aver

( C h ey e n n e ) . .

sl a ps w a ter or m ud .

Both h an ds in fron t of body n g ers extended horizon ta l a t p a l m s , , ,

down w a r d ( W ) end s o f ng e r s p oin tin g obliquely forw ard , p a t the b a c k

,

of rst o n e h an d an d then the other sever a l t im e s n o t t o o r a pidly , .

(D o I ) These Indi a n s believe th a t be a vers a re a ble to con verse

a k t a .

w ith e a ch other a nd do so w hile bui ldi ng th ei r d a m s and lod ges The .

sign however w ould see m t o co m e fro m the n oise m ade by t h e be a vers

, ,

i n p attin g d ow n their d a m s .

H old the left h a n d , p a l m l ook ing obliq uely forw a rd outw a rd an d up , ,

w a rd a foot i n fron t o f the lower p art o f th e chest an d stri k e its p al m

, ,

sever a l ti m es with the b a c k of the open ight h a n d ( Da ko ta I V )

r . .

Both ar m s are se m i exten ded an d the h a n ds i n type position

-
are -

held ri gh t a bove left to represen t size o f a n i m a l H ands i n th is positio n .

execute unifor m ly a creepi n g m ove m en t for w ards the n righ t h a n d ,

sweep s to b a c k o f body an d i s exten ded fro m c o cy g e al region to r e p re

sen t the bro a d at t a il ( O to I ) C reepin g a n i m a l with a t t a il
, . . .

H ol d both exten ded at h ands p al m s down side by side then extend , , ,

the rst thr ee n gers sep ar a ted the little ng e rs a n d th u m bs cl osed

, ,

an d the h a nd s ret a inin g the s a m e rel a ti ve position A h I Fl a t

'
( p ac e ) . .

tail a nd cl a w s
,
.

Tr a p . S ee T ra p .

B e f o re .

Brin g the h a nd close to the right bre a st ( M ) with p al m to left fore ,

n ger poin ted outw a rd ; brin g left h and ( M p al m in w ard ) i n fron t of an d

f e win ches fr o m the bre a st m ove righ t h a n d to the front a n d a t s a m e ,

ti m e m ove the left tow ard the bre ast sli ghtly A e r 0 r a f t e r w a rd .

is don e by h a vin g the h a n d s in the s a m e position ( M ) except t o h a ve

p al m of ri ght h a n d down The left i s k ept st a tion a ry a n d the right is
.

dr a wn b a c k ( C hey enn e II )
. The left h a nd represen tin g an i m a gin ary
.

line the ac tion of t h e ri ght m ak es it the fron t o r before

,
.

Ri gh t h a n d m oved quic k ly forw a rd fro m side b a c k o f h a n d i n f ron t ,

the h a n d dr a w n b ac k less q uic k ly a g a in proj ected forw ar d r a p idly with , ,

s l i gh t i nclin a tion o f he a d a nd body forw ard ( Oj ibw a IV ) .

.
.

O
 34

eft h an d held foren ger str ai gh t upri ght p al m of h an d o utw a r d

L , ,

( other n gers cl osed ) in fro n t o f body about 1 8 in ch es an d then the ,

ri gh t h a nd hel d in the s am e m an n er cl ose to the bo d y on the s am e level .

( Dak o ta I .
)
C lose the n gers of the ri gh t h a n d , th u m b crossin g the n ger , m i ddle
i ndex extended p a l m for wa rd , th rus t ,
the h an d forw a rd forcibly .

( O ma h a

Goin g
before o r p a ssin g a nother person .

M ove both n gers u p an d do wn a n d a w a y fro m the body o n the s am e

li ne but a llowin g the righ t to g ai n on an d n ally p a ss t h e l e f t ( Dako ta
,
.

I ) Fro m the ide a of bein g or goin g before or a h e a d o f a n other perso n

.

i n w a l k ing o r a ny t h i ng else A deri v a tive o f superior

. .

In pl a ce ; ahe a d ; superior .

The h a nd s ar e held horizon t a lly in front b ac k s up w ard p a rall el , , ,

a bout a n in ch a p a rt the f o r e n g e r s only exten ded

,
The ri ght h a n d i s then .

a d va nced before the left usu a lly a bou t a n g e r s len gth ; but th e dist a n ce

,

m ay be in cre a sed or di m in ishe d to express degree Th is si gn is to be .

con sidered i n con n ection wi th th ose f o r behi nd o r inf er ior an d besid e or ,

equa l They al l refe r t o the rel a tive position of obj ects i n sp ace b u t to
.

di ff eren t degrees o f qu ality C o m p a r i so n is expressed b y th ese sign s

. .

C h a n ges o f posi tion a s h orses i n a r a ce are show n by ch a n ges in the

position o f the h a n d s ( lf tt n dan a nd H ida tsa I ) . r .

In ti m e .

S a m e si gn as for T i m e l o n g an d s h o r t , b ut in referrin g to len gth

, ,

of ti m e as to the pre vious d ay or prev ious m on th , etc , the h a nds ar e

, ,
.

dra wn a p art c arelessly a bout ten or twel ve i nches q uic k ly , the a bsen ce ,

of any h a s te i ndica tin g a lon ger ti m e a n d con seq ue n tly a ppli c able to ,

m a tters referri n g to a lon ger period ( Ka i o w a I Co ma nche 1 11 ; Ap a che .

I I ; Wi chi ta II ) .

B e g , Be g g a r .

First m a k e the sign for L o d g e , en t e ri n g a ,

an d t hen the sign
fo r G i v e t o In e ( Da ko ta .

First m ake
the sign f o r G i v e t o I n c , a nd then t h e si gn for M a n
.

or W o m a n , as the c a se m a y be L o d g e e n t e r i n g a can be .
, ,

a dded or not ( Da ko t a I )
.

Fro m an Indi a n goin g fro m lodge t o
.
.

lodge a s k in g f o r thi ngs '

B e g on e . S ee Go .

B e gin n in g . C o nl m e n cem e n t .

right h a n d horizon t al w ith n gers a rched ( l l ) b a ck of h a nd up

Th e ,

w a rd o f ngers obliquely do wn w a rd an d ou t w a rd is p ushed o u t in fron t

, ,
 35

of the ri gh t bre a st an d dra w n b ac k to ori gi n al posi ti on t wo or three

ti m es ( Dako ta I ) G oin g to do i t G oi ng to co mm ence a nythin g
. . . .

Goi n g a he a d pushin g thin gs ,

.

B e h in d .

B rin g
both h a nd s in fr on t of the bre a st ( M p al m s down ) the fore ,

ngers ne ar together poin ti ng to front ; m ove the right suddenly to re a r

few i nches the left re m ai n s still I n describin g a person bein g l eft
,
.

fa rther an d fa rther t o the re ar k eep m ovin g the righ t a couple in ches ,

or so a t a m ove un til y o u m ak e t hree or f o ur m o ve s b a ck ( Ch eyen ne II ) . .

S am e m otion as B e f o r e repe a ted by sw in gin g the h an d b ack w a rds

fro m th igh , w ith q uick en ed m otion a s the h an d we nt b a ck ( Oj i bwa IV ) . .

Fo r e n g e rthe ri gh t h an d s tr a ight u p ri gh t ( o thers closed ) p a l m

of , ,

o f h a n d outw a rd is dr a wn fro m i n fro n t o f a nd on a l e vel with the

sh oulder behi nd th e body o n a s ne ar a str aight line as possible and

, _

w ith foren ger poin tin g upright ( D a ko t a I )

Rever se o f goi n g b e . .

fore H e i s still fa llin g behin d m e

. .

With it s in dex exten ded pointin g b a ck w ard over the right sh oulder ,
, ,

b a c k upw ard push th e ri ght h an d b a c k w ard about four inches fro m j ust
,

in fron t o f the sh oulder ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

In ferior ( C o m p are A h e a d ) . .

Pl a ce the h a nds in the s a m e positio n a s for a h e a d , except th a t the

ri ght h an d i s behin d the left i n e a rer the body
( M a n dan and H i
,
. .

d a tsa

P l a ce the spre ad ri g h t h a nd beh ind th e body m ovi ng the h a n d sli ghtly ,

a li ttle u p an d down an d b ac k an d forth ( O m a ha I )

,
. .

The left i s exed an d h a n d upright w ith hook ed in d ex ( as in I

ar m

1 m o die d by t h e h a n d bein g held ed gewi se ) i s brou gh t before the

face The righ t st is then brough t to the s am e posi tion a nd the p al m s
.

fa ce e ach other The left h an d re m a in s before the fa ce but the righ t

.
,

st is swept b a ck p a st the rig h t side with the i n dex n ger ex tended as

i n type J ( O to I.
)

Wh a t I h a ve gone by . .

B e lo n g . Se e P o sse ss i o n .

B e lo w, un d e r .

M de li k e the Si g n for a b o ve w i th th is excep t iO n th a t al l m ove

a ,
-

m ent is m ade by the left or lower h a nd t h e ri gh t bein g h eld motionless , ,

"

p al m d own w ard a n d th e eyes loo k in g dow n ( Do dg e )

,
. .

Pl ace
the right h a nd b y a desce ndi ng m otio n, j ust under the left
,

h and , both exte nded n gers j oi ned an d p a l m s do wn ( A rap a ho I )

,
. .
 36

Sam e m otion with h and st ar tin g fro m above level

as Abo ve -
of

elbo w , n ger poi n tin g down , rest gen tly closed ( Oj ibw a I V ) . .

Sa m e as A b o ve , only dra w the righ t h a nd a co nsid er able dista nce

belo w the left .
( Da ko ta
S ign c an a w ith o n e h a nd by th e reverse o f the m ove m en ts
lso be m a de
in A b o v e ( Da ko ta .

Refer t o the p erson below or un d er by m o v
in g th a t n ger an d h an d w hich represents the un der person , a n i m a l ,
o r thin g I nf er i o r heig h t v a ri a n t o f superior
.
,
.

Both h ands ar e ext en ded open a s i n type W Th e h a n ds are then

-
.

a pproxi m a ted e d g e w ise a n d the le ft is s u perim posed a n d swep t p al m ov er ,

b ack of right B oth h a n ds n ow di verge a n d a r m s are exten ded fro m

.

the ri gh t an d left sides p a l m s down The ri gh t h an d is n o w brou ght .

forw ard as i n type ( I 1 ) m o die d by i n dex bein g m ore exten ded an d

describes a q u adr an t s ar c tow a rds the groun d ( O to I ) The v a st

. .

depth s i nto which a l l s u d den ly fall .

Pl a ce the at left h an d in fron t of the body , p al m d ow n , n gers d i

,

r e c t e d tow a rd the ri gh t ; pl a ce th e a t righ t h a nd p a l m down bel ow the ,

,

left the gre a ter the dista nce the h a n ds are m oved ap art the gre a ter
,

the d epth s to wh ich a llu sion i s m ade Ute I ) . .

B e lt .

otion o f p uttin g a belt a roun d the bod y wi th thu m b an d foren ger

M
of both h an d s on their respecti ve sides o f body thu m b an d foren ger
U sh a ped poi n tin g in w a rd a n d c a rried a roun d the sides o f body to the
-

fron t other n gers of both h a nds cl osed ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m t h e

. . .

pl aci n g of the bel t .

B e si d e , e q ua l . See S a m e .

B ig In the sen se of B r o a d or F l a t
. .

B rin g both h a nd s i n fron t of bre as t p a l m s dow n , then exten d the m ,

for w a rd to len gth o f a r m s an d sweep a roun d outw ards , o n a level Fo r .

sm a ll exten t , the h a n d s indic a te a less exten ded ar c or circle ( Oj ibw a .

IV ) .

The righ t h a nd i s h eld horizon ta l extended an d at , poi n tin g forw a rd ,

.

A s l i ght a rched curve fro m righ t to left is m a de a t wh a tever hei gh t the

spe a k er wi shes to i nd ic ate ( Ap ache .

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l sigh Pl a ce th e h a nd s n e a r e a ch other and m ove
the m a p art .
( Ba l lar d )
the sen se o f H i g h a s a h ill
In .

A n a scendin g m otio n of the extended h a nd , n gers j oined p al m ,

down , outli n in g and indic at in g rel a tive hei ght ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

 37

( 1 ) B oth h an d s un closed brou gh t to the fron t of chest p al m s fa cin g

, ,

e a ch other , ri gh t h a n d a bove left an d elev a ted to level o f chin , ( 2 )

ri gh t h a nd c arried up w ards in proporti on to th e degree of hei ght t o be
expressed ( C h ey e nne I ) .

R a ise the extended h and n gers j oined , p al m down a nd h orizont a l , ,

to the proper or gre a test possible elev ation ( Ar ap a ho I ) . .

W ith the foren ger o f the ri gh t h an d str ai ght uprigh t ( J ) c arry i t , ,

str aigh t up w ard i n fron t of the body above the he a d a s hi gh as the ex .

tended ar m will re ach This would i n d ic a te a m o u n t ain a n d lesser d e

.
,

grees of a r m ex t en sion would de n ote lesser heigh ts ( Da ko ta I ) Gre at . .

hi gh a m oun ta in .

Deaf -

m u te n a t ur a l sig ns .
Hi h
g
M ove the h a n d up w a rd .
( Ba llar d )
R a ise the h a nd above the he a d .
( L a r so n )
In th e sen se of L a r g e a r o u n d .

( 1 ) M otion for W i d t h except th a t the elbows ar e n ot pressed a g ain st

the sides , b u t the ar m s an d h a nds are extended and give a curved for m
as th ough cl a spin g so m e l a rge obj ect ; ( 2 ) m otion m a de to in cre a se o r

en l arge the circle i n proportion t o the size to be expressed ( Ch ey en ne I ) . .

Indic a te the gene ral outlin es , an d in th e direction thereof exten d -

both h a n ds p al m s tow a rds e a ch ot h er , to the requi red o r gre atest p o s

,

sible d ist an ce a p art ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

I

a l in s fa cin g ,
an d m oved a p a rt farther a nd fa rther by j er k s .
( O ma
ha I) .

L a rge .

The opened uprigh t h a nd s p al m s fa cin g n gers rel a xed a n d slightly , ,

sep ar a ted bein g at the height of the bre a st an d about tw o feet ap a rt

, ,

sep a r ate th e m to n e a rly ar m s len gth ( Dak o ta IV )

. .

Deaj i m n te , n a tu a l sig ma
r Pl a ce the h a nds n e ar e ach oth er p al m to
w a rd p a l m an d m ov e the m , a p a rt, an d a t the s a m e ti m e distendin g the

chee k s ( B a l mr d )
.
-

P o in t your n ger at your chest an d face exp a nded . Cr o ss ) .

Move both open h a nds fro m e ach other with the p al m s loo k in g tow ard
e a ch other an d at th e s am e ti m e c a u se the ch e c k s to loo k big an d
, , ,

roun d b y blow in g a gain st the m ( Hasensta b )

.
. .

S tretch out th e h a nd s .
( L a r so n )
In the sen se o f L o n g .

( 1 ) H an ds bro u gh t up w ard an d to th e fron t o f the body foren ger ,

an d thu m bs o f both
brought together a s though gr a spin g the ends o f a
 38

strin g ; ( 2 ) suddenly d r a w n a p a rt in proportio n to the len gth to be e x

pressed ( C heyen ne I )
. .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig ns .
.
Direct th e fore n ger dow n w ard a nd exten d
it forw ard tow a rd a dist a n t poin t . Ba l la r d .
)
Poin t to th e l a n d if the la n d is in tende d w ith t he n ger ; then m ove
, ,

h ori zon t a l l y th e outstretche d h an d alon g t h e lin e w h ich describes an ,

elli pse ( C r o ss )
.

held t h e h ands , th e p al m s touchin g e a ch oth er , sep ar ate the m

H a vin g
by m ovi ng th em in a str a i ght lin e, sh owi n g h o w f ar ap art ( Cr o ss) .

S tretch
ou t the ar m , at th e s am e ti m e p l ace the foren ger on th e
sh oulder ( Zeig ler ) .

In th e sen se o f L o n g , i n extent .

Push the open ed ri gh t h a nd , p al m tow a rd the left fro m the lower p art ,

of the chest upw a rd to a bout a foot a bove th e he a d ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Deaf mute n a t ur a l sig ns By movin g the h a nds a p art ( Ba l l ar d)

-

S tretch o ut both a r m s in a str ai ght lin e .

In the sen se of W i d e .

( 1 ) E lbo ws close to side fore a r m a n d open attened h a nds exten ded

, ,

p al ms fa ci n g an d ne arly to uchi ng e ach other ; ( 2 ) sep ar a ted in propor

tion to the degree of widt h to be re p resented ( Chey e nne I ) . .

( 1 ) H a nds exten ded to f ron t of body , Ope n to fullest exten t , but

n gers an d thu m bs con ti guous p al m s u p , little n gers of e a ch h an d ,

touchin g ; ( 2 ) gr a du al ly m o ved a p a rt in proportion to the size o f the

surfa ce to be represen ted ( C hey enn e I ) . .

B rin gboth h an ds t o the front o f t h e body , on the s a m e level an d

close together n g ers an d thu m bs e xtended , p al m s dow n w ard ( W ) ,
,

n gers po in tin g forw a rd , w ith both h a n ds o n the sa m e level m ak e a ,

sidewise m ove m en t with the left to n e a rly it s a r m s full extent , but only .

m ove the ri gh t a few in ches ( Da ko ta I ) . .

This sign rese m bles th a t for B i g i n the sen se of F l a t ( Da ko ta I ) , . .

A bro a d , level piece o f l a n d .

B oth h an ds brough t togeth er in front o f bre a st , w ith a curv e d m o

tion , h a n ds horizon t al at , p al m dow n w ard ( W ) E n ds of n gers
,
.

poi n tin g tow ard the fron t a re then c arried out sidewi se , w ith a curved
d own w ard m otion t o their n a tur al positions ( Da ko ta I ) Coverin g a . .

l arge surface .

Pl a ce both a t h a nds side by side before t h e bre a st p al m s d own t hen

-

, ,

p a ss the m horizont al ly o utw a rd to w a rd their re specti ve sides ( Dako ta .

VI VII )
, .

De af m u te n a tur a l sign Pu t the p al m s of t h e h an ds ne ar e ach other

-

an d then m ove the m f ar a p a rt ( Ba l lar d ) .

 39

B ir d .

The h and s a r e ap p e d n e ar th e shoulders I f specic a tion be re .

.

quired , the cry is i m it a ted o r so m e peculi arity is in t roduced ( Bur ton ) .

( 1 ) B oth h a n ds open to fullest ex t en t , p al m s do w n w ard , brou gh t to

level o f an d a g a in st the chest, foren ger poin ti n g a w ay fro m chest ; ( 2 )
pushed for w ard a n d dow n w a rd an d w ith dr aw n w ith a curve m otion , as

the m otion of w in gs i n yin g ( C hey enne I ) . .

The fron t outlin e w ill represen t the si gn B oth ar m s ar e elev ated .

an d exed a t right a n gles t o the shoulders the a r m s a r e th e n m ade t o ,

diverge an d i n position W m a de to a p or w a ver to an d fro m the body

,

a fter th e m a nner o f the w in gs of a bird ur i I ) Th at

( O to a n d M i sso . .

h a s win gs or ies by the m .

'

B i so n , b u a lo .

T h e t w o f o re n g e r s ar e pl a ced ne a r t h e e a rs proj ectin g so , ,

as to
repre sen t the h orn s of the an i m al
( L o ng )
.

R aise the f o r e ng e r s crook ed in w ard ,

in the se m bl a nce of horn s ,
on

both sides o f t h e he ad ( b ur to n ) . .

L o werthe he a d a n d proj ect the f o r e ng e rs fro m their respecti ve sides

of the he a d li k e h orn s ( A r ap a h o I )
,
. .

B oth h a n d s to o r tow a rd the sides o f the he a d foren ger

e l e va t e d of
'

.
,

e a ch croo ked obliq uel y forw ard to represen t horn s ( C h eyenne I ) . .

B othh a nds tigh tly close d , le avin g the f o r e n g e r s only extended a n d

curved ; pl a ce t h e sts before t he ches t a bout ten in ches a p a rt p al m s
'

, ,

fa cin g an d f o r e ng e r s a bove
, ( A bsar o ka I ; S h osh o ni and Bana k I )
. .

H orn s .

Bo t h
h a nds r a ised to the sides o f the he ad in fron t of e ars b ack o f ,

h a nd s loo k in g forw a rd f o r e n g e r s croo ked b a c k w ard , rest of n gers

,

clos e d th u m b restin g o n secon d n ger ( Da ko ta I ) H orn s o f the

,
. .

buff alo .

B oth
h a nd s closed except tb r e u g e r a n d then a pplied to e ach te m ple , ,

w ith the l a tter p o in t in g a li ttle forw ard ( Da ko ta Horn s of a n i m al . .

S e m i e x
the f o re n g e r s, loosely close the others th u m bs ei ther un der
-

the m i dd le n gers o r a g ain st the m an d pl a ce the h an ds upri ght , b ack s ,

outw a rd , on e on e ach side o f the he ad ne a r it or a g ain st it a bove an d , ,

j ust in fron t o f the e a rs then m ove the h an ds suddenly forw a rd a couple

,

o f i n ches ( D a ko ta
. IV )

The horn s of the bu f.fa lo
.

All the di gi ts of both h a n ds are co m pletely exed excep t the f o re n

ger s an d the se ar e slightly curved ; e a ch h a nd , b ac k outw a rds a n d held
,

obli q uely out w ard s an d up w ards , is brough t i n co n t act with the te m ple
 40

of s am e side at the w rist ( M andan

th e . an d .
H ida tsa I)
.
Thu s the
h orn s o f the a n i m a l a r e indic ated .

S am e si gn as for C a ttl e .
( O to
Bothh an ds a ttened sli ghtly arch ed , an d exed at t h e w r ist s, are
, ,

h eld as hi gh as th e e ars an d over the sh oulders poin tin g b a c k w ards ,

then in clin e t h e h e a d to th e fron t an d quick ly th row t h e h an d s up w ard

a short dist a n ce ( K a i o wa I ; Co m a nche I II ; Ap ache I I ; Wichi ta II )
. .

The h u m ped shoulders an d m otion of the an i m al .

B i so n , G e n eric .

C lose both h and s loosely exten din g an d crook in g the ,

i Or e n g e r s,
pl a ce the m sever a l in ches fro m either te m ple ( Ute .

B u ff alo
c a lf .

Pl a ce the sts u prigh t b a ck s outw ard , with t h e th u m b s stron gly ex

,

tended a bove the e a rs n e a r the he a d an d sh ak e the m b a ck a n d forth sev ,

er a l ti m es to i m it a te the sh ak in g o f a c a lf s e a rs ( Da ko ta I V )
. .

Sa m e sign a s for B u f f a l o c o w , but m ade as low as the w ai st , a n d

t h e h an ds ar e m oved sl igh tly forw a rd a n d b a c k w a rd ( K a i o wa I ; C o .

m an che III ; Ap ach e Wichi ta II ) .

Fe m a le .

C urve th e t w o f o r e n g e r s, pl ace the m o n the sides o f the he a d an d ,

m ove the m sever a l ti m es Wi ed ) I h a v e g ive n you a si m i l ar si gn f o r

. .

the Bison wi thout regard to se x except t h a t I do n o t m en tion an y -

m otion of th e h and s a fter they a re pl aced in the position o f horn s , an d I

do n ot re m e m ber seei n g such m otion ( M a tthews ) .

Sam e
si gn as m ade by S hosho ni a n d Cr o ws M i l i eu thi s si gn is m a de .

before the perso n it sign ie s both sexes withou t speci a l reference to ,

either ( Ka io w a I ; C o ma n che I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I )

. .

M ale .

Pl a ce
the tigh tly closed h a n ds o n both sides of the he a d with the n
-

gers for wa rd Wi ed ) If h e does n ot m e a n to describe the s am e sign

. .

( m in us the m otion ) a s in Bi so n , f em a le I k n ow n ot w h a t h e does m e a n ,

.

I h a ve seen b ut one sign f o r B u ff a lo ( wh ich I a m cert ai n w as gene r ic ) ,

an d I opi ne th a t on e sig n w a s a ll the Pri n ce saw The m ove m en ts he .

S pe ak s o f in Biso n f e ma le m ay h a ve been un necess a ry o r acciden t a l

, ,
.

A ddi tion a l sign s a r e used to indic ate se x w hen n ecess a ry ( M a t thews ) .

It is con j ectured th a t Wi e d s sign for the M a le buj f a lo in dic ates t he short ,

stub b y horns a nd th at for the Fema le the e a rs seen m ovin g , n ot bein g

, ,

covered by the shock m a ne of the m ale .

B i te , T o .

Thu m b of righ t h a n d extended fore a nd secon d n gers a lso exten ded , ,

j oi ned , an d sligh tly a rched th u m b sep a r a ted fro m n gers ( other nger s
,
 41

closed ) h an d horizont al o r obli quely up w a rds ed ge of h a n d down w a rd ,

, ,

the a r m extended to n e arly full c a p a city in fro nt of right bre a st quic k ly ,

dr a w the ngers ag a in st the thu m b severa l ti m es at the s a m e ti m e dr a w ,

the ar m in tow a rd the b ody ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the sn a ppin g bite of

. .

dogs The t wo j a ws i n m otion

. .

Bl a n k e t . Se e C l o t h i n g .

Bl in d .

First to uch the closed eyes wi th the tips of the e xtended fore an d
s e co nd n gers of r ight h a n d b ac k u p wa rd ( other n gers closed ) then
, ,

turn the h a n d an d m ak e the si gn for S e e i n g as con t ained i n L oo k

a n d then the sign for No n e or I h a v e n o n e as cont a ined i n No n e .

( D a ko ta I )

I h a ve n o si gh t
. .

B l oo d .

Righ t h an d with th u m b exten ded an d p oi n tin g up w ard n gers ex ,

te nded a n d sep a r a ted a s m uch a s possible an d poi ntin g obli quely u p

w ard an d dow n w a rd is brough t alon g the body in l ron t t o the m o n t h ,
,

where i t is c arried for w ard f o r a fe w i n ches wi th a dow n w ard cu r ved

m otion b a c k o f h a nd tow ard the ri ght
, ( D a ko t a

Fro m a b uff alo .

w hen seriously wounded st a nd in g a n d spirtin g blood fro m the m outh

o r n ose

.

Both h a n ds w ith n gers coll ec t ed at the p al m poi nts a re brough t to

t h e te m ples The n gers ar e th en suddenly ippe d ou t w ard T h e ri ght
. .

ar m is then elev a ted an d the index n g e r a n d thu m b brough t t o the n ose -

an d m ade to drop i n j er k s t o th e ground ri I ) Th at

( O to a n d M isso u . .

w hich puls a tes in the te m ples an d drops fro m the n ose .

C lose the ri ght h a n d le a vin g the in dex an d secon d n ger s only ex

,
~

te nded then dr a w the p a l m ar surface a cross th e lips fro m left to righ t

,
.

( Ka io zca I ; C o ma nche I l l ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichita II ) .

B o a t , row .

M ak e with both h an ds r a ised to the level o f the shoulders the for w ard
an d b ack w ard m otion s as thou gh rowin g a bo a t ( Da ko ta .

Brin g the h a n ds together hollowed little n gers j oinin g the thu m bs

, , ,

fa rther a p art to represent the body of a boa t hel d before the bre a st
, , .

( Om a h a I ) .

C an oe .

Both h a nds at the s a m e side o f bo d y , o n e above the other , m ak e the

m ove m en t o f usin g a p a ddle rst a t o n e side o f the b o d y a n d then a t
the other ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the m a nner o f usi ng the o ars a n d p addle
. . .

M ak e the m oti on of p addlin g .

( I r o quo is I )
.

B od y .

The h a nds with the ngers poin ted to the lo wer p a rt of the body ar e

then dr aw n up w ards ( Du nbai x) .

6
 42

Both h a nds , b a ck s out wa rd c arelessly lower ed to fron t an d sides of

.

t h igh s , f o r e n g e rs extended tips sl igh tly touchin g the thi ghs , then dr a w
,

ra pi dly up w a rd a lon g the sides of the bod y a nd o u t tow ard the shoulders ,
.

( C h ey e nn e I ) .

B oi l i n g .

( Dako ta
I

Same as t he si gn for r e , he a t bein g th e ide a . I) .

B ol d . Im pruden t ;
ra sh .

Bold is in cl uded i n B r a ve R a shness or i m prudence c a n n ot be sep a ra

.

t e d fro m B r a ve a s t h e distin ction is too n e a o n e for the Indi a n s

,

co m prehen sion ( Da ko ta I ) . .

B oo k .

Pl ace the righ t p a l m upon the left p al m , an d then open both befor e
th e fa ce .
( Bur to n )
"
( 1 ) Both h a nds brou gh t to re adin g d ist a n ce a nd m ade to represen t a

a boo k open or m uch as it would b e w hile h o l din g it in the h an d a n d

re a din g little n gers n ot to uchi n g ; ( 2 ) m otion m ade wi th the fa ce an d

,

eyes a s though i nten tly re a din g ( C h ey enne .

M e w ith the ri ght h a n d a t the right side o f the body the m ove
ak .

m ents of u sin g the pen i n wri t in g a n d t h e n c a rry the h a n d to the fron t ,

of the bre a sts , w here the left h an d is h eld horizon t a l with n gers
extended poin tin g outw a rd p al m up w a rd ( X) , an d close t h e right h a nd
, ,

w ith p a l m dow n, n gers exte nded St e ( W ) o n the left as t h oug lr ,

.
, ,

closi n g a n open boo k First p art of the si gn den otes w r i ti ng ( Da ko ta

. .

I ) Fro m the act of closin g a n open book

.

.

Both r m s ar e elev a ted a nd sem i extended with the h ands Open a n d

a -

p ar allel before t h e fa ce ; p al m s up w ard ; the eyes d i recte d in t en tly there

i n The righ t h a n d i s then r a ised an d t urn ed i nto a m odi ed position
.

( II ) an d see m i n gly writes i n the open p a l m of the left T he h ands a re

,
.

th en r e ap p r o x im a t e d i n position ( X) before the fa ce a n d appro a ch an d

diverge as i n the open i ng an d cl osin g o f a boo k s le a ves The thick nes s
.

i s indic at ed by hol din g the right h an d at the desired dista n ce a bove

th e left open ( O to a nd ilf isso a r i I )
,
. S o m ethin g w ri tten th a t open s .

a n d close s fro m w hich we re a d

.

B on e .

M ak ethe si gn f o r the a ni m a l t o w hi ch the bone belon gs an d then ,

touch th e p a rticul ar p art or pl a ce in the body to which the bone belon gs .

( Da ko ta I ) L oc a tin g the bone

. .

B o rn , T o b e .

th e left h a n d in fron t o f the bo d y a li ttle to the ri gh t the p al m

Pl a ce , ,

down w a rd an d sligh tly a rched ; p a ss the exten ded righ t h a n d down

iva rd forw a rd an d u p w a rd for m i n g a short curve un derne a th t h e left
, , , .

( Da ko ta V )

This i s b a sed upon the curve follo wed by the he a d of
.
 43
'

the ch ild durin g bir th an d i s u sed gener ica l ly Th e sign with a ddition s ,
,
.
-

e
m a n s
fa ther
o
m t her
gr a n d p a ren
,
t
b u t its expurg ated for m
,

,

a m on g the French de a f m u tes m e a n s p ar ent a ge generic ally for which

-

,

ter m there is a speci a l si gn reported fro m our Indi a n s S e e P a re n t .

a ge ( Do dg e) .

Pa ss
the at ri gh t h a n d d o w n w ard forw a rd a n d up w ard i n fron t , ,
of

the lower portion o f the abdo m en a n d p ubis ( Da ko ta V I ) . .

Pa ss the righ t h and n atur ally rel axe d d ow n w a rd fro m t h e lower p a r t

.
, ,

of the ch e st f o r w a rd fro m the pubis an d up ward a short distan ce for m

, , ,

i n g a curve with the con vexi ty dow n w a rd ( Ka i o wa I ; Co m a nch e I II .

Ute I ; Ap ache II ; Wichi ta I I ) .

H old t h eextended left h an d t r an sv ersely i n fron t o f the lower portion

of the abdo m en a bou t ei gh t i n ches in fron t o f it an d sli ghtl y a rc hed ,
, ,

t hen p a ss the a t ri gh t h a nd down w a rd between t h e body an d th e l e ft

h a n d for w a r d a nd sli gh tly up w a rd bey on d i t ( Ap a che I ) The left
,
. .

h an d represen ts the pubi c arch the ri gh t the curve of C a ru s ,

.

B ot t l e .

Den ote the size of the bottle o n the upheld left fore ar m by dra win g
a cross the ed ge o f the righ t h a nd with n gers extended an d p a l m

down w ard a nd then m ak e the si gn f o r Dr i n k i n g ( Da ko ta I )

, . .

Fro m drin k in g out of a bottle .

The left ar m i s se m i exten ded before the body an d the h an d is h eld

-

up wi th the n gers collected u p an d dow n as in ( E m ore h orizon t a l ; the

i n de x an d thu m b m ak e a circle A s m all b ottle is r e presen ted by the
righ t i ndex exten ded s a w in g on th e knuck le j oi nt o f the left in dex ( O to -

a nd l l isso ar i I )
i
/

The sh ape an d gr a sp of the bottle

. .

B o w we a pon
, .

'

The left h an d bein g a li ttle extended , the right h an d touches i t an d

m a k es the m oti on of dr a w in g t he cord of the bow ( Dunbar ) .

T h e h a nd s are pl a ced as in th e a ttitude of d ra win g the a rrow in the

bo w .
( L o ng )
Dr a w the ri ght ar m b ac k co m pletely as if dr a w in g the b o w st rin g , ,
-

w hile the l eft ar m i s extended wit h clin ched h a nd There is -

.

a si m il a rity o f con cep tion i n the si gn given by m e

( O to a nd M isso ur i I )
an d Wied s but in execution the l a tter represents a l m ost i den tic a lly the

,

th e O to si gn for To sh oot a n A r r o u ( Bo te le r ) r
. .

M ak e th e m ove m en t of ben d in g i t . ( Ba r to n )

( 1 ) L efth a n d sli gh tly closed a s though gr aspin g bow an d m idd le ,

n ger of right h a nd within three o r four i n ches o f the left h an d a nd

a pp a ren tly gr a spin g a stri n g
; ( 2 ) dr a w n tw o o r three ti m es in i m it a tion
o f dr awin g a bow strin g ( C h ey enne I ) -
. .
 44

Dr a w b a c k the righ t h an d fro m th e left h eld in fron t o f the body , ,

as

though dra win g b ac k th e arro w xed i n the strin g of th e bow .

( Dak o ta Fro m th e dr a w in g of the bow

.

Incline the h e a d a li ttle to w a rd the ri ght ; r a ise the ne a rly closed left
h a nd b a c k ou t w a rd to the h ei ght o f the sh oulder , n e arly a t a r m s
,

len gth for w a rd a nd while p ush in g the left h a nd a he a d and a little to

,

w a rd the left d ra w the n e a rly closed ri gh t h a n d , it s b ack ou tw a rd fro m

,

ne ar i t b a c k w a rd a n d t ow a rd ri ght as i f dr a win g the bow ( Da ko ta IV ) ,

. .
.

The left st b a ck forw ard t hu m b u p w a r d i s held a foot o r t wo in fron t

, , ,

of the chest as if gr aspin g a h o w The ri gh t h a n d wi t h t hu m b u pw ard , .

,

the n ger tips forw a rd an d t wo o r m ore o f the m in con t act with the
thu m b ( position of h oldin g the strin g ) , is hel d a fe w i n ches behi n d the
left h a n d Then a slight m oti on b a c k w a rds o t th e ri gh t h an d m ay o r
'

m ay n ot be m ade ( M a n dan a n d H ida tsa I ) . .

The left ar m w as then sli ghtly ben t a n d extended antero l a ter ally fro m
the bod y In th is position i t is m ad e to rese m ble the sh ape o f a bow
. .

The positi on of the h a nd is v a ri able an d un i m port an t but i t is gener ally ,

clin ched as i n prob a bly to represen t the h old i n g of th e bow stri n g, -

a s i t i s a l w a ys secured a t the en d o f the h o w The righ t h a n d is .

so m eti m es a pproxi m a ted as in se t tiu g a n a rro w ( O to a nd M isso ur i I )

, . .

The sh a pe o f the bow an d i t s u se .

To d r a w the .

The h a nd s a r e held a s in the si gn f o r B o w , then the ri gh t h a nd is

m oved b ac k w a rds a foot o r m ore a s in th e ac t of dr a win g a bow (Hi .

da tsa I ) .

To shoot or k ill w ith the .

H old the left st , b a c k outw a rd , n e a rly a t a r m s len gth forw a rd , poin t

t ow a rd i t wi th the ri gh t i ndex p a l m i n w a rd fr o m in fron t of t he right

, ,

shoulder ; then drop the left h an d an d a fter h oo k i n g the ri ght th u m b

o ver the n gers of ri ght h a n d sudden ly let the m y forw ard ( Da ,
.

k o ta IV ) .

B ow l .

Sa m e as th e sig n fo r K e t t l e , except the l a tter p ar t of the si gn ih

d ica t in g pl a ci n g i t on the re .
( Da ko ta I ) .

The distin cti on i s n ot a ne on e between K e t t le B ucket C up Bowl , , , ,

B a si n & c a n d ei ther o f the m m ay be in dic ated i n the s a m e si gn but

,
.
, ,

the connect i on in which the si gn i s used is gener ally sufcien t t o de n ote

-

t h e p a rticul ar a rticle to which referen ce is m a de ( Da ko t a I )

Fro
m . .

it s use .

Design a te si ze of bo x on the upheld l eft a rm b y d r a win g the edge of

th e ri g h t h a nd over it w ith extended n gers an d then both a r m s ex ,

ten ded in fron t of body h a n ds horizon ta l n gers extended b a c k s out

, , ,

w a rd to the sid e s a r e held o n th e le vel of the bre a st ( Da ko ta

.
.

,
S i ze .

of the box .

B o y . S ee C hi l d .

B ra v e .

C lose
the sts p l a ce the left ne a r the bre a st an d m ove the right ov er
, ,

the left to w a rd the left side ( Wi ecl ) A m otion so m ethin g li k e this , . .

which I do n ot n o w d isti n ctly rec all a sort of w ren ch in g m otion w i th

the sts in fro nt o f the ches t I h a ve seen u sed for S t ro n g If Wi ed s .

sign m a k er s h a nd rst struc k the region over the he art ( as he m ay h a ve

-

done ) he would then h a ve in dic ated a stron g he a rt which is the ,

eq uiv alen t f o r B ra v e ( lf a t the ws ) . i .

.
C linch the right st , an d pl a ce it to the bre a st .
( A bsa r o ka I ; Sho
sho ni a n d B a na k
Bothh a n ds st ; the left ( A ) m oved up close to th e bod y to t h e hei ght
of the chin a t t h e s am e ti m e the righ t is brou gh t up an d throw n over
,

the left ( as it is m oved up ) w ith an ou tw a rd an d d own w ard curved m o

t ion ; the left h a n d is c a rried up w a rd a nd do wn w a rd an d the m ove m en t
o f t h e righ t reversed two or three ti m es E n du r a n ce i s expressed by .

this sign an d i t is connec t ed w ith the sun d a nce tri a ls of the youn g m an
,
-

in testin g his br a very a nd powers of end u r a n ce before a d m ission to the

r an k s of th e w arriors ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Push
the two sts forw a rd abou t a foot at the heigh t of the bre as t , ,

the righ t a bout two i nches beh ind the left , p a l m s i n w ard ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

The h a nds push al l before the m .

The righ t ar m is exed a n d elev a ted ; the h a n d is then pl a ced over

left eye m uch i n type position ( B ) It is then twisted fro m left t o ri ght
-

across forehe a d u n til a t righ t side of he a d w hen the m otion stop s w ith

sts p al m outw ard s Th a t i s re adily u n woun d A s g o o d wi l l ( O to I )

.
, . .

S tri k e the b r e a st j g e n t l y w ith the p a l m a r side o f the right st .

( Wy
and o t I)
.

St ri ke the clinched st forcibly tow ard the groun d in front of an d ne a r

th e bre ast ( A r i ka r a I )
. .

is t h e br a vest o f al l
He .

R ai se ri gh t h a nd n gers exten ded , p a l m d own w a rd ( JV

,
swin g
it aroun d over poin t t o the m an ( g r a ise left st ( A 1 , .

ch an ged to left an d p al m in w ard ) to a poin t i n fr on t of a nd ne a r t h e

body close n gers ( of righ t h a n d an d pl a ce the st ( A 2 p al m i n w ard )
, ,

between left st an d i body an d then w ith violent m ove m en t throw i t

 46

over left st as t h ou gh bre ak in g so m eth i n g an d stop at a poin t in fro n t

, ,

of a nd little below l eft st an d l a stly poin t u pw a rd with ri gh t h a n d , ,

a h ap ti n I ) f h ere h e stron gest

i
( g .
( S O al l s . .

The right st p al m dow n w a rd i s struc k a g ai n st the bre a s t severa l

, ,

ti m es a n d the i ndex i s then q uic k ly elev a ted before the face poin tin g
, ,

upw ard ( Ap a che .

O nly by sh owi n g willi n gness to ght .

( Ap ache III ) .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sign To run forw a rd w ith

-
a bold expression of

the counten a n ce ( L ar so n ) .

Pa nto mime N o t to r un b a ck but to run forw a rd .

( Zeig ler )

B r a ve .

H oldr m l y closed l eft h a n d abou t ei gh t in ches in fron t of cen tre of
body left fore a r m h ori zont al poin tin g to right a n d fron t b a ck of left
, , ,

h an d verti c al an d 01 1 l in e of prolon ga tion o f fore a rm ; bri n gin g th e r m ly

,

closed righ t h a n d so m e six in ches a bove an d a little i n fron t of left h an d ,

bac k to ri gh t a n d fron t a n d o n lin e of fore a r m ; stri k e down w ard w i th ,

right h a n d m ostly by elbow a ction t h e secon d j oi nts o f righ t h a n d

, ,

p assin g close t o an d a bout o n a line wi th k n uck les of left h a nd .

I believe th ere i s n o gesture in the Indi a n si gn l a n gu a ge th a t is a s -

exi ble an d possesses as m u ch stren gth an d ch ar acter in its m e an i n g a s

this for w h en added to oth er si gn s i t inten si es their description
, , ,

wonderfull y ; a dds i n fa ct t h e superl a tive to every ide a ; gi ves heroic

, ,

ch ar acter t o br a very ; a rr an t cow a rdice to ti m idity ; m a k es a n ordin a ry

me al a fe a st an d of a f a st st a rv a tio n ple a sure beco m es bliss an d c a re
, , ,

most bitter sorrow Poin tin g t o a m an and m ak in g th is sig n w ou ld .

con vey to an Indi a n s m in d t h e i de a th a t he wa s br a ve fe a rless ; a nd ,

thi s to the m is the hi gh est , m ost perfect v irtue an d cre a tes n o t only
, , , ,

respect b ut positi ve reveren ce

, .

The f o re g o iug is q uoted fro m an ar ticl e in the Uni ted Ser vice for J uly ,

1 880, w ri tten b y a n a uthor who a ccordin g to hi s stron g expressions , i s ,

obvi ously af icted wit h a theory o f a stereotype an d un i vers a l sign l an -

gu a ge am on g th e In di a n s w hi ch i s su pported by h is a vowedly t ak in g ,

m e a n s of si gn s H is description s a r e therefore li able to so m e of the

.

c aution a ry re m ar k s in th e In troductory L etter to thi s p a m p h le t b u t as ,

i t is h i g h ly i nterestin g t o a scert a in t h e use of a n in ten si ve o r s u perl a t ive

si gn th e q uot a tion is printed to a ttr a ct the a tten tion o f corresponden ts
, .

If they m eet wi th or can rec all the preci se sign a s a bove descri b ed an d
, ,

in t h e s am e ex a ct sen se t hey will ple a se st a te the tribe a n d al l p a rtien,

l a rs . S o m ethin g li k e this si gn with so m e rese m bl a n ce to its u se a s a n ,

i n ten sive a ppe a rs elsewhere in thi s p aper , bu t not with th e si gni c a tion
,

of br a ve u n der wh ich he a d i t w as gi ven by th e a uthor an d therefore

,

is so pl a ced here .
 47

B re a d .

C o m bine si gns for F l o u r an d F i re .

( A r a p ah o I ) .

Both h a nds i n fron t of body sts b a c k s obliq uely do wn w ard p ush u p

, , ,

a n d dow n sever a l ti m es as though k ne a d in g the dou gh a n d then a t a ,

higher elev a tion both h a nds one a bo ve the other a bout 8 inches h ori
, .

zo nt a l , left h a nd below b a c k down w a rd ( X) ri gh t h a n d abo ve b a c k

, ,

u pw ard ( W ) ch an ge the positi ons of the h a nds ( W t ak in g the pl a ce o cc u

pied by X ) two or three ti m es ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m th e p a c k in g and
. .

sh apin g o f the lo a f .

T he right h an d bei n g a bout a foot i n fron t of the chest op ened an d ,

rel a xed poin tin g obliquely forw a rd tow ard the left quic k ly thro w t h e
,
,

left h an d , p a l m down w a rd , a nd l ay it across the righ t then r a pidly sep ar ,

a t e th e h a n ds a n d turn in g the p al m of the left upw a rd an d the righ t

,

down w ard l ay the righ t a cross the left Repe at thi s m a neuver sever al
,
.

t i m es .
( D a k o t a I V )

For .m in g a piece o f dough in to a c a ke o r lo a f
.

H a rd ;
cr a ck ers & c ,
.

A fter m ak in g the rst p art o f the a bove si gn c arry the left h a n d in ,

fron t o f the left bre a st w ith ngers extended j oined at h O I izo n t al , , ,

e n ds of n gers forw a rd , a n d the ed ge o f the right h a nd with n gers

exte n ded is dra wn across the p al m o f the left at proper dist a nces cross
w ise ( Da ko ta I )
. .

B re a k .

Both h a nds b rough t o n e a bove the other a rou n d to fron t of body ,

closed a s though gr aspin g s m all stic k an d sudden ly turned in opposi te ,

d ir e c t io n s t o i m i t a te bre a k in g ( C hey enn e I ). .

The exten ded foren ger o f both h a n ds ( J 1 ) m eeti n g a t their tips i n

fron t o f body , p al m s in w ard an d then sep a ra te the n gers by an outw ard
,

m ove m en t as thou g h bre a k in g a nythin g in two ( Da ko ta I )

Fro m . .

the bre a k in g o f a twi g .

The sts bein g n e a r together d ire cted for w ard an d b ac k s up w ard

,

t urn the outer sides do w n w a rd a s if bre ak i n g a stick ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

W ith both h a n d s pl a ced si d e by side thu m bs touchin g thro w the m , ,

outw a rd a n d dow nw a rd a s if bre a k in g a stic k ( Da ko ta VI VI I ) .

,
.

Both sts ( b ack s up w ard , k n uc k les for w a rd thu m bs o n e o r two in ches ,

a p a rt ) a r e held a t a co m m on level si x o r m ore i nches i n fro n t o f the

chest then si m ult an eously the fore a r m s ar e se m i rot ated so as t o brin g

,
-

t h e thu m bs upper m ost O ther m eth ods of bre ak in g h a ve other sign s

.

t o represent the m ( M an d an a nd H i da tsa I )

. .

The ar m s a re un ifor m ly exed a nd the h a nds in type posi tion ( B ) -

a pproxi m a ted before the bod y The h a nds a re t h us p a l m s do w n w a rd s

. .
 4s

The sign i s co m pleted by turnin g the m over to w ard s th e side as in

regul arly bendin g or bre a k in g a stic k S ign ends with p al m s up . .
( O to

S o m eth in g torn a p a rt .

B oth h an d s closed p a l m s down thu m bs touchin g then throw both

, , ,

d own w a rd an d ou tw a rd tow a rd thei r respecti ve sides a s i f bre a k in g a

,

Stic k If this gesture is a cco m p a n i e d by a m ove m en t o f the body for

.

w a rd a n d fa ci a l a cco m p a n i m en t of exertio n it represen ts gre a ter

, ,

destruction by bre ak in g o r the i ncre a sed req uire m ent o f stren gth to
b re a k th e obj ect r eferred to Ute I ; Ap ache I ) . .

S ei ze i m a gin ary obj ect , h old i t i n two sts ( A p a l m down ) turn

an ,

st s outw ard a nd p a l m s u p ( bro k en )

-

( Ap a che I I I ) . .

Deaf m a te na tur a l sig na Cli nch the h a n ds and turn th e m as i n the

-

ac t o f bre ak i n g a stic k ( Ba l la r d ) .

Use the sh ut h an ds as if to bre ak a stic k .

( H asensta b ) .

Nod the he ad slowly w ith the upper teeth rested o n the lower li p
an d the eyes Opened w idely to express a ston i sh m en t a n d a t the sa m e
'

, ,

ti m e u se the shut h an d wi th the fore n ger up a s if to give a w a rn in g

, ,

a nd then u se the shut h a nds as if to bre ak so m eth in g ( H a se nsta b ) . .

Pl a ce the sts togeth er a n d sud d enly r aise the m a p a rt for m in g

,
an

a n gle ( eith er ri ght o r obtuse ) ( L ar so n) .

To use both sh ut h a nds as if to bre ak a stick .

( Zeig le r )
Br o ke n .

Twist o ff left fore n g er with right fore n ger a nd thu m b .

( Apach e
I II .

B ree ch c l o t h
-
.

Pa ss the at h a nd fro m bet wee n the legs u pw a rd tow a rd the belly .

( Wi ed ) This si gn i s still in u se a m on g these Indi a n s ( M a tt he ws ) . .

M eta phoric ally spe a k in g there i s id en tity w ith Wie d s si gn an d m i ne

.

O to a n d M i sso ur i I ) In the l a tter the sign i s given for the thin g sig
( .
,

n ie d By the Prince o f Wied the conception is the a rticle itself

. By .

the O to th a t which i n v a ri a bl y a cco m p a n ies a n d supp orts it ( B0 te le r )

,
. .

Dr a w the opened right h a nd p al m ,

up w ar d ,
'

b e t we e n the legs fro m

behin d for w ard ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

B oth r m s were exed a nd so m e wh a t r a ised a t the sides ; the h a nd s,

a

then i n p osi tion ( K ) i n verted a r e brou gh t to the pro m i nen ces of t h e

, ,

hi ps Th e h a nd s ar e th en brought aroun d to the pubi s in a n a ppro ac h

.

i n g l i ne a n d there twist cd over e ach other as in tyin g a k not The

-

,
.

m ove m en t in thi s si gn represen ts the ty in g o f the cord th a t p a sse s

a rou n d o ver the hi p s to su p p o r t the breec h clot h ( O to a nd M isso uri I ) -
.
.
.

T h a t w hich i s tied o n with a cord at the hips .

 49

B r id l e .

The extended f o re n g e r o f both h a nd s ( all others closed ) ( M ) m eetin g ,

a t their tips a r e pl a ced b a ck s a g a in st an d covering the m outh thi s i s

(
the bi t ) an d then sep a r a ted dr a wn u p w ard a lon g their respecti ve sides
,

o f t h e f ace in fron t o f the e ars un til they m eet a t t h e b a c k p a rt o f the

to p o f the he a d ( D a ko ta I )

. Fro m the we a rin g o f the bridle
.

.

Both h n ds wi th extended
a , in ( K ) o n the top of the i ndices as ,
m eet

he ad a n d describe a l ine dow n the sides of the fa ce the n m eet i n the ,

ce n t e r o f th e m outh an d diverge ( O to a nd rl f i sso zrr i I ) The position

. .

of t he s a m e o n a n i m a l s he ad
.

B r in g to m e . Se e G i ve .

B r o a d , W id e . S ee B i g i n the sen se of W id e .

B ro th e r ; b ro th er an d si s e r t . S ee R e l a t i o n sh i p .

B roo m .

B oth h a nd s j oined i n fron t o f the sto m a ch b ac k s out w ard n gers

, ,
-

exten ded an d poin ti n g obli quely d own w a rd m ak e a pushin g forw a rd ,

an d b a c k w a rd m ove m en t fro m the wrists a s thou gh brushin g or push

in g d irt before the broo m ( Da ko t a I )

Fro m the m a n ner of u sin g
. .
s

their pri m i ti ve brush broo m .

B ul l .

First m ak e at t h e sides o f th e he a d the horn s of the a n i m a l by croo k

i n g b a ck w a rd the i ndex n g e r s a n d the n m ak e the sign f o r NI a l e
-

a pplied to a n i m a ls w hich i s the s a m e a s a pp l ied t o hu m a n bein gs

,
.

( D a ko ta
Den otin g t h e se x o f the an i m al .

B ull e t .

M e the sign of the explodin g of the powder then gr a sp th e fore

ak ,
.

n ger of the h a nd w ith the re m a in in g n gers a nd th u m b so th a t the ,

tip o f it w ill so exten d beyon d the m as to represen t th e b a ll ( L ong ) .

(1) M ak ethe si gn for B a l l ( 2 ) fore nger a n d thu m b o f right h a n d

u sed a s i n the ac t o f gr a sping so m e s m all object in fron t o f the fa ce an d ,

between it a nd l e f t h an d which represen ts a h a lf circle by m e a n s o f the

,

m iddle n ger a n d th u m b ; ( 3 ) foren ger of righ t h a n d suddenly extended

a n d pu shed through the i m a gi n a ry circle o f which the m i ddle n ger a n d

thu m b o f t h e left h a nd for m s one h a lf ( Ch ey en ne I ) -

. .

Leit h a n d hoo k ed ( G ) ne arly closed ; 5 e le a vi n g a s m a ll circul ar

,

. .
,

openin g thu m b restin g on the b a c k s of t h e 2 d a nd 3 d ph al an ges o f a ll

,
.

the n gers is held horizont a l in fro n t of the left bre a st wi t h b ac k to

, ,

w ard the left ( this represents the b arrel o f a gun ) then the i n dex a nd ,

thu m b o f the right exten ded a nd ne a rly j oined a t tips as though holdin g
 50

a roun d bullet between the m ( this is th e bullet ) is c arried t o t h e l e it ,

- -

h an d an d the n gers rel a xed as thou gh pl a cin g the bu llet in the circul a r
open in g an d then stri k e dow n o n t h e l e f t h a nd wi th the ed ge of the
, ,

ri gh t st ( A 1 ) as thou gh d r ivm g th e bullet h o m e This sig n is th a t f o r .

lo a din g a gun ( Da ko ta I ) . .

B ur n .

To destroy .

M ove th e ri g h t h an d ( F) in fron t o f the b o dy as thou gh throwin g

so m eth in g forw a rd a n d then m ak e the sign for F i r e ( Dako ta I )
, . .

th e body
Of .

Touch the b urn t p art w ith th e righ t in dex a nd then m ak e the si g n

for F i r e ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m re
. . .

B ur y , T o .

Both a t exten d ed h an ds held at ar m s len gth before th e a bdo m en ,

a nd -

ed ges down an d a bout a n in ch or two ap art, thu m bs touchin g ; both

,

h a nd s ar e then throw n outw ard tow ard their respective si des repe a tedly ,
a s if throwin g a w ay fro m their u pper surfa ces so m e li ght subst an ce .

Then reverse the m otion fro m w ithou t in w ard ( Sho shoni an d B a n a k I ) . .

Throwin g u p e a rth fro m a ditch an d returni n g it ,

.

B u y . Se e T ra de .

C a m p .

Cl in ch both h a nd s h old the m up w ard before th e bre asts thu m bs

, ,

touchin g then p a ss them for w ard e ach describin g a se m icircle so th a t

, , ,

t h e outer edges touch a t the ter m in a tion o f the gesture ( An k a r a I ) . .

C an no n .

Thu m b of t h e right h a nd under th e n gers ; t e , i n the p al m o f the . .

h an d otherw ise st ( B ) ; sn ap out the n gers an d thu m b in fron t of the

,

ri g h t bre a st an d then m ak e the si gn for B i g ( Da ko ta

,

The bi g .

explosion From the s m ok e m a de on the disch a rge o f a c an n on .

C a p , p er c u ssi o n . Se e G u n .

C a p tu r e , To . Se e P r i so n e r , t o t a ke .

C ar d s, p l a y i n g .

( 1 ) L e f t h a nd ful ly
open ed sl a nt an d held up to the le vel an d in fron t , ,

o f the shoulder ; ( 2 ) sudden pec k i n g m otion m a de w it h the p a rti a lly

closed n gers o f the ri ght h a nd ve o r six ti m es tow ards the p al m o f

the open left h an d , as though throwin g c a rds ( Cheyenne I ) . .

Go through the m otion of de a lin g fro m a p a c k of c ards , an d throwin g

o ne e ach t o i m a gin ary pl ayers , right fron t , a n d left ( Da ko ta VI , V I I ) , . .
 51

C a tt le .

First m ak e the si gn for B u ff a l o an d the n the sign for Sp o t te d .

( Da ko t a IV )

S potted bu
. ff a lo
.

B oth r m s are elev a ted to he a d exed The h a nds both ar e brou gh t

a .
, ,

to sides of he a d a t p ariet al rid ge s in posi tion ( K ) an d th us held a minute ; ,

the he ad is then rot ated to t h e se ve ra l si des ( O to I ) A n i m a l wi th

. .

h orn s .

M ak ethe si gn f o r B u f f a l o then exten d the left foren ger and d r a w

,

the extended in de x ac ros s i t repe atedly a t di ff eren t pl aces ( Absar o ka .

I ; S hosho ni a n d Ba na k I ) L iter a lly spotted bu ff alo

.
,
.

To roun d up .

V
Pl a ce the closed h a nds horiz on t ally before the chest le a vin g t he fore ,

n gers curved the n m ak e a beck on in g m otion w ith both si m ult a neously ,

,

the ri gh t m ovi ng over the left a s if hoo k in g a t i m a gin ary st al k s of ,

g r a i n (
. K a to w a I ; C o m a nch e II I ; Ap ach e II ; Wi ch i ta I I )

C attle .

( horn s ) brough t t ogether

.

C h a ir .

Righ t fore ar m exten ded fro m the elbo w at righ t a n gles ( L ) with the ,

h an d st ( A ) w ith b a ck down w ard ( Da ko ta I ) Thi s si gn also den otes

, . .

sit d own Fro m i ts u se

. .

C h a llen ge .

F l or ent in e sig h A st clinched w ith the th u m b thrust

,
out u n der th e
f oren ger .

C h i c ke n co c k , do m estic .

B rin g the thu m b an d ngers o f the ri gh t b a n d together a n d , h oldin g ,

th e h a n d m odera tely elev a ted , m ove it a cross , i m i ta tin g the m oti on o f

the he a d o f a coc k i n w al k in g ( Da nbar ) .
-

( 1 ) S i gn n gers
for B i r d ; ( 2 ) tip s of and thu m b of right h a n d
closed a nd poin tin g down w ard ; ( 3 ) m otion of scr a tchin g an d peck in g
i m it a ted ( C h ey e nne I )
. .

C h ie f , a .

The fore n ger of the ri ght h a n d extended p a ss i t perpendicul arly ,

dow n w ard , then turn it upw a rd , a n d r a ise it i n a ri ght li ne as hi gh as

the he a d ( L o ng ) Risin g above others
. . .

R a ise the i n de x n ger of th e right h a nd , holdi n g it str ai ght up w a rd ,

then turn it in a cir cle a nd brin g i t strai ght down a little tow a rd the ,

e a rth ( Wi ed ) The righ t h an d i s r aised , an d i n posi tion ( J ) desc r ibes a

.

se m icircle a s in begin n in g the a ct of throwin g The ar m i s elev a ted .

p e r f e c t l v erect a side o f the he a d the p a l m o f the i ndex a n d h a n d shou l d

,
 52
.

be outw ards There i s a n eviden t si m i l arity i n both execution a nd co n

.

ce p t io n of this sig n a n d Wied s the l ittle v a ri a tion m a y be the resul t o f

di ff eren t i n terpret ation T h e i de a of superiori ty is m os t pr o m inent in

. .

both A pro m i nent o ne before w ho m a l l succu m b ( Bo tele r ) l l i ed s

. . .

air pictur e re m i nds of the roy a l scepter w i t h i t s sphere

-
.

R aise the fore n ger poin ted u pw a rds , i n a vertic al directi on

, ,
an d then
reverse both nger a nd m otion ; t h e gre a ter the elev a tion the
bi gger
the ch ief ( Ar ap a ho I ). .

( 1 ) S ign for M an ; m iddle ,

third li ttle n ger a nd thu m b slightly
(2) , ,

closed together foren ger poin tin g for ward a nd do w n w ard ; ( 3 ) curved
,

m otio n m a de for wa rd ou tw a rd a n d do wn w a rd , ( C h ey enne I ) He ,

. .

w h o st a nds still an d co mm a nds a s show n by si m il a rity of sign s t o S i t

,

h e r e o r S t a n d h e r e the m a n who sta n ds still a nd directs

, .

The extended foren ger of the ri gh t h a n d ( J ) o f which the other n , .

gers ar e closed , i s r aised to the righ t side o f the h e a d an d above i t as

f ar as t h e a r m c an be exten ded an d then the h a nd i s brought down i n ,

fron t o f the body with the wrist ben t the b a c k of h a n d i n fron t a n d the ,

extended foren ger poi n tin g down w a rd ( Da ko ta I ) Rai sed a bove . .

oth ers .

M ove the u pright a n d ex t ended ri g h t i ndex p a l m forw ard fro m the , ,

sh oulder u p w a rd a s high a s the t o p o f the he a d turn it through a curve , ,

an d m ove i t for w a rd six in ches , an d the n dow n w a rd it s p al m b a c k w ard , ,

to th e hei gh t o f the shoulder ( Da ko ta I V ) A bove a l l o thers . He . .

loo k s over o r a fter u s .

E lev a te the extended index before the sh oulder p a ss i t up w ard a s ,

high as the h ad for m i n g a short curve to the fron t an d down w a rd

e
, ,

a g a i n sli ghtly to the fron t ( Da ko ta VI VII ; H id a tsa I ; A r tkar a

.
,

Right h a nd closed foren ger poin tin g up , r a ise the h a nd fro m the
,

w a ist i n fron t of the body till i t p a sses a bove the he a d ( O m a ha .

A nother si gn B rin g the closed right h a nd , fore n ger poin tin g up on ,

a level wi th the fa ce ; then brin g the p a l m of the left h a n d w ith force

a g a in st the ri g h t fore n ger ; next sen d u p th e rig h t h a n d a bove the

he a d le a vin g the left a s i t is ( O m a ha I )

,
. .

The right ar m is extended by side of he ad , wi th the h an d in posi tion

( J ) The a r m a n d h a nd th en descend the n ger descri bin g a se m ici rcle
.
,

w ith the ar m a s a r a dius The sign stops w ith ar m h a n gin g a t full

.

len g t h ( O to I ) The a r m of a uthority before who m al l m ust fall

. . .

Both h a nds elev a ted to a posi tio n i n fron t of a n d high as the shoul -

d e rs p a l m s fa cin g n gers an d th u m bs spre a d a n d sligh tly cu rved the

, ,

h a nds ar e t h en dr a w n outw a rd a sh o r t d ist an ce tow ar d s thei r respective

sides an d gen tly elev a ted a s high a s the top of the h e a d ( Wy a ndo t .

O n e w ho i s elev ated by other s .

 53

E lev a te the closed h a nd in dex on ly extended a n d p o in t iu g upw a rd

to t h e fron t of the ri gh t side of the fa ce o r nec k o r shoulder p a ss i t ,

q uic k ly upw a rd a n d w hen a s hi gh a s the top o f the he a d direct it for

, ,

w a rd a nd down w a rd a g a i n tow a rd the grou nd ( Kai o zva I ; Co m a n ch e .

1 1 1 ; Ap a ch e II ; Wichi ta II ) .

Close the righ t h an d index r a ised exten ded , an d pl aced before the , ,

bre a st then m ove it forw a rd fro m the m outh , poi n tin g for w a rd u n til a t
, ,

ar m s len gth ( Ute I )

. .

H ea d
chief of tribe .

Pl a ce both a t h a nd s before the body p al m s do wn a nd p a ss the m , ,

horizon tally o utw ard to wa rd their respec t i ve sides the n m ak e the si g n ,

for C h i e f ( A r ikar a I ) C hief of th e w id e region an d those upon i t

. . .

A fter poin tin g o u t the m an point to the groun d all n gers ,

closed except rst ( J l poi n ti ng dow n w a rd i n ste a d of up w ard ) then , ,

poin t up w ard wi th s am e h a nd ( J the n m ove h an d to a poin t in fron t

cf body ( Fig n gers extended p al m down w ard ( W 1 ) an d m ove
.

a roun d in circle over al l I In th is pl a ce he i s he a d

( Sa h ap ti n ) . .

over a l l .

Gr a sp the foreloc k wi th the right h a n d p a l m b ac k w a rd p ass the h a n d , ,

u pw a rd a bout si x in ches an d hold i t i n th a t position a m o m e n t ( Pa i .

Ute I ) .

E le v a te t h e
extended i ndex vertic a lly above a n d in front of the he a d ,
hold in g the left h a nd fore n ger pointin g u p w a rd fro m o ne to two feet
, ,

below a n d u n derne a th the right the positio n o f the left , ei ther ele v a ted ,

o r depr e ssed also den oti ng the rel a ti ve positio n o f th e second indi vi d u al
,

to th a t of th e chief ( Ap a che I ) . .

War H e a d of a w a r p a rty ; Pa rtis a n

. .

First m a k e the si gn of the P i p e ; then open the th u m b and i ndex

n g e r o f the righ t h an d b a c k of the h a nd outw a rd m ovin g it forw ard , ,

a nd up w a rd iu a c u rve ( W ie d ) B y the title of

Pa rtis a n the a uthor
.

m e a nt a s in deed w a s the co m m on expression of the C a n a d i a n v oy

,

a g e ur s a le a der of a n occ a sio na l or vol u nteer w ar p a rty

,
The si gn i s .

expl ain ed by h is account in a diff eren t con n ection th a t to beco m e recog ,

n iz e d a s a le a der of such a w ar p a rty the rst ac t a m on g the tribes ,

usin g the si g n w as the con secr a tion by fa sting succeeded by fe a sti n g , ,

of a m edicin e pi pe wi thout orn a m en t w hich the le a der of the expedition

.

afterw a rd bore before h i m a s his b a dge of a u thority an d i t th erefore ,

n a t ur ally bec a m e an e m ble m a tic si g n T h ere m ay be i n terest i n n oti n g .

th a t the C a l an d ar of the Da k ot a N a t i o n ( Bul leti n U S G a n d G

. . . .

S urvey v ol iii No
,
gives a g ure ( N o 4 3 A I)
. .

,
. showi n g .
,
. .

O n e Fe a ther a S iou x chief w h o r a ised i n th a t ye ar a l arge w a r p a r t y
,

,

a g a i n st the Crows whic h fa ct is si m p ly de n oted by h is holdin g o u t ,

,

d e m on str a tively a n unorn a m en ted pipe ,

.
 54

C o m bine si gn s for C h ie f an d B a ttl e .

( A r ap a ho I ) .

First m ak e the si g n for B a tt le a nd th en th a t for C h i e f .

( Da
ko ta I ) .

First i n b a ttle .

b an d
Of a .

Poi n t the exten de d index for w ard a nd up w a rd before th e ch est th e n ,

pl ace the S pre ad n gers of the left h a nd aroun d the i ndex b u t a t a short ,

distan ce behin d i t al l poi n tin g the s a m e direction A h e a d o f the r e

, .

m a in d e r ( A r ika m I )
. .

Gr a sp the forel ock with the right h a nd p al m b a ck w a rd , a nd preten d ,

to l ay the h a ir down over th e ri ght side of the he ad by p a ssin g the h a n d

i n th at direction Pa i Ute I ) . .

The Fren c h de a f m u te si gn for O r der Co m m a n d m ay be co m p ared

-

, ,

wi th sever a l o f th e a bove sign s In i t the i ndex tip rst touches th e .

lower tip then is r a i sed a bove th e he a d a n d brou gh t dow n w ith vi olen ce

,
.

(L

e nse ig n m e n t p r im a i r e ( Ies so ur ds
-
m uets p ar M P l issi e r
.
'

. Pa r is,

C h i l d ; B a b y ; I n f a n t ; 0 sp r i n g .

B rin g th e n gers a n d th u m b of the ri ght h a n d and pl a ce the m a g a in st

th e li ps then d r a w the m a w a y a n d b ri n g th e ri ght h an d a ga in st th e
,

fore a r m of the left a s i f h old in g a n i n fa nt S hould th e child be m a le .

,

prex the si gn of a m a n be f ore thi s sign an d if a fe m a le , do so by th e ,

Si gn of th e w o m a n ( Du nbar ) .

If a n Indi a n wi shes to tel l y o u th a t a n individ u a l presen t is hi s 0 11

'

sprin g he poin ts to t h e person a n d the n w ith the n ger still exten ded
, , ,

p asses i t for w ard fro m h is loin s in a li ne curvin g do w n w ard , then

sli gh tly u pw ard ( L o ng ) .

P us h the i n dex
r a pidly in to the a ir th en dr a w the h a n d b ack
-
n g e r
down w a rd ( Wied ) The righ t ar m is brou ght up a n d exed to w a rd
.

the body The open h an d then describes a se m icircle dow n w ard a n d

.

o utw ard si m il a r to the curve of C a m s an d s t ops with the h a n d erect , ,

The p al m i s rst tow a rd th e body but at th e co m pletion o f th e sign , ,

ou tw a rd There is n o si m il ari ty between this si gn an d Wied s s a ve i n

.

th e m e thod of in dic a tin g its ag e o r size The up turned p a l m a s in di .

c a tin g speci es w ill n o t obt a in am on g the O tos ( Bo teler ) Th at h a s .

-

been born or co m e forth The dist a n ce fro m th e groun d w hen the m o

.

ti on ce a ses in dic a tes the heigh t o f the child referred to Indi an s often .

distin g ui sh t h e heigh t of hu m a n bein gs by the h a n d pl aced a t the proper

elev a ti on b a ck dow n w a rd and th a t o f in a n i m a te obj ects o r a n i m a ls n o t
, ,

h u m an by t h e h and held b a ck u p w ard

, .

A or d a ugh ter is expressed by m ak in g with the h a n d a m ove m en t

so n

denotin g i ssue fro m the loi n s ; it t h e c h ild be s m all a bit of the i nde x
'

held between the a n ta gon ized th u m b an d m edius is shown .

 55

C a resses by a m an ; by ,
a wo m a n ,
by a m oti on represen tin g p a r t ur i
tion . M ac y/ o ce a n ) .

Pa ss the h a n d d o w nw a rd fro m th e a bdo m en , betwee n the legs , i ndi

c a tin g th a t i t c a m e th a t w ay ( Do dge ) .

Right h an d n gers so m e wh a t cu rved an d sep a r ated a nd held for w ard

an d higher th a n the wrist p a l m down m oved in a s h ort a rch fro m side
, ,

to side a t the height represen tin g the ch ild i ndic a ted an d a s i f rubbin g ,

th e t o p o f t h e he a d ( A pache I ) . .

S m a ll .

Pl ace the ri gh t h a n d a couple o f feet fro m the ground o r lower b a ck , ,

forw ard an d n gers poin tin g up w ard then close both h a nds an d pl a ce ,

the m in front of t h e n avel b a ck s ou tw ard , th e right st abou t three

,

inches above th e left a n d while in thi s position exten d an d ex the

,

h a nds a t t h e wrist once o r twice ( Da ko ta IV ) In ar m an d s m all . . .

ble to w a l k
O ne a .

Ri gh t h and exte n ded i n fron t o f th e body o n level wi th the bre a st ,

b a c k o f h and o u t n gers j oin ed an d poi n ting obliq uely tow ard the left
, ,

tur n the h a nd over w ith p a l m look in g down w ard ( W ) an d c arry th e ,

h a nd dow n w a rd as though l ayin g it s p al m on th e top o f a child s he a d ,

th e dist a n ce o f th e h a n d fro m th e groun d in dic a tin g the hei ght an d ap
proxi m a tely the ag e o f th e child ( Da ko ta I ) Indic atin g a ch il d s . .

a g e by i ts hei gh t

.

Deaf -

m a te na tu r a l sig n f or c h il d, no t a ba by i n a r m s Pu t the h and

w hen n a t ur ally stretched out do w n to the k nee .
( L ar so n )
The Uist e r cia n m o n k s ,
vo w ed to sil e nce a n d the E gypti a n h ie ro g ly , .

p h e r s not a bly in the design a tio n of H orus th eir d a wn g o d u sed the

, ,
-

nger in or on the lips for child It h as been conj ectured i n th e l ast .

i n sta n ce th at the gestu re i m plied n ot the m ode of t ak in g n ourish m ent , ,

but i n abil ity to spe a k i n f ans This conj ecture h owever w as only .
, ,

m ade t o expl a i n the blun der of the G ree k s , w h o sa w i n the h a n d pl a ced

con nected w ith the m outh i n th e hieroglyph of H orus ( the ) so n H o r ,

( p ) ch r o t th e gesture fam ili ar to them sel ves of a n ger on th e lips to

-

,

express silen ce a nd so m i stak in g both the n a m e a n d th e ch aract e r i

,

z a t io n in v e nted the G od o f S ilen ce H ar p o k r a t e s

,
A c areful ex a m in a .
,

tion of al l the li ne ar h ieroglyphs gi ven by C h a m pollion ( Diction n a ire

Eg y p t ie n ) , sh ows t h a t th e n ger o r h an d to the m outh o f a n a du l t
( w hose posture is al w a ys distinct fro m th a t of a child ) is a l w a ys i n con
n e c t io n w ith th e positi ve i d e a s of voice m outh speech w riti ng e a tin g ,
, , , ,

drin k in g , & c , an d n ever w ith th e n egati ve i de a o f silen ce The speci a l

. .

ch a r acter f o r ch ild al w ays h as the a bove m en tioned p art o f the si gn

-

w ith referen ce to nourish m en t fro m the bre a st .

 56

Ba by ,
In f an t .

Pl a ce the foren ger in the m outh , e .

, a n ursi ng chi ld .
( Ar ap a ho I ) .

( 1 ) S ign wo m a n m ade fro m shoulder dow n w ard ; ( 2 ) lo wered in

to r
a ccord a nce wi th size a n d heigh t of chil d If a b aby bot h h a nds open .
,

a n d p a l m s sl i ghtly curled up brou gh t u p to fron t of b re a st sligh t u p ,

w ard a nd sidewise roc k in g m otion i mi ta ted ( Ch ey enne I ) . .

L ay th e b a c k of the ri gh t h an d in th e p al m o f the left crossw ise o n

the left side of th e bre a st a n d m ak e the up an d dow n m ove m en ts as
,

th ough hold in g a nd d a n dlin g a n in fa nt ( Da ko ta I ) S e x o f the child . .

ca n b e d e sig n at e d by it s a ppropri a te sign

.

M ove th e open ed right h a n d p al m b a c k w ard n gers poin tin g down

, ,

w ard fro m th e lower p art of th e chest dow n w ard u n t il it is in fron t

,

o f the lower p a rt of the a bdo m en , h ere turn the p al m do wn w a rd a nd

m ove the h a n d for w a rd a bout eighte e n inches ; then r a ise the left
elbow a nd x i t a bout six i nches forw ard fro m th e side the wrist in ,

fron t o f i t a nd t hree o r four in ches higher holdin g the h an d slightly ,

exed i ts p al m b a c k w a rd a n d ngers poi ntin g u p w a rd a n d l ay th e

, ,

b a c k o f the open ed righ t h a nd on the left fore ar m ne a r the el b ow j oin t -

.

( D a ko ta I V )

Gi vin g birth to a n d holdin g in the ar m
.
,
.

T he right a r m is exed a nd h and brought ag ain st a bdo m en abo ut th e

u m bi l icus The h a n d i s in position ( S
. m odied by being i n verted .

The h an d w i th p a l m to w ards the body t h e n roughly des c ribes the

curve of C a r us o r course of th e foetus in deli very The sign is co m

.

p l e te d a t en d of curv e by the h a n d bein g held erect p a l m outw a rd , ,

b a c k to w a rds the body ( O to I ) T h a t which h a th co m e forth

. . .

R i gh t left h a n ds c arried to the left bre ast

and as if holdin g a very
s m a ll i n fa n t there ( Co ma nche I ) . .

Deaf -
m a te na t ur a l sig ns By suc k ing t h e nger a nd pl acin g the h a nd s
a s m all dist a n ce ap a r t to denote the size of th e child .
( Ba llar d )
Da ndle an i m agin ary b aby in t h e a r ms .
( L a r so n)
To m ove the a rm s as if to d an dle a b a by in the ar m s .
( Zeig l er ) .

Bo y .

H old up index n g e r ( Dodge ) This is u sed when indic a tin g

the -
.

m y bo y , a s whe n given a lone it would a lso sign ify m a n

.

Right h a nd tightly closed ; then pl ace i t before the body extend the ,

i n dex poi n tin g u p w a rd ( A bsa r o ka I ; Shosho ni a n d B a n a k I )

. .

Pl a ce the h a nd in rs t posi tion

then open al l o f the n gers fo r M a n ,

a n d m ove the h a n d to the right a bout a f oot to the height o f th e boy

referred to the h a n d t o be horizon t al pointi n g forw a rd , and its b ac k

, ,

up w a rd ( Da ko ta IV ) M a le o ne
. . .
 57

girl
Bo y , .

The m ost n a t u ra l si gn s descripti ve of the sexu al orga n s ( Co ma nch e .

Gi rl .

Joi n th e tw o outstretched th u m bs an d f o re n g e r s an d pl ace the m b e

fore th e crotch G i ve n w hen con versin g wi th a person little a cq u a inted
.

w ith si gn s ( Do dge ).

S i gn f o r S q u a w . To in dic ate sta ture hold the h and p al m dow n

, ,

an d n gers extended a n d j oin ed a t the proper hei ght

, ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Pas s t h e a t exten ded h ands n gers j oi n ed , down the si des o f the ,

h e ad as f ar as th e shoulders when they a r e dra wn forw ard a nd ou tw ard

,

a sh ort di st a n ce endin g w i th the ti ps poin tin g tow ard s on e a n other a n d

,

p al m s d ow n Th en hold th e left h an d an d ar m tra n sversely before the

.

body poin tin g to th e right an d p a ss th e ri ght index down w a rd alon g

, ,

th e ab d o ni e n 1) assin g it un d erne a th th e left h a nd then outw a rd an d

,
.
,

u pw a rd h oldin g th e in dex a s hi gh a s th e fa ce
, ( A bsar o ka I ; S h osho ni .

a n d Ba n a k I )
. W o n born
m a .

.

M ak e th e si gn for I o m a n an d desi gn a te a g e approxi m ately by the

d is t an ce th e righ t h an d is held fro m the groun d , 73 e th e ch ild s height

. . .

Th e l on ger h air d en oti n g th e sex a n l th e hei gh t a g e ( Da ko ta I ) . .

First m ak e th e si gn f o rW o n l a n ; then m ove the h a n d , b ac k forw a rd ,

down to the h ei gh t o f the girl referred to turn in g th e n gers upw ard ,

an d sl igh t ly exin g the m a n d g a therin g their end s ( th u m b included )

i nto a circl e a bout two in ches i n di a m eter ( Da ko ta IV ) The w o m en . .

We ar the h a i r behin d th e e rs
a a n d pl ited
a

.

Ri ght h an d c arried to th e n a vel then w i th ex ten ded p al m n gers , ,

together a n d poi n tin g dow n w a rd m ove the h a n d do wnw a rd t o the ,

groin s an d then ou tw a rd p al m still down w a rd a n d n gers together

, , .

( Co ma nche I ) .

E xten d the left fore a r m

n gle of 45 0 forw ard a n d upw a rd fro m
at a n a ,

th e elbow pl ace the extended at ri gh t h a nd with the outer ed ge

,

a g a in st the m iddle of th e fore a r m , the n dr a w th e left tow a rds th e

bre a st th e righ t ret a in in g its rel a ti ve position wh ile doin g so ( Ute I )

,
. .

B oth h an ds rched or curved , p al m s facin g an d a bout four in ches

a

ap a rt ; then pl ace th e righ t h an d , n gers extended but j oined to the ,

left bre a st ( Ap a che I ). .

O ff sprin g .

Pa ss the h an d n gers exten ded dow n w a rd an d j oined p al m tow ard

, ,

the body dow n w a rd c l ose to an d i n fron t of th e body ch a n gin g the

, , ,

directi on ou tw ard between th e thi gh s ; liter ally o u t of the loi ns or , ,

el se i m plyi n g th e ac t o f p arturition ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

8
 58

Is d en oted by a sli ghtl y v aried d u m b show o f issu a n ce fro m th e loin s ,

th e l in e tr a ced sh owin g a close di a gn osi s of p arturition ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Th e righ t h a nd , b a ck forw a rd , i n th e p osition

i n dex h a n d point o f an -

in g dow n w ard is hel d before the abdo m en an d then m oved dow n w ard
,

an d forw a rd i n a curve ( M a n dan an d H i da tsa I ) . .

Pl a cethe left elbow a g ai nst th e side of the chest an d brin g the h a n d

up to w ithin a bout ei ght or ten i nches o f the fa ce , then l ay t h e ri ght at
h and ed gew ise tr a n sversely in to the an gle for m ed by the left ar m an d
fore ar m Wy a ndo t I )
. .

C h il d r e n Youn g m e n an d wo m en
. .

Both h a n ds closed a nd held at the heigh t o f the shoulders before the

body f o re ng e r s str ai g h t an d extended pointin g up w ard ; m ove the m
, ,

up an d dow n altern a tely an d repe a tedly ( A bsar o ka I ; Shosho ni a nd .

Ban a k I ) The ind ivid u a ls ; represen ted by the sign f o r m a n

. .

C h in a m an .

Pl a ce the tips of th e ri g h t h a n d t h u m b and ngers together t h e n , , ,

fro m the cen ter or top o f th e he a d m ak e a spir al m ove m en t dow n w ard

a n d i n fron t o f the shoulder re a chin g as f ar a s th e hi p
( A bsa r o ka I ; .

Sh o sh o n i a nd Ban a k I ) Represen ts th e q ueue . .

C in n abar . Se e C o lo r , V er nl il io n .

C lean .

With the th u m b a n d foren ger o f both h a nds , a n a rc of a circle

( se m icircle ) rest of n gers closed a n d then the h an ds ar e ca rried
, ,

down w ard a t the sides of the face in front of body below the bre a sts ,

tips of n gers an d th u m b look in g in w ard a nd co m plete by m ak in g the ,

si gn for h a n d so m e ( Dako ta
Fro m h a n dso m e , pretty C le an ,
. .

pretty fa ce wo uld see m to be in te n d e c

C lear .
( Co m p a re L i g h t ) .

The h a n d s a r e uplifted a nd spre a d both w ays fro m the he a d .

( Da n
bar .
)
B oth h a nds w it h p al m s dow n w a rd , n gers extended pointi n g str ai gh t ,

to the fron t ( W ) ar e brou ght together i n fron t of the body o n a level

,

w ith the sto m a ch , a nd then m oved sidewise fro m e a c h other o n the

s a m e level for a f e w inches ( Da ko ta Rese
m bles so m e wh a t t h e
'

sig n for b r o a d a nd a l so f o r a t , l e v e l The sep ar a ti on o f two

, .

bodies t h e he a vier fall in g to the botto m a s i n the cle arin g of w ater

, .

Deaf -
m a te n a tu r a l sig m L oo k at the sk y an d arch th e ar m s a nd
h a n ds tow ards it , an d m ove t h e m a p a rt to i ndic a te the a bsen ce of o h

s truction by clouds ( Ba llar d ) .

 59

C l o ck o r w a tch .

M ak e th e si gn for S u n
the rig h t o f the body heigh t of he a d an d
to ,

then close a l l the n gers except t h e i nde x which poin ts upri ght c arry ,

the h a n d obliquely do wn w a rd to w ard the right describi n g w ith th e ,

i ndex a ci rcle decre a sin g i n size as th e h a n d is c arried down w a rd .

( D a ko t a I )

Tellin g
. ti m e by the su n s m ove m ents
.

The right h a n d with the in dex h oo k ed is m a de to describe th e ar c of

th e hori zon before th e forehe a d The left ar m is then se m i exten ded , .
-

n gers collected b ut th e i ndex an d t h u m b crook ed to for m a circle The

,
.

ri gh t i ndex in position ( K ) no w describes a circle over the left in dex a nd

th u m b a s held above ; then a secon d circle t o i ndic ate hou r m ark s i s -

m a de in dots a s i t were , th en th e arc of th e h orizon i s d ivided o ff a s it

, ,

were , in points ( O to a n s sso um I ) S o m ethin g circul ar th a t m a rk s

'

. .

the di vision s of d aily ti m e .

C l o th i n g . B l a n ke t, ro be .

Pa ss
both st s crossin g in fron t o f th e bre a sts as if wr appin g one s
, , ,

self up ( Wied ) S ign still i n u se , bu t n ow ad ay s for bl a n k et as well as

.

robe ( M a tthews )
. .

Robe red ,
.

First indic a te the wr a ppin g a bout th e shoulders , th en rub th e righ t

chee k t o in dic a te the red color ( Wied) H ere he m e a n s bl a n ke t n ot .
,

bu ff a lo robe w hich shows th a t in h is d ay the s a m e r adic al sig n w a s

-

u sed for both ( S ee si gn for B l a n k e t ) B u ff a lo robes w ere never

. .

p ai n ted of a un ifor m color ex cept when rubbed with whi te or yellow ,

e arth n ever certa i nly green o r blue throughout ; b ut red green an d

, , ,

bl ue a re fa vori te colors for M ac k i na w bl a n k ets T h e si g n s f o r th e .

colors ar e the essen ti a l poi n ts to be n oticed i n these descriptions A .

color m ay be i nd ic a ted by r ubbi n g a ny obj ect th a t possesses it o r pre ,

tendin g t o rub such an obj ect ( M a tthews) .

Robe green ,
.

Indic ate th e wr a ppin g a bout t h e shoulders a n d wi th the b ac k of the ,

left h an d m ak e the gesture o f stro k ing gr a ss up on the e arth ( Wied) .

S a m e re m a rk s are a ppli c a ble to this a s to R o b e , R e d q ( M at ,

.

t hew s .
)
P ut the m on in p an to m i m e .
( B a r to n )

'
Pa n to m im ic show of en velopin g onesel f in a bl a n k et as w orn by In .

di a n s .
( A r ap a ho I ) .

B oth
h a n ds closed a s though loosely cl a spin g the edge of a bl a n k et
.
,

an d brought up i n fron t o f the m iddle of the bre a st , the left h an d over

the right , as though fold in g the bl a n k et a roun d the shoulders ( C hey .

en ne I ) .
 60

Touch the a rticle in questi on ; i n it s absen ce ,

a p a n to m i m ic show of

where i t should be if presen t ( Ar ap a ho I ) . .

Isdenoted by crossin g both ar m s in fron t of the body o n a level wit h

th e brea st and close t o th e body w ith the h a nd s gr a spi n g a fold o f the
, ,

bl an k et the s am e a s a sh a wl would be worn ( Da ko ta

Fro m it s .

use a s a coverin g .

Fro m a n uprigh t p o sit io n ju st a bove th e correspo ndin g shoulder , p al m, ,

forw a rd m ove e ach h an d a cross the chest a nd gradu ally rot atin g th e
, , ,

h a n d un til its p a l m i s b a ck w a rd pl ace it a g ai nst th e opposite sh o ulder , ,

cros sin g the fore a r m s on the chest , t he n rub the b a c k of th e left h a n d

-

w ith the ends o f the n gers of the righ t ( D a ko ta I V )

Wr a ppi n g a . .

bl a n k et a round the shoulders .

both h a n ds as i f dr a wi n g a bl a n k et a roun d the body a n d shoulders ,

U se
crossin g t h e fore a r m s over th e bre ast i n doi n g so ( Da ko ta V I V II ) .
, .

The ar m s a ne exed a nd h a n ds in type posi tion ( S ) crossed o n the fron t -

o f bre a st Then withdr a w n open do wn w a rd s a n d outw a rds o ver li m bs

. .

S o m eti m es both h a n d s i n a bove position s a r e m a de si m ply to touch suc

ce ssi ve l y li m bs body a n d a r m s O I Th a t which wr a ps o r l n

, ( to ) ,
. .

closes m e .

The left p a l m is l ai d up on the chest the n both h an ds are opened an d ,

thrown b ac k o n a level with the shoulders The h a nds a r e n o w gr a d u .

ally crossed o n the bre a st bei n g close d st li k e a s they co m e tog e t her

,
-
.

O o a n d M isso ur i I ) The m a n ner o f foldin g so m ethi n g over the

( t .

body
.

Fold ar m s a cross the bre a st sig n ifying dr a win g the bl an k et about t h e ,

shoulders ( Sa hap ti n .
'

E lev a te
both h ands clin ched ( A ) o n a level w ith the sho ulders a nd
then j er k the m a cross to th e opposite shoulder after the m ann er o f wr ap
pin g u p in a bl a n k et w hen it is cold Fo r a bu ff a lo robe th e si gn is the .

s a m e only a previo u s sig n i ndic a tin g the robe is used ( Co m an che I )

,
. .

s k in or a b u al o robe
Of
'

.
,

The h a nds are pl aced n e a r the shoulders as if h oldi ng the en ds o f th e ,

robe an d then crossed as if dr a win g the robe tight aroun d the shoulders
, ,
.

( L o ng )
Co m bi ne sign s for C l o th i n g , W oolen B lan ke t , and B u f
f a lo .
( A r ap a h o I ) .

S i gn f o r S k i n followed by sign for B l a n ke t .

( Cheyen ne I ) .

First m ak e the sign f o r B u f f a l o , a nd then the sign for B l a n ke t .

( Dako ta I ) Fro m its use a s a coverin g

. .
 61

Both h an ds
with th u m bs an d f o re ng e r s exten ded ( K b ac k of h a n d s
outw a rd ar e bro u gh t to the sides of the he a d an d c arried dow n w ard
.

slightly in fron t of the sides o f the body to the level o f the lower ribs
w here the h a nd s ar e turned so the thu m bs a nd to r e n g e r s point down '

w ard Pa n ts co a t an d every other g ar m en t m ust be poin ted to th e

.
, ,

position where worn ( Da ko ta I ) The en tire coverin g of a person

. . .

M ak ethe sign for wr a pping a bl a n k et a roun d the sh oulders , a n d then

to i ndic a te the h air o n the robe , hol d the left fore a r m horizont a l an d
directed obli q uely for w ard an d tow ard t h e right a nd m ove the right ,

h an d alon g it fro m the elbo w to the wrist the b a ck of the right h a n d ,

a g a in st the fore a r m its n gers an d th u m b so m ewh a t curved an d sep a

,

r a ted poin tin g u pw ard ( as i n P ) ( Da ko ta IV )

,
. .

C o at .

S ep ar a te the th u m b a n d i ndex n g e r of e a ch h an d a nd press th e m -

down w ard over the sides o f th e body Wied ) I h a ve descri b ed a si g n . .

m uch the s a m e for shi r t Perh a ps he reg a rded the Indi a n hu n ti n g sh irt
.
-

as a co a t since i t is used as a n Outside g ar m ent

,
The m otio n he de .

scribes depicts the p u llin g d own o f a shirt over the he ad n ot th e p u t ,

tin g o n o f a co a t o f E urope a n fa sh ion C o ats m ust h a ve bee n r a re .

am on g the U pper M is s ouri Indi a n s i n 1 83 4 H e s a ys th a t the thu m b .

a n d fore n ger a r e sep a r a ted ( but bei n g t h us m en tion ed together he

e vi den tly sa w the m a pproxi m ated ) I h a ve described the m a s in con .

t act Perh a ps the sig n is v a ri able to this tri i n g degree eve n whe n
.

m a de by the s a m e person the m ere in dic a tion of th e p ullin g do wn o f the

,

shirt bei ng t h e essen ti al poin t ( M a tth e ws ) .

W ith the n gers held as f o r D r e ss T u n i c , but wi t h the th u m bs ,

poin tin g rst c arry the ri gh t h an d a lon g the left ar m fro m the w ri st to
,

th e shoulder an d the left h a n d alon g the right ar m ( Da ko ta IV ) C cv . .

erin g the a r m s .

The left ar m is p arti a lly elev a ted an d se m i exten ded in a p a ssi ve m an - ~

n er fro m the body The ri ght h and is then brough t o ver the extended
.

left in type positi on ( W ) The b a c k of h a nd m ore a rched a nd is dr a wn

-
.
,

up over the left a r m an d v ice versa The n gers of both h a nds ar e the n .

twisted over e a ch oth er a t p oi n ts fro m th e nec k dow n the chest a s in

button in g ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) S o m ethin g th a t covers our a r m s
. . .

a n d i s buttoned a rou nd the body

.

Deaf -
m a te n a t ur a l sig ns In dic ated by m ovi n g the h an ds al on g th e
a rm s up to w a rd the sh oulders .
( Ballar d )
T ak e hold o f the front l a ppel o f the co a t w ith o ne h a n d to m a k e a
m ove m en t o f it b a c k an d fron t a n d poin t to it w ith th e other n oddin g
, ,

t h e he a d as if t o i nd ic a te good s of the s am e k in d ( H asensta b ) . .

 62

Dress Tun ic,

.

W i th the exten ded an d poin tin g in w ard b a ck s forw ard ,

f o r e n g e r s ,

an d t h u m b s e x t e n d e d a nd poin t in g b a ck w a rd the othe r n gers closed ,

-

m ove th e h a n ds fro m the fron t o f the s h oulders do wn w ard to the

w a ist ( Dako ta IV ) Th e m otion o f p a ssin g a gar m en t over the he a d
. .

an d coverin g the body fro m th e sh oulders dow n

.

S hirt,
h un tin g .

The fore n ger an d thu m b so opposed a s to for m a cur ve ar e p a ssed

ne ar the surface o f the body fro m the forehe a d to the abdom en ( L o ng )
,
.

poin tin g tow a rds th e hips brough t up alon g t h e si de s

Fo r e n g e r s ,
'

a n d abov e t h e sh oulders an d poi nted b ac k w ards Thi s si gn m ay be .

r e versed ( Chey enn e

.

S am e as the sign for C l o th i n g . ( Dako ta I) .

The tips o f the th u m bs of e ach h an d ar e Oppo sed to one o r m ore of

the correspondi n g n gers a n d the h a n ds ar e then p a ssed r apidly dow n
w ard in fron t fro m th e t o p o f the he a d t o below th e sto m ach ( M a nda n .

and t a tsa I) .

Trow sers .

W i th the n gers held as for T u n i c , c arry the h a nd s fro m the k n ees

up w a rd to th e w a ist ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

C lo ud .

Begin w ith
sign o f w ater th en r aise th e t wo h an ds as hi gh a s the
the ,

forehe a d an d pl aci n g the m with an in clin at ion o f 1 5 0 let the m gently

, ,

cross o n e an other ( Dunbar ) .

( 1 ) B oth h an ds p arti ally closed , p al m s facin g n e ar e a ch other an d ,

brought up to level w ith or sligh tly above but in fron t o f the he a d ; ( 2 )

suddenly sep a r a ted si de wi se describin g a curve li k e a sc a110p ; thi s sc al
,

l o p m otion i s repe at ed for

m a ny clouds
( C h ey en ne .

B oth r m s fully exten ded at the sides o f the body with h a nds hori
a

z o n t al str ai gh t o ut p a l m s do wn w a rd ( W ) are brou ght together wi th a ,

, ,

curved m otion in fron t of but h igher th a n the he a d , so th at the tip s o f

, ,

the n gers m eet b ac k s of h an ds up w ard ( W ) ( Da ko ta I ) Resem bles . .

the sign for N i g h t o r D a r k n e ss The co m in g together of clouds . .

Da r k n ess in the he a ven s .

C l o ud i n e ss , dam p n e ss.

M ay be si gni ed by m ak in g th e si g n for S l n o k e , the h a n d a scen d

in g then descendin g , by con st a ntly revolvin g m oti on ( A r ap a h o I )
,
. .
 63

C l ub .

Point to
piece o f wood w ith the ri ght in dex ( RI ) an d then stri k e the
a ,

p al m o f the at horizont a l left h a nd ( X ) held in fron t o f the body

, , ,

n gers poin ti n g tow a rd th e righ t w ith the edge o f the n gers o f the ,

right crosswise ( Da ko ta Fro m stri k in g w ith a club

. .

C o a l .

The left h a n d i s c arried down a n d held a t the level of and in fron t of

the left bre a st fro m a little h igher elev a tion w i th p al m in w ard n gers , ,

j oined extended sli gh tly arched a n d pointin g tow ard s the ri ght h a nd
, , ,

horizon t al ( b a n k o r blu ff ) a n d then the right h an d in the s a m e positi on

, ,

excep t en ds of extended n gers poi nti ng tow a rd the left i s c arried out ,

i n fron t of the body , a n d i ts b a c k struck sever a l t i m es ag ain st the p al m

of the left ( h ard ) a n d then the righ t i ndex is c a rried fro m left to ri ght
,

a lo n g the m iddle of th e p a l m of the yet st a ti on a ry l eft ( thi s indic ates

th e vei n of co al ) a nd then the left h a nd is drop p ed dow n in fron t The

,
.

thic kness of the vein itself an d i ts depth below the surface c an a l so be

a pproxi m at ely i ndic ated in thi s sign N o written l a n gu a ge could con .

vey to the m ind a m ore gra phic pict ure th a n does thi s to the person
w h o h a s ever a scended the M issouri an d seen th e vein s of co a l croppin g ,

out o f th e ri ver b l us a n d b a n k s ( Da ko ta A vei n o f co a l crop

.

pin g o u t o f a b an k .

C o ee .

L efth and st ( A 1 ) held to th e left side of body i n fro n t of sto m ach ,

-

th e righ t h a n d brough t over it en d o f index resti n g o n end of th u m b ,

( other n gers cl osed ) b a c k o f h an d u pw a rd ; then the righ t is turned i n

,

a circul a r m a nn er a s though turnin g the h a ndle of a n uprigh t co ff ee

m il l The si g n f o r K ett le can be m a de to indic a t e the boilin g o f the

.

coff ee o r the si gn f o r Dr inking to i ndic a te th a t i t is m ade ( Dak o ta I ) . .

From the grin din g o f the co ff ee .

The ar m s are se m i exten ded a n d h a nds ( a s in t yp e p o st ure ( C 1 ) m odi

-

e d b y bein g horizon t a l ) m a de to rub circul a rly the p a l m s sli ghtly ,

sep ara ted This i s foll owed by sign s for W a t e r , F i r e , an d D r i n k .

( O to I ) S o m eth in g to be groun d th en subj ected t o re a n d w ater , a n d

.
,

dr un k .

C o in .

A sh ak in g of n gers an d th u m bs .
( M a cg o wan)
The n gers o f the right h a nd closed , le a vin g the th u m b a n d index
cur v ed w it h t ips j oin in g , t hus for m in g a circle Th e h an d is then held
,
-
.

outw ard tow ar d the right side sh ow in g th e circle to the observer , .

( A bsar o ka l S h osh o ni a nd B a na k I ) Roun d li k e sil ver o r gold coi n

.
,
.

Join the ti ps of the th u m b an d foren ger of the s a m e h a nd the i nte

rior ou tli ne a pproxi m a tin g a circle ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

 64

The ar m is ra ised to th e he ad an d the ri ght i ndex n ger hoo k ed ,

de scribes the h a t m a r k o f the forehe a d in sign for W h i t e m a n or

-

A m e ric a n The a r m s th en di verge w a ve l i k e fro m the si d es of the body

. .

The left h a nd i s then brought before the body The in dex an d thu m b .

for m a circle i n i m it a tion o f th e outlin e of the sil ver doll a r a s i n ( G ) ,

.

The exten ded ri gh t in dex n ger is th en dr a w n a cross the circle of the

l eft h a n d tw ice ( O t o a n d M i sso u.ri )

The roun d , m ark ed curren cy o f .

the w hi te m a n .

C o i tus .

The extended in dex of the ri ght h a nd ( th e h a n d usu ally ba ck down

w ards , other ngers exed ) is gr a sped b y left h a nd p a l m upw a rds In ,
.

th is position th e i ndex is u su ally m o ved b a c k a n d forth i e in an d o ut , ,

. .
,

once or often er ( M a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )

.
/ -

A ustr a li a n sig n Fin gers of both h a nd s closely i nterloc k ed , b a c k s u p

an d horizon t a l This is used cere m on i a lly i n off erin g their
'

. w o me n t o a
v isi tor a s a rite of hospi t a li ty ( Smy th) .

C o ld .

s a m e as for A i r but w hen a pplied to a person the right h an d is

T he ,

shut a nd held up n e a rly opposite the shoulder a n d p ut i n to a tre m u l ous ,

m otion ( Dunba r )
-

. .

The ar m s with cl inched h a nd s hel d up before th e bre a st t hro wn i n to ,

a tre m ulous m otion a s if s h i verin g w ith cold ( L o ng), .

(l ) h a nd s p a l m s fa ci n g bre a st , a w k w a rd l y closed as thou gh

, ,

n u m b with cold an d brough t to a level with the shoulders w hich ( 2 )

,

shru gged ; ( 3 ) h a n d s sli ghtly m otion ed dow n w a rd forw ard an d side , ,

w ise to i m it ate v iolen t tre m blin g

, ( C h eyenn e I ) . .

Hold the clin ched righ t h a n d ( or both ) in fron t of the shoulder then ,

c a use the st to tre m ble as if shi veri n g fro m cold .

( Da ko ta V I I ) .

With both sts clin ched an d held dra w n u p ne ar to th e sh oulders ,

i m it a te tre m bli n g as fro m cold ( Da ko ta V I ; H ida tsa l ; Ar ikar a I )

,
. .

Both h a nds cl i n ched cross the fore a r m s before the bre ast w ith
,
a

tre m blin g m otion ( H ida tsa I ; A r ikar a I ) . .

Both r m s ar e unifor m ly exed a nd m ade t o a ppro ach the chest The

a .

h a nds are ( in type p o st 11r ef ( B 1 ) m odied by p al m s fa cin g chest ) the n

-

m ade to tre m ble before the body ( O to I ) Th a t m ak e s m e sh a k e or . .

tre m ble .

E lev a teboth h a nds , cli nched , t o the shoulders ; then let the m shi ver
a little b a ck a nd forth Thi s si gn v aried as follow s , indic a tes ch ill a n d
.
,

fever A fter the cold sign i s u sed , pl a ce both h a nds clin ched ( B ) beside
.
 65

the te m ples , an d l e t the ngers y o u tw ard , a nd cl i nch t h e m a g a i n a nd ,

let the m y o u t w a rd aga i n Th is i nd ic a tes fever i n the he a d ( C om a n che I )

. . .

S am e si gn as for W i n t e r . ( Ap a ch e I)
.

It is .

W ra p u p sh u dder , ,
an d l ook dis a gree a b l e .
( B ar ton )
C ross both h a n ds ( B ) a t the wrists a fe w i nches in front o f the body
o n a level w i th the bre a st an d the n m a k e a shiveri n g m otion w it h both
,

h a n ds a nd a r m s ( Da ko ta I ) Rese m bles so m e wh at the si gn for B l a n

. .
I

k e t ; c o ve r i n g The ide a of shi verin g with col d

. .

Deaf m a te na tur a l sig ns S h u dder w ith the sho u lders ( Ba l lar d)

-
. .

S hi ver , with yo u r sts ne ar the bre a st .

( C r o ss)
M e a r a pid m o ve m en t of the cl inched h a n ds fro m an d tow a rd e a ch
ak

other w ith the eyes li f ted tow a rd t h e person s p o k en to an d then p oin t ,

in the direction fro m w hich t h e wi nd is blowin g so a s to i n dic a te th a t ,

the we a ther is cold ( Hasensta b ) . .

To shi ver ,
m ovi n g the cl osed sts .
( L ar so n )
C lose the sts a n d dr a w the ar m s tow ard the body with a m otion of
shi veri n g ( Ze ig l cr )
.

C o lo r .

First a n d secon d n gers of the righ t h a n d exten ded th u m b re stin g ,

-

on the thi rd n ger which with the l ittl e n ger is closed , ar e b ro u ght to
the fron t o f the body an d to the left side over the left h a nd wh ich is h eld ,

sli ghtly obliq u e ( B ) o n the left side of the body a bou t a foot to the fron t
of the left bre a st a nd th e n the t wo extended n gers o f the right h a nd
,

are r u bbed over the b a c k of th e left h a n d .

This is gen eric The p a rticu l a r co l or m ust be desi gn ated after m ak

.
.

in g thi s sig n i n e a ch i n s t a n ce by to u chin g so m ethin g o f th a t col or .

( Da ko ta I ) M ixin g the p ai n t on th e h a nd to se e its co l or before usin g ;

.

m u ch the s a m e a s p a in ters try a co l or o n a bo a rd , or a nythin g with a

proper b ack gro u n d to displ ay it .

Bl ac k Wh ite , Red Bl u e , Ye ll o w etc

, , ,
.

With ar m elev ated , se m i e xe d th e h an d i n posi tion ( K ) p ointed to -

these di ff ere n t colors whether rep resen te d i n the v a ul t of the r m a m e nt

,

or articl es o f dress White i s so m eti mes in dic a ted by p oin tin g t o the
.

sun a nd bl a c k by poi n tin g to sun the n exec u ti ng sign for N o o r the

,

S
Su n s e t t n g i (O to I )

A s o bj ects.a ppe a r
. .

Bl a c
k .

R ub the h a ir o n the righ t side of the he a d with the a t h an d . Wie d ) .

Th e h a ir o f the In di a n s bein g n e a rl y a l w ays b l ac k th a t obj ect ,

is n a t ur
a l l y selected a s indic a tion o f th a t color .

9
 66

First m a k e the sign for C o l o r , a nd then to u ch so m ethin g bl ack .

( Da ko ta

Desi gn a tin g a p a rtic ul a color
r
.

R ub lon g the b ac k
a of the left h a nd w ith the p al m of the n gers o r
the righ t b a c k o f left
,
up p al mo f right down O r p oi n t at a bl a c k o h
.

j e ct .
( Da ko ta l V ) .

P a ss the n gers o f the rig ht h an d gen tl y o v

.

er the h a ir o n the righ t

si de o f the h e a d ( Da ko ta V ) . .

Deaf -
al saga S how the en d o f the n ai l o f o n e n ger of th e
m a te n a tur

o n e h an d with the foren ger o f the other h a n d poi n tin g a t i t on a cco u n t ,

of the co l or of the d irt un der the n a il ( L ar so n )

. .

Blue .

W ith t w o n gers of the ri ght h an d r u b the b ack of t h e l eft Wi ed ) . .

It is conj ect ured th a t the vein s o n the b a c k o f the h a nd are i n dic a ted .

First m ake the sign for C o l o r , a nd then t ou ch so m ethin g bl ue .

( Da ko ta Desi g n a tin g color

.

Gr a y .

First m ak e the si gn for C o l o r , an d th en to u ch so m ethi n g of gra y

color w ith the ri g ht i ndex ( Da ko ta I ) Design ati n g color . . .

Green .

With the b ac k o f the l eft h a n d m ak e the gest ure of stro k in g gr a ss

u pon the e a rth Wied ) . .

First m a k e the si gn for C o l o r , an d then to u ch so m ethin g of green

color ( Dako ta I ) Desi g n a tin g c o l or
. . .

Poi n t a t a green obj ect a nd t hen r u b the r adi al edge of the left h an d
w ith the n gers of the ri ght ( Da ko ta IV ) C olors are u s ually d esig
. .

u a te a b y poin tin g at o r r ubbin g so m e obj ect o f the color referred to .

Deaf -
m ute n a tu r a l sign Poi nt the n ger to gra ss .
( La r so n )

Re d
R ub th e r ight ch ee k to i ndic a te the red color ( Wied) The red r e .

fers t o the p ain t h abit ually u sed o n the check s n o t to the n a tu r al sk in ,

.

The Indi a n s k no w better th an to design a te betwe en e a ch other their

n a t ura l color as red an d h a ve been k n own t o give the design a tion r ed
,

m a n to t h e v isi tin g C a u c a si a n whose bli ste red s k in often better deserves

,

the epithet , w hich they o n ly a p p ly to the m selves in con verse wi th the

conq u erin g r ace th a t in sisted u pon i t The au thor m en tion si n a nother .

conn ecti on th a t the M an d an s u sed red o n the chee k m ore th a n o n oth er

p a rts of the body o n w hich p a rts other colors were gener ally displ ayed .
 ( 57

M ak e t h e s i gn fo r C o lo r ,
an d the n to uch an y re d obj ect with the
righ t i nd e x .
( Da ko ta
H old the l eft h and S p o t t e d , and r ub its u pper edge w ith the
as for
en ds of the n gers of the right h a nd ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

R ub the cheek with the ngers .

( Da ko ta V I ) .

Ru b the righ t chee k wi th the

p al m m s u rfa ce o f the exten ded n gers
of the righ t h a n d ( Ka to w a I ; C o m a nche III ; Ap a che I I ;
. ichi ta II ) W .

Fro m the c u sto m of colorin g the ch e k s red

e .

R ub the chee k with the p a l m ar s ur face of the extended a nd j oined

n gers of the righ t h a n d S o m eti m es both h a nds are u sed i n co m m u .

n ica t io n w ith A m eric a n s ( Ute I ) . .

Ver m i l lion cin n a b ar , .

R ub th e righ t chee k w ith the n gers of the ri gh t h an d .

( Wied )
S til l in u se .

Wh ite .

Wi th th e u n derside of the n gers o f the ri gh t h a n d r u b gently u pon

th a t p art o f the left h an d w h ich correspon d s w ith the k n ittin g o f th e
b on es o f the fore n ger an d th um b ( Da nbar ) . .

First m ak e the si gn for C o l o r ,

and then to u ch an y thin g w hite with
the ri ght in dex ( Da ko ta I ) . .

E xten d the left h a n d p al m up a t w ith n gers spre a d b e f o r e t h e '

, , ,

b o dy a n d dr a w the index o f th e ri ght fro m the tip of the m iddle n ger

,

of the left b a ck a cross t h e p a l m t o the wr i st Ligh t col or co m p ared .

w ith the d a r k n ess of the s k in gener all y ( Ute I ) . .

Deaf m a te n a tur a l sign Poin t the n ger t o t h e h u m a n s k in ( L ar

-
.

so n .
)
Yellow .

Si gn for C o lo r ,
an d then to u ch so m eth in g yel l ow .
( Da ko ta

Desi g n a tin g color .

C o m b .

l u rvethe S pre ad n gers o f the right h a n d in to a h alf circl e the n ,

p a ss the m over the h air of the right side fro m above down w ard as if ,

co m bin g on e s self The h an d is then bro u ght forw a rd a ga in stil l in

.
,

the s a m e con diti on to in dic ate the obj ect ( Da ko ta V ) , . .

C o mb a t . Se e Ba t t l e .

C o m e , T o ; to arr i ve .

The foren ger m oved fro m right to left w ith a n interr u pted m otion as

if i m i t a tin g the al tern a te m ove m en t of steppin g ( Da n bar ) . .

 68

E lev a te the index n g er n e a r the fa ce exten d the h a n d a n d ret u rn i t

, ,

with an u m ber o f gen tle j er k s Wied ) The si m ple i de a o f co m e is

. .

expressed by a str ai gh t an d u n v aryin g m otion of the n ger as y o u ,

i m ita te i n yo u r re m a r k Pri n ce W gi ves h ere a v a ri a ti o n w hich sig n i

. .
'

e s co m i ng fro m a d ista n ce or m ak i n g a j o u rney wi th h a lts H e s ays .

gen tle j er k s ; I say w a verin g m otion We both m e a n th e s a m e .

thin g The in terr u p ti o n of m otion m a y i ndic a te n ight l y c am ps ( M a t

.

'
.

t he ws ). The right ar m exten ded w ith the h a n d in type posi tion ( K -

index a l ittl e m ore opened poin tin g to t h e i n di vid ua l then d escribin g

, ,

an ar c tow a rds t h e body with sl ig h t j e r ki ng the in dex sh a rply hoo k ed ,

.

There a ppea rs to be re a son able si m il arity to Wi ed It i s prob a bl e th a t, .

were the l atter descrip tion m ore explicit wi th so m e a llow a n ce for m is ,

inter p ret a ti on , the i den tity o f the con ception s a n d si m il arity o f si gns
wou l d be m ore pl a in ( Bo teler ) To a ppro a c h o r dr a w n e a r u nto i n
. .

both .

( 1 ) Fo r e n g e r o f ri gh t h a n d poin tedperson addressed , the n ger to

tip s poin tin g u pw ards an d p al m i n w a rd ; ( 2 ) h a nd dr a wn to w ard fa ce .

In r ap id co m m un ica tion the poin tin g w ith the foren ger is s u perseded
,
.

by a m otion o f the whole h a n d tow ards th e object ad dre ssed The b a c k .

o f the h an d is k ept tow ards the person the n ger tips u pw a rd , p al m ih ,

w ard , a nd m otion m a de tow a rds the spe ak er s fa ce w ith the rst two or

three n gers o f h is ri ght h an d ( C heyenne I ) . .

H old the left h a n d foot in fron t o f the che st it s b ack forw ard
a , ,

n gers pointin g a l i ttl e u p w a rd tow a rd the ri ght , a n d brin g the p al m

of the ri ght h an d b ac k w a rd a g a in st i t s m artl y the n gers of the righ t ,

poin tin g a little u pw a rd to wa rd t h e l e f t ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

E lev a tethe right h and b a c k forw a rd , q u ick ly elev ate the i n dex an d
,

throw it b a c k in to i ts p l a ce a ga in ( Da ko ta VI ; t a tsa I ; A r ika r a I )

.
'

The ri ght ar m is exten ded for w ard s ne arly or q uite to ful l l en gth , the
ri gh t h an d erected by fu ll e xio n o f the wrist m ak in g the b a c k of the ,

h an d l oo k forw ard s the in dex on ly is exten ded Then the h a nd is

, .

dr a w n in w a rd s close t o the chest This is u sed for C o m e in both an

.

i ndic ative a n d i m per at ive sen se ( M an da n a n d H ida tsa I )

. .

Pl a ce th e clo sed h a nd exed at the w ri st a n d poin tin g upw a rd , p al m

,

tow ard the f a ce at a r m s l en gth to th e fron t a n d right of the body , ele

v ate the in dex , an d brin g i t sl o w l y i n j er k s tow ard the body ( Kat o u a .

'

I ; C o m anche I l l ; Ap a che 1 1 ; Wi chita I I ) .

( In the i m per a ti ve ) .

Right h a nd extended l en gth of a rm , p al m u p w a rd ( Y ) brin g i t to , you .

The s a m e si gn is u sed by w hites in the S t ates ( C o m anche I ) . .

 (i 9

I o r we .

Pl ace both h a nds p al m to p a l m an d p a ss the m in g entle a nd i nter ,

r u p t e d ar c hed m ove m en ts to the fron t rese m bl in g the m otion of w a l k

'

in g ( Pa i Ute I )
. .

B a ck .

Bec k on i n the E urop e a n w ay , an d dr a w the foren ger tow ard you r

self ( B ur to n )
.

( 1 ) S ig n for G o a w a y ; ( 2 ) sign for C o nn e ; th at is, gon e a w ay an d

co m e b a ck ( C hey enn e I )
. .

The si gn can be m ad e b y a si m pl e m oti on o f the ri ght h a nd p er p e n

d ic u l ar he l d a t the a r m s extended c ap acity a t the side of the body a nd
,

dr aw n b ac k tow ard the left i n fron t o f the body , prov ided the person
bein g c alled b a ck is n e ar eno u gh to see i t ( Da ko ta I ) C allin g a . .

person b a ck .

Deaf -
m u te na t ur a l o ut the h a n d to d en ote goi n g a w ay ,
and then m ove i t tow ard s one s sel f
.
( Ba l lar d )

Th e h an d s stretched o ut w ard wi th th e p al m u nder a nd bro ugh t b a c k ,

w ith a c urve m otion down w ard a n d i ncl i nin g to the bod y Dun ba r ) . .

Bec k on wi th t h e foren ger as is done i n E u rope , n ot as i s don e in the

E a st ( Bu r to n )
. .

( 1)The si gn for C o m e i s rst m a de ; ( 2 ) drooped n gers sli ghtl y ex

tended a nd reversed fro m position a ss um ed i n m ak in g th e si gn for
co m e
( 3 ) s u ddenly drop p ed t o indic a te desired positi on ( C hey

; .

e nn e

Pl ace t h e ri ght i n dex upri ght b ac k forw a rd at hei ght of shou lder at
, , ,

a r m s len gth , other n gers closed th u m b a ga in st m iddle n ger , then

,

brin g the h a n d ne ar to the sho ul der ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

The righ t a r m w as extended a n d the h a nd in ty p e position ( K -

m odied by bein g h e l d b a c k o u tw a rd an d do wn w ard p al m u pw a rd ,

a n d in w a rd w a s m a de to poin t wi th in dex to th e obj ect

,
The ar m is .

t hen gr a d u a lly an d u n ifor m l y exed tow a rd the body ; th e h an d i n

a bove position a ppro a chin g the body p a l m u pw a rd in a se m icircl e o r , ,

by jer k s , the index sh arply hook ed ( O to a n d M isso uri I ) Dra w ne ar . .

me .

Deaf -
m u te na t ur al sig na M ovin g the h a nd tow a rd one s sel f .
( Ba l
la r d .
)
U se th e open h a n d a s if t o beck on to so m ebody to co m e , an d , a t the
s a m e ti m e , no d the he ad ( Hasensta b) .
 70

o m e to thi s p l a ce To
C ,
.

M ak e th e sign f o r C o m e a n d as the h a n d is bro u g h t i n fron t o f

,

the body throw the p al m a ga i n st the hori zon t a l p al m of the left h a n d .

( Kai o w a I ; C o m an ch e I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II ) .

C o m i n g ( p a rtici ple ) .

Ri ght h a n d an d ar m ext e n ded h an d clin ched , i ndex h u ger pointin g

,
-

o utw ard Then brin g the h an d s l ow l y to the body the index n g e r

.
,
-

m e a n w hile m ovi ng b a ck w a rd an d forth , as i f it al on e were m o tion i n g

so m e o n e to co m e ( C o m an che I )
. .

A r r iv al f r o m a g re a t d ista n ce .

The h a n d is p l a ced a s i n C o m e, b ut a s f ar to the fron t as possib l e ,

an d then dr a w n s l ow l y t ow a rd th e body so m eti m e s with a l a t er all y ,

tort u o u s m otion ( M a ndan and H ida tsa I )

. .

Of person to a rrive soon to be here

a .

Pl ace th e foren ger in a vertic a l positio n ,w i th the ar m extended to

w ard s the poi n t fro m w hich the person c a m e or i s to co m e then brin g , ,

it gr a d u ally n e a r the body b u t n o t in cont a ct w i t h i t, o r , if he con ti n u ed

,

on c a rry it in the direc t i on he p a ssed ( L o ng )

, .

C l ap
z
-

the h an d s elev a tin g the index h u ger

,
-

of the ri ght h a n d . Wied ) .

Is a l w ays u sed in con n ection w ith the obj ect a cti n g ; f o r inst an ce ap ,

p ro ach in g obj ects a r e poin t ed o u t , described , en u m er a ted , an d sign for

co m e m a de fro m th e d irecti on of the appro a ch in g obj ect t o the fron t
of the per son spe a k in g ( C h ey enn e I ) . .

p erson
t

Of a .

Ri ght ar m ful l y extended to the right sid e of the body ( which m u st

be so pl a ced th a t the h a n d i n thi s p osition wi l l poi nt i n the direction
i n w hich the person is co m in g ) , foren ger exten ded str a ight u p ight
t , , ,

resti ng o n th e th u m b exten ded a lon g it ( oth er n gers cl osed ) b ack o f ,

.

h a n d o utw ard bri n g the h an d to the b o d y ( bre a st ) in this posi ti on by

a s eries o f j er k in g m o ve m en ts ( n e ar l y stoppin g its m otion ) i n im i tation ,

o f the steppin g o f the co m in g person Fr o m t h e w alki ng m o vemen ts of

.

the app r o a ching p er son C o m e I n th e sen se o f he H as co m e ; h e H as

.
,

a rri ved ; b e I s here O n the co m pl etion of the above si gn , cl a p the

.

h ands once at the left side of the b o d v, indic atin g the person h as co m e
to h is j o u rn ey s en d ( Da ko ta I )

. .

H old the ri ght h a nd r m s len gth a little hi gher th a n the sho u lder
at a

, ,

p al m t u rned tow ard t h e fa ce an d in dex elev a ted ; then brin g it b a c k

,

w a rd ih an i nterr upted m otion to n e ar the bre a st w here t h e l eft p a l m i s ,

held edgewise poin tin g forw ard when the b all o f the right h a nd is
, ,

bro u g ht a ga in st i t with a sl a p : ( Da ko ta VII ) .

 7 1

Tow a rd y o u .

Righ t h a n d a t an d extended , hel d edgew i se thr u st the h a n d forw a rd ,

in a c urve either u p w ard o r down w a rd ( O m aha I ) . .

Deaf - S tretch u p the open h an d over the sho u lder

m u te n a t ur a l sig n

o r the h a nd i ndic a tin g the height of the person co m in g n ext poin t t o

.
, ,

h im an d then u se the open h a n d a s if to beck on t o co m e an d a t the s a m e

, ,

ti m e n od the he a d .

C o m p a n io n ; i n co m p an y .
( C o m p are R e l a t i o n sh i p ) .

The t w o f o re n g e r s a r e extended an d pl aced together w ith their b ac k s ,

u pw a rd This sign is a lso u sed f o r H u sb a n d ( L ong )

. .

held m otion less together to uchin g thro ugho u t their

T w o f o r e n g e r s ,

l en gth in fron t of bre a st b a c k s u p w a rd ( C hey e nne I ) ,

. .

The fore nger of e a ch h a nd extend ed , poin tin g str a i ght to the fron t
an d j o i ned ( a ll other n gers o f both h a nds closed ) h a n ds horiz on tal , ,

b ack s u p w ar d o n level o f the sto m ach a n d c l ose t o the body ar e car

, , ,

ried forw a rd for a bo u t eighteen i n ches with a c u rved u p w a rd m ove m ent ,

so th a t when the si gn is co m pleted the n gers a r e on a level w ith the

u pper p a rt o f the bre a st poin tin g obliq u ely u pw a rd ( Da ko ta I ) Ih,

. .

sep ar able , u ni te d , eq ual .

The a r m s are exed before the body an d the h an ds i n type posi t ion ,

( S ) approxi m a ted p al m s i n cont a ct before the chest The ar m s ar e

, ,
.

t hen se m i exten ded a n d the i nd ices i n type posi tion ( J ) , h orizon t a l are
-

, ,

crossed the h a nds th us in si tu describe a w a ve li k e m otion forw ard

, , ,
-

a s in goin g on on e s w ay togeth er w ith o n e to who m we a r e a tt a ched

.

( O to a n d M i sso u r i I )

A f rien d wh o is de a r an d a cco m p a nies m e
. .

Both h a n ds cl osed ( M ) an d bro u ght withi n t wo i n ches o f e ach other ,

index n g e r s poin tin g o u tw ard , then l e t both h an ds m ove o utw a rd a

-

foot or so ( C o ma nch e I ) . .

Tr a velin g . Se e Fr ie n d

For life . S e e H u sb an d an d W i f e the S a m e

, , E q ual .

C o m M o r e M o st
p a r i so n ; , .

In co m p a ri son the si gn s for L i t t l e an d B ig ar e u sed as represen t

in g m ore m ost ( Da ko ta I )

. .
,

C o m p l a i sa n c e .
( C o m p are G l a d ) .

C o m p u l si o n .

I ta li an sig n The th u m b is held u n der the chi n to i nd ic a te bein g l a id

u nder n ecessity .
( Bu t l er ) .
 72

C o n te m p t . I ns u l t .
( C o m p are D i sg u st ) .

C l ose
or sh u t the ri g ht h a nd a nd h old it dr a wn to w ard t he chest a n d
on a level wi th it with the p al m up a n d the sh ut n gers an d th u m b
,

u p ; an d the expres sion of con te m pt is give n b

y extendin g o u t t h e h an d
and a r m directly in fro m the body a t the s am e ti m e o p en i n g the th u m b ,

an d n gers w i d e an d a p art so th a t a t the ter m in ation o f the m otion the

,

ar m i s n e ar l y extend ed an d the th u m b a n d n gers al l r adi a ti n g o ut a s

if it w ere fro m t h e center o f th e h and , an d the p al m o f the h a n d still

poin ti n g u p w a rd ( Oj i b wa I II ) . .

In dic a te by t urn in g fro m the obj ect m ove both h a n ds an d a r m s to ,

ri gh t o r left with p al m s o utw ard a s if i n the a ct o f p u shin g a w ay the

, ,

person or obj ec t ; st a n d erect or le a n b ack a litt l e ( Oj ib wa IV ) . .

observ a tion s a gree with Dr M a tthews con nectio n wi th b a d , ( se e

My .
,

p 2 6 Introd u ction to the S t udy o f S i gn L an gu a ge , by G M a llery ) an d

.
,
-

.
,

al so wi th Gil l l an ( l o c ci ta t o ) a s expressin g the highest degree of con

o
,

te m pt at t h e s a m e ti m e the con te m pt is ex p ressed by fa ci al e m otion s .

(D a ko t a D eriv a tive of b a d

.

This i s expressed by the si gn for B a d b ut the m otion is m ore forci ,

bly m a de If the person at whose e x pe nse the si gn is m ade is p resen t

.
,

the h an d is m oved tow ard h i m an d the fa ce is so m eti m es a verted fro m

h im .
( M a n da n an d Hi da tsa

I ta li a n sign Thr ust

foren ger a nd the l ittle n ger c a l l in g th e
o ut the ,

gest ure by a n a m e very si m il a r i n so u n d to g To t urn u p the .

n ose a t ( E n gl ish phr a se ) i s tr a n sl a ted into the Ita li a n gest u re by doin g

the thin g i t describe s an d pos sib l y o wes it s ori gin to the s a m e gestu re
,
.

( B a t ten )
C o n ten t . S ee G l a d .

C o rn .

S am e the si gn for the A r i k a r a I n d i a n s which see Plan ti ng

as ,
.

co r n is m a de wi th the righ t h a n d n e a rl y as ( U ) poi n tin g to w a rd the gro u n d ,

a t the righ t side of the body a nd m oved a lon g a s tho u gh drop p in g the
'

gr a i ns of cor n in to a hi ll a n d then the h a nd i s t urn ed so th at the n gers

,

poin t u p w a rd which prob ably i n dic ates th a t the corn h as been p la nted
,
.

I a m n o t a w are th a t the sign rese m bles a ny other m ade b y th e S io u x ,

b ut the h a n d is in v ari ably tu rned u p w a rd a t th e ti m e in dic ated above .

( Da ko ta Fro m the p l a n tin g of corn

.

Sa m e si gn as for A r ika r a .
( Kai o wa I ; C o m a nch e I II ; Ap a ch e I I ;
Wi chita II ) .

C ol lect
the n gers an d t h u m b of the right h a n d to a p oi nt , p a ss the
tips u pw a rd fro m the height of the p ubis a s high a s t h e he a d then p r e ,
 '

73

ten d to gr a sp a n i m a gin a ry obj ect hold in g the ra di a l side of the h an d

,

d own w ard tow a rd the left then throw the h an d forcibly on it s b ack over
,

to w ard the ri gh t Represen ts the st al k an d the bre ak in g o ff o f the e ar

. .

S t a ndin g .

C lo se the ri ght h a n d exten d the i n dex holdin g i t u p w ard , b a ck o f

, ,

h a n d n e ar th e gro un d an d gr ad ual l y a nd in terr uptedly elev ated to the

,

h ei gh t o f t h e he a d ( Ute I ) . .

C o r rect . S ee T rue .

C o un t in g , o r n u m era tio n .

The n gers an d th u m bs exp a n ded co un t t e n I n order to proceed .

with the en u m er ation by ten s the h a nds m u st be clin ched an d if a g ai n ,

exp a nded i t co u n ts twenty , a n d so on the h ands bein g clin ched between ,

every ten I n order to indic a te the di gits , clin ch th e h an ds and exten d

.

t h e little n ger o f th e l eft h a n d for on e , e xt end a lso t h e rin g n ger for -

tw o an d so o n th e th u m b for ve these m u st re m a i n exten ded whi l st

, ,

th e th u m b o f t h e ri gh t i s exten ded for six & c A ny n u m ber w i thi n ve , ,

.

a bove a n y n u m ber o f ten s i s in dic a ted by clin chin g t h e left h a nd an d

,

crossin g the righ t over it w ith the req u i site n u m ber o f n gers exten ded
, .

Fo r the n u m ber of si xteen exh ibi t the si g n o f ten a n d th en exten d fo u r

,

n g ers an d t h e tw o th u m bs i n the order of en u m er a tion f o r seven teen ,

p roceed by extendin g the foren ger of the ri g h t h a nd , a n d so o n to
t wen ty In th is m an ner a ny su m can be denoted a l w ay s h oldin g the
.
,

b a c k s o f the h a nds u p w a rd When en u m er ati n g a sm all n u m ber where

.

a con si d er a ble exe rtio n o f the m e m ory is req u isite , the Indi a n s ex ten d

the left h a n d with the p al m u pw ard w h ilst w i th t h e i ndex of the right

-

the n gers ar e s u ccessively ben t into t h e p al m begi n nin g a s before wi th ,

the little n ger a n d the gre a ter d ifc ulty i n rec a lli n g t o m i n d the n u m
,

bers or events the m ore a pp aren t resist an ce i s offered to the in e xio n o f

th e n ger ( L ong ) .

E lev ate the i ndex n g e r a nd m ove it forw ard to in dic a te o n e , twi ce

-

for t wo , etc W hen cou nti n g on the n gers begin at the l eft h a n d
. .

Wied ) .

S ho w the req u ired n u m ber of n gers ; the syste m of ten s obtain s .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

L eft h an d hel d to , o n a leve l wi th , a nd in fron t o f the sho ul der ,

up

ri gh t h a n d p a rti a ll y closed , fore n ger slightly exten ded a nd ( 2 ) to u ched

s uccessi vely to the n gers o f the l eft h a nd fro m little n ger to f o r e n
g er Thi s is th e abstr a ct ide a o f co u n tin g ( C h ey enne I )
. . .

L eft h an d ( P ) exten ded i n fron t of body , then w i th the righ t h a nd , of

w hich the th u m b an d foren ger ar e exten ded ( K t a p with the fore
10
 3
. 74

n ge r the ri g h t h a nd e ach n ger an d th u m b of the left ha nd c l osin g

of
t h e n ger a t the ti me of t a pp i n g, it indic a tin g th a t i t h a s been co u n ted .

Where m ul tiples of t e n are to be u sed , o n e or both h ands , as m ay be

req u ired ar e h eld i n fron t o f the body n e a rl y to geth er w i th n ger s
, ,

exten ded p al m o u tw a rd h a n d s u prigh t an d the n gers closed and

, , ,

Opened as o f ten as m ay be n ecess a ry .

Yo ur re m a r k s o n p ag e 2 3 of In trod ucti on to the stu dy of si gn l an

'

g u a ge ,

a fter K oh l s sig n for
"ua ntity m any m uch ,are correct That

, ,
.

o bserver h a s w itho u t do ubt con fo u n ded these sign s , a s I h a ve seen

m a n y In di an s belon gin g to di ff eren t tri b es u si n g the sign he gi ves for

, ,

q u a n tity i n co u n tin g an d i f there i s an y one un i vers al si g n i t i s th is one

,

for cou n ti n g ( Da ko ta .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig ns M ove a ltern a te l y e a ch foren ger on the tips
o f a ll the fingers .
( L a r so n )
To u ch the fi n gers on e a fter an other with on e n ger .
( C r o ss )

C ou n tr y , L an d .

Poin t tow a rd the g ro u n d a sh or t di st a n ce before the body , sli gh tl y

stoopin g , an d directing the eyes to the s a m e poi n t ( A bsar o ka I ; S ho .

sh o u t a n d B a na k I )

W hen the cou n try is a t a di st an ce the st is
.
,

th rown tow ard the gro un d o u ter ed ge dow n at a r m s l en gth i n the , ,

,

di rection o f the loca tion of the region .

My .

Firs t m ak e
the sig n for C o u n t r y fol lo wed by t h a t for M i n e ( A b , .

sa r o ka I ; S h osh o n i a n d B a n a k I )

Whe n posses sio n is elsew here the .

ar m i s extended in th a t direc t io n which , w ith the si g n for P o sse s ,

si o n si gnies M y co untr y the sign for the l a tter bein g dropped

, ,
.

C o ur t sh i p .

P l a ce the closed right h a n d n e a r the h ip the i ndex extended an d p oi n t ,

i ng forw ard the th u m b extended tow a rd the left an d u p w a rd at right

,

a n gles to the a xis o f the i n dex then m ove the h a nd forw a rd to a r m s

,

length , rota ti ng the h a n d a nd fore a r m ( l u rin g m otion ( Kai o wa I C o .

m a nch c III ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wich i ta I I ) .

C o w .

The tw o f o r e n g e r s bro u gh t u p to the side o f the he a d an d exte n ded

o u tw a rd s so as to represen t the position of the horn s ( Dun ba r ) . .

( 1 ) S ign f o r B i so n ; ( 2 ) m otion of m i lk in g m a de w ith bot h h a nds .

( C he y enn e I ) .

H old the croo k ed righ t index the righ t side of the he a d to r ep re at

sen t the h orns , and then m a k e the si g n for F e m a l e ap plied to an i ,

m al s ( Da
. ko ta I )

H orn s a n d sex

. .
 75

C o i va r'il , c ow a rd i c e ; S ee Fe a r .

C ra n e .

O penboth h ands , m ove t he m fro m the sides of the chest outw ard : an d
b ac k w ard ( as i f swi m m in g , b ut n e a r th e then close t h e r ig h t
h a n d , le avin g the fore n ger ext en ded an d sli ghtly curved ; p ass it fro m
before the chin , upw a rd forw a r d , an d sl i ghtly dow n w ard for m ing an
, ,

ar c to i ndic a te the lon g nec k o f th e bir d

( Da ko ta V ) . .

C ra z y o r d e m e n te d .

R a ise righ t h a n d with n gers p artly distended , a bove the he a d the

, ,

h a n d d roopin g an d m ak e q uick circles close a roun d t o p of the he a d from

,

ri ght to left , an d a sh a k e o f the h e a d ( Oj i bwa IV ) . .

ove th e ope n e d ri gh t h a n d through

M a circle above an d a round the
he ad ( Da ko ta I V )
. H e a d turn ed . .

Pl a ce
clin ched ri gh t h and ( C w ith th u m b cl ose to forehe a d ) , turn the
h a nd till p al m fa ces ou tw a rd then m ove it to th e fron t sli ghtly ( C hey
, .

en n e II ) .

Sa m e the si gn for A n g e r , n ot m a de however w ith as m uch force

as

a n d o m itti n g an y decided fa ci a l expression ( Da ko ta I )

Deriv a ti ve . .

o f a n ger

.

C ro w .

Fin gers a n d thu m b o f right h a nd brou ght to a p oin t and m otion of

pec k i ng sli gh tly m a de ( C hey e nne .

C uttin g an y t hin g in p i e ce s .

Dr a w the right h a n d p al m b a ck w a rd n gers poi nted obliquely

, ,
up

w a rd tow ard the left , four o r v e ti m es ac ross the a dv a n ced left h a nd ,

fore ar m a n d ar m e a ch ti m e at a di ff eren t pl ace ( Da ko ta IV )
, ,
. .

With an a x .

W i th the righ t h a n d a ttened ( X ch an ged to ri ght i n ste ad of left ) ,

p a l m upw ard m ove i t down w ard tow a rd the left side repe at edly fro m
,

d i ff eren t elev ation s endin g e a ch strok e at the s a m e poi n t ( Da ko ta 1 , V )

,
. .

Fro m th e a ct of fellin g a tree .

Repe a t the si gn f o r A x several ti m es m ak ing the cuts fro m dif f er ,

-

ent poi n ts , b ut ter m i n a tin g a bout t h e s a m e pl a ce e ach ti m e ( Da ko ta .

V I H ida tsa I I ; A r i ka r a I ) .

With
k n ife a .

L eft h a n d ( NI 1 ) extended i n fron t left side of body o n level bre a st ,

'

a n d the r igh t h a n d ( S ) brought crosswise over the e xtended n gers j ust

 76

below t h e k n uc k les ( Da ko ta I ) C u t tin g ythi n g i n w it h

. . an t wo a

k n ife .

(I) L eft
h an d open a ttened a nd hel d ou t, n gers of righ t h a nd a lso
,

open and a tten ed a nd pl aced a bove left h a nd , little n ger to w ard p al m

of left h a nd ; ( 2 ) suddenly dr a w n on ce o r t wi ce a cross t h e p a l m of t h e
left h a n d t o i m i ta te th e ac t of cuttin g ( C hey enn e I ) . .

With th e righ t h a nd o r i ndex only i m it a te cu tti n g , , the left fore n ger

as if i t were a stic k ( Da ko ta VII ) . .

The h a n ds are held as in si g n for K n i f e an d then th e r ig h t h an d i s -

m o ved upon t h e left crosswise to represe n t t h e a c t of cu tti n g ( M a nd a n .

a n d H id a tsa I ) .

Deaf -
m a te r
n a t u a l sig m Pl a ce th e forenger of o n e h a n d upon t h at
of th e o t her ,
a nd sl i d e it a lo n g in i m i t ation o f t h e a c t ion ( Ba l lar d ) .

U se the sh ut h a n d s as if to cut a stic k w ith a k n i fe .

( H asensta b)

Da n c e m et , C a lu .

The h a nd extended with the ed ge up w a rd , an d wi th the ar m w a ved

side w ay s w ith a m otion li k e th a t o f a swin g ( L o ng )
,
.

Da n c e , To . Da n c i n g .

Rise o n toes an d fal l two or three ti m e s ,

th e h and s an d a r m s by th e
side n atur a lly . Oj ib wa I V ) .

Fi n gers a nd th u m b of the ri ght h an d hoo k ed ( E ) h a nd horizont al ,

b a ck outw a rd a t the right side of t h e b ody i s c a rried up an d dow n sev

eral ti m es wit h a m oder a tely q uick m ove m en t , endin g e a ch a t the s a m e
-

poi n t i n i m ita tion o f the u p an d dow n m otion o f the body in In di a n

,

d a n cin g con sistin g i n k eepin g ti m e w ith t h e legs t o the t o m t o m ( Da

,
-
.

ko ta I )
Fro m a m ethod of d a n cin g
. .

Dan ge r .

C rouch the body sli gh tly ben d t h e k nees for w ard ben d the h e ad for
, ,

w a rd r a ise the shoulders a trie exten d bo t h h a n ds i n fron t n a tura lly ,

, ,

p a l m s down bend elbow a t ne a rly righ t a n gles , ri ght h an d i n a d va nce

,

o f left m o v e both slowly dow n a f e w in ches an d h old still ( Oj i bw a I V )

. .
,

R igh th an d w ith rst an d secon d n gers exten ded ( others closed ,

th u m b restin g on third n ger ( N except th a t the h an d i s horizon t al ,
b ack up w a rd ) , directly forw a rd in front o f the righ t shoulder and th en
dr a w n b ac k a t the s a m e ti m e th e body is throw n b ack C a utio us p ra .
,
 '

den t ind ic ated i n this si gn The ide a bein g t h at t h e person sh al l

ar e .

be c a utious i n hi s m ove m en t s as there m ay be d a n ger a he a d ( Da .

ko ta I ) .

Brin g the body q uic k ly t o an erec t posture a t th e s am e ti m e g a zin g ,

in ten tl y tow ard th e expected sour ce o f d an ger wi th a look of fright .

( Wy a ndo t I ) .

Pl ace
h a nd in fron t of bre ast ngers h ook ed a s though holdin g a ,

k nife b a c k ou tw a rd ( F 1 , horizon t a l a n d b a c k outw a rd ) then m ak e

, ,

m oti on a s t hough cu tt in g o u t the he a r t rst with the down w a rd m ove ,

m en t t urn in g b ack o f st up w ard , then with the quick m ove m en t 11 p

w a rd throwin g b a ck ou t w a rd a g ai n ( S a h ap ti n I )

C uttin g o u t the . .

he art .

Brin g the right h a n d fro m the right side an d b a ck o f t h e body a s if

gr aspin g a t wi g brin g the h a n d before t h e bre a st , m ak e the sign for
,

B a t t l e , for N 0 , an d for G 0 ( Ap a che I ) In for m a tion o f the co m i n g

. .

o f th a t w h ich w ill c a use a gh t , o r question a ble security an d a desire ,

t o g o r a ther th a n e n coun ter i t .

gerons
I) an .

The left st pl a ced horizon t ally before th e lower en d of the stern u m ,

t h e ri gh t fore a r m p a ssin g before it poi n tin g to th e front an d left so th a t ,

t h e st i s a bout four i n ches before th e left Then r aise the left st .

sli gh t ly an d t h ro w i t forw ard a nd do wn to the s a m e h orizon forcibly ,

followed by the righ t which for m s a l a rger se m icircle an d ce a ses before
t h e l e f t a s previ ously ( Ka io w a I ; C o m a nch e I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II )
. .

Da r k n e ss .
( C o m p are N i g h t ) .

M a k e th e
si gn for S u n then ex ten d the h a nds hori zo n t ally for w ard
, ,

b ac k s up w ard an d p a ss on e over t h e other two o r three ti m es touch i n g

,

it ( L ong )
. .

Both h a n ds spre a d o ut a t an d cross vertic all y p a st e a ch other before

the face a nd n eck ( C h ey enn e I ) . .

Sam e as the sign for N i g h t or C l ou d s .

( Da ko ta I ) .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig n Poin t at y our
eyes p artly sh ut an d then turn
your face to the sk y w ith y our h an d w avin g over your he ad ( C r oss ) . .

Da u g h t e r . See R e l a t i o n sh i p , d a ug hte r .

Da y .
( C o m p a re S u n and E me )a st ; an d Lon g , in l a p se o f ti .

Pl ace both h a n ds a t so m e dist a n ce i n fron t of t h e bre a st a p a rt an d ,

b a ck do w n w a rd elev ate t h e i ndex n ger a n d m ove i t for w a rd to i ndi

,

c ate on e t wi ce for two , e tc

,
Wied ) This is still in u se The hold in g
. . .

up of the index ng e r s is n ot essen ti al When the h a nds ar e held as

-
.
 d escri b ed t hey ar e nother a n d then m ov ed
r st p l a ced ne ar to on e
. a

a ssi sted I re m e m
"

a part as y ou
,
suggest S in ce m y m em ory is
. be r t hi s
si gn w e ll ( M a tthe w ) There is n o observ a ble d i ff eren ce i n ei t her e xe
. .

c a tion or c onception between the sign ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) an d Wied s

( B o te ler ) .

M ak e a circle w it h the t h u m b an d foren ger of both h a nd s in s i gn of

th e su n .
( B a r to n )
Brin g bo t h h an ds si m ulta n eously fro m a posi t ion in fron t o f th e body ,

n gers ex t ended and j oi ned , p a l m s d ow n o ne a bove th e o t her , fore a r m s

horizont al i n a circu l arly sep ar a tin g m an ner to their respective si de s
, , ,

p a l m s up a nd fore ar m s horizo nta l ; i e everythin g i s Open Th is . .

,
.

si gn i s the reverse o f th a t f o r N i g h t ( A r ap a h o I ) . .

A nother si gn m ay be indic ated by m a k in g the sign for S l e e p an d ,

o n e n ger t ouched o r held up a bove bein g t h e equi v a len t o f on e sleep ,

,

one d ay ( A r ap a ho I )
. .

Fo r e n g e r of ri gh t h a n d croo k ed a nd held tow a rd the e a s t t o r ep r e

sen t the sun h a nd elev a ted , n ger u pper m ost a nd p assed in a se m i circle
,

do w n tow a rd the west Bot h h a nds sligh tl y spre a d o u t a nd elev a t ed t o

.

a point i n fron t a nd con sider a bly a bove th e he a d t h en brou gh t down i n ,

se m icircle to level belo w sh o u l ders en d in g wi th outspre ad p a l m s up w a rd .

( C hey e nne I ) .

W hen spe ak i n g of a d ay t hey p a ss the n ger slowly a lon g the en tire

,

v ault o f h e a ven co m m en cin g a t the ea st an d ter m i n a tin g in the w est

, .

This is the si gn f o r o n e d ay ( Oj i bw a .

Bo t h h an ds loosely extended , p a l m s down , the ri ght lyi n g over the

l eft ; then p a ss the m outw a rd tow a rd their respective sides turnin g t h e
p al m s up i n so doin g ( A bsar o ka I ; Sho sh o n i and B a na k I ; Wy a n do t I )
. .

Both h a nds ( W ) are r aised above the he a d the exten ded n gers hori
z o n t al pointing tow a rd e a ch other ( m eetin g ) , p a l m s dow n a r m s meces
, ,

sa r il y so m ewh a t bowed O pen up t h e h a nds so th a t the ngers poi nt

.

upright an d a t once c a rry the a r m s out to their full exten t to the sides
on t h e level of the shoulders brin gin g the p al m s up ( X) ( Da ko ta I ) ,
. .

T h e open in g of the d ay fro m a bo ve
The d ispersion o f d a r k ness .

.

Fro m position s a foot or ei gh teen i nches i n fro n t o f the lower p a rt of

t h e chest , the Open h a nds poin tin g for w a rd , ne a r toget h er , p al m s u p
w a rd a r e to be sep a r a ted by c a rryin g t he m ou t a foot or ei ghteen in ches
, .

( D a k o t a IV )

A l l open . .

A n other : Fro m posi t ion s a f oot o r eigh teen i n ch es in fron t of the low er
p art of the chest poin tin g obli quel y forw ard an d i n w ard p a l m s dow n
, ,

w ar d the right two o r three i n ches a bove the left sep a r a te th e h an ds

, ,
 79
_

about two feet c arryin g e a ch on e outw ard through an are gr adu a lly
, ,

turnin g the p al m s un t il t hey ar e up w a rd U ncoveri ng the sun ( Da . .

ko ta IV ) .

A d ay i s indic ated by m ak in g t h e si gn f o r S u n an d m ovin g t h e ,

h an d th us for m ed fro m the left horizon to t h e r ig h t , for m in g a h alf circle .

_
,

an d indic a tin g t h e course of th e sun th rou gh t h e sk y ( Da ko ta V ) . .

Right h a n d closed for m in g a circle w i th the in dex an d thu m b m ove

, ,

the h a nd 'o m e a st to west followin g the course o f th e su n ( Da ko ta V I I )

, . .

The he a d is turned tow a rd th e orien t an d eyes won derin gly up w a rds .

The right ar m i s then elev ated se m i e xe d to level of left shoulder The -

.

h and i n posi tion ( J 1 ) m odier] by in d ex bein g a little m ore opened ( an d

horizon t a l p al m i n w ards ) Th e h a n d th us poin tin g t ow a rd e a ste rn
.

h orizon i s m ade to tr a verse t h e a r c of the v a ul t o f the he a ven s followed

, ,

by the eyes until i t stops o n level w ith ri gh t sh oulder ar m exten de d , ,

croo k ed in dex poin tin g west O to an d M isso ur i I ) The ti m e between

. . .

the rise a n d en co m p a ssed by t h e co u rse an d setti n g o f the su n .

Both at h an ds w ith p al m s down ar e held horizon t ally before the

bre a st the ri ght over the left t hen throw the m ou tw ard tow ard their
, ,

respective sides t nr n in g the p al m s u p in doin g so ( K a io wa I ; C om a n

,
.

ch e I I I ; Ap a ch e II ; Wi ch i ta I I ) .

C lose the ri gh t h a n d le a vin g the i n dex ben t i n form of a h a lf th e

circle the i n d ex al so exte n ded , then p ass th e h a n d fro m e a st to west
,
.

( Pai Ute I ) .

S ign m a de f o r S u n ,
an d p a ss a cross th e zen ith fro m e a st to wes t .

( Ap a ch e I )
'

Th u m b an d i ndex circled ; sweep h a n d fro m e ast to west a cross th e

sk y . In r a pid use thu m b an d i ndex are often p arted , a n d the h a nd is
swep t through a very short are n ot above shoulder ( Ap ache I II ) , . .

The Fren ch de a f m utes fold th e h an ds u pon e ach other an d the bre a st ,

-

then r aise the m , p a l m s i n w a rd t o bey ond e a ch side of the he a d , .

T o d ay-
.
( C o m p are N o w ) .

Touch the n ose w ith th e index tip ,

an d m otion w ith the st to w ard '

t h e grou n d ( B a r to n ).

( 1 ) Both h and s
xtended , p a l m s outw a rd ; ( 2 ) swep t slowly for w ard
e
an d to e a ch side t o con vey the ide a o f open ness
, ( C hey en n e I ) T his . .

m ay co m bin e th e ide a of n o w w ith op enn ess, the rst p a rt of it rese m

blin g t h e gener a l de a f m ute si gn for H e r e or N o w -

.
 Design a te th e hour si m ply . See ou r .
( A r ap a ho I ) .

Poin t wi th the h a n d to the e a st ,

an d c a rry it slow ly overhe ad to the
w es t .
( I r o quo is I ) .

Fi r st m ak e t h e sign for N o w ,
and th en the sign for Da y . ( Da k o ta
I)
.

Now w i th openn ess .

M ak e the si gn for Da y , to si gn ify the period o f ti m e dis t i nct fro m

ni ght This bein g co m pleted , the righ t h an d w as brough t in m odied
.

position ( I ) fro m t h e st 0p at ri gh t to t h e center of forehe a d ad m ade t o

a

describe a se m icircle forw ard fro m the body tow ard t h e gr o u nd The .

n ger re m ain s h oo k ed a nd p a l m outw a rd a nd down w ard ( O to a nd .

M i sso ur i I )
The d a y th at i s n o w before m e o r presen t t i m e
.
,
.

E ven in g .

Fo r e n g e rri gh t h a nd crook ed as i n si gn for ll l o r n i n g , a n d low

of

ered tow a rd t h e wes t followed by the si gn for N i g h t ( Cheyenne I )

, . .

M ak e the sign for S u n a nd hold it tow ard , t h e w es t ern horiz on .

( A bsa r o ka I ; S hosh o n i a nd B a na k I ) .

The righ t h a nd a n d a r m the for m er in m odied posi tion ( I ) i ndex is

, ,

m ore open ed h an d is horizon ta l a n d p a l m i n w a rd ; execute the si gn for

Da y A t t h e co m pletion o f th i s sign the h an d is q u ic kly everted and
.

a ssu m es type position

( M ) ; i ndex i s m oved to the w est I n t his si gn , .

a s well a s th a t for n oo n m o r ni ng d a y to m o r r o w y este r d ay & c the su b

, , , , ,
.
,

j cet m ust be with his b a c k to the n orth a n d ri ght h a n d west ( O to a n d .

M isso ur i I ) \Vhen the su n goes dow n o r a t the con cl usion o f the d ay

. .

Poin t the ex tended i ndex to the w estern horizon o r a little l ow e r , b y ,

curvin g th e i n d ex i n th a t direction the p a l m bein g bel ow a n d s t ill h or i

,

z o n t al with the shoulder

( Pa i Ute I ) . .

M ak e t h e si gn for S u n , p a ssin g the h an d slowly fro m the western

horizon to a short dista nce below i t hold i ng i t there a m o m e n t , .

( Ka i o u a I ; C o m a nch e III Ap ache I I Wi chi ta II )

v .

H our ,
ti m e o f d ay .

J oi n the tip s of the thu m b an d foren ger of the s a m e h a nd the interio r

out lin e appro xi m a tin g a circle , an d let the h a n d p a use a t the proper
-

a lti t ude e ast o r west of the a ssu m ed m eridi a n ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

i ndic a ted b y m a kin g the sign for S u n , an d holdin g t h e h a n d in

Is
th at portion o f the course followed by the sun to i ndic a te the t i m e to ,

be expressed ( A bsar o k a I ; S hosho ni a n d Bana k I )

. . .

only be a pproxi m a tely told by pl a ci n g the sign f o r S u n i n the

C an
posi tion in the he a ven s correspondin g w ith the hour dividin g the ti m e ,

between sunrise an d su n set in to as m a n y equ a l sp a ces as there ar e

h ours ( Da ko ta I )
. .
 81

orni n g
M .

M ak e the sig n for s u n , a nd hold i t tow a rd the e a s t ern horizon .

( A bsa r o ka I ; S hosh o ni a n d B a na k I ) .

First m ak e the si gn for N i g h t an d then the sign for Da y M orn in g . .

c an l i k ew ise be m a de by si m ply usin g the si g n for d ay ( Da k o ta I ) . .

Dar k ness h a s g o n e d ayli ght h as co m e .

M k e the si gn
a for S u n ,
hold the h a n d below the e a stern h oriz on ,
a nd

m ovin g i t slowly to or a l ittle abov e i t ( Da k o ta V II )

. .

The ar m an d h a nd ( right ) ar e elev ated t o left sh ou lder and the h an d

in m odied p o sitio ii ( I ) i s m ade to describe the sig n for Da y Th e
'

ri ght ar m is then brou gh t ex tended a cross the u pper p ar t o f ches t w i t h

h an d in p osition ( J hori z on t al ; both ar m an d in dex fully exte n ded

tow ard the e a st follo wed by the eyes T hi s m or ning is described i n
,
.

s a m e m a nn er a fter m a k in g the sign f o r T o day ( O to and M isso u r i I ) . .

Th e begi nn in g of a d ay o r to d ay . -
.

M ak e the si gn for S u n an d h old the h a n d t ow ard the e a s tern horizon

,

a short ti m e o r brin g i t a bove th e hor i zon fro m a shor t di st an ce below

,

it , slowly ( Ka i o wa I ; Co ma n ch e I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta I I )
. .

Poi n t wi t h th e extended i ndex to the e a stern h orizon .

( Pa i Ute I ) .

Deaf m u te n a tu r a l sig ns Poin t t o the e a stern horizon

-
an d m ov e the
foren ger a little w ay up w a rd ( Ba l la r d) .

O pen your eyes an d fro m the open h a n d r a ise yo ur he a d to i ts erect

, , ,

position , a s if you h a ve j ust n o w a ri sen fro m bed ( C r o ss ) .

Noon .

M ak e the si gn for S u n an d hold it tow a rd the zen i th , so th a t the ,

eye c an se e through t h e circle for m ed by th e th u m b an d i ndex

( A bsar oka I ; Shosho ni a nd B a n a k I ) .

M e the sign for S u n holdi n g the h a n d overhe a d the outer edge

ak , ,

up per m ost ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

The h a n d an d ar m ar e elev a ted t o left shoul der an d , w ith n gers in

( I ) position m odied b y i n dex bein g m ore open , hori zon t al an d p a l m t o
, ,

t h e bre a st begi n the si gn for Da y

,
This si gn i s then h a lf executed , .

an d th e h a n d stopped in
aline w ith t h e m iddle o f the forehe a d The .

in dex i s then m a de t o poin t to the zen ith The h a nd , w hen a rres t ed , is .

in type position ( I ) ; i t i s quic k ly everted a n d a ssu m es posi t ion ( J ) t o

com plete the sign ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) The h alf course of the sun
. .

o r m id dl e of t h e d ay

.

To m orro w -
.

Describe the m o t ion of the su n fro m e a st to west . A n y n u m ber of

d ays m ay be coun ted up on the n gers ( Bur to n) .

11
 82

Si gn for N i g h t followed by si gn for S u n r i se .

( C heyenne I ) .

J oi n the ti ps o f the thu m b a nd foren g er of the s am e h a nd the in te ,

rior ou tl i ne a pproxi m a tin g a circle an d describe therewi th a sp ace fro m ,

left to righ t correspon din g to the supposed course of the su n d uri n g

,

t wen ty fo ur h ours
-
To distin guish a n h our let th e h a n d p a use at the
.
,

proper a lti tude , e a st or west of the assu m ed m eri d i a n See H o u r . .

( A r ap a ho I ) .

First m ak e
the si g n for S l e e p ; then follow by counti n g on e ( see
C o u n t i n g) a n d n is h with the si gn
, for S u n r i se

O n e n igh t s .

sleep .

Brin g t h e h a nd to side of he ad a n d w it h he a d reposi n g in righ t p a l m , ,

eyes closed he ad a n d h an d i n clinin g to the righ t which i s the sign

, ,

for S l e e p Thi s co m pleted , the ri gh t ar m an d h a n d are brough t a cross

.

the top of th e chest a n d describe the si gn for Da y or T o d a y This

,
-
.

sign a s is ev iden t is a co m pou nd sign co m prisi n g th a t for S leep , Day

, , , ,

or l o ( l a y ( O to a nd lIisso ur i ) The d ay a fter we sleep

'

-
. . . .

M ak e the sign for Da y on ce then reverse it an d stop a t the poin t i n , ,

the he a vens i n dic a t in g th e in tended ti m e of the d ay I f noon , poi n t .

d irectly up w a rd s To express t w o or m ore d ays m ak e the si gn for Da y

.
,

an d hold u p the proper n u m ber of n gers

( I r o q uo i s I ) . .

Deaf -
m ute na tu r a l sig n Pl a ce the h an d on the chee k , i ncline the he a d ,

a nd shu t the eyes to den ote S l e e p , an d then r ai se the he a d a nd open

,

the eyes to signi fy A w a k e a nd h old up the fore nger to den ote 0 n e ; ,

th a t is to say i n one d a y Ba l lar d ) ,

. .

Yes t erd ay .

M ake w ith th e left h an d the ci rcle which the su n descri bes fro m su n
ri se to sunset o r i n vert the direction fro m sun set to sun rise with the
,

r i ght h a nd ( B ur to n ) .

Si gn for N i g h t and S u n se t .
( C hey e nn e I ) .

The si gn for Da y , T o m o rro w , t h e m o t ion reverse d ( A r ap a ho I )

-
. .

O m it the sign for S u n ri se ; otherwi se as Da y ,

To -
nl o r l o

w .

( Da ko ta I ) H a ve slept on e nigh t
. .

The gh t h a n d an d a r m are elev a ted an d w ith h a nd in type posi tion

ri , ,

( I ) , m odi ed by index bei ng m ore opened horizon t a l , a nd p al m to the ,

bre a st m a de to execute the sign for Da y A t the con clu sion of t his
, .

sign the n gers are all collected dr oopingl y ex t ended , touch at poin t s
sli gh tly curved I n this position the h a n d m a k es a sudden forw a r d
.

m ove m ent to the groun d ( O to a nd M i sso ur i I )

The d ay or sun t h at
. .

h a s gone down .
 83

M ak e the si gn for N i g h t , followed by th a t f o r B e f o r e

.
, in ti m e .

( Ka i m oa I ; Co m a nc he I I I ; Ap a che I I Wi chi ta I I ) .

D e a d , d e a th .

Throw the forenger fro m the perpendicula r i n to a h orizon t al positi on

tow a rds the e a rth , w ith th e b a c k down w ard ( L o ng ) . .

H old the left h a nd at over the fa ce b ac k outw ard , an d p a ss w ith the ,

si m il a rly held right h a n d belo w the for m er gen tl y stri kin g or touch ,

in g i t ( Wied ) The sig n gi ve n ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) h as n o si m il arity

.

in execution or con ception with Wze d s ( Bo wler ) Th is si g n m ay con

'

.

vey the ide a of u nder or buri a l q uite di ff eren tly executed fro m

,

m ost others reported Dr M c C h esney conj ectures this si gn to be th a t of

. .

wonder o r surprise a t he a rin g of a de ath but n o t a distin ct si gn for th e ,

l a tter .

The nger of the rig h t h a n d p a ssed to the left h a n d an d then c a st

down .

Pl a ce the p al m of the h a nd a t a sh ort distance fro m the side o f the

he a d th en withdr a w it gen tly in an oblique down w ard d irection an d
,

in cl in e the h e ad an d upper p art o f the body in the s a m e direction .

( Oj ibwa II ) This authority n otes th a t there i s an a pp aren t conn ectio n

.

betwe e n thi s con ception an d exec u tion an d the ety m ology of the corre
sp o n di n g ter m s i n O j ibw a : he dies is n ibo ;

he sleeps ,

,
is m m The

.

C O m nn m ide a expressed by the ges t ure i s a si n k ing to rest The origi .

n al si gni c a nce of the root n ib see m s to be le a n in g a nt be ia i t i s

,

le a ni n g ; ( uzibekwe h i he inclines t h e he a d s id e wa m The word m ba

'

or n ibe ( on ly in co m pou nds ) con veys the ide a of n ight perh a ps a s th e ,

fallin g over the goin g t o rest o r the de a th of the d ay The t er m for

, , ,
.

le af ( of a tree or pl a n t ) which i s a nibish m ay sprin g fro m the s am e

, ,

roo t le aves bein g the le a nin g or dow nh an gin g p a rts o f the pl a n t Wi th

,
.

this m ay be co m p a red the Uh ah t a te r m for le a ves lite ra lly tr an sl a ted ,

tree h air .

H old both h a nds open with p al m s over e a rs extend n gers b a ck o n

, ,

br a in close eyes an d i ncli ne body a little forw a rd an d to right or left

, ,

very l o w an d re m ain m otionless a short ti m e pron oun cin g the word

, ,

[ f e n ce
bo o slowly ( Oj ibwa I V )
. .

L eft h a n d a tten ed a n d held b a c k upw ard th u m b i n w a rd in fron t of ,

a n d a few i nches fro m the b re a st Ri ght h a nd sli ghtly cl a sped , fore

n ger m ore exten d ed th a n the others an d p a ssed suddenly u nder the ,

l eft h a n d the l a tter bei n g a t the s a m e ti m e gen tly m oved to w a rds t h e

,

bre a st ( Chey enn e I )

. G on e u n der
. .

Th e left h a n d i s held slightly a rc h ed p a l m down ne a rl y at a r m s , ,

len gth before the bre a st ; the right extended a t p a l m down a n d , , ,

 84

poin tin g forw a rd is pu shed from the top o f the bre a st , str aigh t for
w ard un derne a th , a n d beyon d th e left ( S ho sho ni a nd B a nak

.
,

Both h an d s horizo n ta l in fron t o f body b a c k s outw ard index of e a ch , ,

h a n d a lon e extende d the righ t i nd ex i s p a ssed u n der the left w ith a

,

down w a rd ou tw a rd an d th en u pw a rd a n d i n w ard c u rved m otion a t the

,

s am e ti m e th a t th e left i s m o ved i n w a rd tow a rd t h e body t w o or

three in ches the m o v e m ent s bei ng ended o n t h e s a m e level as begun
,
.

U pset k eeled o ver

,
M a n y de a ths repe a t the sign m a ny ti m es
.

,
.

The si g n furnished you before I h a ve sin ce a scer tai ned is n ot u sed ,

in the sen se of de a d de ath The si gn cred ited to Ti tehhe mcitski ( C hey

,
.

euue I ) expresses gon e u nder , bu t is n o t u sed i n the sen se o f de a th

de ad , b u t goi n g u nder a cover , as en terin g a l odge , u nder a t able etc ,

.

( Da ko ta I ) .

M ak e the sig n fo r A l i ve , then the si g n for NO .

( Da ko ta I V ) .

H old the left h a nd p al m down w a rd and b ac k w ard a bout a foot i n

, ,

fron t of th e l ower p a rt of the chest a n d p a ss the ri gh t h an d fro m b e ,

hind forw ard underne a th i t O r fro m an uprigh t position in fron t o f

.

th e fa ce b ac k forw a rd i ndex extended a nd other n gers cl osed c arry

, , ,

the righ t h an d down w a rd an d for w ard underne a th th e left an d abou t

four in ches beyond i t gr a du a lly turn in g the righ t h an d u n til i ts b ac k

is up w a rd and its i ndex poin ts to w a rd the left ( Dako ta IV ) G on e . .

und er or buried .

left h and sli ghtly ben t w ith the p a l m down before th e bre a st
H ol d th e , ,

th e n p a ss the exten ded right h a nd poi ntin g tow ard the left forw ard , ,

un der a n d beyon d the left ( Da ko ta VI , V I I ) . .

H oldthe righ t h a n d a t p al m dow n w a rd before the body then thro w

, ,

i t over on its b a c k to the ri ght m a k i n g a curv e o f a bout fteen i nches

,
.

( Da ko ta V I ; H ida tsa I ; A r i ka r a I )

.

E xten d
righ t h a nd , p al m down h a n d curved Turn the p a l m ,
. up in
m ovin g the h a n d d own tow a rds the e a rth ( O ma ha I ) . .

The coun ten a nce is brought t o a sleepin g co m posure w i t h the eyes

closed Thi s coun ten an ce bein g gr a d u ally a ssu m ed , th e he a d n ext
.

falls tow ard eith er shoulder The a r m s h a vin g been closed an d . ,

crossed upo n the ch est w ith the h an d s in type posi tions ( B B ) are
rel a xed a nd drop si m ult aneously tow ard th e ground , w ith the fa ll of
the he a d This a ttitude is m ainta ined so m e secon ds ( O to a n d M isso ur i
. .

I ) The bo d ily a ppe ar a nce at de ath

. .

Pl a ce
the open h a nd b a ck up w ard , ngers a little dr a w n together , at
,

the height o f the bre a st poin tin g for w ard then m ove i t slowly for
,

w ard an d down w a rd turn in g it over a t the s a m e ti m e ( I r o quo is I ) . .

To express gone i n to the e arth face upw ard

,
.
 85

The at righ t h a nd is w aved outw a rd a nd dow n w a rd to w ard the s am e

side , the he a d bein g i ncli ned in the s a m e d irection at th e ti m e w ith ,

eyes closed Wy au do t I )
. .

H old t h e l e f t
h an d loosely extended abou t fteen i n ches in fron t of t he
bre a st p al m d own then p a s s th e i n dex pointin g to the left , i n a sh ort
, , ,

curve do wn w a rd forw a rd a n d up w ard bene a th the left p al m ( Kaio wa

, . .

I ; Co m a nche I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

Bring the le f t h an d to the left bre a st h a n d h alf cl inch ed ( l l ) , the n

,

brin g the ri gh t h an d to the left w ith the th u m b a n d foren ger in such

a p osition a s i f y o u w ere goin g to t ak e a bit o f strin g fro m t h e n gers

o f the left h a n d a nd pull th e righ t h a n d o ff as i f y o u were stretchin g a

,

strin g o u t , exten d the h an d to the full len gth o f the ar m fro m y o u an d

let the inde x n ger poin t o utw ard a t th e con cl usion o f the si gn ( C c .

m a nche I )
S oul goin g to h a ppy h un tin g groun ds
. .

Cl ose both eyes an d after a m o m en t throw the p al m of the righ t

,

h an d fro m the face dow n w ard a n d outw a rd tow ard the right side the ,

h e a d bein g dropped i n th e s a m e direc t ion ( Ute I ) . .

Touch t h e bre ast w ith the extended an d j oi ned n gers of the ri gh t

h a n d then throw th e h a nd p al m to th e left ou tw ard tow a rd the right ,
, , ,

le a n in g the he a d in th at direction a t th e s a m e ti m e ( Ap a che I ) . .

P al m of h a n d up w a rd then ,
a w a ve li k e
-
m otion tow ards the grou n d .

( Z uri i I ) .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig ns Pl a ce the h a n d u pon the cheek , an d shut the
eyes ,
an d m ove the h a n d down w ard .
( Ba l l ar d )
L et your he a d lie on the open h a n d w i th eyes shu t .
( Cr oss )
U sethe ri gh t shut h an d a s i f to dr aw a screw d ow n to fa sten the l id
to the co f n and t o k eep the eyes upon th e h an d ( H ase nsta b ) . .

M ove the he ad tow a rd the shou lder and then close th e eyes ( L ar so n ) .

The Fren ch de af m ute concepti on is th at o f gen tl y fa llin g or sin k in g

-

the ri ght i ndex fa llin g fro m the h eigh t of the right sh oulder u pon the
left foren ger , tow ard w h ich the he ad is i nclin ed .

Die To;
,

Ri gh t h a nd , foren ger extended si de up , for m in g with the thu m b

,

a n ( U ) ; the other n ger s sli gh tly curved , touchin g e a ch oth er the little ,

n ger h avi n g its sl d e tow ards the groun d M ove the h an d right an d left, .

then forw ard , sever a l ti m es ; then turn i t over s u ddenly , lettin g i t fall
tow a rds the e a rth ( O mah a I ) A n an i m al w oun ded , b ut st a gge ri n g
. .

a l ittl e before i t fa lls an d dies

.
 Dy in g . .

H old th e l eft h an d as i n de ad , p a ss th e index in the s a m e m a n ner

u n dern e ath th e left b u t in a slow gen tle in terrupted m ove m en t ( Ka i
, , , .
.

"
ou a I ; C o m a n h
c e I I I ; Ap a ch e l I ; Wi ch i ta I I )

S tep by step ; inch .

by in ch .

ne arly bu t recovers
, .

H ol d t h e left h an d a s i n d ea d; p a ss th e i n dex with a slo w , e a sy , inter

r up t e d m ove m en t d o w n w a rd , un d er t h e left p al m a s i n dy i n g , b u t -

before p a ssin g fro m u n der th e p al m o n the oppos ite return th e i ndex in

the s am e m an n er to poin t of st artin g then elev a te it ( Ka iow a I ; ,
.

Co m anc he I I I Ap a ch e II ; Wichi ta I I ) .

De a f .

The tip o f th e ri g h t i n dex is in serted i n the r i gh t e ar w ithdr a w n a n d ,

rot a te d aroun d th e org an ( Da ko ta I ) Th is w oul d see m to in dic a te

. .

a n oi se i n h
t e e a r preven tin g he a rin g
.

De e p .

Ri gh t h a n d wi th n gers exten ded j oin ed b a c k ou tw a rd en ds of n gers , , ,

poin ti n g str aigh t dow n is c arried down w ard i n fron t o f the right side
,

of the bod y to n e a r t h e grou n d th e bo d y bein g in clin ed forw a rd a t the

,

s a me ti m e , tou chin g the groun d , i n d ic a ti n g th a t al th ou gh deep the bot

t o m h a d been re a ched ( Da ko t a.I )

Fin di n g th e depth of w a ter etc.

,
.

Pl a ce
the at h a nd p al m down se ver al feet fro m the e arth or a t
, , ,

such elev a tion to show depth a nd p a ss i t sl owly to on e side ( Da ko ta

,
.

VI ; H ida tsa I A r i ka r a I ) .

B eer .

The ri ght h and exten ded upw a rds bv the ri ght e ar wi th a q u ic k p u

from the m outh ( Dunba r ) . .

The fore n ger of th e right h an d i s extended vertic ally w ith the b a ck ,

tow a rd the bre a st ; it is then turn ed fro m side to side t o i m i tate the ,

m otio n of the a n i m a l w hen he w al k s at h is leisure ( L o ng ) . .

Pa ss th e uplifted h a n d to a n d fro sever al ti m es in fron t o f t h e fac e .

( W i ed ) I h a ve gi ven y o u m uch the s a m e si gn for whi te t a iled deer -

bu t I h a ve s aid th a t all n gers except the index were ex e d Thi s , , .

m a y n ot be a bsol utely essen ti a l in m a k in g the si gn , whi c h is si m ply de

signed to i m it a te the peculi a r m otion of the t ai l w hen the an i m a l stan ds
observi n g ( M a tth e ws ) The righ t ar m i s elev a ted to th e front of the
.

body an d the righ t i ndex n g e r in positi on ( M ) , proj ected forw ard se v

-

er a l ti m es The h an ds , w ith extended a n d di vergen t n g ers as i n posi

.
,

tion ( P ) a r e now pl a ced a side of the he a d to represent the an i m al s

,

h orn s The right in dex n g e r is n o w extended full len gth a n d w a gged

.
-

behin d The above O to sign differs fro m th a t o f Wieds i n execution , an d

.

i n the l atter t h e conception is w a n tin g , wh ich is the a ni m a l wi t h br an ch

in g h orn s th a t r u n s in j u m ps ( Bo teler ) . .
 87

E xten d th e th u m b s th e two f o re n g e r s of e a ch h a n d on e a ch side

an d

of th e he ad .
( Bur to n )
Bothh a nd s , n gers ir regul arly ou tspre a d an d ele v a te d to sides of
he ad to represe n t ou tspre a d h orn s of deer ( Ch ey en ne I ) This si g n i s . .

m a de by our de a f m utes -
.

W i th th e ri gh t h a n d fron t of the b ody on a le vel wi th th e bre a st

in
an d a bou t ei ghte e n i n ch es fro m i t , b a c k of h a n d to th e ri gh t ( S

m a k e q uic k si de wi se m oti on s wi th th e h a nd i n i m it a tio n of th e m otio n

of th e deer s tai l w h e n ru n ni n g The wri st is xed in m a k i n g t h i s

.

si g n C o rr r ect e d fro m si gn before gi ven ( Dako ta I ) M ove m ents

. . .

of th e deer s t a il wh e n ru n n i n g

.

H an d s a pplied to e a ch te m ple , n gers spre a d an d poi n tin g up w a rd .

( Da ko ta I I ) H orn s
. .

B rin g ri gh t h a n d to a level w i th the sh oulder , th u m b an d fore n ger

curved , th ree n gers curved a nd ne a rly cl osed ( x ) M ove th u m b a nd .

fore n ger forw ard , wrist m oti on alon e , i m i t a tin g th e m ove m e n ts of th e

a n i m al aha I ) Th e deer ru ns

( O m . . .

Si m il a r to th e precedi n g , but w i th wrist an d a r m m otion , w itli h a n d

r a ised h i gh a bove th e h e ad ( O ma h a
The deer boun d s a w ay
. .

H old th e ri gh t h a n d d ow n , exten d i ndex n g e r , thu m b tip touch in g -

ti p of m iddle n ger ; sh ak e i ndex n g e r r a pidly -

.
( O m aha I)
.

The
deer goes al on g r a pid ly , m ak i n g i ts t ai l sh ak e .

H ol d ri gh t h a n d n ext to left shoulder , th u m b crossi n g m id dle n ger

at rst j oi n t ; m ove i n dex ng e r b ac k a n d fort h to an d fro m left sh oulder
-

( O ma ha l ) .

The deer s t a il sh ow s bri gh t or red in th e d ist an ce a s i t
le aps a w ay .

Si m il ar to th e precedi n g , b u t th e h a n d i s h eld infron t on a level w ith

the fa ce a n d m o ved ri gh t a n d left ( O m a h a I ) . . The deer s t ai l sh ows
w h ite sud denly .

Th e ri gh t ar m i s elev a ted an d th e ri gh t i nde x exte nded i s th row n

forw a rd sever a l ti m es Th e h a nd s wi th e xten de d an d d i vergen t n gers
.

a s in posi ti on ( I ) , ar e pl a c e d a sid e th e h e a d to rese m ble the br a n ch i n g

h orns F i n a lly th e ex ten ded i n dex n g e r i s w a gged fro m the se a t o f

.
-

body ( O to a n d M i sso ur i l ) Th e br a n chi n g h orn s , short ta i l a n d

. .

le api n g m otio n of th e a n i m al .

I m i t ate th e m otion of a d eer run ni n g by cl osin g the h an d , p al m d o wn

w a rd , excep t th e two f o r e n g e r s, w hi ch ar e only a little ben t dow n w ard .

Th en m ove th e h a nd for w a rd fr om you wi th a r ath er slow up a nd dow n - -

m otion , sligh tly m ov i n g th e t wo f o r e n g e r st h e w h ole desi gned to

 88
m imic th e l on g j u m ps wi th w h ich a d eer starts o If n ecess a ry to ex

pl a i n th i s furth er , p l a ce on e h a n d on e ach sid e of th e h e a d to represe n t

h orn s ( I r o quo is
.

P l ace both h a nd s , a t , w i th n gers an d th u m b s spre ad , on ei th er

side of th e h e a d a n d a sh or t d i st a n ce fro m i t ( Ute I ) . .

P l a ce th e h a n ds with n gers fully exten ded an d s p re a d a b out twel ve

i nch es fro m ei ther sid e of th e h e a d an d sli gh tly above i t ( Ap ach e I ) . .

B l a c k t ai led [ C a r ia ca s m a er o tt s ( S ay ) , Gr ay ]
'

-
.

F irst m ak e th e gestu re for De e r th en i ndic a te a t ail ( Wted ) .

-
.

Wh e n h e s ays i nd ic ate a t a il , I h a ve l i ttle doubt th a t h e re f ers to th e

sign I h a ve a lre a dy gi ve n y ou for d eer , blacktai led ( M a ndan and B ida t .

sa I ) I do n o t th i n k i t i s ei ther essen ti a l or co m m on to m ak e th e pre

.

ced in g gesture ei th er r st or l a s t ( M a tthews ) .

E xtend both h a n d s n gers close together pl a ce th e m w ith p a l m s to

, ,

fron t o n e a ch side of th e foreh e ad , n gers u p w a rd , a nd t he n m ak e sh ort

m otions b a c k a n d for t h i n i m i t a ti on of th e m ove m en ts of th e l a rge e a rs
o f th e a n i m a l ( Da ko ta II ) . .

Wi th th e ri gh t i nd ex i ts p al m i n w a rd th e ri gh t si d e , at th e hei gh t
, ,
on

of th e hi p , p ass th e l eft i n dex , b ac k for w a rd , fro m i ts m i ddle forw ard to

.

i ts e nd ( Da ko ta IV ) Th a t m uch bl a ck
. . .

Th e left h a n d i s h el d pen den t a sh ort d i st a n ce i n fron t of th e chest ,

.

t h u m b i n w a rd , n ger e nd s a pproxi m ated to e ach oth er as m uch a s

p ossi ble ( i e wi th th e l st a nd 4 t h dra w n together u nd er th e 2 d an d
. .
,

3d ) . Th e ri gh t h a n d i s th en cl osed a rou n d the left ( p a l m to b a ck an d

co veri n g th e b ases of th e left h a n d n gers ) a n d dr a w n dow n w ard , sti ll
-

closed , u ntil i t i s en tirely dr a w n a w ay Th i s si gn see m s to represen t th e

.

a c t of s m ooth i n g do w n the fu sifor m tu ft a t th e en d of th e a ni m a l s t a il

.

( M a nda n a nd H i da tsa I .) .

M o ve the ri gh t h a n d , i ts p a l m obliqu ely for w a rd an d dow n w a rd , fro m

side to side t wo or th ree ti m es a bou t a foo t , throu gh a n arc of a circle ,
a t th e hei gh t of th e h i p , o n th e ri gh t side ( th e t a il of th e deer ) ; th e n

w i th the p al m i n w a rd an d th e n gers poi n tin g forw ard , c a st th e h a n d

for w a rd se v er a l ti m es th rou gh an arc of a bo ut a foot to i m i ta te th e
j u m p in g of a deer ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Th e ri gh t h a n d is h eld upri gh t before t h e chest , al l n gers bu t the

i ndex bei n g be n t , t h e p al m bein g turned a s m u ch to the fron t a s possi
ble Th e h a nd i s th en w agged fro m side to si de a few ti m e s r a th er
.

slowly The a r m is m oved sc a rcely or n ot at al l T h i s si gn represen ts

. .

th e m otio n of th e deer s t ail ( M a n da n and H ida tsa I ) .

.
 89

E lev a te the fore a r m to th e hei gh t of el bo w p oi n ti n g forw ard e x the , ,

t en d th e a tten ed h a nd , poi nti n g u p w a rd wi t h th e p a l m for w a rd ; the n ,

th ro w th e h a n d ri gh t a nd left se vera l ti m es the m o t io n be i n g rot a tio n ,

of the fore ar m ( Ar i /ca r d I ) F ro m th e m otio n an d wh i te appe a r a nce

. .
.

of th e deer s t ail i n r un ni n g .

De a nce I def y yo u
. .

P oi n t to the person y ou d efy to d o th e act wi th th e righ t i nde x

( others closed ) , a n d then tur n th e h a nd ex ten d th e n gers so th at they ,

w il l a ppe ar as gured i n ( V ) , w h en the h a n d is dr a w n i n to th e body w i th

con sider abl e force Th i s w oul d i ndic ate Co m e a nd do i t, bu t th e e mp h a
.

sis o f the m otion a n d a cco m p a nyi n g fa ci a l ex p ression i nd ic a te so m e

thi n g stron ger th a n i nvi t a tion ( Da ko ta I ) . .

The ri gh t h an d closed wi th th e i n de x o nly extended an d sl i gh tl y

crook ed p al m fa ci n g fron t ; h old about twen ty i n ch es i n fron t of the ch est
,
-

a n d w a ve th e n ger fro m sid e to si d e , m o ve m en t bei n g m a d e at th e

wri st ( K aio wa I ; Co m a nch e II I ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wi chi ta I I )

.
-

I ta li a n sign E very . tyro i n L a ti n k n ows th a t extend in g th e m iddl e or

li ttle nger , gestures still m a de every d ay at R o m e , w a s a to k e n of
scorn or de a n ce .

B ite th e foren ger , co m m on ly wi th th e j oi n t ne arest th e en d ben ta

gesture wh ich th row s l i gh t o n th e bi ti n g th e th u m b a t m e , wi th w h ich
R o m eo an d J u lie t co m m en ces .

Wh e n on e w ou ld k i ll th e h opes of a m end ic a n t an d say he w ill give

n oth i n g w i th e m ph a si s , h e blows o n h i s h an d an d sh o ws i t wide ope n to
th e peti tioner or ele v ates on e foren ger , sh ak in g i t gen tly to an d fro .

D e it y ; G o d ; G r e a t Sp i r it ; G r e a t F a t h er ; M a st e r o f
Lif e .

B lo w u po n th e open h a n d poi n t up w ard w i th the extended i ndex

,

n ger w h ilst turni n g th e cl osed h a n d h i th er a nd th i th er , then s w eep i t

above th e e a r t h an d al lo w i t to drop Wi ed ) I h a ve ne ver see n th is
. .

si gn I o nce extr acted a bul let fro m the leg of a de a f an d d u m b Indi a n

.

of Si ou x descen t w h o h ad l i ved l on g am on g th e Ari k ar a s W he n th e .

oper a tio n w as co m pleted h e m a de so m e preli m i na ry si g n ( for th a nk s )

wh ich I d id n ot observe wel l , an d the n poi n ted to m e an d u p w ard
to th e sk y O n e of th e best i n ter p reters in th e coun try , w h o w as a b y
.

st a n der , told m e th at the In di a n th an k e d m e and th e G re a t S p irit I .

say

m e

rst as h e rst poi n ted i n m y d irecti on ( M a tthe ws ) There .

i s n o si m il a ri ty i n the si gn ( O to I ) a n d Wied ( B o te ler ) .

W h en spe ak i n g of th e Gre a t
Spiri t th ey usu ally m ak e a reveren ti al
or ti m i d gl a n ce u pw a rd s , or p oi n t th e foren ger perpen dicul a rly b ut
gen tly to th e sk y ( Oj i bw a I ) . .
 the sig n f o r S a c r e d a nd then

F irst m ak e m ak e t h e si gn for B i g
' '

( Dakota I )

. Th e gre a t S acred B ei n g .

F i rst m ak e th e s ig n f o rp l e d i c i n e m a n , an d the n a fter pl aci ng -

th e opened rel a xed h a n ds , p al m s iii war d , a bout six i n ches a p art , up?
ri gh t , j ust above th e he ad , m o ve the m ap a rt to ar m s le n gth ; ( Dako ta -

IV ) A th un der clou d co m i n g u p a n d spre ad in g

. .

P oi n t tow ard th e zeni th , all o w in g th e eyes to follo w th e s am e d ire c

tio n ( Da ko ta VI I )
. .

Th e a r m s a r e exed an d bo th h a n ds ele v a ted open as i n p osi tion r e p :

rese n ted ( W ) Wh e n h an d s a r e el ev a ted on sid es of h e a d on a le vel
.

Wi th th e eyes a u ni for m s w ayi n g to a n d fro m o ve m en t i s perfor m ed ,

followed by a n u p w a rd m ove m en t of ri gh t h a n d as i n h a nd p osi ti on ( J ) .

(O t o I )

H
. i m a bove wh o i s a n a n gel
on th e wi n g
.

Cl ose th e righ t h a n d le a vi n g th e i ndex str a i gh t a n d e xte n d ed ( or

,

sli gh tly c urved ) ; h ol d i t before th e fa ce , m ove th e h a nd qu ic k ly forw a rd

an d d ow n w a rd for a d ist a nce of a b out si x i n ch es th en p a ss th e i nd ex ,

vertic ally u p wa rd before th e fa ce a bout a s h i gh a s the top of the h e a d .

( f ie l ) .

E le v a te h a n d tow ard sk y , d el i ber a tely ; loo k i n g u p w a rd .

( Ap a ch e II I .
)
E xten d th e righ t h a nd wi t h the i ndex poi nti n g u p w a rd the eyes al so ,

bei n g turned up w ar d .
( Wi chi ta I ) .

Deaf -
m ute na t ur a l. sian s
F i r st cl ose th e h a n d exce pt i ts fore n ger
.
~
.
,

an d then m ove i t u p sl o w ly a n d al so turn th e eyes to w a rd t h e cl ou d s

w it h a sole m n expression ( H a senstaJL ) .

To loo k u p to he a ven , a t th e s a m e ti m e to poi n t with the tb re n g c r a s

if to poi n t t o h e a ven ( Zeiq ien ) .

B e p ar t . S ec G o .

D e s t r o y e d ; a ll gon e ; n o m ore .

The h a n d s h eld h orizon ta lly , a n d th e p a l m s rubbed to geth er , two or

th ree tin i es rou nd th e ri gh t h a nd i s th en c arried of f fro m th e oth er i n
, ,

a sh o r t h oriz on t a l cur ve ( L o ng ) R ub b ed ou t Th is rese m bles th e

'

. . .
,

E di n b urg an d ou r d e a f m ute si gn f o r forgi ve or cle m en cy th e r ub

-

bi n g o u t of offen se .

L eft
h a n d h el d i n fron t , out spre a d , p a l m u pw ard , ri gh t h an d n gers -

e xtended , p al m d o wn , swept r a p idly a cross p a l m of left R i gh t h a n d .

so m e ti m es h el d ou t a fter p a ssin g o ve r th e left wi th n gers w i d e spre ad

a n d sh a k i n g a s if e xpressi n g ba d i n the sen se of n o g o o d ( C he y enne I ) . .

M ove both h a n d s as i f i n act of re n din g a s u n der or te a ri n g i n p ieces

an d throw in g a sid e wi th vi olen ce an d sudden j er k s of h a nd s an d ar m s .

( Ojib wa IV .
)
 91

E xh austed con su m ed co m p leted

, ,
.

The left h a n d , ex te nded p al m up w a rd p oi nti n g di a gon ally forw a rd

, ,

a n d to t h e ri gh t , i s pl a ced b efore th e chest T h e n the ri gh t h a nd .

,

p al m do w n w a rd , is l a id tra nsversely o n th e left , an d , wh ile the left r e .

m a i n s sta ti o n a ry th e ri g h t i s c a rried forw a rd a foot or m ore wi t h a

,

r a pid s weep To sh o w a gr a d u a l di m i n utio n a n d the n e xh a ustion the

.
,

ri gh t p a l m revol ves on the left once or ofte ner w ith a gra d u a l m o tion ,
as i f so m e p l a stic su bst a nce were m a de sp heric a l between t h e p al m s
.
.

( M an dan a nd H i da tsa I ) .

P l a ce the ope n left h a n d in fron t of th e n avel , p al m b a c k w ard , a nd

m ove t h e O pe n ed righ t h a nd , p a l m do w n w a rd i n a h ori zon t a l circle ,

a bove i t ( O to I ) All c a u gh t, k i lled , or destroyed T at s th e en d

. . h .

of i t
.

This si gn rese m bles t h a t for G 0 The ri gh t ar m , exed a n d th e

.
,

h a nd i n p ositi o n ( B
,
m odi ed b v bei n g m ore h ori zont a l i s brough t ,

to the epi g a stri u m Th e a r m i s th en su dde nly extend ed , h a n d li k e wise ,

.

w i th n gers exten ded a pproxi m a ted , p a l m s d ow n w ard The le f t h a n d .

in the s a m e p osi tion a p pro a ches th e sid e of th e ri gh t both no w bei n g i n ,

type p osi ti on ( W ) , d iverge an d sweep b ac k w ar d ( O to a nd M i sso ur i I )

-
. .

Al l gone or swept a w a y .

B y f orce .

I m i t a te the bre akin g of a stick i n t h e two h a n ds a nd th rowin g th e

pieces a w ay , th en l i gh tly stri k e th e p al m s an d open n gers of th e h an ds
toge th er a s i f bru sh in g d ust o ff the m The a m ou nt of force u sed an d .

th e co m pl eteness of th e destruction i s sh ow n by gre ater or less vigor of

a cti on an d fa ci a l expre ssion ( Do dge ) .

A n yt h i n g of little i m port an ce , an d by a ccident or desi gn .

In dic ate th e obj ect, th en sl i gh tly stri k e th e p al ms a nd ope n n gers of

th e h a n ds together , a s i f b rush i n g d ust o ff fro m th e m ( Do dge ) .

R ota te th e ri gh t p a l m up on t h e l eft as if rubbi n g so m ethi n g i nto

s m al ler fr a g m en ts ( Ka i o wa I ; Co ma nche I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II )
.
'

R ubbi n g ou t gri nd i n g to to s
; a m
.

R aise both h an ds to p osi ti on o n righ t of fa ce n gers e xten ded sep a , ,

rate , a nd p oi ntin g up w a rd , p al m s fa ci n g e a ch o th er ( R 1 , righ t an d left )

then with a n e nergetic m ove m en t thro w both to left side , as th ou gh
th ro w i n g so m ethi ng viole n tly to th e grou nd ; the n pl a ce h an ds n e a r
together a n d m ak e sign for A l l g o n e ( S a h ap ti n I )
B ro e n i n to
k
. .

p ieces ; n othi n g of i ts for m er self re m ai n in g .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sig n I m it a te the

.
-
ac t of bre ak i n g an d m ove t h e
h an d s in a curve in opposite ( Ba l lard )
 92

Rui ned .

A n article m i gh t be destr o y ed m i ned by bre a k in g , w hen the si gn f o r , ,

br e a k m i ght be u sed i n con n ection with th e si gn f o r the p a rti c u l a r a rti

cle destroyed ; s am e by r e : bu t th e ide a o f r u bbed o ut as con t a ined ,

i n g o ne, appe a rs to be the prev a lent o n e ( Dako ta I ) . .

S pen t .

Brin g both h an ds together i n fron t of th e bre a st the left h a nd under ,

the righ t h orizon t al at p a l m up w a rd n ger s ex t end ed obliquely t o

, , , ,

w a rd th e ri gh t ( X ) righ t h a n d with n gers exten ded obliquely tow ard

,

the left a t p a l m dow n w a rd ( W ) o n the p al m o f the left slide the two

, , ,

p al m a r surfaces over e a ch other m ovi n g the h an ds sli ghtly in w ard a n d ,

outw ard ( Da ko ta I ) Rubbed on t

. . .

Dia l o g ue . See S p ea ki n g .

D i f f e r e n t c o n t r a st e d , .

First a n d second n gers o f ri gh t h a n d exten ded sep ar a ted ( others ,

closed ) i s p a ssed fro m t h e ri ght bre a st ou tw a rd w i th b ac k of h an d

, ,

tow a rd the righ t forefin ger poi nti n g obliquely u p w ard , an d the second
,

n ger poin tin g str a i gh t ou tw a rd or forw a rd ( Da ko ta

The ide a of .

t h i s is con t a in ed i n contr a sti n g the a ppe ar a n ce of t h e t wo n gers ; one

o f th e n gers is so an d the other is n o t so i e n ot the s a m e d ifferent . .
, , .

Di r ty .

P oi n t to the grou nd with t h e ri ght index a n d then c a rry the h a n d in ,

fron t o f th e fa ce w it h n gers sep a r a te d h an d upri gh t , b ack outw a rd

, ,

( R ) m o r e u p an d d ow n an d a rou n d a s though coverin g the fa ce an d

, ,

bre a st s ( Da ko ta
. Dirt fro m the groun d coveri n g t h e fa ce etc ,
.

D i sc h a r g e o f a g un . S ee G u n .

of an A rrow . See A r ro w .

D i sg u s t ( C o m p a re C o n t e m p t )
. .

E xtend both h a nds q uic k ly outw a rd fro m n e a r the fa ce p a l m s out ; ,

t urn a w a y the fa ce sligh tly fro m the obj ect o f di sgust ; exte n d the h an d s
a n d a r m s but p a rtly
( Oj ib wa IV ) . .

T ap th e left bre a st ( h e a rt ) wi th the righ t h a nd n gers exten ded , ,

b ac k ou tw a rd then the h a n d is c a rried forw a rd out ward i n fron t of th e

,

r ight bre a st , so th a t the p al m is up i i g e r s extended , poi ntin g out ward , ,

'

h an d h orizon t al ( X ) , w h ere it is sligh tly rota ted o r curved a fe w ti m es ,

an d then c a rried directly outw a rd tow a rd t h e right b ack outw ard
, .

( D a ko ta I ) I a m n.ot ple a sed or s a tise d

.

S i gn for S u r p r i se , W o n d e r , then turn the he a d over the left

as

shoulder , retai ni n g the h an d over the m ou th ( O m a ha I ) A s a t the . .

si ght of a de a d body .
 93

S h ake the h e a d slowly fro m side to side , at t h e s am e ti m e th rowi n g

the open ri gh t h a nd p al m dow n , outw a rd tow ard th e right side ( Wy
,
.

a n do t I ).
.

A vert the he a d a n d m a k e the si gn of N e g a tio n .

( Ap a che III ) .

N B
. . In n a rr a ti ve , si m ply d isapp ro va l .

D i ssa t i sf a c t i o n o r Di sc o n t e n t , .

The extended n ger pl aced tr a n sversely before the si tu ati on of the

he art , rot ate th e wri st two o r three ti m es e n tl y for m in g a q u a rter o f a o

circle e a ch ti m e ( L o ng ) . .

The in dex righ t h a n d held tr an sv e rsely before th e he art an d rota ted

fr o m the w rist sever a l ti m es ( Da ko ta 1 ) H e art ill at e a se ; di sturb
.

a n ce o f the org a n O u r abori gines , li k e m odern E urope an s poetica lly

.
,

reg a rd the he a rt a s t h e se a t o f t h e a e ct io n s a nd e m otion s n ot select ,

i n g th e liver o r sto m a ch a s other p eoples h a ve don e wi th gre a ter physio

logic a l re a son .

Di st a n c e , Lo n g ; Fa r .

P l a ce the h a nd s close together a nd then m ove the m slowly a sun der ,

so sl owly th a t t h ey see m as i f t h e v would n ever co m plete the gesture .

A C h ey e n ne si gn Thi s si gn is a lso m ade to in dica te gre a t a n tiq uity i n

.

tim e ( Report o f Lieut J W

. of h is ex a m i n a tion of N e w M exico
. . .

in the ye a rs 1 84 6 4 7 E x Do c N o 4 1 3 0t h C on g ress 1 st session p

-
. . . .
, , ,
.

( 1 ) H e a d dra wn b ack elev ate d eyebro w s con tr acted as i t loo k in g

or ,

to gre a t d ist a nce righ t h a n d r aised t o level of c h in p al m upw ard : ( 2 )

, ,

pushed forw a rd w ith a curved m otion i n th e direc t ion in which the

spe ak er i s look in g ( C heyenne I ) . .

A slowly a scendin g m ove m en t o f the exten ded h a nd ngers j oi ned , ,

from the body an d in t h e direction desired to be i n dic ated ( A r ap a h o I ) . .

R a ise t h e righ t h an d to a n a tur al position th u m b below th e tw o rst ,

n gers then the a r m wi th risin g m otio n as hi gh a s top of he ad stretch

, ,

in g it ou t as f ar as possible ; then bend the h an d down w ard the a r m ,

fallin g slowly "adv an ce t h e body sl i ghtly without m ovin g feet ( Oj i b .

wa I V .
)
Righ t h a n d fore n ger o f whi ch is extended and poin ts forw ard ( oth er
,

n gers cl osed ) p al m tow a rd the left is extended in fron t o f the ,

bre a st a s f ar as the ar m wi ll re a ch , the body bein g in cl ined forw a rd at

the s am e ti m e the exten ded posi tion m a in t a ined a m o m en t a nd then the
,

body an d h an d ar e brought b ack with a m oder a te ly q uic k m ove m ent .

To a l i m ited a n d very in denite exten t dist a nce i s so u gh t to be expressed

by the di st a nce th e ar m i s extended an d the am oun t o f l e an in g forw a rd .

( Da ko ta I ) Distan ce
. .
 94

Fro m a n u pri g ht posi tion j u st i n fron t of the ri gh t shou lder a n d a

little a bove i t p al m forw a rd , n gers rel axed and thu m b a ga in st the
,

i ndex m ove the right h a nd forw ard a nd up w a rd through an a r c to

,

a r m s len gth a n d to the height of the he a d gr a d u ally turn ing the p a l m

,

down w ard .

O r wi th the n gers a t righ t an gles with the p a l m , poi n t in g t o w ar d t h e

'

left an d thei r b a c k s forw a r d th u m b in p al m m ove th e ri ght h a n d fro m

, ,

the ri ght shoulder forw a rd an d up w a rd to a r m s len g t h The left h and ,

.

it s b a ck forw a rd to be held i n front of the ri ght bre ast

, ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

E lev a te the rig h t h an d to a position i n fron t o f the chest , drop the

i n dex n g e r to w a rd the ground then m o ve it forw ard a nd up w a rd rest
-

, ,

i n g i t o n a lin e slightly a bove the horizon , the eyes foll owin g the dire c
t ion indic a ted The ide a o f m uch gre a te r dist a n ce or to i nten sify the
.
,

ex t re m e d ist a nce in ten ded is done by m a k in g the gesture a little ,

q uick er tur ni n g the nger hi gher a t t h e e nd of the sig n an d throw

, ,

in g b a c k the he a d sligh tly ( Da ko ta V ) . .

the a t h an d in fron t of the chest pen den t then ge n tly i n dic a te

Pl a ce , ,

a course fro m before the b ody to a r m s length fi n gers poi n t in g a b ove

-
,

the horizon ( Da ko ta VII ) . .

Descri b e the cur ve by r a isin g the h a n d a b o ve a nd in fro n t o f the he ad

( J ) in de x ex ten de d m ore to the right o r left a ccordin g t o the direction
,

inte nded a nd the h an d t h a t is u sed ( O ma ha I ) Go around in th a t . .

w ay .

A nother Th row the righ t h an d b a ck w a rd over the sh oulder i n dex

:
,

exten ded the n up w ard a n d forw a rd ( O m a h a I )

,
. .

A n other R a ise the ar m abov e a nd

: fron t o f the he ad , then poi n tin g
for w a rd w ith ind e x, shoot the h a n d f o r am t o a r m s len gth h ori zon t all y

.

( O m a ha
The a r m s a re folded an d the h a nd s i n type position ar e a p p r o xi ,

m a ted before the chest The a r m s a nd h an ds then widely di verge fro m

.

the body to signify inten ded sp a ce existin g bet ween two obj ects or per
son s as the c a se m ay be ( O to a nd Mi sso ur i
,

Wide exten t o f sp a ce
.

between .

P ointwith t h e extended i n de x a t a r m s len gth a little above the h ori

zon th e eyes follow in g the s a m e direction ( Pa i Ute

, .

Push the h a nd forw a rd a nd a little dow n w ar d ( T o n edge p a l m in ) ; ,

repe a t with h an d a little higher a ga i n an d a ga in e ach ti m e hi gher a nd , ,

fa rther f or w ard ( Ap ach e I l l ) O ver sever a l m ount a in s

. . .

Deaf -
m ute na tu r a l sig ma E xtend the foren ger forw a rd ,
an d look i n to
the dist a nce .
( B a ll a r d ) .
 95

Ben d i n g
slowly your body f orw a rd move y ou r outstretched h a nd , ,

with your eyes look in g over a gre a t sp ace in the direction the h a n d ,
'

m oves ( Cr o ss)
.

M ove the open h an d u p i n a h orizon t a l l in e fro m b a c k to fron t an d ,

at the s a m e ti m e blow li gh tly fro m the m ou th ( Ha sensta b )
, . .

S ep a r a te the t wo sts fro m e a ch other .

( L a r so n )
H al f w a y .

M ake si gn o f for F a r a w a y a nd then brin g th e h a n d h alf w av b a c k

to the sh ould er ( Da ko ta l V )
. .

S hort .

S a m e m otion h an d a s g r e a t d i st a n c e on l y project ar m for w a rd

of
,

a li ttle do n ot r ai se so hi gh a n d drop m ore q uic k ly w rist an d h an d

,
,

ben t down m ore no m ove m en t of body ( Oj ib wa IV )

, . .

T he foren ger left h a n d extended str a i gh t upri g ht ( J except p a l m ,

outw a rd ed ge of n gers side w ise ) is held o n t h e level of the eyes 1 8

.

in ch es l l l fro n t an d t h en the r igh t h a n d in the s a m e posi tion ( J etc )

, ,
.

i s ca r r ied up w a rd close t o the body as h i gh as th e ri g ht eye an d th en ,

directly for w a r d to n ea r th e left h a nd ( w h i ch i s st a tion a ry ) a little to the ,

ri gh t side a n d be h in d it so t h a t th e exten d ed f o r e n g e r s a r e n ea r ly o n a
,

line a n d w ith their p a l m ar surfaces outw ard ( Da ko ta I ) A ppro a ch . .

ino
5 7
2
'

co m in g ne ar a n y person or o b ie c t .

H ol d right h an d as for F a r a w a y
the , an d pl a ce i t in fron t o f the
ri ght bre a st a nd close to i t ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Do , T I h a ve don e i t
o . .

T h row t h e opened ri gh t h and p al m i n w ard fro m an uprig h t position

, ,

i n fron t o f the righ t shoulder for ward a n d do wn w a rd un ti l i t is horizon

t al a n d eigh teen i nches i n front of the ri gh t bre a st ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Do it ag ai n ( C o m p are R e p e a t )
. .

Pa ss th e Opened righ t h a nd p al m b a ck w a r d str a i gh t across fro m

, ,

ri gh t t o l eft ei gh teen in ches in fron t o f the chest begi n n in g a l ittle o u t ,

side o f t h e li ne o r the righ t side an d stoppi n g in fron t o f the ri gh t

"

bre a st ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

D o c t o r Physici a n ,
.

M ak e m otion s an d m ove m ents of he a d a n d body a s i f h untin g an d

ex am i ni n g herbs a n d roots also by si gn s of s m ellin g an d t a sti ng , an d
, ,

a s if holdi n g t h e th in g g a thered poin t w ith the ri gh t h a nd m otion a s

, ,

if t o drin k or sw a llow ( Oj i b wa I V ) . .

Ri gh t h a n d closed le a vin g the rst two n gers exten ded and slightly
,

sep a r a ted , ele va te to before the forehe ad and m ove the n gers circul ar
1y , p a ssin g the h a n d sli ghtly u pw a rd at the s a m e ti m e .
( A bsa r o ka I ) .

S uperior k n owled ge .

M ak e the sign s for W h i t e nl a n ,

and Sh a m an .
( Da ko ta V I,
V II ; H i da tsa I ; A r i ka r a I ) .

The left h a nd i s exten ded as i n ( W ) an d the h a c k o f i t rubbed by

i n dex o f ri ght h a nd exten ded a s in ( J ) o t h h and s a re then brough t

. i

t r e m b h n g l y t o sides of ch e st a s i n type The h a n ds are then c a rried

to the sides o f he a d an d exten ded i ndices press th e te m p l es Th e righ t .

h an d is then swept vertic a lly ed gewi se up before the face an d ret a ined
th u s sever a l second s ; left fa ll s t o side ( O to I ) O n e di stin guished . .
,

w ho rubs together or writes th a t which re m oves in w ard distress .

First m a k e the si g n for h i t e "I a n which m ust be quic k ly fol

,

lowed by pl a cin g th e closed ri gh t h a n d before the fa ce le a vi n g the ,

i ndex a nd secon d n gers extended a nd sep a r a ted the n rot a te t h e h a n d ,

i n p a ssin g i t u pw a rd a n d forw ar d to the hei gh t of the top o f the he a d .

( K a io w a I ; Co m a nch e 11 1
; Ap ach e I l ; Wi ch i ta

S uperior k nowl
ed ge .

Ri gh t h a n d closed with t h e index only ex te nded elev ate to before the ,

forehe ad an d m ove ci rcul a rly p a ssin g the h a n d sli ghtly upw a rd a t the
, ,

s a m e ti m e ( Shosh o n i an d B a na k l ) S uperior k n owled ge

. . .

Indi an . Se e M e d i ci n e M an .

Do g .

Pa ss t he a t h a nd fro m a bove do wn w a rd stoppin g a t the hei ght of a ,

dog s b ack ( Wied ) In the O to si gn the h a nd i s open ed p al m dow n

.
,

w ard the w hole the n held a bou t the h eight o f the a n i m a l fro m the grou n d
,

i n p a ssin g fro m side to side b efore the body It i s ev iden t at a gl a n ce .

th a t this si gn a n d Wie d s a r e si m il a r in conception a nd execution The

.

sli gh t di ff eren ce m ay b e a ttributed to the con tributor s m iscon struction

.

( Bo te l er )

Is show n by dr a w in g the two f o r e ng e rs sli ghtly open ed horizont ally

a cro ss the bre a st fro m ri gh t to left ( B ur to n) T h i s sign would n o t be.

i ntelligible without k n owled ge o f the fa ct th a t before the in troduction

of the h orse a n d even yet the dog h as bee n used to dr a w th e ten t
'

, ,

poles i n m ovin g c a m p , an d t h e si gn repres ents the tra il Indi an s less .

n o m ad ic who b ui lt m ore subst an ti a l lodges a n d to who m the m a teri a l

, ,

f o r poles w as less preciou s th a n o n the pl ai n s w ould n o t perh a ps , , ,

h a ve co m prehe n ded t hi s si gn an d the m ore gener al o n e i s th e p a l m

,

lowered as if to strok e gen tly i n a lin e con for m in g to the a ni m a l s h e a d

a n d n ec k I t is abbrevi a ted by si m ply lowerin g the h an d to the u su a l

.
 9 7

height of the wo l sh a borigin a l breed a nd suggests t he a n i m al , p ar

ex ce l l enc e do m estic a ted by the I n di a n s a nd m a de a co m p a n ion .

Ri gh t h a n d lowered p a l m down w ard , as if to stro k e a dogs he a d an d

,

b a ck and m oved alon g fro m before b a c k w a rd horizon t a lly con f or m in g

, ,

to the he ad neck a nd b a ck o f a dog , elev a ted or d epressed to express

, ,

d ier e nc e of size ( Chey e nne I )

. .

E xten d spre ad th e ri ght fore an d m iddle n gers an d m ove the

an d , , ,

h an d a bout 1 8 inches fro m left to right a cross the fron t o f the body at
the hei ght of the n a vel p a l m dow n w a rd n gers poin tin g tow a rd th e
, ,

left an d a little down w ard little a n d rin g n gers to be loosely closed the
, ,

thu m b a g ain st the rin g ng e r ( Da ko ta I V ) Represen ts the lo d ge

-

. .

poles a n d tr a v oi s w h ich were for m erly d r a gged by the dogs

.

Fore secon d n gers o f ri ght h a n d ( others closed ) exten ded , se p

an d

a r a t e d V sh a ped , c a rried with a down w a rd w indi n g m otion fro m a bout

-

the left sh oulder i n fron t o f th e body to the ri gh t, the h a n d stoppi n g

righ t side o f the body well to the fron t a t a bout the h ei ght of a good
sized d o g ( Da ko ta .

Fro m the u se o f the dog in carryi n g the lod ge
poles .

Cross the thu m b over the m iddle n ger , three n gers bein g closed
b a c k o f h a nd d own The foren ger curved represen ts t he ta il ( O ma h a
. .

I ) The t a il m o vi ng up an d down as he w a l k s
. .

A n other : H old righ t h a nd i n fron t of y o u thu m b over rst j o int of m id ,

dle nger ( n ot crossin g i t ) foren ger str a i g ht a n d pointin g up ; sh ak e it

,

ri ght and left , m ovi n g i t a bout 6 i nches ( O ma ha I ) The tail , ele . .

v a t e d , sh a k es in the a ir , a s w hen h e scen ts an y g a m e .

I m it a te the quic k , run n in g m ov e m en t of a dog , by m ovin g the h a n d

fro m the bre a st forw a rd p al m do wn w ard , an d a t the s am e ti m e p artly
,

closin g a n d Open in g al l the n gers together q uite r apidly ( I r o quo is .

C lose the ri ght h a nd , le av i n g the in dex a nd secon d n gers only ex

tended an d j oined , hold i t forw a rd fro m an d lower th a n the hip , an d
d ra w i t b a c k w a rd the course followin g the outlin e of a dog s for m fro m
-

he a d t o t a il ( K a to w a I Co m an che I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wich ita I I )

. .

The Fren ch an d A m eric an de a f m u tes specic ally express the dog by -

sn appin g the n gers an d then p a ttin g the thi gh o r by p a ttin g the k nee ,

a n d i m it a tin g b a r k in g w ith the lips .

wol f
O r .

B rin g bot h a r m s together a t wrists an d h a n ds together i n position

( W ) S o m eti m es the si gn i s m a de f urther pl a in by the Indi a n m ak in g

.

an a cco m p a nyin g bow wo w with m outh O I )

H ei ght of a n im a l
( to
-
. .

a n d size

.

13
 98

D o n e , n i sh e d .

T h e h a n ds p l aced edge up an d dow n p ara llel to e a ch other , t h e ,

right h an d wi thout wh ich l a tter is dra w n b a c k a s i f cuttin g so m eth in g

,
.

( D u n ba r)

A n end left a fter cu tti n g i s suggested ; perh a ps our 00 1

l o q uia l cut Short

.

A m otion of cut t i ng wi t h the righ t h a n d .

Both sts clin ched , pl a ced before the chest p al m s fa cin g then dr a w n , ,

a p a r t a n d ou tw a rd tow a rd their r especti ve sides ( A bsa r o ka I ; S h o .

sh o n i a n d Ba na k I ) .

The h an ds pl a ced in front o f body horizont al w i th n gers exten de d , ,

a rched m eetin g n e a r the ti ps th u m b s restin g on tips o f f o r e n g e rs, b a ck

, ,

o f h a nd s outw a rd sep a r ate the t wo h a n ds by c a rryin g to the ri gh t a n d

,

le f t slowly ( Da ko ta I ) Dr a w n a p art an en d left

. .
,
.

Fro m po si tion s a bout 4 i n ches a p a rt a n d a foot in f ron t o f th e upper

p art of the chest t h e upright sts p a l m s fac i n g a re to be sep a r a ted
, , ,

a bout 3 feet , e ach o n e bein g m a de to describe an dir e d own w ard Or -

.
,

a fter p l a cin g th e h al f closed h a n ds ne a r together a nd Opposite e a ch other ,

-

obliquely up w a rd a nd in w a rd a bout a foot in fron t of the u pper p a rt of ,

the chest q uic k ly sep ar ate th e m a bout 3 feet ( Da ko ta I V )

,
We wi ll . .

p art .

The right a r m is exed a little over a righ t an gle an d brought closer

t o the fron t of chest The h a nd in pos ition ( S. m odied by bei n g hori
z o n t a l with p al m tow a rd the bre a s t a n d tips o f index an d ri n g n gers

restin g on biceps d e x o r m uscle o f opposite ar m S o m eti m es the ar m i s .

held in s a m e posture a w ay fro m the body The si gn i s co m pleted by a .

cut t in g stro k e w it h h a nd , edges u p a n d down , fro m left to ri ght ( O to .

I)
. We cut it short ; are done .

H ol dthe left st h ori zon ta lly in fron t o f the body , then p a ss t he a t

a n d extended righ t h a nd ed gew ise quic k ly down w a rd i n front of th e
, ,

left S o m eti m es the ri gh t is p a ssed d o wn in fron t o f a n d by the

. .

k nu c k les o f t h e left ( If ai o wa I ; Co manch e I II ; Ap a che II ; Wichi ta

.
-

II ) C ut o ff
. .

Deaf m a te n a tur a l signs H old both h an ds slightly exten ded with the
-

p al m s down w ard , an d then turn the h an d s over a t the s am e ti m e gi vin g ,

a side m ove m en t t a ri ght an d left w ith e ach ar m ( H a senstab ) . .

S i m il a r to the si gn fo r N o n e ,
m e a n in g
n othi n g m ore .

( B a l lar d)
The French a n d o ur de a f m utes give a cuttin g -
m otion down w a rd with
the righ t h a n d at a righ t an gle to the left .
 99

D o o r , e n tr an ce & c , .

The a r m s ar e elev ate d a n d se m i e xe d before body The h a nd s ar e -

.

the n collected in type position ( U ) a nd tip s o f i n dex n gers m ade to

-

touch The a r m s wi th n ger tips in con t a ct , then appro a ch an d diverge

.
,
-

se ver a l ti m es ( O to I ) The tri a n gul ar en tran ce to th e Wi gw a m open s

. .

a n d sh uts

.

Do ub t . Se e I n d e c i si o n .

Dr a wn o u t .

Both h ands extended i n fron t o f body , th e left on the outside a nd a t

a lower elev a tion th a n the right both h a nds sts , th e left ( B ) the ri ght , ,

w ith b a ck loo k in g to w ard the right ; dra w both ar m s in tow a rd the

body a nd then c a rry out aga in repe a tin g the m ov e m en ts severa l ti m es
, ,

a s thou gh dr a win g o u t for so m e di st a n c e ( Da ko ta

From dr a win g .

o u t o f the w a ter o r hole a person or thin g

.

Dr e a m .

Fir st m ak e th e sign f o r S l e e p , an d then the h an d is c arried down

w ard fro m th e he a d a n d curved up w a rd a n d in w ard to the ri gh t bre a st ,

an d then throw n o u t fro m the body ( turned over ) w ith a down w a rd

curved m ove m en t h a nd turned p arti ally over so th a t the extended

,

n gers poin t tow ard the left p al m of h a n d n e a rl y at thu m b outside , , ,

poin tin g obli quely down w ard ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Dr i n k, d r i n ki n g .

The h a nd is p a r t i ally clen ched so as to h a ve so m ethin g o f a c up sh a pe ,

a n d the Openin g be t ween t he thu m b a n d nger is r a ised to the m outh

a s in the a c t of drin k in g ( L o ng ) .

S coop up wi th the h a nd i m a gin ary w a ter i n to th e m outh .

( B u r to n )
.

of ri gh t h a n d crook ed , thu m b side o f h an d i n w ard

Fo r e n ge r an d

brou ght to m o u th i n up w a rd curve then sudde n ly curved ou tw a rd , an d

down w a rd sever a l i nches ( Cheyenn e I ) . .

Do the h a nd in t h e sh a pe of a cup .
( M acg o wan)
With the right held in fron t of the body m ak e wi th the thu m b an d ,

n gers a cir cle rese m blin g a cup thu m b a n d foren ger for m i n g the top ,

o r r im an d then c arry to the m o uth h a n d horizon t al b ack outw a rd

, , , .

( D a ko t a I )

Drin k in g fro m a cup o r gl ass
. .

_The ri gh t a r m i s exed a n d the h a nd in type position ( Y m odi ,

-

e d by collecti n g t h e n gers a n d lettin g the th u m b rest a g ai n st p a l m s

of the in dex an d m iddle n gers i s then brou ght to a n d fro m the m outh ,

severa l ti m es successively The righ t or left h a nd m ay be used The

. .

m otion rese m bles m uch a n u pw a rd rot a ry m ove m en t of a spoon fro m a

 1 00

d ish th e h an d bein g quite h ollowed in the cen ter to rese m ble a cup
,

s h aped vessel in which w ater m u st be t ak en ( O to a n d M isso u r i .

To t ak e up i n a hollow vessel to the m outh .

Collect the n gers o f th e ri ght h an d to a poin t ,

and brin g i t to th e
m outh , p al m rst ( Wy and o t I ) . .

Th e ri gh t h an d w ith tip s o f n gers an d t h u m b bro u gh t n e a rly to a

poin t is brou gh t to t h e m outh on ce o r t w ice , as if drin k in g fro m a cu p .

( Ap ache I ) .

Han d h a lf closed supin ate d , , an d an u p a n d - -

d ow n m otion in fron t ot

th e m outh ( Zuni I ). .

I ta l i a n sig n I s i m i tated w ith the st .

( B u t le r )

Dr o wn e d .

First m ak e th e sign for R i v e r then m ak e the si gn for G o n e n u ,

d e r ; should t h e person n o t be rescued m ak e t h e si gn f o r D e a d ,

d e a t h ; sh ould he be rescued h owever m a k e the si g n for D r a w i n g , ,

o u t a n d if, a fter gettin g t h e body o u t resu scit a tion sh o u ld occur the

, , ,

sign for L i f e l i v i n g should be m a d e t o i n dic a te t h a t he h as been

, ,

r aised ( up ) t o life ag a in ( Da ko ta I ) Thi s i s a gra phic picture

. . .

Dr u n l .

M ak e the si gn f o r K e t t l e , w i th h and s further a p a rt a n d o m it t h e ,

p art i n d ic a tin g pl a cin g on the re ; t h en h ol d th e left h an d st a tion a ry

an d r a ise t h e ri gh t h a nd u pw ard ( Fist B except b a ck u pw a rd an d in ,

w ard ) ; stri k e down wi th i t to n e a r the left h a nd an d repe a t sever a l ,

ti m es a s th ou gh stri k in g th e h e ad o f a d r um ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m be a t . .

i g the dru
n m
.

Du c k .

The si gn foru r k e y , then the si gn T of W a te r ,

an d l a stly the sign
o
f S w i m m i ng ( D un bar ) . .

E ar n ro un d ; L a n d
th .

The tw o h a n ds open an d exte n d ed brough t horizon t ally n e ar e a ch

, ,

other Opposite t o ei ther k n ee , then c arried to the Opposite side an d ~

r a ised i n a curve m ove m en t until brou gh t roun d an d opposite to the

f ace ( Dunba r )
-

. .

Ri gh t h an d elev ated to level o f fa ce a ttened p al m up w a rd th u m b , , ,

poin tin g forw ard little n ger poin tin g to left a t ri g h t an gle to thu m b ;
,

h an d m oved h orizon t ally forw ard an d outw a rd to represen t extended

su rfa ce S o m eti m es both h an ds e m ployed left h a n d at p a l m u p w a rd
.
, , ,

n gers pointi ng to t h e ri ght ( C hey enne I ) . .

 101

First poin t tow a rd the groun d w it h the ri ght index a n d then bri n g ,

both h a n ds together in fron t of the ch in n gers exten ded poin tin g t o , ,

w ard the fron t p al m s down a t horizon ta l ( W ) a n d carry t o the right

, , ,

a n d left w ith a c u rved m otion a r m s ne a rly ex ten d ed ( Da ko ta I )

Th e ,
. .

en tire e a rth w ithout end ,

.

E yes c a st v a guely a bout the righ t ar m i s exed t o the front of the

,

bod y the h a nd i n type posi tio n ( P 1 ) m odied by bein g inverted hori

,
-

z o n t a l wit h p a l m d own w a r d The h a n d is n ot held rigidly ; it is th en

.

m oved forw ard a n d d o wn w a rd , an d the p a l m poin t of the r ight m iddle

n ger is m ade to touch th e groun d The whole ar m is then ra ised an d .

the h an d i n type position ( W ) describes a circle before the body ( O to .

an d l
. f sso t )
t ur I The spheric
. a l obj ect t ouched ; bene a th m e

.

Deaf m ute n a t ur a l sig h Point at i t an d t h en m ove th e op en h a n d

-

horizon t ally m e a n in g h o w exten sive t h e l a nd is ( Cr o ss)

,
.

soil As .

Ri ght i ndex poi nt s tow ard the grou nd in fron t of the ri ght side
-
of the
body ( Da ko ta I )
. Desi gn a tin g the ground
. .

E a st .
( C o m p are Da y , m orn in g .
)
Poin t to the e a st ; 13
. poin t of sunrise .
( A r ap a ho I ) .

Fo r e n g e r righ t h and croo k ed t o represen t h a lf o f the su n s dis k

of

an d poin ted or extended to the left then sligh tly elev a ted ( C h ey enne I ) ,
. .

S i m ply poin t to w ard the e a st with the extended right index .

( Da
ko ta I) .

Direction .

E a t, ea ti n g ; I h a ve ea te n .

T he ngers a nd th u m b ar e bro ught toget h er i n opposition to e ach

other , i n t o so m ethin g of a we d ge sh a pe a n d p a ssed to an d fro m the ,

m outh four o r ve ti m es w ithin the dist a n ce of three or four in ches O f

,

it , to i m i t a te the a ction of food p a ssin g to th e m outh ( L o ng ) .

I m i t ate the a ction of con ve y in g food with the n gers to the m outh .

( B u r to n ) .

B rin gin g the s t to the m ou th .

( M a cg o ui
an q

Joi n th e tips of the n gers an d th u m bs and m ove the m b a c k an d ,

forth t o w a rd s t h e m outh C hey en n e si gn ( Report o f L ieu t J W A ber t ,

. . . . .

10 c cit p
. .
, .

Fin gers an d th u m b of ri ght h an d pl a ced together as if gr a spin g a

m o r sel , brought suddenly u pw a rd to level of m outh an d m oved to w a rd
i t an d down w ard in t h e direction o f the thro a t to su ggest the act o f
cr amm in g ( C hey enn e I ) . .
 1 02

Right h a nd scoop fa shion , b ac k o f h an d outw a rd a t th e fron t of body ,

-

hei gh t o f a bdo m en , is c a rried to the m ou th a s th ou gh con veyin g food ,

an d repe a ted sever al ti m es ( Da ko ta

Fro m th e m ove m ents o f
.

t h e h a nds in e a tin g

I h a ve e aten .

A fter m ak in g th e above sign the extended th u m b an d foren ger of

the ri gh t h a n d ( other n g ers closed ) is p a ssed b ac k o f h a n d outw ard , ,

horizon ta l & c fro m the sto m ach u p w ar d i n fron t o f body a nd m ou t h

, .
,

D
r

a n d above th e l a tter a ko ta I ) I a m fu ll

( . . .

C lose t h e h an d a ll owin g th e foren ger exten ded then m ove it up

, ,

a nd dow n before th e face sever a l ti m es tow a rd a n d fro m t h e m outh a s ,

if r a m m in g food into the m ou th w ith the n ger ( Da ko ta V ) . .

B rin g the th u m b , index ,secon d n ger to a poin t a n d m a k e r e

a nd ,

p e at e d m otion s down w a rd before the fa ce tow ard th e m onth ( Da ko ta .

VI I ) .

The h a n ds w ith a r m s exed a t el bo w a n d n gers a s in type ( E

, , ,

m odied by h a n d bein g held h orizon t al p a l m u p a r e brou ght a lter , ,

mately to the m ou th a n d b a c k a s it were to the t a ble or di sh as m otion

, , ,

o f Ch in ese e ati n g rice ( O to I ) To ll up i n p arts

. . .

C ollect the thu m b i ndex a n d secon d ngers to a poin t , hold the m

,

a bove an d i n front of the m outh an d m ak e a r epe a ted dottin g m oti on ,

tow a rd the m outh d i o ma I Co ma n ch e III ; Ap ach e II ; Wi chi ta I I )

.
'

Pl a ce
the thu m b a cross the p a l m ar surfa ce o f the p a rtly exten ded
n gers of the right h a n d , then brin g the tips o f the n gers to the m outh
q uick ly sever a l ti m es ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

E xten d the in dex ( or in dex second n ger ) o f the right h a nd hold

a nd ,

i t in fron t of an d a l i ttle hi g h er th a n the m outh p a l m tow a rds the n ec k , ,

then m ak e repe a ted thrusts tow a rd th e m outh with the n ger ( Ute I ) . .

Indic a tes th e direction in w hich food goes .

Close the righ t h a n d le a vin g the index exten ded but sli gh tly curved ;
,

p l a ce th e h a nd in fron t of an d a little a bove th e m outh m a k in g a q uick ,

m otion of pointin g to a n d b a ck fro m th e m outh sever a l ti m es a s i f ra m ,

m in g dow n anythin g ( Ap a che I ) . .

I t a li a n sig h t I s i m it a ted w ith the open h a n d ( Ba tten ) .

S o m ethin g to ea t .

Joi n the en ds of th e n gers a nd th u m b of th e ri ght h a n d , pl a ce the m

'

uprigh t six o r eigh t i n ches i n fron t of the m outh , b ack s forw ard ; ben d
the h a n d at the wrist an d turn the ends of the n gers an d m ove the m
 1 03

tow ard th e m outh an d then dow n w a rd t o the upper p art o f the stern u m
( bre a stbone ) ( Da ko t a IV )
.

P utting food i nto the m outh a nd sw al
.

lowi n g it .

E gg .

The ri ght h a n d h eld u p w ith the n gers an d thu m b extended a n d ap

p r o ac hi n g e ach other a s if holdi n g an egg w ithin ( Dnnba r ) . .

W i th the n ger a nd thu m b o f th e righ t h a n d suggest the outli ne of

an egg The nger s a n d th u m b of the left h an d a re also so m eti m es
.

sh aped in the s a m e m a n ner a n d pl a ced over the poi n ts o f the right as

,

they a ssu m e the position described ( Chey enn e I ) . .

E l k ( Cer v us can a densis ) .

S tretch the a lon gside o f the h ead ( Wied) This

r m s hi gh an d a .

sign is still in use ( M a tthe ws ) I n the O to sign both ar m s ar e e l e va t cd

.

a n d the h an ds opened b ut n gers a pproxi m a ted , a r e the n pl a ced a side

,

the he ad The h a nds are i n type posi tion

. p al m s outw a rd ; the
b a ll o f the th u m b rests a ga i n st p a rieta l ridge T h ough there is a n .

eviden t in co m pleteness in Wi e d s d escription a m a rk ed iden tity in

,

position o f the a r m s a nd the prob a b le con cep tion i s observ a ble The .

sign i s co m pleted by the r ig h t in d e x m a rk i n g on the extended l eft in dex

t h e a ni m a l s short t a i l ( Bo teler ) . .

Is signied by si m ult an eously r ai sin g both h a nds w i th the n ger s ex

ten ded o n both sides of the he ad t o i m ita te p a l m a ted horn s ( B a r to n ) .

A ll or m ost of th e n gers of both h a n ds held together a nd brought to

th e sides of the he a d to represen t t h e pa l m a ted h orn s o f an e lk .

( C hey enne I ) .

The s am e as D e e r except th a t a fter the rst posi t ion both h a n d s

,

w ith n gers spre a d ar e c arried u pw ards an d outw a rds to i m it ate the

br a n chi n g horn s o f the a ni m a l ( Da ko ta I I ) . .

E xten d w idely sep a r a te the n gers a n d thu m bs of both h a nds

and ,

pl ace the m upri ght p al m s in w ard j ust above a n d in front of the e ars ,
, ,

a n d sh ak e the m b a ck a n d forth th ree o r four ti m es

( Da ko ta IV ) . .

The el k s antlers

.

The ar m s ar e elev a ted an d the h an ds pl aced a side o f the he a d with

th e n gers exten ded but a pproxi m a ted a s in posi tion ( W 1 ) m ore erect .

The exten ded ri gh t in dex h u ger m ar k s o ff o n the extended left i ndex

-

the len gth of th e t a il ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) The short t a il a nd

. .

bro a d horn s o f th e a n i m al .

Pl a ce both a t h a n ds with n gers an d th u m bs spre a d u p w ard an d

ou tw a rd fro m either si de o f the he a d at a r m s len gth

( Ute I )
. .
 1 04

Em b ro id e r y .

Same th a t p art of the si gn for B e a d s w here the h and s ar e in

as

fron t o f the body left stati on a ry , an d the righ t holdin g the sin ew m oved
,

t o an d over i t ( Da ko ta I
.
)

Fro m em broiderin g w ith be ad s
. .

E n d . Se e Do n e .

En e m y .

W ith the ri ght fore an d m iddle n gers spre ad poin tin g tow ard the ,

l e f t an d b a ck s forw a rd throw the h a n d a bou t a foot fo r w a rd an d ou t

, ,

w ard t wo o r three ti m es fro m ne ar the fa ce ( I don t w an t to see

touch the chest over th e he art a nd a fterw ard m ak e the sign f o r B a d

( m y he art i s then fro m j u st in fron t of the righ t e y e i t s p al m

, ,

for w ard push the u pright st forw a rd six in ches an d a li ttle tow a rd the
,

l e f l a t the s a m e ti m e turn in g the p a l m b a c k w a rd ( I a m

,
Da
ko ta IV ) .

T h e I ta li a n
. sig n .

f or e nm i ty O pposition in the end s of t h e m id d le

n gers touchin g e a ch other ,
and al l the rest o f th e n gers cl inched .

B ut l e r .
)

E no ug h , a belly q l .
( C o m p a re G l a d an d Fu l l ) .

The si gn for is rst m a de t hen the t h u m b an d foren ger

E a ti n g ,

a r e opposed t o e a ch oth er so a s t o for m a se m icirc u l a r curve whi ch is ,

elev a ted a lon g the body fro m the belly to the n eck , i n order to i ndic ate
th a t the i nterior is lled wi th food up to th a t p a rt ( B ur to n) .

First m a k e sig n for E a t i n g , the n stretch the f o re n g e r s a n d thu m bs

a p a rt as if to sp a n so m eth in g ; then pl a ce the h a n d ne a r the sto m a ch ,
,

a n d m ove i t up a lon g the body un ti l t h e m u scle con nectin g the thu m b

a n d foren ger rests i n th e m outh Ch ey enn e sign ( Report of J W . . . .

A ber t loc cit p

, . .
, .

Righ t h a nd brough t to fron t of body foren ger poin tin g to a nd rest ,

in g ag ain st sto m ach and gently dr a w n alon g upw a rd to the throa t an d

con tin ued up w a rd a n d ou tw a rd ( C h ey enne I ) . .

Th e S ioux Indi a n s express E n o u g h by E n d, Do n e .

( Dako ta I ) .

I a m don e ; h a ve h ad en ough .

M ak e the sign D e si r e , then the sig n for N O .

( Da ko ta IV ) .

Deaf -
mu te n a t ur a l sig ns M ove up w a rd )
t h e h a nd ( p al m in a gentle
curve dow n w a rd wi t h ,
a sui t a ble expressio n of counten a n ce .
( Ba l lar d )
Bend your he a d a little forw a rd a n d m ove th e h an d ( held h orizon
t al ly ) up w a rd o n the thro a t ( Cr oss ) .

M ove the foren ger a cross the fro n t o f t h e nec k fro m side to side , so

a s to in dic a te th a t the thro a t i s f ul l ( H a sensta b ) . .

 1 05

M ove to a n d fro the out stretched h a n d over the other h a n d

-
.

E n te r i n g a h o u se o r lodge . Se e L o dge .

Eq ua l . S ee S a m e .

E xch a n g e . S ee T ra de .

E x c i te d ; e x c i te m en t .

Sam e i g n a s for C o w a r d F e a r The he art bein g the pri m a ry

s , .

se a t of the e m otion s fro m th e st a ndpoint of the In di an , he a ck n owled ges

n o such th in g a s exci te m en t of m in d , therefore thi s w ord is in cl uded i n
f ea r , for e very Indi a n w h o a llo ws hi s he ar t to u tter i s con si dered by h i s
people a co w ard ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m fe a r cow a r d
. .
,

E ye .

S i m ply touch th e eye wi th the righ t in dex .

( Da ko ta I ) .

Fa ce .

The h an d is p a ssed dow n w ard i n fron t of the fa ce on ce on ly fro m , ,

forehe a d to ch i n o r a li ttle belo w th e ch in ( M a n da n a n d H ida tsa I ) . .

Fa i l , to .

L eft
h a nd st a tion a ry h orizon ta l , n gers ne arly closed b a ck of h an d
, ,

o u tw a rd about ei ghtee n inches in fron t of the bre a st an d th e ri gh t i ndex ,

( others closed ) is brought up w a rd cl ose i n front of the body t o the bre a st

a nd th en c a rried o ut to the left h an d w ith sl igh t up an d down j er k in g

m otion s , n ger upri ght b a ck o f h a n d in w a rd an d then dr a w the righ t

, ,

h an d b a ck directly to the bre a st , a nd m ak e the sign for N o ( Da ko ta .

I ) H e did i t n ot H e did n ot co m e ; d id n ot k eep h is appoin t m en t

. . .

Fa il ur e .

H old
the left h a n d edge w ise before the bre a st p oin tin g forw ard then , ,

bring the exten ded i ndex poin tin g tow a rd the left p a l m ; touch it an d, , ,

th ro w the index i n a short curve over a nd down w ard o n its b a ck

rese m bl in g the si gn f o r Dea d ( Ka io wa I ; Co m a nch e I II ; Ap a ch e I I .

Wichi ta I I ) Interrupted in progress ; defe a ted efforts

. .

Fa l l , to .

L eft
h a n d extended to the fron t p al m dow n then brin g tips of al l the , ,

n gers together open an d shut as if letti n g so m ethin g fa ll ( O ma ha I )

, ,
. .

Fa l l , r st ( of the le a ves ) .

R ai se the left h a n d a bove the he ad fore n ger extended , , m ove righ t

a n d left w ith a w an in g an d tre m blin g m o t ion
( O mah a .

F a l se . Se e L i e .

Fa r , a long w a y o ff . Se e D i st a n c e , f ar .

14
 1 06

F a sti n g .

Bl a c k en fa ce , neck , an d h a nd s In c a m p . sit cross legged eyes ben t

-

o n t h e e arth ; fol d h an ds in fro n t p al ms up , ,

r e m ain i n g m otion less , f r e

q uently utterin g i n a low voice progress ( i ) ,

. W h en st an din g per fectly
e rect a n d m otion les s ( Oj i bw a IV ) . .

Fa t .

R a ise the left ar m w it h st closed , b a ck ou tw ard , gr a sp the ar m wi th

the right h a n d an d r ub dow nw ard th ereon ( Wied ) .

( 1 ) B oth h a n d s , loosely clos e d , brou gh t ne a r to and o n a level with

t h e shoulders ; ( 2 ) pu shed a few in ches str a igh t forw ard an d slightly
upw a rd ( C hey enn e I ) Prob ably lu m p s o f f at t ak en fro m a l a rge or
. .

b ro a d a ni m al .

B oth sts cl in ched , pl aced before th e bre a st , thu m bs touchi n g a nd

p al m s down w ard ; then dr a w the m outw ard a nd d own w ard for m in g the ,

u pper h a lf of a circle ( Absa r o ki I ; S hosho ni a nd Ba n a k I )

. .

S i gn for M an ,
an d then the si gn f o r B i g m ade i n fron t of the abd o
( Da ko ta l ) Big in body

m en . . .

H old the open ed left h a nd obliquely u p w a rd tow a rd the ri gh t a foot in ,

fron t of the bre a st p a l m upw ard , b a c k w a rd an d to the ri gh t ; gr asp th e

, ,
.

ul n a r side o f th e h a n d between the n g ers an d th u m b o f the right h a nd ,

th e th u m b on the p al m a n d rub i t li ghtly fro m the b ase of the n gers t o

,

th e w ri st sever a l ti m es ( Da ko ta 1 V
)

Thick , and therefore f a t
. . .

B oth r m s ar e exed in w ard a n d both h an ds brou ght before the

a

body , d i vergen t an d extended n gers drooped The h a n d s ar e m uch i n .

the position ( Q ) on type pl a tes In this position th e h an ds describe a .

se m icircle over the a bdo m en a n d are c arried over the li m bs sever ally , .

If th e si gn is a ppl ied to an y other obj ect th an m an the sig n correspon d ,

in g to s aid obj ect i s rst m ade ( O to an d M isso ur i

O f incre a sed .

di m en sion s or th a t wh ich i n cre a ses on e s si ze

.

Fa th e r . S ee R e l a t i o n sh i p .

Fe a r , co wa r d i ce ; co wa r d .

The t w o h and s w ith the n gers turned i n w a rd opposi te to the lower

ribs then brough t up w ard w i th a trem ulou s m ove m en t as if to r ep re
,

sen t the co m m on ide a o f the h e art risin g up to th e throa t ( Dun bar ) .

The he ad stooped dow n an d th e ar m throw n up to p rotect it ; a q uic k

m oti on ( L o ny )
. .

Poin t f o r w ar dj w it h th e in dex followed by the re m a in in g n gers ; e ach

, .

ti m e th a t is d o n e dr a w b ac k t h e in dex ( Wied) I m possible t o k eep the .

cow ard to th e fron t .

 1 07

(1) Fin gers an d thu m b of ri ght h an d , which droops dow nw ard close d ,

to a poin t to r epresen t a he a rt ; ( 2 ) violently a nd repe a tedly be a te n

-

a g a in st the left bre a st j ust over the he a rt to i m it a te p alpit a tion

( Ch ey .

e nn e I) .

M ay be sig nied by m a k in g the si gn for a Sq u a w , i f the on e i n fe ar

be a m a n or boy ( A r ap a h o I ) . .

Croo k the i ndex , close the other ngers an d wi th i t s b a c k upw a rd , , ,

dr a w the ri gh t h a nd b a c k w a rd a bou t a foot fro m ei ghteen i nches in ,

fron t of the right bre a st ( Da ko ta I V ) Dr a wi n g b a ck . . .

M ak e the sign for B r a v e then throw the right h a nd open an d at , , ,

outw ard tow ard the ri ght ( A bsar o ka I ; S ho sh o n i a n d B ana k I ) N o t

. .

br a ve .

Right h an d ( Q ) in fron t of left bre a st b a ck out w ard an d c arri ed f o r , ,

w a rd f o r a b ou t six in ches w ith a tre m ulous m otion o f the n gers .

M an y of the S io u x however d o n ot m ove th e h a n d fro m the bre a st

, , .

( Da ko t a I )

E xcite m en t ; utterin g o f the he a rt
. .

C ross the ar m s over the bre ast sts closed ; bo w th e he a d over the ,

crossed ar m s b u t turn i t a li ttle to the left ( O mah a I )

,
. .

S tr ik e
the righ t side of the bre a st gen tly w ith the p al m a r side of the
righ t st ; then throw the h a nd down w ard an d outw ard tow ard th e
ri gh t sudden ly sn a ppi n g th e n gers fro m the b all of the th um b where
, ,

they h ad been restin g as if S prin k lin g w a ter ( Wy a ndo t I )

,
. .

Deaf m u te na tu r a l sign s Represented by sh udderin g wi th the shoul

-

ders an d m ovin g th e body sligh tly b a c k w ard ( Ba lla r d ) .

Run b ack w ard .

( L a r so n )
Pl a ce the foren ger between the upper an d lo wer teeth .
( Zeig ler )
The French d eaf m u t e s besides be atin g the he ar t add a nervous , ,

b ack w a rd shrin k in g with bo t h h a nds O u r de a f m u tes o m it the be a tin g .

-

of the he art except f o r excessi ve terror

,
.

Fe m a le .
( Co m p are W om an .
)
Brin g the t w o h an ds open tow a rd the bre a st th e n gers a ppro achi n g , ,

a nd then m ove them outw a rd ( Du n bar ) .

E lev a te the open ri ght h a n d poin tin g forw a rd to the lev el o f an d to , ,

the right o f the shoulder ; dr a w the n gers b a ck k eepin g the m together ,

u ntil the tip of the foren ger rests a ga in st t h e tip of the thu m b for m ,

in g an a l m on d sh a ped open in g bet ween the thu m b a nd foren ger

-
.

( C h ey e nne I )

Prob a bly.fro m its rese m bl a nce t o the a ppe a r a nce o f the

extern a l fe m a le gen itals .

 1 08

A pplied
to an i m als .

S am e a s the si gn for W o m a n .
( Da ko t a I ) .
Desi g n atin g se x .

Fro m the ow in g h ir o
a o f w m an .

G en eric .

Fin gers a nd th u m b s of both h a nd s sep ar ated an d curved ; pl ac e the

h an d s over the bre a sts a nd dr a w the m forw ard a short di st an ce ( Ute I ) . .

Fe n ce .

Both h a n ds exten ded , n gers spre ad ; pl ace th ose o f th e ri gh t in to

the S p a ces between th ose of th e left ; th en ind ic a te a zi g z ag course for
wa rd wi th th e exten ded index W
( y a n do t
Posi tion of r a ils i n a .

fe n ce , an d the zigz a g co u r se .

F i g h t , g h ti n g .
( C o m p are B a tt l e ) .

M ak e a m otion
w ith both sts t o an d f ro li k e a p ugili st ,
of the
ei gh teen th cen tury wh o preferred a hi gh gu ard ( B ur to n )
,
.

Joi nin g h a nds r apidly .

( M acgo wa n ) .

Sa m e sign as fo r B a ttl e .
( Da ko ta I .
.
)

B ot h h an ds cli nch ed hol din g th e m p a l m to p a l m a t a di st a nce of

,

about four in ches fro m o n e a nother ; for m short vertic a l circles a s if ,

s win g
a a h a rd m outhed horse ( Da ko ta V I VI I )
-
.
,
.

B oth h a nd s closed f o r e n g e r s elev a ted an d extended , faci n g

,
o ne

a n other ; m ove p a l m s tow ard a n d fro m e ach other ( O ma h a I ) . .

Close both h a nd s except the i n dex n g e r s H ol d the m before the

,
-
.

bre a st the in dex n g e r s upri ght an d m ove the se fro m side to si de

,
-

opposite e a ch other li k e two a n ta gonists fa cin g on e a n other a nd a void

,

in g e a ch other s blo ws This m ove m en t followed by th a t for De a d ,

.
,

would express They fough t a n d o ne w a s k illed If m ore th a n o ne , ,

.

hold up t wo or m ore ngers ( I r o quo is .

B oth h an d s brou gh t up n e arl y as high as the face , a bout twelve inches

a p a rt n gers poi ntin g tow ard th ose of the opposite h a n d ; the n gers
'

a r e then m oved c arelessly a s the h a nd s a r e brought tow a rd an d fro m

o n e a n other Wy a n do t I )
. .

Deaf -
72 m m n a tur a l signa A c t a s if y o u stri k e your left open h an d w ith
your righ t clin ched h an d ,
a nd do th e a ct o f stri k in g sever al ti m es suc
ce ssiv e l y .
( H a sensta b ) .

R aise the sts as g h ters begin to gh t .

( L a r son )
Indi a n .

E xten d both ar m s, h a nd s clin ched ( J ) ; pl a ce the tips of the in dex

n g e rs together a n d pu sh the m rs t on e w ay an d then the other , still
,
 l 09

k eepi n g the tips o f the i o re n g e rs to gether F aci al expressi on s

'

. ad d

gre a tly to the in ten sity of all si gn s ( Co m a nche I ) W restlin g . . .

F i n i sh e d . See Do n e .

Fi r e , b ur n i n g .

The t wo h a n d s brought n e ar the bre a st touchin g o r appro a ch in g e ac h ,

other a nd h al f sh ut ; then m oved outw a rd m oder a tely quic k , the n gers

,

bein g exten ded an d th e h an ds a li ttle sep a r ated a t the s am e ti m e a s if ,

t o i m it a te the a ppe a r a n ce of a m e ( Da nba r ) . .

The act o f stri k in g r e with the in t a nd st eel is represen ted ; after

w hich th e a sce n t o f t h e s m o k e i s in d ic a ted by cl osin g th e n gers a n d
th u m b of th e ri ght h and , h ol d in g the m in a vertic a l position w ith the ,

h an d as l o w as co n ve n ie n t ; the h a n d i s t hen gr adu ally elev a t ed , an d

the n gers an d th u m b a li t tle exp an ded t o sh o w the as cen t and e xp an
sion o f the volu m e of s m ok e ( L o ng ) . .

H ol d th e n gers of t h e ri gh t h an d sli gh tly Opened an d up w ard an d

elev a te t h e h an d sever al ti m e s ( Wied) T h e body i s ben t som ew h a t
.

for w a r dt h e r i gh t i n dex m iddle n ger and th um b ar e then ap p ro xi

, ,

m a ted a t their p oin ts a n d h a n d i s h eld droopin gly n e a r th e groun d , , .

Th e h a n d th u s cup sh a ped i s m ade t o open an d close successi vely a n d

-

rise by j er k s li k e t h e j u m pin g an d cr ac k i n g o f a am e A lthough the

,
.

posit io n of the h a n d is reversed in IV ied s sign there is a m ark ed si m i

-
'

,

l ar it y of execution a n d con ception in t h e tw o ( B o te l e r ) The si gn .

m a y portr ay the ri si n g fork ed to n gues of the a m e .

B low i t an d w ar m the h and s before it To express the boilin g o f . a

k ettle the si gn o f F i r e i s m a de l o w down an d an i m a gi n a ry pot

,
is
e a ten fro m ( B ar ton ). .

S cr atchi n g t h e b re a st .
( M a cg o wa n ) .

R a ise a nd lo wer the h a n d a l t ern a tely p al m up , the n gers extended

,

up w ard an d m ovi n g i n i m it a ti on of ton gues o f am e ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

R i g ht fore ar m in vertic a l position an d h a n d slowly elev a ted the , ,

nger s an d thu m b poin tin g upw ard , bein g m e an w hile open ed an d closed
t w o o r t hree ti m es ( C h ey enne I ) . .

Righ t h an d ( P ) extended i n fron t to the groun d n gers poi nti n g ,

up w a rd r ai se the h a nd slowly , w ith a tre m ulous m otion , n ot m ore th a n a

,

foot fro m the grou n d to d en ote a s m all re such as In di an s b uild i n ,

thei r lod ges Fo r a l arger re r a ise the h a nd higher wi th th e tre m ulous

.

m otion O f course the body will h a ve to be incli ned for w a rd i n m ak i n g

.

thi s sign ( Dako ta .

From the am e an d s m ok e of a re .

 110

.
R aise the righ t h an d sever al ti m es fro m ne ar the ground it s b ack ,

forw ard , n gers poin tin g up w a rd a nd a li ttle ben t a n d sep a r a ted .

( Dak o ta IV )

Fl a m es sh ootin
. g up w a rd
.

The h a nd i s brought ne a r the groun d in h a n d type ( G ) the body a t ,

the s a m e ti m e in clined for w a rd The n gers a n d thu m b a re the n suc .

ce ssive l y opened a n d closed a s the h a n d is elev a ted by j er k s as i t were , .

O o I ) u pin g cr c li n g e

( t J . m a nd a k o f a a m
.

Righ t h a nd p a l m tow ar d a nd a short dista nce before the w a ist n

, ,

ger s extended up w ard a nd sep a r ated m oved u p w a rd about eight or ten .

in ches sever a l ti m es ( Ute I ) Ton gues o f re , am e

. . .

Dea m a te n a tu r a l sig ns B low through the m ou t h .

,
a nd m ove t h e han d
up an d do wn r a pidly .
( Ba l l a r d )
Ope n bo t h h a nds freely m ove the m up f a st a nd dow n slo wly sever a l
.

ti m es an d a t the s a m e ti m e k eep the m o u th h alf open blow in g ( H ag e n

, , , .

sta b .
)
ove the ngers of b ot h h and s together u p w ard wit h
M a l ittle blo w
sen t fro m the m outh ( L ar so n ) .

To light a .

H old the left h a n d before the bo d y p a l m dow n an d a rched collect , ,

the n gers a n d th u m b of the right h a n d to a point an d p a ss th e m

q uic k ly alon g t h e thu m b of the left fro m the b a s a l j oin t to w a rd the tip ;
then pl ace the ri ght h an d q uic k ly u n der the a rched left for a m o m en t
then suddenly closin g bo t h h a n ds side by side m ove t h e m up w a rd a , ,

few inches quic k ly exten din g the n gers a n d th u m bs in so doin g ; p a l m s

,

forw a rd ( Ute I ) . S tri k in g a m a tch k ind l i n g the brush a nd sm o k e

.
, , .

H oldbot h h a n ds before the body str ai ght n gers curved su f cient , ,

f o r the tips to b e directed to w ard their respective h an ds ; stri k e fro m

a b ove d ow n w a rd with the right so th a t the n g e r n a ils stri k e th ose of ,
-

the left i n p a ssin g ( Ap a che I ) Fro m the o ld m ethod of obt ai nin g

. .

th e with i n t .

To m ak e a .

First m ak e the sig n for F i r e ; then hol d the arched left h an d c l ose
to the groun d w ith th e p al m down w a rd , pl a ci ng the right n gers an d ,

thu m b directed to a poin t u ndern e at h the left ( Ap ache I ) Ki ndli n g

,
. .

gr a ss or other co m b ust ibles .

F i sh .

H old
the upper edge o f the h a n d horizon tally an d a git a te it in the ,

man ner of a f a n but m ore r a pidly , i n i m i ta tion o f the m otion of th e t ai l

of the sh ( L o ng ) .
 111

M ak e the si gn for R i ve r , L a k e or P o n d , ,
an d then w ith th e
ri g h t index in fron t of t h e body m ove in i m it a tion of swi m m in g sh
'

a .

( D a k o t a I )

Fro m.th e m a nn er o f sw i m m in g
.

The extended right h and th u m b u p w a rd n gers poi ntin g forw ard is , , ,

held n e ar the body , i n fron t a n d to th e ri ght o f the m edi a n li ne ; it is:

then m oved r a ther gently forw ard with a l ater ally w a v in g m otion , so a s .

to represen t the m ove m en ts o f a sh ( M a n da n a nd H ida tsa I ) . .

Flam e . Se e Fi r e .

Fl a t .
( Co m p a re B i g in the sen se of Fla t ) .

B ri n gboth h an ds togeth er i n fron t o f th e b r e ast , n g e r s exten ded

an d pointin g ou tw a r d forw a rd p a l m s up w ard ( X ) , at , an d c arry the
, ,

a r m s out t o t h e sides o f th e body as f ar a s they c a n be extende d an d a s

ne arly on t h e s a m e level a s possible ( Da ko ta I ) A level o r at . .

piece o f groun d .

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sig n M ove o ne h a n d horizon t ally over the other .

( B a ll a r d )

Fl o u r .

Pa n to mi m ic S i m ul a te k ne a din g
. dough .
( A r ap ah o I ) .

Wi th the ri ght h a n d ( Q ) i n front of body a s though h ol din g our o r

an y p u lverized subst a nce a n d S pri n k ling or siftin g i t throu gh the th u m b

.

a nd foren ger ( Da k o ta l )

A ne subst a n ce
. . .

The ar m s ar e ex t en d ed in fron t of the body p a r a llel wi th the h and s ,

in position s ( S S ) m odied by bein g held horizon t al The p al m s ar e

, ,
.

then a pproxi m a ted as in sl appin g together , an d opened sever al ti m es

successi vely Fin ally the h a nds ar e m ade to turn over the p al m s
.
,

loosely i n cont act , i n a tu m bl in g m a n ner , the ri ght an d left altern a tely

o n top .
( O to a n d M isso ur i I )

The sign represen ts the Indi a n s m ode .

o f a ttenin g the dou gh for c ak es

.

Fl y, T o ( a s a bir d ) .

I m ita te w ith crook ed elbow s the m otion of wi n g durin g igh t .

( Ar a
p aho

B rin g the h and s sli ghtly in front of their respective sides of the he a d
( h and s as i n T ) an d , by bendin g the w rists m a k e the forw ard a n d
, ,

b ack w ard m ove m ents a s n e a rly as possible i n i m ita tion of the m ove
m en ts of a bird s w in gs in yin g ( Da ko ta I )

. .

F o o l , F o o l i sh .

The n ger i s poin ted to the forehe ad , an d the h a nd is then held verti
c all y a bove the he ad an d rota ted on the wri st t wo or three ti m es ( L ong ) .

R a ttle bra i ned

-
.
 1 12

Pl a ce the h a n d in fron t o f the he ad b ac k out wa rd then tur n it roun d , ,

in a circle sever a l t i m es ( Wi ed) S ti ll u sed A l so for C r a z y I

. .
,

th in k .
( M a tthews)

S i gn
for M a n ri ght h a n d extended dow n w ard , p a l m o u tw ard , n
gers u n cl osed a n d sh ak en W hen referrin g to a p a rticul a r person the
.

n ger o f th e ri ght h a n d is pointed a t h i m eyes resti n g on h im critic a lly , ,

brow s r aised an d con tr a cted a s in pity an d a version ( C hey e nne I ) . .

The sh ak in g of the o pen ed n gers gi ves the ide a o f looseness wi th

out referen ce to the he a d .

B ri n g
the right h a n d to the m edi al line of the forehe a d ( R ) n gers ,

b ut sl igh tly sep a r a te d w here i t i s ro tated sever a l ti m es tw o o r three

,

in ches i n front ( Da ko ta I ) R a ttle

. br a i ned . .

M ove the Ope ned ri gh t h a n d throu gh a sm a ll circle two or th ree t i m es

i n fro n t o f the forehe ad the p a l m tow ard the le : t , n gers sep ar a ted a
,

li ttle a nd poin t in g upw ard ( Da ko ta IV ) H e a d turned . . .

Rota te th e extended an d sep a r a ted in dex a n d secon d n gers o f the

h a n d u p w a rd a nd tow a rd the left before the forehe ad ( Da ko ta VI .

H id a tsa I ; Ar i/ra m I ) .

Fren ch de a f m utes sh a k e -
th e h a n ds a bove the he ad a fter touchin g i t
with the index .

is the gre atest fool o f al l

He .

S w ay the h a n d ( W p a l m do wn w a rd over al l , then p oin t to the

person ( g then pl a ce en d of n gers on forehe a d ( H
. an d then

swin g h a nd arou nd i n circle in fron t of forehe ad h an d a n d n gers up ,

righ t , j oi ned an d p a l m obliq ue to fa ce

,
1 p al m obliq ue ) a n d l a stl v , ,

m ak e t h e sign B a d ( Sa hap tin I ) . O f al l his br a i n w hirl s worst

.
,
.

Your word s a re fooli sh .

A fter poin tin g to person a ddressed an d m ak in g si g n for words ( as

in G ) , the h a n d is m oved to a p oi nt i n fron t but li ttle to right o f , ,

forehe ad n gers a ll n a tur ally rel a xed poi n tin g upw a rd p al m q u a rter
, , ,

in g to fa ce ( Y 1 ch an ged to vertic a l posi tion ) then s wun g a roun d i n

, ,

s m all circle sever a l ti m es then dropped to a poin t in fron t of body an d

,

throw n vi gorously down w a rd t o side an d re ar A t begin nin g o f this .

l a st m otion the n gers ar e hoo k ed secon d restin g a ga in st th u m b p al m , ,

dow n w a rd ( G but d urin g b a c k w a rd m ove m ent the n gers ar e gra d

u al l y throw n open , p a l m outw a rd ( R 1 , n gers poin ti n g obliq uely do wn

w ard ) S i g n B a d ( C ) ( Sa hap tt n I )
. Words fro m whirlin g br ai n
.

b ad .

F o r e st .

S lightlyspre a d a n d r a i se the t e n n gers brin gin g the h a nds together ,

i n fron t o f the face ; then sep ar a te the m ( Wied) The n u m erous trees .

a n d their br a nches m ay be in dic ated f o r a ti m e obscurin g the v i sion ,

.
 1 13

S pre a d
the n ger s of the ri ght h a n d sli gh tly ; r a ise the h a n d on a level
with the fa ce , an d while m ovi n g i t fro m side it i s gen tly thrust up an d
dow n ( Da ko ta V ) The n gers represen t the appe ar a n ce of the
. .

trun k s of the trees visible alon g the ed ge o f the forest .

R a ise the h a n d vertic ally , p al m up ngers p arti a lly closed an d ex ,

tended up w ard in a m an n er in dic a tive of the gro w th of tree s ( A r a

, .

p a ho I ) .

M ak e the sign for T r ee , an d then the si gn for M an y .

( Dako ta I ) .

M a n y tree s .

M ak e the sign s f o r A x an d T r e e s ( Da ko ta VI ; . H ida tsa I; Ar i

ka r a I ) Ti m ber th at i s t f o r cuttin g with an a x
. .

M ak e
the sign for T r e e sever a l ti m es , then throw the b a c k of the
u pri ght an d a t right h a nd tow a rd the righ t , fron t an d left
( Ka i o w a , .

I ; Co m a n che I I I ; Ap a ch e II ; Wich ita I I ) Trees , tru n k s close ( rep .

resented b y j oined n g ers ) all a rou nd ,

.

Fo r g e t, f o r go tt e n .

H a ndsoutspre a d opened , p al m s down w a rd ; crossed as in si gn for

,

N i g h t o r d a r k n e ss a t a level o f a nd a n g l e w ith the elbows left ,

h an d bein g over th e righ t ( C hey en ne I ) Da r k n ess i n the m e m ory

. . .

Deaf -
m a te n a t ur a l sig na Pu t the h an d on the forehe a d an d dr a w it
a w ay .
( Ba l lar d)
H a vethe he ad up s uddenly , an d open th e m outh a little at the s a m e
ti m e a n d then n o d an d the upper teet h rest on the low er lip ( Hasen
, , .

sta b .
)
Pl a ce
the fore nger on the forehe a d an d then st ri k e the l ap with the
shut h a nd ( Zeig lem .

Fo r t .

O level o f the bre a sts i n front o f body , both h an ds w ith n gers turned
n

in w ard , str aight , b ack s j o in e d b ac k s o f h an ds outw a r d horizon t a l turn

, , ,

ou tw a rd the h an ds u n til the n gers are free , curve them an d brin g the ,

wri sts together so a s t o d escr ib e a circle with a sp a ce left between the

en ds o f the curved n gers ( Dako ta I ) A circul arly fortied pl ace . . .

Fo u n d , d i sc o ve r e d .
( Co m p are S e e ) .

First m ak e the si gn for S e e t o , , an d then c arry the ri ght h a n d ( Q )

in fron t o f body tow ard the groun d a n d b a ck to body as thou gh h a vi n g
,

pi c k ed so m ethin g up ( Da ko ta I ) . . S eein g a n d pic k in g up any th in g .

Brin g
the left h a nd opposite the bre a st a foot o r so a w ay , n gers
closed an d sl igh tly ben t p al m d own w ard a s if i t were con ce alin g so m e
,

15
 1 14

th in g ; brin g the right h a nd over it , h a n d i n the po sition of bein g j ust

re ady to pic k so m ethin g u p wi th the n gers then p a ss t h e ri gh t h an d
over the left the l a tter re m a i nin g still an d brin g the n gers o f the ri ght
, ,

b an d together as if you h a d pic k ed u p S o m ethin g ( Com anche I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sig ns .
To u ch the eyeli d th en ben d you r body , and , ,

h a vin g poi n ted at the groun d w i th your h and , cl i n ch i t an d brin g i t up

an d d iscl ose it to th e eye ( C r oss ) .

L o wer the open h an d tow ard the ground , a nd then r a ise it shut u p as

i f to in dic ate th a t so m ethin g is pick ed up ( Hasen sta b ) . .

Fo wl . S ee B i r d .

F r a c ti o n .

Indi c ate w ith the foren ger o f the righ t h a nd the eq ui v alen t len gth of

the left fore n ger ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Fr e e zi n g .
( C om p are F r o s t ) .

M ak e cl osin g m ove m en t a s if o f t h e d a rk n ess by brin gin g to geth er

a , ,

both h an ds w i t h th e d ors a up w ard an d the n gers to th e fore ; t ne

m otio n i s fro m righ t to left a n d a t th e en d the two indices ar e a lon gside
,

a n d close to e a ch other ( B a r to n ) .

No si gn sep ar a te fro m C o ld , I t is ; I ce ; or F r o st , w hich den ote

d iif e r e n t degrees of cold .
( Da ko ta I ) .

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l sig n a S hudder fro m he ad to foot ; then i n mo se t

tion your feet after the m a n ner of s k a ti n g , and then m ove the h a n d
a bout horizon t a lly ( Cr oss) .

R aise the ar m s tow ard the bre ast an d sh a k e the sts , and then m ove
the outstretc h ed h a n ds in a horizon ta l line L ar so n ) . .

Fr i e n d .
( C o m p a re S a l u t a t i o n ) .

(1) Tips of the t wo rst n gers of the rig h t h a nd pl aced a ga in st or a t

right an gles to the m outh ; ( 2 ) suddenl y elev ated upw ard an d outw ard
to i m it a te s m ok e e xpelled ( Chey enne I ) We two s m ok e together
. . .

H old the extended left h a n d before th e body ,

and gra sp it with th e
right .
( Sa c, Fo x a nd Ki ckap o o I )
,
.

Poin t forw ard a n d a li ttle u pw ard w ith the j oin ed an d extended fore
a nd m iddle ngers of the ri gh t h a nd wh ich i s to be pl a ced a foot or so ,

in fron t of the ri gh t bre a st the little a nd rin g n gers closed th u m b on

, ,

m iddle j oin t of r in g n ger ; m ove the h an d u pw a rd to the right side of the

fa ce th en str a i ght for w a rd a bou t e ig h t i n ch e s, an d then a l it t l e upw a rd
, ,

O r hoo k the bent ri gh t i n dex p al m dow n w a rd , over the bent left index , ,

p al m up w a rd the h a nds to be a bout a foot i n fron t of the body Thi s

,
-

l a st they c al l a M exic a n si gn ( Da ko ta IV ) . .
 1 15

E xte nd the ri gh t h a nd if re a chi n g to sh ak e h a nd s ( H ida tsa I

'

as
;
-

A r il ta r a
-
I) .

The l e f t a nd righ t h a n ds a r e brough t to the cen ter of chest Open then ,

extended an d the left h a nd with p a l m u p is gr asped crosswise by righ t

, , ,

h an d with p a l m do wn a n d held thu s sever al seconds The h a nds ar e

, .

the n i n double posi tion ( Y right inverted H an ds ar e n ow un .

cl a sped a n d right st is held i n left a xill a by w hic h it is r m ly gra sped

, ,
.

( O to I ) O ne w ho m I will n ot let go
. .

Bri n g
both h a nds together i n a ful l cl asp of all the n gers , a fter the
ordin a ry m an ner of h a nd sh a kin g ( C o ma n ch e I ) . .

E xtr a o rdi n ary .

B rin g
the two h an ds ne ar e a ch other in fron t a nd cl a sp the two index ,

n g e r s tightly so th a t the tips of the n ger an d thu m b of e ach touch

, .

( C o m a nche I ) .

C l as p the tw o h ands after the m an ner of o u r con gr atul ation s .

( Wi ch
i ta I ) .

Fr ie n d l y frien dship ; .

R ai se both h a nds gr a sped , as if in the a ct of sh ak in g h a n ds or lock

, ,

the two f o r e n g e r s together wh ile the h a n ds ar e r a ised This si gn gi ven .

by p arties m eetin g o ne a nother to a scertai n in ten tion s Fo r m ore g e n .

er al ide a of friend sh ip cl a sp the left w ith th e right ( B a r to n ) .

H a nds
cl a sped in fron t o f body , p al m o f left u p , p al m of righ t resti n g

in th a t o f left h a nd s sh ak en u p o r do wn on e or m ore ti m es
, ( C hey .

e n ne I ) .

Pa n to m i m ic gr a spin g or sh ak in g of the h a nd or , a p anto m i mi c em

br ace .
( Ar ap a h o I ) .

The left h an d held horiz on t al , p al m i n w ard , n gers an d th u m b ex

tended a n d poi ntin g tow a rd the righ t a bout a foot an d a h a lf fro m a nd
i n fron t of bre a st , i s cl a sped by the right , c a rried up in fron t of body
an d out fro m bre a st , th u m b an d n ger s poin tin g do w n w a rd an d dr a w n

directly in to the body ( Da ko ta I ) Gr aslain g the h a n d o f afrien d

. . .

O de af m utes i nterlock t h e f o r e n g e r s for friendshi p cl a sp the

ur -
.

h a n ds right u p per m ost for m arri a ge an d m ak e th e l a st si g n r e

, , , ,

p e ate d w ith the left h a n d u pper m ost f o r

pe a ce
The ide a o f u n ion ,
.

o r lin k in g i s obvi ous .

F r o st ( Co m p are F r e e z i n g a nd S n o w )
. .

B egi n w ith the si gn o f W a t e r , then wi th the si gn of N i g h t or

D a r k n e ss , then the sig n o f C o l d , the n the sign o f W h i t e , an d ,
l a stly , the E a r t h ( Da n bar ) . .
 11 6

First m ak e the si gn for G r a ss an d the n the right h a n d ( W ) is ,

m oved a s though w a vin g it over the gr a s s ( Da ko ta I )

A coverin g . .

of the gra ss .

F r u i t l e ss ; v a in in .

T he left ar m is b rought for wa rd h a n d as in ( L m odied by thu m b ,

bein g closed The righ t h a nd then t a k es position ( S

. m odied b v b e
in g held h orizon ta l N o w the left index extended a s a bove , punches
.
,

the right p a l m , a nd is then swept b ac k w a rd a nd d own w a rd by left si de ,

( O to
Full, box o r s a c k
as a .

Righ t a nd left h a nds ( W , w i th n gers slightly ben t ) are brou ght

together i n fron t o f body end s o f n gers poin ting o u tw a rd , then c a rry
,

the righ t h an d q uic k ly o ver the b ac k of t h e left , a nd b ack a s th ough

bru shin g o ff the surpl us ( Da ko ta I ) It i s full ; brushin g o ff the sur
. .

pl us .

Deaf -
m n tc n a tu r a l sig ns Pl ace h an d down
the ,
an d r a isin g i t a nd
,

m ovin g i t ri gh t an d left as i f at the t o p o f the s a ck or box ( Ba ll a r d)

.

C li nch
your h a nd i n the for m of the letter C , a n d over the supposed
con vex surfa ce a bove it p a ss the ot h er h a n d so m ewh a t clinch ed a lso .

( Cr oss)
The s am e as En o ug h .
( L a r son )
A ppetite s a tised ( Co m p are E n o u g h )
.
.

Fin ger an d thu m b risin g fro m the m ou th ( M a cg o wa n ) .

M ak e the sign for E a t an d w hen co m p leted a n d h a n d brou gh t before

,

a bdo m e n a s i n type ( T 1 ) m odi ed by bei n g held horizont a l a n d arched

,

wi th b a ck outw ard i t then d es cribes an ar e over a bdo m en a s to i ndi

,

c a te fullness ( O to I ) Filled u p ; di sten ded

. . .

M e the sign of E a t , then close the righ t h and , spre a din g the in
ak

dex a nd thu m b wide a p a rt p al m tow a rd th e body then p ass it fro m the

, ,

bre a st u pw ard to before the m outh ( Da ko ta V I I ; K a to w a I ; C o manche .

I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I ) .

F utu r e , ( i n ti m e )
to co m e .

Ri ght i nde x upri ght ( J , excep t of h a n d tow a rd the body ) is b ak

p ushed str ai ght forw a rd out ward fro m the shoulder an d dra w n b a ck
, ,

three o r four ti m es a r m ex tended to its full c ap a city S ee m s to be con

,
.

n ec t e d w ith F a r
( D a ko ta I ) F a r i n
. ti m e
. .

G a p ; c a no n .

Indic a te the w a lls thereof wi th the h a n ds i n fron t o f the body , p al m s ,

tow ard e a ch other , n ger s exten ded an d poi nted do w n w a rd ( A r a .

p a ho I ) .
 1 17

B oth h a nd s ei gh teen inches in fron t o f the bre a st sep ar ated about six .

i nches n gers an d thu m bs poi n tin g u pright , wi th the p al m s facin g e a ch

,

other ( S with edge o f h an ds outw a rd ) thu s ( I I ) ; d ra w the right h a nd

,

i n w ard a bout a foot turn i t so th a t the p a l m i s down w ard at n gers

, , ,

j oin ed , poin tin g str a igh t ou tw a rd , an d the n p ush th e h a n d forw a rd so

th a t it would g o through the m iddle of the sp ace for m ed by the h a nds
i n the rst position ( I ) O ften m ade w ith the ngers curved ( Da ko ta
. .

S ides o f a c a non o r r a vine ; p a ssin g through a c a non .

Ge l t .

B ri ngthe n gers an d thu m b o f the left h a n d together as i f so m ethin g

w a s hel d by the m an d then a ppro a ch the right h a nd a n d m a k e the
,

m otion o f cuttin g a cross wh a t is supposed to be h eld in the left h a nd ,

a n d then dr a w o ff th e ri gh t h a n d as if pul lin g a w a y wh a t h as been o ut .

( Dn nbar ) .

Ge n e r o u s.

H old both h a nds open the p al m s above a n d h el d i n fron t o f bre ast s

,

or body then presen t to wa rd the other p arty a n open s m il in g cou n

,

t e na nce ( Oj i bwa IV )
. .

The sign for Go o d H e a r t or B ig H e a r t is m ade .

( Da ko ta
Gh o s t .

S i gn
for D e a d D e a t h an d then the si gn for
, , M an .
( Da ko ta I)
.

De a d m a n fro m the spirit l a nd .

Gim l e t .

In dex poi nti n g to the center of the left h a nd foren ger ( whi ch indi
c a tes the h a ndle o r borin g p art ) Then the scre w m otio n w i th the righ t .

h a nd con veys the ide a cle arly ( Zn ni I ) .

-

G i ve in e ,
or B r in g to m e .

The h an d h alf shut w ith the thu m b pressin g a ga in st the foren ger ,

bein g rst m oder a tely extended either to the righ t o r left i s brought ,

with a m oder a te j er k to the Opposite side , as if so m ethin g w as p ulled

a lon g by t h e h a nd Con seq uen tly the sign of w a ter preced in g this
.

si gn would con vey the expression Gi ve m e w a ter ( Dnn bar ) ,

. .

ext en ded in a poin tin g position to w a rd the obj ect in re

'

I h e h an d - -

q uest , then brou ght tow a rd the body w ith the n gers r a ised vertic ally ,
an d l a i d a g a in st the bre a st ( L o ng ) .

O bject wish ed for pointed to , the ri gh t h a nd bei n g held in si gn for as

B in g ;
r brou ght w i th two o r th ree j erk y m otion s tow ard the fa ce o r
bre a st o fth e spe a k er ( C hey enne I ) . .

Pl a ce the ri ght h a n d ne arly at ar m s len gth before the bre a st, p a l m

u p , an d m ak e a short oscill a ti n g m otion t o a n d fro ( A bsar o ka I ; S ho .

shon i a n d Ba na k I)
.
 1 18

A fter
pl a ci n g the right h a n d a bout eighteen i nches in fron t o f th e
n ec k a nd turni ng it so th a t the p a l m w il l be outw a rd an d the little
,

n ger tow a rd th e nec k n gers overl a ppin g a n d uprigh t , th u m b in the

,

p al m , m ove the h an d tow ard the nec k ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

B rin g ,
to .

L eft h a n d extended t e n or twel ve i nches i n fron t o f the left bre ast

( P 1 , p al m upw a rd ) ; right h a nd ( P ) exten ded in fron t of ri ght bre a st , ,

a r m s full extent , is m oved o ver the left a s though c a rry in g so m eth in g to

the left h an d wi t h the righ t ( Da ko ta I ) . .

B ri n g
to m e .

Contin ue th e si gn for T o B by brin gin g the h a nds close to the

r in g
left bre ast ( Dako ta I )
. .

Brin g a nd give to m e .

Poi n t
to or otherwise in dic ate th e perso n directed an d the obj ect or

a rticle desired , a n d i m ply a ppro a ch by bec k on in g ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te na tur a l sig ns E xten d the o pen h a n d an d dr a w it b ac k as

i f conveyin g so m ething to one s self

. Ba ll a r d .
)
S tretch ou t the foren ger a nd then m ove it tow a rd the bre a st ( L ar so n ) .

C lo se the h a nd and m ove it to on e s self

.
( Ba l let r d -
.
)

Gi ve
to m e o r u s .

The right h a n d exte nded in fro n t o f body ( Q ) as t h ou gh t a k i ng hold

o f a nythin g an d then brought b a ck to body with n gers pointin g u p
,

w a rd a s thou gh holdin g the a rticle i n it ( P ) ( Da ko ta I ) T ak in g the . .

a rticle fro m the donor

.

Deaf ~
m ute n a t ur a l sig n C lose the h and except foren ger , wi th it it s
poin t to so m ethin g ,
a nd then m o ve i t to w ard the bre ast ( H asensta b ) . .

G ive to h im or an other .

Reverse G i v e t o h i e h a ndi n g the a rticle to the person .

( Da ko ta

I gi ve i t t o you .

The right ar m is se m i extended also th e h a n d ( as i n type position Y

-

,
-

1 m odied by m iddle ri n g a nd i ndex n gers bei ng m ore col lected or

, , ,

closed ) ; ar m a n d h a nd t h us poi n t to obj ect B oth are then brought .

to w ard the body , the index beco m in g m ore hoo k ed as h a n d a ppro aches ,
a n d n a lly it s end con cl udes th e a r c of appro a ch by touchi n g center of

bre a st ( O to I )
. E viden t in sign
. .

I will gi ve .

First m ak e the sign f o r I , person al pronoun , a n d then the si gn for

G i v e , a s cont a ined in G i v e as G i v e t o h i m ( Da ko ta

, . 1
h a nd it t o you ; I gi ve it to you .
 1 19

H a n d held in position for give m e ne a r t o the chi n or bre a st ex

, ,

ten ded q uic k ly tow a rd the person a ddressed ( C hey enn e I ) . .

Fro m an u pri ght position in fron t o f the chi n , p al m t u rn ed tow a rd

th e ri ght h a n d ; th row the righ t h an d forw a rd ei ghteen in ches or u n ti l
'

the ends o f the n gers poin t ob l iq uely forw ard an d u pw ard ( Da ko ta .

IV .
)
De f a -
m u te na t u r a l sig ns Poin t to the bo so m ,
m e a nin g the spe ak er ,
stretch the closed h a nd an d then open it .
( Ba lla r d )
First poin t to yo u r bre a st w ith y o u r n ger then ,
m ove forw ard the
h a n d cl in ched a n d se t free the st ( C r o ss )
,
.

I ta lta n sign The m otion th a t on e is willin g to give so m eth in g an d ,

whi ch m ay be c alled the bribing gest ure is to p u t o ne h a n d in to the

,

m on ey -
poc k et .
( B u t le r )
Gir l . Se e C h i l d .
( C o m p a re W o nl a n .
)
Gl a d ; co n ten t ; p l e a se d ; sa t i s e d .
( C o m p are G o o d ) .

Wi th the r a ised ri gh t h a nd p ass with a

se r p e n t in e m ove m ent
p w ard u

fro m the bre a st an d fa ce above the he ad .

( Wi ed ) H e art be a ts hi g h .

Boso m s l ord si t s ligh tly on it s thron e

.

Wa ve the Open h an d o u tw ard fro m the bre a st to expre ss good he art .

( Bmt o n )
-

l
.

The sign f o r P r e t t y , n o t m ade in i m m edi a te j u xt aposition t o the fa ce

o r a n y p art o f the body is si gnic a n t g ener all y of co n tent sa tisf act io n ,
, ,

co mp l a isa nce etc , expres sed b v the Indi a n phr a se Go o d o r I t i s g o o d

,
.
, .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

S tri k e
the chest over t h e he art l ig htly t wo o r three ti m es with th e
p al m of the ri g h t h a nd ; then m ak e the sign for g ood ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

H e art good .

The ri gh t h and extended h orizon t all y p al m down w ard , is hel d in

, ,

fron t o f an d ne ar o r to u chin g the thro at a nd is th en m oved forw ard a ,

few i nches This den otes a co m fortabl e feel in g of f ul l ness or satisf ac

.

ti on ; b u t to indic ate the m ore i nten se feel in gs of bein g c l oyed o r gl ut

ted the h a nd m ay be he l d at l h e ch in o r a t the m o u th , the si gn bein g
otherwi se u nch a n ged These si gn s m ay be u sed to den ote sa t ie ty fro m
.

other cau se s besides e a tin g a n d drin k in g ( ll a nda n a n d Hi da tsa I ) . . .

With the ri gh t h a nd ( S ) t ap the left bre a st sever al ti mes an d then ,

c a rry the h a n d forw a rd an d tow ard the ri gh t w ith p al m dow n w a rd ( W ) , ,

C on ten t gl ad good h a ppy s a tised a r e a ll expressed by th is si gn

, , , , ,
.

( Da ko ta I ) The h e art feel s g ood

. .
 120

M ak e
i n cl in a tion o f the body forw ard , m ovin g a t the s a m e ti m e
an

both h an d s forw a rd fro m th e bre a st o p en , wi th the p al m u pw ard , a nd ,

gr ad ually low erin g the m ( I r o quo is I ) I give y o u th an k s

. . .

E xten d both h an ds o utw ard , p al m s t u rned down , an d m ak e a sign

ex act l y si m il ar to the w ay l ad ies sm ooth a bed in m ak in g i t . Wichi ta I )
.

S m ooth a n d e a sy .

G l a ss .

L eft h an d rched the th u m b an d f oren ger m eetin g a t their tips

a , ,

for m in g a circl e is hel d in front of th e l eft bre a st horizont al b a ck o f

, ,

h a n d u pw a r d th u m b a n d foren ger tow ard the body ; then the right

,

index i s bro u ght u p close to the body in fron t an d p a ssed forw ard from
the bre a st , describin g a series o f circles to the center of the c ircle for m ed
by the left h a nd , b u t n o t pl a ced wi thi n i t Dayli gh t i s in cl uded in thi s . .

( D a ko t a

Fro m the s a m e r ay s o f l i ght p a ssin g thro u gh a p a ne of
gl a ss in to the h ou se .

G l u t to n P ar a site
; .

I ta l i a n sig n Pin ch the chee k with the n ger .

( B u tler ) .

Go ; go a w ay ; de p a r t ; l e a ve h ere .

The b ack of the h a nd stretched o ut an d u p w ar d .

( Dun bar ) .

Li k e C o m e ( Wi ed ) ,
begin n e a r the face an d extend the h an ds
b ut
wi th a n u m ber of gen tl e j er k s ( Wied ) Th e s am e re m a rk s a pp l y to .

th i s sig n a s t o th a t for C o m e ( M a t the ws ) The righ t ar m i s ben t .

an d the h a n d i n position ( B 1 ) horizon t al i s bro u gh t t o the epi g a stri u m

a n d s u dden ly ar m a n d h a n d a r e extended The identity o f the co n ce p .

tion of this O to si gn an d Wied s i s e viden t The m ove m ent o f exten sion

.

in the l a tter description by jer k s h a s littl e relev an cy a n d m ay be

,

rea son a bly exp l a ined by the c aprice o f the s u bj ect ( Bo te ler ) . .

M ove both h a nds ed gew ays ( the p al m s fron tin g the bre a st ) tow ard
the left , with a rock in g horse m otion ( B ur to n ) -

Ri g ht h an d h eld to w ard l eft sho ulder f ore ar m a cross the bre ast ,

n gers an d th u m b exten ded p al m u p w ard an d in w ard ; bro u gh t wi th

,

e l bow for a pi vot su ddenly to the righ t ( C hey enn e I ) . .

The ri gh t h an d i s carried t o the left side o f the body , l evel of th e

bre a st horizon t al , p al m o u tw a rd th u m b bel ow ( W
,
extended n gers ,

poin tin g tow a rd the left ; ca rry the ar m o ut to fu ll extent i n fron t of

body an d to t h e ri gh t This is e m ph atic Dis m issin g the p erson
. . .

M a n y In di an s m ak e the si gn f o r G 0 , G o a w a y by u sin g the in dex ,

, held u pw a rd the rest o f the n gers bei n g closed an d c a rryin g fro m left
,

to ri ght o r directly o u t in front o f body , b ut this is n ot ne ar so e m ph a tic

as the a bove G 0 in the sen se of G o n e , D e p a r t e d , wo ul d be de
.
,
 12 1

n oted prefer a bly by u si n g th e l a tter si gn an d by stoppin g the m otion of

the h a n d sever a l ti m es in c a rryin g i t o ut to it s n a l exten ded posi tion i n ,

rese m bl an ce of the w a l k in g a w ay o f the person ( Da ko ta I ) H e h as . .

w a l k ed a w ay .

The Opened ri g ht h an d bein g a d v a n ced abo u t a foot a nd a t the height

of the n a vel p a l m tow a rd the left n gers sep ar a ted a little , h and ben t
,

at the wrist an d pointin g down w a rd an d forw a rd , m ove i t str ai gh t

a h e a d a bo u t a foot a nd a t the s a m e ti m e r ai se the end s o f the n gers

,

u n til the h a n d is horizon t a l ( Dako ta IV )

. .

Th i s is i ndic ated by a m otion the reverse o f C o nn e , a nd w he n the

sig n i s co m pleted the h a nd sta n ds a s in the begi nnin g of t h e for m er

gest ure ( M a ndan a nd Hi da tsa I )

. .

Pl a ce the closed h a nd k n u c k l es u p w a rd before t h e bre a st ; elev a te

, ,

the index a nd p a ss the h an d slowly i n a j er k i n g or i nterr upted m ove

,

m en t tow a rd the fron t a n d left p al m f a cin g the front

, ( Ka io wa I ; 00 .

m an che II I ; Ap a che II ; Wich i ta II ) .

W i th the in dex only exten ded poi nt to the e a rth a n d tr a ce

,
a co urse
alon g the e a rth tow a rd an d a bove the horizon ( Ap a ch e .

Go w ay
a .

P l ace the open l eft h a nd twel ve inches or so in fron t o f the lower p art
of the chest poi n tin g forw ard tow a rd the right p a l m l oo k in g obliq u e l y
, ,

u pw a rd a n d b a c k w a rd ; then q u ic k ly p a ss the p a l m of the ri g ht h a nd

forw ard a nd up w ard across th a t of the left a nd beyon d i t a bou t a foot .

( Da ko ta IV ) .

The h a nd w ith the p a l m facin g down w ard an d b ack w a rd , i s he l d cl ose

,

to the body an d a bo ut o n a l evel with the sto m a ch ; it is m oved u p w ard

t o a l eve l with the top o f th e h e a d a foot o r so i n fron t of it describin g
, ,

a n a r c w h ose con vexity is forw a rd ( M a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )

. .

The righ t h a nd is closed as in type posi tion ( B ) an d ar m se m ie xe d ,

-

brin gin g h a n d to cen ter o f body The a r m i s n ow s u dden ly exten ded

.

to ful l l en g th an d h a n d exp a nded i n the m ove m e n t ( O to I ) To r e . .

m ove fro m .

The ri gh t ar m is exed and the h a nd i n position ( B

,
m ore horizon
,
.

t al , is bro u ght to the epig a stri u m The ar m is t hen s u dden ly exten ded
.
,

h a n d li k ewise , w ith the in dex n ger poi ntin g d irectly fro m the body .

A cco m p a n y in g thi s si gn th ere is gen er al ly a rep u lsi ve or forbiddin g

frow n a s su m ed by t h e co un ten an ce w hen one is ordered to dep art fro m
di sp l e a s u re To go o n a m essag e, the co u n ten a nce a ss u m es a s mi le , b u t
.

sign is identic a l an d i s co m bined w ith sign for S p e a k ( O to an d M is .

so ur i I )
. To w ith d r a w o r m ove fro m .

16
 12 2

Pl a ce th e ri gh t h and at th e hei g ht o f an d i n fron t o f t h e a bdom en . .

poin ti n g u pwa rd p al m o ut w ard n gers sli gh tl y sep a ra ted an d ben t ;

, ,

th en m o v e t h e h an d off t ow ard the left ( Pa i Ute .

Throw the righ t h a n d over the right sh o ul der so th a t t h e i n d e x p oin ts

b ac k w a rd ( Wichi ta I )
. .

D ea
f nt ute
-

n a tur a l signs A sligh t m ove m e n t of the feet on the oor

an d m ovin g the h and forw ard .

O pen the h a n d an d m ove u p , an d at the s am e ti m e poin t it forw ard .

( Hase usta h )
-

C lose th e h a n d except its fore n ger , a n d m ove it forw ard , poin t in g i n

,
-

the direction y o u wish th e p erson t o go ( Ha sensta b) .

M ove the h an d forw a rd an d for w ard .

( L ar son )
To a p l a ce , to go .

M ak e the si gn for G o , an d w hen the h a n d i s n e a r a t a r m s len gth ex

ten d the left au d pl a ce it horizon t ally before the m ovin g right so th a t

th ey co m e to g ether au dibl y ( Ka i ow a l ; C o manche III ; Ap a che I I ; IVi
.
'

chi ta II ) .

Go at .

P a ss both h a nd s , w ith the ti ps of the n ger an d th u m bs bro ught to a

poi n t in a c urve b a ck w a rd a nd d ow n w ard fro m th e e a rs in the direction
,

of th e h orn s then pl a ce both h an d s at th e lower p a rt of the abdom en

, ,

p al m s a bo u t 3 in ches a p art an d fa cin g wi th n gers sep ar a ted an d c urved ,

so t h a t the ti ps to u ch c I rved hor s rge t ticles

A
( p a h e ) C u . n an d l a e s.

.

G o i n g , t r a v e l in g , j o urne y .

To describe a j o ur ney o n h orseb a c k the r st two n gers o f the right

h a n d a r e p l a ced a stride of th e foren ger of the l eft h an d , an d both re p
resen t the g allop in g m ove m en t o f a horse If i t is a foot j ou rney w a ve .

the two n gers sever a l ti m es thro u gh th e air ( Oj ib wa I ) . .

The k in d of loco m oti on m ay be indic a ted , as on horseb a c k , & c after .

,

th a t p a nto m i m ic , the ar m s an d h a n ds bein g m ade to represen t the legs

a n d feet
( Ar ap a ho I )
. .

To u ch the nose w ith the ri ght i n dex for I then

,
m ak e the sig n for
G0 ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

To u ch the he art w ith th e right i ndex , an d then w it h a w a ve of the

h an d o u tw a rd poi nt in the direction to which y o u in ten d to g o ( I r o
, .

quo is I ) .

S tri k e
the p al m s o f both h an ds together obl iq u e l y an d glid in g p a st .

on e a n other ( Zuni I ) . .
 123

Pl a ce the h a n ds th u m b to th u m b p al m s forw ard n gers extended ,

'

, ,

sep ar ated a n d pointin g u p w a rd then m ove the m fro m a bove the right
, ,

hip forw a rd an d tow a rd the left ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig n No gener al sign ,
whether o n b ut f o r r id in g ,

h or seb a c k or on wheels the sign w a s m a de by ben din g the a r m s an d

,

r a isin g a n d depressin g the elbows i n i m it a tio n of a m an ridin g o n

horseb a c k an d m ovin g the h a n d horizon ta lly forw a rd t o signify a wa y
,
.

( B a lla r d ) .

R unn in g .

H old the h a nd in the s a m e position as W a l k i n g an d , w ith the fore ,

n ger extended forw a rd , a dv a n ce the h a nd , k eepin g the clo sed portion

u nd erne a th a nd t u rnin g it sli ghtly a n d r a pi dly t o ri ght an d left by a
,

q u ic k m otion of the wrist ( I r o quo is I ) . .

T r avel l n g m arch i n g .

The h a n d he l d vertic al ly a s hi gh as the neck w ith sli ghtly divided ,

n gers and roc k ed ed gewi se forw ard an d b a c k w ard u pon th e wrist

, ,

extendin g the ar m a l ittle for w a rd This sign rese m bles th a t for Q u e s .

t i o n b u t d ie r s in the direction of the m otion of the h a nd ( L o ng )

,
.

H and s pl a ced in the posi tion for the sign for B a t t l e except m a k in g ,

th a t the y ar e further sep ar ate d an d t h en describe a series of h a lf circles,

o r forw a rd a rch li k e m ove m en ts with both h a nds ( Da ko ta I )

Per . .

son w al in g
k
.

H an d edge exten ded ti p s for w ard p al m i n ( T o n ed g e forw a rd ) ;

on , , , ,

w a ve it vertic a lly a nd forw ard Both h a n ds u sed i n dic a te two p a rties

.
, ,

esp ecia l ly the do u b l e col um n in which troops al w ays m a rch ( Ap ache .

III ) . A m b ul a n t forw ard m otion ,

.

W al k in g .

C lose the h a n d except the in dex n ger a nd with th a t extende d a t th e , ,

hei g h t of the bre ast , m ove the h a nd forw a rd , brin g in g i t dow n a l ittl e ,

a t reg u l a r in terv a ls , to i m it a te the ste a dy m ove m en t of a w a l k er (I ro .

quo is I ) .

Go n e un der , d i sa p p e a r e d f ro m V ie w .

L eft a tten ed an d held b a c k up w a rd , th u m b i n w ard i n fron t of

h an d ,

an d a few in ches fro m the bre a st right h a nd sli gh tly c l a s p ed fore n ger , ,

m ore extended th a n the others a n d p a ssed s u ddenly u nder the left h a nd , ,

th e l a tter bei n g at the s a m e ti m e gen tly m oved tow a rd the bre a st The .

ide a here i s th a t the person h as go ne un der a coverin g o f so m e k ind a s ,

a t a ble ten t bl a n k et & c , or gon e u nder the w ater i e

, , ,
. dis a ppe a r a n ce ,
. .
,

fro m view n ot u sed i n the sense of de a d de a th , or per m anen t di sap

, ,

p e ar ance ( Da ko ta I )
. .

All ; no m ore . See D e st r o y e d .

 124

Go n o r r h m a .

C lose t h e ri ght h an d allowi n g the in dex t o re m ai n h alf cl ose d poin t

, ,

in g dow n w a rd ; hol d the h an d a t t h e hei gh t of the hi p either at the ,

side or i n f ron t m ak in g q uic k d own w a rd m ove m en ts exte n di n g a n in ch

,

or two (A bs
. ar o ka I ; S h osh o n i a n d B ana k I )

Fl a ccid gl an s peni s an d .

droppin g of gon orrh oe a l di sch rge a

.

Go o d .
( C o m p are G l a d an d Ye s ) .

The h a nd held h ori zont al l y b a c k u p w ard , describes wi th the ar m a,

h orizon t al c u rve o u tw a rd ( L ong ) This is l i k e o u r m otion of benedic

.

ti on b u t m ay m ore su ggestively be co m p a red with sever al o f the si g n s

,

for Ye s, an d i n opposi tion to sever al of those f o r B a d an d N o , sh ow

in g t h e ide a of a ccept a n ce or selection o f obj ects presented i n ste a d of ,

their rej ection .

P l a ce the ri ght h a n d h orizon t ally i n fron t of the bre a st an d m ove i t

forw a rd ( Wi ed ) Thi s descriptio n is essenti ally the s a m e as the o n e I
.

fu rni sh ed ( M a n dan a nd H ida tsa I ) I st a te d howeve r th a t the h a n d

. .
,

w as m oved o u tw a rd ( i e to the ri ght ) . I do n ot re m e m ber seei n g it

.
,
.

m oved directly for w a rd In m a k in g the m otion as I h a ve d escribed i t

.

th e b and wo ul d h a ve to g o both o u tw a rd an d forw a rd ( M a tthe ws ) .

T h e l e f t a r m i s elev a ted an d t h e h a n d h el d in po i ti on ( W ) Th e ar m s .

a n d h a n d a r e th u s extended fro m the body o n a level with the chest ;

the e l bow bein g slightly ben t , th e a r m re se m bles a ben t h o w T h e righ t .

ar m is be n t an d the righ t h a n d i n position ( W ) , sweeps sm oothly over

the left ar m fro m th e biceps m uscl e over the en ds o f the n gers Thi s .

si gn a n d Wied s a r e n otice a bly si m i l a r T he di ff erence is , the O to si gn

.

u s e s the left ar m i n conj u n ction a n d both m o r e to th e l ef t The co nc e p , .

tion is o t so m eth in g th a t e a sily p asses ; s m oothness even ness etc , i n , ,

.

both ( Bo te ler )
. .

\V av e the h a n d fr o m the m o u th extending the th u m b fro m the index ,

an d closi n g the other three n gers Thi s sign al so m e a n s I k n o w .

.

( B u r to n )
(1 )Ri ght h a n d n gers poi ntin g to th e l eft p l a ced o n a leve l wi th
-

m ou th , th u m b in w a rd ; ( 2 ) s u ddenly m oved w i th c u rve o u tw ard so as

to p resent p a l m to p erson a ddresse d ( C hey enn e I ) .
.

P a ss the opened right h an d p a l m do wn w a rd , thro u gh an a r c of a bo u t

,

9 00 fro m the he a rt , 2 4 i nches hori zon t a lly forw ard a n d to the right .

( Da ko ta IV ) H e a rt e a sy
. o r s m ooth

.

P l ace the at ri g ht h an d p al m down , t h u m b to uch in g the bre a st, then

,

m ove i t forw a rd an d sli g htly u p w ard an d t o the ri gh t ( Da ko ta VI .

,

VI I ; K a to w a I ; C o m an che I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta II ) .

P a ss the at h a nd , p al m down fro m th e bre a st forw ard an d i n a s l ight ,

c u rve to the ri gh t ( Da ko ta V I ; Hida tsa I ; A r ika r a I )

. .
 125

The ex t e n ded ri ght h a nd , p al m down w a rd thu m b b a ck w ard n gers , ,

poin t in g to the left is h eld ne arly o r q uite i n con t a ct w ith th e body

,

a bout on a level w i th th e s to m ach ; it i s then c a rried outw a rd to the

ri ght a foot o r t w o with a r a pid sweep , i n w hi ch th e fore ar m is m oved
b u t n ot necess a rily the h u m erus ( M a nda n an d H i d a tsa I ) . . .

M ove ri gh t h a n d , p al m down over , th e bl an k et ri ght ,

an d left , sever a l
t i m es
.
( O m a ha I ) .

A n o t her : H it t h e bl an k et rst ,
on the ri gh t then ,
on the left, p a l m
down severa l ti m es ( Om a ha
,
.

A nother : Poin t a t the obj ect w ith the ri ght foren ger sh ak in g it ,
a

little up a nd d own , the other n gers bein g closed ( Om a ha I ) . .

A n other : S a m e as precedin g , bu t with the h a n d open , the th u m b

croo k ed un der an d touch in g the foren ger ; h a nd held at a n a ngle of 45 0
w hile sh ak in g a little b a c k a nd forth ( Oma ha .

A n other : H old the close d h an ds together , th u m bs up ; sep a ra te b y

turni n g the wri sts do wn an d m ove the s t s a li ttle a p art ; then reverse
,

m ove m en ts till b a c k to rst position ( O ma h a I ) . .

An other : H ol d the left h an d w it h b ack to w a rd the ground n gers ,

a n d thu m b a p a rt a n d curved
,
H old t h e righ t h an d opposi t e it p al m
.
,

dow n ; h a nds a bout six inches ap a rt S h ak e the h an ds held t hu s u p .

,

a n d d o w n k eepin g the m the s a m e dist a n ce a p a rt

, ( Om a h a I ) . .

An other : H ol d t h e h an ds wi th the p al m s in th u m bs up m ov e h a nd s , ,

righ t a n d left k eepin g the m a bo ut six inches a p a r t ( O ma h a I )

,
. .

A n other : L oo k a t the righ t h a nd rst on the b a ck then , , on the p al m ,

then o n the b a c k a ga in ( Oma h a I ) . .

The a bove ei gh t si gn s were al l t ak en fro m on e O m ah a who st ated ,

th at they al l g ave the ide a of the w ord ud a G oo d

, .

The at ri gh t h a n d , p al m down , is m oved forw ard an d up w a rd st a rt ,

in g a t a poi n t abou t twelve in che s before the bre a st .

( Wyando t I ) .

Throw ri gh t h a n d ro m fron t to side n gers extended an d p al m down , ,

fore ar m horizont al ( Sa h ap tin I )

. .

Sam e sign as for G l a d , P l e a se d .

( I r o quo i s
Brin g both h a nd s to the fron t a r m s extended p al m s outw ard elev ate
, ,

the m upw ard an d slightly forw a rd ; the fa ce m e a n wh ile expressive o f

w onder ( Co m a n che
.

An other : Brin g the h a nd opposi te the bre ast a little bel ow h an d , ,

exte n ded p al m dow n w a rd ( W ) an d let i t m ove o ff i n a horizon t a l

, ,

dir ection If it be ve ry good this m ay be repe a ted If co m p arati vely

.
,
.

good , repe a t it m ore v iolen tly ( Co ma n che I ) . .

 12 6

Deaf -
m a te n a t ur a l st one S m a c k the lips .
( B a ll a r d ).

C lose the h a n d , w hile the t h u m b is up , and n od the he a d an d s m i le as

if to approve of so m ethi n g good .

( H a sensta b ) .

U se the sign for H a n d so n l e ,

at the s a m e ti m e n od the he a d as if
to say

yes .

( Zel g l er )
I ta lia n sig na T h e n gers g a thered on the m outh , k i ssed an d stre t che d
ou t a nd spre ad , i nti m a te a d a in ty m orsel ( B u tl er ) .

The open h an d s tretched o ut horizon ta lly , an d g en tly sh ak en i n t i ,

m ates th a t a th i n g is so so n ot good a n d n o t b a d ( B u t l er )
,
.

S o m e o f the sign s a ppe a r to be con nected w ith a ple a s a n t ta ste in t he

m outh , a s is the sign o f the Fren ch a n d our de a f m utes w a vin g then ce -

the h and , b ac k up w ard with n gers str ai ght an d j oin ed in a forw ard
, ,

a n d do wn w a rd curve The s a m e gesture with h a n d side wise is t heirs

.

a n d ours for g e n er a l a ssen t : Very well "

Good , H e art is .

S tri k e
w ith ri gh t h a nd on the he a rt a nd m ak e th e sign for G oo d ,
fro m the he art outw a rd ( C h eye nn e .

Touch the left bre a st two or three ti m es w ith the end s of the n gers
o f the ri gh t h a n d t he n m a k e the si gn f o r G oo d
, ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Pl a ce
the n gers o f the a t ri gh t h a nd over the bre ast t hen ,
m a ke the
S ign for G oo d ( Da ko ta VI I )
. .

ove h a n d to position i n fron t of bre ast n gers extended p al m

M , ,

dow n w ard ( W then with q uick m ove m en t throw h a n d for w ard a n d

to the side to a poi n t 1 2 or 1 5 i n ches fro m body , h an d s a m e as i n r st
position ( Sa h ap t ln I ) C ut i t o ff
.
'
. .

Good ,
Very .

Pl a ce left h a nd i n position in fron t of body with al l n gers closed

excep t rst thu m b lyin g on secon d ( Ill I ch an ged to left ) t hen wi th
, ,

foren ger of ri gh t h a nd extended in s am e w ay ( M 2 ) poi nt t o en d

of foren ger of left h an d m ove i t up t h e a r m till n e ar t h e body
,

a n d then to a point i n fron t o f bre a st to m ak e the si gn G oo d .

( Sa hap ti n I ) .

G ra n d m o t h e r . S ee R e l a t i on sh i p .

G r a ss ( C o m p a re F o r e s t )
. .

P o in t to the groun d with the i ndex a nd then turn the n gers u pw ard ,

to denote grow th If the gr a ss be lon g , r ai se t h e h a n d high ; an d i f

.

yellow , poi nt out th a t color ( Ba r ton ) .

 12 7

S i gn f o r
F o r e st , but di s t in guished therefro m by rel at ive hei gh t to
w h ich the h an d is r ai sed ( Ar ap a ho ) .

E xt en d the right h a n d i n fron t of body

-
the groun d in the an d n e ar

s a m e posi tion as the rst p a rt o f th e sign for re ( h a n d P ) ; r a ise the

h a n d bu t sli gh tly however turn i t over a t ( W ) a nd c arry i t with a
, , ,

sort o f w a vin g m otion to the ri gh t a n d left as i n i m it a tion of the w avi n g

of a l arge eld of gr a ss ( Da ko ta I ) The sprin gin g up o f the gra ss
. . .

H old the right h a nd n e ar the ground o r hi gh er accordin g to the ,

'

hei ght o f th e gra ss i ts b a ck f o r war d ng e rs poin tin g upw ard , an d a lit

, ,

t l e ben t or sep a r ated For gr as s growin g r a ise the h a n d a foot o r so

.
,

three o r four i nches at a ti m e ( Da k o ta IV V VI VII ; H i da tsa I ; .

, , ,

A r tka r a I ) .

H old the left h an d exten ded an d a t p a l m dow n before the bre a st , ,

the ri ght undern e ath it at a dist a nce to sho w hei gh t o f gr a ss ; m ov e

t h e right h a nd forw a rd an d b a c k w a rd fro m the tip to the w rist o f the
left ( m ai n t a ini n g pre v iou s dist a nce ) to sh ow the S pre a din g o f the growth
over th e su r fa ce ( Ute I ) Thi s si gn is used only in con vers ation ,
. .

when i t is k n own th a t gr a ss i s m e an t by previous referen ce ; other w ise

the foll owin g si gn i s used .

A n other : Is a lso represen ted by holdin g the a t righ t h a nd p a l m ,

do w n w a rd a few in ches fro m the ground differe n t elev a tion s represen t

, ,

in g v a ryin g h eights o f growth ( Ute I ) . .

H old the righ t h an d a t t h e hei gh t of the k n ee , b a c k down , n gers

p oin t in g u p w ard a n d divergin g ; then i n d ic ate the heigh t b y pl a cin g
the at an d exten ded p al m do wn w ard at the required heigh t ( Ap ach e I ) . .

D af e -
m u te I m it a te
the m a n n er of m owin g with a scythe
na tur a l sig n ,

an d ,
h a vin g touched th e lips wh ile the j a ws are in m otion hol d t h e ,

h a nd s a p art, on e ov er the other, an d then m ove about the h an d horizon

t ally ( Cr o ss )
. .

Fin e o r ni ce .

M ak e the si gn f o r G r a ss a nd G oo d . L iter a lly , good gr a ss .

( Da
k ota V I .
)

G ra z i n g . S ee Fe e d in g .

G r e a se .

L eft h a n d hel d c a relessly to level o f an d i n fron t o f left bre a st tw o

rst n gers o f the ri gh t h an d sli ghtly exten ded an d rubbed a g ain st t h e
p al m of the h an d a t the b a se o f the thu m b ( Cheyen ne I ) Prob a bly a . .

referen ce to the m a n ner i n w hich m arro w i s used i n p a in tin g

'

.
 12 8

Ri ght h a n d with n gers bent in rese m bl an ce to the bowl o f a spoon ,

an d then i n this posit ion brough t over the left as thou gh e m p tyin g co n ,

ten ts o f Sp o O n into it which i s hel d level o f sto m a ch h orizon tal p al m

, ,

Up w a rd n g e rs exten ded curve d up w a rd poin tin g outw ard ri gh t h a n d

, , , ,

t hen j oi nin g the l e f t an d i n s a m e p osi tion both h a n ds a r e pushed out i n ,

fron t of body as though holdin g a p an i n the m a nd a t the s a m e ti m e ,

in cli ne the he a d for w a rd a n d blow on the h an ds ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m . .

coolin g h o t gre a se o r food cook ed i n it

,
.

G re a t ( C o m p are B i g , i n the sen se of gre a t )

. .

The two h ands open pl aced w i d e ap ar t o n e a ch side the body a nd

m oved forw a rd ( Dun ba r )

.

The si gn for B i g , i n the sen se of l ar g e a r o u nd , u sed to represen t the

qu ali ty of gre atness ( Cheye nn e I ) . .

Deaf m u te n a t ur a l sig n Sep ar a te the h a nds widely a p art .

( Ba l la r d )

G r e a t F a t h e r : P r e si d e n t ; a l so S e c re t a r y o f I n t e r i o r .

M a k e the sign s f o r W h i t e I n a n C h i e f a nd F a t h e r ( Kai o wa

, , .

I ; C o ma nche III ; Ap ache I I ; Wi ch ita II ) .

G re e n . S ee C ol or

G ri e f .

Brin g the right h a n d up to the left bre a st wi th n gers a nd thu m b

t ogeth er ( U , n gers down w a rd ) foren ger a g a in st bre a st , m a k e a down
,

w a rd m ove m en t t h e h a n d t urnin g as i t goes do wn till the p a l m i s u p

,

w ard ( C hey enne I I ) Dow n he a rted ; lost he art

. .
-
.

Pl a ce the en ds o f the n gers over the eyes with both h a nds at the ~

s am e ti m e , a n d gently l e t the h a nds drop i m it atin g droppin g o f te a rs

,

by repe a tin g the m otion tw o o r three ti m es the h a n ds fallin g a bout to

,

the bre a st the he ad b owed forw a rd

,
.
( Oj i bw a IV ) .

The S i gn for Weep i ng C r y ing i s a p a rt of the si gn for grief, which

,

w ould h a rdly be co m pl ete , h owever , wi thout referen ce to the he a rt an d ,

t h e followin g is the sign f o r grief o r sorrow o f the he art or , a s the S iou x ,

sa y ,

H ea r t i s do w n up set Th e p al m ar surfa ce o f the ri gh t h a n d
,
.

horizon tal wi th n gers extended , p ats the left bre a s t severa l ti m es a nd

, ,

is then turn ed over three o r four i n ches i n fron t of t h e left bre a s t so (a s

to bri n g the p a l m up w ar d thu m b outw ard ( Da ko ta I )
,
U pse t he art , . .

w eepin g
.

Pl a ce the p a l m a r side o f the extended n gers of the ri gh t h a nd to the

front side of the he a d , close the eyes , and drop the he a d forw a rd upon
t h e bre a st ( Wyan do t I )
. .
 1 2 f)

W ounded feeli n gs

G ri e ve d
'

Wi th the i ndex only exten ded a nd held h orizon t ally i n fron t of the
bre a st poi ntin g tow a rd the left preten d t o puncture the he art a t re
, ,
.

p e a t e d m ove m e n ts ( K a io w a I ; Co m a nche I I I ; Ap a ch e II ; Wi chi ta II )

. .

G ro u n d . Se e E a rt h .

G ro w or V e g e t a t e , T o .

Turn h a nd a nd foren ger up fro m the ground i ndica tin g the growin g ,

or co m i n g fro m the groun d o r out of the e arth , close the b al an ce of

n ger s over the upturned p a l m o f the righ t h a nd r a ise h a n d by a quick ,

m otion a few i n ches fro m the e arth ( Oj i b wa IV ) . .

C o m m encewith the si g n for L i f e l i v i n g but stop the up w a rd , ,

m otion of the h an d a t th e proper ti m e a n d turn i t over , an d hold a s seen

in ( W ) ( Da ko ta I ) Desi gn at i n g the a m ou n t of gro wth by hei gh t
. .

fro m the ground .

The h a n d is collected so m ewh a t cup sh aped a s i n type position ,

the n gers m ore closed an d h and h orizont al a n d m a de to a ppro a ch the ,

m outh a s i n the a ct of e a tin g

, The exten ded ri ght a n d left indices ar e
.

then crossed a n d brou ght ne ar the groun d Fro m thi s posi tion the .

h a nd s i n si t n ar e unifor m ly an d successi vely r ai sed i n j er k s ( O to a nd

-

M i sso u r i I ) T h e co m in g up of so m ethi n g to e a t fro m t h e e a rth

. .

Gun .

H old
out the left h a n d a s i n the act of supportin g t h e g un w hen
,

d irected h orizon t a lly a n d w i th the ri ght a ppe a r to coc k it ( L on g )

,
.

C lose the n gers gain st the th u m b , elev a te the h a n d an d open the

a ,

n gers w ith a qu ic k sn a p ( Wi ed) It see m s to m e th at here he on l y

.

describes in sl ightly v a ried l an gu a ge th e m oti on a lre a dy referred to in

A r ro w T o s h oo t w i t h a n d G u n Di sc h a r g e o f , the rin g
, , ,

o f a gun an d not th e g u n itself The only si gn I ever re m e m ber t o h a ve .

seen f o r G u n w as m a de by the a rm s bein g held in the position of

shootin g a gun b ut w hether this si g n w as con ven tion a l o r i m provised
I do n ot re m e m ber ( M a t thews) .

The dexter thu m b and n gers ar e a shed or sc attered ,

i . e ,
. thrown
outw a rd o r up w a rd , t o den ote re .
( Ba r to n )
B i gh th an d n gers poin tin g u p w a rd p arti a lly closed a g ain st the
-

thu m b held to le vel of shoulder sudden ly elev a ted a bove the he a d

, , ,

a n d the n gers a n d thu m b a t the s a m e ti m e sn a pped open to i m it a te the

quic k disch arge of s m oke fro m a g un ( Chey enn e I ) . .

Both in dex ng e r s extended ( oth ers closed ) , thu m bs resti n g o n secon d

-

n gers the ri gh t brou gh t to the righ t eye w ith b a c k o f h an d tow ard

, ,

the right , hor iz on t a l n ger p oi ntin g str a ight outw ard , an d t h e left ar m
17
 130

extended to its full c a p a ci ty in fron t of the eye so th a t th e ex t en d ed ,

foren ger of th a t h a n d is o n a l ine w ith th e extended foren ger o f th e

r igh t b a ck of left h an d tow a rd the left h a n d h orizon ta l n ger poi ntin g
, , ,

forw a rd Edge of th e n gers of both h an ds dow n w a rd ( Da ko ta I )

. . .

Fro m the ac t o f ai m i n g with the gun .

S e m i e xth e n gers an d th u m b of th e left h a n d a n d pl a ce the h an d

-

in fron t of the chest wi th it s p a l m i nclinin g down w a rd b ack w a rd , a nd

, ,

tow a rd th e righ t a t a n a n gle of 4 5 0 ; p a ss the right st upw ar d a lon g

the p al m of the left un til th e righ t wris t l ies between the left th u m b
an d in dex then suddenly open al l t h e n gers
, ( Dak o ta IV ) . .

The ri gh t h a n d brough t t o th e ri gh t si d e of the chest s t o p in posi

tion ( E horizont al ; the ngers su d denly opened as i n gr a spi n g a ,

trigger ; t h e left a r m a nd i ndex n g e r exten d ed a nd the righ t h an d in

-

a bove posi ti on brou gh t to the m iddle o f the left ar m ; the ri ght h an d

suddenly exp a nded up w ard a s th e s m ok e fro m the expl osion of the ca p

,

when the gun is d isch a rge d ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) Th a t w hich is d is

. .

ch a rged b y a tri gger fro m the sh oul d er .

percussi on
C ap , .

L eft h a n d hel d in fron t of the bre a st h a lf closed n gers o f the ri gh t , ,

h an d cl a sped as t hou gh gr a spi n g a s m all obj ect an d brou ght dow n t o

left h a nd m otion m a de wi th the ri ght h a nd a s tho u gh co o kin g a g un ;
ri gh t h a n d sl apped in to t h e p a l m of the left h a nd m a k in g a sh arp cl a p , .

( Chey e nn e

Di sch a rge of a .

Pl a ce both h a n ds a s in A r ro w t o s h oo t a n ; exten d the left ar m , ,

con tr a ct t h e ri gh t before the fa ce then sn ap t h e e n ds o f the n gers ,

for w ard ( Wied ) The description is so a m biguous th a t I ca n n o t

.

s a tisfy m yself as to h is m e a nin g Perh a ps he i s t ryin g to describe a

.

for m of the sign for V o l l e y whi ch I g a ve y ou ( M a tth e ws ) There is

,
.

in dispu t able si m il arity in the ( O to a n d M i sso ur i I ) si gn a n d Wied s a s to

.

con ception an d execution the sligh t di f feren ce bein g in execu tin g i t

,
.

( B o te l e r )

L eft h a n d w ith al l the n gers ex t en d ed horizon t al , b a ck ou tw ard ed ge , ,

of n gers dow n w ard i s h eld abou t 1 8 in ch es in fron t o f the bre a st an d

, ,

the b a ck o f the right w ith n gers exten ded upright , j oin e d b a ck o ut , ,

w a rd ( S ) , is c arried ou t fro m the bre ast , struck quic k ly a ga in st the

p al m o f the left , i e cl a ppin g the h a n ds This is f o r a sin gle dis
. .
,
.

ch arge For a co n t in uo u s di sch a rge of m us k etry , cl ap the h a n ds m a n y

.

ti m es in r a pid succession ( Da ko ta
Fro m the n oise of the disch arge
.

of r e a r m s
-
.
 l 3]

G u n in t -
.

W ith the in dex n g e r of th e right cu t o ff a piece o f the exten ded

-

th u m b so th a t th e n ger is l ai d a cross th e th u m b n ail ( We id) I h a ve

,
-
.

seen this sign m a de ( M a tthew s) .

G u n p ow d e r .

A ppe a r to t ak e up a p i n ch of the powde r an d to rub it between th e

n ger an d th u m b , then turnin g the h a nd sprin g t h e n gers fro m th e
th u m b u pw a rd so as to represen t th e explodi ng o f th e p owder
,
.

R ubthe th u m b an d in dex n ger together repe a tedly ( Wi ed) I .

re m e m ber h a vin g see n thi s sign m ade ; b u t I thin k th at w hen the

n gers were rubbed together they were held poi n ts down w ard , an inch
o r so a bove th e Open p al m o f the left h an d M a tthews ) . .

The left h a nd horizon ta l p al m up w ard n gers to the ri ght ( X) is held , , ,

i n fron t of th e bre a st ; right h a n d ( U ) wi th n gers poin tin g dow n w a rd , ,

b a c k ou tw ard is held over the p al m of the left wi t h a slight m otion of

, ,

the th u m b a n d fore n ger a s though feel in g the gr a in s o f powder w i th ,

the m ( Da ko ta I )
. E x a m in i n g the grain s of powder
. .

R ub the th u m b a nd index of the right h an d t ogether for sever al

seconds .
( Da ko ta IV ) .

Gu n re w -
sc .

E lev a te th e h a n d to i ndic ate the gun an d twi st the n gers '

Sp ir ally
a roun d the thu m b .

Gu n -
s hot .

First m ak e th e si gn for E xp l o si o n w ith the righ t h an d wh ich is ,

m a de by the st ( B excep t in g th a t the th u m b i s u nder th e n gers -

i e restin g in t h e p al m of the h a n d th e n gers ar e sn a pped forw a rd

. .
, ,

an d upw a rd fro m t h e level o f the bre a st to th a t o f the he a d where a ll ,

th e n gers are closed but th e index an d second , which are sep a r a ted .

an d poin t up w a rd ( N ) ( Da ko ta

In dic ates the explosion or d is .

ch arge o f both b a rrel s o f a d o ub l e b ar r e l e d shotgun .

To hi t w ith a .

Pl a ce the tips of the n gers dow n w ard upon t h e th u m b , then sn a p

the m forw a rd an d stri k e the h a nds together ( Wi ed ) Prob abl y when .

he s ay s , str i k e the h a nd s together , h e wishes to describe m y sign for

S hot W hen th e person w ho m the prince saw m ak in g this sign
. ,

r a ised th e n ger h e m ay h ave don e so to i ndic ate a M a n , o r O n e

,

shot I d o n o t t hin k th a t th e r aisin g o f the n ger i s a n i ntegral p art of

.

t h e si gn M a t thews ) . .

Sa m e as in m ak in g the rst si gn h a ve both h a nds open ed

B o w ,
b ut
a nd th e n gers poin ti n g to w a rd t h e left ( Da ko ta I V ) . .
 1 32

Pl a ce the l eft h a n d at a r m s len g t h in fron t of th e bre a st th e ri gh t at

,

th e s a m e ele va tion but i n fro nt of the right shoulder t hen s na p the ,

n gers from th e th u m b si m ulta neou sly When th e sign i s u sed i n co n .

n e c t io n with o t her gestures i n a sen ten ce i t is thu s a bbrevi a ted ; whe n

used al on e the b a ck s of th e n gers o f th e ri gh t h an d a re struc k a t

,

a g a in st th e p a l m o f t h e left ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

E xten d the left h a n d , cl osed , ne arly len gth Pl ace th e closed at a r s

m
.

ri gh t h a nd before th e ri gh t sh o u lder , rst two n gers restin g o n the

b all o f t h e th u m b ; the n si m ult an eou sly sn ap forw a rd the i n dex an d
second n gers of th e righ t h an d an d th e foren ger of th e left ; n ally ,
thro w the open righ t h an d over a nd dow n w ard tow a rd the righ t .

( Ute I ; A bsa r o ka 1 ; S hosho n i? a nd Ba n a k I ) . To hi t an d k ill .

To h i t the t ar get .

W ith th e h a n ds i n the posi tion st a ted a t th e co m pletion of t h e si gn

for G u n d i sc h a r g e o f a , dr a w th e ri ght h an d b ac k fro m the left
, ,

th a t is in tow ard the body ; close al l th e n gers except the i n dex ,

,

which i s exten d e d hori zontal b a c k to w a rd the ri ght p oin ti n g strai gh t

, , ,

ou tw ard i s pushed forw ard a g ai n st t h e cen t e r of th e st ation a ry left

,

h a nd with a q uic k m o t io n S h ould the t a rget n ot be hi t i t can be

.

i n dic a ted by p u sh i n g the in dex above below o r to the side of the l eft , ,

h an d as the c a se m a y require ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the stri k in g of th e

, . .

t a rget Bullet co m es to a stop

. .

a il .

Begi n wit h the sign o f W a t e r , then the si gn o f C o l d , n ext the

sign o f a S t o n e then th a t for S a n l e o r S i l n i l a r , then the sign of
,

W h i t e an d l a stly concl ude wi th t h e si gn of a n E g g ; a ll o f w hich

,

co m bined gi ves the ide a of h ail ( Du nbar ) .

Wi th the fore n ger of ri ght h an d restin g a gain st the b al l o f the

th u m b wi th the secon d a n d third ph a l an ges croo k e d in such a m a n ner
,

a s to for m a s m a ll round open in g rese m blin g a h a il s ton e other n gers ,

ex tended m ak e i n fron t of face an d a bove a nd aroun d it the up w a rd

,

a n d dow n w a rd m ove m en ts describin g the fa lli n g o f h ai l stones

, ( Da ~
.

ko ta I ) Fro m th e f al l iu g o f h a il s t ones
.
-

Deaf - Represen ted by showi n g the b al l of the

m ute n a tur a l sig n s

th u m b to indic a te th e size , poin tin g t o the shi rt boso m t o sign ify th e -

col or a n d m ovin g th e extended ngers dow n repe atedly t o deno t e the

,

fall .
( Ba ll a r d )
Move t h e h a nd s outstretched upw a rd and d ow n w a rd ,
an d then str i k e
the li st o n the h e a d L arso n ) . .

Ha i r .

The m ove m en t of co m bin g ( Da nba r )

-
. .
 1 33

( 1 ) L eft h an d n at u r ally closed elev ated to th e fron t o f the person

, ,

ri ght h a n d held c arelessly a ga i nst b a se of t h u m b o f left h an d ( 2 ) si gn

for G r a ss m a de This sign is so m eti m es m a de over other portion s of
.

the body th e ide a b e in g skin gr a ss ( C h ey enne I )

,

. .

Touch th e h a ir of the person or a n i m a l w ith th e righ t in dex .

( Da ko
ta
Design a tin g th e h a ir .

H a l t "S t o p "
R a i se the h and with the p al m in fron t an d push it back w ard a n d
, ,

forw a rd sever a l ti m esa gesture well k n own in the E a st ( Bur to n) .

Pa l m right h an d d own m ove side w ays two o r t h r e e ti m es durin g

of , ,

th e exten sion of ar m slowly extendin g to n a t ur a l len gth ( n ot s t retched ) ,

th en stopped a n d held sti ll a m o m ent , gen tly lower a li ttle w ith a c a re ,

f ul m ove m en t to th e righ t of sai d sh oulder ( Oj i bw a IV ) . .

Ri gh t h a nd brough t i n fron t o f the ri ght bre a st a few in ches h a n d ,

a n d n gers uprigh t j oined p al m out w ar d ( T ) c a rry i t in this posi t ion ,

, ,

directly outw a rd fro m th e body w ith a quick m ov e m en t , an d when the

ar m is extended a bout tw o th irds of its c a p a city co m e to a sudden stop
.

a n d h old there a m o m en t ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the a ct of stoppin g

. .

suddenly .

Bo t h h a n ds clin ched as i n ( A ) h eld i n front of th e body the right

, ,

h a nd above t h e left Bri n g th e ri ght h an d down quic k ly on top of the

.

l eft .
( Da ko ta I I I ) .

S h ak e the uprigh t opened righ t h and four t o eigh t in ch es fro m side

to side a few ti m es fro m twel ve to ei ghteen in ches i n fron t o f the ri ght
,

shoulder the p a l m forw ard , n gers rel a xed an d sep ar a ted a li ttle ; then
,

close th e h an d a n d lower the st a bo ut eightee n in ches b a ck outw ard ,

.

( Da ko ta IV ) .

An other : In cline the body for ward pl a ce th e ri gh t st at ar m s len gth ,

forw a rd a little high e r th a n the n avel ben t upw ard at th e wrist , b ack
, ,

outw ard then m ove th e st dow n w ard a bou t eightee n i n ches ( Da ko ta

,
.

IV )
.

E xten d t h e left h and , p a l m s turn ed i n w ard , n gers closed E xten d .

th e right in the s am e w ay an d brin g th e extended p al m o f th e ri ght

s m artly a cross the ti ps o f the n gers o f th e left , j ust m i ssi n g the m .

W hile tr a vel in g , i f they w a n t to stop an d c am p this si gn is used w i t h ,

th e followi n g a dd ition : C li nch the right st ( F ) a n d brin g it s m artly

down Th is i ndi c ates they wil l si t do w n there ( C o
.
nu m ch e I) C ut . .

it off .

C lose the right le a vin g t h e i ndex fu l ly exten ded ; pl a ce th e ti p to th e

,

m o n th then dir ect it r m ly forw a rd an d dow nw ard tow ard th e groun d

,
.

Pw: Ute L l
 134

Deaf -
m ut e n a tu r a l sig n L ift both h a nds up .
( Zeig ler )
I ta li a n sigu .

T he open h a nd stretched o ut wi th the n gers u p .

( B ut ler ) .

H a l t A st o pp in g pl a ce
.
-
.

M ust be i ndic a ted by th e proper n a m e o f the pl a ce ( a s Bad River ,

S t a ndin g Roc k B ig Wood s & c ) a t w h ich the h a lt ( wh ich i s a lso th e

, ,
.

sl e e p i n g p l ace for the n i gh t ) is m a de

v
Indi a n s h a ve no h a lts i n th e .

E n glish sen se of th e w ord b u t would say in ste ad I slept at such a

, ,

river o r rock In on ly o n e w ay can I n di a n s be s a id to h a ve h a ltin g

.

pl a ces , e , a s o n a lon g j ou rn ey over a well k n ow n country the s am e

.
-

c a m ps ar e m ade ti m e a fter ti m e as lon g as ti m ber an d w a ter l a st an d ,

d i st an ce is rou ghly c a lcul a ted o r esti m ated by so m a n y c a m ps or d ays

j ourn ey ( Da ko ta .

ll a m nl e l
'
.

S am e th e si gn f o r S t o n e , H a r d , & c S o m e t i m es a distinction
as .

is sou gh t to be m a de in the c a se of H a mmer by poun din g in th e

p al m ofthe l eft h a n d with the lower p art o f the r igh t st ( A ) .
( Dak o ta
'

I )
.

Fro m th e u se of th e h am m er .

H a n d so n l e .
( C o m p a re G oo d an d P re t t y ) .

Ri gh t h an d touchin g t h e left si de o f forehe ad h and horizon t al , p al m ,

i n w a rd n gers j oine d , an d th e thu m b pointin g obliquely upw a rd ( W

,

brin g t h e h a nd dow n over th e fa ce t o th e left bre a st there t urn t h e ,

h a nd so th a t i t will be a s in ( W ) w ith tips of exten ded n gers poin tin g

tow ard the left a n d c arry i t outw ard a nd tow a rd th e ri ght ( Da ko ta I )
,
. .

Pre t ty fa ce good he art , .

Deaf -

m u te na t ur a l stain Dr a w the outstretched p al m of the ri gh t

h an d down th e ri gh t cheek .
( Zeig te r )
a ra n g u e . See Sp e a k i n g .

Il ard .

O pen
th e left h an d an d s t ri k e a g a i n st i t sever al ti m es with th e right
( with the b ac k s of th e n gers ) ( Wied) S till used for h a rd i n ce r ta i n .

sen ses .
( M a tthe ws )
S am e the si gn f o r S t o n e ( Da ko t a I )
as W ould see m to refer to . .

th e ti m e w hen the stone h a m m er w as the h ardest poun d in g in stru m en t

these Indi an s k n ew .

Rot a te the right st a very little f ro m side to side wh ile r a isin g i t

about a foot fro m j ust i n fron t of th e ri ght bre a st it s p a l m in w a rd
, .

The st represents the he art w h i ch i s h ard , an d the m otio n it s be a tin g .

( Da ko ta IV ) .
 135

S tri k e the p al m o f the left h a nd w ith the fron t of the ri ght st sever a l
ti m es ( Ka io rca I ; Co man ch e I I I ; Ap ach e I I ; Wichi t a I I )
-

. .

Pu sh the tip of the ri ght in dex a g a in st the tigh tly clinched left st -

(A ) at . sever a l points ( Ap a che I II ) I m penet r a bi li ty

. . .

Dcaj i m ate '

r n a tu r a l s ig ns S tri k e the sts together .
( L a r so n )
H old the foren ger a n d th u m b a s i f pressi ng so m ethin g between a t ,

the s a m e ti m e s m a ck the lips a s i f there w as a p a sty subst a nce between .

( Zeig l cr )

E xcessively
h a rd : h arder t h a n any thin g .

M a k e the sign for H a r d , then pl a ce the left in dex n g e r upon th e -

right shoulder , at the s a m e ti m e exten d an d r a ise the ri ght arm hi gh ,

extendin g the index n g e r upw ard per pe n dicul a rly ( Wi ed) This w as
-
.

s aid by a n O g al al a to m e a n a h a rdy m an .

the p a l m of the left h a n d with the b ac k o f the ri gh t st ( t o

S tri ke
den ote the resi st an ce ) ; then m ak e the si gn for H a r d ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Ha r e .

W ith the fore an d secon d n gers ( N wi th the t w o n gers con sider ,

ab l y sep a r a ted ) o f e a ch h a n d o n the ir res p ective si des o f the he ad a n d ,

w i th the exte nded n gers poin tin g up w a rd b a c k s o f h a n ds l ight to ri ght ,

a n d left to l e t w a g the m forw a rd a n d b a c k w a rd , an d t hen wi th both

,

h a n ds open n gers str ai ght slightly sep ar a ted poi n tin g upri ght b a ck s
, , , ,

o f h a n ds in the s a m e rel a ti ve posi tion a s a bove i n fron t a n d a t th e level ,

o f the fa ce an d wi th the left h a n d seven or eight in ches for w a rd of the

,

righ t m a k e t h e forw a rd m ove m en ts w ith both at the s a m e ti m e in i m i t a

,

tion of the runnin g j u m ps of the r abb it by m ovin g th e m forw ard o n a

sh ort curve a n d then a t the level o f th e bre a st l ay t h e exten ded stra igh t
,

a n d j oi ned rst an d econ d n g ers o f the right h a nd a cross the b a c k s o t

s

o f the si m il a rly e xten ded fore an d secon d n gers of the left a t righ t

a n gles ( D a ko
. ta

Fro m the e ars m an ner of run nin g sh a dow & c , , , ,
.

of the r abbit .

a t .

Pa ssthe p a rted thu m b a n d i ndex n g e r a bou t both sides of th e he a d

-

where the h at rests upon it ( Wied ) Th is Si gn is still i n u se a m on g

.

the Indi a n s ( Ma tthews ) The l a tter m ove m en t o f the h an d in Wi cd s

.

sign i s prob a bly the s a m e a s th e rst m o t io n o f th e ( O to an d M isso ur i I )

si gn ( B o te ler )
.

Wi th the ri ght in dex exten ded a n d poin tin g tow a rd the left an d the ,

th u m b exten ded an d poi ntin g b a ck w ard the other n gers closed m ove , ,

the h a n d fro m the t o p of th e he a d for w a rd an d dow n w ard to the eye

brows ( Dako ta I V )
.

C overin g the he da

. .
 I3 6

Pl a ce the exten d ed in dex n g e r an d thu m b o n the forehe a d an d righ t -

side of the he ad , then dr a w the m together on a horizont al li ne w here

t h e h a t rests upon the he a d ( Da ko ta V ) . .

The a r m s an d h a nds ar e r a ised to the forehe ad , the thu m bs a re erect ,

the extend ed i nd ices m eet a t th e m iddle of the foreh e a d the h ands ar e

i n position ( L ) an d d iverge dr a win g a line t o the e ars T h e n gers ar e ,
.

n ow closed an d see m in gly p ul l so m e th ing fro m the top of the he a d down

w a rd ( O to a n d il l isso ur i
.

S o m ethin g th a t is pulled down o n a n d
m a rk s the forehe a d .

Ha tch e t . Se e T o m a h a w k.

Ha te , I .
( C o m p a re C o n te m p t )
.

S h ak e the he ad m a k e outw a rd q uic k m oti on o f both h a n ds as i f

,

p ushin g b a c k wi th the righ t h a n d p al m s o ut , exten d th u m b an d n gers ,

p a rtly a nd so meti m es shut th e h an d s o r sts closely i ndic atin g m ore

, ,

i nten se feelin g ( Oj i b wa IV ) . .

The sign i s n e arly the s a m e as for C o n t e l n p t Di sd a i l l b ut the , ,

thu m b i s held un der the h an d i ts ti p proj ectin g between the second ,

a n d third n gers an d the h a nd is throw n o ut i n fron t of the body a nd

,

n gers sep ar ated , b a c k up w a rd , wi th gre a t force This expresses gen u .

in e h a te h a t r ed a n d the c a se i s a l w ays a serious on e w here this si gn i s

, ,

u sed by a n Indi a n wh o al so expresses his h a tred by appropri ate faci al

,

e m otion s ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Ha ve ; I H a ve . Se e P o sse ssi o n .

He ,
or an o th e r .

The foren ger extended an d h ands sh ut a nd n gers brought over on e ,

a n other o r ne a rly touchin g a n d then sep ar a ted m oder a tely q ui c k

, ,
.

( Du nbar )

In dic a te on e s self by touchin g or otherwi se followed by sign of N e g a

,

t i v e ; i e n ot m yself a n other ( Ar ap a h o I )
. .
, ,
. .

Indic a te the p articul ar person or person s to wh ich reference is m ade

by poi n tin g to w a rd h im or the m w ith the right i ndex ( M ) ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Design a tin g a p a rticul ar person .

(1) n ly by poin tin g wi th ri ght i n dex ( 2 )

O an d extendin g left i ndex .

( Ap ache III ) ( 2 ) The person ( 1 ) over there

. .

Deaf -
m u te sig n .
Poi nt the th u m b over the righ t shoulder .
 the phra se of A no ther sp ea ks
In ,
.

Precede the ges t ure for S p e a k , by pl a ci n g the h a n d no t n e ar the

m outh bu t begi nnin g farther a w a y dr a wi n g i t n e a rer
, ,
a n d ne a rer .

i ed .
)
ll ea p , p ile , m o un d .

The h a nd s a re brought fro m their n a tur a l position s by a curved m otio n

wi th the p a l m s down w a rd , n gers extended sep ar a ted , n e arly together
in fron t of the bre a sts 1 8 in ches , ngers pointin g o u t w a rd , h an ds hori
,

z o n t al
,
a t when the curved m o t ion s ce a se a nd the h an ds ( W )
,
-

a r e c a rried str ai gh t do wn w a rd six o r seven i n ches a n d brough t to

a stop suddenly a s though p a ttin g do w n th e top o f a pile ( Da ko ta I ) . .

From the sh ape o f a m ound he a p , or pile ,

.

Hear , to ; h ear in g ; h ear d ; l i ste n .

( Co m p a re U n d e r s t a n d ) .

Pl a cethe open thu m b an d i ndex n g e r over the righ t ear a nd m ove -

the m hither a nd thither ( Wied) I h a ve given y o u this si gn w ith a

.

si m il ar m e an in g b u t a s i n si gn s f o r C o a t an d L eggi ngs I say the n ger

, , ,

tips are i n con ta ct which he s ay s they ar e n o t The re m ar k s I m a k e

,
.

a bout th is d ier e n ce in the for m er sign s m ay a pply a s wel l t o this .

T ap the righ t ear w ith the index ti p .

( B ur ton )

A twirlin g at the e ar .
( JII a cgo wan ) .

First a nd m iddle n ger o f righ t h an d pointin g up w ard held close to

ri gh t e ar ; m oved gen tly dow n w a rd a nd forw ard , eyes loo k in g a s k a n ce ,
eyebrows con tr acted as if i n the a ct o f listen in g ( Chey e nn e .

Pl a cethe h an d pa rti ally closed , p al m to the fron t behi nd the

,
e ar .

( Ar ap a ho I ) .

First m ake t h e si g n for A tt e n t i o n and then c arry the h and b a ck in ,

the sa m e positi on t o n e a r the right bre a st a n d a t the s am e ti m e i n ,

clin e the he a d tow ard th e sound or the direction i n wh ich i t co mes .

( Da ko t a

S a m e a s wi t h us ; rst a ttr a ctin g a tten tion a s a n i ndic a
tion to k eep quiet a nd then li sten in g .

C lose the right h a nd le a vi n g the i n dex an d thu m b fully exten ded

,

an d sep a r a ted ; pl a ce the h a nd upon the righ t e ar wi th the index a bove

it a n d the thu m b below ; then p a ss forw a rd an d sligh tly down w ard by

the chee k ( A bsa r o ka I ; H ida tsa I ; A r ikar a I ; S hoshon i an d Ba n a k I )
. .

righ t h a nd extended curved ( others cl osed ) thu m b rest

Fo r e n g e r , ,

in g on secon d n ger i s c a rried directly to the righ t e ar ( Dako ta I ) . .

Fro m the act o f he arin g .

18
 13 8

H oldi ng the n gers as for I k n o w pl a ce the r ight in dex b ac k ou t, ,

w a rd , i n front o f the righ t e a r poin tin g upw a rd a n d a l ittle forw ard

,
.

( Da ko ta I V ) .

The tips of the foren ger and thu m b bein g o pposed the h an d is held a ,

few in ches fro m th e e a r and the n c a u sed to a ppro ac h the l a tter The .

h a n d m ay the n be restored to its origin a l positio n and m otion repe a ted .

( l l a n da n
. a nd H ida tsa

S pre a d
the th u m b a n d i n dex w idely a p art , re m a in in g n gers clos ed ;
pl ace the h a n d p a l m forw ar d to the side o f th e he ad the thu m b below
, , ,

th e e ar a n d the i n dex a bove it ; then m ove the h a nd forw a rd an d dow n

,

w a rd ( Ka io wa I ; Co ma nche I II ; Ap ache II ; Wich ita I I )

. .

Pl a ce
the h an d behind t h e e ar in the m ost n a t ur a l m a n ner for a

l istener ( Co manche I ) I w a n t to h a r
. . e .

Fin gers a n d th u m b o f the ri gh t h a n d closed , i n dex croo k ed pl a ced ,

Opposi te an d poin tin g t o th e e ar , p a l m tow ard the shoulder , and m oved

tow a rd th e e ar sever a l ti m es ( Ap a che I ) . .

To listen .

H old the ri ght i nde x i n fro nt of t h e e a r a s for I H e a r an d then ,

tur n the h a n d a l ittle fro m side to side two or three ti m es ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Brin gthe h a n d ( R w it h l a st three n gers sh ut ) n e ar t h e e ar , t h u m b

-

a n d i ndex r aised other n gers closed ; t u rn the he a d to brin g the e a r

tow a rd source of sou nd ; f a ci a l expression in q uirin g ( Ap a che II I ) . .

S oun d co m i n g to e ar .

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l sig ns Pl ace the foren ger on the e ar ; at the s a m e
ti m e i ncline the h e a d as i f to l isten to so m ethin g .
( Zeig ler ) .

M ove the forenger ne a rly to the e ar .

( Ba lla r d)

To point th e n ger to the e ar .

( L ar so n )

Do n ot I d o no t u nderst an d
. .

M a k e the si gn for I U n d e r st a n d , 1 H e a r a nd then the si gn for ,

N 0 , or throw the h a nd outw ard fro m the e ar ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Poi n t the f o r e n g e r s of both h a nd s to the extern a l m e a tu s of the e ars .

( Zuni I ) .

Wi th on e s own e ars To
,
.

M a k ethe sig n for B e a r then p a ss the i ndex of the right h a n d fro m

,

the left e a r outw a rd to w a rd the left ( A r ika r a I ) . .

 1 39

He a r d I h a ve , .

O pen wide the thu m b an d in dex n g e r o f the right h an d pl a ce the m -

over the e ar a n d i n this position m ove the m quic k ly p ast the chin an d
,

n ose ( Wied )
.

B rin g the extended pal m ( W ) to the e ar a ti m e or two ,

as if fann in g
,

the e ar .
( Co m a nch e I ) .

He a r t .

S a m e a s the si gn for I person a l pronoun ,

.
( Da ko ta I ) . Th e h e art is
selected a s the se a t o f all the e m oti on s .

Ba d . Se e B ad hea r t .

G oo d . Se e G o o d h ear t .

He a t .

The two h a nds r a ised as hi gh a s the he a d a nd bendin g for w ard h ori

z o n t a ll y w ith the point s o f the n gers c ra vi n g a l ittle down w ard
,
-

( Dunba r )
1 ) B oth h an d s p al m down w ard elev a ted to the le vel of the eyes an d
, ,

exten ded outw a rd ; ( 2 ) brough t dow n w a rd with a r api d m otion h a lf ,

opened while descendi n g Referen ce to the sun s r ays for m ore p artie
.

,

ul a r ide a it feel s h ot ri gh t h an d held w ith l ittle n ger a g ai nst the

,

p a rt a ff ected an d si gn f o r F i r e m ade ( C hey enne I ) . .

Pl a ce both h a nds over the he a d p al ms dow n n gers pen den t an d , ,

h an gin g dow n w ard a t a short di sta n ce fro m the forehe a d ( Ka i o w a I ; .

Co m a nche III ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I ) This si gn i f m ad e a little lower .

a n d i n fron t o f the fa ce the h an d s a lso bein g lowered an d r aised a g ai n

,

sev er a l ti m es q u ic k ly si g ni es R a i n R a ys of light a nd h e a t
, . .

He a v y .

Pl a ce both at an d exten ded h a nd s before the chest poi ntin g forw a rd ,

w ith th e p al m u p a bout four i nches a p art as if supportin g a l a rge body ;

, ,

then m ove the m si m ult aneously up w a rd a nd down w a rd about t w o o r

three in ch es the up w ard m otio n bein g m ade m ore r ap idly th a n the
,

dow n w ard ( Kaio w a l ; Co manche III ; Ap ach e I I ; Wichita II )

.
-
.

Poin t i m a gi n a ry object ; sei ze w ith both h an ds an d li ft with

at an

grea t eff ort ; also t ak e u p a n i m agin ary object i n on e h a n d an d li ft

,

slowly tw o o r t h ree feet ( Y ) ( Ap ac he I II ) . .

W ith both h a nd s clinched ( B ) ar m s m ore th a n h alf exten ded , dr a w,

the m upw ard in fron t o f th e body fro m the level of the a bdo m en to th a t
of the fa ce w ith a slo w a nd m ore or less in terrupted m ove m en t a s
, ,

though the h an ds seized a nd con veyed upw a rd a he a vy bo d y ; at the

s am e ti m e th e e ff o r t is denoted by contr a ction of the fa ci a l m uscles
( Dak o t a I )

Fro m the ac t of liftin g a he a vy b ody
. .

 140

H e l p , T o a ssi s t .

B r in g righ t h a n d up to right bre a st foren ger str ai ght ( J i n upri gh t ,

position , p a l m o u t ) the left to the left bre a st s am e position h a nds about , ,

six in ches a p a rt M ove both forw ard ( O to an d M isso ur i I )

. . .

O n ly by others co m i n g to j oi n in d oin g so m e speci a l w or k .

( Ap ache

First co m m ence w i th the open righ t h a nd ( Y ) b a ck outw a rd , poin tin g

obliquely up w ard , a bo ut two feet fr o m the ri ght side o f the fron t of the
body an d dra w i n w a rd ne arly to the body descri bin g a series of circ u ,

l ar m ove m ents then w i thout stoppin g th e m ove m en t o f the h a n d c a rry

, ,

i t wi th m oder a te force b a c k up w ard h or izon t al n gers exten ded

, , , ,

str a igh t j oined etc a g a in st the p a l m o f th e left h a n d ( in ner side of

, ,
.
, ,

the ri ght index stri k in g it ) wh ic h is hel d horizon t al a bou t a f o o t in fron t

, ,

o f the b ody wi t h n gers exten ded , str a i ght j oin ed , etc edge do w n w a rd
, ,
.
,
.

b ack tow a rd the ri ght , an d then the right h an d is c a rried ou tw a rd fro m

the body by a series o f circul a r m ove m en t s the reverse of the rst
m ove m en ts gi ve n a bove ( Da ko t a I )

Co m e a
. n d help m e

. . .

He r e .

Righ t h an d closed st b a ck ou tw a rd upright is m oved up w a rd an d

, , , ,

down w a rd i n fron t of righ t side of body fro m the level o f t h e bre a st to

th a t o f th e t o p of the he ad ( Da ko ta
It i s ri ght here ; at the
.

pl a ce .

The ri gh t ar m is exed tow ard the body an d the h a nd in type ,

posi tio n ( A ) describes a circle before the bre ast The sign con tin u .

in g fro m t h e co m pletion o f t h e circle the h a nd i s fully open ed as in type ,

position ( S horizon t a l a n d edges bein g h el d u p w a rd an d down w a rd

, ,

an d m a de to stri k e the ground forcibly O d M i ri I )

On
( to a n sso u . .

thi s very spot o f e arth .

O nly by poin tin g ,

as to grou n d or in to m y ten t as I sat at i ts entr a nce .

( Ap a ch e I I I ) .

W here we sta nd .

S a m e po si tion of h a nd a s G r e a t d i s t a n c e , an d poin t d own directly

in fron t to the feet o r between the m w ith sudden droppin g o f he a d o r
q u ick bow the eyes follo win g the direction o f the h a nd i n e very
,

in st a n ce ( Oj i bw a IV )
. .

H i d e , T o ; C o n c e a l ( C o mp a re S t e a l ) . .

P l a ce th e h a n d in side the clothin g o f th e left bre a s t . Thi s m e a n s also

to pu t a w a y o r to k eep secret ( Bur to n ) .

( 1 ) Si g n for S t e a l ( 2 ) left h a n d at , p al m down w ard pl a ced n e ar ,

so m e p a r t of the body ;
( 3 ) right h a nd n gers hook ed covered by left -
.

( C hey enne I ) .
 14 1

The left h a nd st a ti on ary abou t eigh t in ch es in fron t o f left bre ast ,

horizont al b ack outw ar d edge down w ard n gers closed a n d then p ass
, , , ,

th e ri gh t h a nd w ith n gers hoo k ed b ac k of h a nd outw a rd edge o f

, , ,

n gers do w n w ard horizon t al q ui ck ly between t h e l eft h a n d a n d the

, ,

body to the left side as though p a ssin g i t un der a bl a n k et or the co a t

'

, .

A ltho u gh n o t iden tic a l w i th the sign for S tea lin g th is si gn rese m bles .

i t very m uch a n d i t is used to den ote con ce a l m en t of an y article

,

fro m view m uch the s a m e a s we w ould pu t out of sigh t an y article we

,

did n o t wish seen for an y re a son other th a n th at the a rticle w as stolen .

( D a ko t a

Pl a cin g i t out of si ght .

H old the opened left h a nd p al m dow n w ard , n gers poi nti n g to w a rd ,

the right a foot or ei ghteen i nches in front of the lower p a rt of the chest ,
a n d p a ss the Opened righ t h an d , p al m down w a rd over it , an d a lon g the ,

fore ar m to the elbow ; then close both h a nds an d c arry the ri ght st
u nder t h e left ar m as if hidin g i t ( Dako ta IV ) , . .

G r a sp the fore ng e r th e right w ith the p a l m of the l eft S o m e
0f .

ti m es w hen desiri n g to express Th ef t t h e y g o th rou gh the m otion o f

, .

con ce ali n g som e t h in g un de r their bl a n k et ( Co m a n che I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig ns First hold the o pen left h a n d in front of the
body next p a ss sl owly the open righ t h a n d beside t h e left , an d at the
,

s a m e ti m e in cl ine the he ad with the m outh closely sh ut a n d the eye s ,

h alf opened to w ard t h e left an d then poin t to the h idin g pl ace ( E a sen
, ,
-
.
-

sta b .
)
To put the outstretched h a n ds together tow ard the he ad .
( L a r so n )
To i ncl ine the he a d an d fa ce as i f see k i n g so m e p l ac e of refu ge .

( Ze ig len )
S ecret , secreted .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig na H a vin g
to uched the lower lip the ,
m outh
open in g a nd sh uttin g altern a tely , sh ak e your h e ad ( Cr oss ) .

Pl a ce t h e foren ger o n the m outh a t the s a m e ti m e m ov in g th e lip s ,

a s if spe a k in g a n d then sh a k e the he a d a s if to say

,
n o ( Zeig lem .

H i d e ski n , .

S ign for A n i m a l ; both h a nds closed p a l m s fa cin g but n ot touch ,

in g e ach other ; q uic k ly b u t slightly dra wn a p art ( Chey en ne I ) . .

Hig h . Se e B i g i n the sen se of H i g h .

H i l l b l u , m o u n ta i n
,

.

A clin ched h a n d held up on the side o f the he a d a t th e dist a nce o f a

f oot or m ore fro m i t To si gn ify a r an ge of m ount a in s hold u p the n
.
,

gers of the left h an d a l ittle divergin g from e ach other ( L o ng ) .

 1 42

Close the n ger tips over th e he ad i f a m oun t ai n is to be expressed ,

r a i se the m hi gh To den ote a n a scen t o n ri si n g grou n d p a ss the ri gh t
.
'

p al m over the left h a nd h alf d oublin g u p th e l atter so th a t it loo k s li k e

, ,

a ri d ge ( B ur to n )
.

Both h a nd s outspre a d n e ar e a ch other , p al m s down w a rd , an d el ev a ted

to the level of the face ; brou gh t down w ard to represen t the slope of a
hill , the m otion at the b a se bei n g so m ew h a t m ore r a pid th a n at the rst
p a rt ( Chey enne I )
. .

H old the left h an d clin ch ed at so m e dist an ce before the fa ce , the

k nu c k les poin tin g upw ard representi n g the elev a tion or h ill
, ( Da ko ta .

V II .
)

G oin g over a .

Fi rst m a k e the si gn for H i l l as con t ained i n M o u n t a i n with both ,

h a n ds o r with th e left h a n d in fron t of bre a st an d th en the righ t h an d

, ,

is dr a wn b ack to w a rd th e body ( left represen in g th e hill st a tion a ry )

t , , ,

a n d then c a rried outw a rd w ith sh ort , j er k in g m o t ib n s over the b ac k of

th e left , a s th o u gh a m an w a s ridin g o r w a l k i n g over a hill ( Da ko ta I ) . .

G oin g ov er a hill and p a ssin g out of V iew .

H ol d t h e left h an d a bout a foot in fron t o f th e upper p a rt o f the chest,

b ac k out w a rd a n d forw ar d a n d p ass the slightly e xe d ri gh t h a n d f o r
,
-

w ard m e r i t abou t twelve in ches through an a r e beginn in g two o r three

, ,

in ches behin d it b a c k up w a rd the n gers at rst poi n tin g a little up

, ,
.

w a rd then forw ard an d tow a rd the l a st a little down w ard ( Da ko ta IV )

, ,
. .

Pe ak .

Pl a ce
the left st w i th the k nu ck les poi ntin g upw ard , a t so m e di st an ce
,

before the fa ce ( Ute I ) . .

Cl ose the left h a n d l oosely the th u m b restin g upon the ,

m iddle j oi n t
of the foren ger , p a l m t ow ard the fa ce a n d hold i t a s hi gh ,
as th e shoul
der ( Ap a che I )
. .

H o e ; B o e in g .

Pa n to m i m e h a n dle by exten ded left ar m bl ade by a dj u sted righ t

of ,

h and ,
an d th e act ion o f usin g a h o e ( Ap ache III )
-
. .

Hog .

Ri ght h a nd st ( B , turned dow n w ard ) i s m oved arou n d in v ari ou s

-

directi on s below the le vel of the body pointin g down w ard with upw ard , ,

m ove m en ts i n i m it a ti on of the hog s m a n n er o f rootin g i n th e groun d

wi th its sn out ( Da ko ta . Fro m the hog s m ann er of e a tin g

.

Both h an ds are brou ght to the sides o f the he a d i n type position ( W ) -

and m ad e to vibr ate to and fro m t h e thic k of h a n d bein g st a tion a ry The

, .
 1 43

right h a nd t h en a ppro aches the m outh a n d is m a de to scoop succes ,

s ive l y forw a rd fro m the m outh i n i m it a ti on of the a n i m al plowi n g the ,

grou n d ( O to a nd M isso ur i I )
. A bein g with l a rge e a rs th a t plows up .
-

e a rth with i ts n ose .

( 1 ) Ha nd on edge , forw ard ( T o n edge ) , w a ved vertic ally a nd forw ard ,

short, q uic k m otion ; ( 2 ) h a n d ne arly exte n ded , n gers g a thered together
( U , m ore loosely a nd b e n t a little ) , a n d pl aced i n fro n t o f the m o u th ,
ti ps fo r w ard ( Ap a che I II ) G a it of a ni m al , a nd snou t T h e rs t
. . .

p art of the sign is a n i de a lly pe rf ect reproductio n o f the trot of th e

h alf grow n por k ers sc a ven gin g t h e ag ency rubbish
-
.

H o n e s t h o n e st y ( Co m p a re T r u t h )
, . .

Ri ght h a n d he l d w ith th u m b i n w ard a g a in st the h e art ; foren ger

exten ded k nuc k le pl a ced aga in st t h e m outh ; thrust str a igh t for w a rd
,

an d out w a rd i n a sligh t dow n w a rd curve to express str a igh t fro m the

he a rt ( C heyenne I )
.

.

hon est m a n
An .

First m ak e the sig n f o r ll l a n an d then the si gn for T r u t h Thi s .

rel ates to Tr u e tr uth in spe ak in g H e tel ls n o lies It is such a r are

, ,
. .

occurrence for o ne Indi a n to ste a l fro m a nother of the s a m e tribe th a t ,

the S iou x h a ve n o sep ar a te sig n for A n h o nest m a n as i m plyin g the ,

opposite o f T hief ( Da ko ta I ) . .

In dic a te the person w ith the index , t h en pl a ce both h a nds a t a nd ,

e xtended a bout eightee n i nches a p art w it h p a l m s fa ci n g a s hi gh as th e

, , ,

he a d an d m ove the m e a stw a rd t o ar m s len gth ( Wy an do t I )

, U ni

. .

for m fro m h e a d to foot, o r liter ally the s am e fro m end to en d , , .

Indic a te obj ect ( 1 ) Gr a sp tow a rd it ( P , closin g m ore an d pron e ) ;

.

( 2 ) si gn of n eg ation ; ( 3 ) w a ve the h a nds o ff forw ard an d do wn ( Q ) .

A
( p a ch e II I ) T a k i
. n g 2
; ( ) n o 3
; ( ) le a ves i t w here it is
.

First poin t to the person then m ak e sign f o r G o o d ; then pl ace ,

st of left h a nd a t a poin t i n fron t of body ( A 1 ch a nged to left ) a n d , ,

m a k e a p a ss un der it w ith righ t h a n d , a s though gr a spi n g so m ethin g

a n d p ullin g it a wa y fro m where i t belon gs n gers an d th u m b n a tur a lly ,

rel a xed a t rst ( Y 1 p a l m down ) but before the return m ovem en t i s

, ,

m a de the n gers an d thu m b a r e c l c se d ( A 2 , p a l m i n w a rd ) a s thou gh ,

l ay in g h old o f so m ethin g ; then the n a l m otion is m ak in g the si gn o f

a ti n I H e is a good m an ; w ill s te a l n oth

N e g a tio n , N o t ( S a h p ) . .

in g a t a l l .

Ho r r o r .

Th e p al m of the right h a n d ( W 2 ) l aid over the m outh a n d at the ,

s am e ti m e the sign for S u r p r i se is m ade by dr a win g the he a d a n d

bod y b a c k w a rd I h a ve see n a fe w Indi a n s use b oth h a n ds in m ak in g
.
 1 44

this sign , l ayin g one over t h e other crossw ise th us coverin g the ,

m o nth O n e of these si gn s would be used as a bove if a n In di a n w a l k

.

in g a lon g should unexpectedly se e the body of a de a d person lyin g o n

the ground , when the si gn for S urp r ise would be m ade si m ult aneously
a s expressin g his e m otio n s O ne o f the si gns would a lso be used by a
.

perso n o n he a rin g of a n un expected d e a th ; and I believe i t w a s so m e

occurren ce of thi s k in d th a t m isled the Pri nce o f VV ie d N euw ied an d -

c au sed h i m to gi ve subst an ti a ll y the secon d si g n a bove as the one f o r

Dea d Dea t h ( Da ko ta I )
,
. .

H o r se .

The ri ght h an d w i t h the ed ge down w ard the n gers j oin ed th e , ,

thu m b recu m ben t, exten ded forw a rd ( Dun bar ) .

Pl a ce th e i ndex a n d third n ger of th e ri ght h an d a str a ddle th e

i ndex n ger of th e left Wi ed ) By the third he m e a n s the m id d le
. .

n ger as a ppe a rs i n a n other con nection H e cou n ts the th u m b as the

, .

r st E d I h a ve described this sign in words to the s a m e e ff ect

. .

( M a tth e ws ) The right a r m is r aised a n d the h a nd , opened edgewise , ,

w i th n gers p a r a llel a n d a p p r o xi ni a t e d i s dr a wn fro m left to righ t before

'

the body a t the supposed height o f the a n i m a l There is n o co n ce iv a .

a ble ide n tity in the execution of this sig n a n d W i ed s but the sig n for
,

H o r se by the Pr i nce of Wied is n e a rly iden tic a l with t h e sign for R i d e

a H o r se a m on g the O to s ( Bo te ter ) .

L eft h an d th u m b and foren ger stra i gh tened o u t h eld to th e level of

-

an d in fron t of the bre a st ; rig h t h a n d foren ger sep a r a ted fro m th e

-

m iddle n ger an d thrown a cross the left h a nd to i m it a te the ac t of

bestridin g They appe a r to h a ve n o other conception o f a h orse , an d
.

h a ve thus indic ated th a t they h a ve k no wn i t on ly a s an a n i m a l to be

ridden ( C h ey enne I )
. .

A h a n d p a ssed a cro ss th e fore h e a d .

( M a cg o wa n)

Dra w the ri ght h a nd fro m left to right a cross the body a bout the
h e art the n gers al l closed except the i n dex ( Do dg e ) This prob a b ly
,
.

refers to t h e girth I t h as a rese m bl a nce to Bu r to n s si gn for Do g an d

.
~

,

is e a sily co nfou n ded with his si g n for T h i n k G u e ss , .

Pl a ce the rst tw o n gers o f the right h a n d th u m b extended ( N ,

d ow n w ard a str a ddle th e rst t wo j oined a n d str a igh t n gers of the

,

left h an d ( T sidewise to the righ t M a n y S iou x I n di a n s u se on ly the

.

fo renger str a i ghtened ( Da ko ta I ) H orse m ou nted

. . .

T he rst a nd secon d n gers extended an d sep ar ated , re m a in in g n ger s

a n d thu m b closed ; left forenger extended , horizont al re m a i n in g n gers
,
 1 45

an d thu m b close d ; pl a ce th e ri g h t h an d n gers -

astri d e of t h e foren ger
of the left, a nd both h a nds j er k ed together , up an d down to represen t ,

the m otion of a horse ( Da ko ta I II )

. .

The two h an ds bein g cl inched an d n e ar together , p al m s down w ard ,

thu m bs a g a inst the f o re n g e r s, th ro w the m e ach altern ately forw a rd , ,

an d b ac k w a rd a bou t a foot thro u gh an ellipsis two o r three ti m es fro m

, ,

a bou t si x i nches i n fron t of th e ch est t o i m it a te th e g a 110 pin g o f a horse

, ,

o r the h an ds m ay be held for w a rd an d n ot m oved ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Pl a ce the exte n ded an d sep ar ated in dex a n d second n gers of th e

righ t h a n d a str addle of the exten ded foren ger of the left ( Da ko ta V I , .

VI I ; H ida tsa I ; A r ika r a I ) .

The left h a nd i s pl a ced before the chest b ac k u p w ard in the posi ti on , ,

o f an in dex h a n d p oin tin g forw a rd ; then th e rst an d secon d n gers

-

o f the right h a nd ( on ly ) bein g ex t en d ed , se p ar a t e d a n d p oi ntin g do wn

'

w a r d , ar e set on e o n e ach side o f the left foren ger the i n ter di git a l ,
-

sp ac e restin g on the foren ger Th e p a l m fa ces down w a rd an d b ac k

.

w ard This represen ts a rider a stride of a h orse ( M a n dan a n d H ida tsa I )

. . .

C lose h an ds excep t f o r e ng e r s wh ich are curved d ow nw a rd ; m ove

, ,

the m forw ard i n rot a tion i m it atin g the fore feet o f the horse an d m ak e
, ,

p u f ng sound of
U h ,
u h "
( O m a h a I )

This si gn represents th e .

horse r acin g o ff to a s a fe d ista nce then pu ff s as he tosses h is he ad

,
.

The ar m is exed an d wi th th e h an d exten ded is brought o n a level

wi th the m outh The h a n d then assu m es the position ( W
. m odied
by bein g hel d edges up a n d do w n p a l m tow a rd th e chest in ste ad of
, ,

at . The ar m a n d h a nd bein g held thu s a bout t h e u su al hei gh t of a

h orse ar e m a de to p a ss i n an un d ul a ti n g m a nn er a cross the face or body
a bout o n e foot dist a n t fro m con t a ct The l a tter m ove m en ts a r e to r e
. .

se m ble the a ni m al s ga i t ( O to I ) H ei ght o f a n i m al an d m o ve m ent

. .

o f s am e

.

The in dex an d secon d n gers of the right h a n d a re pl a ced a str a ddle

the exten ded foren ger o f the left ( Wy a n do t I ) . .

H ol d the ri gh t h a nd at extended , wi th n gers j oi ned l ay the thu m b

, ,

i n w ard a g ainst the p al m then p ass the h a n d at a r m s len gth before th e

,

face fro m left t o right ( K a io wa I ; Com a nche I I I ; Ap a che II ; IVichi ta I I )

. .

A nother : Pl a ce
the exten ded a nd sep a r a ted in dex an d secon d n gers
a str addle the extended an d horizon t a l foren ger of the left h a n d ( Kai .

o wa I ; Co ma nch e I I I ; Ap a ch e II Wi ch ita I I ) Thi s si gn i s only used .

co m m un ic a tin g w ith u n in s t ructed white m e n o r with other Indi a n s when ,

w hose sign for H o r se i s specic ally disti nct .

19
 1 46

Pl a ce th e right h and , p al m down , before the ri ght side o f t h e c h e st ;

pl ace the tips o f t h e second an d third n ger s a gain st the b all of the
"

thu m b , allowin g the in dex a nd li ttle n gers to proje ct to represe n t th e

e ars Freq uen tly the m iddle n gers exte nd equ ally wi th an d a g ai n st the
.

thu m b for m i n g t h e he a d o f the a ni m al the ea r s a l w ay s bein g rep resen te d

, ,
-

b y the tw o outer n gers , v iz , t h e i n dex a nd little n ger ( U te I )

. . .

E lev a te the ri gh t h a nd exten ded , w ith n gers j oin ed , outer ed g e

"

tow ard the groun d in fron t o f the body o r right shoulder , and p oin t i n g
,

f orw ard restin g the curved thu m b a g a i n st the p a l m a r side of me index

, .

A
( p ach e I )

Thi s si g n appe ars a lso to sign ify A nima l generic ally bein g
.
,

fre q uen tly e m ployed a s a p rel iminary sign when deno tin g other species

Deaf -
ma te n a tur a l sig ns .

I mi t a te the m otion of the elbow s o f a m an
on horseb ack .
( Ba l lar d )
A ct in the m an ner of a driver h oldi ng the l in es
,
in h is h a n ds an d

shoutin g t o th e h orse .

M ove the h a nds sever a l ti m es as if to hold the rei n s .

( L ar son )
O ur i nstructed de a f m utes indic ate the e ars , fol lowed by str addlin g
-

the left h a n d by the fore an d m iddle nger s o f the ri ght The French .

d e a f m a tes a dd to the str a ddlin g of the index the m otion of a t rot

-

A m an on a .

S am e sign a s f o r H o r se , w ith the a ddition of erecti n g the thu m b

w hile m aki n g th e gesture ( Do dge ) .

B ay .

M ake the sign for H o r se , and then rub the lower p art of th e chee k
'

b a ck a nd for th ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

B l ac k .

M ak ethe sig n for H o r se , a n d then poin t to a bl a c k obj ect o r rub

the b ack of the left h a n d w ith the p al m o f the n gers o f the right .

( Dako ta I V ) .

B ron co un t am ed h or se. An .

M ak e the si gn T o r i d e , then with both h a nds r e tain e d in their rel a

t i ve positi on s m ove the m forw a rd in h igh a rches t o show the buc k in g
,

o f the a n i m al ( Ute I ) . .

Gr a zin g of a.

M ak e
the sign f o r H o r se , then lower the h a nd an d p ass i t fro m sid e
to sid e as if dippi n g it upon the sur face ( Ute I ) . .
 Pa ck in g a .

H ol d
the left h a nd poi nti n g for w a rd , p al m i n w ard , a foot in fron t o f
,

the che st a nd l ay the opened ri ght h a nd poin t in g forw a rd , rst obli quely
,

a lon g the right side of the upper edge of the left h a nd then on top an d
, ,

then obliq uely a lon g the left side ( Dako ta IV ) . .

R a cer , fa st horse etc ,

.

The ri ght ar m is elev a ted an d ben t at right an gle before the fa ce ; th e

h an d in position ( S 1 ) m odied by bein g horizon t al , p a l m to the fa ce ,
,

is dr a w n a cross edge wise i n fron t of the fa ce T h e h an d is then closed .

an d in position ( B ) a ppro a ches the m out h fro m which i t i s opened a n d

closed successively for w ard sever al ti m es n a lly i t is sudden ly th rust ,

o u t i n position ( W 1 ) b a ck conc a ve ( O to an d M isso u r i ) .Is expressed .

i n the rst sig n for H o r se the n the m otio n for quick r un nin g
, .

R a ci n g .

E xten d the t wo f o r e n g e r s a n d a fter pl acin g the m p a r allel ne a r

together in fron t o f the chest b ack s upw a rd push the m r a pidly f o r
, ,

w a rd a bou t a foot ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

Pl a ce
both h an ds , w ith the f o r e n g e r s onl y exten ded an d poi n tin g
forw ard side by side w ith the p al m s down before the body ; then p ush ,

the m altern a tely b a ck w a rd an d forw ard , in i m itation of the m ove m en t

o f h orses w h o a r e run nin g nec k a n d neck

( Ute I ; Ap a che I , II )

. .

S a ddlin g a .

H oldthe left h and as in the sign for H o r se P a c k i n g a , an d l ay ,

the se m i e xe d ri ght h a n d a cross its upper edge two or three ti m es , the

-

en d s of the right n ger s to ward the left ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

S potted ;
pied .

M ak e the si gn for H o r se then the si g n for S p o t t e d

, .
( Da ko ta IV ).

H o r se b a c k , T o r i d e .

M ak e the si gn f o r H o r se , w it h the di ff erence th a t h a n d extend s

f art h e r an d the gestur e i s m a de q u ic k ly ( Wi ed ) . .

S ep ar ate the fore and m iddle n gers o f the right h a nd over the n ,

ger s o f the left exte nded an d j oined , both pa l m s tow a rd the b o dy the ,

fore n ger o f the righ t alon g the b ack o f the left h a n d ( Ar ap a ho .

Pl a ce the fore an d m iddle n gers across the foren ger of left h a n d ,

b oth a dv anced in fron t of bre a st , both h an ds ad v a ncin g m o t ion s as if
ri din g , by up an d down m otions o n n ger an d left h a nd ( Oj i bwa IV ) . .

Pl ace the r st tw o n g ers of th e right h a nd ( N wi th th um b res tin g

on th ir d n ger ) astraddl e the t wo j oined ( ma ny S ioux use onl y the fore
 1 48

n ger str ai gh tened ) a nd str a ight rst n ger o f the left the n
m ak e sever a l sh ort a rch ed m ove m en ts forw a rd w ith h a nds so j oi ned .

( Da ko ta

The horse m oun ted a nd i n m otion .

Double the st s a nd m ak e a succession o f plun gin g m otion s , a lter

-

n at e l y w ith ei ther h a n d , forw a rd a n d d own w a rd i n i m it a tio n of the

m otion of a horse s forefeet i n trottin g o r g allopin g

The sig n o f str a d .

d l in g the n ger s for r id ing is a lso in use a m on g the S i oux b u t i s n o t ,

so co m m on a s the a bove ( Da ko ta I I ) . .

E xtend an d S p re a d the right fore m iddle

n gers an d pl ace th e m ,
an d

their en ds poin tin g directly d ow n w ard a stride th e n gers o f th e left

,

h an d ; the little an d ri n g n gers of the right h an d to be se m i e xe d , -

thu m b a ga in st i ndex ; the r a di al side of the left h an d to be up w ard n ,

gers extended a nd j oined , poin tin g forw ard thu m b in p a l m then , ,

r a ise an d lower the en d of the le f t h a n d several ti m es This sign is .

also used f o r H o r se w he n the h a n ds ar e k ep t still ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

E xtend the rst two ngers of the left h a n d before the body , then
stra ddle the fore an d secon d n gers of the ri gh t h an d a cross those o f
the left ; i n this posi tion , m ak e a series of short j u m ps o r j erk s fro m left
to ri ght , i m ita tin g th e g a llop o f a h orse ( Da ko ta V ) . .

M ak e the si gn for H o r se , a n d as the h a n ds ar e reta i ned in thi s

posi tion m ove the m forw ard in sh ort curves t o represen t m otion o f
,

ridin g ( Da ko ta V I ; H ida tsa I ; A r ika r a I )

. .

The h an d s a re arr a n ged a s in the sign for H o r se , an d then m oved

f orw ard .
( H ida tsa I ) This i ndic ates i n a gener a l w ay a j ourney o n
-
.

h orseb ac k b ut d i ff eren t m odes of ridi n g m ay be show n by a ppropr ia te

m odic a tion s o f this si gn thu s : a sl o w j o u r n e y i s sh own by m ovin g the
,

h a n d s slowly forw a rd a r ace by m ovin g them r apidly , a gal lop b y mo v

' '

i n g the m i n a series of s m all arcs wh ose con vexity i s up ward , a j o g t rot -

by m ovin g the m in a series o f s m all a n gles w ith a slight a rrest o f m otion

between e ach a n gle , etc .

L e ft h a n d represen t s the horse , forenger hel d up a little fro m the

other n gers Ri ght foren ger a n d m iddle n ger astride left foren ger ;
.

righ t th u m b curved up w ard o n left o f left foren ger ( O ma ha I ) . .

Pl a ce
the rst t wo n gers of the ri gh t h a n d astride the left h an d , and
m ove both forw ard ( I r o quo i s I )
. .

Pl ace th e h a n ds as in the si gn for H o r se , a n d m ove the m for w ar d

i n short interrupted a rched curves ( Wyan do t I )

. .

Throw the index a n d m iddle n ger s o f the right h a n d a str add le t h e .

foren ger o f the left ( Sa h ap tin I ) . .

 1 49

Pl a ce the exten ded an d sep ar a ted in dex an d second n gers o f the

righ t h a n d a cross t h e exten ded foren ger o f the left b ack o f the h a n d ,

forw ard ( Pai Ute I )

. .

The in dex a n d secon d n ger o f the ri ght h a n d alon e exten ded and
sep a r a ted pl a ced a str addle the extended foren ger o f the left the
, ,

p al m of the righ t h a n d fa cin g the b ack o f the l eft h a n d ( Ap a ch e I )

'
. .

H o t , Ho t we a ther ( Co m p are H e a t )
. .

H a nd s a t the h ei gh t o f the he a d or so m eti m es over i t horizon t a l at , , ,

w ith n gers an d th um bs extended sep a r a ted p oin tin g t ow a rd the fron t

, ,
,
p a l m of h an ds down ( W ) m ak e a slight tre m ulou s m otion with the
,

n gers w ithou t m ovin g th e h a n d S ign is also often m ade wi th the

,
.

exten ded ngers poi n tin g tow a rd e a ch other ( Da ko ta I ) Gli m m er . .

durin g h ot we a ther Reection an d refr action through the a t m osphere

.

often seen durin g hot we ather .

H o u r Ti m e o f d ay ( C o m p are Da y )
,
. .

To indic a te an y p a rti cul ar ti m e o f d ay , the h a nd with the si g n of the

sun is stretched out to w a rd the e a ster n horizon , a nd the n gr a du ally

elev a ted u ntil it arrives i n the proper directio n to i n dic ate the p art o f
the h e a ven s in which t h e su n w ill be a t the given ti m e ( L o ng ) .

of right h a nd croo k ed as in sig n for M o r n i n g m a de to

Fo r c n g e r , ,

describe an are over the he a d fro m e a st to west bein g stopped a t any ,

poi n t i n the ar e a ccord in g to the ti m e of m orn in g or e ven in g ( Chey .

~

emi e I )
.

Indic a te the spot a t w hi ch the su n stood when the e ven t to which

th ey a r e alludin g occurred Poin t xedly to th a t poin t a n d hold the
.

ar m i n th a t p ositio n for seve ra l m o m ents ( Oj i b wa I ) . .

Curve the index of the closed ri gh t h a n d i n the for m o f a h alf circle ;

move i t fro m the e a stern horizon followin g t h e course o f t h e sun an d
, ,

all owin g it t o rest a t the position occupied by th a t body a t the ti m e to

be indic a ted ( Da ko ta V )
.
~
.

The si g n f o r S u n bein g m ade the h an d i s held in the directi on of

,

the pl ace which the su n wo ul d occ upy at the ti m e to be i ndic a ted or t h e ,

h an d i s m a de to describe an ar c correspondi n g to the course o f the sun

durin g the l a pse of ti m e referred to Thus the fore n oo n is show n by .

Stretchin g the h a n d ( in position of sign for su n ) to w a rd the horizon an d ,

then slowly sweepin g i t u p tow a rd the z enith ; the a fternoon is show n

by a reverse m otion ; n oon by holdin g the h a n d tow ard the zen ith
,
-

( H idatsa I ) .

a ta r a i sig ns In dic a ted by stri k in g the ai r wi th the fore

in g the strok e of the clock .
( Ba l la r d )
 1 50

M ove the foren ger i n a c ircle , i ndic atin g the m otion o f t h e '

m in ute
h an d an d then i ndic a te the n u m ber of hour s ( H asensta b )
,
. .

H o u se ( C o m p are L o d g e )
. .

The h an d h a lf Open an d the foren ger exte n de d and sep ar ated ; then
r ai se the h a n d upw ard an d gi ve i t a h alf t urn , as if screwin g so m e
thin g ( Dunbar )
. .

Pa rtly fold the h a nd s, the n gers exten ded i n i m it ation of the corn er
o f an ordin ary l o g house ( A r ap a ho I )
-
. .

B oth h an ds outspre a d n e ar e a ch oth er , elev a ted to fron t of face ; sud

d e n l y sep ar a ted t urned at right a n gles , p al m s fa cin g ; brought dow n at
,

ri ght an gles , suddenly stopped Represen tin g sq u are for m of a h ouse . .

( C hey enn e I ) .

The n gers of both h a nds exten ded an d sligh tly sep ar a ted then those
-
,

of the ri ght ar e pl a ced i n to the sever al sp aces bet wee n those o f the left ,
the tips exten din g to a bout the rst j oi n ts ( A bsar o ka I ) Fro m the . .

a rr a n ge m en t of the logs in a log buildi n g

.

Cross the end s of the extended n gers of the t wo h an ds , the h a n ds to

be n e arly at right a n gle , r adi al side up p al m s in w ard , t h u m b s in p a l m s , .

( Da ko t a IV )

Represen ts
. the logs a t the en d of a l o g h ouse -
.

B oth h a n ds exten ded n gers spre ad , pl ace those of the right i nto the
,

sp a ces betwee n those of the left then m ove the h a n d s in this position a ,

sh ort d ista n ce up w a rd ( Wy a ndo t I ) A rr an ge m en t of logs and ele

. .

v ation .

Both h a n ds ar e held edge wise before the body p a l m s facin g spre a d , ,

the n gers , an d pl a ce th o se of on e h a n d i n to the sp a ces between those

of the left so th a t the tips of e a ch protrude a bout an inch beyond
, .

( H i da tsa I ; Kai o u a I ; A r i kar a I ; Co m a nche I I I ; Ap a che II ; Wi chi ta

II ) The a rr a n ge m en t o f logs i n a fron tier house I n ordin a ry con
. .

v ers a tion the sign for w hi te m a ns ho use is often dropped , usi n g in ste a d the
generic ter m e m ployed for l o dge, an d this in turn i s often a bbrevi at ed ,
a s by the K a i ow a s , C o m a nch es , Wichit a s , a n d others by m erely pl a c in g ,

the tip s of the extended f o re n g e r s together , le a v in g th e other n gers

and th u m bs closed w ith the w rists about thr ee o r four i n che s a p art
, .

B oth h an ds held poin tin g for w ard , ed g es down n gers extended , and ,

sli ghtly sep ar a ted , then pl a ce the n g er s of o n e h an d in to the sp a ces

bet ween the n ger s o f the other , a llowi n g the tips o f the n gers of either
h a nd t o protrude as f ar as the r st j oin t o r ne ar it ( Shosho ni an d
Ban a k I ) Fro m the appe a r a nce of a corner of a l o g hou se
.
,

. prot ru din g -

and a lte rn a te l ayer s of logs

.

Deaf -
mute n a tur a l i gns Dr a w the outl in e s of
s a house i n th e air .

( B a l l ar d ) .
 1

Put the Open h a n ds to g ether tow a r d the face , for m in g a ri ght a n gle
w i t h the a r m s ( Lar so n ) .

G o in g in to a .

H old the open left h a nd a foot o r ei ghteen I nches i n front of t h e

bre a st p al m do wn w ard or b a c k w ard n gers poi ntin g tow a rd the ri g ht
, , ,

a nd p a ss the right h a n d p al m up w ard n gers be nt side wise a n d

, ,

poi n t in g b a c k w ard , fro m before b ac k w a rd un derne ath i t, through a

cur ve un til n e ar the m outh S o m e a t the s a m e ti m e m ove the left h a nd
.

a li ttle forw ard ( Da ko ta IV )

. .

Goin g o ut o f a .

H old the open left h a n d a foot or ei g h tee n i nche s in fron t o f the bre a st ,
p al m down w ard or b ack w ard , n gers poi ntin g tow ard th e right an d ,

p ass the right with in d e x extended , or al l of the n gers extended a n d ,

poin tin g for w ard , about ei ghteen inches for ward u nderne ath the left
through an ar e fro m n e a r the m outh S o m e at t he s am e ti m e m ove the .

left h a n d tow a rd the bre a st ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

S tone ,
Fort .

S tri k e the b a ck o f the righ t st a g a in st the p a l m of the left h a nd ,

'

th e left p al m b a ck w a rd the st upri ght ( ide a o f re sista n ce o r stren gth )

,

then with both h a nds opened , rel a xed , horizo n t al an d p a l m s b a c k ,

w a rd pl a ce the en ds o f the ri ght n gers behin d an d a ga in st th e e n ds

,

of the left ; the n sep ar ate the m an d m ovin g the m b a ck w a rd , e a ch

,

through a se m icir cle , brin g their b a ses toget h er ( Da ko ta I V ) A n . .

in clos ure .

H u m b l e or m e e k .

E xpress b v ben t body , the ri gh t h a nd holdin g the m outh , or o ver it

the h ands also so m eti m es bl ack ened ( Oj i bwa I V ) . .

First m a k e the sign for P o o r , i n p r o p e r t y , a nd the n the e x

ten ded foren ger o f both h a nds ( others closed ) poi n ti n g upri gh t ( J ) , ,

wi th b a ck s in w a rd , ar e c arried str a ight outw a rd fro m about a foot in

fron t of their respective eyes a s f ar as the a r m s can be exten ded ( Da .

ko ta I ) C losely rel a ted t o p oo r i n p r op er ty ; an d possi bly m e a n s n ot

.

seein g a nythin g belon g in g to the person .

Hun g r y .

A s a win g of the bre ast .

( M a cgo wa n ) .

Touch the epiga striu m wi th t h e foren ger of the r ight h a nd a nd

then openin g the m outh poi n t do w n the thro a t w ith the s am e n ger .

( D a ko ta II )

The rst m otio n in dic ates the e m ptin ess o f the sto m a c h
.

a n d the secon d the m ode o f re m edyin g it

.
 15 2

The ar m i s exed a t the elbow , the h a n d c ollected in to sh ape of a

spoon n gers an d th u m bs a pproxi m ated a nd for m in g a hollo w in the
,

h an d n ot close d a t points W i th the p al m u p , the h a nd i s then dra wn

,
.

e d gewise a cross the epi g a striu m twice ( O to I )

A m e m pty o r ex . .
.

h a n sted .

A n other The ar m i s exed an d the h and brou gh t to the pit of

:

stom a ch a s i n position ( S
,
m odied by bein g horizont a l a nd th e b a c k
conc ave ou tw ard The h a nd is then p a ssed se m ici rcul a rly down w ar d
.

an d outw a rd fro m the a bdo m en ( O to I ) H ollowed out or e m pty

. . .

Pa ss t h e
outer edge o f th e a t righ t h an d across the epig astriu m
w ith a s a win g m otion ( Kaio wa I ; Co ma nche III Ap a che I I ; Wichita
.

I I ) The cra vin g of an e m pty sto m a ch

. .

h a n ds pl a ced ne ar together in fro m of sto m a ch , n gers poin tin g

Both .

tow a rd the b ody , then e a ch h a nd quic k ly j er k ed a side as though te arin g

so m ethin g a p a rt ( Sahap ti n I ). .

Pl a ce the a t ri gh t h an d tr a n sversely to the pi t o f the sto m a ch a eco m

p an ie d by a n expression o f we a riness ( Ap ache .

I ta li a n sig n .
T a p the side wi th the open h an d .
( But ler )
H u n t i n g or se a r c h i n g f o r .

The fore nger i s brough t ne a r the eye a nd pl a ced in the a ttitude of

poin tin g ; i t is the n w a gged fro m side to side , the eye followin g it s
devious m otion a nd see m in g to loo k i n the direction i ndic ate d S o m e
, .

ti m es the h a nd is exten ded f a r befo re the eye an d the s a m e m otio n i s ,

gi ven to the n ger ( L ong ) .

Ri ght fore n ger extended ( others closed ) i s c arried outw ard

fro m the ri ght eye w ith consider able n p and dow n an d righ t and l eft
,
- - -

m ove m en ts a s though se a rchin g for so m ethin g lost the eyes followin g

, ,

the course of the n ger ( Da ko ta

Fro m the act o f h un tin g o r
'

se a rch in g for a nyth in g .

With the i ndex ( o r ind e x an d seco nd n gers sep ar a ted ) only extended ,

pl ace the h a nd ne rly a at a r s

len gth before the face , the nger poin t
m

in g sli gh tly a bove t h e h orizo n ; m ove it fro m side to side w ith the eyes ,

i ntently followin g the m ove m ent ( Da ko ta VI I ; Ute I ) . .

The h an d i s held a s i n th e si g n for S e e , a n d is the n m ov e d for ward

wit h a l ater a lly zigz a g m otion ( H ida tsa I ) . .

W ith the ri ght h a n d exten ded a t len gth , p al m down , n gers a r s

m

poin tin g t o the fron t an d slightly a bove the horizon m ove i t horizon t ally ,

fro m side to side a llowin g the eyes to follow the m otion w it h a n expres
, ,

sion of in q uiry ( Ap ache I ) . .

 153

Deaf -
m ute K nit the eyebro w s and m o ve the he ad in
n a tur a l sig ns

di ff eren t directions bendin g the eye upon v ac an cy ( Ba llar d) , .

B rin g your he a d forw ard a little a n d ch an ge your loo k , showin g th a t

yo u ar e loo k in g a roun d for som ethin g n ot yet found ( Cr o ss) .

A ii o t h e r : H a vin g touched t h e eyelid , m ove horizon t a lly the n ger ,

w ith an expression o f h un tin g for s om ethin g ( Cr oss) .

Pl a cethe foren ger o n the eye ; at the s am e ti m e i ncli ne the he ad

as if hun tin g f o r so m ethin g ( Zeig ler ) .

For g am e .

S a m e as the sign H un t i n g f o r This is a genera l sign an d if .

,

hu nti n g f or a p articul ar k i n d o f ga m e i t m ust be specied by it s proper

si gn a s deer , a ntelop e, buf a lo , etc ( Dako ta I ) Fro m the act of seek
,
. .

i n g , se a rchi n g .

Hur r y .

Close the righ t h a n d , inde x exten ded a nd elev a ted , poi ntin g u pw a rd ,
-

b a c k o f h a nd for w ard , a nd bec k on by dr a win g the h a nd tow a rd the

body sever a l ti m es excitedly ( O ma h a I ) . .

Pl a ce the h and s , p al m s up n e ar the sto m ach and i n fron t of i t then

, ,

m ak e a n u p a nd down m otion a s if tossin g a l arge li ght body a sh ort

- -

dist an ce ( K a io wa I ; Co m a nche I II ; Apa che II ; Wichi ta I I ) E vi

. .

d e n t l y fro m the m ove m en t of the sto m a ch so m et im es experienced wh e n

run nin g .

H u sb a n d .
( C o m p are C o m p a n io n ; Sam e ; M ar r ie d ) .

The two f o re n g e r s a r e extended an d pl a ced together w ith thei r

b a c k s u p w ard T h i s si gn is also used for Co mp a ni o n ( L o ng)
. .

M ak e the si g n i n front of the pri v a tes for M a n and then m ove the ,

ri gh t st ba c k outw ard , forw ard a foot or ei ghteen in ches fro m six

,

inches i n fron t of the n a vel ( Da ko ta IV ) M a n I h a ve . . .

A nd Wife .

The s a m e si gn fre q uen tly used f o r both : L ay t h e two f o r eng e r s

together side by side , str a ight a n d pointing forw a rd , the other n ger s
,

loosely closed ( Da ko ta I V ) T wo j oin ed as one

. . .

W i fe
() r .

E xtend the f o re n g e r s o f e a ch h a nd a n d brin g the m toge t her side by

side in fron t of the bre a st an d a foot therefro m ( C om anche I ) . .

I , l e , nl y se l f .

The n gers of the right h an d l aid a gain st the bre ast .

( Dunbar )
20
 1 54

Th e clin ched h a n d str u

c k g en tly , tw o o r an d w ith a q uic k m otion ,
three ti m es u pon th e bre ast O r , th e ngers bro u gh t together ar e
.

pl aced perpen dicul arly upon the bre a st ( L ong ) .

Touch the n ose t ip , or otherwi se ind ic ate self w ith th e in dex

- .
( Bur
to n
.
)
Touch or otherwise i ndic ate on e s self
.
( A r ap a ho I ) .

Ri ght h an d "
n gers droopin g , foren ger sep ar ated fro m the others
-

gently touched on ce o r twice to the ri ght bre ast ( C hey enne I ) . .

The n gers o f the ri g h t h a n d are collected to a poin t the th u m b ,

lyin g a g a i n st the p al m s of the n gers then brin g t h e h and pointin g , ,

up w a rd slo w ly tow ard the bre a st A lso u sed to express to m e ( A bsa

,
. .

r o ka I; S h o shon i an d Bana k I) .

Right h a n d ( S 1 ) th u m b an d n gers exten ded horizont a l , b a c k out

w ard , t a p pin g th e left bre a st W hen the gesturer desires to be very.

e m ph ati c the clin ched ri ght h an d is str u ck repe atedly a gai n st the ri gh t
,

bre a st ( Da ko ta
.
( Co m p are H e a r t Da ko ta ,

Tou ch the en d of the n ose w ith t h e r adi a l side of the right fore n ger ,
the foren ger poin tin g upw a rd ( Dako ta I V ) . .

Pl ace t h e exten d e d index a g ain st t h e m iddle or u pper portion of the

bre a st .
( Da ko ta VI I ) .

Touch th e m iddle of th e bre ast wi th t h e in dex .

( H ida tsa I ; A r ika ra I ) .

S tri k e
th e left bre ast w ith in dex -
n g e r of righ t h a n d , the other
n gers bein g closed ( O m a ha I ) . .

Wi th the right h an d a rche d so th at th e th u m b rests alon g the si de o f

,

t h e i n de x pl a ce the i n ner side of the h an d a g a in st the bre a st w ith the

, ,

n gers pointin g down w ard ( Ka io w a I ; Co m anche 1 1 1 ; Ap ache I I

.

Wich i ta I I ) .

A n other : Pl a ce th e in dex or th e ends of the extended n gers agai n st

the bre a st ( K a i o u a l Comanche I l l ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I )

. .

Pl a ce
the in dex upon the bre ast r ather q uic k ly If this gesture is .

m a de slowly a n d w hen in con n ection w ith other si gn s o f a n arr a ti ve ,

,

o r p recedin g the expression of w a n t or desire , it expresses to m e ( Pa i ,

.

Ute I)
.

S weepthe h a n d up the body and rai se the right foren ger up w ith
v i gor j ust before fa ce ( Ap ache I I I ) . .

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l sig n s .
In dic ated by pointin g to one s self to the
person spe ak in g .
( Ba llar d)
 1 55
B e stth e tip of th e fore n ger upon th e bre a stbon e , and at th e s am e
ti m e nod th e h e a d ( H asensta b ) . .

P ut the ri ght fore n ger on the bre a st .

( Zeig ler )
'

So m e de a f m utes pu sh th e foren ger a ga i n st th e pi t of th e sto m a ch ,

-

others a g ai n st th e b re a st , an d others poi n t i t to th e n eck for th is per

son ali ty .

O bj ecti ve .

\V i t l i th e n gers pl aced closely together at th e ti ps , th e th u m b resti n g

a lon gside of the i n dex , bri n g the h a n d , poi n ti n g up w ard , slo wly to a n d

a g a i n s t the m i dd le of th e bre a st ( Ka i o wa I ; Co m a nch e III ; Ap ach e I I

.

Wi ch ita I I ) .

I ce .

B e gi n with th e si g n of W a t e r , t hen of C o l d , the n of E a r t h ,

a n d l astly a S t o n e , with the si gn of S a m e n e ss or S i m i l a r i t y .

( Dn nba n )
S am e th e si g n for S t o n e ( Da ko ta I ) A h ard substan ce
as . . .

gn o ran t .

T ap the forehe ad w ith the sli gh tly curved i n dex , followed by th e si g n

-

for L ie.
( Ap a che I ) .

I II . S ec S i c k .

Im p r e can tio .

I ta li a n sig h The fore n ger turned d ow n is a m otion o f a girl a t

.

T hr a sy m e n e , wh o w as refused a l m s , as sh e cried c a a l infer n o ( But ler ) .

I m p r u d e n t R a sh .

Sh ad e the eyes wi th left h an d , rel a xed ( Y p a l m i n w a rd ) , ri gh t h a n d

i n front of bre a st , fore n ger str a i gh t upri gh t ( J p al m out w ard ) ; m ove
for w ard , m ak i n g three or four sh ort st o p s in the m ov e m en t to represen t
th e m otion of a person w a l k i n g T h i s i s th e gen er a l descrip ti o n ; i f r e
.

referri n g to r a sh ch a r g e i n ba t tle, th e si g n wi th left h a n d i s rs t m a de ,

the n si gn for char g e is m ade w i th both ( Ch ey enne II ) Goi n g bli n dly , . .

w i th out look i n g .

P l ace th e ti ps of the exte n ded f o r e n g e r s to th e te m ples , th en th ro w

the h a nds ou tw ard a nd dow n w ard W
( y an d o t I )

N o j ud g m e n t
. .

li te r a lly .

In, W i t h in .

Fore n g e r th u m b of the left h a nd ar e h eld i n th e for m of a se m i

a nd

c ir cle , openi n g tow ard an d ne a r the bre ast , a n d th e ri gh t fore n ger ,

rep resen tin g the p risoner , i s p l aced uprigh t wi thi n th e curve , an d p a ssed
 1 56
'

fr o m one sid e to a n other , i n order to sh o w th at i t i s no t p erm itted to p ass

ou t Th is is the sign for P r i so n e r , as gi ven i n I ntrod ucti o n to the
.

study of sign l a ngu a ge , etc Th is si gn i s the one m a de by th e Si ou x

-
.

f or I n , Wi t hi n , a n d al so to i n d ic a te Pr iso n er , b u t w h en so used th e se m i
circle woul d b e con ti n u ed to a circle after p a ssin g th e n ger w ith i n
i t Th i s si gn , h owever , is n ot l i m ited to Pr iso ner ( Da ko ta I )
. . .

Th e l eft h a nd n gers exten ded side b y sid e , the thu m b fa ci ng but an

-

i n ch or tw o fro m th e m p oi n tin g tow ard th e righ t ( for m in g a U h eld

,

sidew ise ) ; t h e ben t i ndex is th en p ushed p artly in to th e sp ace betwee n

th e th u m b an d n gers of th e left ( Ap a che I ) . .

I n d e c i si o n , Do ub t .
( C o m p a re "u e st i o n, an d Kno w , I
d o n t ) .

T he i n dex an d m iddle n ger extend ed di verged , pl a ce th em tr a n s

v e r se l y b efore th e sit u ati on of the h e a rt an d rot a te th e wrist two or
,

th ree ti m es gen tly , for m in g e ach ti m e a q u arter of a ci rcle ( Lo ng ) .

M ore th a n o n e h e art for a purp ose .

C o m bi n e th e si gn s of A f r l n a t i v e a nd N e g a t iv e , i . e
.
,
Ye N o
s .

( A r ap a ho I ) .

The ri gh t h a n d brough t to th e region o ver t h e h e art , w i th th e rst two

n gers exten ded p oi nti n g obliquely do w n w a rd to w a rd th e left , t h u m b
,

r esti n g o n third nger , w h ich w i t h th e fourth i s closed , b a c k of h a n d

ou t w ard , m a k e severa l q ui c k tre m ulou s m otion s , then exten d th e th u mb

an d n gers , an d c arry th e h a n d out in fron t of th e ri gh t side of b ody
,

t ur n in g the h a nd so th a t i t is brou gh t , h orizon ta l , at p al m up w ard ,

( X) , exten d i n g th e fore ar m fro m th e elbo w only ( Da ko ta I ) . .

The ri ght i n dex ex tended , b a ck up w ard p oin tin g tow ard th e left , in
,

fr o nt of t h e left bre ast , th e oth er n gers h al f closed t h u m b on m iddle ,

n ger ; m ove t h e h a n d throu gh a n ar e forw a rd an d to w ard th e ri gh t

u n ti l i t is i n fron t o f the righ t bre ast ( Da ko ta IV ) Goi n g a round ,
. .

th erefore n ot cert ai n .

M e th e si gn for H a v e , an d th en , wi th it s b ack u p w ard , n gers

ak

sep a r a ted a l ittl e , sligh tly exed , an d p oi n ti n g forw a rd , rot ate the righ t
h a n d to th e ri gh t an d left , descri bi n g an ar c u p ward ( to i m ply doubt ) .

( D a ko t a IV )
P
. erh a p s I w i ll get i t ,
or h a ve it
.

In dex a n d secon d n gers stra i gh t an d sep ar a ted , re m a i n in g n gers

an d th u m b closed p l a ce the tip s n e a r th e regi o n of th e h e art p oi n ti n g
, ,

to th e left ; m ove to a n d fro m th e h e a rt repe a tedly as i f p u ncturin g it ,

a t e a ch th rust rot ati ng the h a n d sl igh tly so th a t t he
p ositio n of the n
gers wi l l b e si m il ar a t e a ch al ter n a te m ove m e n t ( K aio w a I ; Co manch e .

I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I ) .
 I e r p l e xit y
-
-
.

I ta l ian sig n O pen h a n d sh ak e n before th e foreh e ad as if a na gi ta tion

o f th e br a in .
( B u t le r )
Dou bt .

I ta li a n sig n B oth h an d s w ith n gers ap art an d p al m s forw ard , r a ised

by th e h e ad .
( B u tler )
I nd i a n Ag e nc y .

F irst m ak e th e si g n for W h i t e m a n , and th e n th e si gn G i v e ,

th e n desi gn a te t h e p ar t ic u l ar a gen cy ( see l oc a l n a m e s i n P R O P E R N A M E S ,
PH R ASE s by i ts proper si gn i f desirin g to be speci c ( Da ko ta
, , .

I) . Th e pl ace wh ere govern m en t prov isi on s ar e i ssued an d th e w hi te ,

m an wh o i ssues th e m .

N one of m y bu si ness
'

I n d i e r e n ce . .

I ta li a n sig ns Both h a n d s held d ow n by the thi gh s .

( B ut ler )
The h a n d w a ved u nder th e ch i n .
( B u t ler )
Ind i g e nt . See P o o r .

Inf a nt . See C h ild .

Inq u i r y . See "u e st i o n .

I t is so . Se e Ye s .

J o u r ne y . Sq o in g .

K e t t le .

S a m e si gn a s for V i l l a g e , b ut i s m a de closer to t h e e a rth ( Wi ed ) .

Th e con gur a tion of a co mm on k ettle ( th e uten sil obta i ned fr o m th e

w h ite s i n t r a de be in g of course th e on e referred to ) i s th e s a m e as th a t
, ,

of th e stoc k ade d vill a ges of the M a n d a n s an d H id at s a , th e i n ter v al s left

between th e h a n d s represen ti n g i n th i s c a se th e in terruption i n th e
"
circle m ade by th e h and les Th e d ier e n t iat io n i s e e ct e d by th e p osi
.

ti on cl oser to th e e a rth .

F irst m a k e th e si gn for F i r e , an d the n pl ace the n gers a n d thu m bs

of both h and s together i n front of th e bre a st so as to describe a circle
l ook in g d own w ard , an d the n m ove th e h a nd s stil l h el d i n thi s p ositio n
as th ou gh pu tti n g a k et tl e over th e re ( D a ko t a

F ro m on e of .

th e u se s t o w h ich th ey pu t a k ettle .

e t h e si gn for E a t i n g , a n d th en m ak e a circle by h oldi n g th e

M ak

en ds of th e p artly ben t f o r e n g e r s an d th u m bs n e ar togeth er , th e p al m s

of th e h an ds i n w a rd ( Da ko ta IV ) .

Ki l l , K il l ing ki l l w ith )
.
( C o m p a re Kni f e , to .

Th e h a nd s are held w ith th e edge u p w ard , a nd th e ri gh t h a n d stri k e s

t h e oth er tran sversely , a s i n th e ac t of ch o p pi n g Th i s si gn see m s to be .
 1 58

m ore p arti cul arly a p p li c a ble to con vey t h e ide a of de a th p roduced by

a bl o w of th e to m a h a w k or w a r -
cl ub ( L o ng )
.

C lin ch th e h a nd and stri k e fro m ab ove d ow n w ard ( Wi ed ) I d o n ot . .

re m e m ber th i s I h a ve given you th e si gn for k il li n g wi th a stro k e

. .

( M a tthews) There i s a n evi den t si m il a rity i n con cep ti o n and exe cution
between th e ( O to an d M i sso ur i I ) si gn a nd Wied s ( Bo te le r ) Th i s m o
.

.

tion , wh i ch m ay be m ore cle a rly expressed a s th e dow n w a rd th rust of a

k nife h eld in th e cli nched h a nd , i s still u sed by m a ny tri bes for th e ge n
er a l ide a of k ill , an d illu str a tes th e an tiq ui ty of th e k ni fe as a we a pon .

Th e a ctu al e m pl oy m en t of a rro w , gu n , or cl ub in t ak in g l i f e , is, however ,

often speci ed by a ppropri ate gesture .

S m ite th e si ni ster p a l m e arth w a rd w ith th e dexter st sh arply , in

si gn of Goi n g dow n ; or stri k e o ut w ith th e dexter st tow ard the
grou nd , m e a n in g to sh u t dow n ; or p a ss th e dexter u nder the left fore

n ger , m e a n i n g to go un der ( B u r to n ) .

R i ght h an d c a st d ow n .
( M a cg o ura n )
R i gh t h a n d cli nch ed , th u m b lyi n g alon g n ger tips , elev ated to ne a r
the sh oulder , s tri k e dow n w ard an d out w ard v a guely in th e directi on of
th e object to be k i lled Th e ab str a ct si gn for Ki ll is si m pl y to cli nch
.

th e ri ght h an d i n th e m a nn er described a n d stri k e i t dow n an d out fro m

th e ri gh t si de Chey en n e
.

B oth h an d s cli n ch ed , w i th th e th u m b s restin g a g ai n st the m iddle j oi nts -

of th e f o r e n g e r s, h old t h e left tran sversely in fron t o f a n d as h i gh as the

bre ast , then p u s h th e ri gh t , p al m dow n , q u ick ly over a n d down i n fron t
of th e left ( A bsa r o ka I ; Sho sho ni a n d B ana k I ) To force u nder
. .

li ter all y .

W i th th e dexter st brou gh t i n front of the b ody th e righ t side at

stri k e dow n w a rd an d outw a rd , w ith b ack of h a n d u p w ard , th u m b to

w ard th e left sever a l ti m es ( Da ko ta I ) Stri k e dow n
, . . .

W ith the rst secon d j oi n ts of th e n gers of the ri gh t h a n d be nt ,

an d

en d of th u m b a gain st th e m i dd le of th e in dex , p a l m d ow n w ard , m ove

th e h a n d en ergetic ally for w a rd an d do w n w ard fro m a foot i n fron t of
th e ri ght bre a st ( Da ko ta IV ) Str i k i n g wi th a ston e m a n s rst
. .

we a p on .

H ol dthe ri gh t st p a l m do w n , k n uc k les for w a rd , a nd m ak e a th rust

forw a rd an d dow n w a rd ( Dako ta . V I, V II ; H ida tsa I A r ikar a I)
.

Th e left h a nd , th u m b up , b a c k for w ard n ot very si gn al ly extended , ,

i s h el d before th e chest a n d stru ck i n th e p al m w ith th e outer ed ge of

h
t e righ t h a n d ( M an da n an d. H i da tsa I )

To k il l w i th a bl ow ; to
/

de al th e de ath blo w -
.
 1 59

R i gh t h a nd , n gers o p e n bu t sli gh tly cur ved , p al m to th e left ; m ove

d o w n w ard , de scri bin g a curve ( O ma h a I ) . .

A n other : Si m il ar to th e l a st , b u t the i n dex n g e r i s e xtended , poi nt -

i n g in fron t of you , t h e other n ger but h a lf open ( O ma h a I ) . .

A n oth er : C lose th e ri gh t h a nd , extendi n g th e fore n ger a lon e ; p oi n t

tow a rd th e bre ast , t h en thro w fro m you for w ard , bri n gi n g th e h a n d to
w a rd the grou n d ( O m a ha I ) . .

B oth h a n d s , in positi on s ( A A ) , w ith a r m s se m ie x e d tow a rd th e

body , m ak e th e forw ard rot a ry si g n for F i g h t i n g or B a t t l e ; th e
ri gh t h an d i s th e n r ai sed fro m th e left ou tw a rd , a s clutch i n g a k n ife
w it h t h e bl a de p oin ti n g d ow n w a rd an d i n w ard tow ard the left st ;
th e left st bei n g h el d i n situ, is str uc k n ow by t h e ri gh t , ed gew ise as
.

a b ove d escri bed , a n d bot h sudden ly fa l l together ( O to and M isso ur i .

I ) To Stri k e d ow n in b attle w i th a k n i fe In di an s seld o m di s agree

. .

or k ill a n o t h e r i n ti m e s of trib a l pe a ce .

P l a ce the a t ri gh t h a nd p a l m d ow n , at a rm s len gth to th e ri gh t ,

,

brin g i t q u ic k ly , h ori z on t ally , to th e side of th e h e ad , th e n m ak e th e

si gn for D e a d W
( y . a n d ot I ) To stri k e wi th a
. c l ub ,
de a d
.

Deaf 11m m n a t ura l

- S tri k e
sig na a bl ow i n th e a ir with th e cli n ch ed
st , a nd th en i ncli n e th e h e a d to o n e si de , a n d lo wer th e open h a nd .

( B a l lar d )
Str i k e th e o t her h and with t h e st , or poi n t a gu n , an d , h a vi n g sh ot ,
sudden ly p oin t to your bre ast w i th th e n ger , an d h ol d y our h e a d side
w i se o u th e h an d .

U sethe cl osed h a n d as if to stri k e , a n d th en m ove b a c k the he a d with

th e ey es sh u t a n d th e m outh O pen ed ( H as e nsta b ) . .

P ut the h e ad dow n over th e bre a st, a nd the n m ove do w n the stretch ed

h a n d a lon g th e n ec k ( La r so n ).

In b a ttle To ,
.

M e th e si gn for B a t t l e , F i g h t , t h e n stri k e the b a c k of th e

ak

n gers of the ri gh t h a n d i nto th e p al m of th e at a nd sli gh tly arch ed

p al m of th e left , i m m ed i a tely afterw ard t h rowin g the ri gh t outw ard
K
a n d dow n w a rd t ow a rd th e ri gh t I il led f l lin g over
( Ute ) a n d a. . .

Yo u ; I w i l l k il l y o u .

Direct th e ri gh t h a n d to ward th e g the n ger fro m

'

o e n d er an d sp r in

th e th u m b , a s i n the act of spri n k li n g w ater ( L ong ) The conception . .

is perh a p s c a u si n g blood to ow , or , perh ap s , s p utter in g a w a y th e

life , th o ugh t here i s a str on g si m i l arity to the m otio n u se d for th e dis
ch ar g e of a g un o r ar r o w .
 1 60

Kind . See G o o d h ear t .

K n if e .

H ol d th e left h a n d cl i nch ed n e ar th e m ou th , as i f i t h el d one en d o f a

stri p of m e a t , the oth er en d of wh i ch w as between th e teeth , the n p a ss
th e ed ge of th e ri gh t h a n d as in th e ac t of cuttin g obliquely a li ttle
.

u p w a rd fro m ri gh t to left bet ween th e other h a n d a nd m ou th , so a s to

a ppe a r to d i vide th e supp osed m e a t ( Lo ng )
. .

C u t p ast the m o u th with the r ai sed righ t h a nd ; ( Wied ) I h a ve

gi ven you a d i ffere n t si g n w h ich i s t he only o ne I h a ve ever seen
,
.

Al t h ou gh th e sign s ( O to a nd M isso ur i I a n d Wicd s) ar e ,

d ie r e n t i n their execu tion a s a pplied to loca l p a rts , th e s a m e concept ion

'

per v ad es e a ch so m eth i n g u sed to sever or sep a r a te ( Bo tclcr ) Wi cds

. .

si gn p rob ably refers to the ge ner a l pr a c t ice of cutti n g off food as m uch ,

bei n g cr am m ed in to th e m ou th as ca n be m a n a ged an d then se p ar ated

by a strok e of a k n i fe fro m th e re m a i ni n g m ass Th is i s S peci a lly th e
.

c a se wi th f at a n d e n tr a i ls , the a bori gi n al del ic a ci es .

C u t the si ni ster p al m wi th t h e de xter f e r ie nt do wn w a rd a nd to w a rd

o ne s sel f : i f the cuts be m ade up w a rd with th e p al m dow n w a rd , m e a t
.

i s u nd erstood ( B a r to n )
.

R i gh t h a nd , p a l m o utw a rd , little nger represen ti n g t he ed ge of a

-

k n ife d r a w n do w n w a rd a cross p a l m or i n side of left h a n d

,
.
( Ch ey e nne I ) .

L eft h a n d st ( B ) held si x or ei gh t i nch es i n fro nt of the m o n t h ,

-

b a c k out w ard , as th ough h oldi n g a l a rge piece of m e a t i n the m outh ,

an d the n th e ri gh t h a nd w i th th e b a c k outw a rd , n gers exten ded , j oi ned ,

u prigh t ( S ) , i s p a ssed fro m ri gh t to left o n a curve betwee n th e m ou t h

a n d the left h a n d as th ou gh cu tti n g th e piece of m ea t i n two ( D a ko ta .

M ay h a ve co m e fro m the ir rst m a nn er of u sin g th e k n i fe i n e a tin g .

H old th e l eft st , b ac k ou tw a rd , abou t ei gh t in ches in fron t of th e

m outh a nd m ove t h e o p e ned ri g h t h a n d , p al m b a ck w a rd , ngers p oi nt
,

i n g obl iquely up w ard tow a rd th e left obl iq uely u p w ard a n d d o w n w a rd

,

fro m side to s ide b eh i nd i t ( Da ko ta I V ) H oldi n g a piece of m e a t

. .

with the left h an d a n d t h e teeth , an d cutt in g a p iece o ff w i th a k n ife

.
.

The left h a nd , fully O p ened , w ith th e ngers close togeth er , p a l m up

w ard a nd n ger tips to th e fro n t , i s h el d before th e perso n Th en th e .

ri gh t h a n d , al so ful ly open ed an d w i th n gers n ot spre a d a p ar t, wi th

th e p a l m i n w a rd a n d the th u m b up w ard , i s l ai d tr a n sversely o n the
left p al m th e o uter edge only tou ch i n g th e left p a l m So me ti m es th e .

ri gh t h a nd i s the n dr a w n a way on ce to the ri gh t wi t h a m otion r e p r e .

se n t in g a cu t ( M andan a n d H ida tsa I )

. .
 16 1

Th e l eft ar m i s se m i extended , an d th e left h a n d , in posi ti on ( X

-

m odied by b e i n g e d g e w ise u p a n d d ow n Th e ri gh t ar m i s th en brou gh t .

before th e bod y an d th e h a nd , in posi ti o n ( X ) , h orizon t al i s m a de to

, ,

exer t a c arvi n g m otion a t th e k n uc k le or m et a c arpo ph al a n ge al j oi n ts of -

th e left h a nd w h ich i s con cluded by a scoop in g or c arv in g m ove m e nt

.

,
.

( O to a nd l h sso uri I ) Th a t by wh ich w e open j oi n ts a d cu t or c rve

'

.
'
. n a .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l s ig ns I m i t a te th e ac t of wh i ttli n g w it h on e fore
n ger upon th e other .
( B a l lar d )

P a ss one foren ger over th e oth er sever a l ti m es .

( H a se sf a b
u -

.
)

S k in nin g w ith a .

Th e h and s ar e pl aced a s i n th e sign for K n i f e , th en the ri gh t h a n d

i s h eld a l i ttle obl iq uely i c , wi th f ore ar m se m i pron a te d , an d d r aw n ,
,
'

. .
-

b u t never p ush e d , a cro ss th e left p al m repe at ed ly , a dv a nci n g a l ittle

to w ard th e n g e r en ds w ith e ach strepe ( M a ndau an d H i d a tsa I )
-
. . .

H ol d th e left closed h and , p al m d ow n , a sh ort d ist a n ce before th e

b ody , a n d m a k e repe ate d cuts in fro n t of th e k n u c k les w i th the atte ned
ri gh t h a n d ( Pa i ( 7 6 l ). R epresen ts h oldi n g a ap of s k i n a nd sep a
.

r ati n g it fro m t h e bo d y .

To k i ll w i th a .

Cli nch t he ri gh t h an d a nd stri k e forci bly to w ard the gro un d before

th e bre a st fro m th e h ei gh t of th e fa ce ( Ute l ) A ppe a rs to h a ve . .

origin a ted w h en i n t k ni ves were sti l l u sed .

K n o w ( Co m p a re G o o d
.
; I n d e c i si o n ; U n d e r st a n d and Ye s .
)
Th e fore n ger of the rig h t h a n d hel d up ne a rly opposite to the
n ose an d brou gh t wi t h a h a lf tur n to the righ t an d c a rried a li ttle ou t
,
.

w ard P l a ce a ny o f th e articles [ si c] before th i s sign , wh ich wi ll the n

.

si gnify , I k n o w , yo u k n ow , h e k n ow s B oth h a n ds bei n g m ad e u se of .

i n th e m a n ner de scribed i m plie s to k no w m uch ( Dun ba r ) .

Spre a d th e th u m b a n d in dex ng e r of the ri gh t h a nd s weep to w ard -

th e bre a st , m ovi n g the m forw a rd an d outw ard , so th a t th e p a l m turn s

up .
( Wi ed ) Th e ri gh t ar m i s exed a nd r a i sed ; t h e h a nd i s th e n
brou gh t before th e forehe a d bet ween th e eye s a s in position ( I 1 ,
m od ied by bei n g p a l m ou tw ard a n d th e i ndex m ore open ed ) ; th e
h a n d an d fore a r m th e n describe a q u adr a n t forw ard an d down w ard .

There is n o con cei v a ble si mi l arity between th i s si gn an d Wieds as

" "
executed an d i t i s p rob a bl e th a t t h e conce p tion s ar e li k ew i s e o f die r
e n t sour ce or a ssoci a tion Th i s s a m e si gn is u sed for Kno w ledg e i n an
.

a b str a ct se n se B w
To h a ve in m in d o r u tt e r f r o m th e
'

l er )
'

( o .

m i nd .

21
 1 62

Th e th u m b an d i ndex -
n g e r m a d e i nto a ri n g an d p assed fro m the
m ou t h ( M acg o w a n )
. .

Th u m b , rst a nd secon d n gers of ri gh t h an d extended ( others closed ) ,

h orizon t a l , b ack s u p w ard , ar e c arried fro m th e n a tur a l positi on cl ose to
an d i n fro n t of the body a s h i gh as th e m outh , where the h a n d i s c a rrie d

w i th a curve d m otion , rst up w ard an d ou tw ard , an d th e n do wn w a rd

to the level of th e sto m a ch , b a c k s of the n gers loo k in g obli q uely d o w n
w ard ( Da ko ta I )
. I h a ve he ard your t al k an d k n o w wh a t you say
. .

The ri gh t i ndex an d th u m b fully extended an d spre a d th e other n gers ,

l oosely closed i ndex poi nti n g forw a rd an d a li ttle to the left b ac k of

, ,

h a n d up w a rd ; th e n su pi n a te t h e h a nd , t hro w n o n i ts b a c k an d h el d
a bou t a foot in fron t of th e ri gh t bre ast ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Strik e th e left b re a st w ith th e th u m b an d f ore n ger , k eepi n g the

other n gers cl osed ( O m a h a .

A n ot h er : C urve th ree ngers of th e ri gh t h an d , touch tip of m id dle

n ge r wi th th u m b , exten d foren ger an d sh ak e h a n d for w a rd an d d own
, .

( O m a ha I ) .

A n other : S a m e a s th e precedi n g , b ut th u m b an d n gers closed i n ste a d

of rin g s h ape ( O mah a I )
. .

A n other : Curve th ree n gers of the ri gh t h a nd , pl ace the th u m b

over th eir m id dle j oi n ts , exte nd th e i ndex , an d s h a k e for w a rd an d do w n
w ard fro m the ri g h t side of the fa ce ( Om a h a .

Spre ad the index an d th u m b of the righ t h a nd full y ap a rt, re m a i ni n g

n gers closed , p a l m tow a rd th e body , an d m ove th e h a n d for w a rd an d
sli g h tly do w n w a rd an d a l i ttle to th e ri gh t fro m bel ow t h e ch in to a d is
t a n ce of ei gh t or t e n i n ch es ( Kato w a I ; Co man che I II Ap a ch e II ;
.

Wi chi ta I I ) .

Deaf mu te na tur a l signs T a p th e forehe a d sli g h tly with the h a nd

-

( B a llar d )
N o d a n d p oi n t to th e forehe ad ( C r o ss ) .

P ut the open h a n d to th e bre a st , a n d at th e s am e ti m e bend dow n

th e he ad ( La r so n )
.

P l a ce the ri gh t foren ger on th e forehe ad , at th e s am e ti m e n od th e

he ad as i f to say yes ( Zeig ler ) . .

All the scert ai ned gestures of de af m utes rel a tin g to i n te l li gence ar e

a -

con nected wi th th e foreh ead , on wh i ch w e , also , rest the fore n ger , for
sh ow of t h ough t .

I do n

t k n ow .

F irst p l ace th e n ger s i n th e p osi tion for K n o w ; then tu rn the righ t

 I 63
'

h and u p w a rd po int o utw a rd t ow ard

'

w it h sp re ad n gers , so th at t h ey
'

t he righ t side .
( Wied )
Is expressed by w a vi n g the righ t h a n d wi th th e p al m ou tw ard before
t h e ri gh t bre a s t, or by m o vi n g a bout the two f o r e n g cr s before the
bre a st , m e a ni n g t wo he a rts ( B ur to n ) .

F irst m ak e th e si gn f or K no w ,
an d th en th a t for N o t or N o .

( Da ko ta I ) . Do no t kn ow w h a t you say . In decisi on , d oub t .

th e si g n for I K n o w ; th e n th e si gn for N o , or w hil e th e

M ak e
n gers ar e in p osi ti on for I K n 0 \ v th ro w t he h a n d ou tw a rd as for N o .

( Dak o ta IV ) .

The righ t ar m i s elev ated an d th e h a nd i n type posi ti on ( F ) , i s ,

-

twi sted sever a l ti m es before the chest , t h e n su d denly everted an d ex

p a n d e d ( O to a n d M
. i sso u r i I )

N o t scre wed u p or p osted u n a w a re
. .

M e the si gn for K n o w , t o , a n d throw th e h an d to the righ t

ak as

in N o , N o t ( Kato w a I ; Co m a nch e I I I ; Ap ache I I ; Wtchtta I I )

. .

Deaf m a te n a ta r a l stgns P oi n t to the b oso m ,

-
. m e a ni n g
th e spe ak er ,
pl ace th e h a n d up o n th e forehe a d and th e n m ove the h a n d a w ay .

( B a l la r d )
H a v in g p u t the n ger to your bre ast , poi n t to th e foreh e ad , sh a k i n g
your h e a d .
( Cr oss)

P ut th e stretched h a n d to th e bre a st, an d a t th e s am e ti m e sh ak e th e

h e a d ( Lar son )
.

P l a ce t h e righ t fore n ger on th e forehe a d , a t th e s am e ti m e sh a k e th e

h e a d as if to say N o ( Zeig ler ) .

I don t k no w you

.

M ove th e r a i se d h a n d , w ith th e p al m in fron t , slo wly to the ri gh t and

l ef t .
( B ur to n )

L a ke , P o nd .

M ak e the si g n of D r i n k i n g , a n d for m a b asi n w i th both h an ds .

If a l a rge body of w a ter is in qu estio n , wa ve b oth p a l m s out w ard as in

de noti n g a pl a i n ( B a r to n ) .

S i gn for W a t e r f ol lowed by si gn for B i g in the sen se of B ro a d ,

W ide F or P o n d , m ak e sign for L a k e an d L i t t l e ( Chey enn e I )
. . .

First m a k e th e si g n for W a t e r , a n d th en th e sig n for B i g in the

sen se o f F l a t ( Da ko ta I ) Water s p re ad o u t or le vel n ot r u nn i n g
. .

w ater .
 1 64

M ak e the si gn for W a te r
spre a d an d sli gh tly e x the th u m bs
, th e n
an d f o r e ng e r s, a nd h old th e h a nds , p al m s i n w ard , n e a r to gether or f ar

ap a rt , a ccord in g to th e si ze of th e l ak e referred to ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

After m a k in g t h e si g n for W a t e r , i ndic ate a circle , by exte nd in g

the h a nds h orizon t a lly a llo win g th e tips of th e fore n ger a nd thu m b of
,

one h a n d to j oi n th ose of th e other A l a rger circle i s m ade to i n d ic a te .

a l a rge l a k e by m a k i n g two h oriz on t a l se m i circul a r air l i nes wi th th e

h a nds , the ter m ini of the li nes j oi ni n g ( S hosh o ni a nd B a na k I ) . .

Deaf -
m a te na t ur a l sig ma M ak e a circle w ith th e fore n ger , a nd im i
t a te the ac t of dri n k i n g to si gni fy W a t e r ( B a l la r d )
.

P a r tly ope n your m outh wi th th e h e ad h el d b a c k , pl ac e th e ng e r s

a rr a n ged i n such a m a n ner th a t the h a n d l oo k s l i k e a cup to i t , an d .

th en suddenly m ove th e h a nd h orizo n t ally al on g a li ne describi n g a n

ell ipse ( Cr o ss)
.

La m e .

R i h t h a nd st B 7 tu rn ed do w n w ard in fron t of the b ody 7 m ak e th e

g
b
-

t.

forw ard a rched i nev e m e n t s in i m i ta tion of the w a l k of a l a m e person .

( Da ko t a I ) F ro m a l a m e.person s m a n n er of w a l k i n g
.

L a n c e , or S p e a r .

Is sh o wn by an i m it atio n of d arti n g i t .
( B ur to n )

H a n ds ele v a ted an d closed a s though gr asp i n g th e sh a ft of a l a n ce ,

left h a nd before right , sud d e n m otio n m ade fro m the left sh oul d er
d i a go n ally for ward ( h a n ds bei n g c a refully ret a i ned in th eir rel a ti ve
posi ti on s ) ( Ch ey en ne .

R i gh t h a n d extended in fro n t o n a lev el w i th th e sh oulder , as th ou gh

h oldin g a spe a r or l a nce in posi ti on to u se it ( D a ko t a I)
F ro m th e . .

th rowi n g of a spe ar .

(1) P oi n t to te nt p ole ( 2 ) cu t off left fore n ger , w i th ri gh t i n dex ; ( 3 )

-

r u b i t w ith th e l a tter to w a rd i ts ti p ( 4 ) pl a ce t ip o f ri gh t a t b a se of left

i ndex ; ( 5 ) t h ru st bot h forw ard ( Ap a che I I I ) Sh a ft ( 2 ) h ead ; ( 3 )
. .

sh arpen s i t to poi n t ; ( 4 ) adj usted he a d to sh ft ; ( ) p i t
a 5 u t i n service .

La r ge . See G r e a t an d B i g , in sen se of L arge .

La ug h , T o . La ug h t e r .

P l ace the h a n ds as i n H e a v y , bu t forw ard fro m e a ch side of th e

lower j a w, then m ove the m u p a n d d o w n a sh ort di sta n ce r apidly , the
fa ce expressi n g a s m ile ( Ka to w a I ; Co m an che I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wich
.

i ta I I ).
 1 65

L az y .

L ay the arched right h a n d ( II ) o n t h e m iddle o f the upper left ar m

p arti ally e xtended in fron t o f the body b ac k o f h a n d up w ard , an d in the
,

s am e m an ner l ay the left h an d on the righ t a r m an d then c arry both ,

h a nds u pw a rd o n thei r respecti ve sides in f r o n t to the level o f the face ,

w here both i n dex ng e r s ar e extended an d p oi n t u prigh t ( J ) fro m
i

w hence they a r e c a rried slowly dow n w a rd i n fron t o f the body to the

level of the sto m a ch ( Da ko ta I ) L azy ; n o good wi th t h e a r m s a nd
. .

h a nd s .

Deaf m ut e na t ur a l sig a Ha vi ng ex tended your chee k s sh ak e your

-
.
,

he ad i m plying n o a nd the n co m press the m w ith the h a n ds ( C r oss)

.
, .

L ean . See Po o r .

L e a ve s ( of trees ) .

The sign for T r e e m ust be m a de rst a nd in thi s c a se wi th the le ft ,

h a n d Begi n nin g fro m low dow n on left side , w i th n gers an d th u m b

.

sep ar a ted poi n ted up w a rd ( P ) , m ove the h a n d up w a rd til l it r ea ches a

,

little above the he ad ; thi s i s the tree Ri ght h an d in p osition ( G ) i s .

brought to touch th e di ff eren t n gers o f the left ( whi ch ar e the br an ches ) ;

foren ger an d thu m b describe th e le a f an d i s m a de l arger to desc ribe ,

differen t k inds by p artin g th e thu m b a n d n ger m ore or less The si gn .

for T r e e a lon e i s ge n er ally m ade wi th the righ t h an d ( C hey enne I I ) . .

M ak e tree a n d i t s br a n ches , an d then w ith the th u m b an d f o r e n

a

ger o f the ri ght h a n d describe a se m icircle with the free ends of the
th u m b an d n ger turned d ow n w ard i n fron t o f the body ( Da ko ta I ) . .

In rese m bl a n ce o f the d roop in g le a ves of a tree .

A rm s exten ded fro m body li k e li m bs of a t ree The righ t h a nd ,

a re .

in posi ti on ( N ) , is th en brou ght to left i n p osi tion ( S ) m odi ed by bein g

h orizont al ed gew ise Fro m the left , ar m an d h a n d still extended the
.
,

r ight drops successively to the groun d A u tu m n is represen ted by this.

sign follow in g the si gn f o r S u n ( O to I ) S o m ething th a t dr ops fro m

, . .

S pre a din g i bs a d the ti e for such

l m n m
.

trees O n .

S am e m otion o f righ t h a n d a s i n T r e e w it h the left h a n d a n d ar m ,

in fro n t above he a d loo k i ng up spre ad the n gers wh ich were ben t

, ,

dow n w ard Th u m bs n e a rly touch in g sh ak e both h a nd s sidewise a nd

.
,

u p an d do wn q ui ck ly i n i m it a t io n o f a spen le a f m otio n W hen the tree -

.

i s n e a r p oi nt in both c a ses t o the tree o r trees with the n ger ( O ji b

,
.

ma I V .
)
L e -
h an ded .

The left h a n d cli n ched is held before the neck ; the elbow is then
brough t in t o t h e side , a t th e s a m e ti m e gi vin g to the fore a r m a tw ist ,
so a s to brin g the closed p al m Opposite the bre a st ( L o ng ) . .
 r
1 66

S i m ply point to the left h a n d with t he extended foren ger of the .

r ight .

L e g g in gs .

S ep a r a tethe thu m b an d index ng e r o f e ach h a n d a nd dra w the m -

up w ard a lon g both legs I h a ve descri b e d his sig n in essen

.

t ial l v the s a m e ter m s ; but a s for the sign for Co a t I say the n gers ,

a r e closed The s am e re m a rk s a pply in o ne c a se as i n th e other ( M a t

. .

th aw s ) .N otw ithst a nd in g the in den ite a n d i nexplicit m a nner i n w h ich

Wied s si gn i s e xpressed there is evi den t si m il ari ty to th a t of ( O to a n d

,

M i sso ur i I ) both i n con ception a n d m ov em en t

, ( B o wler ) .

The tip of the thu m b o f e a ch h a nd is op p osed t o the ti p o f o n e o r

m ore o f its correspon din g n gers a s i f they gr a sped so m ethin g ligh tly, .

The h a nd s a r e then held a f e w i n ches a p a rt o n the a nterior a spect o f

o n e o f the thi gh s a s lo w d own a s they c a n re a c h wi thout bendin g the

body ( th e n ger t ips ne arly o r q u ite touchin g the l i m b ) an d a re the n .

,

si m ult an eo u sly dr a wn r a pidly upw a rd to the w a ist to represent th e

m oti on a s i f d r a win g o n a leggin g The m otion m ay be repe a ted on the .

opposi te li m b ( l l a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )

. .

.

The body i s ben t forw a rd a n d the li m bs exed u p w a rd an d adducted .

B oth h a n ds , w ith the b a c k s a rched up w a rd a n d the thu m b poi nts i n

con ta ct see m in gly encircle the leg a t th e a n k le a nd are dr a wn to w ard
, ,

th e body over e a ch leg sever a lly a s in dr a win g the a bove article o n,

.

O ri I ) Th t w hich dr w n o ver the legs

( t o a nd M i sso u a i s . a .

L e t a lo ne .

Righ t h a nd p a l m dow n
-

,
ar m be n t at elbow , m ove do wn w a rd by
degrees as l ow as the k nees .
( O m a ha I ) .

L ie , F a l se h o o d .

The fore n ger an d m idd le n gers exten ded , p a ssed t wo or three ti m es

fro m the m out h forw ard They are j oined a t the m outh but sep ar ate as
.
,

they dep a rt fro m i t indic a ti n g th at the words go i n di ff eren t direction s

,
.

( L o ng )
Pa ss the secon d an d third nger of the right h a nd tow a rd the left
side i n fron t of the m o uth ( Wied) M y descrip t io n is m uch to the
.

s a m e e ff ect bu t I ad d th a t the h an d is m oved forw a rd ( M a tthews )

,
.

Though the descrip t ion o f Wied s si gn is conden sed there is a n ev iden t

,

si m il arity in the execution a nd conceptio n o f this w ith ( O to I ) ( B o teler ) . .

The a uthor m e an s the i n dex and m iddle n ger a s appe ars fro m other
p arts of hi s li st H e cou n ts the th u m b as the rst ng e r [ E D
. .
-
.

E xten d
th e two rst n gers fro m the m outh .
( B ar ton
-
.
)

Double
ton gue a si gnic a n t gesture .
 167

Pa ss
the h an d fro m ri gh t to left close by an d a cross the m ou th w i th ,

the rst tw o n gers of the h a nd open ed thu m b a nd other n gers ,

closed ( Do dge ) .

Thrust th e fore an d m iddle

n ger exten ded a n d sep a r a ted fro m the
, ,

m ou th L iter ally.

the fork ed ton gue ( A r ap a h o I .

Ri gh t h an d fore a n d m iddle n gers pl aced on a level with t h e b ase

-

of the ch i n rst k n uck le a gai n st or n e a r the m ou th ; t hrust forw ard

,

and t o the left C h I S pe d ouble with two ton gues

( ey e n n e )
. a k .
, .

If t h e t w o f o r e n g e r s ar e p arted a n d m oved fro m the m outh li k e the ,

split ton gue o f a sn a k e i t sign ies lyin g This si gn is adopted in the

.

.
,

sign l a n gu a ge of al l th e In di an s as well a s the gure from w hich i t i s

-

deri ved ( O ji b wa I )
. S pe a k with th e for k ed t on gue
. e lie ,
.
,
.

Fore a nd secon d n gers of the right h a nd exten ded an d for k ed ( L

. 1,
with thu m b restin g o n third n ger ) p a ssed fro m ri ght t o left directly in
fron t o f t h e m ou th ( Da ko ta I ) Double ton gued
. .
-
.

Pl a ce
the righ t h a n d p al m in w a rd ( tow a rd the left ) j ust in fron t of
, ,

th e m ou th ; stron gly exten d t h e i n d e x ; al so exten d the m id d le n ger b ut ,

ben d i t tow ard the p al m un ti l it i s a t a n an gle of 45 0 w ith the index '

h a lt close the rin g a n d little n gers t h u m b ag a in st rin g nger ; m ove ,

the h a n d str a i gh t for w ard a bout eigh t in ches ; o r , h a v in g pl a ced the

h an d with it s b ac k forw a rd m ove the h a nd to the l eft ( Da ko ta IV ), . .

Tw o ton gues .

Touch t h e region o f the he a rt w ith t h e ri ght h a n d then close the ,

h and exten d the rst t w o n gers p a ssin g the m fro m the m outh tor
, ,
e

w a rd ( Da ko ta V )
. .

S pre a d
the extended i nde x a nd secon d nger o f the ri gh t h a nd a nd ,

p a ss the m , p a l m tow a rd the body q uic k ly by an d p ast the m outh to the ,

left ( Da ko ta V I V II )
.
, .

Close the ri ght h a nd le a vin g the i ndex a nd second n ger s extended an d

,

sep ar a ted ; t hen p a ss the m before the bre a st fro m righ t to left the ,

n gers poin tin g in th a t direction a n d the p a l m tow a rd the body .

( H ida tsa I A r ikar a I )

The s ign is l i k e th a t for T r u e , e xcep t th a t both the m iddle and

in dex n gers a r e exten ded a n d t hese ar e held together w hi le the h a n d
,

is a t the m outh b u t they diverge a s th e h an d m oves forw ard ( M a n d an

, .

a nd H i da tsa I ) .

.
The arm i s exed an d elev ated to a level wi th the mou th The h an d .
.

is i n position ( N m odied by bein g h orizon t a l in ste ad of verti c al .

w ith p al m tow a rd the f aC e a n d rst tw o n gers sep a r a ted Fro m in cep .

 168
t i on o f si g n
right side o f fa ce the h an d i s thru st fro m ri gh t t o left
at

across the m outh It i s then repe a ted w i t h other h a n d identic ally the
.

sam e f r o m opp o si te side of m outh S o m eti m es both i ndex n g e r s ar e used

.

fro m corn ers of m outh p al m outw a rd an d m a de to th u s d iverge as they

, ,

recede ( O to I )
. Dupl ici ty o r double ton g ued
.
-
.

M ak e the sign for T a l k , then thro w the righ t st outw ard an d

do w n w ard t ow ard th e righ t side , a n d sn a p th e n gers fro m th e th u m b ,
as in B a d W
( y a nd o t I
.
)

T a l k ,
b a d
. .

A fter poin tin g a t person a ddressed the h a nd i s pl aced in front of ,

m o n th b a ck tow a rd m outh a nd n gers proj ecti n g for w a rd ( P 1 w ith

, ,

k n u ck les up w a rd ) Then w i th qu ic k m otion s m ove h a nd tw o or three

.

ti m es to a poin t six o r ei ght i nches fro m m outh as th ou gh c a stin g so m e ,

thi n g fro m t h e m o ut h Then m ove h an d to side of m outh the two

'

.
,

rst n gers on ly extended a n d sli ghtly sep a r ated ( N 1 ch a n ged to hori ,

z o n t al position an d th u m b obl iquely extended ) an d p a st the m outh t o a ,

poin t o n the left ( Sa h ap tin I ) W ords double ton gued

. .
-
.

Pa ss t h erig h t h a n d to t h e left close by a nd a cross the m outh wi t h ,

the rst two n gers of the h a nd open ed thu m b an d other n gers closed ,
.

( Pa i Ute I )
/

.
I

W ith the th ird a nd fourth n gers o f the right h a nd closed resti ng

'

the t i ps of the rst tw o n gers a ga i n st t h e b a ll o f the thu m b pl a ce the ,

h a n d in fron t o f the ch i n or m o u th an d w hi le m ovi ng i t di a gon a lly ,

for w ard a nd to the left let the n gers sn a p for wa rd fro m the th u m b ;
repe a t this t wo o r three ti m es . ( Ute I ) Double ton gued .
-
.

A n other : H old the i ndex , poi n ti n g up w a rd in fron t of the m on th , ,

a n d m ove i t repe a tedly an d a ltern a tely obliquely forw ard tow a rd the .

right an d left The i ndex an d secon d n ger extended an d sep ar a ted

.
,

ar e so m e t i m es used t o represen t e xtr a ordin a ry lyin g U I )

T al k
( te . .

t w o w a ys .

S ig n for T r u t h , but m ak e the

as m otion obli q uely an d a ltern a tely
to w a rd the left a n d right ( Ap a che .

R un the i ndex fro m e ach corn er of the m outh .

( Zuni I ) .

De af m utes gesture T r uth by m ovin g on e n ger str ai ght fro m the

lips str ai ght forw ard s p e ak in g bu t distin guish Die by m ovin g the
,
-

n ger to o n e side side w ays spe a k i n g ,

.

L ie d o wn .

j IBO in t to t he grou nd ,
an d m a ke a m otion as if lyin g dow n .
( Ba r to n )
si gn f or S l e e p ,
the eyes re m aini n g open .
( A r ap a hoI ) .
 1 69

Only di ff ers fro m the sign f o r S l e e p in i n clin in g the he ad an d ar m s

sidewi se ( to the right ) tow ard the groun d w ith el bo w o ut as th oug h ,

used as a support ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Wa ve the h an ds l ow down p al m s up ( X ) horizon ta lly , ,

an d l a ter all y ;
S eep
l A
( p a ch e II I
. )

S uita ble pl a ce to lie upon . .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig n .
Pl a ce the h a nd upo n the chee k i ncli ne th e ,

he ad to one side . an d then lo wer the h a nd .

( Ba l la r d )

Fl a t w here you ar e .

L i k e D o w n an d A l o n e , but the a r m is extended in the directio n o f

the p arty a ddressed wi th p al m d o wn a n d m oved down w ard sever a l
, ,

ti m es ( O m a h a I )
. .

L if e , L i vi n g .

Righ t h an d fore nger str ai ght upright ot h ers closed ( J ) is slowly

-

, ,

r a ised u p in fron t of the right side close t o the body , a s high a bove the
he a d a s the ar m ca n be extended ( Da ko ta I ) R a ised up ; co m in g . .

up ; growin g a lso .

L ig h t, Da y l i g h t .
( C o m p a re C l e a r ) .

M ak e the sig n of the su n in the e a stern horizon an d then exten d the ,

h an ds together wi th th e p a l m u p w ard an d c a rry the m fro m e a ch oth er

, ,

outw ard ( L o ng ) . .

Da y lig h t is e q ui v alen t to S u n r i se . S ee a lso G l a ss ( Da ko ta I )

. .

The left a r mis extended fro m left side o f the body w ith the h an d
in type position ( I 1 ) m odied by th e in dex bein g a li ttle m ore extended .

I n thi s m a n n er the left h and indic a tes the risi n g su n The h a n ds ar e .

n ow a pprox im a ted at n gers p al m s before th e fa ce a n d grad u all y di

, ,

verge as do h an gin g curt ai n s The h a nds ar e held with the edges in

, .

w a rd an d outw ard ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) Th a t which acco m p a n ies

. .

the sun ; the curt ai n s o f n ight bei n g unfol ded .

Deaf m u l e na t ur a l sig n M ove the outstretched h a nd s ap art fro m e ac h

-

other ( L ar so n )
.

L ig h t ( in wei gh t ) .

Right h a n d horizont al , b a ck dow n w ard n gers exten ded a n d p arti a lly ,

curved upw ard is c a rried up w ard by e a sy m otion i n fron t of the body

, ,

w ith ar m ne a rl y exten ded a n d as though the h a n d cont a i ned so m e li gh t

object ( Dako ta I ) N o t he a vy t o li ft
. . .

Poin t i m agin ary obj ect ; li ft i t wi th

at an o ne h a nd , e a sily an d r apidly ,

hi gh a bove he ad ( Ap a che II I ) .

22
L ig h tn i n g . ( C o m pa re T h u n d er ) .

First the si gn for T h u n d e r ; then open o r sep ar ate t h e h an ds , and

l a stly brin g the ri gh t h a n d dow n tow ard th e e arth , i n the cen ter o f the
open i n g j ust m a de ( Dunba m .

Ri gh t h a n d elev a ted before a n d a bove the he ad foren ger poin tin g ,

up w ar d b rou gh t w i th gre a t r a pidity w ith a sin uous , un dul a ti n g m oti on ;

,

n ger still extended di a gon a lly d own w a rd tow ard the righ t ( C hey .

e nne I ) .

As th under a n d li gh tn in g gen er a lly a cco m p a ny e a ch oth er , there is

no sep a r a te sig n f o r L i g h t n i n g ( Da ko ta I ) . .

E xtend the index str ai ght an d e a rth w ard r ai se the h an d t o the hei ght
.
,

o f th e he a d , a n d p a ss i t q uic k ly dow n tow a rd the groun d m a k in g a r o

t ary m ove m en t w ith the n ger i n d oin g so ( Ap a che I ) . .

L i st e n . Se e He a r .

L i tt l e . Sm a ll a m o un t . Se e S m a ll, a lso Non e .

L o co m o tive .

Pl a ce
the ri gh t h a n d w i th the n gers an d thu m b p arti a lly curved
,

up w a rd an d sep a r ated k nuc k les outw a rd , in fron t of the bre a st and

, ,

p u sh i t u p a nd dow n a sh ort di st a nce while m ovi n g it forw a rd ( pu f n g

s m ok e an d forw a rd m ove m ent of e n gin e ) then pl ace both h a nds e d g e
wi se before th e chest , p al m s facin g and wh ile m ovin g the left but a fe w ,

i n ches forw ard p a s s th e right q uic k ly by i t a nd to the fron t to ar m s

,

len gth ( Ka io u a I ; Co m anche III ; A p a ch e I I ; Wichi ta

.
v R pi d
a

m otion as co m p a red wi th a n yt h in g else

.

L o d g e , l ip i,
'
W i g wa m .

The t w o h a nds are re ared together in the for m of th e roof of a h ouse ,

the en ds o f the n gers up w ard ( L o ng ) . .

Pl a ce
the opened thu m b an d foren ger of e ach h an d oppo site e ach
other as i f to m ak e a circle b ut le a vi n g between the m a s m a ll i n terv al ;
, ,

after w a rd m ove the m fro m a bove dow n w a rd si m ult an eou sly

( which i s
the si g n for vil lage ) ; then elev a te the n ger to in dic a te the n u m ber
o ne ( Wied) Prob ably he refers to an e arthen lod g e I thin k th a t th e
. .

si gn I h a ve gi ven y o u for s k in lod ge is the sam e with al l the U pper

M issouri In d i an s ( M a tthews ) .

Pl a ce the n ger s of b oth -

h a n ds rid ge fa shi on before the bre a st
-
.

( B ur to n )
I ndic ate t h e outlines ( a n in verted V , thus A ) , with the f o r e ng e rs '

touchin g or crossed n e ar the ti ps , the other n gers clo sed ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

 171

Both h a n d s open ; n ger s u pw ard , tips touchin g , brough t down w ard ,

an d a t s a m e ti m e sep a ra ted to describe outl ine o f a cone suddenly ,

stopped ( Ch ey en ne I )
. .

Pl a ce the tips o f the n gers o f bot h h a n ds together in fron t of th e

bre a st w ith the wrists so m e dist a nce a p a rt , a s in the outlin es
,
of the
letter A ( Da ko ta V )
. .

With both h a nds a t an d exten ded poi n tin g upw ard p al m s facin g , , ,

pl ace the tips o f bot h together allo win g the wrists to be a bout three o r
,

four i nches ap art ( Shosho ni a nd B a na k I )

.

O utline o f lodge poles .
-

w ith coverin g .

B oth h a nds at an d exten d ed pl a cin g th e tips o f the n gers of o ne

,

a g ain st t h ose of the other le a vi n g the p a l m s or wri sts a bout four in ches
,

a p a rt I Fro m it s

.
( A bsa r o ka l V y a nd o t ; S h o sh o ni a n d B a n a k I ) .

exterior ou tl ine .

is the pre f erred word with the S iou x Wig wa m i s n ot k n own

T ip i . . .

B oth h a n ds c a rried to the fron t of the bre a st a nd pl a ced V sh a ped , -

w ith the p al m s loo k in g tow a rd e ac h other ed ge of n gers o utw a rd , ,

thu m bs in w a rd ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the tipi

. . .

Cross the ends of t h e exten ded f o re n g e r s the ri ght o ne ei ther in front ,

or behin d the left or l ay the e nds together ; rest the end s o f the thu m bs
,

together side by side the other n gers to be n e a rly closed h a n d s n e a rly

, ,

upright an d the n gers restin g a g a i nst e a ch other p a l m s i n w a rd ( Da

, ,
.

ko ta I V ) Represen ts the tipi poles a nd t h e sh ape o f t h e tipi

.

.

R i ngers both h an ds exten ded a n d sep ar ated then i n terl a ce the m

of

so th a t the tips of one h a n d p rotrude beyo nd the b a c k s o f t hose of the

Opposi n g on e ; hold th e h a n d s i n fro n t of the bre a st le a vin g the w ri st s ,

a bout six inches a p a rt ( Da ko ta V I I ; d a tsa I A r ikar a I )

. .

The extended h a nds with nger tips up w ard an d touchin g the p a l m s

, ,

facing o n e a n other a nd t h e wrist s a bout t wo i n ches ap a rt a re held

,
-

before the chest ( Il l a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )

. .

Pl a ceth e t ip of the ind e x a ga i n st the tip o f the foren ger of the left
'

h a nd th e re m a inin g n gers and thu m bs closed before the chests le a vin g

, , ,

the wrists a bout six i nches ap a rt ( Ka io wa I ; Co ma nch e III ; Ap a ch e

.
'

I I Wichi ta I I ) O utline of lodge This is a n abbrev i a ted sign an d

. .
,

c a re m ust be t ak e n to distin guish fro m to m eet, in which the n gers ar e

brought fro m their respective sides in ste a d o f u p w ard to for m gesture " :

Pl a ce the tip s of the ngers o f the a t exten ded h a nds together before
the bre a st le a v in g the wrist s a bout six i nches a p art ( K ai o wa I ; 00
,
.

m a n ch e II I ; Ap a ch e II 3 Wi chi ta I I ) .
 172
'

Both h and s a t a n d exten ded n ger s sli gh tly se par a te d t h e n pla ce

,

t h e n gers of the ri gh t h a n d between the ngers o f the left as f a r as

the second j oin ts so th a t the n gers of o n e h a nd protrude a bout a n
,

in ch beyond those of the Opposite ; t h e wrist m u st be held a bou t si x

i n ches ap art ( Ka io w a I ; Co m an che III ; Apa ch e I I ; Wichi ta I I ) O u t
. .
.

lin e of India n lod ge an d crossin g o f tent poles a bove the coverin g -

.

Pl a ce
the tips of the spre a d n gers of both h a nd s a g ain st one a n
other poin tin g u pw a rd befor e the body le a v in g a sp ace of fro m four to
, ,

six i n ches between th e wrists Pa t Ut e I ) Represen ts the bough s

( .
-
.

a n d br an ches used i n the con struction of a Pai U t e w ik i u p

- - -
.

Pl a ce
the tips of the two a t h a n ds together before t h e body le a vin g ,

a sp a ce of a bo u t six in ches between the wrists U e I ) O utl ine o f

( t . .

the sh a pe o f the lod ge .

C o m in g out o f a .

S a m e as th e si g n f o r L o d g e , E n teri n g a on ly the n gers of the ri ght ,

h a nd poin t obliq uely up w ard after p a ssin g under the left h a nd ( Da ko ta .

I ) C o m in g out fro m under cover

. .

E n terin g a .

The left h a nd is held wit h the b a c k u n va rd an d the rig h t h a nd a lso ,

w ith the b ac k u p i s p a ssed i n a curviline a r direction do w n under t h e

other si d e o f i t The left h and here represents the lo w door of the s k in
.

l od ge an d t h e ri ght th e m a n stoopin g to p a ss in ( L o ng ) .

Pa ssthe a t ri gh t h a n d i n short curves un der the le f t which i s held ,

a short d i st an ce forw a rd Wi ed ) l h a ve described the s a m e si gn It

. . .

is n o t necess a ry to p a s s t h e h a n d m ore th a n o n ce B y s ayi n g c urves he .

,

see m s to i m ply m an y p a sse s If the h a nd i s p a ssed m ore th an on ce it

.

m e an s repetition of t he ac t ( 111 a tthe ws) T h e con ception is of the stoop

.

in g to p ass throu gh th e lo w en tra nce w h ich is often covered by a ap o f ,

sk in , so m eti m es s tretch ed o n a fr am e a nd which m ust be shoved a side , ,

a n d the subse q ue nt risi n g w hen the en tr a nce h as been a cco m plished .

I n the s a m e tribes n ow if the in ten tion is to spe a k of a person enterin g

,

the gesturer s o w n lo d ge the righ t h a nd i s p a ssed u nder the left and

,

tow ard the body n e a r which the left h a n d i s held ; if of a person en ter
,

i n g the lodge of a n o t her the left h an d i s held further f r o m the body an d

,

the righ t is p a ssed under i t a n d ou tw a rd I n both c a ses both h an d s are .

sli gh tly c ur ved a n d com pressed .

glidin g m ove m en t o f the extended h a nd , n gers j oi ned b ac k s up ,

A ,

dow n w a rd then a scen din g indic ative o f the s toopin g an d resu m ption
, ,

of th e u pri ght positi on i n en terin g the s am e ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

S i gn f o r L o dge, the left h a nd bein g still i n posi tion u sed in m ak

i ng si gn for L o dge ; ( 2 ) foren ger an d thu m b o f righ t h an d brought
 173

to a poin t an d thrust through th e outlin e of an i m agi n ary lodge r e p re

sen t ed by the l e f t h and ( Chey enne I ) . .

First m ak e th e sign f o r L o d g e the n pl a ce t h e left h an d , horizont al an d,

s l igh tly a rc h e d , before the body a nd p a ss th e right h a n d with exten ded ,

index n g e r undern ea th the left forw a rd a n d slightly upw ard beyon d

-

it ( Da ko ta V ; A bsa r o ka I ; S hm h o m a nd B a n a k I ; Wy a ndo t I )
'

.
. .

L eft h a n d en ds of n gers tow a rd the ri gh t st a tion ary i n fron t ,

of th e left bre a st ; p ass the right h an d di rectly an d q ui ck ly o u t fro m

the bre a st u n der the st ati on a ry left h a n d en d i n g w ith the exten d ed ,

n gers o f th e righ t h an d poi n tin g ou tw a rd an d sli gh tly d own w ard ,

j oined p al m dow n w ard at Il o r izo ut al ( W ) ( Da ko ta I ) G one u nder ;
, ,
'

. .

covered .

Th e left h a n d p a l m down w a rd n g e r tips f orw ard either q uite ex ,

-

tended o r w ith th e n gers sli gh tly b e n t i s held before the body Then ,
.

t h e ri ght h a n d n e arly or qui te extended p a l m do wn w a rd n g e r tip s , ,

-

ne a r t h e left thu m b a nd poin tin g tow ards it i s p assed tr an sversely

, ,

u n der th e le f t h a n d a n d on e to four i nche s below i t

. Th e n gers o f the .

ri gh t h an d poin t sli gh t ly up w a rd when the m otion is co m pleted Thi s .

sign u su a lly bu t n ot in v a ri a bly refers to en t erin g a hou se ( M a ndan

, , .
-

a nd H ida tsa I ) .

Pl a ce the s l igh tly curved left h and p al m down before the bre a st , , ,

poin ti n g t o the ri ght the n p ass the a t ri gh t h an d p al m d ow n in a

, , ,

short c u rve forw a rd u nd e r an d upw ard beyon d th e left ( Ute I ) E vi

, . .

d e n t l y fro m the m an ner i n w hich a person i s ob l i ged to stoop in enter

in g a n ordin a ry In d i an lo d ge .

ovin g a w ay a
M .

H old t h e h a n d s a s for L o d g e a nd pu sh th e m forw ard a foot or

ei ghteen in ches ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

ov i n g thi s w ay a
M .

H old the h an d sz a s in the si gn

. f or L o dge an d dr a w the m tow ar d you .

( Da ko ta I V ) .

T ak in g down a .

M a k e the sign f o r L o d g e a nd quic k ly thro w the h an d s outw ard , at

the s am e ti m e openin g al l of the n gers ( Dako ta IV ) . .

G re a t coun cil .

M e th e s ign for L o d g e ; th en p l a ce both h an d s so m ewh a t ben t ,

ak

p al m s fa cin g ab out ten in ches ap art a n d p a ss the m u pw ard from the ,

w ai st as hi gh as the face ( H ida tsa l Ar ika r a I ) . .

 174

L o i te r . T o g a d , d a wd l e .

The h a n d is hel d as i n the si gn f o r W h i t e t a i l e d D e e r but the -

,

tip of the i ndex n g e r is m ad e to describe lines of t w o o r m ore feet in

-

len gth fro m side to side an d to do thi s the w hole ar m m ust be m oved , .

( M an dan a n d t a tsa I ) .

L o n g , in exten t . _ Se e B i g in the sen se of L on g .

L o n g , in ti m e . Se e T i m e .

L o o k "S e e "
Touch the ri gh t eye with the i ndex a nd poi nt it outw a rd .
( B ur to n )

Fore an d m iddle ngers of ri ght h a nd exten ded pl a ced n e a r t o ,

the eyes poin tin g outw a rd an d ( 2 ) thrust w i th a sli ght dow n w a rd

, ,

curved m otion q uic k l y for w a rd t o war d t h e obj ect to be seen o r loo k ed

'

at ( Ch ey e nne I )
. .

I n cl uded in T k , S e e i n g , wi th the
o loo a ddition of th e sign for
A t te n ti o n m ade rst ( Da ko ta I ) . .

L oo k, to . S ee in g .

Fore an d secon d n gers right h a n d ( N ) brought to the level o f the

e y es exten ded n gers poin tin g o ut wa rd b ack of h a n d up w ard , hori
, ,

z o n ta l is then c a rried directly out w a rd on th e s am e level w ith a slight

,

to an d f r o or sidewise m otion o f the n gers M any S iou x In di a ns u se

- -

bo t h h a nd s in m ak i ng th is sign with onl y the foren ger o f e a ch extended .

( D a ko t a I )
Turnin g the eyes in look in g
. .

Deaf -
m a te n a tu r a l sig ns Poin t to so m ethin g an d str a in the eye tow ard
it , a cco m p a n ied by an expression of co m m and .
( Ba ll a r d )

the open h a nd o n the shoulder or the h a n d o r the ar m o f so m e

P ut , ,

body ( w h en this body a sk s wh a t ) ; poi n t with the foren ger o f the other
h a nd to so m ethin g v al u able to l oo k a t noddin g the he a d , so as to c a use ,

h i m to loo k a t it an d then to lift u p the eyes to w ard i t

, ( H asenstab ) . .

K eep
the eyeli ds m ore open t h an u su al , a n d the n pu t the forenger
tow ard o n e of the eyes a nd quick ly stretch an d k eep it in a str a ight
'

li ne fro m the s am e eye ( L ar so n) .

Pl a ce
the foren ger on the eye a nd then point w ith i t as if to poi n t to
so m ethin g ( Zeig ler ) . .

L oo k i n g g l a ss -
. See M i r r o r .

L os t .

The ri ght h an d is brou ght i n fron t o f bre a st , p a l m outw a r d ( T , w ith

l eft h a n d p al m n e ar thu m b o f ri ght ) , right is m oved forw ard at the s am e
 175

ti m e t h e l e f t i s m oved b a ck tow a rd righ t shoulder in obli q ue up w ard

'

position with p a l m t o ri ght ( Ch eye nne I I ) The right is the object . .

dis appe arin g fro m view til l lost The left ob structs the sight . .

U se the s a m e h an d a n d m o t ion s as in C r a z y , describe r a pidly e n

l ar g i n g circles then reverse m otion s of circles
,
Poi n t in di ff eren t di .

rection s an d a ga in r epe a t th e circles aroun d the he a d from ri ght to left

w ith righ t h a n d ( Oj ib wa I V ) . .

H ol dthe left h an d a t w ith the p a l m dow n w a rd abou t twelve in ches

, ,

before the chest , t h e n p a ss the right a t an d exten ded , fo rw ard u n der ,

the left an d up w ard beyon d i t tow ard the left ( Ka to w a I ; Co ma nche ,

.

I II ; Ap ache I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

L o ve ,
or A ff e c tio n .

The clinched h and pressed h ard upon the bre a st .

( L o ng )
Pan to m i m ic e m br a ce ( Ar ap a ho I ) . .

B oth h a nd sclosed ri ght sligh tly abov e the left a nd brought up in

,

front of a n d a slight d i st an ce fro m t h e bre a st and h u gged to m iddle of ,

bre a st left h an d bel ow th e righ t ( Chey enn e I ) The e m br a ce

,
. . .

S am e as A d m i r a t i o n ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Cross t h e fore ar m s ne ar the w rists on the upper p art of the chest ,

h and s closed b a ck s forw a rd ( Da ko ta IV )

,
. .

H ug both h an d s to the boso m as i f cl aspin g som ethin g aff ection ately .

( Wi ch ita I ) .

Deaf m a te na t ur a l sig n K iss your h a n d a nd poi nt to the he a rt , with

-

a h appy s m ile ( Cr o ss ) . .

I t a li a n sig n Pl a ce the open h a n d over the he a rt .

( Ba t ten )

M a l e ( a pplied to a n i m a ls ) .

M ak e a l l ip with foren ger of righ t h a nd on the chee k .

( Dunbar )
Ri ght h a n d b a c k upw a rd , foren ger poin tin g outw a rd an
.
, d u pw a rd ,
elev ated to fron t o f person , an d m otioned once o r twice up an d dow n .

( C hey enn e I ) .

Sam e as M a le, a pplied to m an .

( Da ko ta I ) . Fro m the m ale orga n
of gener a tion .

A pplied t o m an .

Ri gh t h an d closed , thrust throu gh the left h and , wh ich t hen cl asps

the w ri sts very sli gh t up an d down m otion m ade ( Ch ey enne I )
,
- -
. .

A n other : Right h a n d closed , held in obli q uely erect position , left h a n d

loo sely cl a spin g it an d rubbed up an d dow n from the k n uck les to th e
upper p art o f the forear m ( Cheyenne I ) . .
 17 6

A nother Righ t h a n d n gers a n d thu m b brough t to a poin t a n d

: -

thrust through the left h an d , w hi ch then cl a sps the wri st as be f ore ;

sl igh t up w a rd m otion m ad e ( C h ey enne I ) . .

L efth and foren ge str ai ght poi ntin g b a c k w ard a n d u pw ard ; fore
-
r
,

n ger o f the righ t h a n d l a id a cross the b a c k of the left see m in gly to ,

isol ate a n d len gthen o ut th e foren ger o f the left h a nd ( C hey enne .

S i gn f o r S q u a w followed by th at
,
of N e g a t i ve . A lso , S i gn for
M a l e a pplied to a n i m al s .
( Ar ap a h o I)
.

The exten de d foren ger of the right h an d ( of wh ich the oth er s are
closed ) i s l a id i n the crotch fi n ger poi n tin g d ow n w a rd b a c k o f h a nd
, ,

upw ard ( Da ko ta I )
. .

A pplied to m a n n i m a ls
an d a .

Deaf nn u te n a tur a l sig n T ak e h old of the p a nts ,

at th e sam e ti m e
sh ak e the m .
( Zeig ler ) .

M a n .

W ith the forenger of the ri gh t h a n d exten ded an d the h a n d shut , ,

describe a line begin n i n g a t the p it o f t h e sto m a ch a nd p assin g dow n

, ,

the m iddle o f the body a s f ar as th e h and conveniently re aches , holdin g

the h a nd a m o m en t between the lo wer ex tre m i ties ( Dunba r ) .

A n ger held vertic ally .

( L o ny ) .

E lev a te th e in dex n g e r an d t u rn the h an d h ither an d thither

-

( Wi ed ) I h a ve seen only the si gn of th e erect n ger w ithou t the m o .

tion s to whi ch he refers ( M a tth e ws ) The turnin g of the h a nd hithe r

.

a n d th ither prob a bly w a s to con vey m ore th a n th e si m ple ide a o f m an .

It m i gh t h a ve m e an t only o ne m a n , or th a t a m a n w as a lo ne .

A n ger directed tow a rd the p ubis .

( il l a cy o wa n
' -

.
)
H old the in dex -
n g e r erect before the fa ce .
( Do dge )
Gener al ly , sig n as a S io u x a C heye n ne , etc i s un derstood to re
a ny ,
.
,

fer to th e m a le un less t h e sign for a Squa w o r Wo ma n follow s ( A r a

,
.

p a ho I ) .

Righ t h a n d p al m in w ard , elev ated to a bout th e level of the bre ast ,

-

foren ger c arelessly poi n ti n g up w ard sudden ly poi nted str ai ght up ,
.

w ard , a n d the w hole h an d m o ved a li ttle forw a rd at the s a m e ti m e ,

t ak in g c are t o k eep the b a ck of the h an d t o w ar d t h e person a ddressed

'

( Chey enn e I ) .

The ri ght h a n d is held in fron t o f the ri ght bre ast with the foren ger
extended , str a i ght u pright ( J ) , wi th the b ack o f th e h a n d ou tw a rd ;
m ove the h a n d up w a rd an d do w n w ard w ith n ger exten ded , etc This .
 177

is ge n er al . W hite m an h as a speci a l si gn , also negro , an d e ach tribe

of Indi a n s .
( Da ko ta I ) .

Fi rst the extended ri gh t i nd ex , poin tin g for w ard , b a ck upw a rd , is

,

to be pl ace d h orizon t ally i n f r en t of the p ri v ates o r a little higher a nd

-

, ,

the h an d sudden ly lowered a bout a n i nch Then c a rry the h a nd ( i n dex .

still extended ) to the righ t a nd upw a rd thr ou gh an arc , an d brin g it u p

ri gh t to a position a foot o r so i n fron t of the righ t shoulder i ts b a ck ,

forw ard , a n d th e index poin tin g upw a rd an d sudden ly m ove i t forw a rd ,

a n i n ch o r so While m ak in g these m ove m en ts the m iddle , rin g a n d

.
,

little ngers ar e to be closed a n d the thu m b a g ai n st the m iddle n ger .

( D a ko ta I V )
M a le o n e.

.

E le v a te
the e x te n d e d i n d e x before the ri ght cheek a nd throw ,
th e
h a n d forw ard , k eepi n g the p al m tow a rd the body ( Da ko ta V I ) . .

Pl a ce
the exten ded i ndex poi n ti ng up w a rd ,
an d for w a rd befor e the
,

lower portion o f t h e a bdo m en ( Da ko ta V I I ) . .

The ri ght h an d in the posi tion o f a n i ndex h a nd , poin tin g upw a rd is -

held a fe w inches i n fron t o f the abdo m en or chest the outer ed ge of ,

the h an d bein g u su a lly forw a rd ( M a n da n and t a tsa I ) . .

The left ar m is elev a ted an d th e h a nd in type posi tion ( S 1 horizon , ,

t al ) is dr a wn a cross before the body o n a level with the shoulder

,
The .

right ar m i s then r aised a n d exten ded before the body w i th the h a n d i n ,

posi tion ( J m ore st ify extended ( O to a n d M isso ur i I )

A bein g . .

w ith proj ectin g sexu a l org a n .

R aise the closed h a n d w ith the i ndex on ly extended an d elev a ted

, ,

poi n tin g u p w ard to the front o f the right bre a st ( chee k o r shoulder )
k eepin g the b a c k of the h an d t o the front ( Ka to wa I ; Co m a n ch e III .

Ap a ch e I I ; Wtcht ta I I )
'

The fore n ger o f ei ther h an d i s brou gh t before the body poin ti n g ,

up

w ard ( Pa i Ute I )
. .

Pa ss
the extended right h and dow n w ard f orw ard a nd up w ard from ,

the hi p then l ay the extended foren ger a cross the b ack o f the right
,

w rist I
(Ue )
.t
M a le geni t a l org
. a n a n d len gth o f
.

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig n s Put the h a n ds the legson an d dr a w the
h ands up
,
in i m it a tion of the act of puttin g on a p a ir of p an t aloon s .

( Ba l la r d )
S tretchup the open h a n d over the he a d , indic a t in g the gener a l height
o f the m a n ; n ext u se both h a nd s a s if to stro k e the h e ar d o r the m u s

t a ch e a nd then n od the he ad ( H a sensta b)

,
.

M ak e the m otion of t ak in g the h at fro m the he ad " ( L ar so n )

23
 178

O ld .
( C o m p are O l d ) .

H old the right h a nd be nt a t elbow , ngers a nd th u m b cl osed side

,

w ise ( Chey enn e I ) O ld a g e depen d e n t o n a staff It is m a de m ore

. . .

e m ph atic by a totter i n g step .

P l a ce t h e right extended index poi n tin g for w a rd b a c k up w ard h ori , , ,

z o n t a l l y i n fr on t o f t h e pri v a tes an d sudde nly lo wer th e h a n d a bout an

,

i nch , a s for M a n ; the n m ove the ri ght rst , its b ack ou tw a rd fro m ,

twel ve inches i n fron t o f th e right bre a st , forw ard an d b ac k w ard t wo

or three ti m es about a foot describin g a n ellipsis perpe n d icu l a r to t he
,

groun d ( Dako ta IV )
. Progression o f a m an w ith a staf f
. .

Pl a cethe cl osed right h a n d in fron t of an d as high a s the elbow , le a v

i n g the in dex curved an d poin tin g to w a rd the groun d If the m a n is .

v ery a ged c a u se the h a n d t o tre m bl e a t the s a m e ti m e t h e gesture is

,

m a de ( Dak o ta V II )
. .

Ri ght h a nd closed foren ger sli ghtly curved , h a nd held before th e

,

body o r ri gh t hi p p a l m dow n a ll a win g the foren ger to droop to ward

, ,

the groun d ( Co ma nch e II )

. For m a position of the a cci d gl a n s p e
.

n i s of an old m an

.

C lose the right h a nd poin ting for w ard fro m the body , p al m dow n ,
,

th en p artly exten d the i ndex the tip poi nti n g tow a rd the groun d ; ,

the lo wer the h an d i s held an d the m ore the i n dex is croo k ed , the gre ater
th e ag e of the in d ivnl ua l ( Ute I ) Cur ved a nd accid gl a n s pe ni s of

. .

an a ged in divid u a l

.

Touch teeth ; m ak e the si g n f o r N e g a t i o n ; touch h a ir ; touch w hite

ten t [ sic] ( Ap a ch e III ) Tooth less a n d wh ite h air e t
. . .
,

Youn g .

With the right h a n d index o nly exten ded , pl a ce the h a nd a short d is

,

t a n ce in fron t o f the hip a t the hei ght o f th e elbo w pointin g up w ard at ,

an a n gle o f about 2 00 p a l m to the left C o m an ch e I I ) Tenden cy of

( ,
. .

erection i n a you n g m an .

M ar ch i n g . Se e G o i n g .

M arriage .

There is n o m a rri a ge cere m ony w ith t h e S iou x Indi a n s , an d cou se

q uen tly n o si gn design atin g m arri age , an d it can only be expressed
by C o m p a n i o n ( Da ko ta .

M ar r ied , to m arr y .
( C o m p are S a m e , Sim ilar ) .

The h a nds ar e pl a ced in front , the ar m s pron ated , an d the exten ded
f o r e n g e r s ( the others bein g exed ) are pl aced in co n t a ct side by side .

( M a nda n and t a tsa I ) .

 I7 9

Close both h a nds excep t the t wo f o r en g e r s a n d pl a ce the m side by

, ,

side poin tin g forw a rd i n fron t of the bre a st ( I r o quo is I ) T his sig n
, ,
. .

expresses m a ted al so h usban d o r wif e ,

.

Bri n g the t w o f o r e n g e r s side by side h ands pron a ted ,

.
( Zwi i I ) .

I ta li a n sig n Preten d to p ut a ri n g on the rin g n ger o r lay the t wo

.
-

f o r e n g e r s together si de by side ; yet thi s l a st is m ore co m m only used

of an y un i on or h ar m ony .

M a tc h .

Asth ough stri k i n g a m a tch on the p a l m of the left h an d held in front

o f bre a st wi th th e righ t h a n d
,
.
( Da ko t a

Fro m the ac t of stri kin g
a m a tch

.

H old the left h a nd before t h e body extended a nd poin tin g tow ard ,

the ri ght p al m dow n then pl a ce the tip o f the th u m b o f the righ t

, ,

h an d a g ai nst th e i n dex a nd secon d n ger an d p ass the m quic k ly alon g

the inn er ed ge of the left h a n d fro m the wrist forw ard as if li ghtin g a
m a tch ( Ka im ca l ; Co ma n che I l l ; S h o sh o ni a nd B a na k I ; Ute I ;
.

A p a ch e I I I ; Wichi ta II )
,
.

M e d ici n e .
( C o m p a re D o c t o r ) .

C arry t h e righ t h a n d i n p ositio n as thou gh holdin g a bottle in fron t

of the m outh an d then ti p it up as though drin k in g fro m th e bottle
, .

( Da ko t a I )

Drin k in g m .edic i n e fro m a bottle 7
.

The left h a nd w ith the a r m se m i exten ded is held with the b a c k -

u p w a rd before t h e body The extended i ndex of the right h a n d .

then rubs on the b a c k o f the left as th e m ixin g o f m edici ne o n a pill ,

.

tile Both h a nds w i th the fi n gers a s i n ( Q ) , ar e then held tre m blin gly
.
,

before the body s sides The exten ded i ndices next co m press the t e m

.

ples an d t h e coun ten a nce a ssu m es an a ppe ar an ce of distre ss For .

m edicine to in duce sleep quiet cough chec k ow of blood o r purge , , , ,

th e si gn s a ppropri a te to the l a tter cond iti on s o r w ord s ar e conj oined .

sso ur i I ) o ethin g sti rred up for i n w rd distres

( O to a nd zl l i S m
'
a
. s ?

Deaf ma te n a tu r a l sig n U se the sig n for

-

.
.
S ick, I l l , an d then the
S i gn for D r i n k ( Ze ig le r ) . .

In In di a n sen se ( C o m p are I n d i a n D o c t o r S h a m a n )
.
, .

S tir w i th the ri ght h a nd i nto the left an d a fterw a rd blo w i nto the ,

l a tter ( Wied ) There i s a si m il arity in the execution of the ( O to a n d M is

.

so ur i I ) si gn a n d Wi ed s sign The stir r in g in the left in ste ad o f on it s

.

b ack as i n the for m er m ay be a m a tter of c a price It i s prob able th a t the .

concl usive blowi n g in to the h a n d i n the l a tte r is to add m ystery as i n ,

the m a gi ci a n s trick ( Bo telem A l l person s fam i li a r w ith the Indi ans

.

w ill u nderst an d th a t the ter m m edicine , foolishly en ough a dopted by

 1 80

both Fren ch a nd E n glish to express the abori g in al m a gic a rts , h as n o

th er apeutic si gnic an ce Very few e ven pretended re m edies were ad
.

m in istered to t h e n ati ves an d prob ably n ever by t h e profession a l

sh am a n , wh o w or k ed by i nc a nt a tion often pul verizin g and m i xin g the ,

subst a n ces m ystic a lly u se d , to preven t their detec t ion The s a m e m ix .

tu res were e m ployed i n di vin ation The a uth or p a rticul a rly m en tion s .

Ma nd a n cere m on ies in w hi ch a wh ite

,

m edicin e
ston e as h a rd as ,

pyri tes , w as prod uced by rubbin g in th e h an d sn ow or t h e w hite f e ath ,

ers o f a bird The blowin g a w ay of the di se a se , considered to be intro

.

d u ce d by a s u pern atur al power foreign t o th e bo d y w a s a co m m on p art ,

of the j uggli n g perfor m a n ce .

The righ t i n dex is poi nted to w ard the groun d i n sever a l d i ff eren t di
rect i on s i n fron t of t h e body a nd t h en th e oth er n gers a n d thu m b ar e
-

exten ded a n d the h a n d c arried fro m t h e m edi a n lin e of the body w ith
,

a gr adu ally d ecre asi n g spir al m otion t o d irectly over th e he ad , w h ere

th e h an d poin ts u pright edge o f h a n d tow ard th e fron t ( Da ko ta

,
.

M ysterious hen ce s a cred ; power of her b s over di se a se

, .

M e d ici n e M an . Sh a m an .
( Co m p a re D o c t o r ) .

Thi s double si gn is m a de w ith the ri gh t h an d describin g m an rst ,

.

B rin g h a nd up to fron t of ri gh t s h oulder , foren ger str ai gh t u prigh t

(J , p a l m i n w a rd ) ; m ove for w a rd , then brin g i t up fron t of fa ce w i th rst

an d secon d n gers str a ight a n d u p w a rd , sep ar a ted ( N p a l m i n w ard ) ,
.

The n m a k e three o r four m oves in a ci rcle wi th the h an d i n th a t position .

The ar m is no t necess a rily m oved only the h an d fro m w rist up ( Ch ey , .

enne I I ) The m edicin e si gn as m ad e , supposed to represen t sin gin g

.

a n d sh a k in g th e w a n d i n i n c a n t a tion s

.

M ak e sh ak in g a nd short j er k i n g m otion s of the body w ith ar m s an d ,

h an ds j er k in g a nd ngers poi n tin g to an d around he ad , n eck a n d body , ,

wi th w ild gesture s an d distorted fe a ture s also short q ui verin g steps , ,

th e toes sc a rcely le a vi n g the grou nd , a n d wild sh a k es o f the he ad .

( Oj i bwa IV ) .

Fir st m ak e th e si gn f er Da ko ta I n di a n s ( S e e T R I B AL S IG N S ) , ( or any
other tribe a s m ay be desired ) , then the si gn for M a n , an d then th e
,

ri gh t h an d with fore an d in dex n gers exten ded poin tin g upw a rd oth ers , ,

closed ( N ) i s c arried fro m th e p arti ally exten ded posi tion of t h e h a n d

,

o n co m pletin g the si g n for M a n , up w a rd , wi th a sp ir al m o ti on directly

'

a bove the he ad (D a ko ta I )
. .

With its i ndex ng e r exten ded an d poi nti n g up w a rd o r al l the nger s

-

exten ded b a ck o f h a n d o u tw a rd m ove the ri gh t h a n d fr o m j u st i n fr on t

, ,

o f the foreh e a d spir a lly u pw a rd n e arly to arm s len gth fro m left to ri ght

, , , ,

i n the opposi te d irection to the si gn f o r F o o l an d C l a z y ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

 1 81

E lev a te rot ate the extended index before the forehe ad

an d .
( Da
ko ta V I ; H ida tsa I ; A r i ka r a I ) .

R ub the ri gh t chee k w ith the p al m ar surfa ce of th e exten ded n gers

o f the righ t h a n d the n rub th e b a c k o f the closed left h a n d with the
,

index a n d secon d n gers of the right an d conclude by holdin g the left ,

h a n d before th e face t h e in dex a n d secon d n gers only extended a n d

,

sep ar a ted p a ss i t u pw a rd an d for w ard before the fa ce rot a tin g it in

, ,

so doin g the rota tion occurrin g a t the wrist ( Ka io u a I Co m anche I II ;

,
.

Ap ache 1 1 ; Wichi ta II ) .

Poin t to herbs or pl an ts at a short dist a nce fro m the body ; i m i t ate

the poundin g u p of the s a m e in a vessel w ith the ri gh t h a nd u sin g the ,

left a s if holdin g o n e then m ak e the si gn o f t o E a t ( Ap a che I ) The

, . .

prep a r ation o f pl a n ts or herbs for in tern al a d m in istr a tion

.
.

M ee t, T o . ( Co m p a re L o dge ) .

Brin g the exten ded f o r e n g e rs fro m either sid e , a llow the tips to
co m e to gether before the body k eepin g the w ri sts a bou t six in ches ,

a p a rt ( Ko i o w a I ; Co m a n che I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta I I )

. . .

M e lo n .

Fin gers of the ri gh t h a nd sep arated an d curved ; pl a ce the p al m about

ten or twelve inches fro m the ground n gers poin tin g for wa rd a n d p as s , ,

i t forw a rd i n an upw a rd curve correspondi n g to the elon g a ted a n d con

,

vex for m o f a m el on ( Ka io w a I ; Co m anche III ; Ute I ; Ap a che I II

.
,
"

Wi ch ita II ) .

M er cy .

E xten dbot h f o r e n g e r s, poin tin g up w ard p a l m s to w a rd the bre a st , ,

an d hold the h a n ds before the chest ; th en dr a w the m i n w a rd to w a rd

th eir respective sides a n d p as s th e m upw a rd as hi gh as the sides o f the

,

he a d by either cheek ( Ka io wa I ; Co m a nch e I II ; Ap ache I I ; Wichi ta I I )

. .

On oth er To h a ve
n a ,
.

H old b oth h a nds n e a rly si de by side before the chest p a l m s forw ard , ,

foren ger on l y exten ded and poin tin g upw a rd ; then m ove the m f o r
,

w a rd an d up w a rd a s if p a ssi n g th e m by the cheek s of a n other person

,

f o m the bre a st to the sides of the he ad ( Ka to w a I ; Co m an che III ;

r .

Ap ach e I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

M e xi ca n lso T R I B AL S IG N S )
.
( Se e a .

Right h a n d ( V ) b a c k outw ard is held with n gers pointin g dow n

, , ,

w a rd , at the chin ( D a ko ta I )
.

Fro m the we a rin g o f a be a rd
. The .

Si ou x say th e M exic a n s are the o nly Indi n s th t we r be rd

a a a a a .

ove the ri gh t h a n d in a sm a ll c ircle fro m right to left bene ath the

M
chin , p a l m up w ard n gers se m ie xe d , thu m b a g a inst i n dex ( Da ko ta
,
.

IV ) . Fro m the be a rd o n the chi n of the r st they sa w

.
 1 82

Pl a cethe ri ght h a nd a bout three in ches below the chin , wrist tow ard
th e n ec k a n d k n uck les for w ard p al m u p curve the spre ad n gers an d , ,

thu m b so th at the tip s a re all d i rected to one poin t ; the n w or k the

n gers an d th u m b at the secon d j oin ts as if scratchi n g, b u t k eep the
p al m m otionless ( Ka to w a I ; Co manche I I I ; Ap ache II ; Wi chi ta I I )
. .

W hi s k ers .

Pa ss the at righ t h an d across the chee k s and ch i n fro m ear to e ar

an d fro m left to righ t ( Ute I ) . .

E xten d t h m bs u an d f o r e n g e r s widely a bout he a d , a few i n ches fro m

the he ad .
( Ap ache III ) .

Wh o we a r h ats wi th m oder a tely bro a d
bri m s .

M ine, M y p ro p er ty . Se e P o sse ssi o n .

M ir r o r .

The p al m of th e h a n d h eld before th e face the n gers poin ti n g ,

up w ard .

Pl a ce both p al m s before the face ,

an d a d m i re you r coun ten a n ce i n
the m .
( B u r to n )
Ri ght h a n d ( S ) held in fron t of the fa ce , h a n d and he ad turned as
.

thou gh look in g at di ff ere n t p a rts o f the face ( Dako ta I ) Fro m the . .

u se o f a loo k in g gl a ss -

.

The erect exten ded ri gh t h a n d , p al m b a ck w ard is held befo re the ,

face at abou t the d ista nce a m irror w ould be held , an d the g a ze is

,

directed tow ard the p al m ( M andan a n d H ida tsa I ) . .

The left ar m i s elev a ted a nd se m i extended ; the h a n d is then i n posi -

tion ( W ) m odi ed by bein g , p a l m up held before t h e fa ce a n d th e eye s

, ,

in ten tly d irected as loo k i n g therei n ( O to a nd M isso uri I ) The ord i . .

n ary h an d m irror used a m on g the Indi an s

-

Deaf -
m a te na tur a l sig n O utline the sh ape with th e t w o
of a m irror
the f o r e n g e r s in th e air ,
then pl a ce the h and before the fa ce a nd x
eye upon it ( Bel la r d ) .
-

M i se r ( a gripin g m an ) ( Co m p are P e n u r i o u s ) . .

I ta lia n sig ns It a li a n s express th i s ide a by a doubled st , w ith the

n gers curled very close in the p a l m ; also with the st dr awn r m ly
to w ard on e with n ger s S pre ad l i k e cl a ws an d cl utch in g ( B a tten )
,
.

M o d e st y .

I ta li a n sign C over the eyes with the n ger s of one h an d dr a wn

a p art .
( B utl er )
 1 83

M o ne y ( m et allic ) .

Wi t h the right h a n d poin t do w n wa rd to wa rd a piece o f m eta l a n d ,

then c a rry it to the left h a nd held i n fron t of the body h orizont a lly with ,

p al m upw a rd ( X ) a s though p u t tin g the piece of m et a l i n i t a n d t h en ,

with the edge o f the n gers of the closed right st ( A 1 ) pound i n the
p a hn of the left ( Da ko ta . Th is is sh apin g the m et al in to coi n s .

Pa per .

Poi n t t o piece of p a per wi th the ri gh t h a nd an d t h en w i th i t m ak e

a ,

the si gn for W r i t i n g over the left h a n d h eld in fron t of the left bre a st
.

wi th the th u m b a nd foren ger describi n g a se m icircle wi th the free en d s ,

poi nti n g dow n w ard other ngers cl osed ( Da ko ta I ) Thi s indic ates
, . .

m o n e v w ith writin g o n it .

M o o n or M o n th .

The thu m b a nd n gers a re elev ated to ward the r ight e ar Thi s .

S i gn is gen er a lly preceded by the sign for N i g h t or D a r k n e ss

( Dun bar )
M ak e the si g n for Sun ,
a fter h a vin g m ade t h at f o r N ig h t . Wi ed ) .

Co m b ine signs f o r N i g h t an d S u n To disti n gui sh fro m the st ar s .

o r a s t a r , i nd ic a te rel a tive a pp aren t sizes ( Ar ap a ho I ) . .

The right h an d closed le a vi n g the thu m b a nd i n dex exte n ded but

, ,

curved to for m a h a lf circle a nd hol d the h an d to wa rd t h e sk y ne a rer

,

the e a stern horizon th a n zen i th ( A bsa r o ka I ; H ida tsa I ; Wy an do t I ;

.
_

A r i/ca m I ; S h osho ni an d B a n a k I ; Ute I ) .

First m ak e the sign f o r N i g h t , an d then the si g n for the Sun .

( Da k I) N i ght sun or l u m in a ry

o ta . .

First m ak e the sign for M o o n a nd then the righ t i n dex is held

'

upright in fron t of the body to in dic ate o n e ( Dako ta I ) . .

Sa m e for S u n but i nste ad of the sign for Da y m ak e the one

as ,

for N i g h t For Q u a r t e r m o o n an d H a l f m o o n the en ds o f the

.
- -

i ndex an d th u m b ar e k ept a bout fo ur i nches a p art ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

Sam e for S u n except th a t the tips of the n ger an d thu m b

as
, ,

in ste a d of bein g opposed a r e approxi m a ted so as to represen t a cres

,

cent ( M a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )

. .

E xtend the curved i ndex an d thu m b so a s t o for m a cresce n t close ,

the re m a in in g ngers , a n d r a i se the h a n d tow ard the sk y w ith the outer ,

edge of the h a n d forw ard ( Ka io wa I ; Co manche I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wi

.

c h i ta II ).

The in dex and thu m b are curved so as to for m a h alf circle the re m ain ,

in g n ger s closed ( Ap ache I ). .

 1 84

M ak e cresent with th u m b an d in dex , proj ect i t tow a rd the w estern

"

horizon , and by successive j erk s c arry the s a m e t o zen i th . ( Ap a che I II ) .

N e w m oon rst seen a bove western h orizon see n e ach n i ght succes
~

sive l y hi gher tow a rd zen i th

.

Deaf m a te na tu r a l sign M ove the h a n d in a curved li ne f ro m the

-

settin g t o th e ri sin g of the sun a nd turn t h e fore n ger ou tstretch ed ,

.

, ,

a roun d a n d a round l i k e a wheel ( L a r so n ) .

Close the ri ght h a nd exte nd a nd curve the in dex an d th u m b so th a t,

th ey for m a h alf ci rcle then h old the h an d tow a rd th e e a stern horizon .

( Ute I .
)
Full .

Re a ch o u t both a rm s as i f huggin g a tree then ,

m ak e the sign for
M oon ( Ute I ) . .

M ak e crescen t w ith th u m b a nd i ndex proj ect s a m e t o wester n hori

a ,

horizon an d by sever a l successive j er k s fro m we st to e a st ch a nge crescen t

,

to circle ; hold a t e a ster n horizon ; retrogr a de to w ard the west w it h a

few less d ist inc t j e rk s ( Ap a che I II ) A pp a ren t l u n a r course
. . .

M onth .

S i gn for M o on ,
a nd p a ssed a cross the he a ven s fro m e ast to west .

( Ap a ch e I ) .

Deaf -
m a te n a tu ra l sig ns M ak e a zi gz a g m otion i n the air with the
foren ger .
( Ba l lar d ) .

M ove t h e n ger in a zi gz a g wa y .
( L ar son )
-
.

M o re . S ee A d d .

M o rn in g . S ee E as t .

M o th er . See R e l a t i o n sh i p .

M o un ta in .
( C o m p are H i l l ) .

utli ne i ts proj ection a ga in st the sk y with the h a nd to w hich

O m ay be
a dded si gn f o r H i g h a s a h ill ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Right h an d ( A 1 ) to the left side o n level of the face is dra w n in fron t

of the fa ce to the righ t side on th e s am e level w here i t i s held f o r a ,

m o m ent ( Da ko ta I )

.A hei gh t or m ount a in directly i n fron
. t
.

S tri k e
the p a l m of the left h an d wi th the b a ck o f the righ t st p a l m ,

of left h a n d b a ck w a rd ; close the left h a n d , turnin g it s b a ck outw a rd .

a nd r ai se the ri gh t st two feet above it , an d then m ake the sign for

( Dako ta
,

L arge . IV .
)
 1 85

Pl a ceboth h an ds , a t an d exten ded , th u m b to th u m b w ith p a l ms ,

down w ard , i n fron t of a n d as hi gh as the he a d ; then p a ss the m outw a rd

an d down w a rd tow a rd their respecti ve sides describin g the upper h alf
,

o f a circle a n d brin g the m b a c k to the poin t of st a rti n g

, ( Wy a nd o t I ) . .

Pl a ce
th e a t a nd extended left h a nd ed gewise before the fa ce thu m b ,

restin g o n the foren ger , b ac k for w ard n ger tips pointin g to w a rd the ,
-

ri gh t ( Ute I )
. .

H oldboth h a nds up before t h e body as if m oldin g a m oun tai n ; thrust

h and o n edge , down w a rd over o t her h a n d in sever al d irection s; ( Ap a che
,

I II )
. C a o ns dow n i ts sides .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig ns U se one h a n d
to represen t a pl a ne so as

in cl ined up w a rd an d m ove the ot h er h a n d over an d a bove it ( Ba llar d )

, . .

M ove the outs tretched h a nd obl i q uely .

( Zeig l er ) .

Divide .

H old the left h a n d at an d extended before the fa ce n gers poi ntin g

, ,

tow a rd t h e righ t the tip o f t h e th u m b sligh tly tur ned up w a rd ; then

,

with the exten ded i ndex in dic a te t h e g a p over the left p al m again st the
b a se of th e p p t ur n e d j oin t o f the th u m b a l lowi n g the i ndex to go do wn ,

upon the b ack a short dist a n ce ( Ap a ch e I ) . .

Pa s s .

Pl a ce
the a t an d extended left h an d e d g e w ise before the bo d y , elev a te
the th u m b th us for m in g a crotch ; then p ass the in dex poi n ti n g over
, ,

the left h an d , between the thu m b an d forenger , fro m th e p a l m a r sid e

down over the b ack ( Ute I ) . .

R an ge .

M ak e the si gn f o r M o u n t a i n , h oldin g the h a n d a t v ar io u s points

con tin uously tow a rd the hor izon ( Ute I ) M oun t ain . .
,
an d contin u a
tion o f alon g the hori zon
,

.

M o ve , T o .

The only d i ff eren ce fro m M a r c h i n g , T r a v e l i n g con si sts i n ,

reversin g the directi on of the a rched m ove m ents of the h a nd s , brin gin g
the m tow ard t h e body in ste a d o f c arryi n g the m fro m the b ody ( Da .

ko ta I ) M ovin g tow a rd you

.

.

M u ch . S ee Q u a n ti t y .

M ud .

B oth sts pu she d altern a tely down w ard to the groun d sever a l ti m es
"

I
( K a i o wa ; C o m a n ch e III ; Ap ach e II ; Wi chi ta I I )
H
ors e s feet
.

.

24
 1 86

M ule , or A ss .

H ol d the open h a nds hig h beside the he ad , an d m ovethe m fro m b ac k

to fron t sever al ti m es l i k e wi n g s ( Wied ) . Thi s si g n is s till i n u se .

To denote the m ule or ass the lon g e a rs ar e i m it a ted by the i n dices

o n both sides an d ab o ve the he a d ( E u r to n ) .
-

h a n ds n ger s a n d th u m bs bro u gh t to a poin t pl aced by the

B o th -

, ,

side of the he a d hollo ws forw ard , m oved sl i ght l y b a ck w ard an d for

,

w a rd ( C h eye nne I )
. .

The h a nds ( T ) a t their respective sides o f the he a d m a k e m ove m en ts

rese m bli n g the oppin g of the m u le s e a rs ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Fro m the
m u le s h a bit of oppin g hi s e a rs

.

Move the opened u pri gh t h a n ds bac k a nd forth several ti m es above

th e e a rs ( Dako ta 1 V ) . .

P l a ce both at a nd exten ded h a nds to ei ther side of the he ad the ,

wri sts as hi g h as the e a rs then roc k th e h a nds to an d fro sever al ti m es

, ,

m ove m en t bein g m ade at the wrists ( U t e I ; Ap ach e I ) L a rge e a rs

. . .

Mur d e r .

I ta l i a n sig h P u sh the th um b a gai n st the he art with a stern l ook .

( Bu t ler )

Mu te
Pl a ce the extended a nd j oined n gers of the ri gh t h an d over the
cl osed l ips ( Ka io wa I C o m a nche I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta I I )
. .

Ne a r or So o n .

The h ands a re bro u ght before the body both in type p osi tion ( l l
m odied b y the st bein g a l ittl e m ore closed an d the i ndex a little m ore
exten ded ; the poi nts of indices then to u ch a n d ar e rot a ted together .

Spe a k in g o f ne ar fut ure , the rotary m ove m ent forw a rd i s exec u ted .

( O to I )

A ppro
. a chin g con t a ct
.

Deaf -
m a te na t ur a l sig ns M ove the foren ger fro m here to there a

short dist a n ce .
( Ba l l a r d )

U se the si gn for the s a m e ti m e poin t w ith the foren ger as

at

i f to so m ethi ng a t the feet a nd the n to so m ethi n g a t a short dist a nce .

( Zeig ler ) .

Ne g r o .
( C o m p are T R I B A L S I GN S .
)
First m ak e the si gn for W h i t e M a n then r ub the h air o n the righ t ,

side o f the he a d with the a t h a n d ( Wied ) The presen t co m m o n .

si gn f o r bl ac k is to r ub or to uch the h air , whi ch , am o n g d nd ian s ,

i s al m ost u n ivers al l y o f th a t col or .

 1 87

P l a ce the l eft fore ar m tr a n sversely before the body , h an d exte nded ,

a t p al m dow n th en p a ss the a t right h a n d dow n w ard fro m the l ower

, ,

portion of the bre ast for ward an d u p w ard ( for m in g a c urve ) ; then in
,

d ic ate a n y obj ect th a t h a s a bl a c k color ( A bsa r o ka I ; Sh osho ni a nd .

Ba n a k L iter al l y born bl a c k .

M e the si gn f o r W h i t e M a n then point a t a bl a c k obj ec t o r

ak , ,

r ub al on g the b a ck of the left h a n d w ith the n gers o f t h e right ( for

bl a c k ) ( Da ko ta I V )
. .

To u ch the h a ir wi th the ngers o f the righ t h a n d then r u b th e ,

th u m b a n d m iddle n ger together a s if sn a pping the m K i n k y h a i r . .

( Wy a ndo t I ) .

S weep the h a n d over th e h a ir ( W ) ; g a ther i t up i n n g e r -

tips ( U ,

with th u m b a dv a nced to ng e r tips ) ( Ap ache -

.

A n other : S weep the h a nd over th e fa ce ; then to u ch so m e b l a c k

obj ect .
( Ap a ch e III ) . K in k y h a ir 2
( ) Bl a c k fa ce
. .

Gr a sp
the h a ir between the th u m b a nd in dex ro l lin g i t se ver a l ti m es
,

between them ( Wichi ta I ) . .

N ig h t .

The two h a nds Open ,

an d ex ten ded crossin g o ne a nother horizon t a lly
,
.

( Da nbar )
-

The he ad w ith the eyes closed , i s l a ter all y i n clin ed f o r a m o m en t

,

u pon the h a n d A s m a ny ti m es a s this is repe a ted so m a n y n i g h ts ar e

.
,

i n dic a ted Very freq u ently the sig n of the S u n is tr a ced over the
.

he a vens fro m e a st to w est , to i ndic ate the l ap se of a d ay an d precedes

, ,

the m otion ( L o ng ) .

M ove both h an ds open a n d a t th a t is h orizont al b a ck s u p an d in

, ,

s m all c u rves i n fron t of the bre ast a n d over o n e an other Wi ed ) Thi s . .

I believe to be p ri m arily the sig n for d ark ness second arily for ni ght , .

Ni gh t , as a period o f ti m e i s m ore co m m on ly I th i n k , i ndic ated by the

, ,

si gn for sleep ( M a tt he ws ) The Pr i nce of Wie d s sign di ff ers fro m the

.

( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) i n exec u tion an d concep tion one represen tin g the ,

co u rse of th e ca use ( sun ) , the other the eff ect , obsc urity o r n ight The ,
.

ti m e or d ay th a t th e su n m oves bene ath us when w e sleep ( B o te l e r ) .

The con ception i s co ve r ing an d con s e q u en t obsc u rity I n the si g n f o r .

Da y by the s a m e au thor he p rob ably m e a n s th a t the h a n ds , p al m s up ,

were m o ved a p art to den ote op enn ess ,

.

M ak e closin g m ove m en t as if o f the dar kn ess by brin gin g together

a

both h a nds wi th the dors a u p w a rd an d the n gers to th e fore The .

m otion is fro m righ t t o l eft a nd a t the e n d the two indices ar e a l on g

,
.

side an d cl ose to e a c h other Th is m ove m en t m ust be a c co m p a n ied b y

.
ben din g forw ard w i th b o wed he ad , other wi se i t m ay be m is u nders tood
for the f r ee z ing over of a l ak e o r river ( Ba r to n ) .

The si gn for Da y rever se d .

( Ar ap a h o
E very thin g is closed
.

Both h an ds o u tspre ad , p al m s faci n g p assed in fron t ,

of the body an d

crossed the righ t h an d over th e left ( C hey enn e I )

,
. .

P l ace the at h a n d s in fron t o f an d as hi gh as the elb ow s , p a l m s u p ,

then throw the m i n w ard tow a rd th e m i ddle o f th e bre ast the right over ,

the left t u rn in g the p al m s dow n w ard w hi l e m ak in g the gest ure ( A bsa

,
.

r o ka 1 ; Hida tsa I ; K a i o w a I ; A r i ka r a I ; C o m a nche III ; S h o sh o ni a n d

B a na k I ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I ) N o te Fo r the pl u r al , th e si gn i s

.

repe a ted two or three ti m es an d the n u m ber ind ic a ted by el ev a tin g the
n gers o f the left h a n d an d ri gh t if necess ary Ti m e is rec k on ed by
,
.

n ights a n d if b u t two o r three ni ghts ( or d ays ) ar e m en tioned , the sign

,

is m a de th a t n u m ber o f t i m es w itho u t elev a tin g the n gers , the n u m ber

of t i m es the gestu re bei n g m a de referrin g to the n um ber of d ays , with
o u t th e a cco m p a nyin g n u m er a tion

.

E xten d th e a r m s to full c ap a city to the sides of the body o n the leve l

of the sho u l der s, p al m s d own w ard , n gers JO IDBd etc ( a s W ) , an d then ,
.

m ove th e m t o the fron t of the body o n the s am e level o r on a sli g h t

c urve u n til they h a ve cros sed e a ch ot h er at the w r ists ( Dako ta I ) . .

The co m i n g of d ar k n essthe clo sin g i n o f n i g h t .

E xten d both h an ds to the fron t at abou t th e hei gh t of the elbow ( as in

W ) a nd t h en s l ow l y m ove both a t th e s a m e ti m e , the ri g h t h a n d t o
,

the l e ft an d the l eft h a n d t o the ri gh t p a ss i n g o n e a bove the other , ,

-

representin g the d a r k n es s closin g over the e arth ( Da ko ta I I I )

. .

Fro m ad v a n ced position s two feet ap art abo u t eighteen in ches in

, ,

fron t of the line o f the body poi ntin g forw ard p a l m s down w ard at the
, , ,

h ei ght o f the l ower p art o f the chest c arry the opened h an d s i n w ar d ,

e a ch o n e describin g an ar c u n til th ey poi n t obliq u ely forw ard an d o ut

,

w ard the ri gh t tw o o r t h r ee in ches a bove the l eft ( Da ko ta I V ) Dar k

,
. .

ness covers all .

Pl a ce the at h a n d s p al m down i n fron t of an d a s hi gh a s the elbows ,

, ,

t h en m ove the m hori zont al ly tow ard an d p a st e ach other un ti l t h e fore

a r m s cross ( Da ko ta V II )
. .

The si gn for Da y is rst co m pleted ; then th e h an d , in position ( I

i ndex m ore open ed describes a n ar c of the horizo n i n verted a s the sun
, ,

bene a th us ; th is is followed by the sign f o r S l e e p th e eyes cl osed an d ,

the he ad i nclin in g to the right s upported in the open h and ( O to an d,

.

M isso ur i I ) .

Both h a nd s p l aced ih front of the eyes , p al m s fa cin g an d sl o wly

'

c l osed the eyes bei n g closed at the s am e ti m e ( Wy a ndo t I )

, . .
 1 89

Deaf mute n a tu r a l signs M o ve the foren ger

-
d o w n w a rd fro m the
w est to the e a st ( Ba l l ar d ) .

U se the sh u t h a n d as i f to scr a tch a m atch .

( Hasensta b)
V 0 lso K now Se e
d ( C o m p are N o t h i n g )

, t n o . I on t a , . .

The h a nd held u p before the fa ce , wi th the p a l m o utw a rd a nd vibr ated

to a nd fro ( Dunba r ) .

The h a nd w a ved o utw a rd with the th u m b u p w ard .

( L o ng )

Wa ve t h e righ t h an d q uic k ly by an d in front o f the face to ward th e

ri g ht Wi ed ) Refusin g t o a ccept
. . th e ide a o r sta te m ent presented .

M ove t h e h a n d fro m righ t t o l eft a s if m otion in g a w a y , . This sign

a lso m e a n s I ll h a ve n othin g to do wi th y o u ( B ur to n)

.

Ri gh t h a n d n gers exten ded together side of h a nd in front of a n d

-

fa cin g the face i n fron t of the m o u th an d w a ved s u ddenly t o the ri ght

, .

( C hey en ne I ) .

A deprec a tory w a ve o f the ri gh t h and fr o m front to ri ght n gers ,

extended an d j oin e d ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Pl a ce th e ri g h t h an d exten ded before the body n gers poi n ti n g up ,

w a rd p a l m to t h e fron t then throw the h a n d o u tw a rd to t h e ri gh t a n d

, , ,

sligh tly dow n w a rd A bsa r o ka I ; H ida tsa I ; Ar i ka r a I )

( . .

The righ t h a nd , horizont al a t p a l m d ow n wa rd ( W ) i s p ushed si de

, , ,

w i se ou tw ard an d tow ard the right fro m the left bre ast N o n o ne I .
, ,

ha ve n on e etc a r e al l expressed by th is si gn
,
.
,
O ften these In di a n s f o r .

N 0 w il l si m p ly sh ak e the he a d t o the righ t a nd l eft This si gn al tho ugh .

,

i t m ay h a ve origin a l l y been introd u ced fro m the w hite peoples h abi t of

sh ak in g th e he a d to expres s N o h as been i n u se a m on g th e m for as l on g
,

a s the oldest people c an re m e m ber vet they d o n o t u se the v ari a n t to ,

expres s Yes ( Da ko ta .

Di s m i ss i n g the ide a etc , .

Pl a ce the opened re l a xed right h a n d pointi ng tow a rd the left , b ack ,

forw ard in front o f the n ose o r as low as th e b re a st an d thro w it f o r

, ,

w a rd a n d o u tw a rd abo u t ei ghteen in ches S o m e a t the s a m e ti m e tu rn .

the p a l m u pw a rd O r m ak e the S i gn at th e h eigh t o f the bre a st with

.

both h a nds ( Da ko ta I V ) Represents the sh ak in g of the h e ad

. . . .

O u r sh aki n g of the he a d in den i a l i s n ot so u ni vers al in the O l d W orl d

a s is pop u l a rly s u pp osed , for t h e a ncien t Gree k s fol lowed by the m odern ,

T u rk s an d r ustic It al i an s threw the he a d b a ck i nste ad o f sh ak in g it ,

, ,

for N 0 .

H old the h a nd poi n t in g u p w ard before the righ t side of the chest
a t ,

then throw i t o u tw ard an d down w ard to th e righ t ( Da ko ta V I VII ) .

,
 1 90

The h a nd exte n ded or slightly c u rved i s held in fron t o f the body a

l ittl e to the right o f t h e m edi a n line ; it i s then c a rried with a r a pid swee p _

a foot o r m ore fa r t her to the ri g ht ( M a ndan an d ida tsa I ) . .

Pl a ce the h a nd as in Ye s ,
an d m ove it fro m side to side .
( I r o quo is
I ) A sh ak e o f t h e he ad ;
.

Thro w th e at ri ght h an d forw a rd a n d o utw ard to the ri ght p al m to ,

t h e fron t .
( Ka i o wa I ; C o m a nche III ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichita I I ) .

"ick m otion
u open h an d fro m
of th e m o u th for w ard , p al m tow ard the
m o u th .
( Sa hap ti n I ) .

Pl ace h an d in fron t o f body , n gers rel a xed p al m tow ard body ( Y ,

then with e asy m otion m ove to poi n t say a foot fro m body a little to , , ,

ri g h t , gers s e
n a m b u t p l
a m u p w rd ( S p n I )
a a h a,
ti
W e don t gree

a

. . .

To express A l l g o ne use a si m i la r m otio n w ith both h a nds E m p ty

,
. .

E lev a te
the extended i ndex a nd w a ve i t q uic kly fro m side to side
before the fa ce Thi s is so m eti m es a cco mp an ied by sh ak in g the he ad
. .

( Pa i Ute I )
.
.

E xten d
the i ndex holding i t vertically before the face , re m a i n in g
,

n gers an d th um b closed ; p a ss the n ger q uick l y fro m side to side a

foot o r so be f ore the fa ce ( Ap a ch e I ) This si gn as a lso th a t o f ( Pa i
. .
,

Ute I ) i s su bsta n ti ally the s a m e a s th a t wi th the s a m e signi c ance r e

,

p orted fro m N aples by DE J O R I O .

Wa ve extended h a nd before the fa ce fro m side to side .

( Ap ach e III ) .

A n other
The right h a n d , n a t u r al ly rel a xed
: ,
is thro wn o u tw ard an d

for w ard tow ard t h e ri ght ( Ap a ch e I ) . .

E xten d
the p a l m of the ri ght h a n d h orizon tally a foot from the w ais t ,

p al m down w a rd , then s u ddenly throw it h alf over fro m the body , as if

tossin g a chi p fro m the b a c k of t h e h a nd ( Wi chi ta I ) . .

Deaf m u te na tur a l sig ns S h a k e the he ad ( Ba l la r d )

-
.

M ove both h a nds fro m e a ch other a n d a t the s a m e ti m e sh ak e the , , ,

he ad so a s to in dic a te no ( Ha sensta b) .

( ) ur d e af m u tes for e m ph a tic n eg a tive w a ve the ri ght h a nd before the

-

face .

The E gypti an n eg a tive l in e ar h ieroglyph is cle arl y the gest ure of both
h a n d s p al m down w a ved ap art h orizon t all y a n d ap p aren tly at the l evel
, ,

o f the elbo w between w hi ch an d the M ay a neg ati ve p a rticl e m a given

'

b y L a n da there is a stron g coin ciden ce .

No n e , No t h in g ; I h a v e n o n e .

L ittle or n othin g is sign ied by p as sin g o ne h a nd over the other .

( Oj ibw a I ) .
 19 "
M otion of r u bbin g o ut .
( M acgo w a n)

M ay so be signied by s m artly br u shi n g the righ t h an d a cross the

al

left fro m the w rist tow ard the n gers both h a nds extended p al m s to , ,

w ard e ach other an d n gers j oined ( Ar apa h o I ) . .

Is i ncl u ded in G o n e , D e st r o y e d .
( Da ko ta I ) .

A n other Pl a ce t h e Opened left h an d abo ut a foot in fron t of the n a ve l ,

poin tin g forw ard an d t o ri gh t , p al m obliq uely up w a rd an d b a ck w ard ,

a n d sweep the p a l m o f th e Open ri gh t h a n d for w a rd an d t o the right over

i t a nd abo u t a foot t h rou gh a c u rve ( Da ko ta IV )

.
A l l b a re . . .

P a ss the ul n ar side o f the righ t index a lon g the r a di al side o f the left

i n dex fro m tip to b a se S o m e roll the righ t index over on it s b ack as

.

they m ove it alon g the left The h an d s ar e to be in fron t of the n a vel , .

b a c k s forw a rd a n d o u tw a rd the left in dex str a igh t and poi ntin g for ,

w a rd an d to the right t h e right in de x str ai ght an d poin ti n g fo r w ard

,

a n d t o the left ; th e other n gers l oosely cl osed ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

W ith the ri gh t h an d pointi n g obliq u ely for w ard to the left , the l eft
forw ard to the ri gh t p al m s u p w ard m ove the m altern at el y sever al
, ,

ti m es u p an d d ow n stri k in g t h e en d s of the n gers O r , th e l eft h an d

,
.

bein g i n the a bove position r ub the ri gh t p al m i n a circ l e on t h e left ,

two o r three ti m es an d then m ove it forw ard an d to the right ( Da ko ta

,
.

VI ). R u bbed o u t Th a t is al l It is al l g one
. . .

P a s s the p al m o f the a t ri gh t h a nd over the left fro m the wrist to

w a rd an d off o f the tip s of the n gers ( Da ko ta V I , VII ) . .

Br u sh the p al m of the l eft h an d fro m wri st to n ger tips w ith th e

p al m o f the ri gh t ( Wy a n do t I ) . .

A n other Throw both h a nd s o utw a rd tow ar d their re spective sides

:

fro m the bre a st Wy a ndo t I )

.
-
.

P a ss th e at ri gh t p al m over t h e p al m of t h e left h an d fro m the w rist

forw ard over the n gers ( Kai o wa I ; C o manche III ; Ap ache I I ; Wi .

chi ta I I ) Wiped o ut
. .

H old the left h a n d open , with the p a l m p w ard a t the heigh t of the u ,

elbo w an d before the body ; p a ss the right q u ic k ly over the left p al m s ,

to u chin g fro m the w rist tow a rd the ti p s of the l eft as if br ushin g o

, ,

d u st ( Ap a che I )
. .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig n Pl ace th e h an ds ne a r e ach other , p al m s
down w a rd ,
a nd reverse an d m ove the m over in opposite direction s .

( B a l lar d )
 1

A ustr a lia n sig n Pa m i i e .

.

( n on e or
othi n g ) Fo r in st an ce a n ative
n .
,

s ays B amako ingi n a ( give a to m a h a w k ) I reply by sh ak in g t h e h a nd ,

.

thu m b , an d all n gers sep ar ated an d loosely exten d ed p al m down

, ,
.

E xh a u sted
for the pres e n t .

H old b o t h h a nds n a tur a lly rel a xed ne a rly a t a r m s len gth before the

bod y p al m s tow ard the fa ce m ove the m a ltern a tely t o a nd fro a few
, ,

i nch es allow in g the n gers to stri k e those of the opposite h a nd e a ch

,

t i m e a s f a r a s the second j oi n t ( Kai o wa I ; Co m a nch e 1 1 1 ; Ap a che 1 1 ;

.

Wi chi ta II ) .

I h a ve n on e .

Deaf -
m ute na t ur a l sig ma E xpressed by the si gn s for n on e , after poin t
in g to one s self
.
( Ba ll ar d)
S tretchthe ton gue an d m ove it to an d fro li k e a p e n d ul u m then
sh a k e the he ad as i t to say n o ( Zeig lcr ) .

Noon . Se e Da y .

N o se .

Right i ndex croo k ed turned , poin tin g dow n w a rd ( other ngers an d

,

th u m b cl osed ) , is p a ssed dow n w ard fro m the upper p art of the n ose to .

th e level of the n ostrils w ith b ac k outw ard an d n ger touch in g the n ose
,
.

( Da ko ta I ) .

Bleedin g .

L ea n
the he ad sli gh tly forw ard an d conti nue the m ove m en t , as above
given , dow n w a rd fro m the level of the n ostri l a n d repe a t several ti m es , ,

which in di c a tes the droppin g o f t h e blood fro m th e n ostrils ( Dako ta I ) . .

Now , at o n ce .

The two h a n ds for m i n g e a ch a hollo w an d brough t n e ar e ach other

an d put i nto a tre m ulou s m otio n u p w ard an d do wn w ard ( Di m ba n )
.

C l ap both h a nds together sh arply an d repe a tedly , or m ak e the sign

of T o - day .
( Bur to n )
of the righ t h a n d exten ded uprigh t etc ( J ) i s c arried
Fo r e n g e r , ,
.
,

up w ard in front of the ri ght side o f the body a n d a bove th e he a d so th at

the exten ded n ger poi nt s to w ard th e cen ter of t h e he a ven s an d then ,

c arried down w ard in front of the ri ght bre a st foren ger still poin tin g ,

uprigh t ( Da ko ta .

Pl a ce
the extended in dex poin ti n g up w a rd , p a l m t o the left , as hi gh
,

a s an d before the top of the he a d ; push the h a n d up an d dow n a slight

dista nce sever al ti m es , the eye s b ei n g dir ected up w ard at the tim e .

( H ida tsa I ; K aio wa I ; A r ikar a I ; Co manche III Ap a che II ; Wichita II ) .

 1 93

N um b e r .
( Co m p a re C
Q u a n ti ty ) o u n ti n g ; .

Deaf m u te na tur a l sig n C oun t the n gers un til the n u m ber n ine is
-
.

re a ched an d beyon d i t coun t do ubles of the h a nd s e ach d enotin g ten

, ,
.

( C r o ss )
0 bj e c tio n .

I ta l i a n Sig h A n ger pl a ced on the lower l ip is un derstood to m e an

so m e n ew an d suddenly st arted obj ection to a previous pl a n . Bu t ler .
)

0 b ta in .
( Co m p are P o sse ssi o n ) .

First m ak e the gesture for M i n e then m ove the ri ght h a nd righ t ,

an d left before the fa ce th e th u m b turn ed tow a rd the fa ce

, ( Wied ) .

M ake the sign for S e a r c h i n g h un tin g for , an d then t ak e h old ,

of the obj ect w ith the ri ght h and a n d dr a w i t i n tow ard the body n e a r ,

w hich the h a n d is bro u gh t to a stop ( Da k o t a I )

H a ve hunted for . .

an d g o t it .

Den/ i m i tate n a tur a l sig h E xten d th e h a n d ,

a nd close an d m ove it b a c k .

( Ba l la r d )

0 cean .

the sign f o r W a t e r , then pl a ce the at h an d s , p a l m s dow n

M ak e
w a rd th u m bs j oinin g , before the bre a st , a nd m ove the m h orizon tally
,

ou tw ard to either side ( A bsa r o lca I ; S hosho ni a nd B a n a k I ) B ro a d

. .

w a ter .

( " e e t
Turn the h a nd s up w ard an d in w a rd allowin g the tips of th e n gers ,

to tou ch the top o f e a ch s h oulder ( Sa c Fox, a n d Kickap oo I ) E p a u .

,
.

l e t sR

O ff s p r ing . See C h i l d .

O l d ( Co m p a re 0 1 d M a n
.
g e d an d T i n l e l o n g ) , , .

W i th the righ t h a n d h eld i n fron t o f ri ght side of body a s th ough ,

gr a spin g the he a d o f a w a l k in g stick describe the forw ard a rch m ove -

m en t a s though a person w a l k in g w a s usin g it for support ( Dako ta I ) . .

Decrepi t a g e d e pen den t o n a st aff .

Pl a ce
the closed ri ght h a n d in fron t of a n d as hi gh a s the sh oulder ,

le avi n g th e i ndex p artl y exten d ed a nd ben t ; then m ove it slo wly f o r

w ard a n d tow a rd the left in an interrupted m a n n er ( Wy an do t .

S low m ove m en t an d bent for m o f a n o l d m an .

Person .

G r a sp the chee k s w ith both h a nd s , usin g the tips of th e n gers an d

th u m bs . W rin k les .
( Ap ache I ) .

25
 194

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l sign A tre m bli n g m otion of the he a d .
( Ba ll a r d )

O p p o si t e .

A clinched h a nd held up on the side of the he a d ,

at the dist an ce of
a foo t or m ore fro m it .

Br in gthe end s of the outstretched f o re n g e r s in close proxi m i ty ,

rem ov in g the m a g a in perpen dicul a rly , a n d repe atin g the proce ss sever al
ti m es ( Oj ibw a II ) F ace to fa ce w ith
. . .

L eft h an d st ation ary in fron t of face o n level of the eyes , foren ger
alone exten ded horizon t al poin tin g to w ard the right 85 0 ( as in NI
, , , .
,

except b a c k outw a rd ) ; then the righ t h a n d is c a rried to the righ t eye ,

al l n gers excep t the in dex closed , wh ich poin ts ou tw a rd st r aigh t to ,

w a rd the en d o f the st ation a ry extended foren ger of the left h a n d .

( Da ko ta I ) Fo r e n g e r s opposite on e a n other
. .

O tt e r .

Dr a w the n ose sli ghtly up w ard with the two rst n gers of the ri gh t
h an d ( Wi ed )
. .

Rub t h e en d of the n ose roun d an d roun d with the e n ds of the n

gers o f the ri ght h a nd ( Da ko ta IV ) W hi te n ose . . .

O ut utw ard W it h out ( in position )

,
O ,
'

The se m icircle as m a de in the sign for I n W i t h i n , w ith the upright ,

ri ght in dex pl aced w ithout the circle between it an d the body ( Da .

ko ta I )
The v ari a n t of I n W i t h i n
.
, .

O ve r ( on th e other side ) .

Collect the ngers o f both h and s t o a poin t , pl a ce the left horizon t ally
before the bre ast poi ntin g to th e ri ght an d t h e right behi nd the left
, , ,

poi n tin g to the ri g h t p a l m s down then p a ss the ri ght forw ard over an d
, , ,

do wn a short dista n ce beyon d the left ( Ka io w a I ; Co m a nche III .

Ap ach e I I ; Wi ch i ta II ) This sign is abbrevi a ted by m erely usin g the

.

exte n ded f o r e n g er s i n ste ad of the w hole h a nd .

Pa ck , ca r r y i n g a .

The h an ds a r e pl aced e a ch side o f the he a d , a s if they held the str ap

of the kop p as, w hich p asse s r o un d the forehea d in order to relieve th a t ,

p art by supportin g a portion o f the wei ght of the burden ; w ith thi s
,

m otion , two or three sligh t inclin a tion s of the he a d a n d correspondin g

m ove m en ts of the h a n ds a r e a lso m a de ( L o rig ) .
-

Pa c kin g . S ee a lso H o r se ( p ac k in g a ) .

Pa i n t .

Da ub b oth the chee k s dow n w ard w ith the i ndex -

n g e r .
( Ba r to n)
 1 95

L eft h an d held u p , b ack an d th u m b up w ard , rst an d m iddle n gers

o f righ t h a n d d ipped forw ard a s though touchin g so m ethin g a nd then ,

rubbed a ga inst b a c k of h a n d ne ar the b a se o f the th u mb as in si g n for ,

G r e a se ( C h ey en ne I )
. .

M ak e the sign for C o l o r a nd then touch th e ch e ck w ith the ex ,

ten ded fore an d second n gers of the ri gh t h a nd ( Dako ta I ) M ix . .

i ng the p a i n t a nd a p plyin g to the fa ce .

( 1 ) Rub the ri ght foren ger in t h e left p al m ; ( 2 ) then r ub it o n the

chee k s ( Ap a ch e I II )
. 1
( ) M i xin g o r grin din
. g 2
; ( ) a pplyin g
.

Pa p e r .

T he left ar m is se m i exte n ded , the h an d open in position ( W ) p al m

-

u p ; the ri gh t h a n d the n a ppro a ches the l eft a n d in position ( K ) see m

in g l y writes in the left p a l m ; both h a n ds t h c n a s su m e position ( W )

a pp i o xim a t e e a ch other , the n widely di verge ( O to a nd M i sso ur i I ) . .

S o m eth in g extended upon which to write .

Pa r e n t . See . a lso R e l a t i o n sh i p
, .

G en eric a lly .

Pl a ce the h a n d , bowl sh aped , over the ri ght bre a st ,

as if gr aspi n g a

p ap .
( Do dge )
M e the si gn for
ak Fa th er twice .
( A bsa r o ka I ; S h o sho ni an d

B a na k I ).
.

C ol lect th e n gers a n d th u m b o f the righ t h a nd ne arly to a point and

preten d to gr asp th e left bre a st an d dr a w i t out tow ard the front a bou t
twelve inches ( Da ko ta V I ) . When thi s si gn is m a de on ce i t m e a n s
.

f at her ( wh ich m ay be m ore specic a lly design a ted by elev a tin g the
n ger as for M a n , i e m an o r m a le p a re n t ) ; when i t is lu a de tw ice i t
. .
,

m e a n s Pa r e nts, an d i s used gen eri c a lly ; when m other i s m e a n t the ,

si gn s for Par en t an d Wo m an, i e , lon g h aired p a ren t ; wo m a n p aren t . .

-
.

The ri ght ar m is exten ded ( w ith the h an d i n type posi tion J ) a n d -

m a de to poin t to the obj ect The h a nds ( in type positio n s A A ) next

.
-

a ppro a ch the m am m a ry region a nd thu s hold for a m o m ent The .

ri ght h a n d is then Open ed ( a s i n type position S m odied by bein g -

h oriz on t a l ) an d m ade to describe a se m icircle down w ard i n w a rd , an d ,

outw ard fro m the lower p art o f the trun k o f the body ( O to a n d M i s .

so ur i I ) H im o r her fro m who m co m es the o f fsprin g

. .

Sa m e sign a s f o r F a t h e r , al so m a de for m other w ith the a ddition of

the si gn f o r W o n l a n liter a lly Wo m a n Pa r ent ( Ka i o wa I ; 00 .

m a nche III ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta I I ) .

P a r t i sa n . Se e C h i e f , W ar;
P a ti e n c e . S ee Quie t .
 196

Pe a c e .
( Co m p a re F r i e n d sh i p ) .

I ntertwi ne the n gers of both h ands .

( B u r to n ) .

Pa nto mi mi c .

S i m ul a te sh ak i n g o f h a n ds .
( Ar ap a h o I ) .

The exten ded n gers sep a ra ted ( R ) i n terlock ed in fron t o f the bre ast
, , ,

h a nds horizon t al b a c k s outw ard ( Da ko ta I ) L e t us be friend s L e t

,
. . .

u s be at pe a ce

.

The left ar m se m ie xe d h an d closed a n d elev ated the n spir ally r o

, ,
,

ta ted acros s the forehe a d for A n g e r ; thi s is followed by th e si g n for

N 0 in dic a tin g no a nge r
,
The a r m s a nd h a n ds then fal l to sides ri ght
.
,

a r m i s n ow r a ised a n d closed h a nd cl a sped in the left a xill a the si gn

,

f o r A dea r f ri en d The ar m s ar e then exten ded an d dr a w n i n w a rd fro m

.

before the body ( O to an d JIi sso u r i I ). Wh at co m es of m utu al frien d

' - -
.
.

sh ip a n d good feelin g .

Pen u r i o u s or s ti n g y . ( Co m p a re M i se r ) .

Clinch both h an ds r m ly the ri g h t h a n d resti ng on the left bo t h , ,

dr a wn to the chest held r m ly wi th a sligh t sh a ke pressed a g ai n st

, ,

bre a st b a ck of righ t h a nd a bove wi th co m pressed li ps an d ligh t sh ak e

, ,

or q ui ver o f he a d ( Oj i bw a IV ) . .
.

P e r so n . A . A n I n d i vi d ua l .

Pl a ce the h a lf close d h a n ds over th e fron t of the forehe ad , b ac k s

-

ou tw a rd , then p a ss the m outw ard down w ard over the chee k s a nd for ,

w a rd tow a rd the chin F ace ; V is a ge ( Wy a n do t . .

Pi l l s .

The ri gh t ar m a nd h a nd i s brough t before t h e bre a st ; the i ndex n g e r -

a n d thu m b in posi tion ( I " ) rot a te together ; the h an d then a ppro a ches
the m o uth a s i n the si gn for E a t ; t h e ac t of sw a llowin g is then exe c

o u t ed The ri g h t h a n d then sweeps hurriedly fro m the a n a l region of

.

body ( O to an d M i ssou r i I ) S o m eth in g rolled between thu m b an d

. .

n ger then sw allowed th a t will ev a cu a te the b owels

, . .

Pi p e .

M ak e the s a m e sign as to Sl no ke .
( A bsar o ka I; S h o sho ni an d .

B an a k I) .

Fi rst m a k e the si gn of lli n g the pipe in fron t o f th e sto m a ch with ,

the righ t h a nd left h a nd held represen ti ng the bowl o f the pipe ,

,

with n gers ne a rly closed b ack outw a rd ed ge o f n gers dow n w ard , , ,

i n sert the ri gh t i ndex fro m a bove betw een the thu m b an d foren ger as
thou gh in sertin g the tob acco then k noc k i t down with the ed ge of the ,

ri ght st ( B ) , then exten d the left h a nd to ne arly full c a p a ci ty , wi th

b a ck dow n w ard as though gr aspin g the pipe ste m fr o m the right side , -
 197

a nd the righ t h an d gr a sps the ste m fro m the left side w ith b ack down ,

w a rd n e a r the m outh end ( Dako ta

Fro m th e llin g an d m a nner .

o f holdin g the pipe

.

The p al m o f the ri gh t h a n d bein g upw ard the n gers n e ar l ; closed ,

r

an d thu m b exten ded forw a rd m ove the h a n d fro m the m outh str a i gh t ,

forw a rd about four in ches th ree or four ti m es O r the h a n d m ay be , .

held u pri gh t p al m tow ard the left thu m b pointin g tow a rd th e m outh
, , ,

n gers closed ( Da ko ta I V ) H oldi n g th e pipe ste m a n d re m ovin g it

. .
.
-

fro m the m outh as in s m o k in g .

My .

M ak e the sign f o r P i p e a n d then throw th e h a n d forw ard as for I

h a ve . It is m y pipe ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

P i st o l .

The s a m e m ove m en t as for g u n m a de lo w er dow n .

( Bu r to n ).

L eft h a nd p l a ced in position a s though holdi n g a pistol right h a nd ,

-

foren ger restin g a g ain s t lower of left h a n d a n d m otioned as th ou gh ,

coc k in g pi stol ( C h eye nn e l ) . .

The righ t h a n d i n its posi tion n e a r the righ t eye a s g ive n ,

in the sig n
for G u n den otes a pi stol Thi s i s fro m th e shortn ess o f
,
. th e b a rrel .

( Dako ta I .
)
The right a r m i s se m i ex te n d ed before the fron t of the body ; t h e-

h an d a ssu m es t h e post u re of type po si tion ( B m o d ied by bein g m ore -

Open ed a n d index croo k ed as hoo k i ng the tr i gg er Fro m the center of .

th e b o d y the se m i exten ded a r m is ele v a ted to a level with th e fa ce an d

-

suddenly the h a nd is ex p a nded as i t proj ect s forw ard T h e ri gh t h a n d -

.

then drop s t o a n exten ded position fro m the side o f t h e m id dle o f the
body a n d t h e left 11 and is dr a w n ed ge wi se a cros s i t a s in S i gn for B a d , .

( O to a n d I) S o m ethin g to shoot d own wh a t i s b a d

. .

Pl a c e , A t th is .
( Co m p a re H e r e ) .

Pl a ce the left h a n d sli ghtly curved a bout eighteen i n ches before th e

, ,

he ar t pointin g tow a rd the righ t the p a l m to w a rd th e fa ce collect the

, ,

n gers o f t h e ri gh t h a n d to a poin t a n d stri k e the p a l m of the rig h t

.

a g a in st th a t o f th e left the a xes bein g a t a bou t ri ght a n gles

, ( A bsa r o ka . ,

I ; S hosho ni ( an( l Ba na k I ) -

Pl a ce ,
To arri ve a t a .

The h a n ds are pl a ced as i n t h e sign f o r P l a c e a t t h i s but the , ,

righ t h an d is bro u gh t fro m a poin t a t a r m s len gt h b ac k w ard o r o u t

f ro m th e righ t shoulder an d struc k a g a i n st the p a l m of the l eft , .

:A bsa r o ka I ; S ho sh o ni a n d B a n a k I ) Th e left h a n d , represen tin g loc a l .

i ty is held i n an y d irection to in dic a te the spe a k er s m e an in g , when th e

,

ri ght h an d follow s th e course an d stri k es the left a t th a t position .

 1 98

Pl a i n , Pr a i r i e .
( Co m p are E a r t h ) .

L ayth e h ands at u pon their b a ck s a nd m ove t h e m str ai ght fro m one

a nother i n a h orizo n t al lin e Wi ed ) There is n o si m ill ar ity with Wied s
. .

sign in execution n or is th e con cep tion of the l a tter as pl a in a s th a t of

,

( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) .
( R o tele m
W ave both the p a l m s outw a rd a n d lo w down .
( Bur to n)
This i s expressed the sign ( Da ko ta The

in fo r Fla t L , e ve l .

a t or level pr airie
.

A fter p l ar i n gthe h a nds n e a r together , p al m s up w a rd , n gers poi n t

in g forw a rd , sep a r a te th e m a bou t t wo feet ; c a rry the extended righ t
index b a ck u p w ard poin tin g for w a rd through a forw a rd curve fro m
, , ,

side to side in fron t o f the body three o r four ti m es then m a k e the ,

nega ti ve si gn ( Da ko ta IV ) N othin g ther e

. , . .

The a r m s are se m ie xe d a n d brought h a nds together before the , ,

body Then stoop forw ard an d touch a piece of wood , or in its a bsen ce
.
, ,

execute t h e si g n f o r t h e s a m e The h a n ds ar e t h e n a pproxi m ated before

.

th e chest i n type position ( T ) , then m a de to di verge w idely n ally the ,

right h a nd openly sweep s neg a ti vely to th e side ( O to and M isso ur i I ) .

E xten ded sp a ce where t here i s n o wood .

(1) Wa ve the h a nds h orizon t a lly a nd l a ter al ly p a l m s up ( X ) holdin g , ,

left h a n d still ( X ) ( 2 ) thrus t th e right h a n d up n gers extended ( P ) ,

( 3 ) rub 0 11 left p a l m wit h righ t ( X reversed ) s m ooth o ff left p al m wi th

'

ri gh t ( Ap ac h e I II )
.
( 1 ) L evel surfa ce ; ( 2 ) trees ; ( 3 ) destitute of ;
.

( 4 ) very s m ooth

.

Pl a n t, T o .

Collect th e n gers thu m b of the right h a n d to a poi nt , directed

an d

tow a rd th e groun d a n d as th e h a n d is m oved straigh t for w a rd fro m t h e

,

body dip it tow a rd the groun d a t regul a r in terv als ( Kai o wa I ; 00

,
.

m m zche II I ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wich i ta II ) .

P l a n ts, V ege ta ti o n .

C lose the ri ght h an d ; extend the i ndex poi n ti n g vertic a lly a nd pl ace , ,

the tip o f the thu m b a ga i n st the seco n d j oin t , t h en p a ss the h a nd b ac k ,

do wn , to w ard one side i n repe a ted m oves slightly elev ati n g i t a t e a ch

, ,

rest ( Wy a ndo t I )
. .

P l e a se d . See G l a d .

Po n d . Se e L a ke .

Po o r . L ean . I n d ig e n t .

The two f o r e n g e r s extended w ith the ri g h t as if i t w as a k ni fe im i ,

t ate t h e m otion o f cutting the esh o ff th e left nger begin n ing tow a rd ,
 1 99

th e tip , cu ttin g with a quic k m otion directe d tow ard the b a se ; a t

and

the s a m e ti m e turn the nger a little rou nd so as to exp ose the d i ff erent ,

p arts to the a ction of cuttin g ; in ti m a tin g th a t t h e esh h as d im in ished

fro m st arv a tion .

H old the attened h a nd s to w ard o ne a n other before the bre a st ,

sep a r ate the m , m ovin g al l the n gers sever a l ti m es i n w ard an d ou tw ard

tow ard a nd outw a rd fro m th e bre a st Wied ) The left fore ar m i s ele . .

v a t e d an d se m i exten ded fro m cen ter of side of body

-
L eft h a n d is in .

type position ( J 1 h orizon t al ) The ri gh t h a nd i n a si m il a r position ,

,
.
,

see m in gly sh a ves the left i ndex ng e r tow a rd the body There is n o -

a pp a ren t iden tity in executi on or con cepti on of this sig n wi th th a t of

t h e Prin ce of W ied ( Bo te l e r ) Reduced to s m a ll

. di m en sion s
. .

Pa ss o ne foren g er a lon g the oth er le a vi n g i t , at the tip both extend

,

ed ,
as if p arin g or whi ttli n g i t ( Ar ap a ho I ) . .

Wi th th e h an ds a bout f o ur i nches in fron t of the chest ends n e ar ,

together poin tin g i n w a rd p a l m s b ack w ard an d n gers rel a xed q u ick ly

, , ,

m ove the m a f e w i n c h e s ou t w a rd sever a l ti m es e a ch ti m e n e a rly closi n g

..

t h e n gers ( D a ko t a IV .
)

Bec a u se the rib s show an d th e ngers t
. .

in between t he m .

Pl a ce
both h an d s wi th n gers j oined but h oo k ed upon the m iddle of
the chest a nd pull the m ap art as i f te a rin g open t h e esh ( Kaio u a I ;
, .
'

Co m a nche I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta II ) .

With th e right h a nd to t he bre a s t i m ita te th e gra sping , and te arin g

open thereof ( Shosho ni a nd Ba na k I )
. .

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l s hi m Pl a ce the h an d s u po n the chee k s ,
an d dra w
in the ch ee k s .
( Ba l l ar d )
l n property .

E xtend the left fore n ger i n fro n t of the left side re m a i nin g nger s ,

an d th u m b bein g closed ; then with the exten ded in dex m a k e sever al

p a sses over th e b a c k o f the left fro m tip to b a se ( A bsar o ka I ; Sh o .

sho n i a n d B a n a k I )
. .

L eft
h an d i n fron t of body forenger horizon ta l ( lVI p a l m of h a nd to ,

the ri gh t ) ri gh t h a nd s a m e posi ti on exceptin g to h a ve p a l m in w ard

, ,

stro k e th e n ger o f left with foren ger of right fro m end of the n ger to
the k nuc k le sever a l ti m es ( C heyenne I I ) . .

L eft
h a n d as in ( K ) is held a bout twel ve in ches i n front of th e bre ast ,
an d th e ri gh t h a n d ( M ) foren ger ext ended horizon t al p a l m do wn w ard ,
,
-

, ,

th e side o f t h e righ t n ger glided over the b a ck o f the exten ded left
foren ger ( Dako ta I ) . .
 2 00

The extended foren ger o f the left h a nd is strok ed r a ther ra p id l v

two to many ti m es fro m poi n t to b a se with the extended index o f the
righ t h a n d the m otion rese m blin g th a t o f w h it tl in g a stick S o m eti m es
,
.

the left h an d is slightly rot ated so as to presen t d ie re n t p arts of t h e

'

n ger to the stro k in g process ( M a n dan a nd H ida tsa .

Pl a ce t h e poi n t o f the ex te nded inde x u p o n the b ac k of the b as a l

j oin t of the m iddle n ger of th e left h a nd ( Wy a ndo t I ) . .

Rub the extended index b ac k a n d forth o ver the b ac k o f the exte n ded
foren ger of the left h a nd fro m t ip to b a se ( Kai o wa I ; Co ma nch e 1 1 1 .

Ap a ch e I I ; l V i ehi m I I ) .

A n other Pa ss
the exten ded i ndex o f th e righ t h a n d al tern a tely alon g
:

the upper a n d lower sides of the exte n ded foren ger as in whittlin g
tow a rd th e h a nd ( Kai o n a I ; Co m a nche I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II )
. .

Sa m e sig n a s fo r A p ach e . Se e T R I B AL S IG N S .
( C mna nch e II ) .

Ru b the b a c k o f the left h a n d b ac k a n d forth w i th the p a l m ar sur

fa ce o f t h e exten ded index ( Ute 1 ; Ap a che I ) . .

Deaf -
m a te n a tur a l mam Pa ss
the thu m b over the foren ger sever a l
ti m es ( indic a ti n g n ext m ove th e open h a n d fro m side to side
on ce a nd a t the s a m e ti m e sh ak e the he a d ( indic ati n g
, , ,
a n d then

n oddin g the h e ad poin t with t h e foren ger to so m e person who i s poor

, .

Po n y . S ee H o r se .

P o si t i o n , C h a n g e s o f . See A h ead .

P o sse ssi o n , m in e ; m y p ro p e r ty ; T o b e lo n g to .

The h a n d sh ut a nd held up to th e view .

( Dnn ban )
W i th the st p a ss upw a rd in fron t of th e bre a st then push it for
, ,

w ard with a sli ght j er k ( Wi ed ) There is n o appreci a b l e si m il a ri ty in

.

th e execu tion of th e O to a n d M isso u r i I sign an d th a t o f Wied The .

con ception of t h e l a tter i s d if cult t o se e ( Bo wler ) I t a ppe ars to b e .

th e graspin g an d displ ay o f property .

Touch the bre ast w ith th e i n dex -

n g e r .
( Do dg e )
Right h an d closed a s thou gh holdin g so m ethin g elev a ted to level of
a nd i n fron t o f the chin dr a wn q uic k ly wi th a down w a rd curved m otion
,

to w a rd t h e n ec k ( Ch eyenne I ) . .

B othh a nds clinched a bout twel ve inches before the b ody , p al m s in

w ard the ri ght a bout ei gh t inches a bove the left ; both are then forcibly
,

p ushed tow a rd the groun d ( Absar o ka I S hoshoni a n d Ban ak I ) . .

 First m ak e the sign for I , person a l pron oun the n poin t to or m ak e ,

the si g n for the p articul a r a rticle to which re f eren ce is m ade an d co m ,

p l e t e the sign by crossin g the ar m s a t the wrists about a foot in fron t ,

of the bre a st with h a nds n atur al rel a xed ( Y ) p a l m s i n w a rd upright

, , , , ,

dr a w the h a n d s to t h e body so th a t they w i l l cover the right an d left

bre a sts ( the right h a nd the left bre a st a nd the left h a nd the righ t
bre a st ) ( Da ko ta
. Possession m y property .

A n other : First m ak e the sig n f o r I , rst person al pronoun an d th e n ,

the si gn for the p r O p e r ty if i t h as on e ; if n ot then th e p a rticul a r articles

, ,

con stitutin g the property m ust be poi nted to ( Da ko ta I ) T hese . .

thin gs are m ine .

S tr ik e
the p a l m s o f the h a n ds toget h er p a l m s i n w a rd , ,
an d then m ak e
the si gn for S o m e I h a v e so m e ( Da ko ta 1 V ) , . .

Thro w the clinched right h a nd edge wis e tow a rd the e arth before ,
and

a s f a r a s the lo wer p a rt o f the body ( Da ko ta V I , VI I ) . .

The a r m s are crossed an d the h a nds loosely collected a s in type posi -

tion ( B ) ar e folded o n the chest ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) Th a t per

,
. .

t a in s to m e .

Thro w the st , edge dow n w ard to w a rd the ground Wh en posses .

sion i s elsewhere the ar m i s exten ded i n th a t direction an d the above

, ,

sign m ade ( Ka io wa I Ap a ch e II Wichita I I ; Co manche I II )

. .

B oth sts w ith p al m s for w ard are held before the body righ t a b ov e
, , ,

left an d forci bly pushed dow n w a rd a short distan ce ( Sh osho ni a nd

, .

Ba na k I ) .

Deaf -
m ate n a t ur a l sig ns .
Poin t to the obj ect o wned , and then poi nt
t o the bre a st .
( B a l lar d )

Poi nt t o so m ethin g w ith the foren ger of o n e h a nd , a nd , n od the

h e ad then rest the other open h a n d o n t h e bre ast
, .

Sl ap th e bre a st with the h a nd , an d at the s am e ti m e ope n t he m outh

as if to say

My .

( Ze ig le r ) .

O i nstructed de a f m utes press

ur -
an i m a gi n ary obj ect to the bre a st
w ith the ri gh t h a nd .

It belon gs to m e .

Deaf m a te n a t ur a l
-
st or mP oi nt to the obj ect possessed , an d then to
the boso m , m e a nin g the spe ak er .
( Ba l lar d )

First point to th e obj ect w ith the foren ger n ext rest the foren ge r ,

o n the bre a st bone an d the n n od the h e a d

-

( Hasenstab )
,
. .

26
 2 02

Poi n t with th e ri gh t fore nger as i f to point to some t h ing , an d then

' '

fro m the th in g t o m yself ( Zeig ler ) .

I h a ve .

First m ak e the si gn for 1 , person a l pron o un a n d then the b a ck of ,

-

the righ t h a n d wh ich poi nts obliq uely upw a rd and tow ard the left , w ith
n gers extend ed an d j oi ned i s c arried out fro m the bre ast about ,

ei ghteen i nches an d pl a ced in the p a l m o f the left held pointin g

, ,

obliq uely up w a rd an d t ow a rd the right p al m upw ard n gers extended , , ,

j oined an d t hen b oth h an d s dr a wn i n to the body ( Da ko ta I ) Po s

,
. .

session I h a ve it ri gh t here in m y h a nd s .

Pl a ce the sts b a c k s ou tw a r d abo u t a foot in fron t of the n avel the

, , ,

ri gh t j u st above the left, the n m ove the m str a igh t forw a rd a couple o f
i n ches S o m e pl a ce the ri ght a little in a d v ance o f the left ( Da ko ta
.
-
.

1V ) . H oldin g fa st to every thin g .

M ak e the signs for 1 , M e ,

and Ha ve .
( H ida tsa I ; Ar ikar a I ) .

Deaf -
m a te n a tu r a l sig m M ove to and fro th e n ger sever a l ti m es to
th e bre a st .
( L a r so n )

A n other h as .

Pa ss th e ri gh t h an d q uick ly before the fa ce as if to say Go a w ay " , ,

th en m ak e the gesture f o r M i n e Wi ed ) The a r m s ar e r a i sed a nd . .

cl osed o ver the bre a st as in the si g n for M i n e They ar e then s uddenly .

thrown open fro m the bre a st tow ard a n other person w ith the p al m s out ,
.

w a rd There is n o si m i l a rity in either execution o r conception of this

.

si gn w i th th a t o f Wi ed they ar e eviden tly of die r e n t ori gin ( Bo teler )

N o t m in e .

First poin t to the person who h as the a rticle o r wh o h a s don e it with , ,

the ri ght in dex an d then m ak e the sig n for H a v e i t ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Reverse o f I h a ve it .

Rota te the ri ght h an d b a c k up w a rd , fro m side to side six or eight

, ,

inches describin g a n arc n gers sep ar a ted a li ttle slightly ben t , an d

, , ,

poin tin g forw a rd then m ak e the sign for H a v e ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

A n other : Poin t at the person and then m ak e the sign for H a v e . It

belon gs to h im .
( Da ko ta IV ) .

M ak e the sig n for P o sse ssi o n , M in e , in the direction of the per

so n , o r if the person i s n a m ed a nd no t presen t , the gesture i s m a de to
o ne side ( Dako ta V I )
. .

S am e sign as for H i s .
( Ka to wa I ; Co m an che III ; Ap a che II ; Wichi ta
II )
.
 2 03

To h a ve .

Both h a nds c lin c he d held edgewise the ri gh t a bout six i n ches a bove
, ,

the left a n d struc k do wn w a rd tow ard the ground as f ar a s the w a ist ,

,

reta i nin g the s am e dista nce between th e h a nds d ur i n g the wh ole o f the
gesture ( H ida tsa I ; Ar ikar a I )
. .

Indic a te the person , an d th ro w the clin ched h a n d edgew ise tow ard
t h e groun d a short dist a n ce ( stoppin g su d denly a s if stri k in g a resistin g
body ) the h a nd directed tow ard th e person or h is possession s ( Ka i o
,
.

ma I ; Co m a n ch e I II ; A p ac h e I I Wi chi ta I I ) .

It does n o t belo n g t o m e .

First m ak e th e gesture for l'I i n e then w a ve the righ t h a nd quic k ly ,

by a n d in fr on t o f th e fa ce tow a rd the righ t Wied ) . .

Referen ce h a vm g been m ade to th e p articul ar a rticle the rest is ex

pressed b y the si gn f o r N o n e I , h a ve n o n e ( Da ko t a I )
N
. ot .

m i ne .

Deaf -
mu te n a tu r a l sig ns The s a m e si gn as I t b elo n gs to m e ,

s upple m ented by a sh ak e of the he ad .

( Ba l lar d )
U se the si gn for I t b e lo n g s to lin e ,
at the s a m e ti m e sh ak e the
h e ad as if to say N o .

( Zeig ler ) .

P o t a to .

Collect th e n gers an d thu m b of the left h an d t o a poin t , h old the m

up w a rd before the body ( size ) then w ith the n gers an d th u m b of th e ,

ri ght h a n d si m i l arly col lected poin ti n g dow n w a rd m ak e sever al m otion s

, ,

forw a rd an d to w ard the e a rt h ( pl a n tin g ) then w ith the n gers an d ,

thu m b o f the right h an d poin tin g up w ard , curved a n d sep ara ted , m ak e
a m otion up w a rd a t a r m s len gth ( growth ) ( Ka io wa I ; Co m a nche I II :

.

Ap a ch e II ; Wi chi ta II ) .

Po u r , T o .

W ith the l eft h a n d held in fron t of the sto m ac h to represen t kettl e

bucket then th e righ t h a n d held ( A ) to the right an d belo w t h e

, ,

left h a nd , m ak es the si gn f o r C l l l b a nd i s so c a rried over the sta tion a ry ,

left an d turn ed up as though pourin g its conten ts i n to the left ( Da

,
.

ko ta I ) Dippin g o f w a ter w ith a cup to l l a bu c ket

. .

Pr a i r ie . Se e Pla in .

P r a i se .

I ta li a n sig n The forenger r a ised , in a s m uch as to say a th in g is to

be extolled to the sk ies .
( B a t le r
-

.
)
 2 ozi

Pr a y I pr ay you
. .

The p a l m o f the h a nd is held to w ard the perso n or person s a ddressed .

S o m eti m es both h a nd s a r e so held The O m ah a a n d Pon k a I ndi a n s say .

wi b d h a h a , I pr ay to y o u I petition you ; or
- -
n
w i b dh i stu b e I ,
- -

sm oo th y o u do wn w i th t h e han d In pr ayin g to th e sun the h a n d is ele .

v a te d a n d held with the p a l m up Say ( L on g s E xp e d i , 3 84 ) gives the

.
.
,

m e a nin g 43 : Be q uiet , o r be n ot a l a r m ed , o r h a v e p a tien ce

, O ma .

h a I ; Po n ka I )
S ooth in g . .

W ith the fa ce in clined up w a rd eye s look i n g tow ard the he a v en s both , ,

h a n ds a r e brought together fro m their n a tur al position s at the sides o f

the body describin g a con sider able sweep in fron t o f th e fa ce or above
,

or below it with p al m ar surfaces loo k in g tow ard e a ch other u p ri gh t

, , ,

n gers extended th u m bs in w ard ( T ) ; t h en t h e body an d h an ds ar e

,

l owered tow ard the groun d ( n e arly our k neelin g ) with eye s loo k i n g u p ,

w ard ( Dak o ta I ) This is m uch the s am e as w ith ci v ilized peop l e

. . .

The coun te n an ce pl a ci d an d t urn ed upw ar d th e a r m s elev ated an d , ,

w ith open ed p al m s th e h an ds v i b r ate a nd d iverge to a nd fr o m the

body i n i m it a tion of a n a n gel yin g a n d in execu ti on o f th e si gn f o r
Dei ty The h a n d n ow a ssu m es posit io n ( K ) a n d the se m i exten ded
.
-

,
-

in dex n ger poin ts in successive j er k s fro m the m outh up w a rd , a ru d e

-

i m i t ation of the si gn for T a lk ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) S pe ak i n g to . .

the Win ged on e above -

Dea/ l m ute n a t ur a l Siam Cl a sp the h a nds across e a ch other sh ut th e ,

eyes ,
an d m ove the lip s r a pidly .
( Ba lla r d )
Pr a ye r .

If the at h a n d is pressed to the lips an d then ce m oved up w ard to ,

the he a ven s it i n dic a tes a p r ayer or address to Dei ty ( Oj ibwa I )

, . .

E lev ate on e h a n d high tow ard the sk y spre a d h a n ds opposite fa ce , ,

p al m s u p a n d b a c k w ard ( X ) A
( p a ch e III )
Reference to Go d desire
. .

to recei ve .

Pr e g n a n c y .

Pa n to m i m ica llyexpressed by p a ssin g both h a n ds slightly arch e d , ,

p al m s tow a rd the body fro m the pubis in a curve up w a rd a n d in to w ard

,

the pit o f the sto m a ch ( Ute I ) C orrespon ds to the rotundi ty of th e

. .

a bdo m en

.

Pr e tty lso G o o d an d H a n d so m e
. See a .

Th e n gers a n d t h u m b so opposed as to for m a curve , are p assed ove r ,

the fa ce ne a rly touchi ng i t fro m the forehe a d t o the chi n then ad d the
, ,

S ign for G o o d ( L 0ng ) . .

A n other C urve t h e foren ger o f the right h a nd a n d pl ace the tip on ,

the ridge of the n ose between the eyes , so as to represen t a hi gh Ro m a n

n ose ; then brin g down the h a n d in a curvili ne a r m a n ner , until the wr i st
touches the bre a st ; a fter w hich ad d the sign f o r Go od .
( L ona )
Pa ss the extended h a n d ( right usu a lly ) , n gers j oined , p al m tow ard
t h e body i n a c a ressin g or s t ro k in g m a n ner vertic a lly dow n w a rd in
, ,

front of, a n d then ce horizon ta lly fro m , the body i n i m m edi ate j uxt ap o ,
~

sit io n to the fa ce or th at p art of the person desired to be indic a ted .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

Sa m e as H a n d so m e .
( Da ko ta
The s a m e si gn as for Go o d .
( Da ko ta I V ) .

Dea f -
m u te na t ur a l sign .
A rch the eyebrows an d s m a ck the lips .
( Ba l
la r d )
.

P r i e st .

I ta li an sig n-
.
The
p al m s l a id together before the bre ast an d the eyes
xed either on he a ve n 0 1 e a rth ( B utler ) . .

P r i so n e r .
( Co m p a re I n , W i th i n .
)
Th e foren ger a nd th u m b o f the left h a n d are hel d in the for m o f a
se m icircle , Open i n g tow ard an d ne ar the bre ast an d the fore nger of ,

t h e ri ght representi n g t h e pri son er , is pl aced uprigh t withi n the curve ,

a n d p a ssed fro m o n e side to a n other i n order to sh o w th at it will n ot be ,

per m i tted to p ass o u t ( L 0ng ) . .

S ign f o r T a ke p r i sode an d the h an ds cli nched an d crosse d

n e r ma ,

b a ck to b a ck as thou gh bound ti gh tly ( C heye nn e I ) T ak en an d . .

boun t
Cross the wrists a foot in fron t of th e n eck h an ds closed
, ,
h a ck s f o r
w ard ( Da ko ta IV ) Ti ed
. .

S am e th e sign for C a p tu r e w ith the a dditi on of the sign for

as ,

Yo u o r I w hen a p re se n t in divi d ual is concern ed ( O to and M isso ur i I ) . .

To seize w hen i n b a ttle .

B othh a n ds clin ched , the right l a id tr a n sversely a cross the left at the
w rists W y/
. a n do t I ) Tied a r m s
. .

M e the si gn for B a t t l e th e n w ith the right gr a sp an i m a gi n a ry

ak

person fro m the ri ght side exten d both f o r e n g e rs tow ard th e ground , ,

the re m a in in g n gers an d th u m bs closed ; pl ace the m side by side an d

m ove the m tow a rd the left A
( p a ch e I )

O ne gr a sped in b a ttle an d . .

led a w ay by the c aptor .

Deaf -
m ute n a t ur a l sig n Pl a ce the n gers of one h a n d u p on those of
the other , in dic a tin g th e cross b ars o f a j ail , an d then poi nt wi th the -

foren g er to so m e person w ho i s put i n j ail ( H asensta b ) . .

 2 06

I ta li a n sig n s Th e v ul g aris m
to l oo k between b a rs for to be in

pri son corresponds to the gest u re w hich i s m ade by crossin g the n g ers
o f both h an ds before the eyes so a s to m a k e a ch ec k ered gr a te , or b y

coveri ng the eyes with the n gers of one h a n d dr a wn a p art ( B utler ) .

S pecic a lly f o r ca p tive .

The ar m s h a nging down a nd wrists together or cro ssed .

( Butle r )
To t ak e .

Both h and s n g ers sli gh tly hook ed th u m b ly i n g a g ai nst foren ger ,

, ,

s u ddenly thr us t forw a rd to t he left an d j er k ed b ack q u ic k ly tow ard the

body ( C h ey e n ne I )
. .

The left h a nd held a bo u t 1 8 i nches in fro n t o f t h e l eft b r e ast o b l iq u e l y ,

u pw a rd , ed ge of n ger s o u tw a rd ( B is q u ic k ly seized a ro u n d the

w ri st by the right h an d p assed fro m in fron t of the ri g ht bre a st b ack
, ,

u pw a rd a nd dr a w n r a pidly i n t o w a rd an d n e a r the left bre a st

, ( Da ko ta .

H e is co m e ; I h a ve t a k en h im ; le a din g h im c a p ti ve .

Both a r m s ar e exed before bre a st a n d h a n d s m a de t o exec ute the ,

si gn for gh t ; t h e l eft ar m then se m ie xt e n d e d is le f t a secon d ; t hen

, ,

sie z e d a t wri st by the right h a nd i n type position ( G ) ; p a l m s of both

fa ce the gro u nd ( O to
O ne tak en i n gh t or m i scon d u ct .
.

Pr o p e r t y . See P o s se ss i o n .

P r u d e n t or C a u t i o u s ( C o m p are D a n g e r ) . .

H old righ t h a nd i n fron t of righ t bre ast or p a rtly to th e right sid e

an d lower down p al m dow n gently m ove it up an d dow n two o r three
,
,

ti m es then hold it stil l a few m o m en ts an d gently depress t h e h a nd ,

, ,

with slight bow of the he a d to rig ht ( Oj ib wa I V ) .

Sec Da n g e r . Pr uden t, ca ut io us, a r e n ot the op p osite of f e e l .

( Da
ko ta I) .

Pl a ce the tips of the exte n ded n gers a ga in st the te m p l es th en poi n t ,

the m u pw ard , the eyes followi ng the s am e direction S u perior j u d g .

m en t .
( Wy rm do t I ) .

P u r c h a se . Se e T r a de .

P ut it b ac k . Se e L et a lo ne .

Qu a n t i t y , large ; m an y; m u ch ; n um b er .

The a t of t h e right h a nd p a ttin g t h e b ack of the left h a n d, w h ic h is

repe ated in proportion to the gre a ter or lesser q u a ntity ( Dun ba r ) . .

S i m ple repeti tion .

The h an ds a n d ar m s ar e p a ssed in a c urviline a r direc tion o u t wa rd a nd

down w ard , a s if showin g the for m of a l arge gl obe t he n the h an ds
 2 07

closed an d elev a ted , as i f so m eth in g w as grasped in e ach h and

ar e

a n d h eld u p abo ut as high a s the face ( L o ng ) .

Brin g the h a n ds u p i n fron t of the bo dy wi th th e n gers c a refu lly

k ept distin ct ( C heyenne sign Report of L ie u t J W A bert
. . . . .
,

p.

Both
h and s c l osed brou ght u p in a c u rved m otion to w ard e ach other
,

to the level o f t h e nec k or chin ( C hey e nn e I ) . .

C l u tch th e air severa l ti m es w ith bot h h a n ds The m otion gre atly

at .

rese m b l e s th o se of d a n se use s pl ayin g the c a st an ets ( Oj ib wa I ) . .

ny M a .

A si m u lt a n eo u s m ove m en t of both h a n ds as if g a therin g or he ap i n g

,

Ar ap a h o I ) L i ter lly a he a p

up .
( a . .

Both h an ds w ith spre a d a nd sligh tly c urved n gers are h eld p enden t
, ,

a bo u t two feet ap a rt before the thi gh s ; then dr a w the m tow a rd o n e

a n oth e r h orizon t ally dr a w in g the m u p w a rd a s they co m e together

, , .

( A bsa r o ka I ; S h osh o ni a nd Ba na k I ; Ka i o zoa I ; C o m an che I I I ; Ap ach e

. -

II ; Wichita II ) A n accum ul at o in o f obj ects

. .

H a nd s ab out in ch es fro m the gro u n d i n fron t a n d abou t the s a m e

18
di st an ce a p art h e l d scoo p fashion p al m s l oo k in g tow ard e ach other
,
-

, ,

sep a r ated n gers etc then wi th a divin g m otion as if scoopin g u p corn

,
.
, ,

fro m the g ro u nd brin g the h a nd s n e arly together with n gers ne ar l y

, ,

c l o sed as tho u gh h oldin g the corn a n d c arry u pw a rd to the hei gh t o f

, ,

the bre a st w here t h e h a nd s a re t urn ed over n ger s poi ntin g down w ard
, , ,

sep a r a ted as th ou gh t h e con ten ts were al lowed to drop to the grou nd

,
.

( Da ko ta
pen th e n gers of both h a nd s an d h old the two h a nds before the
O ,

bre a st w ith th e n gers u p w ard an d a little a p art a nd the p al m s t u rned

, ,

tow a rd e ach other as if gr aspin g a n u m ber of things ( I r o qu o is I )

,
. .

Pl ac e t h e h a nd s on either side of a n d as h igh as the he ad then o p en ,

a n d c l o se the n gers r a pidly fo u r or ve ti m es ( Wy a n do t I ) C o u nt . .

in g ten s a n i ndenite n u m ber of ti m e s

.

Deaf ma te na tur a l signa Pu t the n gers o f t h e t wo h a nds to g ether

-

tip t o ti p an d r ub the m wi th a rapid m otion ( Ba l la r d )

,
.

M ak er ap id m ove m en t of the n g ers an d th u m bs o f both h an ds

a

u pw ard an d dow n w a rd an d at the s am e ti m e c au se both lips t o to uch

,

e ach other in ra pid su ccession an d both eyes to be h alf opened ( Ha s ,

.

ensta b .
)
. M ove th e n g ers o f both h a n ds forw a rd an d b a ck w ard .
( Zeig len )
 H orses .

R a i sethe right ar m above the he a d , p al m for w ard , an d thr ust for

w a rd forcibl y o u a l in e Wi th the sho ulder ( O ma h a I ) . .

Person s :

T a ke up a b u nch of gr a ss o r a clod of e a rt h pl a ce i t in the h and o f

the person a ddressed w h o l oo k s dow n u pon it ( O ma h a I ) R e p r e
, . .

sen ts as m an y o r m ore tha n the p a rticles con ta ined in the m a ss .

H an ds a nd n gers in terl a ced .

( M acgo wan )

M u ch .

M ove both h an ds to w ard one a n o ther a nd sl ightly u pw a rd .

1 h a ve seen thi s sign b u t I thin k it is u se d on l y f o r a rtic l es th a t m ay be

,

p iled o n the gro u n d o r form ed into a he ap The si gn m ost in u se f o r th e .

gen er al id e a o f m uch or ma ny I h a ve given y o u before ( M a tthe u s ) .

- -

Both h an d s at an d extended pl a ced before the bre a st n g er tips

, ,
-

tou chin g , p al m s d o w n ; then sep ar a te the m by p as sin g o u tw ard an d

down w ard as if s m oothin g the o u ter s u rfa ce of a globe ( A bsa r o ka I ) .

Sh osh o ni a n d Ba n a k l ; Ka t o u a I ; C o m anch e Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta I L ;

'

A he ap .

Mu c h is incl uded i n M a n y or B ig , as the c ase m ay req u ire .

( Da
ko ta I ) .

The h a nds w ith n gers widely sep ar a ted sl i ghtly bent poi n tin g f o r
, , ,

w ard , an d b a c k s o u t w ard , ar e to be r ap idly a pproxi m ated thro u gh dow n

w ard c urves , fro m p osition s twe l ve to thir ty si x i n ches a p a rt , a t th e -

hei gh t o f the n a vel , a n d q u ic k ly cl osed O r th e h a nds m ay be m oved .

u n til t h e righ t is a bove the left ( Da ko t a IV )

S o m u ch th a t it h a s
. .

to be g a thered w ith both h an ds .

Both h a nd s an d a r m s a r e p artly exten ded e a ch h a n d is then m ade to

de scribe , si m ul ta neo u sl y wi th t h e other fro m the h e a d down w ard the , ,

ar c o f a circle c ur vin g o u tw ar d s Thi s is u sed f o r L a r g e i n so m e

.

sen ses ( M a n da n and H ida tsa I )

. .

H an ds o p en , p al m s t urn ed in , held a bo u t
hree feet a p a rt , an d a bo u t t
two feet fro m th e gro u n d R aise the m abo ut a foot then brin g i n a n
.
,
.

u pw a rd c ur ve tow a rd e a ch other A s they p a ss e a ch other , p al m s do wn ;

-

the righ t h an d i s a bo ut three i nches a bove the l eft ( O m a ha I ) . .

Pl ace both h a nds at a n d exten ded , th u m b s to u chin g , p al m s down

w ard in fron t of an d a s hi gh a s the face ; the n m ove the m ou tw ard an d
,
 2 09

down w a rd a sh ort distan ce t o w w ar d their res pective sides th u s ,

d e sc r ib
i n g the upper h al f of a circle ( Wy a ndo t I ) A he a p . . .

S weep both h an ds as if i n cl osi ng a l a rge object ; w a v e the h a nd s

o ut

forw ard a n d so m ewh a t u p w a rd ( Ap ach e I I I ) S u ggestin g i m m en sity

. . .

And he a vy .

S i m il a r t o M except w hen
h an d s ar e r ai sed cl ose th e sts b a c k s
an , ,

of h a nds down a s it l if t ing so m e th in g he a vy ; the n m ove a sh ort dis

'

t ance u p and down sever al ti m es ( O m a h a .

P l en ty .

R a ise the a r m s above the he a d n gers i n terl a ced to repre sen t th e ,

l odge poles sep a r a te an d brin g together a g a in

, ( O ma ha I ) Yo u se e . .

h ow I sit i n a l a rge l odge a n d how co m forta ble I am .

A n other : S am e the precedin g then brin g open h a nd s together in

as ,

fron t p a l m s do wn ex ten ded ; sep a r a te the h a nd s to their respecti ve

, ,

sides ( O ma ha
. I a m sittin g i n a good lod ge or h a v e a good ten t ,

r e here .

A n oth er Righ t a r m c urved horizon t ally , w ith the ti ps of the n ge rs

:

tow a rd the bre a st ; then sl ightly extend th e ar m a n d descri be a circle

by ret urni n g the h an d an d p assin g it i n w a rd p a st the bre a st tow ard the
ri gh t shou lder ( O m a ha I ) A m a n h as plen ty in hi s ten t ; o r I h a ve
. .

p len ty a ro un d here

.

Deaf m a te n a t ur a l Sig n S tretc h the

-
left a r m at full len gth a nd m o ve ,

the foren ger of the right h a n d al on g i t to the sho ulder ( Ba l lar d ) .

Q u e st i o n ; i n q u i r y ; i n te r r o g a t io n .
( C o m p a re F o o l ; l n
d e c i si o n .

The p al m o f the h a n d u p w a rd a nd c a rried circ ul a rly o u tw ard ,

and

depressed ( Da nba r ) .
-

The h an d held u p w i th the th u m b ne a r the fa ce an d th e p a l m directed ,

tow a rd the per so n o f w h o m the in q u iry i s m a de ; the n rota ted u pon

the w ri st two o r three ti m es edgewi se to de n ote u ncert a in ty ( L o ng ) ,
.
-

The m otion m igh t be m ist a k en for the derisi ve v u l gar gest ure c a l led ,

t a k i n g a si gh t
donn er n u pie,
d de nez
de scen din g to o u r s m a l l boys ,

fro m anti q u i ty Th e sep ar a te m otion o f the n gers in th e v ulg a r gest

.

u r e as u sed i n o u r e a s tern citie s is however m ore n e a rly correl a ted w ith , ,

so m e of the Indi an si gn s for F0 0 ] It m ay be n oted th a t the L a ti n .

sa g a x ,
fro m wh ic h i s deri ved s a ga ci ty w as chiey u sed to den ote

,

the k een scent o f do g s so there is a rel a tion esta bli shed between t he
,

na s a l org a n a n d w i sdo m o r it s a bsen ce an d th a t susp e n d e r e n a so ,

w a s a cl a ssic phr a se for h o a xin g The It a li a n expression s rest are co n

.

27
 210

an o di n a so co n t a n to di n a so , etc , m en ti oned by the C a n on

p al m ,

.

DE J O R I O refer to the Sa m e v ul gar gest u re i n w hi ch the face is su p

, .

posed to be thr u st for wa rd silli l y .

E xtend the open h a n d perpendic ul a rly w ith the p a l m o u tw a rd , an d

m ove it fro m side to side sever a l ti m es ( Wi ed ) T hi sign i s stil l u sed . s .

Fo r o ut wa rd , howe ver I wo uld s ubsti t ut e forw a rd The h a n d is

,
-
.

u s u ally , b u t n ot al w ays held before the fa ce ( M a tthe ws )

,
. .

Righ t h a nd n gers p o i ntin g u p w a rd , p al m o u tw a rd el ev a ted to the

, ,

l e ve l o f the sho ulder extended to wa rd the person ad dressed , an d sli ghtl y

,

s h a k e n fro m si de to side ( C h ey e nne I ) . .

Deaf -

m a te n a t ur a l sig n A q u ick m oti on of the lips w i th an i n q u ir

in g loo k .
( Ba lla r d )
A ustr a li a n sig n O ne i s a sort of n ote o f in terroga ti on
For in st an ce .
,

if I were t o m eet a n a ti ve a n d m a k e the si gn : h a nd at , n gers an d

th u m b extended the two m iddle n gers to u ch in g the t w o o u ter sl ightl y
, ,

se p ar a ted fro m the m iddle by t urn in g the h a n d p al m u p w ard a s I m e t

m eet h i m it w o uld m e a n : W here a r e y o u goin g ?
,
I n other w ords I
sho ul d say M i nn a ? ( wh a t n a m e t ) ( S my th ) .

H as he
Deaf -
m a te M ove to a n d fro the
na tur a l sig n n ger sever al ti m es
tow a rd the person spo k e n of ( L a r so n ) .

H a ve you "

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sig n M ove t h e n ger to an d f ro sever al ti m es
tow ard the p erson to wh o m the one is spe ak in g .
( L ar so n )

W hen i

With its i n dex extended an d poin tin g forw ard b ac k up w a rd rot a te , ,

the ri gh t h a n d se ver al ti m es to the ri ght and left describin g a n ar c ,

w ith the in e x ( Da ko ta I V )
i

. .

A re y o u z
.

Deaf m ute n a tur a l sig n s Poi n t to the person spo k e n to a nd sl i gh tl y

no d the he ad , w ith an i n q u irin g look .
( B a l la r d )

Poi n t with the foren ger ,

as if to poin t tow a rd the secon d person , at

the sam e ti m e n od the he a d a s if to sa y

yes ( Zeig l er )
.

.

Qu i c k , Q u i c k l y .

S a m e m otion and p osition as S o o n , ar m s l ightly m ore r a ised a nd

m ov ed o ut fa ster a nd thro w n b a c k m ore r a p id l y b y a q uic k m oti on
.

( Oj ib wa I V ) .
 2 11

Both h a n ds sho ul d be p l a ced h o rizon tal p al m s u p w ard poin tin g for , ,

w a rd , abo u t three i n ches a p art in fron t o f th e l ower p a rt of the chest ,

an d then q u ic k ly r a ised a bo u t eight i nches a t the s a m e ti m e sh ak in g ,

the m a little fro m side to side ( Da ko ta V I ) Ide a o f lightness and . .

,

therefore q u ic k m otion .

Qu ie t , b e be n ot al a r m ed ; h a ve p a tien ce .

The p al m of the h a n d i s he l d to w a rd the person . This is al so th e

S i gn for S ur r e nd er .
( L 0ng ) .

Pl ace the fore n ger or the h a n d over the m o u th .

( A r ap a ho I) .

The right h a n d wi th p al m down w ard horizont a l , a t , n gers ex ,

ten ded a ud poin tin g forw ard ( W ) bro u gh t to the fron t m edi a n lin e o f
body , an d a b o u t a foot fro m i t an d the n c a rried o n t h e s a m e lev e l to the
,

ri ght side o f the body , w here t wo or three q u ic k u pw a rd a n d down w a rd

m ove m ents of the h a n d a n d a r m co m p l ete the si gn ( Da ko ta I ) Sit . .

dow n ; be q u iet .

Deaf
m u te n a tu r al sig ns .
H o l d the h a n d stil l in the a ir .
( Ba l l a r d ) .

Fold th e a r m s .
( L a r so n )
P atience .

The open a t right h a n d is l a id b a c k o utw a rd over the left bre a st an d , , - ,

then both h a nds wi th n gers exten ded se p ar a ted , an d so m ewh a t c u r ved ,

, ,

a r e held h orizon t ally wi th p a l m a r s urfa ces l oo k in g tow a rd o ne a n other ,

,

a few in ch es a p a rt , in fr ont o f th e body ( P t urned horizon t a l ly ) ( this ,

is E xp a n ded la r g e) ; an d then the h a nds a r e closed ( sts B ) an d p a ssed

,

slow ly over o n e a nother with a s l i ght sh a k in g or tre m u lo u s m otio n o f

the h an ds an d a r m s ( Da ko ta I ) A ( l arge ) p a tien t, en d u ri n g he a rt
. . .

Ra b b it lso a r e
. Se e a .

Th e fore and littl e n ger o f th e ri ght h a nd ar e extended , re p resen tin g

the e ars of the a n i m al ; the h a n d is the n bobbed forw a rd to sho w the
l e ap in g m otion of the a n i m al ( Lo na ) .

Ra in .
( C o m p are S n o w
He a t ) an d .

Begin wi th the si gn of W a t e r then r a ise the h a nds even with the ,

forehe ad , extendin g the n gers o utw a rd a n d give a sh a k in g m ot ion a s ,

if to repre sen t the drippi n g of w a ter ( Dun bar ) . .

The si gn for W ate r precedes th a t for Sn o w .

( L o ng )
S ca tter the n gers do wn w a rd . T he s a m e sign den otes S n o w .

( E u r to n )
-

I m it a te i t s fall wit h th e h and p al m do wn p arti al l y closed n gers , , ,

sep ar a ted a nd poi ntin g down w a rd ; then m ove the h a n d in a direct

co urse tow a rd the g ro u n d ( A r ap a ho I ) . .
 2 12

Both h a nds n gers a nd th u m bs droopi ng held to the l e ve l o f the

, ,

he a d ; ngers sl ow l y closed an d opened a n d m otion dow n w a rd m a de , ,

a s tho u gh irting w a ter fro m the en ds of the n gers ( C hey enne I ) . .

C a rry bot h h a nd s over the he ad w ith n gers sep ar a ted cu rved dow n
,
.

w ard ( Q ) , p al m s in w a rd then m ak e a slopin g down w a rd m ove m en t w ith

,

the h a nds exin g an d extendin g al l the n gers sligh tly an d w ith con
,

sid e r a b l e r a pidity , as n e arly as po s sible i n i m it a tion of th e d rops o f r a i n

falli n g o n the fa ce an d body ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m th e fal l in g of r a in

. . .

S uspend the h ands abo u t a fo ot i n fron t of the sho u lders h a ck s for ,

w a rd n gers sep a ra ted a n d ben t a li ttle an d poin tin g down w a rd a n d

, ,

sh ak e the n gers , or a p p roxi m ate a nd sep ar a te their en ds on ce o r se ver al

ti m es S o m e , e ach ti m e w hi l e sep ara tin g the ends o f the n gers , throw
.

the h an ds d own w a rd a bo u t ei g ht in ches ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

H old the ri gh t h a n d penden t , w i th n gers sep ar a ted a n d poi n tin g

dow n w a rd , before the ri g h t si de a nd o n a level wi th t h e he ad ; then
thr u st i t dow n w a rd a nd b a c k to i ts rst position repe atin g the m ove ,

m ent t wo or three ti m e s ( Da ko ta V V I Hi da tsa I ; A r i ka r a I )

.
,
.

The h an d is held o n a level w i th the top o f the he ad n gers sep a r ated ,

an d pende n t ; i t i s then m oved dow n w a rd r apidly a fe w inch es a n d

su ddenly a rrested It m ay be restored to i ts origin a l posi tion an d the

.

m otion m ay be repe a ted on ce or o f t en er ( M an dan a n d Hi da tsa -

.

Both h an ds held to ei ther side a nd in fron t of the he a d p al m s down , ,

n gers penden t a n d sep ara ted ; the n m ove t h e h a nd s down w a rd a n d

b ac k a ga in repe a tin g sever a l ti m es ( Wy a n do t I )
, . .

R a ise ri ght h a n d in fron t o f bre a st , say fteen i n ches fro m body , b ac k

u p w a rd n gers h a n ging dow n ( P 1 w ith ngers h a ngin g down h an d
, , ,

horizon t al ) then m ak e m otion a s tho ugh sprin kl in g w a ter m ovi n g h a n d

, ,

up a n d down fro m wrist o u t ( S a h ap t i n I ) Sp ri n k lin g w a ter

. . .

H old the righ t h an d

in fron t of the side of the he a d p al m d own n , ,

g ers penden t a n d sep a ra ted ; then m ove t h e h a n d u p a nd d ow n a short

d ist a nce sever al ti m es ( U1e I ) . .

H old right h a nd i n fron t of or to one side of th e fa ce p al m d ow n

the , ,

n gers penden t an d sep a r ated then m ove the h a n d d own w ard an d

b a ck to it s ori g in a l posi tion sever a l ti m es m ost of the m ove m en t bein g
, ,

at the wrist For a very he a vy r a in both h a n ds a r e si m i l arly e m ployed ,

.

b ut wi th a m ore V i goro u s m otion ( Ap a ch e I ) . .

Deaf -

m a te n a t ur a l sig ns A n up a nd - -
dow n m otion of the extended
n ger s .
( B a lla r d )
Fir st poin t o u t i n so m e directi on ; next, m ove the open h a nd dow n
,

f a st an d u p slowly s u ccessively , an d then n od the he a d

, ( Hase nsta b ) . .
 2 13

M ove th e n gers u p w ard an d dow n w a rd .

( L ar son )
Drizzlin g .

Pl a ce th e closed h a n d at the hei ght of the fa ce p al m down , le a vi n g ,

t h e index poin tin g down w a rd an d a li ttle tow a rd the left then m ove ,

th e h a n d up a nd do wn sever al ti m es ( A p a ch e .

Ra i n b o w .

The righ t h an d w ith i ndex n g e r only exten ded an d poi ntin g upright -

( J ) is c arried fro m left to righ t in fron t o f t h e he ad o n a cu rve an d

, , ,

then down w ard tow a rd th e h orizon with a gr a d ual ly decre a sin g S pir a l
m otion u n til n a lly w i th o u t thi s m oti on h an d c arried o n dow n w a rd ,
, , ,

with n ger pointin g upw a rd ( Da ko ta I ) To go across the he aven s . .

wr a pped w i th d i e r e n t colors
'

.

R a sh or r a sh l y
, .

Indic ate by q uick u n s te ady m otion o f h a nd s a n d body a git ate both

, ,

h a nd s an d body m ove h an ds qu ic k ly to left i n fron t an d to righ t ,

,

p a l m s d own w ith j er k in g m oti on s up an d down , m ost vio l en tl y dow n

,

w ard he ad sh ak en a littl e ( Oj i bw a IV )
,
. .

Re ce n t l y . Se e T i m e , Re c e n t l y .

R e l a t i o n sh ip .

A u n t ( m a tern al ) .

M ak e th e s ign s fo r M o th e r , e r s ( to the righ t ) , B r o t h e r an d

S i st e r , an d Wo nlan . ( Ka i o w a I; C o m an ch e I II ; Ap a ch e H;
Wi ehi ta II .
)
A un t
( p a tern al ) .

M a k e the si gn s f o r F a t h er H e r s ( t o the ri ght ) B r o t h e r a n d

, ,

S i st e r , an d W om an .
( Ka io wa I ; C o m a nch e I I I ; Ap a che 1 1 ;
Wich ita
Broth er sister ; brother an d sister
, .

The si gn f o r M a n ( an d for si ster o f a wo m an ) s u cceeded b y p l a cin g ,

th e en ds o f th e fore a n d m i d dle ngers o f one h a n d together in th e

m on th ( L ona)
.

The two rst n g e r ti ps ar e p u t i n to the -

m o u th , den otin g th a t they
fed fro m the s am e bre a st ( B ar to n ) .

Pl a ce th e fore an d m iddle
n gers in the m o uth th us i m p l yin g n u rsin g ,

at th e bre a st by a co m m on m other ( Ar ap aho I ) . .

Tips of the fore a n d m i d dle ngers of the righ t h a n d pl a ced bet ween
n ostrils a n d m o u th ; bro u ght w ith a s udden c u rved m otion forw ard ,

o u tw a rd a n d obliq u ely to the ri ght expresses rel a tion ship between

,
 2 14

children of s a m e fat her a n d m o t her ; m us t be preceded b y the si gn f or

M a n or W o m a n , to specify br o ther or sister ( Ch eyenne I ) . .

Put the tips o f the fore a n d secon d n gers of ei th er h an d between

the teeth ( Sac Fo r , a n d K ickap o o I ) Two person s suc k in g one
.
,
.

bre a st
.

Firs t a nd secon d ngers o f righ t h a n d exten ded ( N ) ,pl aced obliquely

b a c k s outw a rd , o n the lips o r their tips in the m ou t h ( Da ko ta I )
, . .

Nour ish m en t fro m the s a m e bre a st .

Pl ace the tips of the extended fore a nd m idd l e n gers o f the ri gh t

h a nd between o r a g a in st t h e lips an d a fterw a rd dra w the m forw ard ,

a bout a foot the other n gers to be closed an d the b a c k of the h a n d

,

up w ard ; t h e n m a k e the rst p a r t o f the sign for M a n , i e the index . .

,
'

horizont a lly i n fron t of the priv a tes S ister : The s a m e as for brother , .

b ut in ste a d of the si gn for m an use the si gn for w o m a n a fter dr a w in g

the n gers fro m the m outh ( Da ko ta I V ) .S uc k in g the s am e bre a st . .

A n other Wi th the ri g ht h a n d closed le a ve the i nd ex an d secon d

: ,

n gers extended p al m dow n ; pl a ce th e tips ne a r the m outh a n d j er k

,

t h e m forw a rd a bout si x i nches ( Da k o ta VI )

W
e derived n ouri s h
. .

m en t fro m the s a m e bre a st .

Brin g t h e ri g ht h a n d to the li ps touchi n g the m wi t h the in dex ,

an d

m iddle n gers ( O m a ha
.

To su ck fro m th e s a m e bre a st .

0b
t ain e d f ro m J L a Fleche a s a Pa ni a n d O ma ha si gn
.
,
.

Thrust the rst n gers i n to the m outh .

( O m a ha I) .

T he left a r m i s se m i extended w i th h an d i n posi tion ( J

-

,
m odied
by bei n g hel d horizon tal outw a rd an d in dex exten ded ; the righ t a r m ,
h a n d a nd n ger n o w a ssu m e the s a m e positi o n a bove a n d beh ind left .

Now the ri gh t index is brought a side of left e a ch extended p a ra llel

, ,
.

Fin ally the ri gh t i ndex i s brough t to poin t to th e ca rd i a c region ( O to .

Two sep r a te irth s li k e i ppe r nce d he rt

a b a ,
n a a a an a t a .

Thr ust the index an d secon d ngers i n to the m outh .

( Po n ka I) .

We
two suc k ed fro m the s a m e bre a st .

Brother ( s a i d by m a le ) .

Brin g the left a r m a nd h a nd to the left bre a st ,

a s if in e m bra cin g .

( Wy an do t I ) .

Brother ( s a id by si ster or oth er brother ) .

M a k e the sign for B ro t h e r a n d] S i st e r followed by th a t f o r M , an .

( Kai o w a I C o ma nch e II I Ap a che I I Wi chi ta I I ) .

 2 15

E xten d the rst tw o n gers the ri gh t h an d ; brin g the h a n d with of ,

n gers thu s exte n ded opposite the m o n t h ; then pl a ce these tw o n gers

,

between the lip s ( C o man che I ) Bo t h took n ourish me n t fro m the

. .

s a m e bre a st .

Ri ght h a n d n gers a n d th u m b closed ; brin g in front o f the right side ,

-
'

extendin g an d sep a r a t in g the fore an d secon d n gers wh ich a re slowl y ,

brough t together so a s to lie side by side ( Pa i Ute .

Both h a n d s closed f o r e n g e r s exten ded ; brin g the m together , verti

,

c ally in fron t of the body w ith the p al m s forw ard ( Pa i Ute I )

, , . .

Pl a ce the rst two n gers of the ri gh t h a n d between the lips . Wi

chi ta I) .

Brother s d a ugh te r
.

M ak e the si gn s f o r B ro t h e r , W o m a n a n d B o r n ( q uick ly or ,

contin uously wi th ter m i n a tio n of l a st sig n to the right of the body )

,
.

( Da ko ta V I.
)
Brother s so n
.

M ak e t h e sign s for B ro t h e r Ni a l l , a n d B o r n ( to the right side , .

of the bo d y an d q uic k ly a fter o r con ti n uously wi th ter m i n ation o f gest

,

ure for l'l a n ) ( Da ko ta V I ) . .

Brother s wife
.

M a k e the signs for B ro t h e r , M an , W oman ,

an d P o ss e ss i o n
( H i s ) ( Da ko ta V i )
. .

M ak e th e si gn s f o r M y , B ro t h e r ( B ro t h e r a n d S i st e r an d
M a n ) H i s ( m ade to th e right ) S a m e or s i m i l a r , a nd W o m a n
, , .

( K aio w a I ; C o m a nch e III ; Ap a che 1 1 ; Wi chi ta II ) .

Brother
si ster an d .

Wi th the right h an d closed le a v in g the i ndex an d secon d n gers ,

extended a n d sli ghtly ben t brin g the h a n d before the ch in , p al m do w n ,,

n ger ti ps n e a rly to uchin g the m o n t h ; then dr a w the m dow n w a rd an d

for w a rd This sign is m a de wh e n the person a ll uded to is presen t , an d
.

h as been referred t o by ei ther person o r a n inq uirer ( Kaio w a 1 ; C o ,

.
.

m a nch e 1 11 ; Ap ache II ; Wi ch i ta II ) N ursed fro m the s a m e bre a st . .

The rst ph al an ges of the rst an d secon d n gers a re pl a ced between

th e li ps an d th en with dr a w n This represen ts so m ewh a t fa ul tily th at .

both h ave b een n ouri shed fro m the s a m e source The si gn is for co m .

m o n gen der M a sc ulin e o r fe m i nin e m ay a fterw a rd be i ndic a ted b y t h e

.

a ppropri a te si gn s ( M a nda n a nd H id a tsa I )

. .

Brothe r and sister ( s a id by fe m ale ) .

In dic ate the in dividu al , t hen gr a sp the t ip of the foren ger wi th t h e

thu m b an d i ndex ( Wy a ndo t I ) . .
 216

Da ugh ter .

Mk e the s am e sign as for G i r l ; then indic a te Pa r en t or Po ssessi on

a

b y pointin g to the person or l ayin g t h e i ndex vertic a lly a g a inst the,

bre ast or poi n ti n g to it ( A bsa r o ka I Sho sho n i an d Ba n a k I )

. .

First m ak e th e si gn f o r O f f sp r i n g , then design a te Age as described

in t h e sign f o r C h i l d , a n d co m plete by th e sign for W o m a n ( Da .

k o ta I ) .

M ak e t h e sign s f o r B i r t h an d I on i an .
( Kaio wa I ; C o m a nch e
III ; Ap ache II ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

Deaf -
m ute na tu r a l sign .
P oin t
the n ger to the ca r ( bec a use of the
e ar rin gs ) an d
-
the n p ut down the h a nd when n a turally stretched o ut to , ,

t h e k nee ( L a r so n )
.

Da u g h ter s d a ug h ter
.

M ak e the signs for W o m a n an d B ro t h e r ( S ister ) B o r n ( to ,

t h e ri ght o f the body ) a n d W o nn a n ( Da ko ta V I )

, . .

Da u gh ter s so n
.

M ak e th e sign s for W o n l a n an d B ro t h e r ( S ister ) B o r n , ,

an d

M a n both o ff fro m the right side of the body

, ( Da ko ta VI ) . .

F a m ily m e m bers of o ne ,
.

Gra sp the t ip of the foren ger w i th the thu m b a n d n gers o f the right
h a nd \Vhen m ore n gers a r e u sed th a n the index thu m b it indic a tes
. ,

m ore i ndi vidu a ls Wy an do t I ) . .

F a ther m oth er ( p aren ts )

,
.

The s am e si gn of issue fro m the loin s a s irs p r i n g , with add ition s :

e g , for M o t h e r gi ve I o r M y
. . n ext W o m a n , an d then the sy m
, ,

bol of p a ren t age For G r a n d m o t h e r a d d to the end cl a sped h an ds

.
,

closed eyes an d li k e an ol d w o m a n s ben t b a ck ( B u r to n )

,

.

With the ri ght h a n d pretend to gr a sp the righ t bre a st with the ex

ten ded n gers a n d th u m b ; th en dr a w t he m ou tw ard abou t tw e l ve i n ches
C o m p a re P a r e n t a g e ( A bsa r o ka I ; S h o sh oni a nd B anak I )
. .

The righ t h an d , w i th n g ers a rched sep a r a t ed tips , poi n ti n g i nw a rd ,

t o w ard the a bdo m en is c arried in a n d ou t t w o or three ti m es w ith a sort

,

of gr abbin g m otion ( Da ko ta I ) Pa rt o f the s a m e body

. . .

A fter m ak i n g the si gn in fron t of the priv a tes for M an ,

m ak e the
sign for M o t h e r ( Da ko ta i v ) . .

A n other : Touch the ri ght o r left bre a st wi th the j oined en ds of th e

n gers o f the righ t h a nd an d then m a k e t h e m otion in fron t o f the ri gh t
,

bre a st w ith the st a s for O l d I n a n ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

 217

S am e si gn as f or Pa re n t .
( Da ko ta V I ; Wya n do t I .
)
C oll ect th e n gers an d thu m b of the ri ght h a n d to a poin t o r n e a rl y
so a nd preten d to gr a sp t h e b re a st an d dr a w the h a n d forw a rd a bou t
, ,

ei gh t in ches ( Ka io w a I ; Co m a n che III ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II )

. .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sig ns C lose th e h an d whi le the thu m b is still up

an d t hen rest the thu m b on the lips .

( H asensta b ) .

M ove the foren ger alon g the j a w sbec a use of th e be a rd .

( L ar so n )
F a ther s brother
.

M ak e the si gn s f o r P a r e n t ( F a ther ) , P o s se ssi o n ( l l i s ) ( to the

ri ght ) M a n , a nd B ro t h e r
, .

F a ther s fa ther
.

M ak e t h e si gn s for M y , F a t h e r , O v e r a n d F a t h e r , . S ome
t i m es , for illustr atin g m ore cle a rly the sign for A g e d i s a dded ,
.
( Kai
o w a I ; C o m a nch e 1 1 1 ; Ap ach e I I ; Wi ch i ta II ) .

F a ther s m other .

M ak e the sign s for M y , M o t h e r ( p aren t a n d wo m a n ) , O v e r , a nd

M o t h e r ( Kaio wa I ;
. C o ma n ch e III ; Ap ach e I I ; Wi ch i ta II ) .

0.

F a ther s sister .

M ak e the sign s f o r P a r e n t ( fa th er ) , P o sse s si o n ( B i s ) , M an

( to t h e right ) an d S i st e r ( Da ko ta V I )
, . .

Gr an dfa ther .

M ak e t h e si gn s for P a r e n t , T i nl e l on g ago , Aged an d B orn .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

Gr an d m other .

E n ds of n gers of both h an ds touch in g the bre a sts on th eir respecti ve

sides , ( this i s m o th e r ) , then m ak e the sign for W o nn a n , b y dr a wi n g
the h a n d d o wn w a rd at the righ t side of the he a d a s thou gh p assin g a
co m b th rough the lon g h a ir , and then co m plete by the si gn for O l d , b y
describin g w i th t h e right h and in fron t of the righ t side of the body
p art of a circle a fter the m a nn er of u sin g a c an e for support i n w a l k
in g ( Da ko ta I ) Den ot e s an a ged person De cr e p l t a g e dependen t
. . .

o n a st aff

.

M ak e th e si gn s for Par e n t, W om an , Ti m e l on g a go , Aged

an d Born .
( Da ko ta V I .
)
H usb a nd .

S i gn for C o m p a ni o n , ( Da k o ta I ) U n ited

. .

28
 H usb an d ( s ai d by wi f e )
7
.

M ak e
si gn f o r S a m e followed b y th a t
t he ,
f or M an .
( Ka io wa I ;
C om anch e 1 1 1 ; Ap a che II ; W
,

i ch ita I I )
'
' '

-
.

other
M .

Tou ch the bre a s t a nd p l a ce t h e foren ger in th e m o u th .

( A r ap a ho _
I .
)
Right h a n d n gers i an d th u m b closed in w a rd as though cl a spin g
-

b re a st ( m a m m ae ) a n d dr a wn outw a rd three or four ti m es ( C h ey enne I ) . .

M ak e the sign for F a t h e r followed by th a t for W o m a n , .

( A bsa
r o ka I ; S ho sho ni a nd Ba n a k I ) W o m a n p aren t . .

Fro m a foot in fron t of the ri gh t or left bre a st , m ove the righ t h a n d ,

it s p al m b a c k w a rd an d its n gers se m ie x e d a n d spre a d n e a r to the ,

bre a st an d after brin gin g the ends of the n gers together m ove t h e
, ,

h a n d for w ard a g ai n an d h a lf open the n gers an d spre a d the m M ak e .

these m otion s tw o or three ti m es so m ewh a t r a pi d ly ( Da ko ta IV ) I n , . .

i m it ation of suck in g the bre a st .

E n ds n gers o f both h a nd s ( S ) touchin g th e bre a sts of their

of the
respective sides ( Da ko ta I ) In dic a tin g the m a m m mon e w ho h as
. .

n ursed a chi ld .

M ak e t h e si gn s for W o n l a n ( Da ko ta V I ; Wya ndo t

P a re n t an d .

I; K a io w a I ; C o ma n ch e III ; Ap a che I I ; Wi ch i ta I I ) .

Deaf -
m ute n a tu r a l sig n C lose the h a n d except the little n ger a nd

then rest the n ger on the li ps .

( H asensta b ) .

M other s
brother .

M a k e the si gn s f o r W o m a n a n d P a r e n t ( m other ) P o sse ssi o n ,

( H e r s ) ( to the ri ght ) , M a n , an d B ro t h e r ( Da ko ta VI ) . .

other s father
M
.

M ak e the sign s f o r M y , M o t h e r , O v e r , an d F a t he r .
( Ka iow a
I ; C o m a nch e 1 1 1 ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wi chi ta I I )
'

.
,

other s m other
M
.

M a k e the signs for M y , M o t h e r O v e r , ,

an d M ot h e r .
( Kaio wa
I ; C o ma nch e III Ap ach e I I ; Wich ita I I ) .

other s sis t er
M
.

M ak e the si gn s for W o m a n an d P a r e n t ( m other ) , P o ss e ssi o n

( H e r s ) ( to the ri ght ) ,
an d S i s t e r ( Da ko ta V I
) . .

Nephew ( brother s so n )
.

M a k e the sign s for M y B ro t h e r H i s , B o r n , , ,

a nd W o nn a n .

( K a i o wa I ; C o m a n che II I ; Ap ache I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

 219

N ephew ( sister s

so n ) .

e th e si gns for M y S i st e r H e r s, B o r n , and M a n T h e

M ak , , .

s i gn s for H e r s B o r n an d M a n , ar e m a de to the righ t of the bod y

, , ,

n e arly a t ar m s len gth as belon gi n g to a n other ( Ka ioa a I ; Co m a nche

,
.

II I ; Ap a che II ; Wi ch i ta II ) .

( brothe N i ece
r s d a u gh ter )

.

M a k e th e si gn s f o r M y , B r o t h e r l l i s B o r n , , ,
an d Wom an .

( Ka i o w a I ; Co ma n ch e I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi ch i t a I I ) .

N iece
( sister s d a ugh ter )

.

M ak e the si gn s for M y , S i st e r , H e r s , B o r n , an d W o m a n .

The si gn s for H er s a nd Bo r n a r e m a de to the righ t o f the b o d y n e ar l y

at ar m s len gth a s belon gin g to a n other ; a lthough the si gn m ust be

,

m a de a t t h e spe a k er s h e a d th e si gn is un d erstood a s referrin g to th e

,

precedin g si gn s ( Ka io wa I ; Co m anche I I I ; Ap a che II ; Wi ch i t a I I )

. .

S ister .

S i gn f o r B ro th e r , an d , i f necess a ry to di stin gui sh gender ,

add th a t
f or S q u a w .
( A r ap a ho
S am e si gn as for B r o t h e r except desi gn ation of the , se x .
( Da ko ta
I) . We ar e fro m the s a m e brother .

M ak e the signs for W O I n a n a nd B ro th er .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

S ister .

The right ar m i s exed up w a rd an d h and in posi tio n ( N m odied , ,

by n gers bein g a pproxi m a ted is th en appro a ch ed to the m ou th a nd ,

en ds of n gers a p p roxi m at ed a nd i nserted between lips ; the h a n d is

th en w i thd r a wn an d the i ndex n g e r exte n ded poi n ts t o the c a rdi a c
,
-

, ,

region ; the h and s ar e then collected , as in type ( A ) an d held i n m a m ,

ma ry region I
( O to )

A fe m.a le de a r to m y h e a r t a n
.d lips
.

Pa ss t h e a t
righ t h an d p a l m tow a rd the body fro m the pubis d o wn , ,

w a rd forw a rd an d upw a r d then elev ate the rst two n gers of t h e ri ght
, ,

h a n d ( Ute I )
. .

Deaf m u te n a tu r a l sig n A n u n instructed de a f m ute a s rel ated b y M r

I

- -
. .
,

Den ison of t h e Colu m bi a n In stitution in ven ted to express Sister rst

, , , ,

th e sign for F e m a l e m a de by the h alf cl sed h a nds , w ith the end s of,
-
o

n gers t o u r h in g the bre a s t s , followed b y the index i n th e m outh .

S i ster ( s aid by brother or other sister ) .

left a r m an d h a n d to the left bre a st

Brin g t h e .
,
as if in an e m br ace ,
( Wy a ndo t I )
.

t hen elev a te the foren ger . .

M ak e the sign for B ro t h e r a n d S i s t e r , followed b y th a t

'

for
W om an .
( Ka i o u a I ; C r
o m anche I I I ; Ap a che 1 1 ; Wi ch i ta II ) .
 220

S ister s
d au ght e r .

M a k e the sign s for W o m a n a n d B r o t h e r ( sister ) W o m a n ,

a n d B o r n ( to the right side of the body ) i n a con ti n uous m ove m ent .

( Da ko ta V I ) .

S i ster s
h usb a nd .

M ak e the si g n s for B r o t h e r an d W o i n a n ( sister ) -

, lVI a n and

P o sse ss i o n ( H e r s ) both to the righ t ( Da ko ta V I )

,
. .

M ak e the si gn for M y S i s t e r , ( br o t her and sister an d w o m a n ), ,

H e r s ( m ade to the ri gh t ) S a m e or S i m i l a r an d M a n ( Kai o w a

, ,
.

I ; Co m a nche I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi ch i ta I I ) .

S ister s so n .

M ak e th sign s for W o l n a n a nd B r o t h e r ( siste r )

e , M an an d

B orn ( to the ri ght of the body ) ( Da ko ta VI ) . .

So n . S e e C h i l d ( o f f sp r in g ) ; M a le , a nd M an .
( Ar ap a h o I ) .

Sam e as the si gn for D a u g h t e r , exceptin g desi g n a tion of se x .

( Da ko ta
M ak e the sign s for B i r t h an d Pl a n .
( Ka io wa I ; Co ma nche I I I ;
Ap a che I I Wi ch i t a I I ) .

S on s
d a u ght e r .

M ak e the si gn s for B o r n , B orn , an d W o nn a n .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

S on s so n .

M ak e the sign s for B o r n , B o rn ,

a nd M an .
( Da ko ta VI ) .

U n cl e
( m a tern al ) .

M ak e the si gn s f o r F a t h e r , B i s ( to the ri ght ) , B r o t h e r a n d

S i s t e r an d W o m a n
, ( K aio wa I ; Co m an che III ; Ap a che II ; Wi
.

chi ta I I ) .

U n cl e ( p a tern a l ) .

M ak e the si gn s for F a t h e r i s ( to the right ) , B r o t h e r a n d ,

S i st e r , an d M a n
( Ka io w a I ; Co m a nche III Ap a che II ; Wi chita I I )
-

. .

Wife ( S e e also C o m p a n i o n )
. .

The dexter fore n ger i s p a ssed betwee n the exten de d th u m b -

an d in dex
o f the left ( B ar to w )
.

S am e as C o m p an io n .
( Da ko ta
th e si gn for W o l n a n , a n d then l ay the t w o f o re n g e r s t o
M ak e
gether side by side , s tra ight a nd poin tin g for w ard the other n gers ,

loosely closed ( Da ko ta I V ) Two j o in ed a s one

. . .
 221

( 1 ) M ak e the si gn for W o m a n ; ( 2 ) two n gers left h a n d exten ded

( N , h ori zon t al , forw ard , an d n gers touchin g ) ; ( 3 ) both sts to che st ,
c o n am o r e ; ( 4 ) left a r m circled before an d dra w n tow a rd the body .

( Ap a ch e A wo m a n ( 2 ) m a ted , ( 3 ) very de a r to m e , ( 4 ) an d
w h o m I e m br a ce .

wi feMy .

M a k e t h e si gn for S a n l e foll owed by th a t for W , o m an .

( K ai o wa
I ; Co m anch e I I I ; Ap a che I I ; Wichita II ) .

M ak e the si gn for W o m a n , and th en m ove the righ t st b ac k o u t ,

w a r d forw a rd a foot or eighteen i nch es fro m six in ches i n fron t of th e

,

n avel ( Da ko ta IV )
. Wo m a n I h a ve . .

W i fe or m oth er .

The h an ds in position ( A ) ar e brou ght to the ch est an d sligh tly p a ssed

, ,

alon g over the m a m m a ry pro m inen ce The righ t h a n d then p a sses .

sweepin gly d own w a rd an d ou tw ard p a l m tow a rd the body describin g , ,

rudely the exit o f th e child fro m the loin s i n the obstetric al curve o f
C arus The ri gh t ar m i s then r ai sed an d the exten ded i ndex touches
.

th e p r ze co r d iu m ( O to a n d M issour i
.

Wo m a n or m other o f m y
he a rt .

Re p e a t ; o l so Do i t a g a i n
ft en . Se e a .

E xten d the left a r m a lso the i ndex n g e r , a n d w ith the l a tter stri k e
,
-

the ar m a t regul a r in terv a ls fro m fron t b ac k w a rd sever a l ti m es , ,

.

( Wied) I h a ve seen this sign ( M a tth ews ) .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sig n Pu t the n gers of the two h a nds together

-
.

( ti p to tip ) a nd rub the m r apid ly ( Ba l la r d) .

I ta l i a n sig h A puts h is n ger behi nd h is e ar , or who stic k s

m an w h o
o u t his chi n a n d p a rts his lips w ishes to h a ve so m ethin g repe a ted w hich
,

he h a s i m per f ectly he ard ( Ba tten ) .

R e t r e a t , or to retur n through fe ar .

Begi n w ith th e si gn f o r T r a v e l i n g m o d e r a t e l y o r M a r ch i n g ,
then dr a w the tips o f the n gers a nd thu m b together an d retre at the
h an d to the body ( L o ng) .

B oth h a n ds closed ( B ) a t the left bre ast o n th e s am e level and ne arly

j oin ed ; then c arry the m outw a rd righ t to ri gh t left to left in fron t o f , ,

the shoulders , w ith ar m s m ore th a n h a lf exten ded a nd i n tr a n sit ope n ,

the h a n ds so th a t when brough t to a stop the p a l m s will be u pw a rd ,

n gers sligh t ly sep ar a ted curved upw ard ( Da ko ta I ) H e art w as
,
. .

n o t br a ve ; wh a t w as I to d o ? ; woul d see m to i ndic a te utter helplessn ess

un der the circu m stances In such c ases the m an wo u ld n ot be st a m pe d

.

a cow a rd S e e th e conception of B r a ve
. .
 122 2

Ridg e .

Righ t h a n d h orizon t al , b ack outw a rd n gers exten ded , e d ge o f h a n d ,

down w ard is dr a wn fro m left to ri ght a bout a foot in fron t of th e fa ce ;

,

if a j a gged ridge i ndic ate b y u p w a rd a n d down w ard s h a r p m ove m en ts

,

o f the h a nd ; if a level o ne b y dr a win g the h a n d on a s n e a rl y the s a m e,

level as possible ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m th e a ppe ar ance o f a rid ge

.

. .

R i d i n g ( horseb a c k ) . Se e H o r se an d Go in g .

R i ve r .
( Co m p a re B r o a d ) .

T heh a nd in the for m of a scoop or l a dle , is c a rried to the m o u th , as

,

if con veyin g w a ter a nd d r a wn a lon g i n a horizon ta l line w ith the ed ge

,

do wn w ard a bou t the height of the bre a st ( L 0ng )

,
. .

A nother : H old
u p the n gers o f th e left h a n d a little divergin g ,

fro m e ach other ( represe n ti ng a m o u nt a i n r a n ge ) , an d to con vey the ide a

o f the stre a m s owin g fro m the m pl a ce the i ndex n ge r of the ri ght ,
-

h a nd a lter na tely betwee n e a ch t wo o f the m a n d dra w i t a w ay i n a ser

pen tine m a n ner ( L o ng ) . .

O pe n the right h an d a n d p ass i t before the m ou th fro m a bove dow n

w a rd ( Wied ) If li ied s si gn is co m plete there is a si m il a rity i n c o n
. .

c e p t io n bu t the ( O to I ) sig n represen ts the conception w a ter an d th a t

, ,

which ret a in s it a t sides a n d direc ts the ow S o m ethin g we drin k , .

ret ained by b an k s a t sides ( B o tcler ) . .

l he n ger tr a ces serpen ti ne lin es the grou nd ( Oj ib wa I )

'

on . .

M ak ethe si gn fo r D r i n k i n g an d then w a ve both the p al m s ou tw ard , .

A rivulet , cree k or stre a m is sho w n by the drin k ing si g n a n d b y hold

, ,

in g the i ndex ti p between the thu m b and m edius ; a n a rroyo ( dry w a te r

course ) b y coverin g up the tip w ith the thu m b a nd m iddle n ger ( Bar
,
.

ton .
)

A m ove m en t the extended h a nd p a l m down an d horizont a l n

of , ,

gers j oined indic a tive a t once o f the owi n g o f w a ter and the m e a n der
, ,

in g of its curren t ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

S ig n for W a t e r , follo wed by the sign for

-

S n a ke .
( Chey enne I ) .

A river i s owin g w ater .

M e the sign for W a t e r , then pl ace the exte nded at h an d , p a l m

ak

down before th e bre a st , a nd pu sh it for w a rd to a r m s len gth ( A bsa

,

.

r o ka I
; S h o sho ni a n d Ba n a k I )

"
Righ t h and to the l e f t sid e o f body , level of shoulder edge of n gers ,

o u tw a rd extended , poi n ti n g obli q uely down w ard t o wa rd t h e left ( S

,

t urned down w a rd ) c arry the h a nd down w a rd o n a double curve in fron t

,

of the body a n d tow a rd the right ( Da ko ta II ) Run nin g w a te r . . .

 223

M ak e t h e si gn f er a te r , (i e p l a ce th e ri gh t h and n p rig h t six b r

' '

.
-
z
-

.
,

, , , .

eigh t inches in fron t of the m outh b ack outw ard in dex an d th umb : , ,

croo k ed an d their ends a bou t an i n ch a p a rt , the other n gers n e arly

_

closed ; m ove it tow ard th e m outh an d the n do wnw a rd n e arly to the

'

top o f th e bre a s t bone , a t th e s a m e ti m e tu rn in g the ha n d over tow a rd

the m o n t h u ntil th e little n ger is upper m ost ) ; then dr a w the righ t h an d ,
a

its b a ck forw ard the in dex extended an d poin tin g tow a rd the left a n d
, ,

the other n gers closed fro m a bout two feet in fron t of the left shoul
,

der tow a rd the righ t u ntil i t i s a foot o r so outsi de of the li ne of the

righ t sh o ul der ( Da ko ta IV ) L o n g w a ter
. . .

Righ t h an d brough t c up sh a p ed p al m u pw a rd to the m outh ; h a nd

,
-

, , ,

a s i n type F I ) m odied by bein g a little m ore rel a xed

( , ; both h a nds a r e
then extended a nd the edges held vertic ally p al m s fa cin g but h a nds , ,

ap a rt ; the h a nd s i n s a m e rel a ti v e position s ar e the n m oved t o a n d fro m

the body ( O to I ) Th a t w e d r in k ; owin g an d ret ained betwee n

. . .

b an k s .

C ollect t h e n gers of t h e ri ght h an d to a poi n t a n d br in g it to the

m outh , p a l m rst then w a ve the a t h a nd p a l m down horizon ta lly
, , ,

fro m ri gh t to left Wy an do t I ) Bro ad w a ter

. . .

R ai se h and s to sides n gers extended p a l m s obliq ue ( X 1 with p al m

, , ,

obliq ue ) then a t sa m e ti m e m ove both on p a r a llel lin es as f ar as a r m s

,

can re a ch sh owin g a trough ; the n pl a ce right h a n d three or four in ches

,

fro m m outh p al m up w a rd a nd hollowed a s thou gh holdin g w a ter an d

, ,

m ove i t q uic k ly p ast th e m outh res t in g i n l a st position j ust in fron t o f ,

ch in ( Sa hap ti n I )
. \Va ter run n in g i n a trough
. .

Put h a nd in fron t o f m outh p a l m u pw a rd a n d hollowed as th ou gh ,

holdi n g w a ter an d m ove it p ast the m ou th , restin g in fron t o f chin ; th e n

,
.

fro m a poin t in fron t of bre a s t m ak e wi n din g m ove m en t t o a poin t as

f a r fro m the body as ar m wil l re a ch n gers n a tur a lly rel a xed ( Y 1 , , ,

p a l m vertic a l ) as t hough tr a cin g course of stre am ( Sa hap ti n I )

,
. .

H old the ri gh t h an d a ttened and e xten ded with p al m dow n to the , ,

side o f the right hi p then p ass it forw ard to w ard the left side i n a se r
,

pen tine m ove m ent ( Co ma nche II ) The h a n d represen ts the at su r

. .

face of the w a ter the m ove m en t th e serpen tin e course

,
.

M ak e the sign for W a t e r , then hold the ex te nded foren ger o f t h e

left h a n d d i a gon ally i n front of the bo d y ; p al m do wn , th en p a ss the
poin t of the i ndex alon g the left fro m the ba se o f t h e p a l m to the tip o f
the fore n ger ( Ute I ) . .

H old the ri ght h a n d at a n d exte nded at the height o f t h e hip , an d

push i t, p al m down w a rd i n a serpentin e m a n ner di a gon ally a cros s
,

tow ard the left ( Ap a che I ) . .

 22 4

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sig na An u n d ul a ti n g

-
m otio n of the h a nd .
( Ba l
l ar d .
)
ove th e foren ger forw a rd in a circl e j ust below th e m outh , ind icat
M
in g the m otion of rol li n g w a ves , a n d th e n p oi n t to th e pl ace of i t .

( H a se nsta b ) .

R a ise th e h a n d tow a rd the m ou th an d th en m ov e th e s am e h a n d i n a

lin e sh owi n g th e ow in g of th e w a ter ( La r son ) . .

A cross a .

W i th th e foren ger of th e ri gh t h a n d d escribe n e a r th e grou n d a

w a vy li n e in the d irecti o n of th e geogr ap h i c a l course of the stre a m
i nd ic a ted a n d th e n w ith the s a m e n ger d escribe a sh ort , str ai gh t li ne
,

a cross the for m er an d fro m the d irection of th e j ourney ( Da ko ta I I ) . .

H e ad w a ters or source of a .

H old the exten ded left h a n d verti c a lly before the body at th e
and at
h ei gh t of the elb ow , then poin t to th e p a l m w ith th e i n dex a n d m ak e
the sig n for R i v e r a w a y fro m th e left h and w ith th e ri gh t ( Ap a che I ) . .

Ro a d .

H avin gth e opened h a n d s ei gh t i n ch es ap art p o int in g forw ard , p al m s ,

u p w a rd in fro n t of th e ch est , m ov e th e m , e a ch o n e altern a t ely , b a ck a n d

,

forth a b ou t ei gh t i n ch e s ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

B ot h h a nd s a t a n d ex ten d ed , p oin ti n g forw ard from th e ch est , p al m s

up w ard , th u m b s an i n ch h i ghe r th a n t h e ou ter e d ges w h i ch ar e pl aced
ne arl y togeth er , i n th i s p o sit ion p a ss th e h an d s forw ard n e arl y to a r m s

len gth ( Ka to wa I ; Co m a n ch e I l l ; Ap a che

. Wichita II ) F rom th e .

depression u su ally i n di c a t i n g a tr a vel e d tr a il .

or i n th e m id dl e of a
O n, .

F irst m ak e th e si g n for R o a d , ex ten d th e left foren ger p oin ti n g

for w ard a nd to th e ri gh t t h en pl a ce th e ti p of th e extended i n dex ,
,

p oi nti n g do w n w a rd , upon th e secon d j oi n t of th e foren ger ( K a io wa I ; .

Co m a nche III ; Ap a che I I Wichi ia II ) .

Wa gon
M ak e the w a gon sign , an d the n w a ve th e h a n d a l on g th e groun d .

( B a r to w )
W i th th e ri gh t h a nd , fore n ger exten d ed a ndp oin tin g do w n w a rd ,
oth er n gers closed ( J turned do wn w a rd ) , d escri be fro m i t s n a tural
p osi ti on outw ard in fron t a nd to th e l eft of t h e body as f ar as th e ar m "

can be ex ten ded th e wi n din g course of a pr a irie w a gon ro a d

( Da ko ta -
.

I ) F ro m t h e wi ndi n g cou rse of roa d s

. .

Ro b e . See C l o t h i n g .
 225

R oc k y ( a s a h ill ) .

'

A n asce nd in g m o t ion of th e exte n ded ri gh t h a nd , n gers j oi ned , p a l m

-

d own , to w ard an d o ver the cl i n ch ed left , w h ich i s con st a n tl y i nterp osed

a s a n obst a cl e If i m p a ss a ble th e ri gh t b an d shou ld n o t p a ss o ver th e
.
,

left , or th e si gn m ay be co m pleted i n th i s m a n n er an d th at of n ega tio n

a dded .
( A r ap a ho
Ro u nd up C a t t le , T o . Se e C att le .

R u n , R u n ni ng ( C o m p are W a l k i n g )
. .

T h e a r m ne a rly doubled u p on i tself, an d th en th e el bo w thro w n for

w a rd a n d b a ck w ard , a s i n the act of ru n n i n g ( L o ng ) . .

B oth h a nd s, sts ( B ) c a rried u p w ard o n th ei r respecti ve sides to th e

,

l evel of th e sh oulders a nd th en m ak e the up w a rd a n d d ow n w ard m oti on s

fro m th e sh oulders i n i m i ta ti on of th ei r m o ve m en ts h el d in th i s positi o n
wh en run n i n g ( Dak o ta I ) F ro m th e m ove m e nts of th e ar m s w h en
. .

ru n n i n g .

E xt en d poi n t both f o r en g e rs i n w a rd , th e ri gh t th ree o r fou r

an d

i n ch e s beh i nd th e left , p al m s b a c k w ard , at th e hei gh t of th e bre a st ,

th en , wh i le m ovi n g th e h a nd s for w ard a l tern a tely , throw th e ri gh t i ndex
over th e left an d th e left over th e ri gh t ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

B oth a r m s ar e exed a nd st s brou gh t -

before body a t ce n ter , about
four i n ch es a p art Th e h and s in posi tion
.
( B ) ar e the n m oved for w a rd
su ccessi vely an d a ltern atel y a s an a n i ma l g a llopi n g o r trot ti n g ( O to I ) . .

M otion of l i m bs i n m ove m en t .

With on e or b oth sts p l a ced ne a r th e si de of the ch est th em ,

m ove
for w a rd a nd b ac k w a rd as in ru n n i n g ; th e m otio n bei n g at th e sh oul d er .

( Ka io w a I; Co ma nch e II I ; Ap ach e II ; Wich i ta II .

)
Deaf mu te -
n a t ur a l sig n a A r ap id m otio n of the feet on th e oor .

( B a lla r d )
U seboth ar m s an d both open h a nd s in a w ay si m il a r to th a t in w h ich
th e legs ar e used to r u n ( H a se nsta b ) . .

M ove th e h an d s u p an d d ow n in th e two p ar allel l i nes fro m th e bre a st .

( L a r so n )
R apidly , swiftly .

L ay b oth h a nds at , p al m d o wn w a rd , a n d p a ss th e ri gh t r a pid ly h ig h

an d f ar over th e left , so th a t th e body is so m ew h a t r a ised ( Wtcd ) .
-
.

Sa c r e d .

R i gh t h a n d upri gh t ( S ) p al m tow a rd ,
th e left i s ,
m oved str a i gh t up

w ard a n d dow n w ard i n fro n t of the fa ce .

( Dak o ta I ) .

29
 226

S a d , Sorry , Trou bled .

( C o m p a re A n g r y ) .

Th e ri g h t h a n d is p a rtly , so m e ti m es q ui te , closed , hel d i n fron t of th e

ch est , a l m ost or q ui te in cont act w it h i t a n d m ade to descri be a ci rcle
,

of th ree or fou r i n ch es r adiu s , on ce o r ofte ner ( M a nda n a n d H ida tsa

.

I ) Th i s i nd ic a tes th e va ri ou s con icti n g e m oti o ns wh ich m ay be re

.

ferred to by an In di a n w h en he s ays M y h ea rt i s

B oth sts p l a ce d before th e bre a st , p a l m s d ow n th u m bs touch i n g ,

,

m ove th e outer ed ges d ow n w a rd a s i f bre a k i n g a stic k , th en pl a ce th e

p a l m of th e h a n d ( or th e n gers ) o ver th e h e art ( Wy a nd o t I ) . .

B ro k en h e a rt
.

Sa d d le .

F irst m ak e t h e si gn for H o r se , then t ur n th e left h an d outw ard to

th e l eft , an d ex ten d th e ex ed n gers so th a t th e h a nd i s h orizon ta l ,
p al m d ow n w ard ( W ) , at the s a m e ti m e th e n gers of th e ri gh t h a nd
ar e l i k ewi se extended , a nd th en on a curve , rst to the ri gh t , then u p .

w a rd an d to th e left , th e h and is brou gh t , w i th p a l m d o wn w a rd ne a rly ,

c ross wi se ov er th e b a c k of th e left , wh ich i t p a t s gen tly sever al ti m es

-
.

( D a k o t a I nd i c at i n g s a dd le fro m i t s posi tion on the h orse

.

The si gn for H o r se is rst m a de by dr a wi n g the ope n b an d edge .

w i se a cross before th e fa ce ; t h e fron t an d m idd le n gers of th e ri gh t

h a n d th en str addle th e in dex and m iddle n gers of th e left F i n ally , .

in represen t a ti on of th e h a n d m a de an d recl i nin g s a ddle tree of th e I n

- -

di an , th e tw o front n gers of th e ri gh t ar e m ade to st a n d i ncl i ned o n

th e fron t a nd b ack of th e left ( O to a n d
. I ) So m eth in g .

a stri d e of a h orse th a t i n cl i nes before a n d beh i nd

.

P a c k , To .

T h e cl i n ch ed st is h eld before the ch est a t a v ari a ble di st a nce , the

secon d ro w of k n uc k les to t h e fron t , u su ally , the fore a r m bei n g se m i

p ron a ted so a s to m a k e the m et a c arpo p h a l a n ge a l a rti cul a tion of the

-

i n de x th e hi gh est p oi n t o f th e h a n d T h e st i s the n struc k by the

.

p a l m ar su rfa ce of the e xten ded n gers of the ri gh t , rst i n th e b a ck a n d

th en o n th e side , or vic e ver sa ( M a ndan a nd H ida tsa I )
. .

Sa lt .

Th e body i s ben t for ward , an d th e p al m pri n t of the r i gh t n gers , in

ty pe posi ti on ( W ) , tou ch th e e arth before th e body T h e op en h a nd s
-
.
,

ar e th en a pproxi m a t e d before th e body , p al m s i n con t a ct , the n d i verge ,

th e righ t i n de x tou ch i n g the ton gu e i n typ e p osi ti on ( K ) The cou n

-
.

t e nan ce a ssu m es a m ie n of di sli k e . Th e m otio n to th e groun d w ould

i n d i c a te th e s al t li ck s of th e pl ain s ( O t o a n d M isso ur i I ) S o m ethin g
-
. .

fro m th e grou nd s a vory to the t a ste .

 22 7

S a l u t a t io n . H an d
sh a k i n g -
.

He sh oo k h a n d s w ith th e p a rty greeted a n d t h e n pressed h i s

ow n open boso m A K a n sa s si gn ( In d i a n s k etches b y J oh n T Irvin g

. . .
,

P hil adel ph i a 1 83 5 , vol I , p

,
. .

It i s notice a ble th a t whi le th e cere m oni al gesture of un ion or l in k i n g

h a nd s i s co m m o n an d a nci en t i n tok en of pe a ce th e pra ctice of sh ak i n g ,

h a n d s on m eetin g n o w th e a n noyi n g etiq uet t e of th e I n di a n s i n their

,

i n tercourse wi th w hi tes , w as n ot used by the m b e twee n e a ch oth er a nd ,

is cle a rl y a forei gn i m port a ti on Th ei r fa n cy f r aff ectio n ate greeti n g

. i

w a s i n gi vi n g a ple a s a n t bodil y sen s a tion by rubbi ng e a ch other s bre a sts ,

a r m s , an d sto m a ch s T h e se nseless a n d i n con ven ie n t cu sto m of sh a k
.

i n g h a nds is, i n deed , by n o m e a n s gener a l t h rou gh ou t th e w orld a nd i n ,

th e exten t to w hi ch i t pre v a il s in the U ni ted S ta tes i s a sub ject of ridi

cule by forei gners Th e Ch i n ese , wi th a h i gh er con cepti o n of pol i t e
.

n ess , sh ak e th ei r o w n h a nd s The a cco un t of a recen t observer of th e

.

m eetin g of two pol i te Celes ti a l s is : E a ch pl ac ed th e n gers of on e h a n d

o ver th e st of the oth er , so th a t th e th u m bs m e t a nd th e n st a nd i n g a ,

f e 2v feet a p a rt r a i sed h i s h a n ds ge ntly u p a n d dow n i n fron t of h is

bre a st F or speci al courtesy , a fter th e foregoi n g gesture , th ey p l a ce th e
.

h a n d wh i ch h ad bee n th e actor i n i t o n th e sto m a ch of i ts o w ner , n o t o n

th a t p art of th e i nterlocu tor th e wh ole proce ed in g bei n g su bjecti ve , b ut
,

perh a ps a relic of obj ect ive perfor m a nce .

Sa m e ; s im ila r to w h a n t io ne d b e f o r e
t is m e .
( Co m p a re
C o m p a n io n ) .

P l a ce th e t wo f o r e ng e r s p a r a llel to e a ch o t h er , an d pu sh th e m for
w ard a l ittl e ( Dun ba r )
. .

The two f o re n g er s ope ned for w ard , l a i d side by side as i n si gn for

C o m p a n i o n , a n d gen tly p u sh ed for w a rd ( C h eyen ne I ) . .

S a m e si gn as fo r C o m p a ni o n .
( Da ko ta I ) .

The f o r e ng e r s of b oth h a nd s ex tende d , j oin ed , b a c k s u p w a rd , ar e

c a rried outw a rd fro m t h e bre ast on th e s a m e level for a foot ( Da ko ta .

I)
. N o di ff erence both th e s am e .

Th e h an d s ar e pl aced i n t h e s am e p o i t io n s as i n A h e a d a nd
B e h i n d , except th a t th e f o r e n g e r s a r e pl a ced ex a ctly side by si de .

I f it i s to be s h o w n th a t t wo thi n gs are ex a ctly al i k e or con st a n tly a li k e

o r besid e one a n oth er , the h a n d s a r e m oved forw a rd toget her for a short

d i st a n ce ( M a n da n a n d H ida tsa I )
. .

E xten d foren ger an d m i ddl e n ger of ri g h t h a n d , p oi ntin g up w a rd ,

th u m b crossed o ver th e other ngers , w h ic h a re close d ; m o ve hand
dow n w a rd a n d for w a rd ( O ma ha I ) . .
 2 28

Wi th th e f o re n g e r s on ly extended pl a ce th e h an d s i n front of th e ,

ch est p al m s d own so th a t the ex ten ded n gers l ie si de by side ( Ka to

, ,
.

wa I C o m a nch e III ; A p a ch e I I Wi ch i ta I I )

O n e l i k e the ot h er
. .

The f o r e n g e r s o nly of b oth h a n ds exte nded , pl aced side by side be

for e th e body , p a l m do wn ( Ap ache I ) . .

I ta li a n sig h L ay the two f o r e n g e r s together side by side .

( B u t l er )

U nion or h a r m ony
.

S a t i s e d . See G l a d .

Saw .

S am e as th e si gn for C h e y e n n e I n d i a n .
( See T RI B AL S I GN S ) .

( Da ko ta F ro m th e u se of th e saw .

Sc a l p .

G r a sp the h a ir w ith th e left h a nd a n d w i th th e righ t on e a tte n ed

,

cut aw a v over t h e left ( Wi ed ) Sti ll i n use ( M a tt h ews) Al though

. .

Wied s S i gn see m s i nexplicit i n de scripti on there i s a re m a rk a ble si m i

,

l ar ity in th e execu ti on a n d con ception between th a t an d the ( 0230 a n d M is .

so u r i I ) ( B o te ler ) Th at p a rt re m oved by th e k n ife , as represen ted

. . .

Th e left h a n d st a tion a ry , ei gh te en i nch es in fron t of sto m ach ( D ) , as

th ou gh gr a s p i n g th e sc a l p loc k , a n d the n th e ri gh t h a nd ( X) , w it h
-

p al m u p w ard , n gers extended , p oi n tin g obliq uely tow a rd the left , i s

p a ssed w i th a b ac k w ard or i n w ard m otion u nd er th e left h a n d fro m i n
fr on t of i t , j ust as th ou gh dr a w i ng t he k n ife i n w ard i n sc al pi n g ( Da .

ko ta I ) .F ro m th e ac t of sc al pi n g .

R ap idly c arry the left h a n d to the fron t of the up per p art of th e ch est
a nd close i t , b a c k forw a rd , a s i f gr a bbin g th e h a i r ; th en dra w th e ri gh t

h a nd , p a l m do w n w a rd , fro m left to ri gh t bene a th i t , a s i f cu t ti n g ( Da .

ko ta I V ) .

The left h a n d i s r a i sed to th e vertex of the h e a d an d sei zes the h air

c alled by th e I ndi a n s th e sc a l p lock th u s r m ly h el d , th e ri gh t is r a ise d
a n d ed gewise executes a severi n g sweep arou n d th e forehe ad
( O to .

an d M isso u r i I ) Th a t w hi ch i s re m oved as represented

. .

Gr a sp the h air on th e top or ri gh t side of th e he ad w i th th e l eft h a n d

th en dr a w the at ri ght h a n d with th e ed ge tow a rd an d a cross th e side
of the he a d fro m behi nd for w ar d ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

S ca r c e , Fe w .

P l ace th e h a n d in th e p osi tion g i ve n for C o m e , w h en i t is m oved

fro m s ide to side , a rrested i n its m otion a t i n t erv a ls and wh ere so ,

a rrested is depressed a n i nch or two

( M a n d a n an d H i da tsa I )
. .
 229

S c i sso r s .

W ith th e fore an d m i ddle n gers i m it a te th e open in g an d sh uttin g of

th e bl a de s of t h e sci ssors .
( L o ng )
Se a r c h f o r . See H u n t i n g .

Se c r e t ; T o se c r e te . See H i d e .

S e e ; Se e i ng ; S a w .
( C o m p are L o o k a t .
)
The fore n ger , in th e a ttitude of p oi n t in g , is p a ssed fro m th e ey e
tow ard th e re al or i m a gi n a ry obj ect ( L o ng ) .

P a ss the exte nded i n dex n g e r forw ard from the eye -

.
( Wied ) S am e
a s m y descri p ti on , b u t briefer ( M att h ew s ) . .

S tri k e out the two f o re ng e rs forw a rd fro m th e eyes .

( B ur to n
-

.
)
T wo n gers proj ecti n g .
( M a w/ 02m m )
P l ace th e fore a n d m iddle n gers ( of the ri gh t h a n d u su al ly ) , se p a
r a ted , extended , an d poi n ti n g out w ard , i n fron t of th e eyes i n dic ati n g ,

th e d irection of supposed l i nes of si gh t ( A r ap a h o .

P a ss th e exten ded i n dex forw ard fro m th e eye .

( A bsar o ka I ; S hos
h o n i a n d B a na k I ) .

S am e as Lo o k T . o .
( Da ko ta I ) .

W i th th e i ndex m iddle
n gers of th e ri gh t h a n d exten ded , an d
an d

th ei r e n d s se p arated abou t two i n ches , p oi n t forw ard at th e h ei gh t of

th e eyes , th e oth er n gers to be cl osed an d th e thu m b o n the m , b a c k of
h an d u p w a rd H ol d the h a n d sti l l or m ove i t forw a rd a fe w i nc h es
. .

( D a ko ta Two eyes
.

Wi th th e n gers of th e ri gh t h a n d as for S e e i n g , m ove th e h a nd

fr o m sid e to sid e sever a l ti m es at th e wrist , describi n g a cur ve ( Da .

ko ta IV ) .

E xten d th e i ndex secon d n ger of th e ri gh t h a n d , a n d m o ve the m

an d

h oriz on t al l y for w a rd fro m th e eyes ( Da ko ta VI VI I ) .

,
.

Th e ri gh t h a nd , h eld as a n i ndex , i s pl a ced ne ar t h e ri ght ear , i ts b ac k

a l m ost or q ui te touch in g t h e chee k a n d is the n m oved for w ard , ( M an .

da n a nd H id a tsa I .
)

C l ose th e ri g h t h a nd , le av i n g th e i ndex ( or b oth i ndex a n d secon d

n gers sep a r a ted ) exten ded p a ss fro m th e eye forw ard , th e n ger t ip
,

p oi n ti n g in th e s a m e direction ( Ka io wa I ; Co manch e I II Ap ache I I

.

Wi ch i ta I I ) .
 230

A nother : Dr a w a circle arou nd th e eye wi th th e exte nded index , or

w i th both in dex a n d second n gers ( Kaio wa I ; Co ma nche III ; Ap ache
'

I I ; Wi chi ta I I )
'

C lose th e th ird an d li ttle n gers of the righ t h a n d , l ay the thu m b over

th e m sep ara te the ex tended i n dex a nd second n gers as f ar ap a r t a s
,

th e eyes , bri n g the h a nd to th e eyes , n ger s poi nti n g ou tw a rd , a n d p a ss

the h a n d ou tw a rd Wich i ta I ) . .

Deaf m u te n a t ur a l sig ns .
O pen th e eyes wid e an d stra i n th em at

c n cy
va a .
( Ba llar d )
P oi n t the n ger to th e eye .
( L a r so n )
M ove the ope n h a n d up and d ow n successi vely i n fron t of th e eyes .

( H a sensta b ) .

P l ace the fore fi n ger -

on the eye as i f to see so m eth i n g .
( Zeig ler ) .

n other
O ne a .

B oth h and s closed wi t h t h e p al m s fa cin g , f o r e ng e r s str a i gh t , e xed

a t m et a c a rp a l j oi n t so th a t th ey a r e h ori zon t a l a nd poi n ti n g tow a rd on e

a n other a t a d i st a n ce of ei gh t or ten i n ch es ; so m eti m es sli gh tly m oved

to a nd fro m on e a nother ( A bsar o ka I ; S h o sh o ni a n d B a na k I ) Si g n

. .

of T o S e e with b o t h h nd s , as rep resen ti n g

a t w o i ndivi d u ls
a

.

S e e n , or D i sc o v e r e d .

Th e si gn of a M a n or other a n i m al is m a de ; a fter w h ich the n ger i s

p oi n ted tow ard a nd a ppro a ch ed to yo ur o w n e y es It i s th e si gn for .

S e e i n g reversed ( Lo na ) .

S am e as Fo u nd .
( Da ko ta I ) .

Th i s is m ad e i n a m an n er th e reverse of S e e .
( M an da n a n d H ida tsa I ) .

Deaf m u te n a tu ra l
-
sig n N o d , h a vin g touche d th e eye .
( Cr o ss)

Sh am e .

B oth h an d s to fron t of fa ce , h a nd a n d n gers u pw a rd , b a c k out w ard

( S ) , p a ss th e left h a n d sl o wly fro m left to ri gh t i n fro nt of the eyes , a n d
th e ri gh t i n s a m e w ay to th e left ( Cheyen ne I I ) . .

H e a d i ncl i ned forw a rd d ow n w a rd , eyes l oo k in g d irectly do wn

an d

Ward ; pl a ce th e u prigh t h a n d s w ith b ac k s ou tw a rd ( S ) , about three or

,

f ou r i nch es in front of fa ce so a s to h ide i t fro m V ie w as m uch a s p ossi

ble ( Da ko ta I )
. F ro m coveri n g th e fa ce to h ide t h e sh am e
. .

B oth h a nd s a t , w i th exten d ed n gers j oi ned ; pl a ce th e l eft outw ard

before th e l e f t chee k , poi n tin g up w a rd an d b ac k w ard tow ard th e ri gh t
side of th e cro wn , an d th e ri gh t se ver al i n ch es fro m an d before th e left,
 231

p oi n ti n g u p w ard an d for w a rd , b a ck s o u t w ard th e fa ce a t th e s am e ti m e

-

bei n g tur ned tow a rd th e left ( Ka io w a I ; Co m a n ch e I I I ; Ap a ch e I I

.
"

Wichi ta I I ) .

Sh ee p .

R igh t h a n d h eld forw a rd fro m th e lower p a r t of th e ri gh t side of th e

abdo m en , p al m down arch ed , n gers sli gh tly sep ar a ted , a n d m a k e a rch e d
,

i n terru pted m ove m en ts forw a rd ( Ute I ) M a n ner of the m ove m e n t of

. .

th e a n i m a l wh ile gr azi n g .

E we .

Th e ri ght h a nd , exten ded a n d sli gh tly a rch ed , h el d before th e body ,

a bout two feet fr o m th e grou n d the n p ush i t for w ard over a sl i gh t a r c
on ce or twice ( Ap c e I )
a h . Ill ustr a tes th e a n i m a l s h eigh t a n d i nter
.

r up t e d m a n ner of m ovi n g for w a rd w h il e browsi n g

.

Mou nt ai n ; B i gh orn ( O vis m o nta n a R ich )

.
,
.

M ove th e h a nd s i n th e d irection of th e h orn s o n b oth sides of th e

h e a d by p a ssi n g th e m b a c k w ard a n d for w a rd i n the for m of a h a lf ci rcle .

( Wi ed ) Thi s si gn i s stil l i n u se ( M a tth e ws ) .

P l a ce the h a n ds o n a l evel w i th th e e ars the p a l m s fa ci n g b a ck w a rd

,

an d th e n gers sli gh tly reversed , to i m it a te th e a m m oni te sh a ped h orn s -

.

( B u r to n )
M ove th e opened h a nd s b a c k w a rd o ne on e ach sid e of the he a d a bov e
,

the c ars , p al m s i n w a rd , n gers sl igh tly exed a nd poi nti n g b a c k w a rd .

( Da ko ta IV ) .

P l ace th e ri gh t h a nd a t th e h ei gh t of an d str a i gh t forw ard fro m th e

.

elbo w p al m do w n w ard , cl ose th e two m idd le ngers , exten d a n d croo k

,

th e i ndex and li ttle n gers , a t the s a m e ti m e exte nd i n g the th u m b so th a t

i t p a sses do wn w a rd an d belo w the closed n gers ( Ute I ) C ur ve d . .

h orn s a nd n ose s represe ted

i n

.

W ether .

M ak e th e si gn for S h e e p , e w e ; th e n p l a ce th e arch ed left h a n d

tr a n sversel y in fron t of the body ( poi n ti n g tow a rd th e ri gh t ) a n d n e a rly
cl ose th e ri gh t an d m ak e a m ove m e nt fro m the left b a ck w ard an d d ow n
,

w ard tow ard the body a s if dr a wi n g a rope ( Ap a che I ) H ei gh t of . .

th e a n i m al , w al k i n g a s i t grazes , a nd th e l o n g t il
a

.

S h ie l d .

Is show n by poin ti n g wi th the i ndex over th e l eft sh oul der , w here i t

i s slun g re a dy to be brou gh t o ver th e bre a st w h e n re q u i red ( B ur ton ) .

B oth h a n d s m a de to describe a circle sligh tly to on e side an d in fron t

of the b ody ( C h ey enne I )
. .
 2 32

S h o e s, m o c c a s i n s.

R aise the foot a nd stro k e it fro m f ro n t to b a ck w i t h t h e i n dex n g e r of -

th e h a n d o n the s a m e si de Wi e d ) I h a ve see n th is si gn ( M a t the ws )

. . .

The si m i l a rity betwee n the ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) si gn an d Wi ed exists

m ore i n th e ide a or concepti on th a n t h e m otio n exerted I t i s n o t prob .

a ble th a t th ey e ver w ere ide n ti c a l i n e xecu ti o n ( B o te l er ) . .

Dr a w th e foot up w a rd i ncl i ne th e body for w ard so th a t th e

a nd b an d s
c an re a c h t h e foot w h e n th e d r a w i n g o n of the sh o e or m occ a si n is im i

( Da k ta I ) F ro m the dr a w ing o n o f th e sh oe
t ate d . o . .

S tool) a nd , wi t h th e nge rs i n t h e s a m e p ositio n as for D r e s s , t u n i c ,

except in g t h a t the f o re n g o rs a r e to p oi n t d o wn w ard a n d th e th u m b s
n w ard m o ve the h a n ds fro m t h e toes b a c k w a rd th rou gh sl i gh t curves
, ,

on e o n e a ch sid e of one of th e fee t ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

An oth er : M ak e th e s am e sig n a bo ve th e foot wi th ou t stoop i n g .

( Da
ko ta I V ) .

B oth h a n ds i n type posi ti on ( W ) ar e a p prox i m a ted at th e poi n ts of

-

the i ndex ng e rs before th e toes of ei th er foot The n th e h a n d s d i v erge

-
.

an d descri be a cu rve a ro un d th e si de s of th e foot to th e h eel , fro m w h i ch

p oi n t both h an d s ar e p u l led suddenly u p w a rd The si gn i s perfect , rep

. .
.

r esen ti n g th e p oi nted ov a l of t h e m occ a si n a n d th e u se of bot h h a nd s in -

dr a wi n g t h e m o ver th e h eel F or B o o t s th e l a st m oti on i s exten ded

.

up o n both sides of the l i mb to m id w ay th e foreleg ( O to and M isso u r i . .

I ) Th a t wh ich i n closes the foot a n d is d r a wn on

. .

Sh o o t ; sh o t . See , a l so , A r r o w an d Gu n .

Di sch arge of a de adly m i ssi le .

T heh a n d i s cl i nched i n such a w ay th a t the th u m b covers the n a il s of

.

th e o th er di gits ; th e f o r e n g e r s ar e the n sud den ly exte nded as i n th e

ac t of sprin k li n g T h is i s m u ch li k e the si g n for B a l l , b u t h ere th e ar m
.

i s n ot m oved a n d th e ngers n ot stron gl y e xed ( M an d a n and H i .

d a tsa I ) .

Stru ck by a de a d ly m i ssile .

T h e left h a nd i s h e l d before th e ch es t a t a con v en ien t d ist a nce , th u m b

up w a rd , b a c k outw a rd , n gers sligh tly be n t , a nd i s stru ck in th e p a l m
w ith th e b a c k of th e cl i n ched ri gh t st zl l a n da n a nd H id a tsa

.

Sh or In st a ture
t, .

A sh ort perso n i s d escribed wi th ri gh t h a n d brou gh t u p as h i gh as th e

he a d o n ri gh t si de , fore n ger str a igh t u p ri gh t ( J , b a c k out w ard ) ; m ove
th e h a n d dow n , k eepi n g n gers up w a rd ti ll i t re a ch es th e w ai st or .

belo w T h e body i s usu ally be n t to t h e ri g h t a l it t l e i n th e m ove m en t

.

a s th e h a n d goes do wn S ho r t di sta nce i s d e scri bed the s am e as C l o se

.

or N e a r ( Chey enne I )
. .
 2 33

I n e xten t .

P l a ce th e h a n ds , p al m to p al m , a sh ort or the requ ired d ist a n ce ap a rt .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

C u rt ailed .

The ar m s are se m ie xe d before the body ; th e h a n ds a pprox im a te d at

p a l m s , the n m a de to diverge to i n di c a te so m e le n gth T h e righ t h a n d .

then a pproxi m ates th e left and , ed ge wise , i m i t a tes a cutti n g o of a sh ort -

piece of th e ng e r e nds T h e w ord does n ot see m to be well u ndersto o d

-
.

by th e I ndi a n u nless a pplied to so m e obj ect, in wh ich c a se th ere is a

co m pound si gn O to a nd M isso ur i I ) L en gth red uced by cu tti n g o ff
. . .

A little sh ort exte nt , or ti m e , a ccordi n g to con nection

, .

R aise left h a n d to posi ti on in front of b o d y , f oren ger exte nde d h ori

z o n t al ( M 1 , ch a nged to left ) ; t h e n r a ise ri g h t h a n d , rst n ger e xte n ded

( M 2 ) pl a ce e n d of th e n ger n e a r e nd of fore nger on left h a nd , a nd

m ove i t slowly u p the n ger , resti n g ne a r it s b a se or ne a r b a se of t h u m b .

( Sa hap tin I ) .

O nly by less sep ar ati on of h a nds .

( Ap ache II I )
.

S ick ill .

H ol d the a tten ed h a nd s to w a rd n other before the bre a st , bri n g

o ne a

the m , h el d stiff, in fr on t of th e bre a st a n d m ove th e m for w ard an d b ack

,

w ard from a n d to th e s am e ( Wied ) A s i s eviden t , n o si m il arity of

.

e x ecuti o n or des i gn exists be tween Wi eds si gn an d th e ( O to a n d M i s

so ur i I )
.
( B o te le r ) .

Con tr act sh oulders an d chest , bri n g h a nd s i n fron t of thro at a n d c h in ,

wi th a shri n k i n g , con tr a cti n g m oti on an d a sh i ver ( if a gue ) or blo w sh o r t
bre a th s a s if p a n ti n g ; t hen c a rry th e left h a nd to th e forehe a d an d press ,
i ndic ati n g he ad ach e ( Oj ib wa IV ) . .

Touch th e p art th a t i s th e se at of th e p ai n and t h e n w i thdr a w q u ic k ly

the touch ed l i m b , or i nch at th e pressure m ade o n the p a rt, at the s am e
ti m e th e e m otions of th e fa ce express su ff eri n g ( Da ko ta I ) F ro m t h e . .

fe ar of i ncre a sed p ai n by press ure .

Th e ope n , rel axed h a n ds ar e to be q ui c k ly throw n a bou t four i n ch es

for w ard an d ou tw a rd , se ver a l ti m es , in fron t of the sto m a ch ; n gers
s p re a d a li ttle , en ds abou t four i n ches a p ar t, p al m s b ac k w ard ( Da .

ko ta IV ) Th e p uls a tio n of th e h e a rt
. .

Ass um e an ap pe a r an ce of di stress , w ith gener a l fe a tures rel a xed .

B oth ar m s ar e then ele v a ted , se m ie xe d , a n d the h a n ds a ssu m e th e

type posi tion ( "
m od ie d by n gers bei n g m ore curved a n d less rigid .

The h a nds ar e brought tre m bl in gly th u s to the sides of th e b ody ,

chest , etc , a nd the n r a ised to the foreh e ad and the ex ten ded i n dices m a de
.

to co m press th e te m p les ( O to an d M isso ur i I ) Th a t w h ich p rod uce s

. .

i n w ard or b odily di stress .

30
 2 34

Pl a ce th e tips o r en ds of the exten d ed n ger s an d th u m b gen tly over

the he a rt , l e a n in g the he a d sl i ght l y tow ard the l eft acco m p an ied b y a ,

droopin g or cl osin g o f the eye l id s ( Ute I ) . .

A n other : C ollect the n gers an d t h u m b o f the right ( o r l eft ) h and to

a p oin t an,
d p l a ce the ti p s a ltern ate l y to t h e right a n d l eft si des o f the
chest , a cco m p an ied by a si m u l t an eo us droppin g of the he ad , w i th the
eyes p a rti ally or en tirely cl osed ( Ute I ) L oc a tion of p a in . . .

Deaf -
m ate n atur a l sign a P l a ce the h a nd u pon the bre a st a nd pro
tr u de the to n g u e .
( B a llar d)

P l a ce you r p al m on th e forehe a d an d sh u dder .

( C r oss)

P l a ce the o p en h an d o n the forehe ad , an d then m ove th e he ad dow n ,

wi th the m o u th h alf op ened ( Hasenstab ) . .

forth a p art o f the ton g ue o u t o f the

Pu t m ou th an d a t the s a m e ti m e
r aise the h an d to the bre a st ( La r so n ) .

Pl ace the h a n d o n the bre a st ,

at the s am e ti m e Open the m o u th as

if to v o m i t ( Zeig ler )
. .

Very .

Both h a n ds a t , extended an d n gers j oined p l ace a ga in st the chee k

, ,

bo n es an d w ithdr a w slow l y ( Wy ando t I ) . .

Sig n lan g uage .

T ap the b a c k o f on e h an d w i th the p a l m a r s u rfa ce o f the n gers of

the other al tern ately and rep e a tedly , then cl ose both h ands l e a vi ng the
, ,

f o re n g e r s a n d th u m bs fu ll y extended an d sep ar a ted ; p l a ce the m a bo u t

fo ur in ches ap art p al m s fa cin g an d rot ate the m in short vertic al cir
, ,

cles i n su ch a m an ner th at w hen the right h a n d occu p ies the u pper

,

portion of its circ l e the left w il l be bel ow ( Ka to w a I I ; C o ma n che I II .

Ap a ch e II ; Wichi ta I I ) H a n ds an d con vers a tion

. .

Sil e n ce .

L a y the exten ded i ndex p oi n tin g u p w ard , over the m o u th so th a t

,

the tip extends as f ar as the n ose , or al on gside the n ose ( S hoshoni an d .

B an a k I ; Ute I ) .

S in g , t o .

Ri ght h an d n gers an d th u m b p a rti al l y un closed , p l aced i n fron t

-

of

the m o u th , shot up w a rd a n d sli gh tly sh ak en ( C heyenne I )

,
. .

B a ll of the ri ght h a n d restin g o n the chin , n gers extended ob l iq u ely

u p w ard an d to wa rd the l eft , as tho u gh c atchin g the w ords thr o wn o ut

of the m o u th ( Da ko ta I ) C a tchin g the w ords

. . .
 2 35

M ovethe ri ght h an d thro u gh a s m all circl e in fron t o f the m o u th ,

b ac k forw a rd fore an d m iddle n gers spre a d a l ittl e exten ded an d

, ,

u prigh t other n gers closed th u m b o n m idd l e n ger ( Da ko ta IV )

, ,
. .

O peni n g a n d closin g the m o uth a nd the so nds co in g forth

u m
.

( 1 ) Put th um bs spre a d t o m ak e l arge circle ; ( 2 ) be at

a nd f o r e n g e r s
tip of righ t h a nd sever a l ti m es tow ards it ; ( 3 ) w ave fore nger sever al
t i m es q u ic k ly fro m lips u p w ard ( Ap a che III ) Dr u m ; ( 2 ) be a tin g
. .

acco m p a ni m en t o n i t ; ( 3 ) sin gin g

.

Deaf -
m a te n a tu r a l sig n Put one n ger to yo ur open in g an d m o u th ,
sh u ttin g it a ltern a te ly ; se t in m otion yo ur a r m s a fter the m a n n er in ,

which a sin ger a cts ( C r o ss) .

Sin g in g Sa c r e d , .

M ove the u p right ri ght h a n d i n a circ l e in fron t o f the m o u th th e ,

n gers sli ghtly ben t an d sep ar ated so as to for m a circle b ac k o ut ,

w ard ( Da ko ta I )
.
V
.

S i st e r . S ee R e l a t i o n sh ip .

Sit d o w n .

The st i s clin ched an d the m otion o f i t i s then the s am e as if i t held

,

a st aff an d gen t l y st a m ped it u pon the e a rth t wo o r three ti m es

( L o ng ) . .

M ak e a m otion
tow ard the grou nd , as if to po u n d it w ith the f e r ie nt
of the closed h a n d ( B a r to n ) .

"ick l y l o wer
u the extended h a nd , p a l m down , i n dic ating sp ot an d

a ct -

ion .
( A r ap a h o I ) .

Ri gh t h a n d he l d to o n e side , n gers a n d th u m b dr o opin g , str uck

down w ard to the gro u n d or obj ect t o be sat u pon ( C hege mm I ) .
-

S h ut
both h ands th u m bs u p ( or above ) r aise h an ds a l ittle an d
, , ,

l ower a t s am e ti m e w i th a sq ua ttin g o r sittin g m otion o f bod y i f the

person gi vin g the si gn is st and in g ; if sittin g , point to the p l ace an d
m ak e m otion with the h ands an d a r m s ( Oj i bwa IV ) . .

Right h a n d clinched , o u ter edge dow n w a rd a nd p ushed tow ard th e ,

the gro u nd ( A bsa ro ka I ; Shoshoni and B a na k I )

. .

A n other : M ak e
the si gn of T o s i t b u t m ak e it tow ard the spot i n d i ,

ca t e d for the vi sitor to occ u py ( A bsa r o ka I ; S hosh o ni a n d Banal: I )

. . .

Right h a nd in n at ur al posi tion n gers closed ( A ) p al m up w ard , ex , ,

ten d the fore a rm , w i th el bow xed str a ight tow ard the fron t ( L ) a nd , ,

c arry it tow ard the gro u nd o r se at ( Da ko ta I ) S ittin g down o n . .

a ch air o r the g r o un c
 2 36

In cl ine the bod y for w a rd an d m ove the ri gh t st dow n w ard abo u t

eighteen i nches fro m in fron t o f the sto m a ch a t a r m s length forw ard , ,

ben t u pw ard a t th e wrist , an d b a c k o u tw a rd ( Da ko ta IV ) Down . .

in a b u n ch .

The cl inched st , th u m b u p ward is held o u tw ard , u s ual l y to the ,

ri ght, the elbo w for m in g ne a rly a right a n gl e the h a n d is then depressed ,

an d s u ddenly a rrested Thi s is a m odic a tion o f the si gn f o r S t a y , or

.

A b i de W hen the sign is m a de i m per a ti ve l y the ar m i s so m eti m es

.

stretched tow ard the p l a ce where it is desired th a t the person a ddressed

sh al l sit S o m eti m es a p artic ul a r spot m a t o r se a t , if con ven ien t, i s
.
, ,

str u ck w ith the st i n m ak in g the si gn ( M a ndan a nd Hida tsa I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te r na tu a l sig n Poi nt the pl a ce where y o u w ish the per
at

so n ( spo k en t o ) to sit , an d m ak e the m otion o f sittin g ( C r o ss) .

s m ok e
an d .

U sed as an i n vi ta tion to a visitor an d i s m ade by c areless l y poin tin g

,

to the i ndivid ual , t o i ndic ate person then m ak e the si gn S i t d o \ v |l ,

an d T o sm o k e ( A bsa r o ka I ; S h osho ni a n d B a n a k I )
. .

A u str al i a n si gn . S ee W a it .

Sl ave .

S l ave i s described the s am e a s a C a p t i v e The only person s u sed .

as sl a ves o r so con sidered , i n w i l d tribes o f p l a in s ar e c apti ves

,
M exi .

c an ch ildren h a ve been often ta k en a s well as yo u n g peo p le o f hostile

tribes The ri ght h and clinched ( C w i th p a l m forw ard ) u pri ght on a

.
, ,

level w i th an d to the ri ght o f ri ght sho u l der i s cl a sped a ro u n d th e wrist ,

by the n gers a n d th u m b o f the l eft h an d w i th b ac k of h an d ( left h a n d )

to fron t , an d p u ll the ri gh t h and to th e fron t twelve o r fte en i nches

( C heye nne II ) .

S l e e p , sl e e p i n g ( C o m p are N i g h t )
. .

Poin t t o the gro und a n d m a k e a m otion as if of l yi n g dow n ; then

cl ose th e eyes ( B a r to n ) .

C lose the e y es a n d i ncline the he ad , the chee k restin g u pon o r sup

p orted by the exten ded h a nd Ti m e m ay b e ind ic a ted by this m e an s ;
.

on e sleep ( the sign for sleep an d o n e nger to u ched or hel d u p al on e )

bein g th e eq u iv a lent of twen ty fo ur ho u rs o r a d ay ( A r ap a ho I )
-
. .

Right h a nd , p a l m in w a rd , p l a ced by the side o f the he a d he a d dro oped

t o the ri gh t a s if to fa ll i nto the Open p al m an d eyes p arti a lly closed
, ,
.

This also m e an s to go to bed ( C h eyen ne I ) . .

A nother : Fo re n g e r of ri ght h a nd croo k ed an d p l aced a ga in st o r

ne ar the u pper l id o f the eyes ; very short m otion dow n w ard an d
o u tw ard ( C hey enne I )
. .
 2 37

The he ad i ncli n ed sidewise tow ard the right , a ga inst the p al m of the
righ t h a n d with ngers sep a ra ted ( P ) ( Da ko ta I ) H e ad s upp orted . .

by a pi l low .

C lose the eyes , in cline the he a d tow ard the right , an d l ay i t i n the
op en ed right h a n d ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

The ar m is bro u ght to the side of he a d w ith h a n d in position an d ,

he a d in cli ned to righ t shou l der , restin g i n p al m , eyes cl osed ( O to .

Rest .

In cli ne the he a d to o ne side , close or p a rtl y cl ose the ey es , an d p l a ce

the a t h a n d to w ithi n a bo u t six i nches Of the e ar ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig na P l ace the h a n d up on the chee k , incl ini n g
the he a d to o ne side , a nd closin g the eyes .
( B a llar d )
C lose y o u r eyes an d ben d yo ur he ad side wise on the o p en h a n d .

( C r o ss)
First pl ace the Open h a nd on one side O f the he a d , next m ove the
he ad the eyes h a vi ng been sh u t , dow n to the side an d then poin t to the
, ,

pl ace to sleep ( Ha sensta b ) . .

C l ose the eyes .

( L ar so n )
S h ut th e eyes , an d incline the he a d as if to slee p .
( Zea
/Zen )

I ta lia n sig n L ay the Ope n h an d u n der th e cheek .

( B a d en )
To slee p w ith a n other .

The p erson is rst i ndic ated by poin tin g , then p l ace the f o r e n g ers
Of e ach h an d side by side in fron t Of the bre a st, b a ck u p w a rd at the ,

s am e ti m e in cl i nin g the he ad a little to the l eft a n d p arti all y closi n g the

e y es ( Da ko ta V )
. .

C ross both clo sed h an ds an d ar m s before the bre a st a s if in an e m

br ace then l ay the exten ded in dex an d foren ger si de b y side , p al m s
,

dow n p oin tin g forw a rd and m ove the m over tow a rd the ri ght so th a t
, ,

the b a ck s Of the h an ds p oin t do w n w ard tow ard the right at the ter m in a
tion Of the si gn ( Ute I ) . .

S l e e p l e ss .

The he a d i s held n e arer th e m i ddle line th an in th e sign for S l e e p -

The h a n d is then r a i sed i n positio n ( N ) a n d m ade to q uiver with p a l m ,

o utw a rd ( O to I ) .

U n rest
. .

Sl o w .

E xten d the l eft ar m , cu rving the foren ger an d ho l din g i t stil l The .

ri ght ar m does the sa m e b u t is dr a wn b a ck w i th sever al sh o rt an d cir

o nl a r m ove m en ts Wied ) . .
 2 38

Both h ands in fron t O f bre a st wi th n gers exten ded , & c .

,
as ( W ),
p ass the right h an d for w ard over the b ac k Of the left slo wly .
( Da ko ta
I ) S low i n m otion
. .

The h a nds fo u r to ei gh t i nches a p a rt ab o u t a foot i n fron t o f the

, ,

l ower p a rt Of the chest , wi th the f o r e n g e r s exte nded poi n tin g forw a rd ,

a n d b a c k s u pw a rd sho u l d be slo w l y l owered a bo u t ei ght i n ches an d a t

,

the s a m e ti m e sep a r a ted by brin gi n g the elbo ws to the sides Th e .

other n gers ar e to be ne arly closed , th u m bs a gai nst the m iddle n gers

o r u n der the m ( Da ko ta IV )

G
. oin g b a c k w a rd a n d therefore
. s l ow
,

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig ma A s l ow , horizon t al m ove m en t of the h a n d
( B a l lar d ) .

In r e f e r e n ce t o w a l k in g w al k slowly for a l ittle dista n ce ;

,
to sew in g ,
slow ly copy s uch a m a nn er a s a dress m ak er a ct uall y does , a n d so on .

( C r oss ) .

Sm a ll ; L ittl e a few ; sm a ll a ni o n n t .
( C o m p are N o t h
ing ) .

P a ss the ne a rl y c l osed h an d s se ver al ti m es by j er k s over on e a n other ,

the right h and a bove ( Wied ) There a r e v a rio u s si gn s f o r L i t t l e ,
.

depen din g o n the n a t ure o f the Obj ect described I h a ve gi ven y o u on e . .

I do n o t re m e m ber thi s O f t h e Pri nce of Wied ( M a tth e ws ) .

( 1 ) Fin gers th u m b Of both h a nds closed , h a n ds ben t b a c k w a rd

an d

fro m the wri st an d th u s ( 2 ) crosses righ t a bove the left before the bre a st
, .

( C heyenne I ) .

First l ay t h e O p en h a n ds on the body b a c k s O u tw ard a n d then m ak e

, ,

the si gn f o r M a n o r the a ni m al or thin g to wh ich the si g n is to be

,

a pplied , a nd then c l ose the h a nds sts ( A l eft o utside O f the right
,

a n d a bo u t a foot a n d a h alf i n front Of the l eft bre a st a n d the ri ght ,

he l d j u st in fro nt o f the left bre ast ; c arry the left h a nd in w ard a nd the ,

ri gh t h an d o u tw a rd to the body on a c urve u n til the right st is O ver th e

,

left ( Dak o ta I ) Denotes s m al l i n body or sta t ure

. . .

Pl a ce the right st or h al f cl o se d h a nd a bo u t three i nches a bove the

v

left in fron t Of the n a ve l r ad i al side Of the sts u p w a rd ; then bend the

, ,

h ands b a ck w ard a s f ar as possible a t the wrists , a n d m ove the righ t

w rist over the left , a t the s a m e ti m e t u rn in g the p a l m s a l ittle up w a rd .

( D a ko t a IV )

S O s m al l o r so l ittl e th a t it ca n be held in t h e c l osed
.

h a n ds .

T he exten ded fore n ger Of the left h a n d ( u su a lly erected ) i s pinched

ne ar its extre m ity betwee n the th u m b a nd i n dex n g e r O f the right -

h an d The degree O f s m alln ess i s to so m e exten t sh own b y the height

.

O f th at p ortion Of the l eft fore nger w hi ch a p p e ars above the right

th u m b n a i l Fo r extra de m on str a tion the eyes ar e Ofte n p artly closed

-
.

an d the foren ger p in ched tightl y ( M a nd an a nd H ida tsa I ) . .

 239

The th u m b an d front n gers o f the right h an d ar e collected an d a s ,

i n ty pe p osition ( G ) , ar e m a de to gr a sp so m eth in g ; or both h ands in l i k e

-

position ar e held p ar allel facin g e a ch other ( O to an d M isso ur i I )

,
. .

Th a t cont ained betwe e n the n g e r en ds -
.

\Vi th the foren ger on l y exten ded p l ace the in ner edge o f the exte nded,

inde x a bo u t h alf an inch fro m the t ip of the fore n ger ( Ute I ) . .

E xten d the th u m b an d i ndex , brin gin g th ei r p al m ar sur fa ces to wi thi n

h alf an in ch Of o n e a n other th e re m a i n in g n gers closed o r ne ar l y
,

closed ( Ap ach e
.

The position s Of the n gers ar e the s am e as i f
h oldin g a very s m al l bod y .

H old i m a gi n ary Obj ect betw een left th u m b an d i n dex ; p oi nt ( Carry

i n g ri gh t index c l ose t o tips ) t o the l a st ( Ap a che II I ) . .

size an d also in q u a ntity

In .

Ri ght h a n d in fron t Of the body m ar k O ff on the index ng e r , w ith

-

,
-

th e th u m b , a s m a ll portion o f it other n gers closed ( Da ko ta ,

A .

portion O f anythin g a s m al l am ou n t ,
.

Deaf -
mu te n a tu r al sig ns Put o ne foren ger up on th e other a little
w ay fro m the tip .
( B a l lar d )

Pl ace the tip Of o ne foren ger o n the rst j oin t o f the other , an d then
h al f Open the eyes , an d m ove the l ips fro m e ach other while the u pper ,

an d l ow er teeth ar e k e p t tow a rd e ach other ( Hase nsta b ) . .

Put the Open h ands together .

( L a r so n )

U se th e teeth as if to press the en d Of the ton gu e between .

( Zeig ler )
.

Sm e l l .

To u ch the n ose tip A b ad s m ell is expressed by the s a m e sign ,

.

a m m
"
ej a cu l a tin g at th e s e ti e Pooh an d m ak in g the si gn o f B a d

.

( B u r to n )

Fore and m id d le n gers O f ri ght h a n d p l a ced at or n e ar t h e n ostrils ,

dr a wn dow n w a rd a nd forw ard w ith sli ghtly c u rved m otion ( C hey .

enn e I )
.

Fore a n d secon d n gers of righ t h a n d exten ded ( others cl osed ) ( N ) ,

c arried di rect l y to the n ose an d th en forw ard f o r a few in ches in fr on t
Of the n ose , n gers poin tin g ob l iq u ely down w a rd ( Dako ta I ) From . .

the a ct of sm elli n g .

Deaf -
m u te na tur a l sig ns H old the n ose w ith th u m b a nd foren ger ;
or i m i t ate the a ct o f sn i ffin g .
( B a l lar d ) .
 2 40

Po in t a t the n ostril w ith o ne nger , with a d isp l e a sed or p l e a sed

ex p ression ( C r o ss )
.

P l ace the foren ger bene a th the n ostril at the s a m e ti m e r a isin g t h e ,

u pper l ip sever al ti m es i n s u ccess ion a s if to s m e l l so m ethi ng ( Zeig l er )

,
. .

Sm o ke .

Begin with t h e sign for F i r e , then r a ise t h e h a n d u p w a rd , w i th th e

n gers Open a s if to re p resen t s m o k e ( Da nba r ) .
-

the n ose an d r a ise the n gers O f both h a n ds sever a l ti m es ,

S uu l e
r ubbin g t h e ngers a g ain st e a ch other ( Wi ed ) The r ubbin g s u ggests .

the O ld m ode o f obta in in g re by friction , a n d the wrin k lin g o r sn ufi n g

o f the nose in dic ates the e ff ect Of the s m o k e on th a t org a n .

With the croo k ed index describe a pipe in the a ir begi n n in g a t the

, ,

lips ; then w a ve the open h a n d fro m the m o uth to i m it a te c u rl s o f s m o k e .

( B ur t o n )
S i m il arto the sig n for F i r e , the n gers still an d the h an d a scen d in g
by a cons t an tly rev ol vi n g m otion ( A r ap a h o I ) . .

S i gn for F i r e m a de s l ow l y .
( C hey enne I ) .

C l in ch
the ri ght h a n d an d ho l d i t p al m tow a rd the left an d dow n
, ,

w ard , abo u t twel ve in ches in fron t O f the l o wer portion Of the chest .

( A bsar o ka I ; S h osho ni a n d B a na k I ) H oldin g the pipe

. .

S am e as the sign for F i r e wi th the h an d c arried up h igher .

( Da
ko ta I)
.

Fro m the a scent Of the s m ok e .

M ak e
the sign f o r F i r e , an d then h old the O p ened up righ t h a n ds ,

ngers a little spre ad side by side , in fron t o f the fa ce ( Da ko ta IV )

, . .

H ides e verythi n g .

C lose
both h a nds p l ace the m side by side tow a rd the grou nd , p al m s
,

down w ard , then r aise the m q u i c kl y , extendin g the n gers an d th um bs

i n doin g so an d m ak e s p ir al c urves u p w ard a short dist an ce ( Ute I )
, . .

S n a ke .

The foren ger i s exten ded horizon t a lly ,

a nd p a ssed a lon g forw ard in
a serpen ti ne l i n e
( L o ng )
. .

A g l idin g m ove m en t O f th e extended h an d , p al m dow n , n gers j oined ,

in i m it a tion of re p ti l i a n loco m otion ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Righ t h a n d foren ger poi n tin g , p l aced i n fron t o f a nd o n a l evel with

left sho u lder dra w n al on g to the right with u n d ul a tin g sin u ou s m oti o n ,
,

i m it atin g the m otion of a sn ak e cr a wl in g ( C heyenne I ) . .

 2 41

E xten ded fore n ger O f ri ght h an d ( others c l osed ) ( J p oin tin g do wn

w a rd in ste ad o f u p w a rd ) i n fron t o f th e bre a st m ove i t in i m it a tion ,

o f the m ove m en ts o f the sn ak e i n cr a wlin g

( Da ko ta I )

Fro m the . .

c r a wlin g of a sn ak e

.

The h a nd , he l d as a n in dex h a n d , poi n ti n g forw a rd , is he l d n e a r the

body i n fron t a n d u s u ally to o n e side ; i t is then adv an ced r apid l y a n d
w i th a tort u o u s m otion , l i k e th a t of a sn ak e cr a w l in g ( M an da n a nd .

Hida tsa

Sam e si gn as th a t f o r S h o sh o n i I n dia n .
( S e e T R I B AL S IGNS .
)
( C o m a nche I I ; Pa t Ute I ) .

\Vith the i ndex only extended p al m dow n an d the h a n d at the ri gh t

,

hi p , p a ss it forw a rd a n d to w a rd the l eft m ov in g it fro m side t o side ( in ,

-

a serpe n tine m a n ner ) i n doin g so , the m otio n bein g m a de a t the wrist

( Ap a ch e I ) .

Deaf -
mu te r
n a t u a l sig ns A zi gz a g m otion for w a rd w it h the foren ger .

B a ll a r d ) .

M ove the ar m in a serpen tin e for m .

( L a r so n )
Poin t with the foren ger as if to poin t to so m ethi n g , at the s am e ti m e
m ove i t croo k edly an d al so at the s am e ti m e stretch the ton g u e a n d
,

m ove i t to a n d fro li k e a pen d ul u m ( Zetg ler ) .

Sn o w ( C o m p are F r o st )
. .

Begi n with the si gn for R a i n then the sign , f or A i r or C o l d, an d

concl ude w ith the sign for W h i t e ( Dun ba r ) . .

The h a n d i s he l d u p abou t as high a s the he ad w ith the n gers su f ,

f e r e d t o d a n g l e dow n w ard ; i t i s then bobbed a l ittle u p a n d down , as

i f t o throw O ff drops fro m the en ds Of the n gers ( L o ng ) .

S c a tter the n gers do wn w ard The s am e sign den otes r a in ( B ur to n )

. .

I m ita te its fa l l w i th the h a n d p a l m do wn , p arti a lly closed n gers

, ,

sep ar a ted a n d pointin g do wn w a rd T o i n dic a te R a i n , the h a n d i s .

m oved i n a direct co u rse tow a rd the gro u n d ; S n o w the h a n d m oves ,

other th an in a direct co urse to sho w drift , li ghter fall S e ( A r ap a h o I ) ,

t
. .

S am e si gn as for R a i n tho u gh the h a n d s ar e m oved in

, an d o u t

m ore th a n i n th a t si gn a s i f coverin g the body ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m

, . .

the fallin g o f the sn ow .

The s a m e sign a s f o r R a i n b ut w hen i t is n ecess ary to distin gu i sh

it fr o m r ain , it m u st be preceded b y the si gn for C o l d , which m ak es i t
the s a m e a s w inter O fte n th e sign for R a i n o r S B O V is m ade w ith
.

o n e h a n d a lone ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

31
 2 42

M ak e the sign s f or Ra in an d De e p .
( Da ko ta V I; Hida tsa I ;
A r ika r a I ) .

The h an d in positi on of sign f o r R a m i s m oved do wn w a rd sl ow l y

an d wi th a w a verin g m otion ( M a n da n an d H i da tsa I ) . .

The face is c ast in q ui siti vely tow a rd t h e sk y a nd th e a r m s an d c l oth

in g col l ected aro u n d the body as w hen o n e i s ch i l ly The ri ght h a nd is .

then r aised a bove the he a d wi th the n gers col lected m u ch a s in type

p osition ( H I ) m odied b y nger ends bei n g held a l ittl e m ore c u nve d
,
.

The h an d then fa l l s by j erk s , O pen in g an d cl osin g su ccessi vely ( O to .

a nd M isso u r i I ) o ethin g f llin g th t m es chilly

S m a . a a k u s .

The h an ds are hel d a s in the sign f o r R a i n b u t are then m oved ,

do wn to w a rd the gro u n d an d o u tw a rd to either side L iter a l l y deep I

.
,

r a in ; r a i n bein g indic ated the depth is S how n by p a ssin g the h an ds

,

o u tw ard tow ard their respecti ve sides ( Wy an do t .

P l a ce the right h a n d as high as the he a d in fron t or tow ard th e right ,

side p al m down m ov in g i t q u ic k ly u p an d down sever al ti m es for a

, ,

short di st a n ce then i ndica te th e depth u pon the gro u n d wi th the at

,

h a n d p a l m e a rth w ard ( Ap ac he I )
, . .

M ak e the si gn for C l o u d s ; then the h an d descends fro m a bove

the he a d ( Q ) tips down ; when n e ar the e arth w a ve the h an d To
,
.

sh o w depth of snow o n e a rth S pre a d both h a n ds p a l m s dow n ( W ) ,

.

A
( p a ch e I II )

Represents. the v a ryi n g m otion of snow a k e s
-
.

Deaf -
m ute r
n a tu a l sig ns Poi nt to the shirt boso m , sign ifyi n g the
color w h ite , an d m ove u p an d do wn the extended n gers .
( B a llar d )
Do the s a m e as t o say r ai n except p oi nt w ith the foren ger to so m e ,

Obj ect th at is white i n dica tin g the whiteness of sn ow ( H ase nsta b )

,
. .

P ut the h a nds tow ard the bre a st an d sh a k e the body , a n d t hen m ove
the o u tstretched h a nds u p w a rd an d dow n w ard ( L a r so n ) .

So a p .

The righ t h an d c l inched ( D ) , i s r ubbed o n the left fore ar m , j ust a bove

-

the wri st ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m i ts u se i n w a shi n g clothes

. . .

So f t .

O pen the left h a nd a n d stri k e a g a in st i t sever al ti m e s wi th the ri ght

( w ith the b ack s of the n gers ) [ w hich al so m e a ns [ l a r d ] then stri k e

on the Opposite side so as to i ndic ate the reu n ion ( Wi ed ) The sup . .

p osed yieldin g s u bst a nce is restored b y the secon d stro k e t o its for m er
sh ap e .
 2 43

T ak e so m e soft body in the h a n d and to uch and h a ndle it l ightl y ,

a ltern ately with e a ch h a nd held a s t h o u g h m oldin g it into a ro u nd b a ll

,
.

( D a ko ta I )

H a ndli ng the s u bst ance gen tly , so as not to inj ure i t
. .

With the h a nds three or fo ur i n che s ap art p ointin g forw a rd p al m s , ,

dow n w ard n gers rel a xed l o w er the m a bo u t fo ur i n ches slo wly a n d

, ,

r a i se th e m r ather r apidly se ver al ti m es ( Da ko ta IV ) Yie l ds a nd . .

spri ngs b a c k ; there f ore i s soft

.

With the n ger a nd th u m b of the right h an d a pproxi m a ted to a p oin t ,

p reten d t o pic k so m e p ul ver ul en t s u bst a nce fro m the p a l m of the l eft ,

k eep wor k in g the tips o f the right a s if a l l owin g the con ten ts to fal l
s l ow l y b a c k a g ai n into the left ( Ka i o wa I ; C o m anche I II ; Ap ache I I ;
.

IV ich ita I I ) .

M a de only b y r ubbin g folds o f cloth ( fl exibi li ty ) or i m it ati n g the ,

cr um b li n g o f bre a d ( Ap ache III ) . .

Deaf -
m u te r
n a tu a l sig n S q ueeze s o ftl y the c l in c h ed h a n d .
( C r oss)
So il . Se e E ar th .

S o l d i e r ( A m eric an ) .

P a ss e ach h an d dow n the o u ter se am of the p a nts .

( Sa c, For , a nd

K ickap o o I ) S tripes . .

S ign f o r W h ite M an an d then for Fo r t .

( Dako ta I ) .

Fro m
h is forti ed pl ace of abode .

E xten d the n gers Of the ri ght h an d ; p l ace the th um b o n the s a m e

pl an e c l ose beside the m , and then bri ng th e th u m b side Of the h a n d
horizont all y a g a in st the m iddle o f the forehe ad , p al m dow n w ard a nd
li ttle n ger to the fron t ( Da ko ta I I )

Visor o f for a ge c ap
. .
-
.

The ne a rl y closed h a n ds , th u m bs a g a in st the m iddle o f the f o r e n g e r s,

bei n g pl a ced w i th their th u m bs ne ar together i n front Of the bod y p an s ,

forw a rd se p a r a te the m abo u t t wo feet ( Da ko ta IV ) A l l i n a l ine

,
. .

i n fron t .

A nother : First m ak e the si gn for soldier then th at for W h i t e ,

In a n .
( Da ko ta I V ) .

Pl a ce the ra di al sides o f the clin ched h a n ds together before the chest ,

then dr a w the m hor i zon t all y ap art ( Da ko ta VI ) A ll in a line . . .

P l a ce the a t an d extended right h and , p a hn d o w n w a rd , horizont al l y

g
a a i nst the forehe a d (U te I )

Visor o f th
. e cap

. .

A ri k ar a .

M ak e the si gn for A r i ka r a , and th at for B r a v e .

( A r ikar a I ) .
 244

Dak ota .

M ak e the sign for D a k o t a , an d th a t f o r S o l d i e r .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

So l die r s c o m i n g ,

Both h a nds exten ded n gers spe ad p l a ce obliq u el y u pw a rd an d i n

, ,

fron t of the bre a st right a b o v e l e f t a short dista n ce ; m oved al tern atel y

,

a n d s u ccessively fro m righ t to l eft e I ) The m ove m en t of b a yo

( Ut . .

nets i n a ch a rge .

S o m e ( P a rt Of a n u m ber of p erson s o r Obj ects )

. .

E xten d the i n dex , hol d th e p a l m down a n d i m i ta te the ,

m otion of
i n dic atin g differen t in divi d u al s or a rticles fro m l eft to ri gh t .
( Ka io w a
I ; C o m a nch e I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta I I ) .

So n . S ee R e l a t i o n sh i p .

So o n . See T i m e . So o n .
( C o m p are N ea r ) .

So r r o w ( O cc a sion ed b y l i al disrespect )
. .

Right h a n d n ext t o th e he art p al m in n gers sli ghtl y cu rved ; then , ,

m ak e a circ u l ar move m en t forw ard an d o u tw ard tow ard fron t ( O m a ha I ) . .

So r r y . See S a d .

So u p .

S i gn for K e t t l e , setti n g on the r e , an d then th a t for Dr in kin g .

( Da ko ta I ) .

So u r
S i m u l a te t a stin g a nythin g so u r , i . e , a ct o f
. t astin g an d expression Of
face ( A r ap a ho I )
. .

Tip Of foren ger to u ched aga in st the t ip Of the ton g ue ; then m ak e

the si gn for H a r d ( C h ey enn e I ) . .

R ai se th e righ t h a nd to th e m o u th , as tho u gh h a v in g the s ubst a nce

to be t a sted in i t an d then s p it ( Da ko ta I ) N o t li k in g the t a ste
,
. . .

Deay i anute n a tur a l

sign M a k e w r y m o u th s .
( B a llar d )
To u ch the to n gu e , sh ak in g the he a d with . a l ook expressi ve Of d is
p l e as ure ( C r oss ) .

C lose the eyes a l ittle and sh ak e the he a d .

( L ar so n )
S p a c e ; e xt e n t .

The l eft ar m a n d h a n d are exten ded The right h an d is then brou gh t .

( a s i n S 1 m odied by bei n g horizon t al ) to left an d dr aw n a cross l eft

ar m edgewise a t s u ccessive poi n ts O I Th a t is com posed O f

( to ) . .

s m all er p a rts ; m a ny a dded .

 2 45

S p e a k sp e e c h .

The m otion is li k e sprin kl in g w a ter fro m the m o n th by spri ngin g the

foren ger fro m the th um b the h an d fol l ow in g a short dist a nce fro m the
,

m o u th a t e a ch resilience t o show the direction o f the word or to w ho m

, ,

it i s a ddressed ; this m otion is repe a ted three o r fo ur ti m es ( L o ng ) .

Pl ace the at h an d b ac k down w ard before the m ou th an d m ove it

, , ,

forw ard t w o or three ti m es ( Wi ed) M y description is the s am e as .

thi s, b u t m ore preci se I believe I s a id the th u m b is he l d forw ard A

. .

k n o w l edge of th is fa ct w o ul d be essen ti a l to on e w ho w ished to i m it a te

the si gn correct l y ( M a tth e ws) There i s s u f cient si m il arity t o Wie d s
.

si gn in the p ositio n o f the h a n d an d for w a rd m ove m ent to j ustif y a su p

p osition O f for m er identity between th a t an d ( O to a n d M i sso ur i I ) The .

c urved posi tion of the n gers i n th e l a tter si gn i s n ot in v ari a ble ( Bo te .

l er .
)
E xten d th e open h a nd from th e m o u th .
( B ur to n )
Fin gers u sed as if pick in g so m ethin g fro m th e m o u th .
( M a cg o wa n )
Poi n t the ex te n ded fore n ger as fro m the m o u th .
( A r ap a h o I ) .

Fo r e n g e r s of both h a n ds crook ed i n w ard a s in m ak in g th e si gn for ,

Mo r n in g ; m oti on b ac k w a rd a n d forw a rd fro m m o u th ( C hey enne I ) . .

The gest ures by w hich spe a k in g is described ar e m a de close to the

m o u th If the h a n d i s p a ssed sever a l ti m es a cross the l i p s it m e a n s
.

a ddressi n g the peo p le Ha r ang ue If the n g ers o f bot h h a n ds ar e .

,

cro ssed before the m o u th li k e a p a ir of scissors it m e a n s a Dia log ue , .

( Oj ibw a I ) .

S am e the si gn for S i n g exceptin g the h a n d is c a rried fa rther o u t

as ,

w ard fro m the m o u th ( Da ko ta I ) C a r ry in g the w ords o u t Of the

. .

m o u th .

Pl ace the righ t h a n d j u st in fron t of the m o u th , p a l m forw ard , in dex

h a lf exed other n gers c l osed , th u m b a ga in st m iddle n ger ; m ove the
,

h a nd at the wrist forw ard two o r three ti m es thro u gh an ar c Of a bou t

six in ches , e a ch ti m e brin gin g t h e en d of the i n dex a g a in st the en d o f

the th u m b ( Da ko ta I V ) O penin g an d closin g the m o u th , an d the

. .

so u n ds co m in g forth .

P ass the tips of the n gers of the ri ght h a n d for w a rd fro m the m o uth .

( Pa i Ute I ) .

P l ace the k n u c k l es O f the right h a nd a ga inst the l ip s , an d m ak e the

m oti on of ipp in g w a ter fro m th e index , e a ch ip c a stin g the h an d an d
ar m fro m the m o uth a foot or so , then brin g in g it b a c k in the s am e posi

tion ( Wichi ta I )
. .
 246

Pl a ce the at right h a n d p al m u p , n gers p oi ntin g to the l eft , a short

,

dista nce before the chi n , a nd m ove i t forw a rd Thi s is so m e ti m e s .

repe a ted th ree o r fo u r ti m es ( Da ko ta V I , V I I ) . . .

The ri ght h a nd n ot very ri gi d l y extended , p al m up w ard th u m b for

, ,

w ard is held i n con t a ct w it h the l ower l ip i t is then m oved for w a rd a

,

fe w in ches an d restored t o i ts ori gi nal positi o n These m otion s ar e

, .

re p e a ted once o r oftener ( ZlI a nda n a n d Hi da tsa I )

. .

The right h an d is bro u ght to the m o u th , p al m u p w a rd i nd e x n g e r ,

c

croo k ed , the others so m e wh a t collected , an d h a n d s l i ghtl y c up sh ap ed -

.

The h a n d and a r m is the n exten ded fro m the m o uth Open in g a nd clos ,

in g p artly by s uccessi ve a n d de l ic a te j er k s tow a rd the person or obj ect

a ddressed The p osi tion of the h and i s n o t i n v a ri able , a nd the tr u e
.

origin of the si gn see m s to be m ore in the co n cep tion Of so m ethi n g co m in g

a t i n terv al s fro m the m o u th ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) . O pen i ng Of t h e .

m o u th a n d th a t which iss ues therefro m .

C l osethe h and , excep t t h e in dex n g e r an d rst to u chi n g w ith this

-

, ,

the m ou th m ove it forw ard , b ack u p w ard , p artly closin g a nd Open in g

,

the n ger w i th a r apid m otion ( I r o quo is I ) . .

The right h a n d is hel d to the ri ght side o f the m o u th n gers poin tin g ,

for w a rd , p a l m dow n , w hen the n gers an d th u m b are s l owly o p ened

a n d closed , re p resen ti n g the Open in g a n d c l osi ng Of the l ips i n spe a k

ing . Wy a n do t I ) .

P a ss the right h a nd p al m ,
up , forw ard fro m the chi n .
( S hosh o ni and

B an a k I ) .

Deaf
m ute n a tu r a l sig n M ove the l ips as if to spe a k .
( Zeig ler)
A n other
spe ak s .

P l ace the h a nd as i n the sig n f o r S p e a k be gin n in g fa rther fro m the ,

m o u th dr aw in g i t ne arer a n d ne a rer
, ( Wi ed ) I h ave seen this si gn . .

( M a t th ews)
on vers ation
C .

S ever a l repetition s of the si gn for S p e a k .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

M ak e the s am e si g n as T e l l , b ut w ith both h an ds , an d to wa rd e a ch

other .
( Hi da tsa I ; A r ika r a I ) .

I w il l sp e ak to y o u A n i nterv iew . .

Righ t ar m exed at el bow , and h a n d coll ected as i n ty pe ( G m odi

e d by bein g i n verted a n d p al m t u rned u p The ar m a n d n gers ar e .

then s uddenly exten ded , a fter bei n g bro u ght to the position of the
he art ( O to I ) A ppro a ch ; I wi ll O p e n m y se l f to y o u
. . .
 247

T al k in g ( o n e person ) .

Throw the Open ed rel axed ri ght h and p oin tin g forw ard , p al m u p
, , ,
~

w ard an d i n w a rd six o r ei ght i nches tow a rd th e l eft , sever al ti m es

,
.

( Da ko ta IV ) .

T wo o r m ore person s con versin g .

Both h a nds bein g Opened , re l a xed , an d p oin ti n g forw a rd ei gh teen

inches a p art p a l m s u p w ard an d a l it tl e i n w ard m ove the m in w ard u nti l
, ,

n e a r together three o r fo u r ti m es ; or h a vi n g the h a nd s n e ar together , ,

m ove the m fro m side t o si de sever a l ti m es t u rnin g the en ds obliq u ely , ,

rst tow a rd the right an d then to w ard the l eft , m ovin g the m from th e
wri sts alon e , o r m ovin g fore arm s a lso ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

O t al k i n cou ncil
r .

The ri gh t a r m i s r a i sed exed a t elbow a n d the h a n d bro u gh t t o the

, ,

m o u th in ty p e p osition ( G 1 m odied by bein g in verted ) , p al m up , a n d

-

th e i n dex n g e r bein g m ore open The h an d then p asses fro m th e m o u th

-
.

in j er k s openin g a n d closin g s u ccessively ; then the ri ght h a n d in posi

,

tion ( S h orizon tal , m ar k s Off di vision s on the l eft ar m exten ded .

( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) Th a t w hich iss ues fro m the m o u th co n ti n u o usly

.

or in p art s -
.

Te l l me .

Pl ace the a t right h an d p al m u p w ard abo ut fteen i n ches i n fron t

, ,

of the right side of the face ngers p oin tin g to the l eft a n d front ; the n
,

d r a w the h a n d in w a rd tow a rd a n d a g a in st the botto m Of the chi n (A h .

sa r o ka I ; H ida tsa I ; Ka i o wa I ; A r i ka r a I ; C o m a n che I II ; Ap a ch e II

;
Wi chi ta
Pl ace ri ght h a n d ( Y s l ig h tl y str ained at the wri st , as tho u gh ho l d
i n g so m ethin g o n it ) a t a poi n t say a foot from the m o u th an d m ove it , ,

to w ard the m o u th t wo or three ti m es A ll the m otion by the fore ar m , .

the ar m to the elbow lyin g again st the side ( Sa hap tin I ) Po ur in g . .

i n or bei n g fed .

I h ave told y o u .

M ove the opened rel a xed right h a n d fro m the m o u th str a ight forw a rd
abo u t a foot , n gers pointin g tow a rd the left , p a l m u p w a rd ( Da ko ta .

IV )
.

To l d m e , a p erson .

Reverse the m ove m en t o f the right h a n d as given in the si gn for

T a l k , i e the h a nds dr a w n in w ard tow a rd the fa ce as tho u gh c a tch
. .
, ,

in g the w ords as u ttered by an other p erson , an d c arry in g i t to y o u r own

m o u th.
( Da ko ta I ) .
 2 48

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sig n A r a pid m otion the li ps a s if in the ac t
of

of s p e ak i n g an d m ove the n ger

, to the b o so m after so m e sign f o r th e
p erson te l lin g ( B a l la r d ) . .

Sp e a r . S ee L an ce.

Sp o o n .

Right h a nd i n fron t o f body wit h th u m b an d fore n ger ben t in re se m

b l a nce to the sh a p e of the bowl of a spoon a s m uch a s possible ( Da .

ko ta I )
.Bow l o f a spoon .

Th e left ar m is elev ated an d se m i exten ded , the i ndex ng e r an d - -

th um b a r e a p p roxi m a ted a t ends a s in posi tion ( l l ) other n gers ar e , ,

closed Th e righ t h an d is then m a de to scoop down w ard an d i n w a rd ,

.

with the i ndex a n d m idd l e n gers ap p roxi m a ted an d c u rved p alm ,

in w a rd The rin g and littl e n gers a r e closed The ri gh t h a nd then

. .

a p pr o a ches the left in the a bove position , w hich is n ow t a k en to the

m o u th ( O t
.o a nd M i sso u r i I )

The sh a pe , size an d u se o f the in st ru
.
,

m en t is in dic a ted .

Sp o t te d .

With the extended i ndex m ak e re p e ated tr a n sverse c u ts a cross the

extended foren ger Of the l eft h a n d ( A bsa r o ka I ; S ho sho ni a nd
.

B a nak I ) .

H old the left h an d w ith p a l m in w ard and n gers poin tin g for w a rd
it s ,

a n d al tern a tely dr a w t h e p al m s a n d the b a c k s Of the right n gers a cross

it s u pper edge sever a l ti m es fro m l eft to ri ght O r dr a w the m a cross the .

h an d a n d a r m at di ff eren t p l a ces a s i f w i p i n g O the n gers ( Dako ta .

IV ) .

E xten d the l eft fore arm horizon t al ly , poin tin g forw a rd the n p a ss the ,

left p a l m al tern ately across it fro m be l o w up w a rd ( b ut no t to uchi n g it )

o n th e in ner a nd o u ter sides ( H itl a tsa I ; A r ika r a I ) . .

T he for the a ni m al o r thin g i s m a de rst then the a r m s ar e

si g n ,

exed h a nds bro u gh t together i n fron t o f body , O p ened i n f ul l , at ,

,

p al m Of o ne o n b ack Of othera cross d up lic ate o f position ( W ) .

Fl a t s urfa ces th en p a ss horizont al l y over e ach other ( O to I ) Th a t . .

w hich h as bee n r u bbed o r bl u rred .

S p r i n g ( se a son ) .

The si gn for C o l d, to which add the si gn for bein g D o n e or Fin

i sh e d .
( Dun ba r )
S ign s f o r Da y
D a y l i g h t ) an d G r a ss The se ason s m ay also
( or .

be distin gu i shed by in dic a tin g a gre a ter o r l ess m eridion al al titu de o f

the su n ( A r ap ah o I )
. .
 249

W ith the righ t h a nd n gers an d t h u m b curved u pw ard a nd sep a r a ted

-

( P with k n uc k les a nd b ack down w ard ) begi nn i n g w ith the h a n d in this

posi tion as low do wn o n the ri ght side as you ca n re a ch by bendin g the
body a li ttle then bri n g the h a n d u p a few i n ches k eepin g n gers up
, ,
.

( C h ey e nn e II )

Represen ts gr a ss grow in g
. .

M ak e the sign for G r a ss ( Da ko ta I ; K a i o w a I ; Co m a nch e . I II ;

Ap a che H ; Wi cki ta I I ) Fro m the se a son the gr a ss spri ngs up
. .

M ak e the si gn for H o r se ( R i d i n g a h o r se ) ; a n d then hold the ,

left h a nd p al m loo k in g obliq uely do wn w ard an d b a c k w a rd in front of

, ,

th e a bdo m en a n d p a ss the right h a nd b a c k up w ard un derne a th it fro m

, , ,

behin d for w ard ; o r m ak e the sign f o r 0 sp r i n g ( Dako ta IV )

'

.
, ,

The m ares h a ve colts .

M ak e the sig ns for R a i n , G r a ss, an d Go o d .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

The right h a n d is gr adu ally dr a wn tow a rd the body the n appro a ches ,

the ground i n type position ( Q

,
n gers m ore co llected at the en ds
-

a n d less rigid Fro m the grou n d the h a n d is m a de to rise slowly an d

.

successi vely in represen ta tion of the up w ard tendency of veget a tion .

o a nd M i sso ur i I ) The ti e when gr a in a n d gr a ss grow

( O t m .

.

M ak e the si gn f o r R a i n , then wi th the curved i n dex on ly poi nti n g

up w ard h old the b a c k o f the right h a n d ne a r the groun d a nd elev ate it
, ,

gr a d u ally a n d in an i n terrupted m ove m en t up w ard ( Ute I ) A fter ,

. .

the r a in s the sprouts a ppe a r

'

Sq ua w . See W o m an .

S ta r s .
( Co m p a re M o o n . )
The right h a n d forenger an d thu m b croo k ed is p oi nted i n v a rious
-

, ,

d irection s a bove the he a d to wa rd the he a ven s an d a m oder ately q uick ,

under an d over m ove m en t o f the nger a n d th u m b for m in g a crescent ,

- -

i s m a de ( Da ko ta
.

Fro m the twi n k li ng of th e st ars .

M ak e the sign for N i g h t , a nd then bri n gin g the ends o f the right ,

th u m b an d foren ger together or exi ng the foren ger w ithi n the ,

thu m b q uic k ly m ove the upright h a nd four o r ve ti m es forw ard here

, ,

a nd there a bo ve the he a d Fo r sta r hol d the h a n d a bove the he a d i ts .

, ,

in ner edge upper m ost ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

S ta y , ab ide . I l i ve o r s a t y h er e .

Fro m a foot i n front o f the n ec k m ove the righ t h an d i ts b a c k forw a rd ,

an d i nde x extended sever a l ti m es through a curve to w a rd the right

,

shoulder e ach ti m e rot a tin g it to turn the p al m forw ard ; then throw the
,

st forw ard i n fron t of the lower p art of t h e chest an d m ove it a foot or

eigh tee n i n ches up a nd down b a ck outw a rd ( Da ko ta IV ) ,
. .
 2 50

The cli nched st b ack forw ard , thu m b up w ard is held before the
, ,

ch est then depressed a few in ches and suddenly arrested If you wish
,
.

to tel l a person at so m e dist an ce to stay w here he i s stretch the ar m ,

out at full len gth tow ard h im in m ak i n g the sign , otherwi se the h a nd i s
h eld n e ar the body ( M a ndan an d H ida tsa I )
. .

Clinch t h e right h a nd as i f h oldin g a stic k an d m ak e a m otion a s i f ,

tryin g to stri k e so m ethin g o n the ground w ith the botto m o f the stick .

held in an upri ght position ( Wich ita I ) . .

S te a l , T o .

The left fore a r m i s hel d ho ri zon t ally a little forw a rd acro ss the body
, , ,

a n d the righ t h an d p assin g un der i t w ith a q uick m oti on see m s to gr a sp

so m ethin g an d is suddenly wi thdr a wn ( L o ng ) .

S eize i m a gi n ary obj ect w ith the right h a n d from u n der the left st
an .

( E ur to n ) Thi s i m plies con ce al ed action an d the tr an sport a tion for m

-

i n g p a rt o f th e legal d enition o f l arcen y O u r in structed de af m utes

,
.
-

m a k e the s a m e sign .

L eft a r m an d h and held di a gon al ly to the body o n level w ith elbow ,

right h a n d foren ger hoo k ed , q uic k ly dr a w n under left h a n d a nd b a c k

-

to th e side ( so m eti m es al l the n gers are h ook ed as thou gh gr abbin g

so m eth i n g o r te arin g it a w ay ) ( C h ey enn e I ) . .

L eft h a n d h eld about a foot in front o f the bre a st horizont al b ack , ,

out w ard , n gers exten ded a nd pointin g tow ard the ri gh t ; then the righ t
h a nd with the n gers extended hoo k ed ti ps outw ard h a n d horizon t al
, , , , ,

i s p a ssed outw ard under the left h a nd , an d quick ly dr a wn b ack w a rd

a g a in behi n d the left h a nd a s thou gh seizin g an d subse q uently con
,

ce a l in g the a rticle ( Da ko ta I ) S
. te a l i n g a n d conce a.l m en t
.

The left a r m i s p artly extended a nd held horizon tal ly so th a t the left

h and will be , p al m do w n w ard , a foot or so in front of the chest Then , .

w ith the ri ght h a n d i n fron t a m otion is m a de as if so m ethi n g were

,

gr a sped deftly in the n gers an d c a rried r apidly alon g u nder the left
ar m to the a xi l l a ( M a nda n a nd H ida tsa I )
. .

No speci al sig n for this un less the portr ay al o f a T e x a n ( se e

T R I BAL S iG N s) be accepted as the M esc alero type for a thief , as thes e
poor wretches ar e sa id to h a ve been d re adfu l l y h ar a ssed and plundered
by Tex a n s ( t ay h a n as) f o r m a ny ye ars Pa tr icio g ave sever a l n arr a
- -
.

t ive s ; i n one the Tex a n s c am e an d dr o ve of hi s horses ; in a n other the

Tex a n s en tered a h ouse an d too k ( show n by a q uic k gra bbin g ) property .

( Ap a che III ) .

Deaf -
m a te atur a l sig na L ook around put forw ard the h a nd , an d
n ,

close it as if to tak e so m ethin g an d m ove i t t o t h e side ( Ba l lar d )

,
.
 251

Bend forw ard your body a n d brin g the h a nd cl inched i n th e m a nner , ,

o f ta k in g so m ethin g under your ar m a t the s a m e ti m e loo k in g a roun d ,

a s if to se e th a t n o one h as seen your deed ( C r o ss ) . .

T ak e a nythi ng spo k en o f an d p ut the h a nd i n the pock et ,

an d turn
a n d r u n a w ay ( L ar so n ) .

U se the h a n d as if to t ak e so m ethin g at the s am e ti m e loo k a roun d ,

a s if t o see if so m ebody co m es ( Ze ig l em .

I ta bla n -

sig n
-

.
The open h a n d he ld before the face , a nd the ngers , b e
gi n ni n g w ith the little o ne , turn ed round i n a w heel si gn ies ,
a robbery .

( B at te n )
horse A .

T o express horse ste a lin g they sa w w ith the right h a n d do wn upon the
-

exten ded ngers o f the left thereby denoti ng rope cuttin g ( Ba r to n )

,
-
.
-
.

L eft h a n d horiz ont al a t in fron t an d as h igh a s th e elbow Right

, ,
.

h a n d a rched j oi ned thu m b restin g ne ar e n d o f fore nger , dow n w a rd

, ,

( si m il ar to V ) a n d p a ssed slowly under the left b a ck w ard tow ard the

, ,

elbow an d qu ic k ly a cross to i ts o wn side to show cr a wli n g up to a ,

horse cuttin g its l ari at an d m ak i n g o ff quic k ly ( Da ko ta I II )

,
. .

S te a m b oa t .

The sig n f o r S m o k e is m a de with the righ t h a n d extended up w a rd

at the side an d a bove the he a d an d then with the m ou th m a k e the ,

pufn g sou n d i n i m it ation of the sound fro m th e esc ape pipes ( Da ko -

.

Fro m the
ta p u i n g soun d o f the esc ape pi pes w hich c a n be he ard
-

a con sider a ble dist a nce on a st il L d ay a n d the s m o k e fro m the s m o k e ,

st ac k .

M ak e the sign f o r 7 a t e r , by pl a cin g the at righ t h a n d before the

face poin tin g up w ard an d forw ard the b a c k for w ard with the wrist as
, , ,

high as the n ose ; then dr a w it down an d in w ard tow ard the chi n ; then
w ith both h a n ds in dic ate the outlines o f a horizon t a l ov a l gure fro m
before the body b ac k to n e ar the chest ( bein g the outlin e o f the dec k )
the n pl a ce both at h an ds poin tin g forw a rd thu m bs hi gher th a n the
, ,

outer ed ges an d pu sh the m forw ard to ar m s len gth ( ill n st r at in g the for
,

w a rd m otion o f the vessel ) ( Ka io wa I ; Co man che II I ; Ap ache II ;.

r

Wichi ta I I ) .

S tin g y , C o ve t o u s, C o wa r d l y , & c .

First l ay the p a l m of the rig h t h a nd horizo n t al over the left bre a st : , ,

then m ak e the sig n for A n g e r by c arryin g the st ( B 2 ) dow n w a rd , ,

in fron t of the body fro m the fa ce to w ard the left to the level of the
,

he a rt but n o t w ith an y e m ph a sis ; a nd then the sign for G o o d i s m a de

,

by Open ing the h a n d turn in g it p al m dow n w ard ( S ,

a n d c arryin g
 252

o ut fro m the bre ast f o r a foot or m ore an d then turnin g the h a n d , ,

thu m b down w ard , b a c k tow ard t h e left an d c a rryin g i t out to the right ,

side of the body on th e sam e level w hich i s the si gn f o r N o or N o t , .

( Da ko ta
M e the si gn for B r a v e G e n e r o u s , a t the en d o f whi ch sign
ak ,

the righ t h an d is open ed as in ( T m odi ed by b a c k o f h an d bein g

m ore con c a ve an d swept se m icircul a rly outw a rd an d dow n w a rd fro m
the righ t side o f he ad ( O to I ) N o good w ill , generosi ty , o r cour a ge
. . .

the left h a n d a ga i n st th e sh oulder , with t h e elbow sl ightly b e

B ri n g
fore the h ip then t ap the elbo w wi th the k n uck les of the ri ght h a n d
,

fro m below upw a rd ( Ap a che I ) . .

C urve th e n gers o f the left h a n d so th a t their tips rest a g ain st the

i nner edge o f the thu m b , wh ich should be a bout a n i n ch fro m the p al m
then bri n g the h an d s l o wly to the pit o f the sto m ach b ac k to the fron t , .

( Ute I )
.

S ti r r u p .

M e rst the si gn for H o r se an d n ext the sign for S a d d l e ; then

ak

c atch the righ t h a nd w ith it s in dex hoo k ed as in position

,
index
m ore opened by the left i n si m il ar position
,
Then r a ise the foot ( either ) .

an d c atch its sole by t h e hoo k ed index o f the left h a nd H oldin g the .

leg th u s , as h alf m oun ted throw the left ar m in to the a ir as the leg over
-

a horse .
( O to a nd M i sso ur i I ) S o m e t hin g h oo k ed to c a t ch th e foot
.

w hen m oun tin g a s a ddled horse .

Sto ne .

Th e ri ght h an d sh ut gi ve sever a l s mall blow s ,

on the left .
( Dun ba r )
Close the right h and an d stri k e the p al m of the left h a n d two
, or

three ti m es w ith i t ( L o ng ) . .

If light , ac t as if p ic k in g i t up ; i f he a vy ,
as if droppi ng i t .
( B a r to n )
Fin gers o f ri ght h an d closed thu m b lyin g a lon g the tips , struck on ce ,

o r twice i nto the p a l m o f the left h a n d ( Cheye nn e I ) . .

W ith the b a c k o f the arched righ t h a n d ( l l ) stri k e repe a tedly in the

p al m o f the left held hori zon tal b a ck outw ard at the hei gh t of th e
, , ,

bre ast an d a bout a foot i n fron t ; the ends of the n g ers poin t in oppo
site direction s ( Da ko ta l ) Fro m i ts use when the ston e w a s the on ly
. .

h am m er .

The ri ght h an d poin ts to the e a rth with the exten ded i ndex ; then
both h and s n gers di vergen t ( as i n P
,
i n verted approxi m a te a t the ,

poi n ts o f i n dex n g e r an d t h u m b then diverge un ti l in descendi n g the

-

,
.

poin ts of ri n g an d little n gers touch th e groun d The n gers the n .

 2 53

a ppro ac h e ach o t her at thei r poin ts un ifor m ly an d di verge three ti m es .

( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) S o m ethin g th a t w oul d ll the h a nd which lies

.
.
, ,

sc attered o n the e a rth .

Deaf -
m a te pic k in g up an d throw
n a t ur a l sig n I m it ate th e action of

in g a ston e an d so m eti m es w ith i ndic ation s of the size an d for m o f

,

t h e obj ect by m e a n s of the left st ( Ba l la r d ) .

S to r e.

First m ak e the si gn for W h i te m then f o r T i p i , an d n a lly

an ,

for T r a d i n g ( Dak o ta .

W h ite m a n s house w here we sw a p

goods .

M ak e the si gn for W h i t e m a n s h o u se ,
an d T o b uy .
( Ka io wa
I; Co m a nche II I ; Ap ache II Wichi ta I I ) .

S to v e .

First poin t to a piece o f iron an d then w ith t h e h an ds in fron t of t h e ,

body m ak e the sh a pe of a box stove a nd co m plete by the sign f o r F i r e .

-

, .

( Da ko t a I )

Iron o f the stove an d re
. .

St ud y , T o ; t o d e l ib era te .

The ar m is exed an d the h a nd assu m es type position ( 0 1 ) m odied -

by the n gers bein g m ore curved cup sh a ped The ar m is then ele v ated ,
-
.

an d t h e h a n d twisted spir a lly fro m left to righ t up w ard before the cen

ter o f the forehe a d ( O to a nd M i sso ur i I ) To revol ve i n m in d

. . .

S tum b l e , T o .

H ol d
the left h a n d a t edgewise extended before the bre ast b ac k to , , ,

the front n gers poi nti n g to the righ t ; then m ove the at ri ght h a n d ,
,

p al m tow ard th e body a n d n g ers poin tin g dow n w a rd , for w ard tow ard
the left a nd as t h e b ack s o f n gers of the righ t stri k e the p al m o f the
,

left drop t h e ri ght h an d over to the fron t a n d dow n w ard a short di s

t an ce ( K aio n a I ; Co ma nch e III ; Ap a che I I ; Wi ch ita II ) To stri k e
.

an obj ect an d to trip o r stu m ble

.
,

Sto r m , T em p e st , or H u r r i c a n e .

The three s ign s for V i n d , B i g , an d Fe a r , in th at order .

( Da n
ba r .
)
M ak e
the R a i n si gn , then if th u nder a n d lightnin g are t o b e e x

pressed , m ove as if i n an ger the body to an d fro to show the wr a th of

, , ,

the ele m en ts ( Ba r to n ) .

S i gn f o r C l o u d s is a lso u sed for stor m ( Da ko ta G a theri n g

. of

the cloud s before a stor m .

 2 54

Deaf -

m u te n a t ur a l sig n R a i n i ndic a ted by

repe ated dow n w ard a

m otion of the extended n gers Wi nd b y a sidewi se sweepi n g m otion

.
,

o f the h a n ds a n d blowin g throu gh the lips ( Ba l lar d ) .

S tr o n g , S t re n g t h .

The h ands ar e clinched ; the left fore ar m is held a l m ost perpend icul arly
n e ar the bre a st , so th a t the st is n e arly opposi t e to the throa t ; the
r ight ar m is then c arried up between the left a nd the bre a st an d co n ,

tin ned on over the left st to the ou tsi de o f th e l atter ; t h e right a rm is

then brou gh t down so as to h a ve the s am e direction wi th the other a nd ,

th e sts rest O p posite to e a ch other in a lin e fro m th e bre a st This .

m o t ion rese m bles the a c t of wrin gin g a thic k towel i f he would say .

I a m stron g he stri k es hi m self upon the bre ast tw o or three ti m es

,

w ith h is st previously t o the m otion a bove described If he would .

a
s y

you are stron g he previously poi nts to you , etc
,

.

Deaf -
m ute n a tur a l sig n I mi ta te the a ction of a person exerti ng m us
c ul ar force .
( B a llar d )
Applied to m an or ani m al .

Both ar m s r aised o n their respecti ve sides to level w ith the sh oulders ,

b a c k o f h a n ds up w a rd sts ( A ) are q uic k ly thro wn dow n w a rd to the

,

level of the sto m a ch o n their respective sides an d brought to a su dde n ,

stop w ith a reboundin g m otion The m uscle o f t h e a r m s chest an d .

, ,

b ac k a re al l brought in to a ction in m a k in g this sign ( Da k o ta

Ex .

h ib it in g m uscul ar p ower .

A s a cord , rope etc ,

.

With both h a nds i n fron t of the bre a st sts ( B ) h an ds se p ara ted a , ,

few in ches , m ak e m ove m en ts as though p ulli n g o n a cord or rope th a t

would n ot yield I n a ddition t o the m uscles o f the a r m s etc , those o f
.
,
.

the fa ce a r e brought m ore i n to a ctio n th a n in the a bove si g n ( Da ko ta .

I ) C a n n ot bre ak it It i s stron g
. . .

S u b m i ssi o n ,

W ith both h a nds in fron t of fa ce open ( W , p a l m s oblique , down w a rd , ,

w ith the little n g e r edge o f the h a n ds low est ) , the n gers close to
-

an d poi n tin g together , the he a d is slightly inclin ed forw a rd a n d eyes

c a st dow n , h a n ds ar e m oved obliq uel y in w a rd an d dow n w ard till t hey

com e close to or r e ach the bre ast Gen er a lly repe a ted two or three ti m es
.

( C hey enne I I ) .

The righ t h an d , w ith n gers extended ( S ) is c arried to the right a n d ,

to the left in fron t o f the bod y a nd b a c k to in fron t o f the right sho ulder ,

w here al l the n gers are closed exceptin g the i ndex , w hich points up
r i ght b a c k o f h a nd outw a rd a n d then the h a n d is t hrow n slowly f o r
, ,

w ard in fron t of the body so th a t it is horizon t al , b ac k do w n w ard , i ndex

 2 55

n ger poi n tin g obliquely forw a rd an d d ow n w ard ( Da ko ta I ) Th e . .

rst p a rt of this sign m e an s everythin g is cle ar ; nothi n g o f thi s m atter

t o co m e u p here a fter ; an d t h e l atter p a rt , I a ccept , I yield , sub i t
m
.

S u g a r ( C o m p are S w e e t )
. .

The ri ght ar m i s ben t at a ri ght an gle an d t h e h a nd in type position , ,

-

( K 1 m odied by the p a l m fa cin g the m outh ) is m ade to slowly an d

, ,

gently touch the ton gue w ith the p al m poi n t of the in dex n g er The -
.

h an d is then dropped and a ppro a ches the ton gue a seco n d tim e i n a se m i
circle the coun ten a nce a n d m ou th i ndic a ti n g ple a sure ( O to an d M is
,
.

so n r i I ) S o m ethi n g th a t ca n be t a sted twice with ple a sure

. .

The right h a nd b ac k outw a rd n gers as i n ( U ) but t urn ed dow n

, , ,

w ard is c arried fro m in fron t o f the body upw ard t o the lips a n d a
, ,

sound m a de by suc k in g in a ir ( Da ko ta I ) It i s swee t ; I li k e it

. . .

Su m m e r .

Both h a nds n gers an d th u m bs sep a r a ted ( "

, ,
n gers d ow n w ard ) ar e ,

m oved out w a rd to fron t an d up w a rd a s f ar a s a r m s will re a ch The .

h and s n eed n ot be i n sh ape till they are o ut at ar m s len gth The si gn

.

is st a ti on a ry ( C h ey e nn e II ).

S upposed t o represen t r ays an d he a t
.

o f sun stri k in g down

.

M e the si gn for G r a s s in fron t o f the body c a rryi n g the h a n d

ak
,

up w ard tw o or three feet from the groun d , in dic ati n g th at the gr a ss is

lon g ; an d then the left h a nd represen tin g a T r e e i s held i n fron t , ,

of the bre a st a n d w ith the right h a nd m ak e m ove m en ts a s though pic k

,

in g so m eth in g fro m i t an d puttin g in t h e m onth ( Da ko ta I ) The . .

t i m e when the gr a ss i s lon g a nd the cherries a r e ripe ; hen ce , su m m er .

M e the si g n f o r G r a ss g ro w i n g i
ak m ove the right h a n d fro m ,
.

the ground up w ard three or four in ches at a ti m e ( Da ko ta IV ) The . .

gr ass gettin g hi gher a nd h igher .

Poin t to the sk y then p a ss the p al m s , turn ed u p ward to the ri gh t

, ,
an d

left h ori zon tally before the bre ast ( Da k o ta V I )

, ,
. .

The counten a n ce a ssu m es a n oppressive m ien ; the ri gh t arm is ele

r a ted a n d the in dex n g e r i n ty pe posi t ion ( J ) poin ts to the su n in the
- -

zen ith ; both h a n ds the n w a ve above the he a d , in ty pe positi on ( P 1 ) -

m odi ed by bein g inverted ; the h a nds thus rese m blin g the direct r a y s ,

of the sun appro a ch the h e a d ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) The ti m e when

,
. .

t h e r ays o f the sun descend direct oppress s

a n d u .

Sam e sign as for Hot .

( Ka io w a I ; C o m a nche III ; Ap a che II Wichi ta
II )
.

M a de in the s am e m a n n er as t h at f o r W arm .
( Ap ache I ) .
 2 56

Sun .
( C o m p a re Da y . )
The thu m b a n d n ger , for m in g a circle elev a ted
,
in front to w a rd the
fa ce ( Du n ba r
. .

The foren ger and th u m b ar e brought together a t tips so as to for m

a circle an d held u p tow a rd
,
the sun s tr ac k ( L o ng)

.

For m s m all circle w ith the f o r e ng e r s an d h old t he m tow ard he a ven

a .

( Wied ) I h a ve given you t his si gn ( M a tthe ws) There is no v isible .

iden tity in the executio n o f the ( O to I ) sign a n d Wied e a lthough a

,

see m in g si m il a rity i n conception exists ; the si m il ari t y in t h e signs f o r

d ay expl a i n s the pr a ctice of spe ak in g of a d ay as af e r o ne o r m o r e suns
t

( B o te l e r ) .

J oi nthe tips of the thu m b and forenger of the s am e h an d the in te ,

rior outlin e a pproxi m atin g a circle an d i ndic ate thus the proj ectio n o f ,

it s dis k a g a i nst the sk y ( A r a pa ho I ) . .

Right h a n d ng e r crook ed elev ated an d he l d tow ard the e a st

-

, ,
.

( C hey enne I ) The croo k is an a bbrevi ation o f the circle representin g

.

the o r b .

Right h a n d closed the i ndex an d th u m b curved w ith tip s touching

, , ,

t hu s a pproxi m a tin g a circle a n d held to wa rd the sk y ( A bsa r o ka I

,
.
'

S hosh o ni a n d B an a k I ; Ute I ; Wy a ndo t I ) .

Righ t h a n d ex t en ded a t side o f body o n a level with the he a d ; w ith

the foren ger an d thu m b describe a crescent ot h er n gers closed ( Da ,
.

ko ta I ) .

M ak e the sign for Da y , a nd then ex the right i ndex an d thu m b

until their ends ar e abou t four in ches a p a rt ; or as so m e do un til they , ,

a r e a n in ch an d a h alf a p art ; o r as m ost do brin g the ends together

; , ,

ne arly close the other ngers a nd r a ise the h an d in fron t of the fore
he ad The n l n ar ( in ner ) edge of the h a nd is usu a lly turned to w ard
.

the p art o f the sky w here the su n is supposed to be : for sunrise , tow ard
the e ast ; for n oon tow a rd the zen i th ; for s unset tow ard the west ( Da
, , .

ko ta I V . .
)
lose the righ t h a nd curve the i ndex n g e r in the for m of a h alf
C ,
-

circle an d in this position hold the h an d upw ard tow a rd the sun s trac k
,

.

( Dak o ta V ) .

C lose
the right h a nd for m in g a circle w i th t h e thu m b
,
an d i ndex ,
then h old the h a n d tow ard the sk y ( Da ko ta V I I ) . .

The p a r t ly ben t index a nd thu m b of the ri ght h an d a r e brought

together a t their tips so a s to represent a circle ; an d w ith these digits
,

next to the fa ce th e h a n d is he l d up tow ard the sk y , fro m on e to two

feet fro m the eye an d in such a m ann er th a t the gl a n ce m ay be directed
through the Openin g ( M anda n a nd H ida tsa I ) . / .
 257

The right ar m is elev ated , then e xten ded to t h e left on a level with
the left deltoid pro m inence The h an d is i n type p osi tion ( I 1 ) m odied
.

by bein g horizon t al The h a nd an d a r m thus poi nt in g t o the O rient ,

.

describes next the ar c o f the v a ul t o f the he a ven s an d slowly sin k s ,

w a verin g extended fro m shoulder , pointin g t o t h e west The sig n for
,
.

L i g h t is n ext execute d ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) Th a t which p a sses

-
. .

throu gh the he a ven s v a ul t sheddin g ligh t

, .

R a ise the ri ght h a nd a bove the n e ed h oldin g the Open p al m to w ard ,

the sk y ( sun i n pr ayer ) ( Po n k a I ) Wa k and a Pr aying to the

. .

J oin the ti ps of the i ndex an d th u m b so as to for m a circle , close the

re m a ini n g n gers a n d hol d the h an d to w a rd t h e sk y with the o dt e r ,

edge for w ard ( Ka io wa I ; C o m an che I II Ap a che 1 1 ; Wi chi ta I I )

. .

For m a circle w ith the i n dex an d thu m b tips touc h in g , the re m aini ng ,

n gers closed a n d hol d the m tow a rd t h e sk y ( A p a ch e

,
.

Deaf -
m ute na tu r a l sig n Point to w a rd the sk y , m ak e a circle wi th the
foren ger , an d w in k as if d azzled by the sun s r ays
.
( B a l la r d )
E clipse of .

First m ak e the sign for the S u n and then , the si gn for De a d ,

De a t h .
( Da ko ta I )
The su n is de a d
. .

S u n d og s
-
.
( C o m p are A u ro r a B o r e a l i s ) .

Fir st m ak e the sig n f o r the S u n directly i n fron t o f t h e body wi th ,

t h e righ t h an d a nd then the sign for F i r e , o n t h e s am e level a n d a t

,

both sides o f it at the s a m e ti m e ( Da ko ta I ) Fire bui lt to he a t t h e . .

w in ter sun .

S u n r i se .

M ake the sign for Da y at the s a m e ti m e i ndic a tin g p osition ,

of the
su n , j ust a bove t h e hori zon a s in sign for S u n
.

( A r ap aho I ) ,
. .

M ake the si gn for the S u n b ut poin t th e crescen t in the direc t ion o f,

the risin g su n in the h orizon , an d then c arry it slightly up w a rd ( Da .

ko ta I )
.

The co m in g 11 p of the sun .

M ak e the sign f o r M o r n i n g an d then the si gn for S u n , holdin g ,

the in n er edge o f the h a n d tow ard the e ast an d r aisin g it a little

( Da ko t a IV )

U ncoverin
. g the sun
.

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig n "
The s a m e sign as S u n w ith th e addition ,
of

poin tin g to the e a stern horizon ( Ba l lar d ) . .

S u n se t .

M ak e t h e sign for N i g h t , a t the s am e ti m e i ndic a tin g position of the

su n , j ust below horizon , a s in sign for S u n ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

33
 32 5 8

Right h a n d foren ger crook ed , as in si gn

-
for M o r n i ng , lowered
tow ard the western horizon ( C h ey en ne .

Point
the cresce nt sign for S u n in the direc tio n o f the settin g sun ,

in the horizon a n d belo w i t ( Da ko ta S u n h a s dis a ppe ared fro m .

V ie w

.

M e the si gn f o r S u n holdin g the in ner edge o f the h an d tow ard

ak ,

the west an d lowerin g i t a li ttle then m ak e the sig n for Ni g h t ( Da , .

ko ta IV ) .

Deaf -
m u te na tu r a l sig n The s a m e si gn as for the Sun , and poi n tin g
to th e western hori zon .
( B a l la r d )

S u p e ri o r . Se e A h e a d .

S u p p l i c a t i on .

I ta li a n sig n F a llin g upon the k n ees an d cl aspi n g the h a n ds or l ayin g

-

the p al m s together shows the supplic a tion o f a begg a r ( B ut ler ) . .

S u r p r i se ( C o m p a re A d m i r a t i o n an d W o n d e r )
. .

Throw t h e he a d an d body b a c k w ard with a quick m otion a nd express

surprise by faci al e m otion s an d the eyes See con nection wi th H o r r o r .

un der th a t word Wo nder i s i ncl uded i n the sig n for S urp r ise ( Da ko ta I )
. . .

The ri gh t h a n d p a l m i n w a rd w i th the n gers sli ghtly ben t i s pl a ced

, , ,

over the m outh i n such a w ay a s to le a ve the lips free to a rticul a te

The i ndex rests o n the upper li p but the p a l m does n ot touch th e ,

m outh The thu m b co mm only rest s a ga in st the righ t si de of the n ose ,

.

a n d o n e or m ore n g e r ti ps on t h e fa ce to the left of the m outh

-
W hile .

the h and is th us h eld lo w gro an s excl a m a tion s , or expression s o f su r

, ,

prise ar e uttered M an d a n an d H ida tsa I )

. .

C lin ch the sts shri n k a w ay Fists

a nd . m ust be n e ar w aist an d no t

at ch in , as in F e a r ( Ap ache I II )
. .

Deaf -
m ute n a t u r a l siy n .
Pa rt th e lip s ,
a rch th e e y ebrows , and r aise
the h and .
( Ba l la r d ) .

S u rr e n d e r . Se e "u i et.

S u rro u n d .

A t the heigh t of th e bre a st b ac k s of h ands obliq uely u p w ard th u m b , ,

an d foren ger of e ach extended curved an d brou ght ne a rly together ; , ,

other ngers o f both h a nds closed ( Da ko ta

C losin g in o n or sur .

roun din g anythin g .

S urroun ded .

For m a circle a bout eight in ches in di a m eter by exten din g an d sep a

 2 59
'

r ati n g both thu m bs a nd f o r e ng e r s an d holdi ng the h a nds opposite ,

e ach other w ith p a l m s i n w ard ; then m ove the h an ds a bou t six inches
fro m side to side ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

S ur rou ndin g
the bison .

The sign for B i so n is rst m ade ; the h and with th e f o r e n g e r s an d ,

th u m bs i n a se m icircle , are then brou gh t t w o o r three ti m es together .

( L o ng )
-

First m ak e the sign for B i so n an d then th e si gn for S u rro u n d

in g .
( Da k o ta I ) .

S u sp i c i o n .

I ta l i a n sig n Dr a w dow n one lower eyelid which i s

to ,
as m uch as

say ,
L e t m e open m y eyes a little w ider A m an con v inced th a t o t hers .

w ish to i m pose upon h im an d wishin g to let the m k no w th a t he i s n o t

,

i m posed upon , points a n ger a t his e y e a s i f to say , M y eye is w i de

Open a n d sees w h at you ar e about ( B utler ) .

Sw a l l ow Sw a l l ow i n g
, To . .

S lightl y ex the n gers O f the ri ght h an d a n d pl a ce the t h u mb

a g a in st the side o f the index the h a nd directed forw a rd p a l m up w a rd , , ,

i n fron t O f the righ t bre a st a n d , wh ile turni n g the h a nd over m ove i t

, ,

rst up w ard then b ac k w ard through a curve to the m outh an d then

, ,

d own w ard to the top o f the bre a stbone ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

S w e e t ( C o m p a re S u g a r an d S o u r )
. .

Tip Of foren ger touched a g a in st the tip of ton gue ; sign for G oo d .

( C h ey enne I ) .

Sa m e the si g n for S o u r o m itti n g the spi ttin g

as , ,
and s m ack in g th e
l ips in ste ad ( D ak o ta I )

.Good ; I li k e it .
.

Deaf mu te n a t ur a l siy n A n y
-
. a gree a ble t a ste w ould be in dic a ted by
s m a ck i n g the lips ( Ba l l a r d ) .

S w i f t sw i f t n e ss, .

The two i n dex n g e r s ar e held p a r a llel together a n d poi ntin g f o r wag b

-

the right o n e i s then p a ssed ra pidly for w a rd ( L ong ) .

L eft h a n d hel d horizon t al with p al m dow n w ard n gers extended , ,

j oin ed pointin g outw ard ( W ) a bout 1 2 in ches in fron t Of bre a st ; p a ss

, ,

the right h and , c arried o utw a rd fro m the right bre a st by the st a tion ary ,

left with a r apid m otion ( Dako ta I ) The swift p assin g the slow
,
. . .

Deaf -
m u te na t ur a l si g n .
A slight m ovin g
the body fro m side to
of

side i n r apid succession ,

and a sli gh t m ove m en t of the feet o n the oor .

(
B a l l ar d )
 2 60

I ta li an sig n The colloqui a l phr a se ,

h a nd over h and , ex actl y de
scri bes the It a li a n m otion to e xpress th e s a m e ide a n am ely , t o do an y
,

thin g r apidly ( B a d en ) .

S w im m m in g , sw i .

The foren ger of the ri ght h an d ex t en ded ou tw ard an d m oved to

a n d fro ( Dn nbar ) . .

brough t together i n fron t of the body about a foot ( W ) , wi th

H a nds
n gers poin ti n g outw a rd ; m ak e a series of sidewise m ove m en t s of the
h a n ds tow a rd th e right an d left , o n a cur ve , i n i m it a tion of the m ove
m en ts o f t h e h an ds and a r m s in sw i m m in g ( D a ko t a I )

Fro m the . .

act of sw i m m i n g

.

S w o rd .

M ak e the m otion of dra win g i t .

( Bur to n )
Ri gh t h an d a ttened n gers pointi n g up w ard little n ger fron t ; , ,

m otion m a de forw a rd t o i m ita te cu t tin g ( C heyenn e I ) . .

S y p h i l is .

The left h a n d is closed a ll owin g th e foren ger to be exten ded and ,

poin t in g forw a rd before the body ; then , with the thu m b and index o f
the ri ght pretend to pick 011 s m all p articles of i m a gin ary forei gn bodies
,
'

fro m v arious sides o f the foren ger ( A bsa r o k a I ; S hoshoni a nd B a na k . .

I) . Fro m the ulcer a ti n g or e atin g n ature of the dise ase

.

Ta l k . Se e Sp e a k .

T a st e .
( C o m p are S w ee t an d Sou r ) .

Touch the ton gue tip -

.
( B u r to n )
Righ t h a n d fore an d m iddle n gers pointed up w ard , touched to
-

,
t ip
of ton gue ( Chey enn e I ) . .

S i m ply
touch the foren ger o f the right h a n d to t h e t on gue .
( Da ko ta
I .
)
Fro m th e act of t a stin g .

Put o ne fore n ger i n the other p al m , t hen to ton gue .

( Ap ach e
T e l e g ra p h .

L eft
i ndex extended a nd held in fron t of the body , h orizont al an d
poi n tin g tow a rd the ri ght b ac k ou t w ard , is struc k s m artly crosswi se ,

sever a l ti m es by the ri ght i ndex edge of h a n d dow n w ard an d t hen the , ,

sign f o r T a l k i n g o r S p e a k i n g is m a de to co m plete it ( Da ko ta .

The rst p a rt of this si gn denotes t h e stri k in g of the k e y .

Te ll . Se e Sp ea k .
 26 1

T e xa n .
( C o m p a re S t e a l ) .

Pl a ce widely extended th u m bs a n d f o r e ng e r s as if i nclosi n g a very

l arge h at bri m o u t b y sides of he ad ( Ap a che I II ) S uch bein g
, . .

estee m ed by Tex a n s .

T ha n k s .
( C o m p a re G l a d ) .

T h a n k y o u , or , m ore
stri ctly I n v o k i n g a b l e ssi n g , .

The righ t h a n d upright , open ed an d rel axed , n gers sep ar a ted a lit
tle p al m forw ard is pl a ced n e a r the person s forehe a d an d then m oved
, ,

do w n w ard in fron t of the fa ce to the stern u m the h a n d bein g a t the ,

s am e ti m e ben t a t the w rist until it beco m es horizon tal ( Da k o ta I V ) . .

Both h and s ar e frequen tly dr a w n dow n w ard i n fron t o f the fa ce .

The f t . Se e Ste a l .

T h e re , I h a ve b e e n .

H old th e open left h a nd its p a l m obliquely b a ck w ard an d upw ard a

, ,

foot in front of t h e chest ; then , the ri ght h a n d bein g closed excep t i n g

t h e i ndex w hich is to be exten ded up w ard , stri k e it s p a l m an d n gers
,

a g ai n st the p a l m of the left a n d hold the two h a nds still for a few sec

ouds ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

Thic k .

First m a k e the sign for T h i n , an d then the si gn f o r No or N o t , ,

an d then the two h a n ds with n gers e xten d ed a nd j oined a re held

, ,

h orizon t al si x o r seven i nches a p art i n front o f the bre a st wi t h their

, , ,

p a l m ar surfaces to w a rd on e a n other ( Da ko ta I ) Not thin . . .

Thi n . See P oo r .

T hi n k G u e ss ( C o m p are S t u d y )
; . .

Pa ss the foren ger sh a rply a cross the bre a st fro m right to left .

( B ur to n )

(1) Righ t h a n d n gers a nd th u m b loosely closed fore nger croo k ed

-

sli ghtly exten ded ; ( 2 ) d i pped over tow ard an d sudden l y forw a rd fro m
left shoulder o r upper a r m ( C heyenne I ) . .

Right h a n d c a rried t o the left bre a st wi th the fore an d secon d n gers ,

exten ded poi n tin g do wn w ard , obliquely tow a rd the left , b a c k outw a rd
,

( N turned obliq uely do w n w ard ) m ak e sever al outw ard an d in w ard

, ,

m ove m e n ts of the exten ded n gers on ly ( Da ko ta I ) S top " let m e . .

thin k The he art is rega rded as the se a t of al l the fu n c t ions of life

.
,

hen ce the si gn o f thin k i n g fro th t org n

m a a

.

H ol d the left h an d poin tin g tow ard the righ t p al m , b a c k w a rd a foot

, ,

i n fron t o f the n ec k ; th en m ove the right h a nd , p a l m tow a rd the left ,

fro m an upri ght posi tion j ust below the m o nt h over the left to ar m s
 2 62

len gth , turnin g the en d of the righ t h a n d down w a rd u n til it poi nts for
w ard ( Da k o ta IV )
. The m ind goin g str a i ght forw ard
. .

C linch the righ t h an d and pl ace the r a di a l side ( either t h e th u m b o r

t h e m i d dle j oin t o f the in dex ) a g a in st the lower portion of the forehe a d ;
the st i s usu ally pl a ced between the eyes A t the s a m e t i m e the he ad .
_ ,

w ith eyes to the groun d is in clined an d rested a ga in st the st as if in

, ,

m edi ta tion ( Da ko ta V I VI I )
.
,
.

H it the chest w ith closed st thu m b over the ,

st .
( O ma ha I ) .

Deaf -
r
m a te I n the sen se o f Supp ose or Pr esnme the si gn
na tu a l sign

w as m a de by n oddin g the h e a d sli ghtly a cco m p a nied by a ste a dy xin g ,

o f t h e ey e ( Ba l la r d)
.

I ta l i a n sig n The foren ger on th e forehe a d denotes either effor t of

thou ght or force of t alent .

( B ut l e n )

T h un d e r .

The sign o f R a i n a cco m p a nie d by the voice i m it a tin g the ru m blin g

soun d of th un der ( Dun ba r ) .

H a nds p arti ally closed b a c k s outw a rd , elev a ted to the e ars ; m oved
,

sli gh tly out an d i n face expressin g a n noy a nce o r p a i n ( C hey enne I ) . .

An other : The sign for T o S i n g ex a gger a ted ( C hey enne I ) . .

Gre a t
v oice o r bi g sin g .

Ri ght h a n d r a ised as hi gh a bove the he a d as possible ( wi t h th e h a n d

a s T ) brin g it dow n i n front o f the b ody with a q uic k m oti on sn a ppin g
, ,

the n gers , an d sep ar atin g the m ( as " ) , the n gers poi ntin g down w a rd ,

b a ck o f h a n d outw ard S a m e sign in cl udes L i g h t n i n g Thu nder

. .

a n d l ightnin g so freq uen tly a cco m p a n y e a ch other a s to suggest to the

Ind i a n the ide a o f const a ncy ; hence n o sep ar a te sign for ligh tni n g .

( Da ko ta I ) .

Fro m posi tions ne a r together in fron t o f the fa ce , p a l m s forw ard , se p

a r a te the upright clinched h a nds a bout eighteen in ches a n d then , tur n ,

in g the p a l m s in w a rd m ove the h a n ds b a c k w ard , o ne o n e ach side o f

,

t h e he a d ; ( Da ko ta IV ) S pre a ds an d goes a w ay
. .

T ie , To .

M ak e a circul ar m otion a round over , an d above t h e left h a nd held ,

i n fron t o f bre a st ( st , A 1 ) with t h e right h a nd w ith thu m b an d fore ,

n ger exten ded crook ed a nd m eeti n g ( other n gers closed ) , b a ck o f h a n d

,

up w ard of closed n gers outw a rd , an d t hen p a ss the ri ght h a n d un der

,

the left wi th thu m b a n d fore n ger sep ar a ted an d dr a w n in w ard or b a ck

,

w ard a g a in a s though h a vi n g seized hol d o f so m eth in g and p ullin g h ard

 2 63

on i t a fter which the right h a n d i s dropped down w ard

, .
( Da k o ta I ) .

P uttin g a l a ri a t a roun d the pole an d m ak i n g it secure . S ecuring the

horse .

Ti m e .

The se a sons correspondin g wi th our div ision s of winter , S prin g sum

, .

m e r a n d a utu m
, n ar e den oted by their a ppropri a te sign s Win ter by
, ,

C o l d o r S n o w ; Sp r ing by the S p r i n g i n g u p o f t h e G r a ss ;
,

S h unner , by L o n g G r a ss the T i m e C h e rr i e s a r e R i p e etc ;

, , .

an d A utu m n by the F a l l i n g o f t h e L e a v e s
, H o ur o f the d ay .

is a pproxi m ately den oted by the P o si t i o n o f t h e S u n A M o n th .

( on e m oon ) is al so den oted by i t s appropri a te si gn Day s an d n i ghts .

can a l so be so denoted ( Dako ta .

Deaf -
m ute n a tn r a l sig n No gener al sign
i ndic ated b y . A day i s
m ov in g t h e foren ger a cross the sk y ; p a r ts o f t h e d ay by portion s of
thi s m ove m en t ; (l ays n u m bered by sleep s , th at is by inclin in g the he a d ,

o n the h an d repe atedly ; noo n by the i ndex n g e r o f the ri ght h a n d -

a pp l ied to th a t o f th e left a s for the ti m e w hen the h a n ds o f the clock

,

m eet a n d both poin t to the hour twelve ( B a lla r d ) .

Future .

The ar m s ar e exed h an ds brought together i n fr ont o f body as

an d
'

i n t y p e p o sit io n ( W ) The h a n ds a re m a de to m ove in w a ve li k e m o

~
.
-

tion u p an d dow n together a nd fro m side t o side ( O to I ) Flo a ti n g . .

o n th e tide of ti m e

.

C ou n toff n gers , then shut al l the n gers of both h an ds se ver a l

ti m es an d touch the h a ir an d ten t ( Ap a che
M a n y y e ars ;
'

.
,

w h en I a m ol d ( white

Deaf -
m u te n a tn r a l sig n To denote
future ti m e th e si gn i s m a de b y a ,

puttin g the h a nd on th e ch e ck with th e he a d sl i ghtly i ncli n ed m e an in g ,

d a y s an d coun ti n g on the n gers to den ote h o w m a n y

,
There is n o .

specic si gn to distin gui sh th e p a st from the future ( B a lla r d ) .

L on g .

Pl a ce the h ands close together an d then m ove the m slowly a sun der ,
so slowly th a t they see m a s if they would n ever co m plete the gesture .

h
( C eye enn si gn Report of L ie u.t J W A ber t l o c ci t p
. This
. .
,
.
,
.

w a s u sed in n a rr a ti n g a tr a dition an d referrin g t o gre a t an tiquity in ti m e ;

a lso a pp li ed to gre a t inden ite dist a n ce

.
,

S ign s for Sl e e p ( A r ap a ho I ) L iter all y , man y sleep s

an d NI a n y . . .

Fin gers o f both h a nd s cl a sped a s th ough holdin g a strin g , left h a n d

re m ai ni n g st a tion ary , righ t h an d dra w n alon g the i m a gin ary stri n g i n
proportion to the len gth of ti m e to be represen ted It a lso m e an s o l d .

i n the abstr act ( C hey enn e I ) . .

 264

Pl a cethe h an ds a s i n T i l n e ( S h o r t ) ; then dra w th e m a p a r t a ny

.

dista nce thought necess ary b y the t a l k er to con vey the ide a ( C h ey .

en ne I I ) .

Both h a nds i n fron t o f the bre a st thu m b a nd fore n ger o f e a c h ,

extende d curved a nd m eetin g at tips ( other n gers closed ) h a nds h ori

, , ,

zo n t al ,
b a c k s outw ard secon d ph al a n ges of li ttle n gers j oined then
, ,

th e h a nds a r e sep ar a ted b y slo wly c a rryin g ri g h t to righ t l eft to left , ,

still horizont al a nd o n the s am e level by a series o f sh ort stops as

, , ,

t hough p assi n g a stri n g between the thu m b a nd foren ger o f e a ch a nd

tighten in g o n it a r m s c a rried to full exten t a t si des of body ( Da ko ta
,
.

I)
. M a k in g ti m e .

Throw the uprigh t opened right h an d for w a rd three ti m es fro m the

w ris t j us t i n fron t o f the righ t e ar the p a l m i n w ard n gers j oined , , ,

thu m b sep ar a ted a little fro m the in dex ( Da k o ta IV ) . .

H old the left h a nd closed a bout a foo t in fron t of the left s houlder
'

, , ,

the fore n ger extended an d poin t in g up w ard ; then close the rig ht h a nd ,

i ndex only exten ded horizon t al ; tou ch t h e tip o f the left fore n ger w ith
,

t h e tip o f the i ndex a n d dr a w the ri ght h an d b ac k w ard to th e right

,

sh oulder ( Sh osho n i a nd Ba na k I )
. .

Pl a ce t h e
left h a n d in fron t of the chest the tips o f the th u m b a nd ,

fore n ger touchin g with re m a in in g n g e rs tightly closed ; w i th the

,

n gers and t hu m b o f the right h an d si m il arly pl a ced ; brin g the tips of

thu m b an d index o f the ri gh t a g a in st those of the left a nd dra w the m ,

slowly a p a rt the left h a n d forw ard a n d outw ard fro m the left side a nd
, ,

the ri gh t b a c k w a rd over the fron t o f the right shoulder ( Kai o wa I ; .

C o m a nch e I II ; Ap a ch e II Wichi ta II ) .

A n other H ol d
the left h a nd a bou t t wel ve inc h es in front of the left
:

shoulder tips o f foren ger an d thu m b touchin g ; then brin g t h e tip of

,

t h e in dex a g a in st th a t o f the thu m b the ri ght touchin g those o f the left , ,

an d dr a w the m slowly ap a rt brin gin g the ri ght h a n d to w a rd the righ t

,

shoulder a s i f dra win g ou t a lon g thre a d ( Wy a ncl o t I ; K aio wa 1 ; C c .

m a n ch e III ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi t a II ) .

Pl a cethe thu m b a n d foren ger o f e ach h an d a s if holdin g a s m al l pin ,

pl a ce the two h a n ds ( in this position ) a s if h oldin g a thre a d in e ach h a n d ,
a nd between t h e th u m b an d foren ger o f e a ch h a n d close together a n d
,

let t h e h a n ds recede fro m e ach other stil l h oldi n g the n gers in the ,

s am e position , as i f lettin g a t hre a d sl ip between the m un t il the h a nds ,

ar e t w o feet a p a r t Wi chi ta I ) . .

L a tely ,
recen tly .

Ri ght h a n d n gers an d thu m b exten ded str ai ght up w a rd , sep ar ated

-
 2 65

( R ) , is b r ought up to side of face ( ri ght ) with p al m tow a rd fa ce ,

an d

m oved b a ck w a rd a nd for ward two or t h ree ti m es ( Cheye nne I I ) . .

H old the left h a nd a t ar m s len gth clo sed , w ith fore n ger on ly ex
,

te nded a nd pointi n g in the directio n of t h e pl a ce w here th e even t c c

curred the n hold the righ t h a n d a ga in st the righ t sho ulder closed bu t , ,

w ith i n dex extended a n d p oin t in g in the d irec t ion o f th e left T h e .

h a n ds m ay be exch a n ged the right exte n ded a nd the left ret a ined a s
, ,

the c ase m ay re q u ire for e a se in description ( A bsa r o ka I ; Sh osho ni a nd .

Ba n ak I ) .

The a t open ri ght h a n d t ur ned b ac k tow a rd the right n gers ex , ,

tended poi nti n g u p w a rd ( S ) i s c arried b a ck w a rd a nd forw a rd at the

, ,

right side o f the he a d a n d then the righ t h and i s p assed by th e left

,

h and , held horizont al b a ck to w a rd the left ( S turn ed h ori zon t a l in

,

ste a d of u pright ) a bout a foot a nd a h a lf i n fron t of the fa ce ( Da ko ta

,
.

I ) Gone by i n t i m e
. .

E xte n d
the rig h t i ndex h a lf close the other n gers th u m b a g a i n st
, ,

the m iddle n ger , a nd a fter pl a cin g the h a n d b a c k o ut wa rd a nd wel l ,

exten ded on the upright fore ar m four or six i nches i n fro n t o f the righ t
, ,

e ar , throw i t forw a rd a bo ut four i nches thr ee ti m es by j er k s fro m the , ,

wri st ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

L on g ag o .

B oth h a n ds closed f o r e ng e r s e xte n de d a n d stra i g h t ; pl a ce one h a n d

,

at a r m s len gth poin t in g hori zo n t a lly , the other a g a i n st the shoulder or

,

ne a r i t pointi ng in the s am e directio n as the opposite o ne Freq uen tly

,
.

the tips of t h e f o re ng e r s ar e pl a ced together , an d the h a n ds dr a w n .

a p a rt , unt il they r e ach t h e position s described ( A bsa r o ka I S hosh o ni .

a n d B a na k I ) .

Pl a ce
the at rig h t h a n d p a l m forw ard n e a r the side of the he ad an d
, , ,

w a ve i t by i n terrupte d m ove m en ts outw ard tow ard the right , gr a du a lly

turnin g the p a l m m ore an d m ore to the right ( Ka io w a I ; Co m a n ch e .

II I ; Ap a che II ; Wichi ta I I ) .

A n other : Pass
the right h an d a t an d extended edge wise an d poin t , ,

in g u p w a rd fro m o ver the shoulder , outw ard to w ard the right i n a

w a vin g m otion so th a t at e a ch m ove m en t the h a n d is farther fro m the
,

he a d and a t l a st the p al m is turned ne arly to the right ( Ka io wa I ;

, .

Co manch e I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wich ita I I ) .

S hort .

The si g n for T i l n e (L on g) followed by th a t of neg a tion .

( A r ap
a ho I ) .

B oth
h a nd s in fron t of bre ast about si x in che s a p art arched ( l l , , ,

b ac k outw a rd ) th u m bs an d f o r e ng e r s horizont al , an d poin ted tow a rd

,

34
 266
.

e a ch other ; m ove slowly together till thu m bs an d n gers . of e a ch h a n d .

touch if a very sh ort ti m e is m e an t ( C h ey enn e I I )

,
. .

Indic a te by poin tin g t o the su n o r above , a s at the sun a t hi gh me ri

di a n a n d m ove right h a n d to ri ght a sh o rt dist a n ce O r , if sun or
,
.

m oon is seen poin t a t w ith s am e i ndi c a tion a slo w m otion an d short

, , ,

dist a n ce o f rot atio n o r ch an ge ( Oj i bwa IV ) . .

The ri ght i n dex exten ded an d poi n t in g obliq uely upw ard ( K ) , is held
ten or twelv e i nches i n fro n t of the bre a st then the h a n d is turned ,

horizon tal b a c k up w a rd a n d dra wn slo wl y i n w a rd to the b ody n gers

, , ,

poin tin g to w ard the left a nd obliquely do wn w a rd ( Da ko ta I ) A . . .

short dista nce i n ti e

m
.

With the ti ps the i n dex a nd th u m b o f the righ t h a n d touch in g ,

of

preten d to dr a w a sh or t ber hel d by the foren ger an d thu m b of the

left ( Ka io wa I ; Co ma nche III ; Ap ach e II ; Wichi ta I l l )
.

A nother Pl a ce
the tips of th e f o re n g e r s a nd th u m bs together as in
:

T i l n e ( L o n g ) ; then dr a w the m abou t an in ch a p a rt ( Ka i o n a I ; .

C o m a n ch e I II ; Ap ache II ; Wi chi ta II ) .

Som e
ti m e a g o Fro m a cert ain ti m e m en tioned
. .

H a ving pl a ced the n e a rly closed left h a n d , b a c k outw a rd , a bout tw o

feet i n fron t o f the lo wer p art of the chest an d the righ t h a nd b a ck -
, ,

outw ard , about six i nches b ac k of i t a nd a little to the right , n gers r e

l a xe d a nd sep a r a te d a little , push the left h a n d a very l ittle forw ard
an d to w a rd the left an d dr a w th e right b a c k w a rd an d tow a rd the ri gh t
,

u n til it i s a bout six inches in fro n t o f the right side ; then drop the left
h an d an d m ove the righ t o ne froin the wrist up a nd do w n a bou t ei gh t
i nches two or three ti m es ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

S oon .

R a ise left h a nd a n d ar m p a r t ly , p al m tow a rd the body , ar m ben t a t

ri ght a n gle h a nd a n d fore ar m dr a wn forw ard tow a rd the body slowly
, ,

w ith slight bow of he a d to w a rd body ( Oj i bwa I V ) . . .

ery l on g ag o
V .

Wa ve the extended at right h a n d in an i nterrupted m a n ner outw ard

a n d slightly b a c k w a rd fro m the right side of the h e a d .
( Wy and o t I ) .

( ) f d ay . S ee Ho u r .

To -

d ay . Se e Da y .
( Co m p a re N o w ) .

'
l i p i ( te p ee ) . See L o dge .

T ir e d , we a r y .

the p al m a r sur f aces of bot h h a n ds ( W ) a g a in st the legs ab out

S tri k e
m id w ay between the thighs a nd k nees , an d c arry out t o the side s f o r a
 267

fe w inches with bot h h a nds a s in ( W ) with exten d ed n gers poi n tin g ,

forw a rd , c arryi ng the h a n ds do w n w a rd for ni ne o r ten i n ches wi th a

.

q uic k m otion a nd co m in g to a sudde n stop ( Da ko ta I ) L egs h a ve . .

g i ven out .

,
T he left ar m is p a rtly extended for w a rd a n d is gen tly struck ne a r
the ben d o f the elbow , usu a lly a bove i t , wi th the p a l m o f th e ri ght
h a nd ; a t t h e s a m e ti m e the he a d is usu a lly i ncli ned to the left si de ;
then i n si m i l a r m a n ner the ri g h t a r m is exten ded a nd struc k by the
, ,

left h a nd , a n d th e he a d i n turn i nclin ed to the right If the sign m a k er

, ,
.
-

a i m s to be p art icul a rly expressi ve he a ssu m es a n a ppe a r a nce o f we a ri ,

n ess ( M anda n an d H ida tsa I )

. .

Pa ss
the h a nds dow n the legs h a n ds tre m blin g g a ther ar m s to side , , ,

sts before chin a nd settle elbow s dow n i n the l a p ; fa ci al expression

,

corrobor a tin g ( Ap a che III ) .A c t io n o f an exh a usted m an .

-
.

T o m ah a w k, a x, h a tc h e t .

C ross th e ar m s a n d slide the edge o f the right h a nd held vertic a lly

,
.

, ,

dow n o ver the left a r m ( Wied) S till e m ployed a t le a st for a s m a ll

.
,

h atche t o r dress to m a h a w k a s I m igh t c a ll it T h e essenti a l poi n t is

, , .

l ayi n g the extended right h a nd in the ben d o f the left el bow The .

slidin g dow n over th e left ar m is a n a l m ost u n a void a ble b ut quite u n

n ecess a ry a cco m p a ni m en t to the sign The si gn in dic a tes the w ay i n .

whic h the h a tchet i s usu a lly c arried This i s illustr a ted in C atli n s

N orth A m eric a n Indi a n s by n o less th a n fourteen portr a its I n seven .

o f these p ortr aits the h a tchet is represe n ted i n die r e n t position s In .

o n e of these the posi tion a pproxi m a tes th a t of this sign ; i n other the s

subj ect is so l o a ded dow n w ith we a pons th a t he c a n n ot give hi s a x the

usu a l positio n and i n others there ar e so m e eviden ces of posin g by
,

the a rtist Pipes , whips bows a nd a rrows fan s , an d oth er dress or e m

.
, ,

b l e m at ic a rticles o f the b uc k a re seldo m o r n e ver c arried i n the ben d

o f the left elbow a s is the a x The pipe i s usu ally hel d in the left h a nd
. .

( M a t the ws ) There is n o t the le a st si m il arity i n execu tion o r con ception

between Wied s an d the ( O to I ) si gns the for m er bei n g a lso very ob

,
.

scure S o m ethin g wit h a long h an dle a nd wi d e bl ade used for ch o p

.
,
v

pin g ( Bo tele r )
. .

Is den oted by choppin g the left h an d with the right .

( B a r to n )
I

Right h a nd elev a ted to level of chi n n gers Open an d atten ed , ,

th um b lying close to an d a lon g the forenger , whole h a n d ben t in the

d irection of the little n ger and a t a right a ngle to the wrist ( Ch ey .

e nne I ) The m otion of chopping i m it a ted usi n g the fore a r m a s th e

.
,

h andle o f the ax .

Ri ght h a n d in f ront o f the body as though gr a sping the h a n dle o f a

to m ah a w k an d a t the s a m e ti m e a slight up w a rd an d do wn w ard m ove
,
 268

m en t the h a nd is m a de ( Da kot a I ) Fro m t h e m an ner holdin g

of . . of

the to m a h a w k .

With right h a n d closed or opened the p a l m obliquely u pw a rd ,

an d

tow a rd the left , a nd the left h a n d opened p a l m obli q uely dow n w ard ,

to w a rd the right , an d n gers forw a rd m ove the m down w ard tow ard

the left sever al ti m es to i m it a te ch opp in g w ith an ax ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

Pl a ce
the exten ded at ri ght h a nd ed gew ise a bov e the left, s imi l arly
held both p ointin g tow ard the left a n d do w n w ard an d m ak e a sim ul t a
, ,

n eo u s cut i n th a t direction w ith both ( Da ko ta VI ; H id a tsa I ; A r i .

kar a I ) .

The left ar m is exten ded the h an d edgewi se , thu m b up an d n gers ,

inclin ed down w ard , m uch in position ( L n gers open ed The ex .

ten ded right in dex is then brou gh t to touch the lower th ic k p art of the
left h an d , a n d then sl owly dr a w n down w a rd an d b a c k w a rd to about the
len gth o f the h a n dle B oth h a nds then , i n sta tu quo , exert a un ifor m
.

an d si m ult a n eous u p a n d dow n m otion a s in choppin g wood

- -

( O to a nd ,
.

M is o
s u r i I )

. S o m ethin g wi th a lon g h a n dle by which we chop
.

The ri gh t h a n d wi th extended i ndex only is brought t o the m outh

, ,

an d the n ger i n serted ; the ac t of s m o k in g is then i m it a ted as the pole

o f this i n stru m en t is h ollowed a n d h an dle perfor a ted to be used as a

pi pe The right h an d i s n ow extended in position ( L

. m odied by
n gers bein g opened a n d i nclin ed dow n w a rd The left h a n d i s then .

superi m posed to the left in position ( L m odied by index bein g

closed ( O to and M isso ur i I ) A n a x through w hich o n e s m ok es
. . .

T o - m o r ro w . S ee Da y .

T rade ; b ar te r .

First m ak e the si gn of E x c h a n g e , then p at the left ar m w ith the

right n ger with a r a pid m otion fro m the h an d , p a ssin g i t tow a rd
,

the shoulder ( L ona ) .

S tri k e
the extended i ndex ng e r o f the right h a n d severa l ti m es u po n -

th at o f the left ( Wied ) I h a ve descri bed the s am e si gn in d ie re nt

.
'

ter m s an d a t gre a ter len gth It i s on ly n ecess a ry h owever , to pl a ce .

,

the nge rs in cont act once The person w ho m the Prince saw m ak in g .

this sign m ay h a ve m e a n t to indic a te so m ething m ore th a n the si m ple

ide a o f tr a de i e tr a de oft en or h abitu ally The ide a o f frequen cy is
,
. .
, .

ofte n con veyed by the repeti tion of a si gn ( as in so m e In di a n l an gu a ge s

by repetition of th e root ) O r the si gn m a k er m ay h ave repe ated the.
-

sign to de m onstr a te it m ore cle a rly ( M a tthew s ) Though so m e di ff er .

en ce exists in the m otion s executed i n Wied s si gn an d th at of ( O to and

,

M isso u r i I ) there is sufcien t si m il a rity to j ustify a prob a ble iden tity o f

,

con ception a nd to m ak e the m e a sily un derstood ( Bo teler ) In the .

a u thor s m i nd E xchange w a s prob a bly in t en ded f o r o n e tr an s a ction in

,
 269

w hi ch e a ch
two a rticles took the pl a ce bef ore occupied by the other
of ,

a n d T r a d e w as in ten ded for a m o re gener a l an d syste m a tic b a rt er indi

,

ca t e d by the repetition o f stro k es , w hich the in dex n g e r s m utu a lly -

ch a n ged position s .

Cross the f o re n g e r s o f both h a n ds before the bre a st ( Bur to n ) .

Di am on d cut di am on d Thi s conception o f o n e s m art tr ader cuttin g

.

i n to the prots of an other i s a m ist ak e a rising fro m the rough rese m

bl a nce of the sign to th a t f o r C u tt i n g .

Cross the i ndex

n g e r s .
( M a cg o wa n )
'

Cross the f o r e n g e r s at ri ght an gles .

( A r ap a ho
B oth h an ds p al m s fa cin g e ach other f o r e n g e r s exten ded , crossed
, ,

ri ght above left before the bre a st ( Chey enn e I ) . .

The left h a n d w ith fore n ger extended poi ntin g tow a rd the right
, ,

( rest o f n gers closed ) horizont a l b a c k outw a rd , otherwise as ( M ) is , ,

hel d i n fron t of left bre a st a bout a foot ; an d the ri gh t h a nd with fore ,

n ger exten ded ( J ) in fron t o f a n d ne ar the ri ght bre ast , is c a rried o u t

,

w ard and struck over the top o f the st ation ary left crosswi se , where
it re m a in s for a m o m en t ( Da ko ta I ) . .

The si gn sh ould be m a de at the heigh t of the bre ast R a ise the righ t .

index abou t a foot a bove the left before crossin g the m ( Dako ta I V ) . .

Yours is there a n d m in e is there ; t ak e ei ther .

Pl a ce the rst two n gers o f the righ t h a n d a cross those o f the left ,
both bein g slightly Spre a d The h a n ds ar e so m eti m es used but are
.
,

pl a ced edgewise ( Da ko ta V ) . .

A n other : The index o f the right h a n d i s l aid across the foren ger
of the left w hen the tr a n s action i n cludes bu t two person s tr adin g sin gle
a rti cle f o r a rticle ( Da ko ta V ) . .

S tri k e the b ac k of the extended i ndex at right a n gle a gain st the r a di a l

side of th e extended fore n ger o f th e left h a nd ( Dako ta V I VII ) .
,
.

The f o r e n g e r s ar e exten ded held obliq uely up w ard , an d crossed at

,

ri ght a n gles to one a n other , u su ally i n fron t o f the chest ( M a nda n .

a n d H ida tsa I ) .

The p al m poin t o f the right i ndex exten ded touches the chest ; it is
then turn ed tow ard the second in di vidu al i n tereste d , t h en touches the
obj ect The ar m s a r e n ow dr a w n tow ard the body se m i e x e d , w ith the
.
,

h an ds i n type p osition s ( W W ) , crossed , the right superposed to the

,
-

left The in di vidu al then c a sts an i nterrogatin g gl a nce a t the secon d

.

person ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) To cross so m ethin g from one t o a n

. .

other .
 270

C lose the h a nd s except the in dex n g e r s a n d the thu m bs ; wit h the m

,
-

open , m ove the h an ds se ver a l ti m es p a st one a nother a t the hei gh t of

the bre ast the i n dex n g e r s poi ntin g upw a rd a nd the th u m bs outw a rd
,
-
.

r o quo is I ) The ove en t i n dic tes exch a n gin g

( I . m m a

.

H old the le f t h a n d horizon tally before the body , w it h the fore n ger
on ly exte nded a nd poi nti n g to the righ t p al m do w n w a rd ; then w ith , ,

the ri ght h a n d closed i ndex o nly exte nded p al m to the ri g h t pl a ce the

, , ,

in d ex at right a ngles o n the fore n ger of the left touchi n g a t t h e second ,

j oin ts ( Ka io wa I ; Co ma nch e II I ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wich i ta I I )

. .

Pa ss th e h a n ds fr on t
in of the body ,
al l the n gers closed excep t the
f o r e n g e r s .
( Sa h ap ti n I ) .

C lose the n gers o f both h a nds ( K ) ; brin g the m opposite e ach

shoulder ; then brin g the h a n ds a cross e a ch other s p a th w a y withou t

,

per m i tti n g the m t o touch A t the close o f the si g n the left h a n d wi ll be

.

n e a r a n d pointin g at the righ t sh oulder ; right h a n d will be n e a r an d

p o in t in g a t the left shoulder ( Co m an che I ) . .

Close both h a nds le a vin g t h e f o r e n g e r s only exten ded ; pl ace the

,

right before a n d sever a l i nches a bove the left th e n p a ss the ri gh t h a n d ,

to w a rd the left elbow a nd the left h a n d tow ard the righ t elbo w , e ach
h an d follo wi n g the course m a de by a ourishi n g cut w ith a short s word .

This si gn accordin g to the i nfor m a nt , is a lso e m pl oyed by the Ba n ak

,

a nd U m a till a In di a n s ( C o m a nch e I I ; Pa i Ute I )

. .

The f o re n g e r s o f both h an ds only exte nded p a ss the left fro m left t o ,

right an d the right a t the s a m e ti m e crossin g it s cours e fro m th e tip

,

to w a rd the wrist o f the left stoppi ng when the w rists cross ( Ute I ),
. .

E xch a n ge o f a rticles .

H a nds pron a ted an d foren ger crossed .

( Zu ni I ) .

Deaf i m u te na t ur a l sig n C lose the h a n d slightly

i f t ak i n g so m e , as

thin g an d m ove i t forw ard an d open the h a n d as if to drop o r give

,

a w a y the thin g an d a g a in close a n d w ithdr a w the h an d a s if t o t ak e

,

so m ethin g else ( Ba llar d )

. .

O i nstructed de af m a tes
ur -
u se s ubst a n ti ally the sign described in ( M an
d a n a nd H id a tsa I ) .

To buy .

H old t h e l e f t
h a nd about t welve in ches before the bre ast the thu m b ,

restin g o n the closed t h ird a n d fourth n gers ; the fore an d secon d n

gers sep ar a ted an d exten ded p a l m tow ard the bre a st ; then p a ss the,

exten ded i ndex in to the crotch for m ed by the sep a r a ted ngers o f t h e
left h a nd T h i s is a n i n ve n ted si gn an d was give n to i llustra te the
.
,

di f ference between buyi n g a n d tr a di n g ( Ute I ) . .

 27 1

Deaf m u te na t ur a l sig n M ak e
circle o n the p a l m o f the left h a n d
a

w ith the foren ger o f the ri ght h a n d t o den ote co in an d close the thu m b
, ,

an d n ger a s if t o t ak e the m on ey an d put the h an d forw a rd to signify

,

givin g i t to so m e one an d m ove the h a n d a little a p art fro m the pl a ce

,

wh ere it left the m oney an d then close an d withdr a w the h an d a s if to

, .

tak e the thin g purch a sed ( Ba lla r d ) .

I ta li an sig n To in d ic a te p ayin g , in the l a n gu a ge of the n ge rs , o ne

m ak es thoug h he put so m ethin g piece a fter p iece fro m o n e h a nd into

as , ,

the otherand gest ure however f ar less expressive th an th at when a

, ,

m a n l a c k s m oney a n d yet c a n n ot m ak e up a fa ce to beg it ; o r si m ply to

in dic a te w a n t of m oney wh ich i s to rub to g ether the th u m b a nd fore
,

n ger at the s am e ti m e stretchi n g out the h a n d ( B u tler )

, .

E xch a n ge .

The two f o r e n g e rs ar e exten ded perpen dicul arly an d the h an ds ar e ,

then p a ssed by e ach other tr a n sversely i n fron t of t h e bre a st so as n e arly

t o exch a n ge posi tion s ( L o ng ) .

Pa ss
both h an ds w ith exten ded ,
f o r e n g e r s, a cross e a ch other before
the bre a st Wi ed ). .

H a nds brought up to fron t of bre a st f o r e n g e r s extended an d other ,

n gers sli ghtly closed ; h a n ds suddenly dr a w n tow a r d a n d p ast e a c h

other un til fore a r m s a r e crossed i n fro n t of bre ast ( C hey e nne I ) Ex . .

ch an ge ; right h a n d exch angin g position wit h the left -

.

L efth a n d with foren ger exten ded o th ers closed ( M , excep t b a ck of

, ,

h an d outw a rd ) is brough t a r m extended , i n fron t o f the l eft bre ast , an d

, ,

the extended foren ger o f the right h and obli q uely up w ard , others ,

closed is pl a ced crossw ise over the left a nd m a i n t ai ned in th a t positio n

,

for a m o m en t w hen the n gers of the ri gh t h a n d ar e rel a xed ( as i n Y )

, ,

brou gh t ne a r th e bre a st wi th h a n d hori zon ta l , p a l m i n w ard an d then ,

c arried o ut a ga in in fron t o f righ t bre a st twenty i nches w ith p a l m loo k ,

i n g tow ard the left n gers pointin g forw a rd h a n d horizon tal an d then
, , ,

the left h a nd perfor m s the s am e move m en ts on the left side o f the body .

( Da ko ta You give I give you

m e

,
.

The h a n ds b a ck s forw a rd , are hel d a s in dex h a n ds poin tin g upw ard ,

, ,

the el b ows bein g fully ben t ; e a ch h a n d i s then si m ulta neously w ith the ,

other m oved to the opposite shoulder so th a t the fore a r m s cross o ne

, ,

a n other a l m ost at right a n gles ( M a nd an a nd H i da tsa I )

. .

T ra p ( h e a ve n )
The t w o f o r e n g e r sbrought sud denly together in a p ar allel m a nner
'

so as to represen t the sn appin g of the steel tr ap ( L o ng ) .

 27 2

T r a va i l plur a l , T r a v a u x 0r T r a v o i s ( The corrupt French

; .

expression for the sledge u sed by I nd ia n s , prob ably fro m tra inea u ) .

The s am e sign a s for Do g ( Dako ta I V ) . .

T r a ve l ing . S ee G o i n g .

M oder ately ; m archin g . S ee G o i n g .

W i th gre a t r a pidity . See S w i f t .

T ree , trees .
( Co mp a re F o r e s t ) .

Vertic a lly r a ise the fore n ger poin ted up w ard other n ge rs , a nd

thu m b cl osed b a c k of h a nd dow n ( A r ap a h o I )

,
. .

Poin twi th foren ger exten ded in front obliquely tow ard the groun d ,

a n d with a n extendin g m otion o f ar m r a ise the h a n d an d ar m q uic k ly to

an a n gle o f over 4 5 0 exten d ar m at full len gth , then with n ger s and '

th u m b extended sh ak e the h an d once o r twice to i ndic a te the br a nches ;

,

loo k u p as if followin g m otion of h a n d ( Oj ibwa I V ) . .

First hol d the right in dex in fron t o f the bre ast upright ( J b a ck , ,

outw ard ) f o r a m o m en t a n d then ope n the secon d an d t h ird n gers , se p

, ,

a r a te the m an d let the m poin t up w a rd i n di ff erent direction s thum b ,

restin g o n the closed little n ger ( Da ko ta

The t ru n k o f a tree .

a n d its br a nches

.

Wi th the h an ds uprigh t b ac k s forw ard n gers a little sep a r ated a nd

, ,

sli ghtly ben t th e right behi nd the left a nd a foot in front o f t h e chin
, ,

m ove the left a foot o r so obliquely forw a rd tow a rd the left an d the ,

right obl iquely b ac k w ard tow ard the right until it is in fron t o f an d
n e ar the ri ght shoulder ( Da ko ta IV ) . .

H old t he ri gh t h a n d before the body b a c k forw ard , n gers and thu m b ,

extended an d sep ar ated ; the n pu sh the h a n d sli gh tly up w a rd M a de .

m ore th a n once in successi on an d a t di f feren t poi nts o f the hori zon ,

m e a n s trees or groves ( Da ko ta V , VI ; H i da tsa I ; A r i kar a I )

. .

Mov e the righ t h a nd n gers loosely exten ded sep a ra ted a n d poi n tin g
, ,

up w a rd b a ck to th e fron t , up w ard fro m the hei ght o f the w a ist to t he

,

fron t of the face For trees n ot referrin g to a den se grov e or a fore st

.
, ,

the s am e sign is repe ated sever a l ti m es to w ar d di f feren t points in fr on t o f

the body ( Kai owa I ; Co m anch e II I Ap a che II ; Wichi ta II ) Trun k
. .

an d br an ches

.

Grove of .

S ee T r e e s. ( Da ko ta V ,
VI ; H id a tsa I A r ika r a I)
.

R a ise the ri ght ar m vertic ally , w ith n gers a nd thu m b spre ad , then .

g r a sp the ar m ne a r the shoulder wi th the left h an d ( Wyan do t I ) . .

 273

Trun k a nd br a nches , the left h an d representin g the e a rth i n closin g

the b ase o f the tru n k .

T r u e , t r u th .

The f ore n g er p assed in the a t titude of pointin g , fro m the m outh for
w a rd i n a li ne cur vi n g a little u p w a rd the other n gers bei n g c arefully ,

closed ( L 0ny )
. .

L ower the h a n d in fron t of the bre a st then exten d the i ndex n g e r ,

-

r aise an d m ove it str aight forw a rd before the per son ( Wie d ) I h a v e .

described th e sign for this i n m uc h the sa m e w ay I th i n k lo wer the .

h a n d refers si m ply to a prep a ra tory m otion ; if the h a n d w ere h a n g

i n g by the side , r a ise the h a nd I h a ve u su ally s ee n the i n dex n g e r .
-

held horiz on t a lly n ot perpen dicul arly if th at i s wh a t he m e an s by

, ,

r a ised . M a tthe ws ) T h e right ar m i s exed at the elbow a nd the ha n d

.

dr a w n up t o the m outh T h e i n de x hu ger i s extended p al m down w ard

.
-

a n d m a de to p a ss ste adily for w a rd describi n g a n ar c o f a q u adr a n t ,

do wn w a rd Thou gh Wied s sig n is very i nexpli c it there i s m uc h si m i

.

,

l a r ity between i t a nd the ( O to a n d M isso u r i I ) both a s t o conception a n d

m ove m en t I n the for m er , the stress is o n wh a t co m es fro m the m outh
.

i n the l a tter wh a t co m es fro m the bre a st ( Bo te le r ) Th a t which . .

co m es str a i ght fro m th e m outh or bre ast .

If one n ger is thrust for ward in a str a i gh t line fro m the m out h , it
m e a n s a str a i gh t speech or spe ak in g th e truth ( Oj i b wa I )
, . .

Thrust the foren ger fro m the m outh direct to the fron t i
stra i ght ,
.
,

n ot crook ed speec h A l so t he si gn f o r L i e F a l s e h o o d follo wed

.
, , ,

by th a t o f N e g a t i o n ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Righ t h an d ngers an d th u m b droopin g hold thu m b in w ard a g ai nst

-

the he a rt ; brought up to the level of the m outh , m iddle third , and l ittle ,

n ger closed forenger extended poi n t in g for w a rd thrust suddenly ,

, ,

w ith a cur ved m otion str ai ght forw ard fro m the m outh ( Ch ey e nn e I )
,
. .

The exte nded foren ger of the h orizon t a l right h an d ( M ) other n ,

gers closed is c a rried str ai ght outw a rd fro m the m ou th This i s al so

, .

th e sig n f o r Ye s ( Da ko ta I )

O n e ton gue ; str a i ght forw a rd t al k i n g

. .
-
.

Pl a ce the right h a n d in fron t o f the m o n th , b a ck up w ard i ndex ex ,

tended an d poi n ting forw ard , other n gers h a lf closed th u m b a s y o u ,

ple a se , m ove the h a n d forw ard abou t ei ght in ches S o m e poin t the ih .

dex forw ard a n d up w a rd ( Da ko ta I V ) O n e ton gue . . .

Touch the bre a st over th e h e a rt w ith the n gers of the right h a nd ;

then w ith the extended index ng e r o f the righ t h a n d p a ss i t for w a rd -

fro m the m outh elev a te a n d hold it a m o m ent ( Da ko ta V ) Thi s

,
. .

signies
o ne t o n g e d
u a n d co m i n g fro m th e he
,
a rt

a s

sincerity o f
T h e bre a st , bein g the ini ti a l poi n t the sig n ne a rly cor ,

responds wi th the French de a f m ute sign for S i n c e r e -

.
 274

P a ss the exten ded i ndex p ointin g ,

up w ard an d f or w ard , forw ard from
th e m o u th ( Da ko ta VI VI I )
.
,
.

The si gn is the s am e a s th a t for Ye s except th at th e ha n d is held ,

before an d ofte n in cont a ct w ith the m o u th an d the m otion m ade fro m

'

th a t poi nt ( M a n da n a nd H ida tsa I )

.
-
.

The ri ght h a n d is gr a d u ally bro u ght to th e m o n t h w hich i s i n m otion

of t a l k in g The h a n d is in positio n ( I 1 ) m odied by th e in dex n g e r
.
-

bein g m ore extended T h e h a nd an d in dex then describe the ar c o f a

.

q u a dra nt , the i n dex n g e r poi ntin g forw ard ou t wa rd an d down w ard

-

,
.

(O to I ).

W h a t co m es str a igh t or u n v a r in
y g
-

M ak e the S ig n f or S p e a k then poin t ,

u p w a rd wi th the exten ded
in dex .
( Wy a ndo t I ) T al k good
. .

P a ss the extended i ndex poin tin g u p w a rd an d for w a rd , to the fron t ,

sever al ti m es ( Ute I ) B ut one ton gue ; on l y o n e w ay i n t a l k in gt o

. .

the fron t .

W ith the in dex on ly exten ded poin tin g forw a rd p u sh i t forw ard , ,

fro m the m o u th i n a sligh t ly down w a rd direction an d ter m in a tin g as

hi gh as in the begi nn in g ( Ap ach e I ) . .

S tri k e
wi th ri gh t i ndex erect f ro m l ip s for w a rd ; repe a t the m ove , ,

m e n t w ith e m ph a si s n o t re tu rni n g to li p s e a ch ti m e,( Ap ache .

Th a t i s so .

R un the n ger str a igh t o ut from the cen ter or m id d l e of the m o uth .

( Za h i I) .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig m N o d
h e a d se v er al ti m es with an e arnest
th e
10 0k , in an s wer to an i ndic a tion o f do u bt o n an other person s face
.

( Ba l la r d )
De a f m u tes gene ral ly give the gest u re of
-
m o v in g one n ger stra i ght
fro m the lips S tr a i ght forw a rd spe a k i n g
.
-
.

T r y, T o ; T o A t te m p t .

With both sts ( A , k n u ck les o utw ard ) in fron t o f bre ast , th e l eft a
little in re ar o f the right m ove o u tw a rd bris k l y a n d repe a t the m otion
,

two or three ti m es ( C hey enne I I ) K ee p p u shi n g

. . .

Ri ght i ndex as ( J c a rried t o the ri gh t an d to the left a n d i n fron t o f

, ,

the body w h en the h a nd is t urned horizon tal n ger poi n ti n g str ai ght
, ,

o u tw ard an d then the h an d is dr aw n in w a rd tow ard the bod y a nd

,

sligh tl y u pw a rd a n d then thrown for w ard a n d dow n w ard , o n a C u rv e ,

with a q u ick stron g m ove m en t so th at the ar m is ful ly exten ded in ,

fron t o f t h e body w ith nger horizon ta l a n d poin tin g ou tw ard ( Dako ta

,
.

I ) A nythin g it i s I w i l l try to do
. .
 275

T ur ke y .

The Open h ands bro u ght u p o p po site to the sho ulders an d i m it atin g
s l ow l y the m otion of the w in gs o f a bird to wh ich add the si g n f o r ,

C h ic ke n ( Dun ba r )
. .

U n d e r st a n d .
( C o m p a re c a r an d Kn o w ) .

The n gers a nd th u m b o f the right h a n d bro u gh t together ne ar the

tips a nd then a ppro a ched an d receded to an d fro m the e ar t wo or three
, ,

ti m es , w i th a q u ic k m otion m a de w ithi n the dist an ce o f t wo or three

,

in ches The m otion o f the ngers i s desi g ned to represen t the so u n d

.

en terin g the e ar ( L ong ) .

Vertic all y l ower the h a n d ( right u su al l y e m p l oyed ) forenger an d ,

th u m b exten ded , other n gers closed an d n a il s u p , i n a deci sive or e m

ph atic m a n ner Th is is often preceded by the sig n o f a fr m a tion , i e ,
. . .

Ye s , I u n d e r st a n d ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

Right h a n d , m i dd l e third , ,
an d little ngers closed forenger exten de d ,
,

th u m b cock ed u p w ard held ,

a short dista nce in fron t o f the m o u th ; sig n
-

f o r Ye s ( C h ey e nn e I )
. .

To poin t wi th the foren ger to the e ar m ean s

I h a ve he ard an d

u n derst a nd ( Oj i bwa I )

. .

M e the sign T o H e a r then pl a ce the h a nd q u ic k l y before the

ak ,

chin the index poi ntin g to the left ; then m ove the h a nd forw ard a n d
,

dow n w a rd a s h ort di sta nce u nti l the p al m co m es upper m ost T h e m o .

tion t ak es p l a ce a t the wrist When the m otion i s q uick ly m a de a t the

.

ter m in a tio n of the sig n H e a r to the be g i nn in g of th a t for U n d e r

s t a n d i t i s eq u iv a len t to the conj unction a nd
, ( S h osho ni an d B an ak I ) . .

Fo re n g e r the ri g ht h an d extended a n d crook ed other ngers

of ,

closed th u m b restin g o n the second is c a rried behind the ri ght e ar ,

, ,

an d then i n the s a m e po si tion i n fron t of the left bre a st where i t i s h el d ,

f o r a m o m ent with h a nd u pr ight , edge of ngers o u tw a rd b a ck of h a nd ,

tow ard the ri gh t ( Da ko ta I ) .I he ar ; I u n ders t a nd . .

A fter m ak in g the si gn for T o h e a r gt h r o w the b ac k o f the h a n d for

w ard ( ret a i ni n g the position o f the ngers ) a n d m ove it for w ard an d ,

dow n w ard ( Absa r o ka I ; Hida tsa I ; A r ikar a I )

. .

Both a r m s ar e exed an d folded o n the chest ; the n ge rs ar e clo sed

except the in dex w hich is hoo k ed m u ch as i n position
,
index m ore
opened an d h a n d horizont al The h an ds th u s ar e m a de to to u ch the
.

sides of the chest a nd then p assed u nifor m l y for w ard t o war d t h e obj ect ;
the s a m e sever al ti m es rep e a ted ( O to a nd M i sso ur i I ) S o m ethin g . .

k n ow n between y o u a n d m e .
 2 76

M ak e the si g n for T o H e a r , an d by m erel y reversi n g th e p a l m

con cl u de by th at f o r T o K n o w . S o m eti m es the si gn for T o K n o w
is m a de onl y a s an abbrevi a tion
,
.
( Ka to wa I ; C o ma n ch e I II ; Ap a che
I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

Fo r e n g e r right h a n d
of m oved q uic kl y fro m behin d the e ar to the
fron t .
( Sa h ap tin I ) .

A n other ove ri g h t h a nd , p al m to w a rd h e ad , al l n gers extended

: M l

to a posi tion behin d e ar ; then m ove i t p ast th e e ar t o a poi n t

in fron t o f bre a st ; then t urn the h and p a l m dow n ( W an d m ove ,

to a poin t say a foot fro m body , an d a l ittl e to the right This l ast
,
.

i s si g n for Go o d ( S a h ap tin I )

.C utt in g o ff the so u n d o r words
. .

In dex to bre a st then to lips w ith a vi goro u s thr u st u p w ard

,
a nd for
w a rd with a n a f r m a tive n o d
, ( Ap a che III ) . .

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sign L ook dow n
v a c a n cy , w ith th e eyebrows at

k ni t , an d pl a cin g the h a n ds on the forehe a d a n d then r a isin g the he a d ,

sligh tly arch the eyebrow s ( Ba l la r d) .

Do l o He a r d o n o t
no t

. See a s , .

M ove the a t h a n d q u ic k ly p a st the e a r s m e a n s I h a ve n ot he a rd

a n d m ay m e a n th a t he w i l l n ot u n derst a n d , o r th at the req u est p a sses

h is e ars u n heeded A ccordin g to circ um s t a nces i t m ay m e an th a t i t

.

p a sses his e ars beca u se he con siders i t u n tr u e S l i ghtly m odied , it .

w i l in dic te
l a Y o u a e tryin g to t a e
r ,
k m e in

( Oj i bw a IV ) . .

S i gn f o r U n d e r st a n d , follow ed by th a t f or N o .
( A r ap ah o I
( C heyenne
Poi n t to the e ar with the r i ght i ndex sli ghtly c u rved an d r e m ai ni n g ,

n gers closed ; then pl ace t h e tip s o f the n gers a g a in st the b al l o f the

t h u m b , an d sn a p the m o ff as if sprin k l i n g w a ter fro m the e a r o u tw a rd ,

an d forw ard fro m the e a r

( Shosho n i a n d B a n a k I )
. .

First m ak e the sig n for Un d e r s t a n d , a n d then the si gn for No .

( Da ko ta I ) Do no t h e a r y o u u nderst a n d y o u

.
,
.

The si gn for H e a r , followed by th a t for N 0 , m a de to the side of th e

he a d ( Ap a che I )
. .

P a ss o ne or t wo n gers from li p s to the e ar a n d m ak e the sign for

NO .
( A p a ch e I II ) .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sign L ook do wn at v ac a n cy k n it the eyebrow s , ,

p u tti n g the h a nd on the forehe a d a n d sh a k e the he a d ( Ba l lar d ) .

Un r e a d y , un p r e p a r e d, e tc.

The a r m s ar e r aised and extended p ar al lel before the body . The .

 27 7

h and s a ss u m e position ( K 1 ) m odied by bein g horizon tal The in dex .

n g e r s ar e then a p p roxi m a ted an d r u bbed together at p a l m ar p oin ts .

( O to and M isso ur i I .
)
V e st . See C l o t h i n g . ( Da ko ta I V ) .

V a in .

C a n n ot be se p ar a ted fro m P r o u d, Pr i de .
(Da ko ta

Deaf -
m ute n a tu r a l siy n .
M ove the n gers of both h an d s up an d dow n .

P urse pro ud -
.

I ta lia n sign Both h a n ds st uc k i n the p oc k et . Ba ll a r d .

)
V er m il l io n . Se e C o lo r .

V i l l a g e ( In di a n )
( C o m p are K e t t l e )
. .

Pl a ce the open th u m b a nd foren g er of e ach h a nd opposite e a ch

to
o ther , a s if to m ak e a circ l e , b u t le a ving between the m a s m all in terv al ;
a fterw a rd m ove the m fro m a bo v e dow nw ard si m ult a neo u sly ( Wi ed ) .

There i s n o si m il a ri ty in execu tio n of the ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) sig n a n d

th a t of Wi ed s n or i n their con ception a s the v il l a ge i s n o t s urro u n ded

, ,

b y a stoc k a de ( B o teler ) The v ill a ges o f th e tri bes with w hich the
. .

au th or w as lon gest residen t p artic ul ar l y the M a nd a n s an d A ri k a r a s

, ,

w ere s u rro u nded by a stron g circ u l a r stoc k ade sp aces o r bre a k s i n the ,

circl e bein g l eft for en tr a n ce or exi t .

Repe t ition s of the si gn for L o d g e , o r th a t sign and th at f or Ma n y .

( Ar ap a h o I ) .

P artly exten d the t i p s of n gers o f both h a nds , slightly cross the

h a n ds perpendic ul a r i n fron t o f bre ast then descri be a circle by a slight ,

circu l a r move of the h a nd s an d wrists p al m s in side , a n d drop the h an ds ,

a li tt l e an d in both descriptio n s poin t to t h e d irect ion of the v i l l a ge

, ,

a n d repe a t sever al ti m es the for m si gn withi n re a ch of the a r m s and

h an d w h en a vill a ge is described a n d b u t on ce if only on e hou se is to ,

be described s ayi n g Wig te a m " ( Oj i b wa IV )

,
-
.

First m ak e the si gn for L o d g e t i p i , ,

an d then the sign for
Ma n y ( Da ko ta I , IV ) a y tipis
M n
. . .

The a r m s a r e elev a ted a n d the h ands a p p rox i m a ted at the n ger tips
before the fa ce ; th e h a n ds an d ar m s then diverge from points o f co n
t act to for m the tri a n g u l ar represent a tion of the wi gw am door ; the
si gn f o r w i gw am or h o u se bein g th u s co m pleted the ri ght st i n type , ,

position ( A ) m ar k s the s a m e s uccessively aro u n d the s ubj ect s posi tion

,

o n the gro u n d a n d M i sso u r i I ) a n y ho u ses co l lect cd i n one

M
( O to . .
-

loc al ity .
 278

R ai se both h an ds t o a position i n fron t a l i ttl e to ri ght o f the face , ,

n gers exten ded , poin tin g u p w a rd p al m s facin g e ach other ( R I , ri ght ,

an d l eft ) Then with zi gz a g m ove m en t u p an d down p a ss the m in front

.
, , ,

o f fa ce to left , h a nds say ve i nches a p art ( Sa hap tin I ) Vill a ge . .

thin gs st an din g o n gro un d .

White m an s
.

Repetition o f sign f o r H o u se , also th a t sig n a nd the sig n for ll I a n y .

( A r ap a h o I ) .

M ove both h a n ds wi th t wo m otion s rst b a c k o f l eft tow ard p al m ,

right abo u t twelve i nches a p a rt t h e n for m i n g a rig h t a n g l e for m i n g a

, ,

sq uare represen tin g the fo u r sides o f a ho use ; then pl a ce the h a nd s ,

th u m bs u n der so a s to show a cover as a roof of a ho use a nd p ro no u n c , ,

in g l V iy w ai n ( Oj i bwa I )
' -
. .

Th e si gn for W h i t e I l l a n is pre xed to th a t for V il l a g e .

( Da
ko ta I ) M a n y w hite m en s ho u ses
.

.

M ak e the sig n for H o u se , an d then the si gn for M a n y .

( Da ko t a
IV .
)
M ak e the sign for V il la ge , follo wed by th a t f o r W h ite m an .

( Sa hap tin I ) .

O tli ne w ith extended h ands

u o n edge ) the vertic a l w a lls an d

pe a k ed roo f ; al so b e t we e n e ar th a nd roof p a ss the h an d ( X reversed ) ,

'

h oriz o n t a lly , i ndic a tin g ho u se di vided in to two stories ; di m e n sions

l a rge ; w a ve h an d s a bo u t hori zont a lly l eve l of chin p a l m s d o w n ( W ) , , ,

gre at exten t of tow n ( Ap ache I II ) . .

V o l le y .

The t wo h a nds as in sign for ( l ischra ge of a dea d ly m issile a re h el d in '

fron t a few i nches a p a rt an d directed to ward on e a nother , then the n

,

gers ar e s u ddenly str a ightened a s in the s a m e sign ; th is m ay be repe a ted

to represen t the volleys of contend in g forces an d e ach h a n d m ay m ak e ,

i ts si g n si m u lt a neo u sly o r altern ately with the oth er ( M a nda n a nd H i .

d a tsa

W ago n .

Rol l h a n d over h an d i m i ta tin g ,

a wheel . ( B ur to n )
The righ t h a nd w ith n gers closed ( st B ) , is rot a ted at the right
,

side o f the body ( Da ko ta I ) Fro m the m otion of the w h e els

. . .

Both h a nd s held i n fron t of the body , the n gers exte nded the righ t ,

n gers poi n tin g to the l eft t h e left n gers to the ri ght the tips of the
, ,

ngers Opposite t h e wrist o f t h e op p osite h a nd t h e h a n ds a bo u t si x ,

inches a p a rt , both p a l m s t o w a rd the body By a m ove m en t o f the .

 27 9

elbow s rot a te th e h an ds over e a ch other to th e fron t,

i
, l ke a revolvin g
w heel ( Da ko ta II I )
. .

Pl a ce both h a nds pal m s b ac k w a rd a t the hei gh t of the shoul ders a n d

, ,

a little i n fron t o f the m or pl a ce the m ne a r the s ides of the body ex

, ,

both i o r e n g e r s an d th um bs u nti l their ends ar e abo u t a n in ch ap art ,

the other n gers ne a rly closed then throw the h a nds forw a rd Sever a l ,

ti m es e ach ti m e brin gin g the en ds of the th u m bs and f o r e n g e r s t o g e th

,

er t o i m ita te the rot a tion of w heels ( Da ko taIV )

, . .

Both a r m s ar e exed a t a right an gle before the chest ; the h a nds

then a ss u m e type position ( L ) , m odied by the i ndex n g e r bei n g hook ed
- -

an d m idd l e n ger p artly opened a n d hoo k ed si m il a rly ; the h an ds ar e

held h ori zon t ally an d rot ated forw a rd side by side to i m it ate tw o
wheel s p al m s u p w a rd ( O to an d M isso ur i I ) The erect w agon
,
. .

st a n d ard a n d c urved rollin g wheel .

Both h a n ds closed in fron t o f the body abo u t fo ur in ches a p art wi th , ,

f o r e n g e r s an d th u m bs a pproxi m a tin g h alf c ircles p a l m s tow ard the ,

gro u n d m ove forw a rd slowly in short circles ( Kai o wa I ; C o ma nch e

,
.

I II ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta II ) Wheels an d rev ol vi n g m otion forw ard

. .

S win gthe f o r e n g e r s of e a ch h an d a ro un d e ach other , represen ti n g

the w heel r un n in g ( Sa hap tin I ) . .

( 1 ) C ircle both th um bs an d in dice s a n d hol d the m p ar allel ; ( 2 ) pl a ce ,

these ci rcles w ith sli gh t e m ph a si s i n two pl a ces ; ( 3 ) seize left circle

w ith righ t th u m b an d i ndex a n d m ove ri gh t h an d as if re m o vin g i t ;
( 4 ) dip right i n dex dow n w ard ; ( 5 ) s weep it a ro u nd extended left i ndex ;
( 6 ) re m a k e l eft circl e ( Ap a che III ) T wo wheels ; ( 2 ) c ap a b l e of
. .

progression ; ( 3 ) too k o ff on e wheel ; ( 4 ) dipped u p gre ase ; ( 5 ) gre a sed

a xle 6
; ( ) p ut on w heel a g a i n
Thi s prob ably m e an s m ore th a n the
.

si m p le ide a o f w a gon .

Deaf -
m ute n a tu r a l sig n A n u p a nd- -
dow n m otion of the ben t ar m s in
i m it a tion of a m an ridin g o n horseb a c k an d ,
m ovin g the n gers i n cir
cl es t o den ote the m otion of the wheels ( B a l lar d) .

W a it .

A ust r a l i a n sig n M inn ie m in n ie

.
( W a it a little ) H an d w ith n
-

gers h a lf clin ched between type position s ( A ) an d ( D ) , th u m b str a ight

,
-
.

sh a k en dow n w ard r apidly two o r three ti m es Don e m ore sl owly , to .

w a rd the gro un d it m e a n s S i t d o w n ( Smy th )

, . I
-

W ant , T o .

C u rve the in dex a nd brin g it i n a c urve down w ard tow ard the m ou th
, ,

p a st i t , a n d forw a rd fro m the bre a st a short dist an ce ( Ka i o w a I I ; . .

C o m a nche 1 1 1 ; Ap ach e I I ; Wich i ta I I ) .

 2 80

W ar . S ee Ba t t l e .

To decl are .

F ir st m ak e the sign for B a t t l e , and the n the sig n for M a r c h i n g

o r T r a ve l i n g O f co u rse Ind i a n s do n ot m a k e a ny for m al dec l a r a tio n
.

of w ar, a nd the a bove si g n w o u ld be ren dered go ing to ba t tl e g o ing to ,

g h t .
( Da ko ta

Fro m gh tin g b a tt l e , .

W ar -
p ath , ou th e .

W ith it s index at a ri gh t a n gle w ith the p a l m an d p oi n ti n g to ward ,

the left it s th u m b exte nded a n d u pri gh t b a c k o f h an d forw a rd a nd

, ,

o u t wa rd the other n ger s closed m ove the ri gh t h a n d r ap idly forw a rd

, ,

a bo u t a foot fro m j u st i n fron t of the right sho ulder ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

The th u m b ch a sin g the i n dex .

W arm .
( C o m p a re n o t ) .

Dra w the h an d a cross the forehe a d as if w ipi n g o ff the perspir a tion .

( Ap ache II ) .

W a sh .

R ub the h a n d as with in visible so a p in i m p erce p tib l e w a ter .

( B u r to n ) .

Ba c k of l eft h a nd bris k ly r ubbed w i th I) p al m of righ t .

( C hey e nne .

Precisel y the s am e as th o u gh w a shi n g the fa ce wi th bot h h a nds w ith

w a ter cont ai ned in a w aslr b a siu a bo u t th e hei ght o f the sto m a ch ,
.

( Da ko ta

Fro m the ac t o f w ashin g .

W a te r .
( C o m p a re D r i n k i n g ) .

The h a n d for m ed i nto a bow l an d bro u ght u p t o the m o u th , p a ssin g a

little u p w a rd with o u t to u ch in g th e m ou th ( Dun bar ) . .

T he h a n d i s p a rti a lly clin ched so a s to h a ve so m ethi ng o f a c up ,

sh a pe an d the Open in g between the th u m b a nd n ger is r aised t o the

,

m o u th an d con tin ued a bove it ( Lo ng ) .

O pen the right h an d an d p ass it before the m o u th fro m a bove dow n

w ard Wi ed )
. .

Wa ve th e ri gh t h and held open p al m to the m o u th a s i f abo u t to

'

, , ,

h o l d the m o u th sh ut l ic k the p al m o f the h an d wi th the ton g ue m ov in g

, ,

the h a n d fro m a bove dow n w ard o n the ton g u e ( B ur to n ) .

Present the hol l o w ed h a nd , cup sh a ped other ngers -

,
an d th u m b
closed b a ck of the h a n d dow n ( A r ap a ho I )
,
. .

A ho l l ow h a nd w ith the ,
m otion of dr a w ing w ater .
( Oj i bw a
Righ t h a nd at an d s l i ghtly arched o r c ur ved ; p a ss i t do wn w ard
before the fa ce fro m the forehe a d to the chin , p al m i n w ard ( Absar o ka .

I S hosho ni a n d B an ak I ) T o w a sh the fa ce . .
 2 81

Sam e the sign for D r i n k i n g or for R i v e r

as , w hich of cou rse
i ncl udes w a ter ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Pl a cethe right h a n d upright si x or eight in che s in front o f th e m outh ,

b a c k outw a rd , i ndex an d thu m b cr ook ed a nd their en ds a bo ut a n i nch ,

a p ar t the other n gers n e a rly closed

,
m ov e it tow a rd th e m outh , an d
th en d ow n w ard n e a rly to the top o f the bre a stb on e at the s a m e ti m e ,

turn th e h a n d over to w ard the m outh un til the little n ger is upper
ost (D t I V C rryin g cup the outh e ptyin g it

m .a ko a ) a a to
. m a n d m .

C ollect the n gers a n d th u m b of the righ t h a n d to a poi n t , an d b rin g

the m t o the m outh p a l m up ( Wy an do t ,
.

Pl a ce
the a t right h a n d before t h e fa ce , poin tin g upw ard an d forw a rd ,

the b ack for w a rd with the wri st a s h igh a s the n ose ; then dr a w i t dow n
w a rd an d i n w a rd to w a rd the ch i n ( K a io w a I ; Co m a nch e III ; Ap ache
.

I I ; Wichi ta I I ) Fro m the for m er custo m o f drin k in g w ith th e bowl

.

sh aped h an d .

Pa ss the extended at right h an d dow n w ard before the fa ce , n gers

to the left a nd b a c k forw ard ( S hosho ni a n d Ba na k I ) Fro m the . .

m a n n er in wh i ch i t i s used i n w a shin g the fa ce .

Deaf -
m u te n a tu r a l sig h R ai se
depress the h and i n i m it ation o f
an d

a m a n h an dlin g a p u m p , a n d m ove the h a n d to the m outh a nd r a i se the

he a d in i m it a tion o f the a ct of drin k in g ( B a l la r d ) .

dri n k o fA .

M a k e sign for B r i n g ; n g e r s still croo k ed a s i n si gn for M a n y

'

brough t over forw ard fro m the m outh w ith sudden dow n w ard curve .

( Ch ey enne I ) .

of S prin g .

( 1 ) H old the h a n ds dow n , thu m bs a n d i ndices w idely sep a r a ted , as if

i n c l o sin g a roun d obj ect twen ty i nches a cross ; ( 2 ) tr ace a serpen tine line
fro m i t w ith n ger tip ( Ap a ch e II I ) : A spri n g ; ( 2 ) a rivulet .

.

l
a te r m e l o n s, S q u a sh e s, a n d M u sk m e l o n s.

Pa n to m i m ic a lly
expressed by i llustra tin g their for m on the groun d
an d a ccordin g to size for specic design a t i on Ute I ) . .

W e a k W e a k n e ss . .

L eft h a n d is held in fron t of the body about a foot h an d horizon t a l , ,

n gers exte n ded a n d poin tin g tow ard the right b a ck o f h an d outw ard ,

( S I ) , an d the ri g h t h a n d ( S 1 ) is p a ssed fro m the righ t b r e a st for w a rd

by the left , wi th the n gers pointin g str aigh t ou tw ard b ack of h an d ,

tow ard the ri ght , an d then the right h a nd c a rried directly o ut tow ard
the righ t side o f the body ( Da ko ta
N o ; n o g o ; c a n not go ; am
.

w e ak sic k ly
,
.

36
 2 82

W ell , He a l thGo o d .

H a ve a s m il in g co un te n a n ce r a ise bot h h a n ds q uick ly to lo wer p a rt ,

o f fa ce a n d m o uth as if i n the act of e a t in g sh ak e an d gen tly touch th e ,

.

bre ast an d body , a s h a n ds descen d i n front sep a r a te over the abd o m en ,

w ith q ui verin g m otio n , the n m ove both h a n ds outw ard r a ise h an ds ,

q uic k ly b ack o f h a n ds a bove , st a nd erect an d throw che st for w a rd

, .

( Oj i bw a IV .
)
Pa l m s of both h a nds n gers exten ded , touch the body over the ,

bre a st sto m ach abdo m en & c , an d then m ak e the si gn for G o o d

, , ,
. .

( Da ko ta I )

B ody i s a l l
. good ; I a m w ell
.

The a r m s ar e p assed tre m blin gly up the si des of the body then the ,

exte n ded i n dices ar e m a de to press the te m ples the counten a n ce as ,

su m in g a ll the w hile a v is a ge of distress ; the sig n f o r S i c k bei n g

thu s co m pleted the h a n d is thro w n open n eg a tively fro m the body to

in dic a te e m ph a tic a lly n o sic k ness ( O to a n d M isso ur i I ) N o t sick . .

o r i n distress

.

W eep , T o ; T o C r y .

The foren ger o f e a ch h a nd exten ded c arried to it s respecti ve eye , b a c k ,

o f h a n d ou tw ard , al l n gers but the in dex closed c a rry the ngers down ,

the fa ce as t h oug h follo w in g the co urse of the te ar drops ( Da ko ta I ) -

. .

Fro m the droppin g of the te a rs .

M ak ethe si g n for R a i n , but in so doi n g h ol d the b ac k s o f the pend

en t ngers tow ard the fa ce an d drop the h and repe a tedly fro m the eyes ,

dow n w ard ( Ute I ) L i tera lly

. eye r a in drops of w ater fro m the
.
,
-

eyes .

S ign for W a t e r m a de f ro m eyes .

( Chey enne I ) .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l stg n

-
.
-
Rub the eye w ith the b ac k of the h an d as

ch ildren do whe n cryin g .

( Ba llar d )

W h a t "W h a t do yo u sa y " S ee Q u e st i o n .

W h ea t .
( Co m p are G r a ss ) .

Sam e si g n as for G r a ss begun n e ar the grou n d , a n d gr adu a lly ,

an d

in terruptedly elev a ted to the hei gh t of about three feet ( Ute I ) . .

W h e n " S ee Q u e s t i o n .

W h e n ce co m e you ?
First the si g n f o r Yo u then the h a nd exten ded open a nd dr a w n to ,

the bre a st an d l a stly t h e S i gn for B r i n g i n g ( Dun ba r )

, .

W h e re 2
W ith it s b ac k u pw a rd an d in dex poin tin g forw ard , ca rry the ri gh t
 2 83

h a n d fro m left to ri ght a bou t ei gh t in c h e s r ai sin g an d lowerin g it ,

sever a l ti m es w hile so doin g a s if q uic k ly poin tin g a t d iff eren t obj ects ,
.

( Da ko ta IV ) .

W h i sk e y .

M ak e the sign for B a d a nd D r i n k for ,

b ad w a ter .
( B u r to n )

S ign for W a te r an d Fi r e .
( Ch ey e nne I ) .

A n other : S ign
for B r i n g an d righ t h a n d n gers outspre a d tips ,
-

poi ntin g up w a rd sh a k en before forehe a d w ith w a ve of he a d to indic a te

,

u n ste a diness ( C hey e nn e I ) . .

First m ak e the sign for Dr i n k i n g ,

an d th en the si gn fo r Fo o l .

( Da ko ta I ) Very expressi ve

. .

The right arm i s exed an d elev a ted t h e ri ght h a n d a ppro aches the ,

chest in type position ( G m odied by bein g held edge up

-
The h an d .

thu s see m i n gly gr a spin g a bottle is p a ssed se m icircul arly up w ard to

w ard , then to the m outh a n d fro m i t the he a d recedi n g The h a n d ,
.

then fa lls to the side a n d the he a d in clin in g t o either side is s w ayed to

,

a n d fro i n dic a ti ve of lost equili bri u m

, ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) S ome . .

thin g drun k th a t st up e e s the senses

Deaf -
m ute na t ur a l sig n R a ise
the h a nd n gers pl a ced together to , ,

w ard the m ou th , an d sh ak e the body to an d f ro si dew ise ( L ar so n ) .

W h i te . Se e C o lor .

W h i te M an ; Am er i ca n .

Pl a ce the open in dex n g e r an d th u m b o f the right h and tow ard the -

face , then p a ss i t to the right in front o f the forehe a d to i n dic a te the

h at . Wi ed ) S till used to so m e exten t ( M a tth ew s ) There is a pl a i n
. .

an d evi den t si m il arity i n both execution a n d conception in the ( O to I )

sign an d Wi ed s ( Bo te ler )
. .

The si gn for T r a d e a lso den otes the A m eric a n s an d , indeed , an y ,

white m e n w ho are gener a lly c a lled by the In di an s w est o f the Rock y

,

M oun ta in s S h w o p fro m o ur sw a p o r swop ( Bu r ton ) ,

This is

.

a leg acy fro m the tr a ders w h o were the rst represe n t a ti ves of w h a t

used to be c alled the C a uc asi a n r a ce , m e t by the In di a ns .

A n ger p a ssed across the forehe a d .

( M a cg o w a n ) .

Indica te up on the forehe ad w ith the h a n d the supposed li ne o f con t a ct

of a h a t ( A r ap a h o I ) L iter all y , the h at we a rers "
. .
-

H ol d one h a n d hor iz ont ally over the forehe ad .

( Sac, For a nd K icka o

p oo I)
.
 2 84

The exten ded foren ger of the ri ght h an d ( M , turn ed in w a r d ) is

-

dr a w n fro m the left side of t h e h e a d a rou n d i n fron t to the right si de ,

a bout o n a line w ith the bri m o f the h a t w i th b a ck o f h a n d outw ard
,
.

(D I Fro the w e rin g

a ko t a ) . m a o f a h a t
.

Dra w the open ed right h a n d h orizont a lly fro m left t o ri gh t a cross the
forehe ad a little a bove th e eyebrows , the b ack of the h a n d to be u p w ard
a n d the n gers poi ntin g tow a rd the left O r , cl ose al l the n gers except
.

the i ndex , an d dr a w i t a cross th e forehe a d in the s a m e m a n n er ( Da .

~

ko ta I V ) Fro m the h a ts worn by the whites

. .

Close the ri gh t h a nd an d dr a w the b a ck of the thu m b h ori zo n t ally

,

a cros s the forehe a d fro m left to right ( H ida tsa I A r i ka ra I )

. .

The right arm is r aised an d the h an d a ssu m in g position ( I i ndex

n o t entirely closed bu t loosely hoo k ed i s then dr a w n a cross t h e fore
,

he a d in a line correspond in g to the h a t m a rk The Indi a ns we a rin g .

gener a lly a rudely constructed turb a n w ou ld m ost li k ely select th e sign

for h a t to distin guish th e white m an , fro m its bein g h is u n ivers a l he a d ~

dre ss . ( O to a n d M i sso ur i I ).The m an th a t we a rs the h at .

P oin t to the eye with the i n dex , then pl a ce the h a lf closed h a n ds , -

p al m s tow a rd th e foreh e a d over the eyes a n d p a ss the m dow n w a rd over

,

the cheek s an d for w a rd tow ard the ch in ( Wya n do t I ) S ta ted to b e

. .

b a sed upon the fact o f the gen er ally gr a y o r li ght eyes of A m eric an s rst
seen , follo wed by the sign for P e r so n .

Pa ss th e p al m a r surface of th e fully extended an d sep ar a ted th u m b

an d in dex of the ri gh t h a n d a cr oss the forehe a d fro m left to ri ght ,

A lth ough this is the essen ce of the ge sture n u m erou s slight v a ri a ,

tion s or abbrevi a tion s occur Freq uen t1y th e exten ded index only is
.
-

dr a w n across the forehe a d ; so m eti m es the thu m b i s pl aced ag ai n st

the ri gh t te m ple as a support for the h a nd , a s the index is dr a w n
a cross to it T h e h a nd an d ar m m ay be pl aced i n al m ost an y p ositi on
.
,

a s i t d oes n ot for m an es sen ti a l fe a ture in expressin g the ide a Th e left .

h an d h as also been u sed in in st a n ces w hen the right w as en g a ged as ,

in hol din g a pipe w hile sm ok in g or fro m other c auses

, ( K a io wa I ; .
-

C o m a n ch e III ; A p a ch e I I ; Wi chi t a I I )

.The lin e at w hich t h e h at
rests a g a in st th e forehe a d
.

R aise ri ght h an d to side of he a d a rched thu m b a nd n gers hori zon

.
,

t al poi n tin g to te m ple ( l l 1 ) then p a ss h a n d in th a t positio n over the

,

forehe a d a t s am e ti m e turni n g he ad to ri ght ( Sa h ap tin

,

M an
.

with h at .

P l ace the extended a n d se p ara te d ind e x a n d th u m b of the right h a n d ,

p al m down w ard , a cros s the ri ght side of the forehe ad ( Pai Ute I ) . .
 2 85

I m it a te the strok i n g of chi n wh is k ers then pl ace the b a ck of th e wrist ,

a g a in st t h e chi n , allo w in g the S pre a d n gers an d thu m b to poin t forw a rd

a n d dow n w a rd ( Ute I ) . .

A n other Dr a w the r adi al side

: of the extended i ndex a cross the fore
he ad fro m left to right ( Ute I ) . .

M a ke the si gn f o r M a n ; pl a ce t h e h a n ds on fa ce ; touch ten t cloth -

o r so m e other w hite obj ect poin t to the h a n ds A a ch e III )

( p ,
M an . .

w ith whi te fa ce or h a nd s .

A n oth er : H a nd
turn ed tips dow n u nder chin ( Q ) ,
.
( Ap ache II I ) .

B ea rd ; the M esc aleros bein g be a rdless .

De a f m utes gener ally i n especi a l the Fren ch ,

-

,
m ak e the
h at
sign
for m a n as di sti n guished fro m w o m a n .

W i c ke d . Se e B ad h ear t .

W ide . Se e B i g i n the sen se of wid e .

W if e . See H u sb a n d , R e l a t i o n sh i p ,
an d C o m p ar i so n .

W ig wa m . S ee L o dge .

W ild .

The h a n ds i n fron t of their respected bre a sts w i th n gers an d th u m bs ,

exten ded sep ara ted an d poin ti n g down w ard b a c k s of h a n ds outw ard ,
, ,

ar e quick ly c arried outw a rd wi th a tre m ulous m oti on of a l l the n gers ,

an d a s the h a n ds ar e c a rried ou tw a rd in cre a se the di st a n ce betw een

.

the m i e , c a rry the h an d s out obliquely ( Da ko ta I )

,
. . Prob a bly fro m . .

th e m ove m en t s of so m e k in d s of g a m e on bein g surprised

-
.

W in d ( air i n m otion ) . Air .

Ri ght h an d held perpendicul arly up w a rd an d brough t forw ard w ith a

tre m ul o us or vibr a tory m otion un til it p a sses beyon d the face ( Dun ba r ) .

S tretch the n gers of both ha nds outw a rd p u fn g v iolently the w h ile

, .

( B ur to n )

I ndic a te w i th the extended h a n d it s direction and force , an d e m it a

w hi stli n g soun d ( A r ap a ho I ) . .

B oth h an ds held u p c arelessly before the body , n gers n at ur a lly

exten ded , swept suddenly w ith dow n w ard an d up w a rd curve to the
left ( C hey enne
.

Righ t h a n d w ith the n gers slightly sep a r a ted , upri ght p al m forw a rd
o r outw a rd ( R ) , is c arried , held in this p osition , fro m behin d the body ,

by the right side o f the he a d , to the fron t of the body , o n the s am e level
 2 86

as f ar the ar m can be exten ded , a nd a t the s a m e m ak e w ith the

as

m outh a sound in rese m bl a n ce to the whistli n g o f the w ind ( Da ko ta I ) . .

Fro m the w histlin g o f a ir in m otio n s w ift ly by a perso n .

M ak eshort , r a pid vertic al vibr a tion s o f the h a nd spre a d a n d p al m

, ,

d o Wn ( W ) s weepin g it fro m be h i n d for w a rd , a bout hei ght o f w a i st ;

,

a cco m p a nied by a whizzin g soun d fro m the m outh ( Ap a ch e II I ) . .

Deaf m u te na t ur a l sig ns -
B low throu gh the lips an d m ove the uplifte d
h a n d horiz on ta lly .
( Ba l la r d )
B lo w the a ir fro m the m outh an d then ,
m ove the stretched h a n d in
a lin e b e fore th e bre a st ( L a r so n ) .

W i n te r .
( C o m p a re C
-

o ld .
)
shrin k in g sh i verin g condition ; m ove as if dr a win g a bl an k et a rou n d
A ,

the he ad a nd shoulders , then m ove both h a n ds above the he a d sh a k in g ,

the h a n d a s in the c a se of F a l l i n g l e a v e s ; brin g the h a nds ( n gers

down ) tow a rd the ground a n d un dul ate the m n e a r the groun d ; the n
w ith the right h a n d i ndic a te t h e d epth a nd level of the sn ow ; pro
n oun ce the n am e o f s n o w O cco ne ( Oj ibw a IV ) , . .

M e the si gn for C o l d , a n d then for

ak Sn o w .
( Da ko ta I ) . C ol d
we a therthe se a son of sn ow .

S h ak e
the upri gh t ne arly closed h a n ds b ac k an d forth sever al ti m e s
.

i n fron t o f the sh oulders a s if shi verin g p a l m s i n w a rd ; the n suspen d ,

the h an ds a bou t a foot in fron t of th e shoulders b a ck s for w ard n gers , ,

sep a r ated a nd ben t a little a nd poin tin g do wn w a rd a n d m ove a ll the

, ,

n gers a s i f sh ak i n g so m ethi n g fro m the m or a pproxi m ate an d sep a ra te ,

the e nds on ce or sever al ti m es a n d while doing so e a ch ti m e th row the , ,

h a n ds down w ard about eigh t inc h es ( Da ko ta IV ) C old an d sn ow . . .

M ak e the si gn s for R a i n , D e e p , and C o ld .

( Da ko ta VI ) .

M ak ethe sign for R a i n with both h a nd s then p ass the h and s w ith ,

p a l m s dow n hori zon ta lly to the ri ght an d left before the lower p art of the
body ( Da ko ta VI ; H ida tsa I ; A r ika r a I )
. Precipit ation an d dep th . .

B othh a n d s in position ( A ) tre m ble before the bre a st This bei n g .

en acted the h a nds o f the subj ect a r e exten ded th e a rm s l i k ewise on a

, ,

level with sh oulders pointin g to the horizon both h a nds no w desc ribe ,

the ar c subtendi n g the qu a dr a n t o f the horiz on un til they m eet over t h e

he ad ( O to a n d M isso ur i I )
. Wh en cold d a ys spre a d o ver u s
. .

Sam e sign as for C o ld .

( Ka i o wa I ; Co m anch e III ; Ap a che I I ;
Wi chi ta II ) .

Brin g
both sts together i n fron t of the bre a st as if dr a win g togethe r
the edge s of a bl a n k et ( Ap ache I ) . .
 2 87

W i se .

R a ise the righ t h an d a n d n gers gently t ap the forehe a d over the ,

righ t eye a nd p a ss ba ck w a rd alon gside of he a d w ith three or four t ap s

,

of n gers o n he a d ( Oj ibwa IV ) Prob ably i nti m atin g a level h ea d

. . .

Touch the forehe a d wi th the ri ght index an d then m ak e the sign for
B ig directly i n fron t of it ( Da ko t a I )

Bi g br a in
. . .

Touch the side of t h e he a d with the at right h a n d then elev a te the ,

h an d tow ard the sky lV ya n do t I ) . . S uperior i n i ntelligence .

T ap the forehe ad w ith the in dex ,

an d m ak e the si gn for Sp eak .

( Ap ache
W i sh ; d e si r e o f p o sse ssi o n .

H oo k the foren ger o ver the n ose .

( Ar ap a h o I ) .

Right h a nd w i th t h u m b an d foren ger exten ded is brough t up w ard

, ,

in fron t of th e body w ith the b ac k of the h a n d ou tw ard , thu m b a n d

,

fore n ger poin tin g tow a rd the left , to the level of the bre a st , w hen the
h a n d is q ui c k ly th ro w n upw a rd o utw ard an d then s li ghtly d ow n w ard , , ,

i. o n a curve so th a t the h a nd is horizon t a l w ith the p a l m up w a rd

, .

( D a ko ta I )
I li
. k e i t wi sh it
,
.

W o lf . Do g
( C o m p are .
)
S a m e si gn a s for Do g .
( O to
Pl ace t h eri gh t h an d n g e r s j o i ue d a nd ext en de d , a bove the
,
-
m outh ,
po in ti n g dow n w ard an d forw ard ( Ute I ) L on g nose . . .

W o m an . ( Co m p a re F e m a le ).

The n ger an d thu m b of the ri gh t h and p artly open , ,

an d pl aced as if
l ayin g hold of th e bre a st ( Du nbar ) .

Th e h a n ds ar e p a ssed fro m the top do wn e ach side o f the he ad , i n di

c a tin g the p a rtin g o f the h a i r o n the top an d it s owi n g dow n e ach side ,
.

( L o ng )
the p a l m o f the ex ten ded h an d down w ard over the h air o n the
Pa ss
side of the he a d , o r dow n w a rd over the chee k s ( Wi ed ) S am e a s m y .

d e scriptio n , b u t less preci se ( M a tthews ) The a r m s were exed an d .

the h an d s , st li k e held a t either side in the position o f the fe m ale

-

m a m m ar y g l a nds , then sweeps se m icircul a rly dow n w a rd There is no .

a ppreci a ble si m il arity i n this si gn a n d Wied s the conception a n d e x ecu

,

tion of wh ich ar e wholly di ff eren t ( Bo teler ) O n e with pro m inen t .

m a m m ae w h o can bri n g forth youn g

,
.

Pa ss the h a n d dow n both si des of the he ad ,

as if sm oothin g o r st r o k

in g th e lon g h a ir ( B ur ton ) .
 2 88

A nger directed tow ar d the bre ast .

( M a cgo w a n )
Tur n the ri ght h a n d ab ou t the ri ght e ar , a s if putti n g the h air behi n d
it .
( Do dg e)

Dra w the h an d , the n gers sep a r a te a n d p a rti ally closed , p a l m tow a rd

the chee k dow n w ard as o f co m bin g the h air ( Ar ap a ho I )
, , . .

Right h a n d n gers close together thu m b lyin g alo n g b a sal j oin t of

-

foren ger , pl aced a bove t h e t o p an d side o f the h e ad ben t an d su d ,

d e n l y brou ght down an d ou tw a rd to th e level a n d right o f sh oulder ,

n ger en ds still ben t in tow ard the l atter ( Ch ey enne I ) T o express . .

shortn ess as co m p ared with m an .

Pa ss
the p al m on ce do wn the fa ce a n d the w hol e bo d y ( Oj i bw a I ) . .

The l on g w a vin g dresses [ sic] o r the gr a ceful con tour of the fe m ale
,

body .

H old the h a nds cup sh a ped over e a ch bre a st .

( Sac, Fox, a nd Xieka
p oo I)
.

Pa ss the exten ded a n d at right h a nd b ac k for w ard an d outw a rd , ,

fro m the side of the cro wn do w n w ard to w a rd the shoulder a n d for w a rd .

A b r o ka I B I
Repre sen ts the lon g h a ir
( sa
; S h o sh on i a n d a n a k ) . .

The righ t h a n d brou gh t to the t o p of the he a d an d then c arried o ut

sid ewi se tow a rd the right a nd do wn w ard a s th ou gh d r a win g a co m b
throu gh the lo n g h a ir of a wo m a n s he a d ( Da ko ta I ) L on g h air

. . .

Right h an d n gers extended an d j oi ned ( as in T ) , horizon t al held on

-

the left side o f the fa ce the n gers poin tin g to the re a r the th u m b
, ,

gr a sp in g an d slid in g dow n w a r d to represent stro k in g the lon g br ai ded

h a ir o f a sq u a w ( Da ko ta I II )
. .

With t h e ri gh t h a n d b a c k forw ard n gers sli ghtly exed an d j oi ned

, , ,

th u m b close to in dex the little n ger ne a r th e h e ad m ak e a m oti on a s

, ,

if brushi n g the h a ir b eh ind the e ar by m ovin g the h a n d b ac k w ard an d

dow n w a rd throu gh an arc o f a bout six i n ches ( Da ko ta I V ) The . .

wo m en we a r the h air behi nd the e ars an d pl aited .

Pa ss
the at right h and p al m of exten de d n gers restin g n e a r th e
,

ri ght side of the crown , an d d o a ar d an d to the fron t o f the coll ar

bon e ( Da ko ta V I ) Represen ts lon g h air
. . .

extended h a n ds p al m s b a ck w a rd , a nd pointin g up w a rd a n d in
The ,

w ard ar e held e a c h ne a r the te m ple of the sam e side T h ey ar e then

,
.

swept si m ult a n eou sly down w ard a foot or t w o ( M and a n a n d H ida tsa .

I ) Thi s is to indic ate the m ode o f dressi n g the h air m ost co m m on

.

w ith wo m en a br a id on e ach side .

 2 89

B oth h an ds are brough t to a position correspon din g w ith f e m a le

m a m m ae The h a nds ar e loosely clin ched as i n type ( F ) an d l a id
.

loosely a g a in st chest o n side correspon di n g w i th h a nd a lthough so m e ,

ti m es the ar m s a re crossed an d h a nds held i n a bove posi tion s on oppo

site sides M y V O I n a n is expressed by t a ppi n g the left bre a st by
.

poin t of righ t in dex ng e r i n a ddition to a bove ( O to I ) A posi tion

-
. .

in dic ative o f fe m a le m a m [ 11 28 an d con n u bi a l e m bra ce .

Pa ss the exten ded a nd a t right h a nd ngers j oined , fro m the sid e ,

o f t h e crow n down w a rd a n d for w a rd a lo ng the chee k to the fron t o f the

righ t side of the n ec k the ngers p oin ting do wn w a rd a t ter m in a tion of

,

m otion B oth h a n ds a r e so m eti m es us e d

.
( Ka to wa I ; Co m a nche II I ; .

Ap a che II ; Wi chi ta II ) .

W i th the n gers an d thu m b of the ri gh t h a n d sep ar ated an d p artly

ben t or hoo k e d p a ss fro m t h e side of the he ad tow ard t he fro n t o f the
, (

shoulder gr ad ua lly cl osin g the h a nd i n i m i ta tion of ga therin g an d

,

S m oothin g the loc k of h a ir o n th a t side ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

Touch the h a i r on the side of the he ad with the n gers o f the ri ght
h a nd then pl a ce the closed h an d before the pubis , w i th the b ac k for
,

w a rd i n dex an d second n gers extended a nd sep a r a ted pointi ng do wn

, ,

w a rd ; pl ace the th u m b a ga in st the p a l m so th a t the tip protrudes a little

fro m th e crotch th us for m ed by the n gers ( Ute l ) Fourchette , . .

gl an s clitorid is an d loc ation o f

, .

The left fore an d secon d n gers a r e extended a n d sep ar a ted th e re ,

m a in i n g n gers closed ; the thu m b is then pl a ced a g a in st the p a l m in

such a m a n n er th at the tip is v isible in the crotch for m ed by the ex
tended n ger s; the h a n d i s the n pl a ced b a ck forw a rd in this position at
th e crotch ( Ap ache I ) . Rese m bl an ce to the p udendum m uliebr e
. .

( 1 ) T wo n gers held dow n w a rd ( N reversed ) ; ( 2 ) sweep h a nds u p

n e a r leg s a n d cl a sp the m about the w a ist ; ( 3 ) sweep h a n ds fro m shoulder
to w a ist loosely A h
( p c e
a I I I
.
) ( ) H u m a n bein g ( 2 ) we arin g shirt s
1
.

a n d ( 3 ) loose j a c k et s -
.

Deaf m u te na tur a l sign s T ak e hol d of the ga r m en t at the side below

-

the hip a nd sh ak e i t t o den ote the s k irt o f a w o m a n s dress ( Ba l la r d)

.

P oi n t
the h a nd to the re a r side of the he ad bec au se o f the co m bs the ,

w om en we ar as orn a m ents ( L a r so n ) .

In structed de a f m utes gener ally -

m ar k the lin e of the bon n et strin g -

dow n th e chec k .

I ta l i a n sig n Dr a w th e h a n d down the cheek un der the ch in .

( B ut
ler .
)
37
 2 90

O ld .

M ak e the sign for W o n l a n , an d then m ak e

the si gn for P r og r e s
W i th ( Da ko ta I V ) Progres sion o f a w o m a n wi th a

si o n a s a ff
t . .

st aff

.

Youn g , girl .

M ak e the sign for w o m a n h a n ds held i n the s a m e position , an d ,

brought fro m shoulder dow n w ard an d outw ard in proportio n t o th e

height of the girl ( C heyenne I ) . .

Deaf m u te n a tur a l sig n

-
T a k e hold o f an i m a gi n a ry g ar m en t below the
thi gh an d sh ak e it an d pl a ce the h a n d to the hei g ht o f a girl
, ( B a l la r d ) .

Touch the right e ar w ith the n ger bec a use ,

of the e ar -
rin gs girl s
we a r ( L a r son )
.

Won der . ( C o m p a re A d m i r a t i o n an d S ur p r i se )
.

S am e si gn for S u r p r i se S urpri se an d w onder see m to go

as th e .

h a n d in h a n d , b ut ad m ir ation and wonder do no t see m t o be n ecess arily

con n ected ( Da ko ta I ) . .

P l a ce ri ght h a n d o ver m outh , the thu m b bein g o n the ri ght an d the

.

n gers on the left of the n ose ; then sh rin k b a c k ( O m a ha I ) Th e . .

gesture o f pl a ci n g th e right h a n d before th e m outh is see m in gly in vo l

u n t ar y w ith u s, an d appe a rs also i n the E gypti a n h ieroglyph s .

Deaf -
m u te n a t ur a l sig n Part th e lips , r a ise the h a nd , an d a rch the
eyebrows e a ch action ,
in a slo w m a nner .
( Ba l l a r d )
R a ise ap art the ar m s , w ith the h a n ds open .
( L ar son )
W ood .

Poi n t to a piece of w ood with ri ght i n dex extended .

( Da ko ta I ) .

W ork , l ab or , e tc .

The ri ght h a nd , w ith n gers exten ded a n d j oi ned , b ack of the h a n d

outw ard , ed ge o f n gers dow n w ard is throw n fro m the level of th e ,

bre a st , forw a rd up w ard , and then down w ard , on a curve so th at th e

, ,

p a l m is brough t up w ard , an d then c arried to the righ t side of the body ,

level o f th e fa ce , w here the exten ded n gers poin t upri ght , p a l m o ut
w a rd ( Da ko ta I )
. .

As wor k is a gener al ter m for m a n u a l exertion , the ind e ni t e n e ss of

thi s si gn ca n be wel l understood The a r m s a n d h a nds are exten ded .

before the body , the h a n ds i n type position ( A ) ; the h a n ds ar e t hen -

gr a spin gly open ed an d shut as i n seizin g the plo w h a ndl es ; t h e closed -

h a nds then approxi m a te an d forcibly stri k e as in w or k in g at m ech a n

i c a l pursuits ( O to a n d M isso ur i I )
.

The exertion req uired in di ff er .

e n t k ind s o f l a bor
.
 291

H old both at h a n ds edgew ise i n fron t o f the body , thu m bs up p ush ,

forw a rd w ith sudden i n terruptions , a t e a ch m ove m ent dra win g b a ck the

n gers an d thro win g the m forw a rd a t every re st ( Kaio w a I ; Co m an .

che III ; Ap ach e I I ; Wichi ta II ) .

M e a sort o f m ild gr aspin g m otion w ith both h a n ds in sever a l d i

ak

rection s do wn w a rd ( Ap a che I I I ) S uggest ive of i n d ustri a l a cti vity ,

. .

a n d supple m en ted by p a n to m i m e of se w in g or choppin g if n o t pro m p tl y

,

un derstood .

W ra p , T o .

The left h an d is hel d i n f ron t of the body h a n d closed horizon t a l , , ,

b ac k up wa rd an d the ri ght h an d , with n gers in p ositio n as thou gh

,

gr aspin g so m e thing i s rot a ted aroun d the sta tion ary left ( Da ko ta
, .

Fro m the act o f wr appin g .

W r i ti n g .

The ac t o f writi n g is i m it ated by the nger in the p a l m o f the opposite

h a n d ( L o ng )
.

(1 ) L eft
h a n d held up as if a piece o f p a per ; ( 2 ) m otion m a de w ith
ri ght h a nd as thou gh writin g ( C hey en ne I ) . .

The rst p a rt of the si gn for B oo k .

( Dako ta I ) .

Ye a r .

Give the sign of R a i n or Sno w .

( Bur to n )
S ign for C o l d , an d then sig n for C o u n t i n g on e .
( Da ko ta I ) .

O ne w in ter .

Deaf -
m u te n a tur a l sig n Poin t to shirt boso m
lower th e exten ded a nd

n gers to si gn ify sn o w then r a ise the h a n d to den ote the height or dep th
,

o f th e sn ow an d then depress the h a nds t o sign ify g o ne

, ( B a l lar d ) .

Ye s . A f r m a t io n . I t is so .
( Co m p a re G o o d an d T r uth ).

The m otion i s so m ewh a t l i k e T r u t h b ut the nger is held r a ther m ore ,

upri ght , an d i s p a ssed ne arly str a ight forw ard fro m opposite the bre ast ,
an d w hen at the en d o f i ts course it see m s gen tly to stri k e so m ethin g ,

thou gh with a r ather slo w an d n ot sudden ly acceler a ted m oti on ( L o ng ) .

Wa ve the h a nds str a igh t forw ard fro m the fa ce ( Bur to n ) Thi s .

m ay be co m p a red with the forw a rd n od co m m on over m ost o f the w orld

for assen t but th a t gesture is n ot u ni vers a l as the N e w Ze a l a n ders
, ,

elev a te the he a d an d chin an d the T urk s sh ak e the he a d so m ewh a t li k e

,

o u r ne g a tive R ev E B B B a r n u m H ar p o o t Turk ey in a co n tr ib u
. . . . .
, , ,

tion of sign s received after the foregoin g h ad bee n prin ted den ies t h e ,

l atter st ate m en t but gi ves T r u t h as gently b o wi n g w ith he ad in

, ,

cl in e d to the righ t

.
 2 92

A n other : Wa ve the h a n d fro m t h e m outh , extendin g the th u m b f ro m

the i ndex an d closi n g the other three n gers .
( B ur to n )
G esticul ate vertic ally down w a rd fron t of the body w ith the ex
an d in
ten de d fore n ger ( ri g h t h a n d u su a lly ) , the re m ain in g n gers an d th u m b
cl osed their n ail s dow n ( Ar ap a ho I )
,
. .

Right h a n d elev ated to t h e l e ve l an d in fron t o f th e shoulder tw o rst ,

n gers so m ewh a t extended , th u m b restin g a ga in st the m iddle n ger ;

S udden m otion in a curve forw ard and d own w ard ( Chey enn e I ) The . .

correspon den ce between thi s gesture a nd the one f o r S i tt i n g , see m in g

l y in dic a tes th a t the ori gi n o f th e m o t ion for A f r m a t i o n i s i n i m it a
-

tion o f restin g or settli n g a q uestion

,
.

Sam e the S ign for ( Da ko ta to n gue

as T r u th . B ut o ne .

E xten d the righ t i ndex the thu m b a gain st it n e arly close the other
, ,

n gers an d fro m a posi tion a bou t a foot i n fron t o f the right bre a st ,
,

bend the h a n d fro m the wrist do wn w a rd un ti l the e n d of the i ndex h as

p a ssed a bout six in ches through a n are S o m e a t the s a m e ti m e m ove .

the h a n d for w a rd a li ttle ( Da ko ta I V ) A n o d ; the h a n d represen tin g

. .

the he a d a nd t h e index the n ose .

The ri ght h a nd , w ith the foren ger ( only ) extended a nd poin tin g f o r
w a rd i s held before a nd n e a r the chest It is then m oved for w a rd o ne
,
.

or tw o feet usu al ly wi th a slight curve do wn w ard ( M a n dan an d H i

,
.

da tsa I ) .

Bendthe ri gh t ar m poin tin g tow a rd the chest w it h the i ndex

,
-
n g e r .

U nbend throwi n g the h a n d up an d forw a rd

, ( O ma h a .

A n other C lose the three n gers close t h e thu m b over the m , extend
:
,

fore n ger , and then sh ak e forw ard an d dow n Thi s is m ore e m ph a tic .

th a n th e precedin g an d sign ies Y

, es 1 kn o w ( O ma h a I ) , ,
. .

The ri ght ar m is r a ised to he a d w ith the i ndex n g e r in type posi tion - -

(I m odied by bein g m ore Open ed Fro m a side the he a d th e h a n ds .

s weep in a curve to the right e ar as of so m ethin g en terin g or he a ri n g

so m ethin g ; the nger is then m ore opened an d is c arried direct t o th e
ground as so m ethi n g e m ph a tic or direct ( O to a nd M isso u r i I )
I . .

he ar , e m ph a tic ally sy m bolized .

The h an d open , p al m dow n w ard at the level o f the bre a st i s m oved , ,

forw ard w ith a quick dow n w ard m otion fro m the wrist i m i tatin g a bo w ,

o f the he a d ( I r o quo is I )
. .

Thro w the closed righ t h a nd wi th the i ndex extended an d ben t as

, ,

hi gh as the fa ce , an d let i t drop a gai n n a tur ally ; b ut a s the h a n d re a ch e s

i t s gre a test elev a tion the i nd ex is ful ly extended an d suddenly dr aw n
i n t o the p al m the g esture rese m blin g a bec k oni n g fro m a bove to w ard
,

the groun d ( Kaio w a I ; Co m a nch e II I ; Ap a che I I ; Wichita I I )

. .
 2 93

"ick m otion of the right h

u n d forw ard fro m the m outh ; rst position
a

a bout six inches fro m the m ou th a n d n a l a s f ar a g a in a w ay I n r st .

position the index n g e r i s extended , th e others closed ; in n al the

-

in dex loosely closed , thro wn in th a t position as the h a n d i s m oved for

w ard as thoug h hoo k ing so m ethin g w ith it ; p a l m o f h a n d o u t ( Sa kap
, .

t in I ) .

A n other : M ove right h an d to a position i n front o f the body , lettin g .

a r m h a n g loosely a t the side the thu m b sta ndin g a lon e , al l n gers

,

hook ed except foren ger wh ich i s p a rti ally exte n ded ( E 1 w ith fore
, ,

n ger p arti ally exten ded p a l m up w ard ) The si gn con sists in m ov i n g

,
.

th e foren ger fro m it s p arti a lly extended positio n to o n e si m il a r to '

the others as though m ak in g a sly m otion for so m e on e t o co m e to y o u.

,

This is don e on ce e a ch ti m e the a ssen t i s m a de M ore e m ph a tic th a n .

the precedin g ( Sa hap tin I ) We are together , th in k a li k e

. . .

Deaf -
m a te na t ur a l sig h Indic ate by noddin g the he ad .
( Ba l l a r d )

Y e st e r d a y . Se e Da y .

Yo u .

The h a n d open , held upw ard obl i q uely ,

an d poi ntin g forw ard .
( Dun
ba r )
.

Is e xpresse d by si m ply pointin g at the person s .

( L o ng )
Poin t to or otherwise in dic a te the person design a ted .
( A r ap a h o I ) .

Poi nt tow ard th e person with th e extended foren ger of the ri g ht

h a nd b a c k upw a rd hori zont al ( Da ko ta I ) Desig n atin g th e person
, ,
. . .

To .

With the n gers an d thu m b exten ded , lyi n g closely si de by side an d ,

poin tin g up w ard , p al m to w a rd i ndi vidu a l a ddressed , slo wly m ove the
h a n d tow ard the he a rer the ng e r tip s slightly in a dv ance o f the w rist
,
-

as if l a yin g so m ethi n g a g a in st the person ( Ka io w a I Co manche I II .

Ap ach e II ; Wi chi ta I I ) .

Yours .

T he ar m an d h a n ds ar e folded o n the chest as i n the si g n f o r M i n e ;

they are the n throw n open fro m the bre a st tow ard a n other , p al m s o ut
w ard ( O to an d M isso ur i I )
.

N o t m ine your s
.
,

.
 T R I BA L SI GN S .

A b sa r o k a , C ro w .

The h a n ds held ou t e ach side ,

a nd stri k in g the ai r in the m a n ner of
yin g ( L ong )
.

I m it ate the a pp i n g of t h e bird s w in gs wi th the two h an ds , p al m s

do w n w ard , brought close to the shou l der ( B ur to n ) .

The si gn f o r th ese Indi a n s is the s a m e as th a t for F l y , to .

( Da ko ta I ).

Flight o f the cro w .

A n other The Cro w In di a n s si m ply pl ace the i n dex upon the ridge
:

o f the n ose b ut thi s sign w oul d be un derstood by the S iou x a s m e a ni n g

,

N ose .
( Da k o t a I )

Fro m the S ioux ide a th a t the he art i s the se at o f
.

life ; con se q uently m y he art is I , is m yself ( Sic ) The pl a cin g o f the.

i ndex upon the rid ge o f th e n ose is understood to sign ify person ality

I m yself an d n o t to be a trib a l si gn
, ,
.

B oth h a nds extended with ngers j oined ( W ) , held ne a r the shoulders ,

,

an d ap p e d to represen t the w in gs of a cro w ( Da ko ta I II ) . .

At the hei ght o f the shoulders a nd a foot outw a rd fro m the m m ove ,

t h e op ened h a nd s forw ard an d b a c k w a rd twice o r three ti m es fro m the

wrist p al m s for w a rd n gers an d th u m bs exten ded an d sep a r a ted a lit
, ,

tle ; the n pl a ce the b ack or the p al m of the upright open ed ri ght h a n d

a g a in st t h e upper p art of the foreh e a d
; or h a lf close the n gers ,

pl a cin g the en d o f the th u m b a g a i nst the ends o f the fore an d m iddle

n gers , a nd then pl ace the b a ck of the h a n d a ga in st the forehe a d ,

( D a ko t a IV )
To i m it ate the y in g of a bird , and a lso in dic a te the
.

m a n ner in which the A bsa r o ka we a r their h a ir .

Pl a ce the at h a nd a s hi gh a s a n d in fron t o r to the side of the right

shoulder , m ove it u p an d do wn , the m otion occurrin g at the wri st For .

m ore th orough represent a tion , both h a n d s ar e so m eti m es e m ployed .

( Dako ta V , V I V II Ka io wa I ; Co m a nch e III 3 Ap ache I I ; Wi ch i ta II )

, .

B ird s w in g
.

M ak e w ith the ar m s the m otion of appin g w in gs .

( Ka tine I ) .

2 94
 2 95

The right h a nd a ttened is held over an d in front of the right

, ,

shoulder , an d q uick ly w a ved b a ck a n d forth a few ti m es as if fa nn in g the

sid e o f the fa ce W h e n m a de for the i n for m a t ion o f o n e ig nor a n t of th e
.

co m m on si gn , both h a n ds ar e used a nd the h ands ar e m oved outw ard ,

fr o m the body , though still ne ar the shoulder ( S hoshon i a n d B a n a k I ) . .

Win gs i e o f a crow
,
. .
,
.

Ar i ka r a .
( C orruptly abb r ev i a ted R ee .
)
W ith the righ t h an d closed curve the thu m b an d i n dex , j oi n their ,

tip s so as to for m a circle an d pl a ce to the lobe of the ear ( A bsa r o ka , .

I ; H ida tsa I ) Big e ar rin gs .

-

C ollect the n gers a nd thu m b o f the ri ght h a n d n e arly to a poin t an d ,

m a k e a t a ttooi n g or dottin g m otio n tow ard the u pper portion o f the

chee k This is the ol d sign a nd w as used by the m prev ious t o the a dop
.

tion o f the m ore m odern on e represent in g corn e a ters ( A r i ka r a I ) - -

. .

Pl a ce
the b a ck of the closed righ t h a n d tr a n sversely before the m outh ,

an d rot a t e i t forw a rd an d b a c k w a rd sever a l ti m es

-
This gesture m ay .

be a cco m p a n ied a s it som eti m es is, by a m otion of the j a ws a s if e a tin g to

, ,

ill ustr a te m ore fully the m e anin g o f the rot atio n of the st ( K a i o w a I ; .

Co m a nche III ; Wichi ta I I ; Ap a che II ) Corn e ater ; e a tin g corn fro m .

-

the co b .

by the s am e m otion s w ith the thu m bs an d f o r e n g e r s th a t

S ig n ie d
a r e u sed in shellin g cor n The d w arf Ree ( A ri k ar a ) corn is thei r p eo nl
.

iar possession w hic h their tr a diti on s a ys w a s gi ven to t h e m by Go d ,

,

wh o led the m to the M issouri River an d in structed the m h o w to pl a nt

it ( Rev C L H all , in T he M issio na r y H er a ld A pril ,
. . . .

They ,

ar e the corn shellers -

.

Ap a ch e lso W a r m S p r i n g
. S ee a .

M ak e either of the signs for P o o r i n p r o p e r ty ( Ka io w a I , .

Co m a nche III ; Ap a ch e II ; Wi chi ta II ) It is s a id th a t when the rst .

A p a che c a m e to the region they n ow occupy he w a s a sk ed who o r w h a t

he w as, an d n ot un derst a n di n g the l a n gu age he m erely m a de the sign
f o r P o o r , w hich expressed h is condition .

Rub the b a ck of the exten ded fore n ger fro m en d to end wi th the ex
ten ded i n dex ( Co m an ch e I I ; Ute I )
.P oor , poverty stric en
k
.
-
.

esc alero
M .

S a m e sig n a s f o r L ip an .
( Ka io wa I Co ma nche III ; Ap ach e II ;
Wich ita I I ) .

Ar ap a h o .

The n gers of on e h a n d touch the bre a st in di ff erent p arts to i ndic ate

the t a ttooin g of th a t p art i n poin ts ( L o ng) .
 2 96

S eiz e the n ose w ith the thu m b an d for en ger ( The Pr a ir ie Tr a ve ler . .

By R a ndol p h B M arcy c a pt ai n U n ited S t ates A r m y , p 2 1 5 N e w

.
, . .

York ,

Rub the right side o f t h e n ose with th e forenger : so m e c all this tribe
the S m el lers a n d m ak e their si g n c on si st of seizin g the n ose w ith
,

the th u m b a n d fore n ger ( B a r to n ) .

Fin ger to side of n ose .

( M acgo wan )
Touch the left bre ast th us i m plyin g wh a t they c all th e m sel ves , v i z :
,

the Good H e a rts ( A r ap a ho I )

. .

H ol d the left h a nd p al m down , an d n gers exten ded then w ith t h e

,

righ t h a nd , n gers exten ded p al m i n w a rd a n d thu m b up m ak e a su d

, ,

den stro k e fro m left to ri gh t a cross the b a c k of t h e n gers o f the left

h a nd , as if cuttin g t he m o ff ( Sac Fo r , a n d K ickap o o )
.
,
.

Joi n the end s of the n gers ( the th u m b in cl uded ) o f the right h a nd ,

a n d p oin tin g tow a rd the he a rt n e a r the chest thro w the h and forw a rd
, ,

a n d to the ri gh t once , twice , or m a ny ti m es through a n ar c o f a bout si x ,

in ch es ( Da k
.o t a IV )

S o m e say they u se this sign bec a use these I h
.

di a n s t attoo their bre a sts .

Rub the side of the exte nded i n de x a g ain st the right side of the n ose .

( Kaio w a I ; Co m a nche III ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta II ) .

C ol lect the n ger s an d th u m b o f the ri gh t h a nd to a poi n t a n d t ap ,

th e tips upo n the left bre a st bris kly ( Co ma nche II ; Ute I ) G ood . .

he ar ted It w as stated by m e m bers of the v a rious tribes a t Wa shin gton

.
,

in 1 880, th a t thi s sign is used to design a te the N orthern A r a p a hos , w hile

th at in w hich the in dex ru bs a g ain st or p a sses up w ard a lon gside of ,

the n ose , refers to the S outhern A r ap ah os , the re ason s given for w hich
w ill be referred to i n a future p a per .

A n oth er : C l ose th e ri gh t h a nd le a vin g t h e i n de x only exten de d then

,

rub i t up a n d dow n , held vertic a lly a gain st t h e side of the n ose where ,

i t j o in s th e ch ee k ( Co m an ch e I I ; Ute I )
. .

The ngers a n d thu m b of the right h an d ar e brought to a poi n t a n d ,

t a pped upon the right side of the bre ast ( Sh osh o ni a n d B a n a k '

A ssi n a b o i n .

M ak e the si gn of C u t ti n g t h e th roat. ( K a tine I ) .

With the ri ght h a n d attened for m a curve by p assin g it fro m the top ,

of the chest to the pubis the n g ers poi ntin g to the left an d the b a ck f o r
, ,

w ard ( Shosho ni a nd Banak I ) Big bellies

. . .
 297

A t si n a , L o w e r G r os V en t re .

B oth
h a n ds closed the tips o f the n gers po i ntin g to w a r d the wrist
,

a n d resti n g upo n the b a se of the j oi n t the th u m bs lyi n g upon an d ,

exten din g over the m iddle j oint of the f o r e ng e r s hold the l eft before
th e chest poi ntin g forw a rd p a l m up p l a cin g the right, w ith p a l m dow n
, , , ,

j ust b a c k o f the left a n d m ove a s i f p ic k i ng s m a ll obj ects fro m the

,

left w i th the tip of the right thu m b ( A bsa r o ka I S hoshoni an d B a n a k .

I)
. C or n shellers -
.

B rin g
the extended a n d sep ar a ted n gers a n d th u m b loosely to a poi n t ,

exed a t the m eta c arp al j oi n ts ; p oin t the m to w ard the left cl a vicle a n d ,

i m it a te a d ot tin g m otion as i f t a ttooi n g the s k in ( Ka to wa I ; Com a nch e .

II I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi chi ta I I ) T h ey used to t a ttoo the m sel ves , an d

.

live in the co u n try south o f the Da k ot a s .

B an a k .

M ak e
whistli ng sou nd phe w ( begi n ni n g a t a hi gh n ote a n d endin g
a

a bout a n oct a ve lo wer ) the n dra w the e xte n ded i n dex a cross the th ro at
fro m the left to th e ri gh t an d out to n e a rly a t a r m s len gth Th ey u sed
.

to cut the thro a ts of their prisoners ( Pai Ute I ) . .

M aj or H a worth
sta tes th a t the B a na ks m ak e t h e follo win g si g n for
th e m selves : Brush the a t ri gh t h a n d b a c k w a rd over the forehe a d a s
if forcin g b ac k the h a ir Thi s represe n ts t h e m a nn er of we a ri n g the
.

tuft of h a ir b a c k w a rd fro m the forehe a d A ccord in g to this i nfor m a n t .

,

the S hoshon i use the s a m e si gn for B a n a k a s f o r the m sel ves S n a k e .

B la ckf ee t ( This title is u nderstood to refer to the

. A lgon k in B l a c k
feet , properly c a lled S a t si k a ) .

The n ger an d t h u m b encircle the a n k le ( L o ng ) .

-

Pa ss the right h a nd , ben t s p oon fa sh ion fro m the heel to the little toe
-

of th e right foot ( Ba r to n ) .

The p a l m a r surfa ces o f the exten ded fore a nd secon d n gers o f the
ri ght h a n d ( others closed ) ar e rubbed a lon g th e leg j ust a bove the a n k le ,

This would n o t see m to be cle a r , b ut these Indi a n s do n ot m ak e a ny

si gn ind ic atin g bla ck in con n ection w ith the a bove The S i gn doe s n ot .
,

h owever i nterfere wit h a n y other sign as m a de by the S ioux ( Da ko ta

,
.

I ) Bl a c k feet
. .

Touch the righ t foot w i th the right h a nd .

( K a ti ne I)
.

C lo se
the right h a nd thu m b resti n g over the secon d j oi n t of the fore
,

n ger p al m tow a rd the fa ce a n d rot a te over the chee k thou gh an i n ch

, , ,

o r tw o fro m it o sh o n i a n d Ba n a k I ) Fro m m a nner of p a i ntin g

( S h . .

the cheek s .

38
 298

C a ddo .
( Co m p are N e z P e r c s ) .

Pa s s the horizon t ally exten ded in dex fro m ri ght to left u n der the n o se .

K a i o wa I C o m a n che III ; Ap a ch e II ; Wi chi ta II ) Pierced n oses

(

; ,
.

fro m for m er custo m o f we arin g rin g s in the septu m .

C a l i sp e l . Se e Pe n d d o re ille .

C h eyen n e .

Dra w the h a n d cross th e ar m , a to i m it a te cuttin g it with a k n ife .

( M ar cy, Pr a irie Tr aveller , loc ci t p . .

, .

Dr a w the l ow er edge of the righ t h an d a cross the left ar m as if

g a sh i n g i t w ith a k n ife ( Ba r ton ) .

W i th the in dex ng e r o f the right h an d proceed a s i f cutti n g the le f t

-

ar m i n d i ff eren t pl a ces wi th a s a win g m otion fro m the wrist upw a rd to ,

represen t the cu ts o r burn s on the ar m s of th a t n a tion ( L o ng ) .

Brid ge p al m of left h a n d wi th i n dex n g e r -

of right .
( Macg o w an )
Dr a w the extended right h a n d n gers j oined , ,
a cross the left wrist as

if cuttin g it .
( A r ap ah o I ) .

P l a ce
the exte nded in dex a t the righ t side o f the n ose w here i t j oin s ,

the fa ce the tip re a chi n g a s h igh as the forehe ad , an d close to the in ner
,

cor ner of the eye This posi tion m ak e s the th u m b o f th e right h an d rest
.

upon the chin , while the i n dex is perpen dicul a r ( Sac, Fox, a n d Kicha .

p oo I ) I t i s con sidered th a t thi s si gn though given to the coll a bor a tor

.
,

as expressed , w as an error It applies to the S outhern A r ap a hos

. .

As though s a w in g through the left fore a r m a t it s m iddle , with the

edge of the right held b a c k ou tw a rd th u m b u p w a rd S ign m a de a t the ,
.

left side o f the body ( Da ko ta I ) Sa m e sig n as for a S a w

. The . .

C heyen n e In di an s ar e k n o w n t o the S ioux by the n a m e of The S a w s .

Right h an d n gers an d thu m b exten ded an d j oin ed ( as i n S ) outer

-

ed ge do w n w ard an d dr a w n sh arply a cross the other n ger s a n d fore

,

ar m a s if cuttin g wi th a k n ife ( Da ko ta III ) . .

Dr a w the extended ri ght index or the u l n ar

( inn e r ) edge of the open ed
ri ght h a n d sev er al ti m es a cross th e b ase of the e x te n d e d l e f t index , or
a cro ss the left fore a r m at diff eren t heights fro m left to ri ght ( Da ko ta .

I V ) Bec a u se their a r m s a r e m ar k ed wi th sc ars fro m cuts w hich they

.

m ak e as o ferin g s t o S pi rits
f
.

Dr a w the extended i ndex sever a l ti m es across the extended foren ger

from the tip tow ard the p al m , the l a tter pointin g forw ard an d sli ghtly
tow a rd the righ t Fro m the cu stom o f stripin g ar m s tr ansversely w ith
.

colors ( Ka io w a I ; Com an che I I , II I ; Ap ache II ; Ute I ; Wichi ta II )

. .
 2 99

An other the sig n for Do g and th a t for T o E a t Thi s sign

: M ak e .

is gener a lly used but the other a n d m ore co m m on on e is a lso e m p l oyed

,
,
especi a lly so with individu al s n o t fully con vers a n t wi th th e si gn l an -

gu a ge a s e m ployed by the Co m an ches & c ( K a iozca I ; Co ma nche III ; ,

.

Ap a ch e II ; Wi ch i ta II ) Do g e a ters .
-

Dr a w the extended in dex a cross the b a c k of the left h a nd an d a r m a s

if cuttin g i t The i ndex does n ot touch th e ar m as in sign s gi ven for

.

th e s a m e tribe by other Ind i a ns but is held a t le a st four o r ve in ches ,

fro m i t ( S ho sho n i a n d Ba na k I )
.
.

C h ip p e wa y . Se e O j ib wa .

C o m a n ch e .

Im i tate , by the w a vin g of the h a n d or foren ger , the forw a rd cr a wli n g

m otion of a sn a k e ( B ar to n a lso B l a ckmo r e in i n troductio n to Do dg e s
.
,

Pl ain s o f the G re a t West xx v N e w Yor k , The s am e sign i s

, .

u sed f o r the S h osh oni m ore co m m on ly c a ll ed S n ak e Indi an s , w h o as

,

well as the C o m a n che belon g to the N u m a li n guistic fa m ily The .

silen t ste alth o f the tribe ( Thirty Ye a rs of A r m y L ife o n the Border .

By C ol R B M a rcy , p 33
. . .N e w Yor k , B ut see S h o sh o n i
. .

for distin ction between the sign s .

M otion of a sn ak e .
( M a cg o w an )
H old the elbo w o f the ri gh t ar m ne a r the righ t si de but n o t touch in g ,

it ; exte n d the fore ar m an d h a nd p a l m i n w a rd , n gers j oin ed o n a level ,

with th e elbow then w ith a shoulder m ove m en t dr a w th a t fore ar m an d

,

h a n d b a c k u ntil the p oints of the ngers ar e behin d the body ; a t the

s am e ti m e th a t the h a n d is thus bein g m o ved b a c k tur n it righ t an d ,

left sever a l ti m es ( Sa c, Fort , a nd K ickap oo I ) S n ak e in the gr a ss

. . .

A sn ak e dr a w i n g itself b a c k in the gr a ss i n ste a d o f crossin g the ro a d in

fron t o f y o u .

A n other The sign by a n d for the Co m an ches the m selves is m a de

: ,

by h oldin g both h a nd s an d ar m s up w ard fro m the elbow both p a l m s ,

in w ard and p a ssin g both h a n ds w ith their b ac k s up w a rd al on g the

,

lower end o f the h air to i ndic a te long h ai r a s they n ever o u t i t ( Sa c, , .

Fo x, a nd K ickap o o I ) .

Ri gh t h a n d horizon t a l , at , p alm dow n w ard ( W ) , a dv anced to the

fron t by a m otion to represen t the cr a wlin g o f a sn ak e ( Da ko ta III ) . .

E xten d
the closed right h a n d to th e front an d left ; exten d the index ,
p a l m down an d rot ate fro m side to side w hile dr a w in g it b a c k to the
,

ri ght hip ( K a io w a I ; Co m a nch e II I ; Ap a che II ; Wi chi ta I I )

. .

Me the reverse gesture for S h o sh o n i i e begin a w ay fro m th e

ak , . .
,

body d r a win g the h an d b ac k to the side o f the righ t hip w hile rot a tin g
,

it ( Co m an ch e II )
. .
 300

C re e . K n i st e n o .
-

K r i st e n e a u x .

S ignfor W a g o n a nd then the si gn f o r M a n ( Da ko ta I ) Th is . .

indic ates the Red Ri ver h alf breeds , w ith thei r c arts , a s these people are -

so k n ow n fro m their h a bit o f tr a veli n g w it h c a rts -

D a k o ta S i o u x . .

The edge of the h a n d p assed across th e th ro at , as in the act o f cuttin g .

th a t p art ( L o ng ; M ar cy A r m y L ife l o c ci t p
.
, . . .
,
.

Dra w the lower edge of the h an d a cross th e thro a t .

( B a r to n )

Dr a w the exten ded ri gh t h an d acros s th e th ro a t .

( Ar ap a ho I) .

The
cut th ro a ts
-
.

Dr a w the foren ger of the left h an d fro m ri ght to le ft a cross the

thro a t ( S a c For and Ki ckap o o I ) A cut thro a t
.
, ,
. .

Fo r e n g e r th u m b o f ri gh t h a n d extended ( others close d) is dr a wn

an d

fro m l eft t o ri gh t a cross the thro at as thou gh cuttin g i t The Dak ota s .

h a ve been n a m ed the cu t thro a ts by so m e of the surroun d in g tribes -

( Da ko ta I ) C ut throa ts -

. .

Ri ght h a nd h orizont al at p a l m down w a rd ( a s in W ) , , , and dr aw n

a cross th e th ro a t a s if cutti n g w ith a k n ife ( Da ko ta III ) . .

Dr a w the Opened right h a n d or the ri gh t in dex , fro m left to right ,

h orizon t ally a cross the thro a t , bac k of h a nd up w ard n gers poi ntin g ,

tow a rd the left ( Da ko ta IV ) It i s s a i d th at a fter a b a ttle the U te s

'

. .

too k m an y S iou x prisoners and cut th eir th ro a ts ; hen ce the si gn out

throa ts .

Pa ss the a t h a nd , w ith the p a l m down , fro m left to ri ght a cross th e

thro a t .
( Da ko ta V I .
)

Dr a w the exten ded ri ght h and p al m d own w ard , ,

a cros s the thro a t
fro m left to righ t ( K ai o w a I ; Co m a nch e I I , III ; S hosho ni
. and B a na k
I ; Ute I ; Ap a che II ; Wi chi ta II ) Cu t thro a ts
'

-
. .

Bl a c k foot ( S ih a s a p a ) .

Pa ssthe ri ght h a nd q u ic k ly over th e right foot fro m the gre at toe

outw a rd turn t h e heel as if brushin g so m ethin g therefro m ( Da ko ta V )
'

. .
,

Pa ss
the w idely sep ar ated th u m b an d index o f the ri gh t h an d over the
lower leg fro m j ust below the k nee n e a rly dow n to th e h eel ( K a i o w a
,
.

I ; Co man ch e III ; Ap a che II ; Wichi ta I I )

.
 301

B r ul ;

R ub th e upper an d outer p art of the right thig h ina s m all cir cle wi th
the opened ri ght h a nd n gers poi nti ng dow n w a rd ( Da ko ta I V )
,
. .

These In di a n s it is s a id w ere on ce c a u ght in a pr a irie re m a n y

, , ,

b urned to de a th an d others b a dly burned about the thi ghs H en ce

,
.

th e n am e S i ca u g u ( burn t thigh ) a n d th e sign

- -
.

B rush the p a l m of the righ t h an d over th e right thi gh fro m ne ar the ,

buttock tow a rd the fron t o f the m iddle third of the thigh ( K a io w a I .

Co ma nch e III ; Ap a che I I ; I ichi ta I I ) .

gal a l a
O .

Fin gers an d th u m b sep ar a ted str a ight ( a s in R ) , an d dotted a b out ,

over the fa ce t o represen t the m a r k s m a de by the s m all pox ( Da ko ta -

.

III ) Thi s b a n d su ff ered fro m th e dise a se m a ny ye ars ag o

. .

W ith t h e th u m b over th e en ds o f the n gers hold th e ri gh t h a n d ,

upri ght i t s b ac k forw a rd a bout six in che s i n fron t o f the fa ce or o n

, , ,

o n e si de o f the n ose ne a r the fa ce a n d sudden ly exten d an d spre a d al l ,

the n gers ( th u m b in clu d ed ) ( Da ko ta IV ) The word O ga la l a m e a n s . .

sc a tter in g o r th row in g a t an d the n a m e w a s gi ven th e m i t is s aid , a fter

, ,

a ro w i n whi ch they thre w a shes i nto e ach oth er s fa ces

.

F l a th e a d , or S e l i sh .

O neh an d pl aced o n th e top of th e he ad , a nd the other on the b a c k of

the h e ad ( L o ng )
.

Pl a ce th e ri ght h a n d to the top of the h e ad .

( K a ti ne
Pa t the righ t side of t h e h e ad above an d b a ck o f the e ar w ith the at
ri gh t h a n d ( S ho sho n i a n d B a n a k I ) Fro m th e elon ga tion o f the
. .

occi p ut .

F o x, or O u t a g a m i .

S a m e si gn a s for S a c .
( Sa c, For , and K ickap oo I)
.

Gro s V en tr e . Se e H i d a t sa .

H i d a t sa G r o s V e n t r e o r M i n i t a r i
, .

B oth h a n d s a t a n d extended p a l m s to w a rd the body w ith the tips , ,

.

o f the n ger s poi n tin g tow a rd on e a n other ; p a ss fro m the top o f the

ch est dow n w ard outw ard a nd i n w ard tow ard the groin ( Absar o ka I ;
, , .

S hosho n i a n d Ba n a k I ) Big belly . .

L eft ri gh t h a nds i n f ron t of bre a st left pl a ced i n position rst

an d , ,

sep a r a ted abou t four o r ve in ches left h a n d outside of th e ri ght hori , ,

z o n t al b ack s ou tw a rd n gers exten ded an d poin ti n g left an d ri gh t

, ,

stri k e the b a c k o f the right ag a in st the p a l m o f the left sever a l ti m es ,

a n d then m ak e the sign f o r G o , G o i n g ( Da ko ta

The Gros .
 3 02

Ven tre In di an s , M inneta rees ( the H id at sa I ndi an s of M a t th ews) , ar e

k no wn to th e Si o u x a s the Indi an s wh o wen t to the m oun t a in s to k il l
t hei r e ne m ies ; h e nce the si gn .

E xpress w it h the h a nd the sign of a bi g bel ly .

( Da ko ta III ) .

Pa ss
th e a t righ t h and b ack forw ard , fro m the top of the bre a st , dow n
,

w a rd , out w ard an d i n w a rd t o the p ub i s ( Da ko ta V I ; H ida tsa I ;

,
.

A r i ka r a I ) B ig belly

. .

I n d ia n ( gen eric ally ) .

R ub the b a c k o f the exten ded left h a n d w ith the p al m ar surfaces of

the exten ded n gers o f the right .

( Co ma nche I I ) .

People of the s a m e
k ind ; d a r k s k in n ed -
.

Rub the b ac k of the left h a n d with the index of the ri ght .

( Pa i Ute I ) .

R ub the h a c k of the left h a n d li gh tly w ith the in dex of the right .

( l V ichi ta I )
/
.

K a io w a .

Me the si gn s of the P r a i r i e a nd of D r i n k i n g W a t e r
ak .

( Bur to n ; B lach mo r e i n Dodge s Pl a in s o f the Gre at West , xx i v N e w

.

Yor k ,

Right h a n d n gers an d th u m b extended a n d j o ined ( as i n W ) pl a ced

-

i n fron t o f ri ght sh oulder , an d revol v in g loosely at the wrist ( Dako ta .

I II ) .

Pl a ce
th e at h a n d w ith exten ded a n d sep ar ated n gers before th e
fa ce , poin tin g for w a rd an d up w ard , the w rist n e ar the chi n ; p ass i t
up w ard an d forw ard sever a l ti m es ( K ai on a I Co m a nche III Ap a che .

I I ; Wi chi ta II ) .

Pl a ce
the ri gh t h a n d a short dista n ce a bove the righ t si d e of the h e a d ,
n gers an d thu m b sep ar a ted an d extended ; sh ak e i t r a pidly fro m si de
t o side , givin g i t a sligh t rotary m otion i n doin g so ( Co m anche I I ) . .

R a ttle br a in ed -
.

S am e
si g n as ( Co m a nche II ) w ith the exception th a t both h a n d s a r e
,

gen er a lly u sed i n ste a d o f the ri gh t on e only ( Ute I ) . .

Ki cka p o o .

With the thu m b n ger go through the m otion of clippin g the

and

h ai r over the e a r ; th en w it h the h an d m ak e a si g n th at the border s of

the Ieggins are wide ( Sac, Fox, a nd Kickap o o I ) . .

K n i st e n o , or C ree .

Pl a ce the rst an d s econ d n gers of the right h a n d i n fron t of the

m outh .
( Ka tine I ) .
 3 03

Ku ti n e .

Pl a ce the i ndex or secon d n ger o f the right h a n d on e a ch si de of the

left in d e x n g e r to i m ita te ri din g a h orse ( K a tine .

H old the left st , p al m up ward a t a r m s len gth before the body th e ,

,

right a s if g r aSp in g the b o w st rin g an d dra wn b ack ( Shoshoni a n d .

B ana k I ) .Fro m their peculi a r m a nner of holdin g the lon g b ow hori

z o n t a l l y i n shootin g

.

L ip an .

W i th the in dex a n d secon d n gers only extended an d sep ar ated , h old

th e h an d a t ar m s len gth to the fron t o f the left si de ; dr a w it b ack in

distin ct j er k s ; e a ch ti m e the h an d rests dr a w the n gers b a ck a g a in st

the in side o f the th u m b an d when the h a n d is a ga in st arted o n the n ext
,

m ove m en t b a c k w a rd sn ap t h e n gers to ful l len gth This is repe ated .

ve o r sixti m es dur i n g th e o n e m ove m en t o f the h a nd The coun try .

w h ich the L ip a n s a t o ne ti m e occupied con t a ined l arge pon d s or l ak es ,

a n d a lon g the shores of these t he reptile w as foun d w hi ch g a v e the m .

thi s ch a r a cteristic appell a tion ( K a io wa I ; Co m an ch e III ; Ap a ch e II ;

.

Wichi ta I l ) Frogs . .

M an dan .

The rst a nd secon d n gers of the right h a n d exten ded , sep a r ated
b ac k s outw ard ( other n gers a n d th u m b closed ) ar e d r a wn fro m the ,

left sh oulder obli q uely down w a rd in fro n t of the body to the ri gh t h ip ,

( D a ko t a I )

The M
. a nd a n In di a n s ar e k n own to the S iou x a s

The
p e Ople
-
w h o we a r a sc a rlet s a sh ,
w ith a tr a in
in the m a n ner a bove de ,

scri bed .

M e xi ca n . Se e V O C AB UL AR Y .

M i n i ta r i . S ee l l i d a t sa .

N e gr o . S ee V O C AB UL AR Y .

S i nce t h e V O C AB UL AR Y w as pri nted the foll owin g

been received h as
fro m A r ap ah o an d C heyen n e In di a n s in W a shin gton , a s the si gn for
N e g r o a s well a s f o r U t e Rub the b ack o f the extended at l eft h an d
.

w ith th e exten ded n gers o f th e righ t then t ouch so m e bl a ck obj ect , .

Represen t s bl a ck sk in A lthou gh the s am e si gn is ge ner ally u sed to

.

si gn ify N e g r o , an a ddition is so m etim e s m a de as foll ow s : p l a ce the

in de x an d secon d n gers to the h air o n the ri gh t side o f the he a d an d ,

r ub th e m ag ain st e a ch other to signify C ur ly h a ir Thi s addition is .

on ly m ade w hen the con nection w ould c a use a bo n f usio n between th e

bl ac k sk i n In di a n U t e an d negro
( ) .

N e z Pe r c s . Se e S a h ap ti n .

Pl a ce the th u m b an d foren ger to the nostril s .

( K a tin e I ) .
 .
3 04

o j i b wa , or C h ip p e wa .

Righ t h a n d hor izo n t a l b ack out ward n gers sep ara ted a rched ti ps
, , , ,

poin ting i n w a rd , i s m oved fro m righ t to left bre a st a nd gener ally over
(

the fron t o f the body w i th a tre m blin g m otion a n d at the s a m e ti m e a

-

S li ght ou tw a rd o r forw ard m ove m en t of th e h a n d as though dr a win g

so m ethi n g o u t o f the body , a nd then m ak e th e sig n for M a n ( Dakota I ) . .

Perh a ps th e rst C hippew a In di a n see n by a S iou x h ad a n eruption o n

h is body an d fro m th a t his people were given the n a m e o f the
,
People

w ith a bre a k in g out by which n a m e the C hippew a s h a ve e ver been

-

k n o wn by the S ioux .

0 sa ge, or W a sa j i .

P ull the eyebro ws over the le f t eye w ith the th u m b a n d foren ger
at

o f the l eft h a n d T h is si g n i s a lso u sed by the O s a ges the m selves

. .

( Sa c For a nd Ki ckap o o I )
, ,
.

H old the a t ri ght h a n d , b ac k forw ard wi th th e ed ge poin tin g b a c k ,

w a rd a ga in st the side o f the he a d then m ak e repe a ted cuts a nd th e

, , ,

h an d is m oved b a c k w ard tow a rd the occiput ( Ka io wa I ; Co m a nche .

I II ; Ap a che I I ; Wichi ta I I ) For m er custo m of sh a vin g the h air fro m .

the sides o f the h e ad le a vin g bu t a n occipito fron t al rid ge

,
-

Pa s sthe at a n d exten ded ri ght h a n d b a c k w a rd over th e ri ght side

o f th e he a d m ovi n g the i n dex a g a i n st the secon d n ger i n i m it a tion o f
,

cutti n g w ith a p a ir of scissors ( Co ma nche II ) Repre sents th e m an . .

n e r of re m ovi n g the h a ir fro m the sides o f the he a d le a vin g a rid ge ,

only fro m th e forehe a d to th e occipu t .

O u ta g a m i . Se e F o x .

P a i U t e s,
-
He a d C h ie f o f t h e '

G r a sp the forel ock w ith the ri ght h a nd p a l m b a c k w a rd ; p a ss the ,

h a nd u p w a rd a bout si x i nches a nd hold it i n th a t p osition a m o m en t ,

.

( Pa i Ute I ) Big ch ief

. .

Pa i Ute b a n d , C h ie f
-
o f a .

M e the gesture a s for P a i U t e H e a d C h i e f but i nste ad of

ak -
, ,

holdin g the h an d a bove the he a d l ay i t do w n over the ri gh t te m ple ,

restin g i t there a m o m en t ( Pa i Ute

L ittle chief . .

P a n i ( Pa wn ee ) .

I m ita te a wolf s e a rs wi th the t w o f o r e n g e r s o f the ri ght h a nd ex

.

tended together upri ght, on the left side of the he a d ( Bur to n )

,
. .

Pl a ce a h a n d on e a ch side of the forehe a d , w i th two n gers pointin g

to t h e fron t to represen t the n arro w sh arp e ars of the wol f ( M a r cy ,
.
,

Pr a irie Tr a veler loc ci t , p ,

. . .

First an d secon d n gers of ri ght h a nd str a ight up w a rd a n d sep a r a ted , ,

re m a in in g n gers an d thu m b closed ( a s i n N ) li k e the e ars o f a s m a ll ,

wolf ( Da ko ta I II )
. .
 3 05

Pl a cethe closed right to the side of the te m ple p al m forw ard , le av in g ,

the index an d secon d n gers exten ded an d slightly sep ar ated , poin tin g
up w a rd This i s ordin arily used though , to be m ore explicit both h a n d s
.
, ,

m ay be used ( Ka io w a I ; Co m an che III ; Ute I ; Ap a che I I ; Wi ch i ta I I )

. .

E xte nd the in dex an d second n gers o f the right h a n d up w ard fro m

the right side of the he a d ( Co m a nch e I I ) . .

Pe n d d o r e i l l e , or C a l i sp e l .

M ak e the m otion of p a ddlin g a c a noe .

( Ka ti n e I ) .

B oth sts ar e held a s if gr a spin g a p a ddle vertic ally dow n w ard an d

wor k in g a c an oe T wo strok es ar e m a de on e ach side of the body fro m
.

the side b a c k w a rd ( Shoshon i a n d Ba n a k I )

. .

Pue b l o .

Pl a ce the clin ched h an d b ac k of the occip ut as if gr a spi n g the queue ,

the n pl a ce both sts in front of the ri ght shoulder rota tin g the m slightl y ,

to represent a loose m ass of an i m a gin ary s u bst a nce Represents t h e .

l arge m a ss of h a ir tied b a c k o f the he a d This sig n h as been obt ain ed .

fr o m A r a p a h o an d C heyen n e I n di a n s while this p aper w as p assin g

thr ough th e press .

Sac, or S a u k i .

Pa ss the extended p a l m o f the ri ght h a n d over the ri gh t side of the

he a d f ro m fron t to b a c k and the p al m o f the left h a n d i n the s am e
,
;

m an ner over the left side o f t h e he a d ( Sa c Fo x a nd Ki ckap o o I ) .

, ,
.

S h a ved he a ded I ndi

-
a n s
.

Sa h ap t i n , or N e z P e r c s .

C lose the ri gh t h a nd le a vi n g the i n dex str a ight but exed at right

,

a n gles wi th the p al m ; p a ss i t h ori zon t ally to th e left by a n d under the

nose Thi s sign i s m ade by the N e z Perc s for them selves a ccordi n g
.
,

to M aj o r H a worth W hile this p aper h as been p a ssin g through the

'

press infor m ation h a s been rece ived fr o m A r ap a ho an d C heyen ne In

di a n s now i n Wa shin gton , th a t this sign is a lso used to desi gn a te the
,

C a ddos who pr a cticed the s am e custo m o f perfor atin g the n a s a l septu m

,
.

The s am e i nfor m an ts also st a te th a t the S h a w nees ar e so m eti m e s i n di

ca t e d by the s a m e si gn C II ierced nose

( o m a n ch e ) P . . .

Pa ss the exten ded index , pointi n g tow a rd t he left , re m a i n in g n gers

an d th u m b closed i n fron t o f an d a cross the u pper lip j ust below the
, ,

n ose The secon d n ger i s a lso so m eti m es exten ded ( Sho shon i an d
. .

B a na k I ) Fro m the custo m of piercin g the n oses for the reception o f

.

orn a m ents The S a h apt in , however , h ave n o t h ad th a t custom since

.

bein g k n own to the m selves .

S a t si k a . Se e B l a c k f ee t .

S e l i sh . Se e F l a t h ead .

39
 3 06

Sh a wn e e . S ee N e z P e r c es .

Sh o sh o n or S n a k e ( C o m p a re C o m a n c h e )
i, . .

The foren ger is exten ded h orizon t a lly and p a ssed alon g for w ard i n
a serpentine line ( L ong ) .

Right h a nd closed , p al m down pl aced in fron t of the ri ght hip ; ex ,

tend the in dex an d push it di agon ally tow a rd the left fron t , rota tin g it
q uic k ly fro m side to s ide in doi n g so ( A bsar o ka I ; Shoshoni an d Ba na k .

S n ak e .

Righ t h a n d horizont a l a t , p al m down w ard ( W ) , ad v an ced to the

, ,

fron t by a m oti on to represen t the cr a wlin g of a sn ak e ( Da ko ta I II . .

W ith the ri gh t in dex poin tin g forw a rd the h a nd is to be m oved for ) ,

w ard a bout a foot in a sin uous m an ner to i m ita te the cr a wlin g of a ,

sn a k e ( Da ko ta IV )
. .

M ak e the m oti on of a serpen t w i th the ri ght n ger .

( K a ti n e I ) .

Pl a ce the cl osed righ t h a n d p al m dow n , i n fron t o f the righ t hip ;

,

exten d the index a n d m ove for w a rd an d tow ard the left rot a tin g the
, ,

h a n d a n d n ger from side to side in doin g so ( Ka io w a I ; Co m anche .

III ; Ap a che II ; Wichi ta

Pl a ce
the closed ri ght h a n d , p al m down i n fron t o f the ri ght hip ; ,

extend the index , m ove it forw ard a nd tow a rd the left , rot atin g the
h a n d and index i n doin g so ( Co ma nche I I ) . .

Close the right h a nd le a vin g the in dex on ly exten ded an d p oin tin g
,

forw ard , p al m to the left the n m ove i t for w ard a n d to the left The
, .

rota ry m otion o f th e h a n d does n o t occur i n this a s in the s am e si gn gi ven ,

by other tribes f o r S h o sh o n i or S n a k e ( Pa i Ute I ) . .

S h e e p e ate r .
( T uk u ar ik ai ) .

B oth h a nds , h a lf closed p a ss fro m the top o f th e e ars b ac k w ard , dow n

,

w a rd , an d forw a rd , in a curve , to represen t a r a m s horns ; t h en with th e

,

i n dex only exten ded a n d curved , pl a ce the h a n d a bove a n d i n fron t o f

the m o nt h , b ack to w ard the fa ce , an d p ass i t down w ard an d b a ck w ard
severa l ti m e s ( S ho shoni an d Bana k I ) S heep , an d to e a t
. . .

Ute .

They w ho live on m oun tain s h a ve a com plic a ted sign wh ich den otes ,

livin g in m ou n t a i n s an d is co m posed of the si gn s S i t an d lil o n n t

a in .
( B a r to n )
L eft h a n d h orizo n t al , at p al m dow n w ard an d with the n gers
, , of

th e righ t h a n d bru sh t h e other tow ard the wrist ( Da ko ta I II ) . .

Pl a ce
the a t a n d exten ded left h and at the height of the elbo w before
the body, poin tin g to the front an d right , p al m tow ard the g round ; then
 3 07

p a s s the p al m ar sur f a ce o f the at a nd exten ded n ge rs o f the righ t

h a n d over the b ack of the left fro m ne ar the wrist tow ard the tips of
the n gers ( Kai o wa I ; Co m a nche III ; Ap a ch e I I ; Wichi ta I I ) Tho se
. .

w ho use sinew for sew in g an d for stren gthen in g the b o w

,
.

In dic ate th e color B l a c k then sep ar a te the thu m bs an d f o re n g e r s

,

of b oth h a n ds as f ar as possible le a vin g the re m ai n i n g n gers closed ,

,

a n d p a ss up w a rd over the lower p a rt of the legs ( S ho sho ni a n d B a nak .

I ) B l ac k o r d ark leggin g s
. .

W arm S p r in g A p a ch e .

H a nd curved ( Y , m ore exed )

l a i d o n it s b ac k o n t o p of the foot
an d

( m o cca si ns m a ch ca r ved ap a t to e) ; then dr a w h a n ds up legs t o ne ar

k nee a n d cut o ff with edges of h a n ds ( bo o t top s)
,
A
( p a c h e I II )

Those . .

w h o we ar booted m occa sin s w ith turn u p toes

.

W a si a
j . S ee o sa ge .

W h i te m an ; Am er i ca n . Se e V O C AB UL A R Y .

i ch i ta
T
.

In dic ate a circle over the upper portion of the righ t ch e ck wi th the ,

in dex or sever al n gers of the ri gh t h a n d The st ate m ent of the In di a n .

a uthori ties for the a b ove i s th a t ye ars a g o the W ichit a wo m e n p a i n ted

S pir a l li nes on the bre a sts st artin g at the nipple a n d exten d in g sever a l
,

in ches fro m it ; bu t a fter an in cr e a se in m odesty or a ch an ge i n the upper

g ar m ent by which the bre a st ce ased to be exposed the ch eck h as been
, ,

a dopted as the loc a lity for the sign ( Ka io wa I ; Co m anch e I II ; Ap ach e

.

I I ; Wich ita I I ) .

W yan do t .

Pa ss
the a t right h a n d fro m the top o f the forehe a d b a ck w a rd over
the he a d an d do wn w ard and b a ck w ar d as f ar as the length o f the ar m .

W
( y a n do t I )

Fro m the m
. a nner of we a ri n g the h a ir
.
PR O PE R N A M E S PH R A SE S , ,

DI A L O GU E S E T C , .

PR O PE R N AM E S .

P r e si d e n t o f th e U n i te d S ta t e s ; S e cr e ta r y o f th e I n
t e r io r .

Close the ri ght h a nd le a v in g th e th u m b an d i ndex fully exten ded

,

an d sep ar a ted ; p l a ce the i ndex over the forehe a d so th at the thu m b

poin ts to the right , p a l m to w ard the face ; then dra w the in dex across .

the forehe a d tow a rd the right ; then elev a te the exten ded i ndex , poin t
in g up w a rd before the shoulder or nec k ; p a ss i t up w a rd a s hi gh as
the t o p of the he a d ; m ak e a short turn tow a rd the fron t an d p a ss it
poin tin g down w a rd tow ard the ground to a poi n t farther to th e fron t
,

a n d a l i t t l e l o we r th a n a t the begi n n in g ( A bsar oka I ; Da ko ta V I , V I I ;

.

S h osh on i a n d B ana k I ; Ute I ; Ap a ch e I ) W hite [ m an ] ch ief

. .

M a ke the s a m e sign s for W h i t e m a n an d C h i e f , an d concl ude

by m ak in g th a t for P a r e n t by collectin g the n gers an d th u m b of
the right h a n d ne arly to a poin t a nd dr a win g the m forw ard fr o m the
left bre a st ( Kaio w a I ; Co manche III ; Ap ache II ; Wi chi ta II ) Wh ite
. .

m an ; chief ; fa ther .

W a sh i n g t o n , C i ty o f .

The sig n for G o the sig n for H o u se o r W i g w a m ; the sign f o r

C a r s, an d the si gn for C o u n c i l The sign for F a t h e r is briey
.

executed by p a ssin g the open h a n d do wn an d fro m the loin s then brin g ,

i n g i t erect before the body then the si gn for C a r s co m bined of G o ,

an d W a g o n m a ki n g wi th the m outh the n oise o f a n en gine ; the

,

h an ds then ra ised b efore the eyes an d a pproxi m ate d at poi n ts , a s in the

si gn f o r H o u se ; then di verge to i n dic ate E x t e n si v e ; thi s bein g
follow ed by the si gn for C o u n c i l ( O to and M isso a r i I ) The h om e
. .

o f our fa thers , w here we go o the pu n g w gon to coun cil

n f a .

M i sso ur i Ri v e r .

M ak e the si gn for W a t e r an d the sign for L a r g e , and the n r apidly

rota te the righ t h a n d fro m right to left sever al ti m es , its b a ck up w a rd ,
n gers spre a d an d poin tin g for w a rd t o sho w th at it is stirred up or m uddy .

( Da ko ta I V ) .

308
 3 09

Ea g l e B u l l ( a Dak ot a chief) .

Pl a ce the clin ched sts to either side of the he a d ; then exten d the
left h a nd a t p a l m down be f ore the left side n gers poin tin g forw ard ;
, , , ,

the outer edge of the at an d extended right h a n d i s then l a i d tr a n s

v e r se l y across the b a ck of th e left h a nd , an d slid forw ard over the n g ers .

( D a ko t a V I ; A r ika r a I )

B ull a n d e a.gle
H a lia eta s lea co eep ha l a s
'

( L ina ) S an .

R u sh i n g B e a r ( a Dak ot a chief ) .

Pl a ce the right st in fro n t of the right side o f the bre a st, p a l m do w n

exten d an d curve the th u m b and little n ger so th a t their tip s p oi n t
to w ard o n e a n other before the k n uc k les o f the re m ainin g closed n ger s,
then re a ch forw ard a sh ort dista n ce a n d p ull tow ard the body sever a l
ti m es r a ther q uic k ly ; suddenly p ush the st , i n this for m for w ard to ,

a r m s len gth tw ice

( Da ko ta V I ; A r ika r a I )
.

B e a r a n d rushin g
. .

S p o tt e d T ail ( a Dak ot a chief ) .

With the i ndex only o f the right h an d extended i n dic a te a li ne o r ,

curve fro m the s a cr um ( or fro m the right buttock ) dow n w ard b ack w ard , ,

an d outw a rd tow ard the left ; then extend the left foren ger poi ntin g ,

forw a rd fro m the left side an d w ith the exten ded in dex dr a w i m a gin ary
,

lin es tr an sversely a cross the left foren ger ( A bsar o ka I ; S hosho ni I ; .

D t
a ko a V I V I,
I ; A r i ka r a

T a il ; spotted
'

Stuln b lin g B ear ( a K aio w a chief ) .

Pl a ce the right st in fron t of the right side of the bre a st , p al m dow n ;

exten d a n d cur ve th e thu m b a nd li ttle n ger so th at thei r ti ps poin t
to w ard o n e an other before the k n uck les of the re m a ini n g cl osed ngers ;
the n pl ace the left at h an d edgewi se before the bre ast , poin tin g to the
ri ght ; h ol d t h e right h an d at p oin ting dow n n e arer t he body ; m ov e
i t for w ard tow ard the left so th a t the ri ght h a n d n ger s stri k e the left
,
-

p al m an d fa ll down w ard beyon d the left ( K a to wa I ) Be ar ; stu m ble . .

o r stu m blin g

.

S wi f t R un ner ( a Dak ot a In di a n ) .

Pl a ce th e right h a n d in front o f the right side , p al m down ; close all

the n gers exceptin g the i ndex , w hich i s sli ghtl y cur ved poin tin g for ,

w ard ; then p us h the h an d for w ard to ar m s len gth tw ice , very quic k ly
.

( Da ko ta V I ; A r i kar a I ) M an run n i n g r a pid l y o r swiftly

. .

W i l d H o r se ( a C o m a n che chief) .

P l a ce the extended an d sep ar a ted i n dex an d second ngers o f the

righ t h a nd astr a ddle the exten ded foren ger o f the left h a n d W ith .

the ri ght h a n d loosely exten ded held a s h ig h as an d ne arly at ar m s

,

len g th before the shoulder m ak e sever al cuts down w ard an d tow ard the
,

left ( Co ma n che III ) Prairie or w ild horse

. . .
 310

PH R ASE S .

W h ere is yo ur m o th e r 2
A fter pl a cin g the in d ex in to the m ou th ( mo ther ) poin t the index at ,
.

the indiv idu a l a d d ressed ( yo ur ) ; then sep a r a te an d exten d the i ndex a n d

secon d n ger s o f the righ t h a n d ; h old the m p oi n tin g forw ard , a bout ,

twel ve o r fteen i n ches before the fa ce a n d m ove the m fro m side to side , ,

eyes follow in g the s a m e direction ( I see ) ; then throw the at ri ght h a n d

i n a short curve o u tw a rd to th e ri gh t un til the b a c k points tow a rd the
groun d ( no t) a nd loo k i n quirin gly a t the in di vidu a l a ddressed ( Ute I )
,
. .

M other your I se e n ot ; w here is sh e ?

A r e yo u b r a ve "
Poi n t to the person an d m ak e sign for B r a v e , a t s am e ti m e loo k in g
with an in quirin g expression ( A bsa r o ka I ; S hosh oni a n d Bana k I )
. .

B i so n , I h a v e sh o t . a .

M ove the open left h a n d ( p al m t o the fron t ) tow a rd the left a n d a w a y

fro m the b ody slowly ( m otion o f th e bu ff alo when ch a sed ) M ove right .

h a n d on wrist a s a xis r a pidly ( ma n on pon y ch asin g buffa lo ) then ex

,

ten d left h a n d to the left dr aw ri gh t ar m a s i f d ra w in g a b o w sn a p the

, ,

foren ger a n d m idd l e n ger of left h a n d an d thrust the ri ght foren ger ,

over the left h and ( O ma ha .

Yo u g a ve u s m an y c l o t h e s, b u t w e don
t wa n t th e m .

L ean forw ard an d hold in g the h a n ds con c a vo con vex , dr a w the m up

, ,
-

over the li m bs seve ra lly then cross on the chest as wr appi n g a bl a n k et

,
.

The ar m s a r e then exten ded before the body w ith the h a nds in type ,

position ( W ) to a hei gh t i n dic a tin g a l arge pile The righ t h an d then

,
.

sweeps outw a rd sh ow in g a n ega tive state of m i nd The in dex of ri gh t

,
.

h an d n a lly touches th e chest of th e secon d p arty an d a ppro a ches the

body i n posi tion ( I ) horizon t a l ( O to a nd M isso ur i I ) S o m eth ing to
, ,
.
.
.

put o n th at I don t w an t fro m y o u

.

Q u e st i o n .

H old the extended an d atten ed righ t h an d p a l m forw a rd a t the , ,

heigh t o f the shoulder or fa ce an d a bout fteen in ches fro m i t sh ak in g , ,

the h a n d fro m si de to side ( at the wrist ) as the ar m is sl ightly r aised ,

re se m blin g th e ou tline o f an in terrog ation m a rk m a de fro m bel o w
up w ard ( A bsa r o ka I ; Dako ta V , VI VII ; H ida tsa I ; K ai o wa I ; A r i
.
,

ka r a I ; C o m a n ch e I I III ; Pa i Ute I ; S h osh o ni a n d B a n a k I ; Ute I ;

,

Ap ach e I II ; Wi chi ta I I )
,
.

Wh a t ? W h a t i s i t ?
"

First a ttr a ct the person s n otice by the si gn for A tt e n t i o n

, an d

then the right h an d n gers e xtended pointin g forw ard o r outw ard
-

, , ,
n
 31 1

gers j oi ned & c , horizont al i s c arrie d outw ard , obli quely in fron t of the
,
.
,

right bre a st an d there turned p arti ally ov er an d u nder sever al ti m es

,
.

( Dako ta I ) .

W h a t are y o u doin g ? Wh at do y o u w an t ?
Throw the ri gh t h an d about a foot fro m right to left sever a l ti m e s ,

describin g a n ar c upw ard p a l m i n w ard n gers slightly bent an d sep ar

, ,

a ted a n d poin tin g forw ard

, ( Da ko ta I V ) . .

W h at ar e you ? i e Wh at tribe do y o u belon g to ?

. .
,

S h ak e the uprigh t opened ri ght h a nd four to eight in che s fro m side

t o side a few ti m es fro m twelve to eighteen in ches in fron t o f the chin
, ,

the p al m for w ard n gers rel a xed a nd a little sep ar ated ( Da ko ta IV )

,
. .

Pl a ce the at ri gh t h an d at so m e dist a nce i n fron t o f an d as hi gh as

t h e sh oulder p a l m forw a rd an d down w ard , then sh ak e the h a n d fro m
,

side to side p a ssin g i t sli ght 1y for w ard an d up w ard at the s am e ti m e

,
-
.

( Da ko ta VII ) .

Pa ss the righ t h a nd fro m left to ri ght a cross the fa ce .

( Ka ti ne I ) .

Wh a t do y o u w a nt ?
The ar m is dr a w n to fron t of chest an d the h an d in position ( N 1 )
'

m odi ed by p al m s bein g down w ard an d h an d h orizont a l Fro m the .

chest cen ter the h a n d is th en p a ssed spir ally forw ard tow ard the o n e
a ddressed ; the h a n d s p a l m begi n s the spir a l m otion w ith a dow n w ard

an d en ds i n a n up w ard a spect ( O to I ) To un win d or open

. . .

Wh o ar e y o u ? or wh a t is your n am e ? ,

The ri gh t or left h an d approxi m a tes close to center of th e body ; the

ar m i s exed an d h a n d in position or a little m ore closed Fro m .

i nception of sign ne a r center of body the h a n d slowly describes the ar c

o f a q u a dr a nt a n d n gers u nfold a s the h a n d recedes
,
W e thi n k the .

proper intention is for the i nception of si gn to be loc ated a t the

,

he art b ut i t i s seldo m truly a n ato m ic ally thus loc a ted ( O to I ) To

, ,
. .

unfold on e s self o r m ak e k nown

.

you through ?
Are
With ar m s h an gin g at the side an d fore ar m s hori zon t al pl a ce the sts ,

n e ar e ach other in front of body ; then with a quick m otion sep ar ate
the m as th ough bre ak i n g so m ethin g a sun der ( Sa h ap ti n I ) . .

Do y o u k now ?
S h ak e the right h an d in fr ont o f the fa ce a l ittl e t o the right , the ,

w hole ar m elev a ted so as to thro w the h a n d even with the face and the ,

fore ar m standi ng al m o st perpendicul a r Prin cip al m otion with h a n d .

,

sli ght m otion of fore ar m , p al m o u t ( Sa hap tin I ) . .

 31 2

H o w f ar is i t ?
S ign for Do y o u k n o w "follo wed with a precise m ove m en t thro w
i n g right h an d ( p al m to w ard fa ce ) t o a position as f ar fro m body as
con venien t , si g nifying fa r t ; the n w i th the s a m e q uick precise m o ,
.

tion bri ng the h a n d to a p o sitio n ne a r the facen e a r ? ( Sa hap tin I )

, .

you g o horseb a c k o r i n w a gon ?

H o w w il l
First m a k e the si gn ter Do y o u k n o w "then throw righ t h a n d
for w a rd go or then thro w fore a n d m idd l e n gers of righ t
a stride the foren ger o f the left h a nd si gnifyin g
wi l l y o u , ,

the n swin g the f o re ng e r s of e a c h h a n d aroun d e a ch other si gn of whee l ,

r un n in g si gn ifying o r will y o u go i n w ag o n ?
, , ( Sa hap ti a I ) -
.

DI AL O GUE S, E T C .

The followi n g con vers a tion too k pl a ce a t Wa sh in gton in A pril , 1 880, ,

between T E ND O Y , chief of the S hosh on i a nd Ba n ak In di a n s of Id aho an d ,

H U E R I T O o ne of t h e A p a che ch iefs fro m N e w M exico , in the presen ce

,

of Dr W J H o ff m a n N either of these In di a n s spo k e any l a n gu a ge

. . . .

k no wn to the other , or h ad ever m e t or he ard of o n e a n other before th a t

occ a sion '

HUE R IT o .
W h o are yo u 2
P l a ce the a t an d exten ded righ t h an d p al m for w ard , about t wel ve ,

in ches i n fron t of a n d a s hi gh a s the shoulder , then sh a k e the h a n d

fro m side to side as it is m oved for w ard an d up w ardquesti on, w ho
are o u 9
y .

T E N Do v S h o sh o n i
. ch ie f .

Pl a ce the closed ri ght h an d n e ar the ri gh t hip le a vi ng the i ndex ,

only exten ded p al m down ; then p a ss th e h a n d tow ard the fron t a nd

,

left rot ati n g the h a n d fro m side to side S hosho ni ; then pl a ce the
,

clo sed h an d w ith the i ndex exten ded a nd poin tin g upw ard , ne ar the
,

ri ght cheek p a ss it upw a rd as hi gh as the he a d , then tur n i t for w ard

,

an d do w n w a rd tow a rd the groun d , ter m i n a tin g w ith the m ove m en t a

little below the initi al poin t chi ef .

HUE R I T O H o w . o ld are yo u "

C li nch both h a n ds an d cross the fore ar m s before the bre ast w i th a
tre m bli n g m otion co ld win ter s, yea r s th e n elev a te the left h a nd as ,

high as the n ec k an d a bout twel ve o r fteen i n ches before it , p a l m to

w ard the face wi th n gers exten ded an d poi n tin g up w a rd ; then , w ith
,

the i ndex turn dow n o n e n ger a fter an other slo wly begin n i n g a t the
, ,

little n ger , un til three or four ar e fol ded a ga in st the p a l m a n d loo k in ,

q u ir in l
g y a t the person a ddressed ho w m a ny .
 3 13

T E NDo v .
F i y -
si x .

Close an d extend the n gers a n d thu m bs o f both h a nd s with the ,

p al m s forw a rd ve ti m esf ty then extend the n gers an d th u m b o f

,

the left h a nd close the ri gh t a n d pl a ce the extended th u m b a lon gside

, ,

o f a n d ne a r t h e left thu m b si r .

H UE R r ro '
.
V e r y we l l . Are th e r e a n y b uff a l o in yo ur
co u n tr y "
Pl a ce the at right h a nd pointin g to th e left w ith the p al m down ;
, ,

a g a in st the bre a st bone ; t hen i nov e i t for w a rd a nd sli ghtl y to th e righ t

-

a n d i n a curve upw a rd ; m a k e the gesture r a ther slowly a n d n e a rly to

a r m s len gth ( otherw ise i e i f m a de h astily a n d b u t a short di st a n ce

. .
, , ,

i t w ould only m e a n mo m very g o o d ; pl a ce both closed h a nds t o their

respecti ve sides of the he a d p a l m s tow a r d th e h a ir l e a vin g the f o r e n
, ,

gers curved b a a lo t h en re a ch o u t the st to a r m s len gth tow a rd t h e

west a n d thro w i t forcibly to w a rd the groun d for a dist a nce of a bou t

,

six i nches edge d ow n w a rd co un tr y a w a y t o t h e w est

, then poin t the ,

curved index r a ther q uic k ly a nd c arelessly tow a rd the person ad

dressed y o ur .

T E N Do v Ye s ; m a n y b l a c k b u f f a l o
. .

P a ss th e cl osed right h a n d , w i th the index p artly exed to posi ,

a

ti o n about ei ght inches before the right coll a r bon e an d a s the h a nd -

, ,
.

re a ches th at e l ev a tion , q uic k ly close the i ndexy es then m ak e the

s a m e si gn as in the precedi n g question for buff a l o tou ch the h air o n
the right side of the he a d w ith the p al m s of the exten ded n gers o f
the righ t h a nd bl ack ; spre ad the c urved n gers an d th u m b o f both <

h a n ds pl a ce the m before ei ther thigh poi n t in g dow n w a rd ; then dr a w

, ,
-

the m tow ard o n e a n other an d upw ard as hi gh as the sto m a ch so th a t ,

th e n gers will poin t tow a rd o ne a nother or m ay be in terl a ced ma ny ,

.

T END O Y
Di d .
yo u h ear an y th i n g f ro m th e S e cr e ta r y "
If so , tel l m e .

Close the ri gh t h a n d l e a vin g t h e in dex an d thu m b w idely sep a r a ted ;

,

p ass i t by the e ar fro m t h e b a c k o f th e e ar down w ard an d tow ard th e

chi n p al m tow a rd the he ad hea r poi n t to t h e i ndividu a l a ddressed
,

y o w ; close th e h a n d a g ain le a vin g th e i ndex a n d thu m b sep a r a ted

.
,

as i n the si gn for H e a r an d pl a ci n g the p a l m a r surfa ce o f th e n ger

h orizon tally a cross the forehe ad poin tin g to the left, a llow the th u m b ,

to rest a g a in st the righ t te m pl e ; then dr a w the in dex a cross the fore

he a d fro m left to righ t le a vin g the th u m b touchi n g t he he a d whi te
,

m an th en pl a ce the closed h a nd with elev a ted i ndex before the ri gh t , ,

si de of the n ec k or in fron t o f the top o f the shoul der ; p ass the in

dex poin ti n g u p w ard , a s hi gh a s the top of the he a d turn it forw a rd
a n d dow n w a rd a s f a r a s t h e bre a stchi ef
,

p a ss th e exten ded i ndex , ,

poi ntin g up w a rd a nd forw a rd forw a rd fro m the m outh twice ta lk ,

40
 3 14

then open an d a tten the h an d , p al m up , o u ter edge tow ard the fa ce ,

p l a ce i t abou t fteen inch es i n front o f the chin an d dr a w i t horizont ally ,

i n w a rd u ntil the h a n d n e a rl y tou ches t h e n eck te l l m e .

H u m an e l i e to l d [ h e th at in f our d a ys I w o u l d go to
m v co u n tr y .

C l ose the right h a nd le a v in g the i ndex c urved ; p la ce it abo u t six

,

in ches fro m the e ar an d m ove i t in to w ard the extern al m e a t u s

t o ld m e w ith the ri gh t h a n d stil l closed , for m a circle w ith the in dex
a n d th u m b by allowin g their tips to to u ch ; p a ss the h a n d fro m e a st

t o we st a t a r m s l en gth day ; pl ace the left h a n d before the bre a st ,

-

the n gers exten ded an d the t h u m b restin g a g ain st th e p al m b ack

, ,

forw a rd a nd w ith th e i n dex , t u rn down on e n ger a fter a n oth er

, , ,

be g in nin g a t t h e l ittle n g e r o n ? to uch the bre a st w ith the tips o f

the n ger an d t h u m b o f the l eft h a nd collected t o a poin t ; drop the

h a nd a shor t di st a n ce a n d m ove it for w a rd to a r m s len gth an d slightly

u p w ard u n til i t p oin ts a bove the h orizon I g o to ; then a s the a r m is

"
, ,

extended throw the st edgewise to w ard t h e g ro u n d my co u ntr y

,
.

T E N DO Y I n . tw o d a y s I g o to m y co u n t r y j u st a s y o u
g o to y o u r s . I g o t o nn i n e w h ere th e r e is a g r e at
d e a l o f sn o w , an d w e sh a ll se e e a c h o th er n o nlore .

Pl a ce the at h an ds horizon t ally , a bo u t t w o feet a p art m ove the m

, ,

q u ickl y in an upw a rd c u rve to w a r d o n e a n other un til the right lies

a cross the l eft n ig h t ; repe a t this sign t wo n ig h ts ( liter al ly t wo sleep s ,

h ence ) ; poin t tow ard the indi v id u al a ddressed wi th the ri ght h a n d

y o n ; a nd i n a con ti n u o u s m ove m e n t p a ss t h e h a n d to the ri ght , 71 .

tow ard the so u th n ea rly to ar m s len gth go then throw the st ed ge

,

w ise tow ard the gro un d a t th a t dist a n ce yo ur co un tr ? then to u ch the /

bre a st w ith the ti p s o f the n gers o f the l eft h a n d I ; m ove the h an d

o h s l owly tow ard th e l eft i t ow a rd the n orth , t o ar m s len gth g o

.
,

to " an d throw the clinched h a n d tow a rd the gro u n d m y co nn tm

'

then hold both h a nds tow ard the l eft as hi gh a s the h e ad , p al m s down ,
w ith n gers a nd th u m bs pen den t a n d sep a r ated ; m ove the m tow a rd
the gro u n d t wo or three ti m es r ai n ; then p l a ce the at h a nds hori
z o n t al l y t o the l eft of the body a bo u t tw o feet fro m the gro u n d
deep
l iter l ly d m i an d r a ise the m u n til a bo u t three feet fro m
( a ,
eep n ) sno w
the gro u ndvery deep mu ch pl a ce the h a n ds before the body abou t
twe l ve i nches a p art p al m s down , wi th f o r e n g e r s on ly exten ded a nd
,

p oin tin g tow ard o n e a nother ; p u sh the m tow a rd an d fro m on e a n ot h er

several ti m es sec each o ther then hol d the at ri ght h an d i n fron t of
the bre a st poin tin g for w ard , p al m to the left , an d thro w it over on it s
,

b ack to w ard the ri gh t no t n o m o r e ,

.

E XPL AN A T O R Y N o r m W here the a steris k s appe a r in the above d ia

l ogu e the p reposition to i s i ncl u ded in the g estu re A fter to u chi n g the .

bre a st for I , the sl o w m ove m en t forw ard sign ies going to , an d coun try
 3 15

i s signied by loca tin g i t a t ar m s len g th tow a rd the west to the l eft

,

o f the gest urer as the stoppin g pl a ce a l so p o ssessi o n by the clin ched

,
-

st bein g directed tow a rd the gro u n d It is the s a m e a s for m g o r m in e .

,

tho ug h m ade before the body i n the l a tter si gn s The directi on o f Ten .

doy s h a nd s rst to the so uth an d a fterw a rd to the north w as u n der

, ,

stood not as poi ntin g to the ex act loc a lity of the two p arts of the
co u n t r v b u t to the dier e nc e i n their respective cl i m a tes

.
,

PAT RI C I O S N ARRAT I V E

.

This n arr a tive w as obt ai ned in J uly 1880 by Dr F RAN C I S H A T K I N S , ,

. .
,

a ctin g a ssist a n t s urgeon , U n ited S t a tes A r m y , a t S o u th For k New .

M exico fro m T I P E B E S T L E L ( S heeps k i n leggin g s ) h a bi t u ally c alled

,
- - - -

P a tricio a n in telli gent yo un g M esc alero A p a ch e It g i ves a n acco u n t

,
.

of wh a t i s loc ally ter m ed the A pril Ro und u p w hich w a s the dis ar m

-

in g a n d i m pri soni n g by a c a v alry co m m a nd of the U ni ted S t a tes A r m y ,

o f the s m al l A p ac he s u btribe to w hich the n a rr a tor be l on ged The ref .

e r e nc e s to si g n s n o t descr i bed a r e to the co n trib u tion s of Dr A T K I NS .

,

m a r k ed i n the V O C A B U L AR Y ( Ap a ch e I II ) .

( 1 ) L eft h an d on ed ge , cu rved , p a l m for w a rd , exten ded b a c k w ar d

len gth o f a r m tow ard the W est ( f ar w estw a r d ) -

( 2 ) A r m s s a m e , t urn ed h a n d , tips down , a nd m o ved i t fro m n orth to

so u th ( r i ver ) .

( 3 ) Dipped s a m e h a nd sever al ti m es a bove a n d beyond l a st lin e ( be

yond ) .

( 4 ) H a n d c urved ( Y , m ore exed ) an d l a id on its b a ck o n top of hi s

foot ( m o ccas ins m a ch c a r ved up a t to e) then dre w h a n ds u p legs to n e ar
k n ee , an d c u ts o ff w ith edges of h a nds ( bo o t top s) ( l V a r m Sp r i ng .
'

Ap a ch es, w ho we ar booted m occa sin s w ith t u rn u p toes ) -

.

( 5 ) H a nds held before h i m tips n e a r together , n gers g a thered ( U )

,

then a ltern a tely opened a n d g a thered n gers of both h a nds ( P to U , U

to P ), and thr ustin g the m tow a rd e ach other a fe w ti m es ( sh o t or

ki l l ed m a ny ) .

H eld h a nds six in ches fro m side of he a d , th u m bs an d f o r e n g e r s

w idely sep ar a ted Mexi ca n , i e , wea r s a br o a d ha t )
. . .

( 7 ) H eld ri gh t h a nd o n edge , p al m tow a rd him , thre w i t o n it s b ac k ,

for w ard an d down w ard sh a r ply to w ard e a rth on ed ge to X) ( dea d , ,

so m a n y d ea d ) ;
( 8) Put th u m bs to te m ples an d i n dices forw a rd , m eetin g in front
other n g ers closed ( so ld ie r s, i e , cap viso r ) . .
-
.

( 9 ) Repe a ted No 5 a n d N o 7 ( w er e a lso sh o t d ea d )

. . .

( 1 0) Pl a ced r st a nd seco n d n gers o f right h a n d ( others closed )

a stride o f l eft i n dex , held horizon t a lly ( h o r ses) .

( 1 1 ) H eld h ands o n edge a n d forw ard ( T o n edge forw a rd ) , p u shed

the m forw a rd , w a vi ng vertic ally ( m a r chi ng , w h ich see ; al so , tr a vel o r
 316

g h t, i .
f
e , ran o
. w i th ) N
so l d i e r sB

U sin g bot h
h o r ses or o t h er s . . .

h an ds ind ic a tes do ub l e r a n k s of troops m a rch in g a lso .

( 1 2 ) S tr u c k right st a cross i n fron t of ch i n fro m righ t t o left sh ar p ly

( ba d ) .

( 1 3 ) Re p e a ted No 4 ( Wa r m Sp r i ng Ap a che)
. .

( 1 4 ) M oved st , th u m b to he ad , fro m cen ter of f orehe ad to ri ght t e m

p l e a nd a l ittle b a c k w a rd ( f oo l ) .

( 1 5 ) Repe a ted No 8 a nd No 1 1 ( so ld ier s r i d i ng in do u ble co lum n )

. . .

( 1 6 ) Thr ust righ t h a nd dow n over a nd beyon d left , both p a l m s do w n

( W ) ( ca m e h er e) .

( 1 7 ) Repe ated No 8 ( so ldi er ) . .

( 1 8) To u ched h a i r ( ha i r ) .

( 1 9 ) To u ched ten t ( q ui te w h i te ) .

( 2 0) To uched t o p of sho ulder ( co rmnissi o ned o icer , i e sh o u lder

. .
,

str ap s)

( 2 1 ) Thr ust both h a nd s up h igh ( h ig h r ank) .

( 2 2 ) Right fore nger to forehe a d ; w a ved i t a bo u t i n fron t of fa ce an d

ro l led he a d a bo u t ( pr i m a rily f o o l , b u t q u al ied i n this c ase by the i n ter
preter as n o sa be m u ch ) .

( 2 3 ) Drew h ands u p hi s thi gh s a n d body a n d poi n ted to h i m se l f

( M esca le r o I ndi a n , q .

( 2 4 ) A pproxi m ated h a n d s be fore h i m , p al m s down , w ith th um bs an d

indices w idely se p ar a te d , as if i nclosin g a c ir cl e ( cap t ur ed, i e , co r r a lled, . .

sur r o un de d ) .

( 2 5 ) Pl aced ti p s o f h a nd s together , wrists a p a rt , hel d the m erect

both h a nd s incli ned ) , ( h o use ; in thi s m m; the ag ency ) .

( 2 6 ) Threw both h a nds p al m s b ac k , for w a rd a n d dow n w ard , m ovin g

,

fro m k n u c k les ( m et a c a rpo ph al an ge al j oin t ) on ly , sever a l ti m es ( issuin g

-

r a t io ns) .

( 2 7 ) Thr u st two n gers ( N ) to w a rd m o uth an d d own w ard ( f oo d ) .

( 2 8) Repe a ted No 2 5 ( h o use ) ; ou tlined a he m ispheric a l obj ect ( w ick i

.
-

up ) ; repe a ted these sever a l ti m es , brin gin g the h a n ds with e m ph a sis

sev er al ti m es down tow ard the e ar th ( vi llag e p er m anen t ly h er e ) .

( 2 9 ) Repe a ted N o 2 5 severa l ti m es an d poi nted to a n eigh borin g

.

hillside ( p il lage o ve r t h er e ) .

( 30) Repe a ted N o s 1 7 to 2 1 , i ncl usi ve ( Ge ner a l X)

. .

( 3 1 ) Thr u st t wo n gers forw a rd fro m h is eyes ( p ri m arily I see ; al so

I saw , o r th er e w er e ) .

( 32 ) Repe a ted No 1 1 ( to wa r d sa id hillside ) , ( tr o op s w ent o ver th er e w i th

.

Ge ner a l X) .

( 33 ) Repe a ted No 4 , a ddi n g swep t i ndices a ro u n d he a d a n d to u ched

.

red p a per on a tob acco wr ap per ( Sa n C ar lo s Ap ach es, sco u t s especi a lly
di stin g u ished b y we a rin g a red llet a bo u t the he a d al so a dded , dre w
i ndices a cross e ach ch eck fro m n ose o u tw a rd ( w er e m uch p a i nted ) .

( 3 4 ) Repe a ted N o 2 4 a nd No 2 3 ( to cap tur e th e M esca ler o I n dia ns)

. . .

( 35 ) Repe ated N o 3 1 ( th er e w er e)
. .
 3 17

( 36 ) Repe a ted No 3 3 ( Sa n C a r lo s sco uts) . .

( 3 7 ) Rep e a ted No 8 ( a nd so ld iers) . .

( 3 8) C l a sped hi s h a nd s e usi vel y before hi s bre a st ( so many "i e, a

'

. .

g r ea t m a n y ) .

( 3 9 ) t e p e a t e d No 3 1 ( I sa w ) . .

( 40) Repe a ted No 2 ( m y p eop le) . .

( 4 1 ) Bro u ght sts together u nder chin , a n d h u gged h is a r m s close to

h i s bre a st w ith a shrin k in g m o t io n of body
,
-

( 4 2 ) S tr u c k o ff h a lf of left i nde x w ith right in dex ( h a lf , or a p o r ti o n ) .

( 4 3 ) Wa ved o l a ter a lly a n d u p w ard w ith bot h h a nds bris k ly ( ed )

'

( 4 4 ) Projected circ led ri g h t th u m b an d i ndex to e a stern horizon , thence

t o zeni th ( nex t mo r ni ng i e s u n ri se to n oon ) , . .
,
.

( 4 5 ) R e pe a te d N o 2 3 ( th e M esca le r os) . .

4
( ) 6 H eld h a n ds i n position of a i m in g a g u n left Obli q u e
( 4 7 ) Wa ved righ t i n dex bris k ly before ri ght sho ul der ( no , did n o t
n eg a t io n ) .

( 4 8) S wept hi s h an d fro m beh in d forw a rd , p al m up ( Y ) ( the o the r s

ca m e) .

( 4 9 ) Re p e a ted No ( a nd sh o t ) . 5 .

5 Rep e a ted No 2 3 ( t he M esca le r os) . .

5 Repe a ted No 7 ( m a ny d ea d ) . .

5 Repe a ted No 8 ( so ldie r s) . .

5 3 ) Repe a ted No 1 0 ( h o r se , m o u nte d ) . .

( 5 4 ) H a n d for w a rd , p a l m dow n ( W ) m oved forw ard and up an d dow n

( w a l king i e , i nf an t r y )
,
. . .

( 55 ) Beck on ed wi th ri g ht h a nd , t wo n gers c u rved ( N horizont al an d

c urved ) ( ca m e ) .

( 5 6 ) Repe a ted No . 11 ( m a r chi ng ) .

5 7 ) Repe a ted No . 28 ( to th is ca mp , o r vi l la g e ) .

Repe a ted No . 23 ( wi th lf esca l er os)

. .

Repe a ted N O . 24 ( as p r iso ner s, su r r o un ded ) .

Repe ated No . 33 ( Sa n C a r l o s sco uts) .

( 62
( 6 3 ) Repe a ted No 5 ( sh o t m a n y ) . .

( 6 4 ) Repe ated No 4 ( Wa r m Sp r i ng Ap a ch es)

. .

6 5 ) Repe a ted N o 2 3 ( a n d M esca l er os) . .

6 6 ) M oved st th u m bs to h e a d a cross his forehe a d fro m right to

(
l eft , an d c a st i t tow a rd e a rth over l eft sho ul der ( br a r e, i e -

. .
,
th e Sa n C ar
l o s sco u ts a r e br a ce ) .

C ON T I N U O U S T RAN S L A T I O N O F T HE AB O V E .

Far westw a rd bey on d the R io Gr a n de are the W ar m S prin g A p aches

who k i l led m a ny M exic an s an d soldiers an d stole the ir horses They .

( the U n ited S t a tes sol diers ) ar e b ad an d fo ols

'

.
 3l8

S om e c a v alry c a m e here u nder a n a g ed ofcer of hi gh r a n k , b u t o f

i n ferior i ntelli gen ce to c apt ure the M esc al ero I n di a n s
,
.

The M esca leros wi shed to h a ve their vill a ge per m a nen tly h ere by th e
a gen cy a n d to recei ve their r a t io n s i e
,
were pe a cefu lly in cl ined ,
. .
,
.

O u r vill a g e w as over there I sa w the gen er al co m e with troo p s an d

.

S an C a rlos sco ut s to s u rro u n d ( or c a p tu re ) the M esc a lero Indi a n s There

-
.

were a gre a t m any S a n C a r l os sco u ts a nd soldi ers .

I sa w th a t m y peopl e w ere a fr a id and h a lf o f th e m e d ,

.

Next m orni ng the M e sc a leros did n ot shoot ( were n ot hostile ) The .

othe r s c a m e an d k i lled m a ny M esc a l eros The c a v alry an d i nfa n t ry .

bro u gh t u s ( the M esc a leros ) to t h i s c a m p a s pri son er s .

The Sa n C a rlos sco u ts were wel l s u p plied w i th a m m u n i tion a n d g u n s ,

an d shot m any Wa r m S prin g Indi a n s a n d M esc a l eros .

The S an C ar l os sco u ts ar e br a ve m e n .

T SO DIAK O S R E PO RT

.

The follo win g sta te m en t w a s m ade to Dr W J H offm a n by T S O DI AK O . . .

( Sha r ed hea d B o y ) chief o f the Wichit a s in In di a n Territory w hile o n

, ,

a visit to W a shin gton D C in J u n e 1 880

,
. . , ,
.

The Indi a n bein g ask ed whether there w as a n y ti m ber in hi s p a rt o f

th e Territory replied i n si g n s a s follows :
,

( 1 ) M ove t h e righ t h an d n gers l oose l y extended sep ar a ted an d

, ,

poin tin g u pw ard b ack to the fron t u pw ard fro m the heigh t o f t h e w ai st
, ,

to the fron t o f the fa ce tr ee ; repe a t this two o r three ti m es tr ees ( 2 )

then ho l d t h e h a nd n gers exten ded a nd j oi ned poin tin g u p w a rd w ith
, , ,

the b a c k to the front an d p u sh i t for w ard tow a rd di ff ere n t poin ts on a

,

level with the fa ce sta ndi ng a t i a r i o us p l a ces ; ( 3 ) both h a nd s w ith v

,

sp re ad a nd slight l y c urved n gers ar e hel d a bo u t two feet ap art , before ,

the thi gh s p a l m s fa cing then dr a w th e m tow a rd on e a n oth er h ori zon

, ,

t ally a n d gr a d ually u p w a rd u n til the w rists cro ss a s if gr a spi n g a ,

b u nch of gr ass an d p u llin g i t l i p m a ny ; ( 4 ) poi n t to the so uth west

w i th the i n dex , ele v a ti n g i t a little a bove the h orizon co u n t r y ; ( 5 )
then throw the st edgewise to w ard the s u rfa ce i n th a t direction ,

m y m i n e ; ( 6 ) pl a ce both h a nd s ext en ded a t ed g ewi se before the

, ,
-

, ,

body the left belo w the righ t an d both ed ges poin tin g tow ard the
, ,

gro u nd a short dista n ce t o the le f t of the body the n m ak e repe a ted ,

c u ts tow ard th a t direction fro m di ff eren t poi n ts the ter m i n a ti on o f e ach ,

c u t en d in g a t n e a rly the s a m e poi n t c ut do wn ( 7 ) ho l d the left h a n d

w ith the ngers a n d th u m b collected to a poi n t d irected h orizon t al ly ,

forw ard a nd m ak e sever a l c u ttin g m otion s w ith the edge of the a t

righ t h a n d tr a n sversely by the tips o f the left , an d u p on the w ris tcut
,

of t he e n ds ; ( 8) then c u t u pon the left h a nd , still held i n the s a m e posi

tion w ith the ri gh t the c u ts bein g p ar allel to the lon git u din al a xi s o f
, ,

the p a h nsp li t ( 9 ) both h a n ds c l osed i n fron t of the body , abo u t fou r

i nches a p a rt w i th f o re ng e r s an d th u m bs ap p roxi m a ti n g h alf circl es ,
,
 3 19

p al m s to w a rd the gro u nd m ove the m forw ard so th a t the b ack o f t h e ,

h an d co m e s for w ard an d the h alf circles i m it ate the m ove m en t of

w heel s w a g on ( 1 0) h old the left at h a n d before the body poin tin g ,

horizont all y forw ard w ith the p al m down th e n bri n g the righ t at
, .
,

h a n d fro m the ri g ht side an d sl ap the p al m u pon the b ack o f the left

several ti m e s l oa d up o n ( 1 1 ) p artly close the ri ght h a nd a s if gr asp
i n g a thic k rod p a l m tow a rd the gro u nd an d p ush i t str a i ght forw a rd
, ,

n e arly to ar m s len gth ta ke ( 1 2 ) hold both h a nds w ith n gers n a tu r a lly

exte n ded an d sl ightly sep a r a ted n e a rly at a r m s l en gth before the body ,

p a l m s down the righ t lyin g u pon the left then p a ss the u pper forw a rd
, ,

an d down w a rd fro m the left q u ic k ly so th a t the wrist o f th e ri ght is ,

r aised an d the n gers poi n t e a rth w ard thr o w of ; ( 1 3 ) cu t the left

p al m repe a tedly wi th the o u ter ed ge of the exten ded right h a nd bui ld
( 1 4 ) ho l d both h a nds edge wise before the body p a l m s fa ci n g , spre a d ,

t h e n gers a n d pl ace those of on e h a n d in to the sp a ces between those

o f the left so th a t the tips of o n e protr u de beyond t h e b a ck s of the
,

n gers of the other l o g ho use ; ( 1 5 ) then pl ace th e a t righ t h an d ,

p a l m down an d ngers poi ntin g to the left a g a i n st th e bre a st a n d m ove ,

i t forw a rd an d s l ightly u p w ard a n d to th e righ tgo o d

,
.

AN A L YS I S O F T HE F O RE GO IN G .

[ There is] m u ch I ti m1 ber I[ in ] co u ntry I [ o f w hich I ] c ut down

my
(3) 2 ( , ) ( 5) ( 4) (6)

[ so m e ] , I tri m7 m ed , I split
8
,
l o a ded i t u pon I[ a ] w a gon [ a n d ] I too k i t
( ) < ) ( 1 0) ( 9) ( 11 )
w a y I [ where I ] th rew [ it ] | [ an d ] b u1 il3 t [ a ] good I ho u se
'

a ,
cd
12 ( ) < ) 15 14
< ) ( )

N O T E s A s will . be seen the word

i s co m posed of si gn s No , tiln b er .

1 a n d 2 , signifyin g t r e e s s t a n d i n S i g n No 3 , for m a n y i n th is

O
. .
,

in st an ce as i n si m il ar o t her ex a m ple s beco m e s n u l e h The word i n ,

, , .

i n conn ection w ith c o u n t r y a n d n l y is expressed by the gest ure o f ,

pointin g ( p assin g the h a n d less q u ic k ly th n i n ord in ary si g n l a n gu a ge ) a

,

before m ak in g si g n No 5 Th a t si gn co m m only g i ve n for p o sse ss i o n

. .
, ,

w o uld w itho u t the pre x o f i ndic a tion i m ply u l y c o u n t r y , a nd with

, ,

th a t prex si gn ies i n m y c o u n t r y S ign No 7 t r i m m e d i s in . .

, ,

d icat e d by choppin g o ff the ends an d fa ci a l ex p ression den oti n g sa t i s ,

f a ct io n I n sign Nos 1 1 an d 1 2 th e gest u res were co n tin uo u s b u t at

. .
, ,

the ter m i n ation of the l atter the n arr ator str ai ghten ed hi m self so m e
wh at , den otin g th a t he h ad overco m e the gre a ter p a rt o f the l a bor .

S ign No 1 4 , den otes l o g h o u se fro m the m a n ner of i n terl a ci n g t h e

.
-

n g e r ends th u s repre sentin g t h e corn er of a l o g ho u se a n d the ar

-

,
-

ra n ge m e n t of the en ds of the s a m e I n d i a n l o d g e wo uld be indi .

ca t e d b y a n other si gn , a ltho u gh the l a tter is often u sed a s an a bbre vi a

tion for the for m er w hen the s u bj ect of con vers a tion is k now n to al l
,

present .
 SI GN A L S .

The co ll abor ators in the presen t wor k h a ve n ot ge n er ally respon ded to

the req uest to co m m u n ic a te m ateria l u nder th i s he ad It is how ever .
, ,

hoped th at by n o w prin tin g so m e extr a cts fro m p u blished wor k s a n d

the few un p u blished st a te m ents recen tly proc ured the a t ten ti on of o h ,

servers wil l b e directed to the further prosec u tion o f rese arch in thi s
direction .

The ter m si gn al is here used in d i stin ction fro m the sign s n oted in the
V O C A B U L ARY as bein g so m e a ction o r m a n ifest a tion i nten ded to be
,

seen at a di sta nce , and n ot a llowin g of the m in u te ness or det a i l possible -

i n close con verse S ign al s m ay be exec uted rst excl u sively by bodily
.
, ,

a ction ; second , by a ction of the person i n connection with obj ects s u ch ,

a s a bl an k et o r a l a nce or i n the directio n i m p a rted to a horse ; th ird

, , ,

by v a rio u s dev ices s uch a s s m o k e o r re a rro w s w he n the person of th e

,
-

sign alist is n ot v i sible They are al m o st en tir e ly con ven ti on a l a n d

.
,

while their st udy h a s n ot th e sa m e k i nd of i m port a nce as th a t of gest

u r e si gns i t possesses so m e pec u li a r i n terest
-

,
.

S IGN AL S E XE C UT ED B Y BO Dl L YAC T I O N .

So m e
of these will prob a bly be fo u nd to be iden tic al ,
or ne arly so w ith,

the g est ure sig ns u sed by t h e s a m e peop l e

-
.

A la r m . Se e n otes on C heyen ne an d A r ap a ho si g n a ls .

Anger .

lose t h e h a nd p l ace it a ga i n s t the forehe a d , an d t urn it b ac k a n d

C ,

forth w hile i n th a t position ( Thi r ty Y e a r s of A r nr

ii ij e o n th e B o r der .

by C o l R B M arcy U S A p 3 4 Ne w Yor k
. . .
,
. . .
,
.
, ,

C o m e h ere .

The righ t h a nd is to be a d v anced a bo u t eig hteen in ches a t the h eight

of the n a vel horizon t a l rel a xed p al m dow n w ard th u m b in t h e p al m ;
, , , ,

the n dra w it ne ar the side a nd a t th e s a m e ti m e drop the h a nd to brin g

the p al m b a c k w a rd The fa rther a w ay t h e person c a lled i s the higher
.
,

the h a nd i s r a ised If very f a r o ff , the h a n d is r ai sed hi gh u p over the

.

he ad an d then sw u n g forw ard an d down w ard then b a c k w ard a n d dow n ,

w ard t o the side ( Da k ta IV ) .

o .

Da n g e r .
( There i s so m ethi n g d a n gero us in th at pl a ce ) .

Ri gh t -
h aud i ndex ng e r a n d th u m b for m in g a c u rve , the other n gers
-
 32 1

closed ; m ove the righ t h a n d for w ard , poi n ti n g in the d irection of the
d an gerou s pl a ce o r a ni m a l ( O ma h a I ) . .

De a n c e .

Right h an d index a n d m i ddle n gers Open ; m oti on tow a rd t h e en e m y

-
.

I do n ot fe a r y o u Reverse the m oti on brin gin g the h a n d tow a rd the

.
,
.

s ubj ect Do your worst to m e

.
( O m a ha I ) .

.

Dir e ctio n roun d th a t obj ect or pl a ce ne ar yo u she i h e ti

. Pa ss a - -

d 11 11 g a .

Then a m a n is a t a di st a n ce I say t o h im G o a roun d th a t w ay ,

.

Describe a curve by r a isi n g the h a n d a b o e the he a d foren ger open '

, ,

m ove t o righ t or left a ccordin g to d irection i n ten ded a n d h a n d th a t is

used 13 m ove to the left use right h a n d ; m ove to the ri g h t use left
,
.
, ,

h a nd ( O ma ha I ; Po nka I )
.
.
.

H a l t " ( T o i n q uire d isposi tion ) .

R a ise th e ri gh t h a nd with the p al m in front an d gr adu a lly pu sh i t

forw ard a nd b a c k se ver al t im es ; if they a r e n o t hosti le it will a t once
be obeyed ( T h e Pr a i ri e T r a vele r by R a ndolp h B M a rcy p 2 1 4 , N e w
.
,
.
,
.

Yor k ,

there " H e i s co m in g to yo u
S ta n d .

Ri gh t h a nd exten ded , at , edge wise , m oved do w n w a rd sever a l t im es .

( O m a ha I ) .

goin g tow a rd y o u
H e is .

H old the open righ t h a n d p a l m to the left w ith the tip s o f the n gers , ,

tow a rd the per son sign aled t o ; thrust the h a n d forw a rd i n either an
up w a rd o r dow n w ard curve ( O ma h a I Pon ka I ) . .

down a t where you are ( sh e d h u b is p z h a m g a )

Li e - - -
.

E xten d the ri ght ar m i n the d irecti o n of the person si gn al ed t o h a v in g ,

the p al m down ; m ove do wn w a rd by degrees to a bou t the k nee s .

O m a ha I Po n ka I ) .

Pe a ce F r i e n d sh i p
; .

H old u p p a l m o f h a n d O bserved a s m a de by a n I ndi a n of the K an

sa s tribe i n 1 833 ( I n di a n S ke tch es, by John T Irvi n g , v ol ii , p 2 53 ,
'

. . . .
.

Ph il a delphi a ,

E lev a te
the outstretched h a nds w ide open a n d ngers p arted a bo v e
an d o n either side o f the he a d a t a r m s len gth O bserved by D r W

. .

J H offm a n as ma de in N orthern A rizon a i n 1 87 1 by the M oj a ve a n d

.
,

S eviches N o a r m s correspondin
.
g wi th
h a n d s u p of ro a d a gen ts
-
.

The ri gh t h a n d held aloft e m pty ,

.
(M y L if e on the Pl ai ns by G en er al
,

G A C uster , p 238, N e w Yor k ,

. . .

41
 32 2

Q u e st i o n ( I do n ot k n o w you Wh o are y o u i )
. .
'

A fter h a ltin g a p a rty co m in g : Righ t h a n d r aised p a l m i n front an d ,

slowl y m oved t o the ri ght an d left [ A n swered by trib a l si g n ] ( M arcy s .

P r a i r i e T r a veler , lo c . ci t ,
.

i n qui re if co m in g p a rty is pe aceful

To .

R aise both h an ds , gr asped in the m a n ner of sh ak i ng h ands , or by lo ok

in g the t wo f o r e n g e r s r m ly w hile the h a nds are held up If friendly .

they w il l respon d with the s a m e si gn al ( M a rcy s Pr air ie T r aveler loc .

,
.

ci t ,
.

W hen ce co m e y o u ?
Fi rst th e si g n for Yo u then th e h an d extended Open a n d dr a wn to .

the bre ast a n d l a stly the si g n for B r i n g i n g ( Dm zhar )

, .
-
-

Sub ln i ssi o n .

The U n i ted S t a tes ste a m er S ar a n ac i n 1 87 4 crui sin g in A l a s k a w a ters , ,

dropped an chor in J uly , 1 87 4 , in Freshw a ter H arbor, b a c k o f S it k a i n ,

l a titude 59 O n o r t h A n ar m ed p a rty l a nded at a T lin k i t vill a ge de

. .

se r t e d by al l the in h a bit a nts except o n e o l d m an a nd two w o m en the ,

l a tter se a ted a t th e feet of the for m er The m an w as i n gre a t fe ar , .

turn ed h is b ack a n d h el d up hi s h a n ds as a sign of u tter helplessness .

( E xtr a ct fro m n otes k i ndly furnished by L ieuten a nt C om m a nder W m -

Ba inbrid ge H o , U S N w h o wa s senior aid t o Re a r A d m ir al Pen nock ,

'

-
. . .
,

on the cruise m en tioned ) .

S ur r e n d e r .

The p a l m o f the h an d i s held tow ard the person [ t o wh om the surren

der i s m a de ] ( L o ng ) .

S I GN AL S I N WH I CH O BJ E C T S ARE USE D I N CON

N E C T I O N WI T H PE R SO N AL AC T I O N .

B lso note s on C heyenn e an d A r ap aho

d i sc o v e r e d
'

u alo . See a

si gn s .

W hen the Pon h a s or O m a h a s discover buffalo th e watcher st an d s

erect on the hill , w ith his fa ce tow ard the c a m p , hold in g h is bl an k et
with an end in e ach h and h is a r m s bein g stretched o u t ( ri gh t a nd left )
,

o n a line w ith shoulders ( O m a h a I Po nka I ) . .

C o m e "T o b e c ko n t o a p e r so n .

H old the lower edge of the robe o r bl an k et , then w a ve it i n to the

o ut

legs . This is m a de w hen there i s a desire to a void gener al observ a tion .

( M a tth ew s ) .
 323

C o m e b a ck "
Ga ther or gr a sp the left side o f th e u n button ed co a t ( or bl a n k et ) w ith
the righ t h an d a n d eit h er sta n d in g or sittin g i n p o si tio n so th at th e
, ,

si gn a l c an be seen , w a ve i t to the left a nd right as ofte n a s m ay b e

necess a ry for t h e sig n to be recog nized W h en m a de sta n din g the per .

so n should n o t m o ve his body ( Da ko ta I ) . .

D a n g e r S e e a lso n otes o n C h eyen ne a n d A r ap a ho sign als

. .

H orse m a n a t a dist a n ce g allopin g p a ssi n g a n d rep assin g an d cross

, , ,

i n g e ach othere nemy co mes B u t for n otice of herd of b u tf a l o they .

g allop b a c k and forw a rd a bre a s t do n ot cross e a ch other ( V ie ws of

,

L o u isi a n a by H M Br a c k e n ridge p 2 5 0, Pi ttsburgh

, . .
,
.
.

Ridin g r a pidly round i n a c ir cl e Dan ger "Ge t together as q uic k ly .

as possi b le ( Th e P lai ns of th e Gr ea t West, by Rich a rd Irvin g

.

Dodge lieuten a n t colonel U ni ted S ta tes A r m y p 3 6 8 N e w Yor k

,
-

,
.
, ,

1 87 7 )

D i sc o v e r y o f e n e m i e s, o r o f o th er gam
t h a n b u ff a l o
e .

lso n otes on C hey en ne a n d

See a A r a p a ho S i gn a ls .

W hen ene m i es a r e discovered or other g a m e th a n b u tf a l o the sen ti , ,

n el w a ves his bl an k et over h is he a d u p an d do wn holdin g a n e nd in ,

e ach h a n d ( O ma ha 1 ; Po nka I )
. .

Dr i l l M il ita r y
, .

It is done by sign als devised a fter a syste m of the Indi a n s o w n i n

,

v e n t io n a n d co m m un ic a ted in v a rious w a ys
,
.

Won derful as the st a te m en t m ay a ppe ar the si gn a lin g o n a brigh t ,

d a y , w hen the su n is i n the proper direction i s done wit h a piece of ,

l ook in g gl as s held i n the hollo w of the h and The reection o f the sun s
-
.

r ay s throw n o n the r a n k s co m m un ic ates in so m e m ysterious w ay the

w ishes o f the chief O nce st a n d in g o n a little k n oll overlook in g th e
.
,

v alley o f the S ou th Pl a tte I w it n essed a l m ost a t m y feet a drill of ,

a bout o ne h un dred w a rriors by a S iou x chief who sa t o n his horse o n a ,

k n oll opposite m e a n d a bout two hundred y ards fr o m hi s co m m a n d in

,

the pl a in below Fo r m ore th an h alf a n hour he co m m a nded a drill

.
,

w h ich for v a riety a n d pro m ptness o f a ctio n coul d n ot be e q u a led by

a ny civilized c a v a lry o f t h e worl d A l l I could see iv a s a n occ a sion a l .

m o ve m ent of the r ight a r m H e hi m self a fter w a rds tol d m e th a t he.

used a loo k in g gl a ss ( Th e P l ai ns of the Gr ea t West & c by Rich a rd

-
.
, .
,

Irvin g Dodge lieuten a nt colonel U n i ted S ta tes A r m y , pp 3 07 , 308

,
-

. .

N e w Yor k ,

H a l t "S t a n d t h e r e "H e i s c o nn i n g t h a t w a y .

Gr a sp the e nd o f the bl a n k et or robe ; w a ve i t dow n w a rd sever a l

ti m es ( O m a ha I )
. .
 32 4

P e a ce , co u p l e d w i th i n vi ta ti o n .

otion of spre a din g a re a l or i m a gin ary robe or sk in on the groun d

M
N oticed by L ewis an d Cl a r k on th eir rst m eetin g w ith the S hoshon i in
( L e wis an d C la r k s T r a ve ls & c L ondon , 1 81 7 vol ii p

1 805 .
,
.
, , .
,
.

Q u e st i o n .

The ord in a ry m a nn er of o p enin g co m m un ic atio n wi th p arties k n ow n

o r supposed to be h ostile is to ride tow a rd the m i n zigz a g m a n n er or to
,

ri d e in a circle ( M y L if e o n the Plai ns & c by Ge n G A C uster , U

.
,
.
,
. . . .

S A p 58
. N e w Yor k ,
.
,
. .

This a uthor m en tion s ( p 2 02 ) a syste m atic m a nner o f w a vi n g a bl a n k et ,

.

by wh ich the so n of S a t an a th e K aio w a chief conveyed in fo rm a tion to

, ,

h im an d a si m i l a r per f or m a n ce by Yellow B e a r , a chi ef o f the A r a p a hos

,

(p . n either of wh ich h e expl a in s i n deta il .

S a f e ty . A l l q uie t . Se e n otes on Cheyen n e an d A r a p a ho si gn a ls .

S I GN A L S M ADE WH E N T HE PE RSO N O F TH E
S I GN AL I ST I S N O T V I S I BL E .

Those n oted con sist of Sln o ke, F i r e , or B u st sign a ls .

S MOKE SI G N AL S G ENE R ALL Y .

T h eir syste m s of telegr a ph s ar e very peculi ar , an d th ough they

m ight see m i m pr a c t ic able a t rst yet so thorou g hly ar e they understood ,

by the s a v a ges th a t i t is a v a iled of freque n tly to i m m en se a dv an t a ge .

The m ost re m ark a ble is by r a isin g s m o k es by w hich m an y i m porta n t ,

facts are co mm un ic ated to a con sidera ble d ist an ce a n d m ade i n te l l ig i

ble by the m a n n er size , n u m ber o r repetition o f the sm o k es w hich ar e
, , ,

co m m on ly r a ised by rin g spots of dry gr a ss W hen tr a velin g they .

,

w ill also pi le he a ps of stones upon m oun ds or con spicuous p oi n ts so ar ,

r a n ged as to be u nderstood by th eir p a ssi n g co m r a des ; an d so m eti m es

th ey se t u p the ble a ched b u al o he a ds w hich are everywhere sc a ttered
'

over those pl ai n s to i n d ic a te t h e direction of their m a rch , an d m a n y

,

other fa cts which m ay be co m m unic ated by those si m ple si gn s ( O o m .

m er ce of t he Pr a ir i es by Josi a h Gregg vol ii p 2 86,

N e w Yor k ,
.
,
. .
,

The h i ghest elev a tion s of l a n d ar e selected a s sta tion s fro m wh ich

sign a ls wi th s m o k e are m ade These can be seen at a di st a nce of fro m .

twen ty to fty m iles By v a ry in g the n u m ber o f col u m ns o f s m o k e dif

.

f e r e n t m e a nin gs a r e con veyed The m ost si m ple as well a s the m ost.

v a ried m ode an d rese m blin g the telegr a phic alph abet , is arr a n ged by
,

b uildin g a s m all re whi ch i s n ot allowed to bl a ze th en by pl a cin g an

,

a r m f ul o f p a rti a lly green gr a ss o r weeds over the re a s if to s m other ,

it , a dense w hite s m o k e i s cre a ted , w hich ordi n arily will ascen d i n a co n

t in u o u s vertic a l colu m n for h un dreds o f feet H a vin g est a b l ished a cur .
.
ren t o f s m o k e the Indi a n si m ply t a kes h is bl a n k et an d by spre adin g it
,

over the s m al l pile of weed s or gra ss fro m w h ich the s m ok e ta k es its

source a nd properly con trollin g the e d ges a nd corners o f the bl a n k et
, ,

he con nes the s m o k e a n d i s i n thi s w ay a ble to ret a in it for sever a l

m o m ents By r a pidly displ a ci n g the bl a n k et , the oper a tor i s en a bled
.

t o c a use a den se volu m e o f s m o k e to rise the len gth o r shortn ess of ,

w h ich a s well a s the n u m ber an d frequency of the colu m n s he c a n reg

, ,

u l a t e perfectly si m ply by a proper use o f the bl a n k et

, ( O uster s L if e o n .

the Pl a i ns l oc ci t p
,
. .
, .

They g a thered a n a r m ful o f dried gr a ss a nd weeds which w ere pl aced ,

a n d c a rried upon t h e highest poin t of t h e pe ak where everythi n g bein g , ,

i n re a diness the m a tch w as a pplied close t o the groun d ; but the bl a ze w as

,

n o soon er w ell ligh ted a n d a bout to en velop the en tire a m oun t of gr a ss

collected th a n it w as s m othered wi th the unl igh ted portion A slender .

colu m n of gr a y s m o k e t h e n beg a n to a scen d in a perpen dicul ar colu m n .

Thi s w as n ot enough a s i t m ight be t ak e n for the s m o k e risin g fro m a

,

si m ple c a m p r e The s m olderin g gr a ss w as then covered with a bl a n k et ,

-
.

the corners of wh ich were h eld so closely to the gro u n d as to a l m ost

co m pletely conn e a nd cu t o th e col u m n of s m o k e Wa i tin g a few m o
"
.

m en ts u n ti l the s m o k e w as begin n in g to esc a pe fro m bene a th the bl a n k et

, ,

w a s suddenly throw n a side whe n a be a utiful b a lloon sh a ped colu mn

,
-

pu ff ed u pw a rd li k e the whi te cloud o f s m ok e wh ich a ttend s th e disch arge

of a e l d piece A g ai n c a stin g the bl a n k et o n the pile of gr a ss th e
-

.
,

colu m n w a s i nterrupted as before a nd a g a in i n d ue ti m e rele a sed so th a t, ,

a succession o f el on g a ted egg sh a ped p u s Of s m o k e k ept a scendin g

'

tow ard th e sk y i n the m ost regul ar m a n ner Thi s be a d li k e colu m n of .

-

s m o k e con siderin g the hei ght fro m w hich i t beg a n to a scen d , w a s visi
,

ble fro m poi nts on the level pl a in fty m iles di sta n t ( 1 b p . .

,
.

S M O KE SIG N A L S O F T HE A PA C H E S .

The fol lowin g i nfor m a tion w as obta i ned b y Dr W J H O F F M A N , . .

fro m th e A p ache chiefs n a m ed on p age 1 5 u nder the title o f T I N N E AN , ,

Ap a ch e I
The m a teri als used in m ak in g s m o k e o f su fcien t den sity an d color
c on sist o f pin e or ced a r b oughs le a ves an d gr a ss w hich can ne arly , ,

a lw ay s be Obt ai ned in the region s occupie d by t h e A p a ches of N orthern

N e w M exico These Indi a n s st a te th at they e m ploy bu t three k i nd s of

.

sign als e a ch of w hich con sists o f co l u m n s o f s m o k e n u m berin g fro m o ne

'

, ,

to three or m ore .

Alar m .

This si gn a l is m a de by c a usin g three or m ore col u m n s of s m ok e to

a scen d ,
a n d si gnies d a n ger or the a ppro a ch o f an ene m y an d a lso ,

re q u ires the con cen tra tion o f those who see the m T h ese sign als a r e .

co m m i m icat e d fro m one c am p to a n other , a n d the m ost dista n t b a n ds

ar e gui ded by their loc a tion The gre a t e r the h a ste des ired the gre ate r
.
-
 32 6

the n u m ber o f col u m ns of s m o k e These are oft en so h a stily m ade th a t .

they m ay rese m ble pu ff s of s m ok e a n d a re c a used by throw in g he a p s ,

o f gr a ss a n d le a ves u pon th e e m bers a g a i n an d a g a in .

A t te n ti o n .

This sign a l i s genera lly m a de by prod ucin g on e con tinuous col u m n ,

a n d sig nifi es a t t en tio n for sever a l p u r poses viz w he n a b a n d h a d beco m e , ,

tired of one loc a lity or the gr a ss m ay h a ve bee n con su m ed by the ponies ,

,

o r so m e other c a use n ecessi t a tin g re m ov al

; o r should a n en e m y be
reported w h ich would require further w a tchin g before a decisi on as to
,

future a ction w oul d be m ade the int e n tion o r k nowledge of anythin g ,

u n u su al would be co m m u nic a ted to nei gh borin g b an ds by c a usi n g o n e

colu m n of s m ok e to a scend .

E s t a b l i sh m en t o Q uie t ; S a f e t y
f a ca m p ; .

W hen a re m ov al o i c a m p h a s been m a de a fter the si gn a l f o r A tt e n

'

t i o n h a s been gi ven a n d the p a rty h a ve sel e cted a pl a ce where they

,

p ropose to re ma i n u ntil th e re m ay be a necessit y o r desire for their r e '

m ov a l t wo col u m n s o f s m o k e a r e m ade to i nfor m their friends th a t

.
,

they propose t o re m ai n a t th a t pl a ce Two col u m n s ar e a lso m ade a t .

other ti m es d urin g a lon g con ti n ued residence to infor m the n eighbor

'

in g b a nd s tha t a c a m p still exists a nd th a t al l i s fa vor a ble a nd q uiet , .

F O R E IG N S MO KE S IG N AL S .

The followin g ex a m ples of s m ok e si gn a ls in foreig n l an d s ar e a dded for

co m p a rison .

M i ss H a i gh spe ak in g of th e Gua nch es of t h e C a n a ry Isl a nd s a t the

,

ti m e of the S p a n ish con quest s ay s : W h en an en e m y a ppro ached , ,

they al a r m ed the coun try by r ai sin g a th ic k s m o k e o r by whistlin g ,

wh ich w a s repe a ted fro m one to a n other Th is l a tter m ethod i s stil l in .

use a m on g the peo pl e o f T e n e r ifl e a nd m ay be he ard a t an a l m ost l n

credible dist a n ce ( T r a ns E t h S o c L o nd v ii 1 86 9 se e se r pp 1 09
. . . . .
, ,
. .
,
.
,

The n a tives h a ve a n e a sy m eth od o f telegr aph in g n ew s to their dis
t a n t friends W hen S ir Tho m a s M i tchell wa s tr a veli n g throu gh E astern
.

A ustr ali a he oft en sa w col u m n s o f s m o k e a scendin g throu gh the trees

i n the forest s a n d h e soon le a rned th a t the n a tives used the sm Ok e o f
,

res for the purpose o f m ak in g k n own his m ove m en ts to their frien ds

.
.

N e a r M oun t Fr a zer he observed a den se colu m n o f s m o k e a n d sub se ,

q uen tly ot h er sm o k es a rose extendin g in a telegr a phic line f a r to the

,

south a lon g the b a se of the m ou nt ain s a n d thu s co m m uni c a tin g to the

, ,

n a tives w ho m ight be upon hi s route ho m e w a rd the tidin gs o f h is

return .

W hen Sir Tho m as re a ched Portl a nd Bay he n oticed th a t when a wh a l e
a ppe a red in the b ay the n a ti ves were a ccu sto m ed to sen d u p a col u m n
 32 7

of s m o k e thus gi vin g ti m ely i n ti m ation to al l the wh a lers If th e w h a l e

, .

should be pursued by o n e bo a t s cre w only it m igh t be t ak en ; but i f

,

pursued by sever al i t would prob a bly be r un a shore an d beco m e food

,

f o r the bl a c k s ( E a ste r n A ust r a l ia , by M aj T L M itchell , F G S ,

.

. . . . . .

v ol ii , p
. .

J a rd ine w ri tin g of th e n atives of C ape Yor k s ays th a t a co m m u n ica

, ,

tion between the i sl a n ders an d the n a ti ves of the m a in l a nd i s frequen t ;

an d the r a pid m a n n er i n w hich n e ws is c a rried fro m tribe to tribe to

gre a t dist a nces i s a stoni shin g I w asi n for m e d of the a ppro a ch o f H e r

,
.

M aj esty s S te a m er S al a m an der o n her l a st visit two d ays before her

, ,

a rriv a l h ere In telli gence is con veyed by m e a n s of res m a de to throw

.

u p s m o k e in di ff erent for m s a n d by m essen gers w h o perfor m l o n g a n d ,

r apid j ourneys (" uoted by S my th l oc ci t v ol 1 , p 1 53 , fro m O ver

.
,
. . . .
,

la nd E xp ed i tio n p
.
,
.

M essen gers in p a rt s Of A ustr a li a appe a r to h a ve used th is m ode o f

al l -

si gn a lin g I n Victori a when tr a veli n g thr o ugh the forests they were
.
, ,

a ccusto m ed to r a ise s m o k e by llin g the hollo w Of a tree w ith green

bough s a n d settin g re t o the tr un k a t its b a se ; an d in thi s w ay a s they ,

a lw a y s selected a n elev a ted position f o r the re when they could their ,

m ove m en ts were m a de k n ow n .

When en g aged in h un tin g when tr a ve lin g o n secret expedi tion s , ,

w hen a ppro a chin g a n enc am p m en t , w he n thre a te n ed with d a n ger or ,

w hen foes m en a ced their friends the n a ti ves m a de sign als by rai sin g a ,

s m o k e a n d thei r res were lighted i n such a w ay a s to give forth

,

si gn als th a t would be u n derstood by people of their own tribe an d by

friendly tribes They exh ibited gre a t a bili ty i n m a n a gin g th eir syste m
.

of telegr aphy ; a n d i n for m er ti m es i t w as n ot seldo m used to the inj ury

o f the w hite settlers , wh o a t rst h a d n o i de a th a t the thi n col u m n of

s m ok e risin g throu gh the fol i a ge of the a dj a cen t b u sh a n d perh a p s ,

r aised by so m e feeble o l d wo m an w a s a n i nti m a tion to the w arriors t o ,

a d v a n ce an d a tt a c k the E urope a n s ( Th e A bo r ig i nes of V i ctor ia , vol . .

i , by R B rough S m yth F L S F G S A ssoc In st C E , etc pp

.
,
. . .
, . . .
,
. . . . .
,
.

F IR E A R R O VV S .

Tr a velers o n the pr a irie h a ve Often seen the In di a ns thr owin g up
sign a l lights a t n i gh t a nd h a ve w on dered how i t w as don e ,
.
i

They t ak e off th e he a d of the a rro w a nd dip the sh aft i n gunpowder ,

m ixed wi th gl ue The gunpo wder a dheres to the wood a n d
.
it
,

co a ts it three o r four in ches fro m it s en d to the depth Of on e f our th of

a n in ch C hewed b ar k m ixed w ith dry gunpowder is then fa sten ed to
.

the stic k an d the a rrow is re a dy for use W hen it i s to be red a

,
.
,

w arrior pl a ces it on h is bowstrin g and dr a ws h is b o w re ady to let i t

y ; the poin t of the arrow i s then lowered a n other w arrior lights the ,

dry b ark an d it i s shot hi gh in the air W hen i t h as gone up a l it t l e

,
'

dist an ce it b ursts out into a am e , an d burn s brigh tly until it falls to

,
 32 8

the ground V a rious m e a n i n gs ar e a tta ched to t hese r e a rro w si gn a ls

.
-

Thus on e a rro w m e a n t a m on g the S a n tees T h e ene m y ar e a bout

, , ,

t wo arrows fro m the s a m e poi n t Da n ger ; three Gre a t d an ger ; ,

,

m an y They ar e to o s tro n g or we a r e fallin g b a ck ; t wo arrows sen t

,

,

u p a t the s a m e m o m e n t , We will a tt a c k ; three , S oon ; four , N o w ;

if shot di a gon a lly In th a t direction These si g n a ls ar e con st a ntly

,

.

ch a n ged a n d a re a l w ays a greed upon when the p arty goes o ut or before

,

it sep ar a tes The Indi an s sen d their sign a ls very in telligently an d

.
,

seldo m m a k e m istak es in t elegr a ph in g e a ch other by these silen t m onitors .

The a m oun t o f i nfor m a tion they ca n co m m unic a te by res a nd burn in g

a rrow s i s perfectly won derful E very w ar p a rty c a rries wi t h i t b un dles
.

o f si gn al arrows ( Be l den Th e Wh i te C hi ef ; o r T we lve Y

. e ar s a m o ng th e
,

Wi l d I ndia ns of the Pla ins pp 1 06 1 07 Cin cin n a ti an d N e w Yor k ,

,
.
, .

W i th rega rd to the above it is possible th a t wh ite i n uence h as been

,

felt in the m ode of sign a lin g a s well a s in the use of g unp owder b u t ,

i t w ould be in terestin g to le a rn i f a ny l ud ian s a dopted a si m il ar exped i

.

en t before gunpo wder w a s k n o w n to the m .

D U ST S I G N A L S .

W hen an y g am e o r an ene m y i s di scovered an d should th e senti nel ,

be wi thout a bl a n k et he th rows a h an dful o f du st up i nto t h e air When

.
,

t h e B rul es a tt ac k ed the Bou k a s in 1 87 2 they stood o n th e blu ff an d , ,

thr ew up d ust ( O m a ha I ; Pon ka I )

. .

T h ere a ppe a rs t o be a m ong the B ush m en a custo m of thro w in g up

s an d or e arth in to the a ir w hen a t a dist a nce fro m ho m e a n d in need of
h elp of some k in d fro m th ose w h o were there ( M iss L C L loyd , M S . . . .

L e t ter , d a ted July 1 0, 1 880, fro m C h a rlton H ouse , M owbr ay n e a r C a pe ,

To wn , A fric a ) .

NO T E S ON C H EYENNE A N D A R A PA H O SIG N AL S .

The followin g i nfor m a tion w a s obt a ined fro m WA U ( B o btai l ) M O -

,

H I N U K M A H A I T ( B ig H o r se ) , C heyen n es an d 0 C H O H I S A ( The M a r e
- - - -

,
- - -

better k n o wn as L i ttle a n d N A U A T S H ( L ef t H an d ) , A r a p a hos

,
-

chiefs an d m e m bers of a del eg a ti on w h o v isi ted Washi ngton D in ,

.

S e pte m ber 1 880 in the in terest of their tribes loc a ted in In di a n Territory :
, ,

A p a rty of I nd i a n s goin g o n the w ar p a th le a ve c a m p , a n n ouncin g -

their proj ect to the re m a i n in g i n di vidu a ls a nd infor m i n g nei ghborin g

f ri en ds by sen din g ru n n ers A p a rty is only syste m a tica lly org a ni zed
.

w hen sever al d ays a w a y fro m their h ea d qu a rters un less circu m sta n ces ,

should req uir e i m m edi a te a ction The pipe be a rers ar e a ppoin ted w ho .
-

precede the p a rty while o n the m arch c arryi n g the pipes , an d n o one is ,

a llowed to cross a he a d of these i n di vidu a ls or to j oi n the p a rty by ridi n g ,

up b e fore the he a d of the colu m n , as it w ould end a nger the success of

the expedi tion A l l ne w a rriv a ls fa ll i n fro m either side or the re ar
. .

U p on co m in g i n sight of a n y ele v a tions o f l a n d l i k ely to a ff or d a good

V iew of the surroun di n g coun try the p a rty co m e to a h alt an d secrete
 32 9

the m selv es as m u ch as possible The scouts w h o h a ve alre a dy been

.
,

selected adv ance j ust before d aybre a k to w ithin a m oder a te dist a nce o f
,

the elev a tion to a scert ai n if an y of the ene m y h a ve preceded the m This .

i s only discovered by c arefully w atchin g the su m m it to see if an y obj ects

a r e in m otion ; if not t h e i g h t Of birds i s o b served a nd if an y s h ould
, ,

al ight upon the hill o r bu tte i t would i nd ic a te the a bsen ce o f a nythin g

th a t m ight ordi n aril y sc a re the m a w a y S hould a l a rge bird , a s a r a ven

.
,

crow , o r e a gle y tow a rd the hill t o p a nd m ak e a sudden swerve to

,
-

either side a n d dis appe ar , it would in dic a te the presen ce of so m ethin g

su f cien t to require further ex am in ation W hen it i s le arned th a t there
.

is re a son t o suspect a n ene m y , the scout w ho h as all the ti m e been

,

closely w atched by the p arty i n the re a r, m ak es a si gn a l for the m to lie

st ill sign ifyin g Da n g e r o r C a u t i o n
,
It i s m a de by gr a sping the
.

bl an k et w ith th e right h a nd an d w a vin g it e a rth w ard fro m a positi on

i n fron t o f an d as high a s the shoul der This is n e a rly the s a m e as we
u se the h a n d f o r a si m il a r p urpose i n b a ttle or hu ntin g to di rect lie

quiet I

S hould the hill , how ev er be cle a r of a n y one the In d i a n wi ll a scend

,

slowly an d un der cover as m uch as possible an d g ai n a V iew of the

, ,

cou n try If there i s n o on e to be seen the bl a n k et is gr asped an d w a ved

.
,

hori zon t a lly fro m righ t t o left a n d b a ck a gain repe a tedly showing a ,

cl e a r surfa ce If the en e m y is discovered the sco ut will gi ve the

.
,

A l a r n l by ru n n in g down the hi l l upon a side visible to t h e w atchers ,

in a zi gz a g m a nner w hich co m m u nic a tes the sta te o f aff airs .

S hould a n y expediti on o r a dv a nce be a tte m pted a t night the s a m e ,

si gn als as ar e m ade w ith the bl a n k et a re m a de wi t h a re b r an d , w hich

is con structed of a bun ch o f gra ss tied to a sh ort pole .

W hen a w ar p a rty enc a m p for a n igh t o r a d ay or m ore a piece of

wood is stuck in to the ground , poin tin g i n the direction pursued wit h ,

a n u m ber of cu ts , n otche s, o r m a r k s correspon din g to the n u m ber Of

d ays wh ich the p arty spen t after le a vin g the l a st c a m p un til le a vin g the
presen t c a m p ser vin g to sho w to the recruits to the m ain p arty the
, ,

course t o be followed , an d the distance .

A h un tin g p a rty t ak e the s am e prec a ution s in a d v a ncin g as a w ar

p arty , so as n o t to be surprised by an ene m y If a sco u t a scen ds a .

pro m inen t elev a tion an d di scovers n o ga m e the bl a n k et is gr a sped a n d

,

w a ved horizon t ally fro m si de to side at the heigh t of the shoulders o r

he ad ; a n d if g a m e is discovered the Ind i a n ri des b a c k an d forth ( fr o m
left to right ) a short dist an ce so th a t the dist an t Observers can v iew the
m a n euver . If a l arge herd of b uif al o is fou nd the exten t tr aveled over
,

in goi n g to and fro i ncre a se s i n proportion to th e size Of the h erd A .

q ui c k er g a i t is tr a veled whe n the herd is very l a rge o r h a ste on the p art

o f the h u nter s is desired .

It i s st ated th a t t hese In di a n s a lso use m irror s to si gn al fro m one

elev ation t o a n other but the syste m could n ot be le arned a s they say
, ,

they h a v e no lon ger u se for i t h a vin g ce a sed w arfare

,

42

O
 SM I THSO M I AN

I NST I TUTI O N

AM ERI C AN

E THNOL O G Y

R
0 NO . I
O
C

I
B

WASHI NGT O N